WO2019035459A1 - Information distribution method, information distribution server device, terminal device, and computer program - Google Patents

Information distribution method, information distribution server device, terminal device, and computer program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019035459A1
WO2019035459A1 PCT/JP2018/030313 JP2018030313W WO2019035459A1 WO 2019035459 A1 WO2019035459 A1 WO 2019035459A1 JP 2018030313 W JP2018030313 W JP 2018030313W WO 2019035459 A1 WO2019035459 A1 WO 2019035459A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
user
currency
unit
value
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/030313
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
和豊 渡邊
Original Assignee
株式会社Maxele
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/JP2017/029397 external-priority patent/WO2019035183A1/en
Priority claimed from PCT/JP2017/029396 external-priority patent/WO2019035182A1/en
Application filed by 株式会社Maxele filed Critical 株式会社Maxele
Priority to JP2018544276A priority Critical patent/JPWO2019035459A1/en
Publication of WO2019035459A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019035459A1/en
Priority to JP2019527933A priority patent/JP6608566B1/en
Priority to PCT/JP2019/019007 priority patent/WO2019142948A2/en
Priority to JP2019158684A priority patent/JP6608560B1/en
Priority to JP2019185263A priority patent/JP6651245B1/en
Priority to JP2020006686A priority patent/JP2020126627A/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q30/00Commerce
    • G06Q30/02Marketing; Price estimation or determination; Fundraising
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q30/00Commerce
    • G06Q30/06Buying, selling or leasing transactions
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q50/00Information and communication technology [ICT] specially adapted for implementation of business processes of specific business sectors, e.g. utilities or tourism
    • G06Q50/10Services

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an information distribution method, an information distribution server device, a terminal device, and a computer program.
  • SNS Social Networking Service
  • advertising costs of advertising displayed and output together with the content are returned to the content provider according to the quantity such as the number of browsing times of the content to promote content transmission.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 one user having a service account of an information providing site sends out a content introducing a product or service as an effort to promote the use of the information providing site, and the other user via the content
  • an affiliate service in which, when there is a browsing or transaction of an electronic commerce site that handles the goods or services from the above, an affiliate service is provided that returns a part of the same to one user.
  • point services are ultimately point reductions to encourage use of the associated e-commerce site.
  • points are premised on exchange for goods or services whose value is specified in legal currency. Therefore, in such a point service, the use of the e-commerce site is only promoted after the launch of the content of the introduction of the product or service by the SNS.
  • the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and provides an information distribution method, an information distribution server device, a terminal device, and a computer program for realizing an information exchange market that produces value based on evaluation of transmitted content.
  • the purpose is
  • An information distribution method is an information distribution method including a plurality of terminal devices and a server device that can communicate via a communication network, and distributing information among the devices, the server device including the plurality of terminals
  • An evaluation value is calculated based on the usefulness of the content transmitted via one of the devices, and the user identification information of each of the plurality of terminal devices is exchanged based on the calculated evaluation value.
  • the quantity of value exchange medium is determined, and the value exchange medium according to the determined quantity is issued in association with the user identification information of the one terminal device.
  • the information distribution method issues, to the first user, a value exchange medium of an amount according to an evaluation on the content transmitted by the first user via the communication network, and the value issued to the first user From among the value exchange media transferred to the second user, part or all of the exchange medium is transferred to the second user, and upon transmission of the advantageous information of the second user via the communication network, Disappear the value of the value exchange medium in an amount corresponding to the transmission of the advantageous information, store the issue of the value exchange medium to the first user, and store transaction information including transfer and extinction of the issued value exchange medium Have the computer execute the process.
  • the information distribution server device of the present disclosure is a server device that communicates with a plurality of terminal devices via a communication network, and the usefulness of the content transmitted via the first terminal device of the plurality of terminal devices. And a determination unit for determining the quantity of value exchange media to be exchanged among the user identification information of the plurality of terminal devices based on the calculated evaluation value, and And an issuing unit that issues a value exchange medium according to a quantity in association with user identification information of the first terminal device.
  • a terminal device of the present disclosure is a terminal device that communicates with an information distribution server device via a communication network, and includes a transmitting unit that transmits one or more contents in association with user identification information; and the user identification information
  • a receiver for receiving, from the information distribution server apparatus, information indicating the quantity of value exchange media issued by the information distribution server apparatus based on the evaluation value based on the usefulness of the one or more contents transmitted in association with
  • a display unit for displaying the quantity of value exchange media associated with the user identification information.
  • the computer program of the present disclosure calculates an evaluation value based on the usefulness of content transmitted via a first terminal device among a plurality of terminal devices that are communicably connected by the communication unit to a computer including a communication unit. And determining the quantity of value exchange medium to be exchanged among the user identification information of each of the plurality of terminal devices on the basis of the calculated evaluation value, and the value exchange medium corresponding to the quantity thus determined is used as the first value exchange medium. Execute processing to be issued in association with the user identification information of the terminal device.
  • the computer program of the present disclosure transmits one or more contents to a computer including a communication unit, a display unit, and a storage unit in association with the user identification information stored in the storage unit by the communication unit.
  • Information indicating the quantity of value exchange medium to be issued based on the evaluation value based on the usefulness of the one or more contents transmitted in association with the user identification information stored in the storage unit by the communication unit A process of displaying on the display unit the quantity of the value exchange medium received and associated with the user identification information stored in the storage unit is executed.
  • an information distribution method it is possible to provide an information distribution method, an information distribution server device, a terminal device, and a computer program for realizing an information exchange market that generates value based on the evaluation of transmitted content.
  • the user can efficiently obtain information useful to himself / herself in the information exchange market, and can also obtain appropriate revenue from the content transmitted by the user.
  • the revenue is also circulated, for example, for information dissemination and information acquisition within the information exchange market, and it becomes possible to activate the information exchange of the information exchange market and improve the market itself.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overview of an information distribution system 600.
  • the information distribution system 600 includes an information distribution server device 6 for realizing the information distribution system 600 and a plurality of terminal devices 7 used by the user.
  • the information distribution server device 6 provides a platform for an information exchange market that enables the transmission of content, exchanges the in-system currency L described later issued based on the transmitted content, and enables the use of the in-system currency L. Do.
  • the information distribution server device 6 is managed by a system administrator of the information exchange market.
  • the platform of the information exchange market is a web-based system, and access to the market from the terminal device 7 by the web browser is realized.
  • the use of the information exchange market by the terminal device 7 basically requires account registration.
  • Content transmitted in the information exchange market may be partially or entirely disclosed publicly so as to be viewable or viewable from an unspecified number of information terminal devices not having account registration.
  • the information exchange market may be based not only on the Web (WWW: World Wide Web) but also on a new communication protocol, or may be on a specific virtual space such as a metaverse.
  • the terminal device 7 is a computer device used by a user, and in one example, is a PC (Personal Computer).
  • the terminal device 7 may be a smartphone, a mobile phone, or a tablet terminal device in another example.
  • the terminal device 7 can execute an application program including at least a web browser, and may be any computer device as long as the device includes a display unit, an operation unit, and a communication unit. In this sense, for example, the terminal device 7 may be a television receiver, a car navigation system, a stationary game machine, a robot or the like.
  • the terminal device 7 causes a general-purpose computer to function as a terminal in the information distribution system 600 by executing a specific application program 7P (see FIG. 3).
  • the terminal device 7 can also function as a terminal in the information distribution system 600 by logging in from the service login screen provided by the information distribution server device 6 using a general-purpose web browser program as well as the specific application program 7P.
  • the user of the terminal device 7 has, for example, at least one of accounts classified into three types of "Associates”, “Operator”, and "Individual”. Depending on the division of account, different services can be received in the information exchange market.
  • the user A in FIG. 1 has an account in the “Associates” category.
  • User A who has an "Associates” account has the right to transmit paid or free content to the information exchange market.
  • the paid content is content that can be acquired by the user classified as “business operator” or “individual” by paying the value (in-system currency L).
  • free content is content that all users can obtain without paying any compensation. For example, free content distributes content such as articles to the public, provides value to other users (transfers the value), and receives an evaluation from other users, and the system currency L is Sent by user A who has an "Associates" account for the purpose of acquisition.
  • the free content is transmitted by the user A who has an "Associates” account for the purpose of improving the purchase desire for paid content and increasing the number of purchase applicants.
  • the "Associates” account is an account given when a user having an "Operator” or “Individual” account applies to a system administrator or the like and is licensed by the system administrator or the like. That is, a user having an "Associates” account has at least a "Business operator” or “Individual” account, and the acquired in-system currency L is an account of his / her "Business operator” or “Personal” as described later. It is possible to consume the in-system currency L by its own activity by transferring it to an account of “business operator” or “individual” and performing the first consumption activity and the second consumption activity described later.
  • the user B in FIG. 1 has an “operator” account, and the terminal device 7 can use the paid or free content transmitted by the user A.
  • the usage here can be various modes such as browsing of content, viewing, and downloading to the terminal device 7.
  • the user B who has the account of the “business operator” may be given not only the right to use free content but also the right to use paid content using the system currency L.
  • the "consumer" account may be authorized to use the information exchange market more advantageously than other users by the first consumption activity described later.
  • User B, who has an “Operator” account has the right to transmit (system use behavior) for information not regarded as content in the information exchange market (information to be treated as described below) or the system currency L May be provided for a fee (first consumption activity described later).
  • the user C in FIG. 1 has an “individual” account, and the terminal device 7 can use the paid or free contents transmitted by the user A.
  • the user C who has the “individual” account may be given not only the right to use free content but also the right to use paid content using the system currency L.
  • the "individual” account may be authorized to use the information exchange market more advantageously than other users by the first consumption activity described later.
  • User C who has an “individual” account like user B, has the right to transmit information not considered content in the information exchange market either free of charge or paid using system currency L (the first consumption described later Activities) may be given.
  • the "business" account and the "individual” account are only distinguished depending on whether the attribute registered when the account is issued is “business” or “individual”, and substantially the same. Usage rights may be given. On the other hand, depending on the type of the information exchange market, it may be preferable to clearly distinguish between the two, and different usage rights may be given between the "business" account and the "personal” account. For example, for a person who mainly conducts advertising (one of the first consumption activities described below, and sending out business-active information when the expression is changed), the "business" account is set and it is not considered as content You may give the right to send information and restrict the other usage rights.
  • an “individual” account is set, and the right to use paid content using the system currency L is given, and others You may restrict the use authority of.
  • all accounts may be authorized to purchase the system currency L by assets in a virtual society or real society other than the information exchange market.
  • users who only use free content sent from Associates do not necessarily need to acquire an "personal" account, and even if there are users who use free content without possessing an account. Good.
  • the information distribution server device 6 evaluates the basis of calculation of the evaluation value to the account of "Associates" described later. You may do it.
  • the user A can transmit contents to the information exchange market via the terminal device 7 by the platform provided by the information distribution server device 6.
  • the content transmitted by the user A is available from the terminal device 7 used by other users B and C in a virtual space where an information exchange market such as Web is formed.
  • the transmitted content is selectively included as a link for acquiring the content in a specific web site.
  • the website providing the content may be, for example, a portal site of the information exchange market, and an area such as an account page of the user of the caller provided in the website which is a virtual space in which this market is formed It may be the space of user A).
  • the information exchange market can also function as a content delivery system.
  • the information exchange market may also function as an SNS capable of comment registration for content, user evaluation (like / dislike) and the like using the terminal device 7 when the user has an account.
  • the contents transmitted from the user A having the “Associates” account are, for example, as follows, and are information mainly handled in the information exchange market. However, the present invention is not limited to the following four, and may be "all works that can be converted into data". It is not limited to this as long as the value is found from other users.
  • the content transmitted from "Associates” may be free of charge, partially paid, or all paid. The distinction between chargeable or free of content and the amount of charge for charge may be arbitrarily set by the user A who has an “Associates” account.
  • Video data etc. Works such as moving image data for an unspecified number or specific subject, such as news, documentary, drama, entertainment, or commentary. It also includes moving image data created by a general user distributed by a conventional content distribution system.
  • Work data etc Unspecified number or specific, including articles, novels, scripts, cartoons, movies, books, photographs, music, choreography, design drawings, software, computer programs, or their secondary works or edited works. Work data for the target. It also includes work data distributed by conventional content distribution companies.
  • “Beneficial information data, etc.” Useful information data sent by experts. Professional useful information data for an unspecified number or specific targets provided by specialists such as lawyers and other agents, career change agents such as career consultants, and consulting companies such as management consultants. It also includes useful information provided by a conventional expert question-and-answer system.
  • the information transmitted from the user B who has the account of "business company” or the user C who has the account of "individual” is, for example, the following, and information which is treated as subordinate in the information exchange market It is.
  • the information is not limited to the following three, and may be added as appropriate, as long as it is “information that can be converted into data”.
  • Profile Information corresponds to "business information” corresponding to the "personal” account. It includes personal profile information transmitted by the individual, such as activity zone information, activity time information, ability information, aptitude information, or guidance information.
  • the profile information is not limited to personal information that can identify individuals, but includes information that appeals about work aimed at obtaining offers from businesses or individuals, social contribution activities (volunteer activities), hobbies and the like.
  • the target of the advertisement can be arbitrarily set by the sender, and includes, for example, information that leads to the caller's revenue.
  • information such as region (may be national), gender, generation, language used, occupation type, final education, and income level may be arbitrarily set as an attribute or as a premise.
  • information such as the time zone in which the terminal device 7 to which the appealing user logs in is communicating with the information distribution server device 6, the area, and the weather in that area may be acquired from the terminal device 7 and included in the setting information.
  • the authority may be set such that only the user B who has the “company” account can transmit the advertisement information.
  • the information distribution server device 6 issues the in-system currency L to the account of the user A who is the content sender based on the evaluation.
  • the in-system currency L is consumed by the action (first consumption action) in which the user A who has an account of "Associates" uses the information exchange market more advantageously than other users.
  • the first consumption activity is an act of transmitting advantageous information (information treated as a subordinate described above) in the interest of the user, an act of acquiring information desired in the interest of the user, an act of blocking unnecessary information.
  • Act of using desired content more advantageously.
  • the advantageous information includes advertising information, IR, company information and the like.
  • the act of using the desired content more advantageously includes, for example, an act of accessing the content prior to other users, an act of utilizing the content exclusively, and the like.
  • the first consumption activity is the act of conducting a questionnaire using the information exchange market, the open question to the user who has an "Associates" account, the expansion of the amount of information to be transmitted, the issuance of a press release by the business operator, etc. May be included.
  • the in-system currency L consumed by the first consumption activity disappears from the information exchange market.
  • the intrasystem currency L differs from the legal currency, virtual currency, cryptocurrency or electronic currency called cryptosystem asset in that it disappears from the information exchange market.
  • the in-system currency L also disappears according to an elapsed period after the user having each account acquires it.
  • the in-system currency L is consumed by the user B or C who has an account of "business person” or “individual", but the in-system currency L is a user A who has an "Associates” account. Is issued only against.
  • the user A can not consume unless the information exchange market is used on the side of his "business person” or "personal” account. If the user B and the user C do not obtain the system currency L from the user A, the above-mentioned usage act (first consumption activity) is not possible. Therefore, the intra-system currency L enables transfer from the user A having an "Associates" account to the user B having an "Operator” account or the user C having an "Individual" account.
  • the user B and the user C can consume the in-system currency L acquired from the user A, and can acquire the paid content transmitted from the user A, in addition to the above-described first consumption activity.
  • the act of the user consuming the system currency L to acquire paid content is referred to as a second consumption activity. Note that in the second consumption activity, the attribution of the system currency L is only transferred from the "business operator" or the "individual” to the "associates", and the system currency L does not disappear from the information exchange market.
  • the intra-system currency L has a quantity defined in a predetermined unit (for example, as US dollar “$” or Japanese yen “ ⁇ ”).
  • the predetermined unit of the system currency L is not designed to have a value directly based on the legal currency.
  • the predetermined unit is the setting information (price setting behavior) related to the first consumption activity of the information distribution server device 6 set by the system administrator or other means, and generation of the system currency L of the information distribution system 600 Adjusted by a control algorithm that controls issuance, distribution, and extinction.
  • In-system currency L accepts the transfer of ownership between accounts that use in-system assets such as in-system currency, but exchange in-system currency, and therefore, between the real and virtual society information exchange markets. It also has a function as a value exchange medium.
  • the in-system currency L does not have an excessive or insufficient distribution amount in the information exchange market, and the exchange balance between the in-system currency L and non-system assets is Unit value is adjusted while controlling the amount of new issue to be maintained properly.
  • the currency control unit 6C controls the currency L in the system so as to adjust the new supply balance of the currency L in the system reflecting the difference in the economic value of the free content by the purchasing power difference between the plurality of subject groups It may have a function to make corrections to
  • the currency in the information exchange market is the system currency L, which is issued and distributed independently by the information distribution server device 6, and the currency in the real market (real society) is uniquely issued by the central bank and distributed. This is a virtual currency distributed in legal currency or other means, and the control of the intra-system currency L including exchange of these currencies is realized by the processing of each functional unit of the information distribution server device 6.
  • the in-system currency L does not have the function of storing the value scientifically regarded as a currency function, and is different from the conventional legal currency or a currency such as a virtual currency.
  • the in-system currency L is used as a means of settlement for use of the information exchange market as an application, an exchange medium, and a means for sharing a measure of value among users.
  • the in-system currency L is not stored in order to disappear according to the elapsed time since each user has acquired it, and it is eventually stored in the information distribution system 600 while being circulated from time to time. It disappears by consumption activity of 1.
  • the in-system currency L is conventionally limited to a currency such as a legal currency or a virtual currency, and free exchange with other assets that are not in conventional points or electronic money is possible.
  • the range of circulation of the system currency L is limited to the information exchange market, it functions as a means of payment among users in the market, and also functions as a measure of value between users, and information exchange The use value in the market is guaranteed.
  • the in-system currency L functions as a unique value exchange medium in the user's information exchange market.
  • the intrinsic value of the intra-system currency L is derived from the value of free content provided and acquired from other users of users participating in the information exchange market, and is quantified by the evaluation algorithm (valuation algorithm). Based on the amount of value transferred.
  • the system internal currency L can also be expressed as "information value-oriented money” or “evaluation-oriented money” as money based on the value of information transferred between users in the information exchange market. In that sense, it can be said that the system currency L is a currency.
  • the quantity of the system currency L issued to the user A is not determined based only on the unambiguous calculation formula such as the number of times of use of the free content or a predetermined ratio with respect to the use time.
  • the user B or user C to use is not determined by the subjectivity of the user each time it is used, but is determined by continuous processing of a plurality of functional units of the information distribution server device 6. In this respect, it is further different from the conventional point system and the compensation system in the content delivery system.
  • the in-system currency L is created in the information exchange market by a series of processes of each functional unit starting from the free content distribution of the user A having an "Associates" account.
  • the in-system currency L created in the information exchange market starts distribution in the information exchange market by transfer from the user A to the user B having the "business operator" account or the user C having the "individual” account.
  • assets outside the system can be targeted for exchange, and a system in which the user A who sends more useful free content can earn a profit is achieved, such as the users B and C
  • the number of users also increases and the size of the information exchange market continues to expand.
  • the information exchange market grows in the following manner.
  • a user with an "Associates” account sends out paid or free content.
  • B The number of users with "business” or “individual” accounts increases for content.
  • C Users of "business operators” who want to transmit information such as advertisements to the increased users appear. When value is found in the content transmitted from "Associates”, even if the content transmitted from "Associates” is paid, users of "Individuals” who wish to acquire the content appear. Thus, the first and second consumption activities increase.
  • D Due to the increase in the demand for the in-system currency L, the quantity for which the in-system currency L is issued to the user of "Associates” increases.
  • the amount of new issuance of the system currency L is adjusted by the processing of the functional unit of the information distribution server 6 based on the demand of the system currency L.
  • the users of the "business operator” and the “individual” pay the compensation to the user of "associates” and receive the transfer of the system currency L.
  • the user of "Associates” acquires the non-system asset by paying the compensation from the "business person” and the "individual” user.
  • the user of the “business operator” consumes the transferred system currency L to transmit information (first consumption activity), whereby the system currency L disappears.
  • the "individual” user consumes the transferred system currency L to acquire paid content of "associates” (second consumption activity), whereby the attribution of the system currency L is from “individual” to "Associates” Transfer to (G)
  • the user of "Associates” who has acquired the off-system asset further transmits valuable content.
  • H As the number of users increases and consumption increases, the supply amount of the system currency L to the information exchange market rises.
  • I A newly issued (supplied) in-system currency L is given to the user of "Associates”.
  • the information exchange market may include a plurality of information exchange markets sorted according to the type of content to be transmitted and the business condition of the Associates.
  • the information distribution server device 6 may operate by separating functions for different information exchange markets, or may have a function of mediating exchanges between different information exchange markets so that one account can operate in different information exchange markets. It may be possible to perform activities. Multiple markets may overlap with each other.
  • the function of the account as “Associates” is given by the system administrator for each information exchange market.
  • the application for permission of activity as “Associates” may be applied to the system administrator in the different information exchange market, and the application may be permitted.
  • the information distribution server device 6 functions as a management unit 6A, a currency issuing unit 6B, a currency control unit 6C, a transaction processing unit 6D, and a value interlocking unit 6E as shown in FIG. Do.
  • Each function may be implemented by separate server computers, and may operate as the information distribution server device 6 as a set.
  • the management unit 6A, the currency issuing unit 6B, the currency control unit 6C, and the transaction processing unit 6D each have the functions shown in FIG.
  • the management unit 6A includes a use request receiving unit 601, an acquisition request receiving unit 602, a consumption recording unit 603, a first transfer recording unit 604, and a second transfer recording unit 605.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B includes a calculating unit 606 and a determining unit 607.
  • the currency control unit 6C includes a value control unit 608, a correction unit 609, an evaluation correction unit 610, a consumption amount determination unit 611, and an update reception unit 612.
  • the transaction processing unit 6D includes a trade reception unit 613 and an exchange reception unit 614. Details of each function will be described later.
  • the management unit 6A controls the overall functions, issues an account issuance procedure, accepts transmission of content, accepts usage of content, and the like.
  • the management unit 6A executes data processing in the database storing the attribute information of the user in association with the account of the user.
  • the management unit 6A is communicably connected in advance to the terminal device 7 used by the user A who has an account of "business operator", and the management unit 6A is connected from the terminal device 7 used by the user A to the information exchange market.
  • the "Associates" account in the information exchange market is issued to the user A, on the condition that the user A sets some collateral.
  • the collateral may be an asset (money) based on a legal currency or a virtual currency, or may be a credential or the like that secures the usefulness of the information of the content.
  • the issuance of the account of the “business operator” conditions may be set such that there are more registration items than “individual”. It should be noted that the issuance of “business person” and “individual” accounts may not be conditional on the setting of collateral by the management unit 6A.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B is communicably connected to the terminal device 7 used by the user A.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B may be communicably connected to a terminal device used by a system administrator.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B calculates the free content transmitted from the user A and the calculating unit 606 for calculating the evaluation value for the user A, and the quantity of the system currency L to be issued to the user A based on the calculated evaluation value.
  • a determination unit 607 that determines the Here, the evaluation value calculated by the calculation unit 606 is based on the usefulness of the free content in the information exchange market.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B issues the system currency L to the user A according to the determined quantity.
  • the issue amount of the system internal currency L is determined based on the free content transmitted from the user A and the evaluation value for the user A, the basis of the economic value necessary for passing the information exchange market is the free content and the user A It can be said that it is the economic value based on the evaluation value for.
  • the issuance amount of the system currency L may be determined based on the demand of the system currency L in the information exchange market, and the system currency L may be maintained at a fixed unit price (value as a unit).
  • the currency issuing unit 6B newly issues (supplies) the in-system currency L based on the size of the market, the balance between the demand and supply of the in-system currency L, and the like.
  • the currency control unit 6C exhibits a function of changing the value of the system currency L.
  • the currency control unit 6C adjusts and controls the supply amount of the system currency L from the currency issuing unit 6B to the information exchange market. Further, the currency control unit 6C may autonomously adjust the exchange ratio at the time of exchange between the system currency L and the other assets in the transaction processing unit 6D in order to adjust the supply. In addition, the currency control unit 6C may perform adjustment so as to absorb the difference in purchasing power between the subject groups.
  • the function of the currency control unit 6C may be exhibited autonomously, or in particular, may be manually executed via a terminal device used by a system administrator of the information exchange market.
  • Transaction processing unit 6D processes transactions of intra-system currency L between users.
  • the transaction processing unit 6D functions as an exchange of the system currency L in the information exchange market.
  • As one of the intra-system currency L transactions among users exchange with non-system assets such as legal currency or virtual currency, cryptocurrency or electronic currency called cryptosystem asset is enabled.
  • the value interlocking unit 6E exhibits a function of accepting exchange between the system internal currency L held by the user having the “Associates” account and the digital asset distributed outside the system.
  • the value interlocking unit 6E can exchange the value of the system currency L with a specific virtual currency which is an example of a digital asset, and the function of storing the value of the system currency L can be realized. It will be possible to substitute by a specific virtual currency.
  • the information distribution server device 6 may be provided for each information exchange market, or one information distribution server device 6 may be provided to collectively control and manage a plurality of information exchange markets.
  • a user having an "Associates" account belonging to one information exchange market can be used to make an "Operator” or "Individual” or "Associates” account belonging to another information exchange market.
  • the in-system currency L may be transferred to the user who has it.
  • a group of metaverses covering the whole world or a plurality of principal groups (for example, a group of regional attributes of users such as an economic zone, a state, a state or a prefecture, etc.) by the information distribution server device 6
  • the system may be configured to control and manage a virtual market (a virtual state such as a virtual state that generates and distributes its own currency).
  • a virtual market a virtual state such as a virtual state that generates and distributes its own currency.
  • there is no concept of “distance” that exists in the real market and this does not incur the costs of “distribution and movement” that are in the real market.
  • Users participating in the metaverse are preferably free to perform activities, including production activities, without being tied to distance (ie cost and belonging state).
  • an information processing terminal device such as a personal computer, a smartphone, a tablet terminal, a television receiver, or a VR (Virtual Reality) dedicated device including a game machine connected to a network in the real market as a user interface
  • a VR Virtual Reality
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the information distribution server device 6 and the terminal device 7.
  • the information distribution server device 6 includes a control unit 60, a storage unit 61, and a communication unit 62 using a server computer.
  • the information distribution server device 6 has separate hardware for each function of the management unit 6A, the currency issuing unit 6B, the currency control unit 6C, the transaction processing unit 6D, and the value interlocking unit 6E described above. Is preferred. However, in the following description, it is assumed that an instance having each function is generated virtually by one server computer and each performs processing.
  • the control unit 60 is a processor using a central processing unit (CPU) or a graphics processing unit (GPU), and uses a memory such as a read only memory (ROM) and a random access memory (RAM) incorporated therein. Control and execute processing. Specifically, the control unit 60 configures, for example, a management unit 6A, a currency issuing unit 6B, a currency control unit 6C, a transaction processing unit 6D, and a value interlocking unit 6E shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The control unit 60 executes information processing based on the server program 6P stored in the storage unit 61.
  • the server program 6P includes a web server program, and the control unit 60 functions as a web server that executes provision of a web page that is a portal site of the information exchange market to the terminal device 7, acceptance of login to a web service, etc. Do.
  • the storage unit 61 uses, for example, a non-volatile memory such as a hard disk or a flash memory.
  • the storage unit 61 stores the above-described server program 6P and various types of information to which the control unit 60 refers.
  • the communication unit 62 is an interface for realizing communication via the network N, and uses, for example, a communication interface such as Ethernet (registered trademark) or a wireless communication antenna.
  • the control unit 60 can communicate with the terminal device 7 via the communication unit 62.
  • the information distribution server device 6 can read / write information from / to the storage device 63 storing the account information of the user of the information exchange market to be provided by the function of the management unit 6A.
  • the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 performs addition / deletion of account information, update / readout of account information and the like to the storage device 63.
  • the control unit 60 associates the content data including the transmitted content data and the identification information with each other, and stores the content information in the storage device 63.
  • the identification information of the content includes not only information identifying the content but also information identifying paid or free.
  • the control unit 60 stores, in the storage device 63, an accounting record that records to which user the intra-system currency L belongs, which user has transferred it to another user, and the like. In addition to this, the control unit 60 stores, in the storage device 63, "information to be treated as slave" (sub-content information) transmitted from a user of "business operator" or "individual".
  • FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of the in-system currency management table showing the accounting record of the in-system currency L.
  • the currency ID is information for identifying each in-system currency L.
  • the control unit 60 assigns an individual currency ID to the in-system currency L of a predetermined unit (for example, the smallest unit) each time the currency issuing unit 6B issues the in-system currency L, and manages the assigned currency ID in-system currency. Record on the table.
  • the acquirer ID is information for identifying an acquirer of the in-system currency L.
  • the control portion 60 associates the issued user with the issued currency ID of the in-system currency L. Record the acquisition ID to identify in the in-system currency management table.
  • the acquisition date represents the date when the user acquired the system internal currency. For example, when in-system currency L is issued from the currency issuing unit 6B to a user having an “Associates” account, the control unit 60 uses the date when the in-system currency L is issued as the acquisition date of the user. Record in management table.
  • the expected disappearance date represents a date on which the system currency L disappears.
  • the intra-system currency L is configured to disappear if the setting period has elapsed without using the intra-system currency L after the user acquires the intra-system currency L.
  • the setting period can be set according to the user. For example, 1 year for users with "Associates" account, 6 months for users with "Operator” account, 3 months for users with "Individual” account It can be set. Further, the set period of time in which the system currency L disappears can be set according to the acquisition history of the system currency L.
  • the intra-system currency L enables transfer from a user with an "Associates” account to a user with an "Operator” account or a user with an "Individual” account.
  • the in-system currency control table is appropriately rewritten according to the transfer of the in-system currency L. For example, when the intra-system currency L of the currency ID "L001" is transferred from the user (associates) of the acquirer ID "U001" to the user (individual) of the acquirer ID "U021” on August 1, 2018, The items of the acquirer ID and the acquisition date associated with the currency ID "L001" are rewritten as "U021” and "2012.08.01", respectively.
  • the estimated deletion date is rewritten as "2017.11.01."
  • one user may have a plurality of accounts.
  • a user who has an "Associates" account has at least an "Operator” or "Individual" account. Therefore, in the in-system currency management table, the information of the currency ID of the intra-system currency L, the acquisition date, and the estimated date of destruction is not only the acquirer ID identifying the acquirer, but an account owned by the acquirer. It may be configured to be recorded in association with the ID of.
  • the intra-system currency L is mainly for each account ID. It is preferable if they are managed in association with each other. That is, a "passbook function" as in the conventional online bank system based on the accounting record recorded in the in-system currency management table may be controlled in association with the account.
  • the "passbook function” described above is displayed on the display unit 73 of the user's terminal device 7 for each account, receives an operation from the user having the account by the operation unit 74, and communicates with the information distribution server device 6 by the communication unit 72. By doing this, the accounting record recorded in the in-system currency management table may be read, rewritten, or added.
  • the “passbook function” described above may function in cooperation with the transaction processing unit 6D.
  • the in-system currency L consumed by the first consumption activity disappears from the information exchange market.
  • the record of the extant in-system currency L is deleted from the in-system currency control table.
  • the record of the in-system currency management table is rewritten according to the transfer or disappearance of the in-system currency L, but the history from issuance to transfer and disappearance of each in-system currency L is You may leave it as a record.
  • the currency ID, the acquirer ID, the acquisition date, and the estimated due date are associated and recorded, but the breakdown of use (for example, transfer to another user , The first consumption activity and the second consumption activity) may be recorded together.
  • the priority order of the currency ID for transferring or deleting the in-system currency L from one acquirer ID (or account ID) to another acquirer ID (or other account ID) is The same acquirer ID (or account ID) may be taken from a currency ID in which the expiration date is near.
  • the terminal device 7 is a computer device such as a personal computer, a smartphone, or a tablet terminal device used by the user as described above, and includes a control unit 70, a storage unit 71, a communication unit 72, a display unit 73, and an operation unit 74.
  • the control unit 70 uses a processor such as a CPU and a GPU, a memory, and the like.
  • the control unit 70 may be configured as one hardware (SoC: System On a Chip) in which the processor, the memory, the storage unit 71, and the communication unit 72 are integrated.
  • SoC System On a Chip
  • the control unit 70 executes communication connection to the information distribution server device 6 based on the application program 7P stored in the storage unit 71, and via the Web page in the information exchange market provided by the information distribution server device 6. Execute the process
  • the storage unit 71 uses a flash memory, and stores programs and data referred to by the control unit 70 including the application program 7P.
  • the application program 7P includes at least a web browser program, and the control unit 70 causes the display unit 73 to display a screen based on the information of the web page provided by the information distribution server device 7 based on the application program 7P.
  • the storage unit 71 may have an in-system currency management table indicating accounting records of the in-system currency L associated with the user's account. In the in-system currency table of the terminal device 7, for example, the currency ID of the in-system currency L, the acquisition date, and the expected disappearance date are associated and recorded.
  • the communication unit 72 is a communication module that implements communication connection to the network N.
  • the communication unit 72 uses a network card, a wireless communication device or a module for carrier communication.
  • the display unit 73 uses a display device such as a liquid crystal panel or an organic EL display.
  • the operation unit 74 is an interface for receiving user's operation, and uses a physical button, a touch panel device with a built-in display, a speaker, a microphone, and the like.
  • the operation unit 74 may receive an operation on a screen displayed on the display unit 73 by a physical button or a touch panel, or the microphone recognizes an operation content from an input sound and interacts with the sound output from a speaker The operation may be accepted in a form.
  • the display unit 73 and the operation unit 74 are not limited to the modes described above.
  • the operation unit 74 may use a controller module such as a joystick of a game machine.
  • the device may be a wearable device that receives an operation according to the user's movement, and various input / output devices such as gloves, suits, shoes, and goggles can be used.
  • the control unit 60 receives the content registration request transmitted from the terminal device 7 used by the user having the “Associates” account by the function of the management unit 6A.
  • the control unit 60 causes an interface that accepts content registration to be displayed on a screen displayed on the website or the terminal device 7 only for a user who has an “Associates” account.
  • the control unit 60 adds content identification information to the received content and stores the content identification information in the storage device 63.
  • the control unit 60 stores the content identification information, the account information of the user who is the sender, and the time information including the registration date of the content in the storage device 63 in association with each other.
  • the quantity of in-system currency L determined by the user who is the sender is stored in association. This quantity can be changed ex post.
  • the control unit 60 presents a web site including access to the content, which enables the use of the content.
  • the control unit 60 uses the content history including the usage count etc. Are stored in the storage device 63 in association with Further, the control unit 60 stores, in the storage device 63, a usage history including what kind of content each user has used and at what timing in association with the user's account information by the function of the management unit 6A.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing procedure of the control unit 60 as the management unit 6A.
  • the control unit 60 as the management unit 6A, executes the following processing once a day, once a week, once a month, etc. according to a predetermined cycle.
  • the control unit 60 selects the user of "associates” based on the account information stored in the storage device 63 (step S101).
  • the control unit 60 calculates an evaluation value for the content of the selected user or the user itself (step S102), and determines the quantity of the corresponding intra-system currency L based on the evaluation value calculated for the user under selection (step S102) S103).
  • the control unit 60 issues the in-system currency L according to the quantity determined in step S103 to the user currently selected (step S104).
  • step S104 the control unit 60 stores the currency ID identifying the newly issued in-system currency L in the in-system currency management table in association with the account information (for example, acquirer ID) of the currently selected user.
  • the currency ID of the in-system currency L is the in-system currency management together with the acquisition date when the in-system currency L is acquired by the user (ie, the issue date of the in-system currency L) and the date when the in-system currency L disappears. It is stored in the table.
  • the control unit 60 determines whether or not all the users of "associates" who transmit the content have been selected (step S105), and when not selected (S105: NO), returns the process to step S101. If it is determined in step S105 that all the items have been selected (S105: YES), the control unit 60 ends the process.
  • the control unit 60 stores the calculation method of the evaluation value based on the usage history of the content as the first setting information in the storage unit 61 or the storage device 63, and the control unit 60 evaluates based on the first setting information. Calculate the value.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the evaluation value calculation procedure.
  • the processing procedure illustrated in the flowchart of FIG. 6 corresponds to the details of the process of step S102 in the flowchart of FIG. Note that the calculation procedure of the evaluation value based on the flowchart of FIG. 6 is merely an example, and is not limited to the procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG.
  • the control unit 60 refers to the content identification information to which the account information of the user of “associates” being selected is associated, and selects one free content transmitted by the user (step S201).
  • the control unit 60 calculates the “number evaluation value” for the selected free content (step S202).
  • the “count evaluation value” is calculated based on the number of users used in a predetermined period, for example, a period from the previous calculation time point to the current calculation time point.
  • the number of users may be a total number or may be distinguished by account information.
  • the control unit 60 calculates the “count evaluation value” as follows.
  • Numberer of times evaluation value number of times used x x 1 + number of times used x x 2 x (number of times used / total number of times used) + x 3
  • x1 user number coefficient (setting information)
  • x2 Coefficient when evaluating based on the ratio to the total number of times of use (setting information)
  • x3 Evaluation value for the top users (setting information)
  • the "number of times of use” is the number of times in a predetermined period, and the “total number of times of use” is the total number of times from the time when the content is registered to the time of this calculation.
  • Numberer of times of use is a value counted by the number of times of access to the link specifying the content, including the number of times of access to the Web page containing the content, the number of downloads of Portable Document Format (PDF), the number of times of playback of moving images, etc. .
  • PDF Portable Document Format
  • the control unit 60 calculates a "time evaluation value” (step S203).
  • the “use time” is a time in a predetermined period, and the “total use time” is a total time from the time when the content is registered to the present calculation time.
  • the “use time” is a time during which content is viewed on the terminal device 7 of the user, and includes the display time of a web page including the content, the display time of the PDF, the reproduction time of the moving image, and the like.
  • the control unit 60 calculates a "user evaluation value” (step S204).
  • the “user evaluation value” is calculated based on the evaluation content (the number of evaluations) in which the user evaluated the target content in a predetermined period.
  • the evaluation number is the difference between the number of "Like” for the content and the number of "Dislike” in reverse, and is the total number of the given *.
  • the control unit 60 calculates the “user evaluation value” as follows.
  • “User evaluation value” evaluation number x z1 + evaluation number x z2 x (number of evaluations / total number of evaluations) + z3
  • z1 evaluation number coefficient (setting information)
  • z2 Coefficient when evaluating with the ratio to the total evaluation number (setting information)
  • z3 Evaluation value for top evaluation numbers (setting information)
  • “Evaluation number” is the number of evaluations in a predetermined period, and “total evaluation number” is the total of the number of evaluations from the time when content is registered to the time of this calculation.
  • the control unit 60 calculates an evaluation value based on another index for which the evaluation is recognized (step S205).
  • the control unit 60 adds, for example, when it is a long seller that is used as a content for a predetermined period or more.
  • the other control unit 60 may add the evaluation value based on the fact that, for example, an evaluation by a well-known critic is given or an award is given.
  • the control unit 60 integrates the evaluation values calculated from step S202 to step S205 to calculate a content evaluation value (step S206). In step S206, for example, the control unit 60 adds up the evaluation values.
  • the control unit 60 determines whether or not the process has been performed on all the contents of the selected "associates" (step S207). If it is determined that the process has not been performed for all (S207: NO), the control unit 60 returns the process to step S201.
  • control unit 60 calculates a sum value obtained by adding up the content evaluation values calculated for all the contents (step S208).
  • the control unit 60 calculates a "transmission amount evaluation value” (step S209).
  • the “transmission amount evaluation value” is calculated based on the number of transmissions of the content transmitted by the user of “Associates” selected during a predetermined period and the internal capacity (the number of text, time, etc.). For example, the control unit 60 calculates the “transmission amount evaluation value” as follows.
  • “Delivery amount evaluation value” Dialing amount ⁇ w1 + Dialing amount ⁇ w2 ⁇ (Dialing amount / total dispatching amount) + w3
  • w1 transmission amount coefficient (setting information)
  • w2 A coefficient (setting information) when evaluating with the ratio to the total transmission volume
  • w3 Evaluation value for upper sending volume (setting information)
  • the “amount of transmission” is the amount of transmission of content provided free of charge in a predetermined period.
  • the “amount of transmission” is a product of the number of contents transmitted and the content size.
  • the “total transmission amount” is the total of the multiplication value of the "number of transmissions and the internal capacity" from the time when the user of "associates” first registers the content to the present calculation time.
  • the control unit 60 calculates an “overall evaluation value” in which the content evaluation value and the Associates evaluation value are integrated (step S210), and ends the process.
  • the control unit 60 may calculate the "overall evaluation value” by adding the content evaluation value and the associated evaluation value.
  • the control unit 60 determines the issued quantity of the intra-system currency L based on the calculated evaluation value and the second setting information stored in the storage unit 61 or the storage device 63.
  • the second setting information is, for example, a ratio to an evaluation value.
  • the second setting information is newly issued, for example, to all the associates that the information distribution server device 6 autonomously derives from the demand of the system currency L in the information exchange market, or arbitrarily set by the system administrator. It may be the total issue volume, that is, the additional total volume of the system currency L additionally supplied to the information exchange market.
  • the newly issued total amount (additional supplied total amount) of the system currency L which is derived or set arbitrarily may be the quantity of the predetermined period which is derived or set arbitrarily.
  • the first setting information and the second setting information can be changed and updated as appropriate.
  • the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 receives a change, an update, a registration, and the like via a terminal device used by the system administrator, it is possible to correct the market intended by the system administrator. That is, the control unit 60 functions as an update accepting unit 612 that accepts the update of the first setting information and the second setting information.
  • the market itself is designed to update the configuration information to grow the market autonomously, not to reflect the intention of the system administrator. That is, the control unit 60 may function as a correction unit 609 that corrects the first setting information and the second setting information in accordance with the usage condition of the content.
  • the consumption of the in-system currency L given to the user having the “Associates” account will be described.
  • the system currency L acquired based on the content transmission can not be consumed by the action of the same user (the same user).
  • a user with an "Associates” account transfers the acquired in-system currency L to the "Operator” or “Individual” or “Associates” account owned by another user, or on the basis of his "Associates” account. Can be transferred to a certain "business" or "individual” account.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of management of the system currency L in the terminal device 7.
  • Control unit 70 transmits the content to the information exchange market through communication unit 72 (transmission unit) (step S600). With the transmission of the content, the information distribution server device 6 evaluates the content (free content) and the sender (associates), and based on the evaluation result, the system currency L is issued to the sender.
  • the control unit 70 transmits the account information of the user stored in the storage unit 71 from the communication unit 72 to the information distribution server device 6 (step S601).
  • Control unit 70 causes communication unit 72 (reception unit) to receive screen information including information such as the quantity of in-system currency L associated with the account information transmitted from information distribution server device 6 (step S602).
  • control unit 70 causes display unit 73 to display a screen including the quantity of in-system currency L issued for the account information of the user (step S603).
  • a user having an "Associates" account can grasp the amount of in-system currency L given for his content transmission activity.
  • the screen information includes detailed information indicating when the system internal currency L was issued to which content, based on what evaluation value, and the display of the detailed information is performed by the operation unit 74. This should be displayed when selected in.
  • Control unit 70 is a screen for accepting transfer (sell) to user having account of other "business operator” or "individual” in system L regarding the system currency L including the displayed quantity. Is displayed (step S604). Control unit 70 determines whether or not the screen for accepting transfer has been selected (step S605), and when it is determined that it has been selected (S605: YES), accepts the quantity to be assigned (step S606), based on the accepted quantity Transaction information is created (step S 607). The control unit 70 transmits the created transaction information to the transaction processing unit 6D of the information distribution server device 6 (step S608). When the transaction information transmitted from the terminal device 7 is received, the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 updates the recorded contents of the in-system currency management table.
  • the control unit 70 determines whether or not the login to the portal site of the application program 7P or the information distribution server device 6 is to be ended (step S609), and when it is determined not to be ended (S609: NO), the process is performed Return to S602. If it is determined in step S609 that the application program 7P or login is to be ended (S609: YES), the process is ended.
  • step S605 If it is determined in step S605 that no selection has been made (S605: NO), the control unit 70 advances the process to step S609. Also in this case, the control unit 70 ends the process when the application program 7P or the end of login is selected.
  • the transaction information includes designation of account information of "business person” or “individual” or “associates” of the transferee user.
  • Transfer of the system currency L is based on free trade and direct trading in the real world. Therefore, the quantity of in-system currency L to be transferred is directly negotiated with the user among the users.
  • the consideration may be a legal currency or may be an asset such as a virtual currency, payment of debt, provision of goods or services, or a bond.
  • FIG. 8 is a view showing an example of a screen displayed on the terminal device 7.
  • FIG. 8 shows an example of a screen displayed based on the screen information in step S603 in the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG.
  • the system is issued to the user “AA” having the “Associates” account and remains A quantity screen 731 including the quantity “5500” of the currency L is included.
  • the quantity screen 731 includes an interface for displaying detailed information on the process of acquiring the in-system currency L of the user “AA”.
  • the confirmation screen 730 of the intra-system currency L shown in FIG. 8 includes a transfer acceptance screen 732 corresponding to step S604.
  • the transfer acceptance screen 732 includes a control for selecting a quantity to be transferred and a transfer destination, and an interface 733 for instructing transfer.
  • the confirmation screen 730 of the system currency L includes an interface for returning to the portal site.
  • the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 determines from the account information of the user of "associates" of the transfer source as "business operator” or “individual” or Transfers the system currency L to the account information of the "Associates” user.
  • the determination of the compensation for the transfer at this time may be determined by free trading outside the system, and the information distribution server device 6 functions as a exchange at the transaction processing unit 6D as described in the following flowchart. It may be realized.
  • FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of transfer processing of the system currency L in the information distribution server device 6.
  • the control unit 60 causes the communication unit 62 to receive transaction information from the terminal device 7 used by the user of the account of “Associates” in association with the account information (step S701).
  • the control unit 60 determines whether the received transaction information includes information indicating the user of the transferee (step S702), and when it is determined that it is included (S702: YES), the transferee's The account information of the user is specified (step S703).
  • the control unit 60 transfers the in-system currency L associated with the transfer source account information to the transfer destination account information by the number included in the transaction information (step S704). Specifically, the control unit 60 controls the acquirer ID of the in-system currency L by the amount included in the transaction information among the in-system currency L owned by the transfer source user (associates). Execute processing to rewrite the ID to the ID of the transfer destination user. Further, the control unit 60 additionally executes a process of rewriting the estimated date of disappearance of the system currency L according to the user of the transferee. In step S704, so-called block chain technology may be used to record the fact of transfer in the information exchange market in the accounting record in the storage device 63.
  • the control unit 60 uses the function of the transaction processing unit 6D to collect a fee of a predetermined amount from the asset associated with the account information of "associates" at the time of processing for registration of transfer in step S704 (step S705).
  • Assets may be collected from digital assets such as crypto assets or registrations in legal currency at the time of registration of Associates account, and may be collected from these, as described later, credit limit for each Associates account You may process the accounts receivable after the amount is fixed. Also, both of them may be performed. When the accounts receivable processing is performed, the calculation of the credit limit for each “Associates” account may be left to the processing of the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6.
  • the amount of the fee to be collected from the asset associated with the “Associates” account information may be arbitrary setting information of 0 (zero) or more stored in advance in the storage unit 61.
  • the control unit 60 reduces the fee by the amount corresponding to the asset recorded in association with the transfer source account information by the function of the transaction processing unit 6D, and records it in advance for the system administrator. Add only the collected fee to the asset to be recorded in association with the prepared account information and record.
  • the control unit 60 may execute a process of transferring the reduced digital asset to the account of the system administrator.
  • the control unit 60 receives the screen information including information such as the quantity of the system currency L associated with the account information of the transferee “associates” after transfer and collection of the fee in step S701. It transmits to the terminal device 7 of the transmission origin of (step S706), and a process is complete
  • control unit 60 includes the transaction information in the transaction information by the function of the exchange included in the transaction processing unit 6D. It receives as a sales order of the system internal currency L for the quantity which is made (step S707). That is, the control unit 60 functions as the purchase and reception unit 613.
  • the control unit 60 accepts the purchase order from the users of all the accounts including “Associates” by the function of the exchange (step S 708).
  • the control unit 60 separately accepts registration of a currency such as legal currency or virtual currency, which is an asset outside the system, or a physical asset as a deposit asset as a purchase order.
  • the control unit 60 may request an external asset transaction system to subtract processing from the custody asset when the transaction is established.
  • the registration of the credit card number may be accepted, and the credit card management company may be charged.
  • the control unit 60 performs, as the management unit 6A, a measure such as restricting the later-described use act of the user's information exchange market including “Associates”.
  • the control unit 60 extracts a buying order to be assigned to the selling order received in step S 707 (step S 709), and completes the transaction (step S 710).
  • step S 710 the control unit 60 determines the acquirer ID of the system currency L from the ID of the user of the transfer source, for the quantity included in the transaction information among the system currency L owned by the transfer source user. Execute processing to rewrite to user ID. Further, the control unit 60 additionally executes a process of rewriting the estimated date of disappearance of the system currency L according to the user of the transferee. That is, the control unit 60 functions as the second transfer recording unit 605.
  • the control unit 60 collects a fee of a predetermined amount from the asset associated with the account information of "associates" (step S711).
  • the fees collected in steps S705 and S711 may be the same amount or different amounts.
  • the fee collected from the user with the “Associates” account when the transfer is established by the function of the exchange in step S711 is more expensive than the case where the direct transaction outside the exchange in step S705 is established. It may be or vice versa.
  • the asset may receive registration of a digital asset such as a cryptographic asset or a deposit in the legal currency at the time of registration of the “Associates” account, and the control unit 60 may collect the digital asset or the legal currency.
  • control unit 60 may function as the exchange receiving unit 614.
  • the fee to be collected may be the system currency L.
  • the ID of the system administrator is prepared, and the acquirer ID of the system currency L for the reduction (collection) is the ID of the system administrator from the ID of the collection destination (the account of the Associates who should pay the fee). It is sufficient to execute the process of rewriting to.
  • the control unit 60 transmits the screen information including the information such as the quantity of the system currency L associated with the account information of the "associates" of the transfer source of the transaction establishment in step S701. It transmits to the apparatus 7 (S706), and a process is complete
  • the user of the account of “Associates” can obtain revenue from assets such as legal currency or virtual currency based on the in-system currency L acquired based on the content transmission. If the content originator earns a profit, the content originator can be motivated to issue further content because the profit from the objective and legitimate evaluation can be expected thereafter and the information exchange market can be activated.
  • a user who has an account other than "Associates” such as "Business Operator” or “Individual”
  • a user who has an "Associates” account also desires the system currency L additionally Can acquire this by registering the transfer of the system currency L.
  • the terminal device 7 used by the user having the “business operator” or “individual” account is also associated with the account information of step S603 in the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 based on the application program 7P. Process up to the screen display including the quantity of the currency L in the system. Even on the terminal device 7 used by the user having the “business operator” or “individual” account, the portal site of the information exchange market is displayed, and the transfer as shown in FIG. A screen for confirming the quantity of system internal currency L received and owned is displayed.
  • the information distribution server device 6 functions as a exchange by means of the transaction processing unit 6D, and can promote the transfer of the system currency L between users.
  • the system currency L since all the system currency L have an expiration date, it makes it difficult for the user to buy and sell for investment or speculative purposes and to operate the information exchange market.
  • a user who has an "Associates" account transfers it for the purpose of exchanging the system currency L for another asset, that is, for the purpose of acquiring an asset in the real world.
  • a user who has an "enterprise” or “individual” account receives the transfer of the system internal currency L for the purpose of exchanging the owned assets into the system internal currency L of the information exchange market, that is, the purpose of using the information exchange market. It is difficult to think of trading for investment or speculative purposes, such as establishing a very simple purpose trading, holding the currency L in the system and warming it up for profit.
  • the "value retention function" which is conventionally considered to be one of the functions of the currency, is eliminated by the "setting of the expiration date". I have something to do.
  • the in-system currency L provides a function as a currency as an integrated system with assets such as legal currency and virtual currency to be exchanged. That is, for the user using the information exchange market, the surplus system currency L is exchanged for other assets such as legal currency, while the shortage of system currency L is surplus legal currency. Etc. may be exchanged for other assets.
  • the in-system currency L is different from the conventional currency in that it does not have the asset function of "holding value".
  • the transfer between the "Associates" account and the "Operator" or “Individual” account may be charged a higher fee compared to the direct transaction.
  • This fee is a bond to "Associates” for the system administrator. It is good to operate the upper limit value of the price using a different value for each "associates”. That is, it corresponds to the credit limit mentioned above. It can be said that it evaluates the user's service usage behavior and increases or decreases the credit line of "Associates”. This increase or decrease in the credit limit may be related to the display priority of the content originating from the individual "Associates" account, or the setting information is updated such that more in-system currency L is issued. You may do so. It may also be related to the amount of incentives from the system administrator.
  • the value of the currency L in the system is determined locally by the function of the currency issuing unit 6B and the currency control unit 6C described later.
  • the “value scale function” is considered to be an important function of the currency, which is kept at a constant level (for example, across multiple countries with different purchasing power parity) and temporally (for example, across the current and future)
  • the supply adjustment is made according to the demand of the in-system currency L, and the in-system currency L Reduce volatility, improve circulation speed, and further curb trading for investment or speculative purposes as described above. Details of this function will be described later.
  • a user having an account of “business person” or “individual” transmits a request for usage act to the information distribution server device 6 via the terminal device 7 to be used.
  • the usage act is an advantageous usage act of the information exchange market including transmission of information not regarded as content in the information exchange market (information treated as subordinate), or paid content using the system currency L Acquisition of
  • FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the acceptance process of the use act in the information distribution server device 6.
  • the control unit 60 receives a request from the terminal device 7 used by the user having the “business operator” or “individual” account by the function of the management unit 6A (step S801).
  • the management unit 6A functions as a usage request receiving unit 601 and an acquisition request receiving unit 602.
  • the control unit 60 specifies the content of the received request (step S802).
  • the control unit 60 specifies that the content of the request is transmission of information to be treated as a slave.
  • the control unit 60 specifies that the content of the request is acquisition of paid content.
  • the control unit 60 determines whether the specified content is transmission of information (step S 803), and if it is determined that transmission is information (S 803: YES), consumption of the account information of the request source
  • the consumption amount of the system currency L to be determined is determined (step S804). That is, the control unit 60 functions as the consumption determination unit 611.
  • the control unit 60 may determine the consumption amount of the system currency L based on the setting information stored in the storage unit 61 or the storage device 63 according to the content of the request.
  • the setting information that determines the consumption amount of the system currency L according to the user's request may be updated to increase usage by the system administrator or autonomously by the function of the information distribution server device 6.
  • the control unit 60 consumes the in-system currency L associated with the account information of the requesting "business company” or “individual” by the determined consumption amount (step S805), and performs processing for the request. finish. That is, the control unit 60 functions as a consumption recording unit 603 which records consumption (disappearance) of the in-system currency L due to the first consumption activity in the in-system currency management table.
  • control unit 60 reduces the quantity of system currency L associated with the account information stored in storage device 63 by transaction processing unit 6D. Specifically, the control unit 60 executes a process of deleting the record of the in-system currency L owned by the requesting "business company” or “individual” from the in-system currency management table by the determined consumption amount. . At this time, the reduced system currency L is not transferred to another.
  • the consumption of the intra-system currency L at step S805 causes the intra-system currency L to disappear from the information exchange market.
  • the control unit 60 transmits information on the consumption amount determined in step S 804 to the request source terminal device 7 and determines whether to consent to the consumption of the system internal currency L or not. You may check with the requesting user.
  • the terminal device 7 displays the received consumption amount information on the display unit 73, and accepts, at the operation unit 74, a selection as to whether or not the consumption of the system currency L is accepted.
  • the terminal device 7 transmits the selection result from the communication unit 72 to the information distribution server device 6.
  • the information distribution server device 6 consumes the in-system currency L corresponding to the determined consumption only when the selection result of accepting the consumption of the in-system currency L is received.
  • step S 803 it is determined whether it is the transmission of information such as an advertisement, but for the use accompanied by this disappearance, a user having an account of “business person” or “individual” starts including desired content,
  • the information exchange market may be advantageously used, for example, an information collection and utilization act that enables quicker, more, and appropriate acquisition. In this case, as the system currency L is consumed more, the priority and accuracy may be improved and used.
  • step S803 If it is determined in step S803 that the information is not sent (S803: NO), the content of the request is acquisition of paid content.
  • the control unit 60 Based on the price stored in the storage device 63 in association with the content identification information of the paid content, the control unit 60 corresponds to the in-system currency L associated with the account information of the request source by the price.
  • the content is transferred to the account information of the paid content provider (step S806), and the process ends. Specifically, the control unit 60 determines the acquirer ID of the in-system currency L by the price of paid content among the in-system currency L owned by the requesting user (the enterprise or the individual). Execute processing to rewrite the ID of the content provider to the ID of the content provider.
  • control unit 60 additionally executes a process of rewriting the estimated date of disappearance of the system currency L according to the user of the transfer destination. That is, the control unit 60 functions as the first transfer recording unit 604.
  • the price stored in association with the content identification information may be specified when the user of the account of “Associates” transmits as content regardless of whether paid or free using the terminal device 7
  • the content may be designated and the price may be set. For example, when the content is transmitted, if the price is not designated, it may be treated as free content.
  • the control unit 60 sets the price of the quantity L of the system currency L stored in the delivery record of the storage device 63 in association with the request source account information by the function of the transaction processing unit 6D. Reduce by minutes and record (passbook record). In this case, at the same time, the control unit 60 stores the quantity of the system currency L reduced and associated with the account information of the request source that has acquired the paid content in association with the account information of the provider of the paid content. Record on 63 cash records.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing for accepting the price setting of paid content.
  • the control unit 70 of the terminal device 7 causes the display unit 73 to display a reception screen for receiving the price setting necessary for obtaining the paid or free content transmitted to the information exchange market (step S901).
  • a display field of identification information for identifying the content for example, an input field for inputting the price of the content (quantity of the currency L in the system), a confirmation button for fixing the input price, etc. are arranged. Be done.
  • control unit 70 determines whether the price of the content has been determined (step S902). That is, when the price is input in the input field of the reception screen described above and the confirm button is pressed, it can be determined that the price of the content is fixed. If it is determined that the price has not been decided (S902: NO), the control unit 70 stands by until the price is decided.
  • the control unit 70 transmits information such as identification information for identifying the content and the determined price (quantity of currency in the system) to the information distribution server device 6. (Step S903).
  • the information distribution server device 6 receives the content identification information and the price information, the information distribution server device 6 stores the received information in the storage device 63 in association with each other.
  • the paid content may be, for example, a conventional e-mail magazine, or may be content such as books, music, movies and the like. If the user who is the originator of the content sends only a part of the content as free content, and the user who has an “individual” or “business person” account using it wants to acquire it further, all the paid content It can also take the form of being acquired as.
  • a user with an "Associates" account can provide the information exchange market with various works in various forms.
  • the content transmitted in the information exchange market is not limited to the copyrighted material created by the user with the “Associates” account, for example, based on the copyright or other rights entrusted to or acquired from the author by the music distributor. It may be a work.
  • a user who has an "Associates" account that transmits the work as the content is a music distributor.
  • a content distributor such as a video distributor may also be able to develop business in the information exchange market as a user with an "Associates" account.
  • the in-system currency L transferred to the system administrator from the account of the “business operator” collected to the system administrator of the “basic income” is the first consumption based on the “tax rate” set in advance. It is good to be collected at the time of activity.
  • the in-system currency L collected by the "tax rate” may be distributed as "basic income” to a user having an "individual” account. Distribution as "Basic income” supports the economic activity of users with “personal” accounts in the information exchange market, promotes personal consumption, and increases usage frequency of users with “personal” accounts, resulting in Exerts the effect of increasing the amount of circulation and consumption of system currency L throughout the information exchange market. Note that the above-described taxing may be performed on the second consumption activity.
  • the in-system currency L issued to the user of the "Associates" account by sending free content is such that the user transmits information to be treated as a subordinate such as advertisement involving consumption of the in-system currency L, etc. Until it disappears due to the use activity relatively relative to other users of the information exchange market, or the expiration date, transfer such as transfer shown with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. It is a currency that circulates among the users from time to time by using such paid contents.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of supply, distribution and extinction of the currency L in the system.
  • the intra-system currency L is different from the value exchange medium such as points and electronic money, which are complements of legal currency in the country to which the issuing entity belongs, which has conventionally been the debt of the issuing entity at the time of issuance.
  • the intra-system currency L is not a debt of the issuing entity, the function of the information distribution server device 6 becomes a coin having intrinsic economic value by itself, and is constructed by the information distribution server device 6 used by the issuing entity Or it becomes a currency that circulates endlessly as value exchange media in multiple information exchange markets.
  • the function of the currency issuing unit 6B will be described.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B has a function of newly issuing the in-system currency L to the "Associates" account in the information exchange market.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B may store the newly issued information (for example, identification information such as a serial number) of the system currency L in the storage device 63 together with attribution.
  • attribution of the system internal currency L is managed in the system internal currency control table.
  • the currency control unit 6C exhibits a function of changing the value of the system currency L.
  • the currency control unit 6C causes the value to be zero, that is, to disappear, become unusable, or change to a smaller value after a predetermined period has elapsed since each user acquired the system currency L.
  • the information distribution server 6 for controlling the in-system currency L is equipped with a process in which the value of the in-system currency L decreases or disappears as the user's possession period elapses.
  • a user who has an "Associates" account does not have his own consumption value for the system currency L.
  • the in-system currency L is issued without being a system administrator's debt in a new issue for the "Associates” account, and since the in-system currency L is not given an intellectual value in the issue stage.
  • In-system currency L may not be an asset of a user having an "Associates” account at the early stage of issuance, but a mere quantified evaluation. From this, the expiration date of the in-system currency L to be issued has a ground that can be set arbitrarily by the system administrator.
  • the acquisition history of the system currency L is free acquisition, it may be a short term such as one day, one week or one month, and the acquisition history may be paid for (as purchased from associates, etc.). Even in the case of 1 month, 3 months, or 6 months, it may be a short period such as giving only the consumption value without giving the asset value. Then, the intrasystem currency L disappears even by the first consumption activity by the consumable user. From these facts, the intra-system currency L that circulates the information exchange market has a feature that can function as a value exchange medium having a high circulation speed as compared with the conventional value exchange medium.
  • the in-system currency L can exhibit a function as a money having a high circulation speed in the information exchange market, and can exhibit an effect of improving the information circulation speed in the market (boosting total information exchange market production). This can also be expected to have the effect of improving the market control power of the system administrator.
  • a user having an "Associates" account can exchange the system currency L issued at any time for other assets, the value storage function that the system currency L does not have functions as the entire system.
  • the system currency L can also be expected to be effective as a currency having a faster money circulation rate than the conventional legal currency.
  • the currency control unit 6C determines the amount of supply of the in-system currency L to the information exchange market by the currency issuing unit 6B, that is, the issued quantity of the in-system currency L to the "Associates" account.
  • the currency control unit 6C determines the supply amount based on the setting information stored in the storage unit 61 or the storage device 63.
  • the currency control unit 6C refers to, for example, transaction information that does not designate a transferee in the transaction processing unit 6D, that is, a sales order and a purchase order of the user for the system currency L,
  • the supply volume may be determined based on the change in the value of the asset.
  • the currency control unit 6C may be determined by an algorithm for adjusting a new supply amount of the system currency L by monitoring the “pre-sales amount for borrowing” described later.
  • the currency control unit 6C may update the setting information so as to increase the new supply amount when it is determined that there are many buying orders and the value of the currency L in the system tends to relatively increase.
  • the currency control unit 6C may update the setting information so as to reduce the new supply amount. This makes it possible to stabilize the balance of supply and demand of the system currency L in the information exchange market, and at the same time reduce the volatility of the system currency L, and also between assets outside the system. It is possible to improve the execution speed of transactions.
  • the currency control unit 6C can determine the supply amount based on the transition of the contract price of the trading order of the exchange (exchange function), but in addition to this, the supply amount is adjusted by the following algorithm. It is also good.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an outline of the standard of the new supply amount of the currency L in the system according to the following algorithm.
  • the whole of the pie chart shown in FIG. 13 represents the total amount of in-system currency L distributed in the information exchange market.
  • the colored part of the pie chart shown in FIG. 13 represents the quantity of in-system currency L issued to associates based on the evaluation value.
  • the uncolored part of the pie chart shown in FIG. 13 represents the remaining number of borrowing advance sales volumes described later.
  • the adjustment of the supply of the in-system currency L to try to keep the ratio of the pre-sales amount of borrowing within the predetermined range by the processing of the functional unit of the information distribution server 6 (the in-system currency L issuance amount to associates By performing the adjustment), it is possible to keep the monetary value of the currency L in the system constant while stabilizing the supply and demand balance of the currency L in the system in the information exchange market.
  • the selling order of the intra-system currency L at the exchange is preferentially executed as the selling price (setting of exchange consideration) is lower.
  • the currency control unit 6C determines in advance the selling order of the system currency L at the exchange as setting information and other assets (exchange assets) such as a predetermined legal currency to be exchanged or a specific virtual currency.
  • the system administrator may arbitrarily set the exchange ratio so that a predetermined exchange ratio, for example, a one-to-one relationship (in-system currency L and an exchange asset defined by the system administrator) become equivalent exchange. If the exchange asset to be determined is a specific virtual currency issued by the system administrator, equivalent exchange is desirable).
  • a predetermined exchange ratio for example, a one-to-one relationship (in-system currency L and an exchange asset defined by the system administrator) become equivalent exchange. If the exchange asset to be determined is a specific virtual currency issued by the system administrator, equivalent exchange is desirable).
  • the selling order in (2) is subordinately executed if the selling order from the "Associates" account and the selling price are equal.
  • the currency control unit 6C increases the “amount of borrowing” based on the selling order of (2) and causes the purchase order to be fulfilled.
  • the “amount of borrowing” is the quantity of the system currency L required for the selling order (2) which the currency control unit 6C has made a contract. It can be said that the currency control unit 6C has a function of issuing the in-system currency L infinitely.
  • the "quantity of system currency L additionally issued" by the currency control unit 6C is referred to as "the amount of borrowing".
  • the amount of borrowing By this, when the user sends a buy order to the transaction processing unit 6D at a price (the exchange ratio) or more of (2), the price is always filled with the price of (2) and the user can not purchase the system currency L. There is no condition.
  • the user can exchange the legal currency specified by the system administrator or a specific virtual currency with the in-system currency L at a predetermined exchange rate.
  • the transaction processing unit 6D sells a large amount (infinitely) of the system currency L, but the currency control unit 6C As "".
  • the currency control unit 6C places a buy order of the system currency L of the same amount as the stored “pre-sale amount for borrowing” in the transaction processing unit 6D at the price of (2).
  • the user is preferentially executed from the buying order made by the user.
  • the purchase order from the currency control unit 6C is executed only when the user's sell order exists but the user buy order does not exist, and the "advance pre-sale amount" is reduced and stored. In this way, when a user with an "Associates" account places a sales order, it will always be fulfilled as long as the "advance pre-sales volume" balance remains.
  • the currency control unit 6C determines the in-system currency associated with the "Associates” account when the "pre-sale amount for borrowing” falls below the threshold (Z, described below) set as the setting information. Stop the decrease in value due to the holding period of L (counting of the expiration date).
  • the currency control unit 6C issues the currency so that the “pre-sale amount for borrowing” approaches A% (A is a set value, for example 10%) of the total amount of in-system currency L existing in the information exchange market. Adjust the supply amount by the part 6B.
  • the currency control unit 6C determines that the total amount of in-system currency L in a predetermined period C is “A” when “the advance sales volume for borrowings” rises above A% to B%, ie, demand increases and supply shortages occur.
  • ⁇ B) Adjust the supply amount to increase by%.
  • the condition of increased demand and shortage of supply is the condition that the "pre-sales volume of borrowing" is (A + A ⁇ B)% of the total amount of the currency L in the system.
  • B% is setting information, for example, 50%.
  • Period C is also setting information, and is any period such as one month, two months, or one week.
  • the “rental” should be continued until the “fixed period (for example, D period)” has elapsed. Even if the "pre-sales amount" exceeds the threshold value, it is preferable not to adjust the new supply amount.
  • This period D may be a period until it falls below the set “pre-sales volume”. If the setting of the predetermined period C is short, the influence of the adjustment is large, and if it is long, the influence of the adjustment is small.
  • demand increase which is an increase phase of “pre-sales volume for borrowing,” and “adjustment of new supply volume at the time of supply shortage” are determined and issued based on the evaluation value to the user with “Associates” account.
  • the quantity of the in-system currency L is multiplied by the “factor” derived by the present algorithm to increase and correct the issued quantity of the in-system currency L.
  • the information distribution server device 6 can effectively increase the total amount of distribution in the system currency L distributed in the information exchange market when the demand increases and the supply shortages. The effect of preventing an increase in the unit price of the currency L is achieved.
  • the new supply total adjustment in (8) is calculated retroactively to increase the immediate effect, and in the past, it is added to the amount of system currency L supplied to the account of “Associates”, The currency issuing unit 6B may further immediately supply the adjustment to "Associates". Thereafter, the adjustment of the total new supply amount may be continued.
  • the supply amount adjusted by the present algorithm for adjusting the new supply amount may not be newly provided each time while being reset, and may be continuously overlapped in a multiplicative manner. In this case, the coefficient value to be multiplied by the evaluation value that has been multiplied once beyond the threshold may remain unchanged thereafter, and from that state, if the threshold is further exceeded, an additional correction may be continued.
  • the currency control unit 6C determines that the total amount of in-system currency L in a predetermined period E is “A” when the “pre-sales volume for borrowing” falls below A% to D%, ie, demand declines and oversupply.
  • X D) Adjust the supply to reduce%.
  • the decrease in demand and the excess supply state are states in which the “pre-sales volume of borrowing” is (A ⁇ A ⁇ D)% of the total amount of the currency L in the system.
  • D% is setting information, for example, 50%.
  • Period E is also setting information, and is any period such as one month, two months, or one week.
  • the “fixed period” may be a period until it exceeds the set “pre-sale amount of borrowing”.
  • the setting of the predetermined period E is short, the influence of adjustment will be large, and if it is long, the influence of adjustment will become small.
  • demand decrease which is a decrease phase of “pre-sales volume for borrowing”, and “adjustment of new supply amount” at oversupply time are determined and issued based on the evaluation value to the user with “Associates” account.
  • the quantity of the in-system currency L is multiplied by the “factor” derived by this algorithm to reduce and correct the issued quantity of the in-system currency L.
  • the currency control unit 6C receives the update of the setting information from the terminal device used by the system administrator according to the state of the information exchange market. (11) The timing at which supply adjustment at the time of demand decrease is made the threshold Z of the "pre-sales volume for borrowing" in (6), and the currency control unit 6C determines the in-system currency associated with the user of Measures should be taken to stop the decrease in value (counting of the expiration date) due to the holding period of L. When the demand for the intra-system currency L increases and the “pre-sales volume of borrowing” reaches the value of A, the currency control unit 6C resumes the counting of the expiration date that has been stopped.
  • the currency control unit 6C extends the expiration date of the currency ID linked to the account ID of "associates" by a value obtained by advancing one day during the execution period of the above measure. Update and return to the original processing when the action is completed.
  • the urgent treatment is carried out as follows. (12) If there is a sharp decline in demand, and the "pre-sales volume of borrowing" becomes close to 0 (zero) or 0 within a predetermined range, the currency control unit 6C limits the above mentioned “basic” Raise the tax rate in the “income” to a predetermined rate.
  • the predetermined rate is also setting information, and can be changed by updating. This substantially increases the consumption of the system currency L throughout the one or more information exchange markets, and increases the free benefit amount to the user having the "individual" account of the system currency L, It can support the consumption of users with "personal” accounts. In addition, when this emergency process is performed, it is good to make this known to the user's terminal device 7.
  • the distribution state of the in-system currency L including “the advance amount of borrowing” in the information exchange market it is preferable to disclose to the user the distribution state of the in-system currency L including “the advance amount of borrowing” in the information exchange market.
  • the user can predict the execution timing of the emergency process. Therefore, it is possible to expect rush consumption by the user with the "business operator" account immediately before implementation (immediately before tax increase), thereby increasing demand and consequently delaying urgent processing or performing no urgent processing. It can be expected to be effective.
  • Currency control unit 6C also determines the unit price of currency L in the system (in other goods or services per unit in “normal time” in which one or more of the above-mentioned “pre-sales volume of borrowings” is present in transaction processing unit 6D. Provision and exchange value with other assets such as legal currency can be maintained at a predetermined level (predetermined exchange ratio predetermined as setting information).
  • predetermined level predetermined exchange ratio predetermined as setting information.
  • “emergency” (“pre-sales volume” is “0”), such as a sharp decline in demand at an exception such as economic recession in the information exchange market or monetary policy failure. Even in the situation where the above-mentioned emergency processing is performed), the unit price at the exchange of the currency L in the system is unlikely to decrease.
  • the user may not sell the system currency L cheaply. This is because the demand of the system currency L recovers to the original demand (the advance sales volume for borrowing becomes 1 or more) with the decrease of the total amount of distribution.
  • the user may keep standing at the price of the “normal” exchange asset (the exchange ratio predetermined by the currency control unit 6C, for example, 1 to 1).
  • a user with an "Associates” account may set a low exchange ratio, for example, 1 to 0.9, and transmit a sell order only when he / she wants exchange assets soon.
  • the currency control unit 6C causes, in advance, the terminal device used by the system administrator in advance when the “pre-sales volume for borrowing” becomes 0 (zero) or close to 0. You may accept a buy order at a set order price.
  • the system currency L temporarily sold out by the system administrator from the user of the account of "Associates" is temporarily purchased.
  • the price of the buy order may be the same as the price of the "normal” buy order, or if the price of the currency L in the system is allowed to fall, the "average" buy order is acceptable. The price may be lower than the price.
  • the currency control unit 6C receives the sale of the system currency L purchased from the terminal device used by the system administrator.
  • the selling price at this time may be the purchased amount or a price to be usually sold (for example, one-to-one exchange ratio predetermined by the currency control unit 6C).
  • the system administrator can buy and support the price so that it does not fall below the system administrator's decline allowable price, and it is possible to prevent the decline in the trading price of the system currency L in the system.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B and the currency control unit 6C autonomously perform selling order (newly generating and selling, or selling for holding) of the currency L in the system based on the supply-demand gap and buying order (newly generated sales Repurchase or recover the shortfall in demand).
  • the transaction processing unit 6D can settle the user's purchase order for the system currency L without giving stress to the user.
  • the sale of the in-system currency L by a user having an "Associates" account is also settled without stress in peacetime. Since the user only has to wait for a while for an emergency situation, the effect of reducing the transaction stress of the user as in a conventional exchange can be expected.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B can easily calculate the amount of the in-system currency L that is insufficient or surplus by monitoring the “advance sales volume of borrowing”. become. Therefore, it is expected that the system administrator and the user can easily recognize the basis of the adjustment.
  • the currency control unit 6C can adjust the new supply amount without depending on the adjustment algorithm of the new supply amount of the currency L in the system by monitoring the above-mentioned "advance pre-sale amount of borrowing". For example, based on the set values P, Q, R stored in the storage unit 61 or 63, the currency control unit 6C increases or decreases the quantity for the total circulation quantity of the currency L in the system as the adjustment supply quantity. . P is a “fair price”, Q is a price fluctuation upper limit, and R is a fluctuation lower limit. Both are setting information and can be changed. With regard to the set values Q and R, it is also possible to make stepwise adjustment supply using thresholds in a plurality of stages.
  • the difference between the set value R and the appropriate price P be smaller than the difference between the set value Q and the appropriate price P.
  • the adjustment supply by the adjustment supply amount y (y ') is performed by the currency issuing unit 6B as follows.
  • the currency control unit 6C calculates the distribution of the adjustment supply amount from the issue amount (evaluation supply amount) based on the evaluation value for each account of "associates".
  • the currency control unit 6C distributes the adjusted supply amount according to the ratio of the issue amount of each account of "Associates" to the total issue amount.
  • the base evaluation supply amount may be calculated using the latest evaluation supply amount when increasing it and using the evaluation supply amount determined at the next timing when decreasing. In the case of increasing or decreasing, the estimated supply amount determined at the next timing may be used.
  • the currency control unit 6C may calculate the distribution of the adjustment supply according to the ratio to the whole of the evaluation value itself instead of the evaluation supply amount for each account of "Associates". There are various conceivable methods of calculating the allocation, in order to be distributed equally to the users having the "Associates" account as much as possible.
  • the first consumption price set by the system administrator or the like is set and updated by obtaining an optimum solution for each of the subject groups.
  • the consumption amount in the system L usage of the currency L in each entity group according to the number of users active in each entity group, the activity level of content distribution, and purchasing power in the real economy, etc. makes a difference.
  • the currency control unit 6C corrects the evaluation value by reflecting the difference.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a method of correcting the evaluation value according to the subject group. Based on the corrected evaluation value, the currency issuing unit 6B issues the in-system currency L to the "Associates" account.
  • the value of “evaluation” (the value moved between users due to the movement between users of information) becomes larger or smaller depending on the purchasing power of the agents to which the user belongs, and the agents relating to the transition of the times It should be done because it fluctuates by fluctuation of purchasing power.
  • the economic value of goods or services, etc. for each nation that is one of the groups of actors differs from nation to nation.
  • the control of generation, distribution, etc. must be considered with respect to purchasing power parity. You must.
  • the algorithm described here is a means to solve these problems.
  • the group of subjects means attribute information stored in the storage unit 61 of (the user having the account with) “associates”, “business person”, “individual” and the like who use the information exchange market, A “area” in which “area attribute” which is one of the attribute information stored in the storage unit 61 and which is a name summarized in a predetermined range according to setting information stored in the storage unit 61 in advance It is the designation of "attribute subject group”.
  • “Subject groups” can be defined in any way, such as municipality, prefectures, states, regions, countries, economic zones, or continents, but in this case they will be described assuming "state”. .
  • “subject group” is a collection of accounts having the same regional attribute, and refers to similar groups of culture, language, purchasing power parity, taxation, and the like. In other words, "subjects” usually represent a nation.
  • the currency control unit 6C determines the consumption amount of the intra-system currency L for which the evaluation total amount of the user (associates) in each of the principal groups is determined (consumed) in the first consumption activity of the principal groups.
  • the currency issuing unit 6B issues the in-system currency L using the purchasing power reflection evaluation value after this correction.
  • the information distribution server device 6 causes the currency issuing unit 6B to issue the in-system currency L to the account of “Associates” based on the purchasing power reflection evaluation value.
  • efficient inter-system currency L communication is realized that is not affected by economic disparities, such as differences in purchasing power parities, and efficient information is not affected by economic disparities of the main bodies.
  • the evaluation purchasing power multiple calculated as described above is an existence such as purchasing power parity, and also serves as an index representing the difference in purchasing power among the groups of subjects.
  • the evaluation function as the setting information updated by the system administrator eliminates the need for the system administrator and the user to consider the difference between the subject groups, and the area with purchasing power difference A reasonable evaluation value is calculated for the user who has an "Associates" account among them, and it becomes possible to eliminate the impediment factor of the information distribution in the information exchange market, and at the same time, the use of the user is promoted and the information distribution is made. Activate.
  • the evaluation function as setting information for determining the issued quantity of the in-system currency L updated by the system administrator by this and the control of the issued amount of the in-system currency L by the above-mentioned "new supply total amount adjustment algorithm"
  • the value as the evaluation (purchasing power reflection evaluation value) that reflects the purchasing power by users of other accounts in the market against the free content provided free of charge by the user with the “Associates” account is the system currency L
  • the issue will be given to the account of "Associates" who are the assessors through issuance, and information distribution will be popular, and the effect of activating the information exchange market can be expected.
  • the system internal currency L is appropriately supplied to each entity group by reflecting the entities of the individual entity groups.
  • the currency control unit 6C uses the evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor calculated here to correct for the price difference resulting from the difference in purchasing power for different subject groups, and for the disparity between the subject groups similar to the national economic disparity in the real economy. It is also possible to realize the measures.
  • the paid content provided from the “Associates” account in a group of subjects having a relatively low rating purchasing power ratio has a higher content than the paid content in a group of subjects having a relatively high rating purchasing power ratio (for example, Japan). Even, price competitiveness is high. This may reduce the willingness to provide paid content in a group of subjects having a relatively high evaluation purchasing power multiple. For example, even if Japanese Associates try to provide valuable paid content to other users such as "individual” by presenting the exchange value (price) defined by itself (determining the quantity of the currency L in the system) There is a possibility that similar paid contents having value as equivalent or inexpensive edition can be provided with exceptional exchange value from Associates of India.
  • the information distribution server device 6 in the present embodiment has a function of increasing the exchange price (the second consumption price for the second consumption activity) of the system currency L necessary for acquiring the paid content by the function of the currency control unit 6C. May be implemented.
  • the user of the account of “business person” or “individual” in the subject group B (subject group having a relatively high evaluation purchasing power multiple) has a subject group A (subject group having a relatively low evaluation purchasing power multiple). It may be implemented when it is going to acquire the paid contents sent out in.
  • a price according to the ratio of the evaluation purchasing power multiple among the subject groups may be presented to the user of the account of the “business company” or the “individual” of the subject group B.
  • Exchange price presented Exchange price of paid content arbitrarily set by "Associates” of subject group A ⁇ (evaluation purchasing power multiple of subject group B / evaluation purchasing power multiple of subject group A) If the user of Entity B's "Business Operator” or “Individual” purchases paid content sent from the user of Entity A's "Associates” at the exchange price presented, the user of Entity B will pay The intra-system currency L corresponding to the exchange price is acquired by the user of the “associates” of the group of entities A.
  • the exchange price of paid content that "Associates" of subject group A intends to sell is a user of the account of "business person” or “individual” in subject group C whose evaluation purchasing power multiple is lower than that of subject group A or subject group A Are sold at the stated exchange price.
  • users of accounts of “business person” or “individual” in the subject group B whose evaluation purchasing power multiple is higher than the subject group A are sold at the corrected exchange price that reflects the high purchasing power. Ru.
  • the income of the "associates" account in the subject group A increases, and the exchange price of the paid content in the subject group B can not be unduly depressed.
  • the scope of the group of entities to which the same evaluation purchasing power multiple factor is applied is not limited to the state, but may be any region where economic conditions such as prices are considered to be similar.
  • the information distribution server device 6 in the present embodiment consumes the amount of consumption of the system currency L necessary for transmission of subordinate information between different subject groups by the function of the currency control unit 6C You may implement measures to increase). For example, the first consumption price presented to the user of the account of “business person” or “individual” in the group of subjects A having relatively low evaluation purchase power multiple factor in the above example is higher than The first consumption price determined in the subject group B having a high evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor is presented as it is. On the other hand, with respect to the first consumption price presented to the user of the account of the “business operator” or “individual” in the group of subjects B whose evaluation purchasing power multiple is higher than others, Measures may be taken.
  • the currency control unit 6C corrects the consumption amount for the first consumption activity in the subject group A with respect to the account of the “business operator” or the “individual” of the subject group B according to the ratio of the evaluation purchase power ratio of the two.
  • the first consumption price presented to the user of the "business" or "individual” account of the subject group B, who intends to carry out the first consumption activity in the subject group A is The price reflects the difference.
  • the user of the subject group B performs the first consumption activity in the activity area of the subject group A (a part of the area in which the subject group A is active in the information exchange market)
  • the first factor on which the difference in evaluation purchasing power ratio is reflected The intra-system currency L corresponding to the consumption price may disappear from the information exchange market.
  • the system internal currency L may be used as the source of benefit for the basic income as much as the original first consumption price.
  • the object of payment may be limited to the “individual” account in the subject group A, and the purchasing power of the subject group A having a relatively low evaluation purchasing power multiple may be increased.
  • the system currency L for the increased amount is provided to the "personal" account of the entity group A, and if not adopted, the entire amount is treated as the first consumption amount of the entity group B It is to be done. That is, the correction process for the first consumption price reflecting the evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor including the basic income process can also be expected to have the effect of balancing the purchasing power difference between the subject groups.
  • the function of the currency control unit 6C can strongly generate the market competition principle of the first consumption activity by the user of the "business operator" or the "individual” account belonging to the groups of agents having different evaluation purchasing power multiples. it can. As a result, the effect of activating the consumption activity in the information exchange market can be exhibited, and further, the effect of correcting the impediment factor of the economic activity due to the difference in purchasing power among different subject groups can also be expected.
  • the value interlocking unit 6E exhibits a function of accepting exchange between the system internal currency L held by the user having the “Associates” account and the digital asset distributed outside the system.
  • the digital asset is, for example, a specific virtual currency equivalent to a foreign currency with respect to the system currency L, and is issued by a system administrator such as ICO. Users with "Associates" accounts need to obtain their own wallet address on the blockchain network managed by the system administrator in order to own this particular virtual currency.
  • FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of an intra-system currency exchange procedure executed by the value interlocking unit 6E.
  • the value interlocking unit 6E receives the quantity of the system currency L to be exchanged among the system currency L possessed by the user having the “Associates” account (step S1401).
  • the value interlocking unit 6E makes a exchange request to the transaction processing unit 6D so as to exchange the accepted quantity of currency L in the system for a specific virtual currency (step S1402).
  • the transaction processing unit 6D functions as an exchange in the information exchange market, and enables exchange for a non-system asset (for example, a specific virtual currency) as one of the intra-system currency L transactions.
  • a non-system asset for example, a specific virtual currency
  • the information of the specific virtual currency acquired by the exchange has an “Associates” account that sold the system currency L. Written to the user's wallet address.
  • the exchange rate between the intra-system currency L and the specific virtual currency is a fixed rate (for example, one to one).
  • the exchange rate between the system currency L and the specific virtual currency is exchanged by interlocking the processing of the new supply adjustment algorithm by monitoring the “pre-sales volume of borrowing” described above and the processing by the value interlocking unit 6E. Can be fixed by any setting by the system administrator.
  • the control unit 60 subtracts the quantity of the system currency L owned by the user by the exchanged quantity.
  • the in-system currency management table is updated to do this (step S1403).
  • the value interlocking unit 6E makes it possible to exchange the value between the system currency L and a specific virtual currency, and substitutes the function of storing the value of the system currency L with a specific virtual currency. Will be able to Also, the system currency L and the specific virtual currency can be integrated to provide the function of the currency.
  • constant exchange of system currency L with a specific virtual currency makes it possible to set the value of system currency L to a specific virtual currency, thereby making the virtual currency economic Will be able to generate Furthermore, the user who holds a specific virtual currency is held by the above-described function of the transaction processing unit 6D based on the above-described algorithm for monitoring the "pre-sale amount for borrowing" and adjusting the new supply amount of the currency L in the system. It is possible to exchange a specific virtual currency to the intrasystem currency L at any time and in any quantity.
  • the value interlocking unit 6E exerts a function of generating a basis of economic value for a specific virtual currency.
  • a currency value exchange medium, that is, currency L in the system
  • a specific virtual currency based on the economic value of the system currency L on the block chain network.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the price, the new supply amount and circulation amount of the in-system currency L, and the unit price of the in-system currency L.
  • the first consumption price (price) defined for each entity group by updating setting information by the administrator terminal etc. used by the system administrator is the relative balance of the first consumption price, the unit price of the system currency L, and information exchange It serves as a basis for determining the total amount of in-system currency L distributed to the market. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, when the first consumption price (price) defined for each group of entities rises, the amount of new supply and the amount of circulation of the currency L in the system increase, and the unit price of the currency L in the system accordingly Has the aspect of falling.
  • the increase and decrease of the first consumption price described above can be controlled by updating the setting information by the system administrator.
  • the control unit 60 may correct the evaluation value calculated by the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 based on the evaluation correction algorithm described below.
  • the entire configuration of the system including the information distribution server device 6 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • the calculation of the evaluation value which is the purpose of the evaluation correction described here, is equivalent to balancing of how to distribute the quantity to be issued for each association of the currency L in the system as described above. is there.
  • the evaluation value is not an absolute value but quantification of evaluation as a relative value between free content and associates.
  • the act of quantifying the balance of the free values transferred among the users is the calculation of the evaluation value.
  • the evaluation correction algorithm described later is processing of how to correct the evaluation value as the relative value and how to balance. That is, although the evaluation value is to be corrected, for example, just because the evaluation value is 10 times as a result, the issued quantity of the system currency L is not 10 times. Another process is used to determine the issue quantity of the in-system currency L.
  • the evaluation correction algorithm 1 is a process of calculating the tendency of a free content acquisition act for a predetermined period by a user having an “enterprise” or “individual” account, and performing correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value based on the calculation result and setting information It is.
  • the users who acquire the free content that is, the users having the "business” or “individual” account) each acquire free content based on their tastes and preferences. Therefore, bias is likely to occur in categories of free content that can be easily obtained by a certain user, or in the originator's associates.
  • control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 can change (multiply) the correction magnification for the evaluation, for example, by reflecting the difference in the acquisition rate for each category to which the free content belongs. Further, the control unit 60 may change (multiply) the correction magnification for the evaluation by reflecting the difference in the acquisition rate for each association to which the content belongs.
  • the control unit 60 can calculate the correction magnification with respect to the user's evaluation, for example, by the processes (1-1) to (1-6) shown below.
  • the control unit 60 calculates the per cent browsing ratio per category according to the following arithmetic expression each time the user having the “business person” or “individual” account acquires free content.
  • Reading rate for each category reading amount for each category / total reading amount for all categories
  • the number of browsing times of content belonging to a category A to G of a user is A50 times, B100 times, B0 times, C0 times, D1500 times, E500 times , F1500 times and G5000 times
  • the total number of browsing times for all contents is 8650 times, so the browsing rates for each category are A 0.6%, B 1.2%, C 0.0%, D 17.3. %, E5.8%, F17.3%, G57.8%.
  • a represents an added value when all free content of the same category is obtained
  • b represents an added value when obtained free content of a category that has never been obtained.
  • the addition values for the above categories A to G are A0.99, B0.99, C1.00, D0.83, E0.94, F0.83, respectively. It becomes G0.42.
  • the addition value when the user acquires the free content of category C is a value higher than that of category G, which has a high acquisition frequency.
  • (1-3) Browsing Ratio for Each Associate The control unit 60 calculates the browsing ratio for each Associate according to the following arithmetic expression each time a user having an account of “business person” or “individual” acquires free content.
  • Reading rate for each associate reading amount for each associate / total reading amount for all associates
  • the number of times for viewing a free content of associates A to G by a user is A50 times, B100 times, B0 times, C0 times, D1500 times, E500 times , F1500 times and G5000 times
  • the total number of browsing times is 8650 times
  • the browsing rates for each associate are A 0.6%, B 1.2%, C 0.0%, D 17.3%, E5 respectively .8%, F 17.3%, G 57.8%.
  • the control unit 60 calculates an addition value according to the browsing ratio calculated in (1-3).
  • the addition value y ′ to be added to the number of browsing times for each associate is calculated by the following equation.
  • y ' a' + (1-browsing rate of each associate) x b '
  • a ' represents the added value when all the free content transmitted by the same Associates has been acquired
  • b' represents the added value when the free content transmitted by the Associates that has never been acquired has been acquired.
  • the addition values to the above associates A to G are A 0.99, B 0.99, C 1.00, D 0.83, E 0.94, F 0. 83, G 0.42.
  • the addition value when the user acquires the free content of Associates C is a higher value than Associates G, which has a high acquisition frequency.
  • y is an added value according to the browsing ratio for each category calculated in (1-2) above
  • y ' is an addition according to the browsing ratio for each associate calculated in (1-4) above It is a value.
  • the evaluation correction algorithm 2 is processing for performing correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value based on the acquisition rate of free content by the user having the “business person” or “individual” account, and the setting information. From the terminal operation state of the user who browses or acquires the free content (ie, the user having the “business person” or “individual” account), the information distribution server device 6 allows the user to handle all free content from the beginning to the end A process may be added to determine (to what extent) the eye has passed. For example, free content such as articles displayed on the display unit 73 of the user's terminal device 7 can not all be browsed unless the screen is scrolled in most cases, and there are a plurality of pages. May not be able to view everything without updating the screen.
  • the information distribution server device 6 determines how the user performed the above-mentioned process, for example, when performing all the processes, 100 points, 50% or more of the processes are performed.
  • the evaluation based on the points may be corrected by adding points, such as 30 points when 50 points or 30% or more of the stroke is performed, or 0 points when the performed stroke is less than 30%.
  • the measure of multiplying the amount of information of free content may be multiplied by a factor to evaluate Good.
  • the information distribution is larger than the amount of information, and the content browsed to the user is highly evaluated by the information distribution server device 6, and the quality and the amount of free content transmitted by Associates are The user's willingness to view and improve the free content will be increased, and the information exchange market will be activated.
  • the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 calculates a correction magnification by which the time evaluation value calculated in step S203 is multiplied, for example, by the following arithmetic expression.
  • Correction magnification (acquisition rate-lower acquisition rate) / (100-lower acquisition rate)
  • an acquisition rate of 100% and a lower limit acquisition rate are defined in advance for each free content.
  • the acquisition rate of free content by the user is calculated as a ratio (%) to the 100% acquisition rate.
  • the content to be evaluated is a moving image having a viewing time of 2 minutes
  • a state where the acquisition rate is 100% is defined as the user viewing the moving image for 2 minutes. If the user views the video for one minute, the acquisition rate is calculated as 50%.
  • the moving image was taken as an example to explain the specific calculation method of the correction magnification, but the content such as the document other than the moving image, music, and images also has 100% acquisition rate, lower acquisition rate and
  • the correction magnification can be calculated by the same calculation method by defining.
  • correction magnification a x (x-p) x (x-p)
  • x an acquisition rate
  • p a lower limit acquisition rate
  • a a change rate calculated by 1 / ((1-p) ⁇ (1-p)).
  • the correction magnification approaches 1 as the acquisition rate approaches 100%.
  • the latter is differentiated so that the evaluation is higher between the content that had 60 viewings per second and the content that had one viewing for 60 seconds. It is possible to make an evaluation and a more appropriate evaluation is possible.
  • the upper limit value of the correction magnification is 1 in both of the above-described arithmetic expressions, the upper limit value of the correction magnification is not limited to 1 and may be set as appropriate.
  • Evaluation correction algorithm 3 is processing for performing correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value based on setting information set by a user having an account of “business operator” or “individual”. In addition to the evaluation balance setting based on the basic setting information by the system administrator, weighting (evaluation balance) correction of the degree of evaluation may be performed by the user's arbitrary setting. About the basic balance setting of the evaluation based on the evaluation value that determines the balance of the issue amount of the currency L in the system to the "Associates" account, the processing to make this reflect the user's intention is the evaluation correction Algorithm 3.
  • a user having an account of “business person” or “individual” may be able to arbitrarily correct the evaluation balance for his free content acquisition behavior, and the information distribution server device 6 is further corrected It may be possible to execute a measure that multiplies the evaluation value calculated by the information distribution server device 6 by the evaluation balance. In this way, the information distribution server device 6 can derive an evaluation value that reflects the user's intention (arbitrarily corrects the evaluation balance), and conventionally, the information distribution server device 6 conventionally receives an option from the system administrator.
  • the correction of the evaluation balance is a relative weight adjustment with other categories of each category to which the free content belongs.
  • the evaluation correction arbitrarily performed by the user may be received using a user interface such as an equalizer that adjusts the sound of music so that an intuitive operation can be performed.
  • the information distribution server device 6 performs this in the median calculation process. It may be determined that the correction is not performed by including the, and the evaluation may reflect "how the user thinks of the balance of the evaluation" to the last. That is, the evaluation correction performed by the user mentioned here is not an absolute one but how to correct the relative balance.
  • the information distribution server device 6 always receives votes by the users having accounts other than "Associates" (any evaluation correction described above), every predetermined period determined in advance by the system administrator.
  • For the basic balance setting of evaluation processing of reflecting the result (average value) of the votes on the setting information of the information distribution server device 6 may be performed.
  • the user's vote may not be reset even after the setting information update processing is performed, and the user may be able to always update the basic balance of the evaluation set in the vote.
  • the information distribution server device 6 may update the setting information based on the vote every predetermined period.
  • the change width may be set to, for example, a half of the change amount voted, in order to prevent a change in the basic balance of rapid evaluation.
  • the upper end value and the lower end value may be set in advance by the system administrator. Furthermore, weighting may be performed on votes for each user. In this case, weighting may be performed for each user based on the user's information exchange market usage condition, and voting may be multiplied by a coefficient according to the weight. .
  • the information distribution server device 6 stores the character string of the search word input by the user, derives the degree of interest in the free content of the user, and based on the derived degree of interest
  • the degree of evaluation of categories to which the related free content belongs eg, domestic political category, domestic economic category, international technology category, domestic music category, etc.
  • the change in the degree of evaluation based on the degree of interest performed by the information distribution server device 6 may be performed for each subject group.
  • the information distribution server device 6 calculates the average value of the user's evaluation balance (subject group evaluation balance) for each subject group to which the user belongs, with respect to the user's own evaluation balance, The distribution server device 6 may add processing to add and correct the evaluation value calculated for the associates and the free content belonging to the subject group based on the calculated subject group evaluation balance. . Further, the information distribution server device 6 may disclose to the associates in real time about the subject group evaluation balance and the degree of interest.
  • the information distribution server device 6 can distribute and issue the balance of the in-system currency L to the associates based on the user's evaluation in a balance closer to the actual evaluation, and It is possible to make it possible to make evaluations that reflect differences in evaluation tendency (characteristics, for example, national character etc.), and to encourage the provision of free content that reflects changes in the user's degree of interest (by search strings) As a result, the information exchange market can be activated, the convenience of the user can be enhanced, and the intervention and effort of the system administrator can be reduced.
  • the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 receives, for example, a change in correction magnification for evaluation for each category of free content from a user having an account of “business operator” or “individual”.
  • the evaluation value for the free content is increased or decreased based on the correction magnification of.
  • the correction magnification after change may be totaled for each subject group, and the correction magnification for each category may be changed for each subject group based on the tabulation result. In this case, based on the post-change correction magnification, correction is performed to increase or decrease the evaluation value of the free content belonging to each category for each subject group.
  • a condition may be imposed that the sum of the correction magnifications for each category does not increase or decrease before and after the change. Further, the upper limit value and / or the lower limit value may be set in advance with respect to the correction magnification that accepts the change.
  • the amount of operation of the user may be reduced by dividing the categories into the large classification and the small classification, and collectively accepting the change of the correction magnification for each category for each large classification and / or each small classification.
  • the number of browsing times, browsing time, and browser evaluation corrected by the evaluation correction algorithms 1 to 3 may be aggregated and used.
  • the browsing frequency evaluation value the browsing frequency evaluation value is calculated with reference to how many users browsed the free content in a predetermined period. At this time, the number of browsing times corrected by the evaluation correction algorithms 1 to 3 is counted.
  • Number of browsing evaluation value number of browsing x a + number of browsing x a 'x (number of browsing / total number of browsing) + a "
  • the setting value a the number of viewing people's magnification a ': the number of viewing people multiple in the case of evaluation by the ratio to the total number of viewings a
  • the evaluation value for the highest number of viewing people (ii)
  • the browsing time evaluation value is calculated by referring to how many seconds the free content has been browsed, and at this time, the browsing times corrected by the evaluation correction algorithms 1 to 3 are totaled.
  • Reading time evaluation value reading time x b + reading time x b 'x (reading time / total reading time) + b "
  • Viewer evaluation value is free for a predetermined period
  • the viewer evaluation value is calculated with reference to the number of evaluations obtained by the content (for example, total number of likes-total number of different likes) and the total number of evaluations of the five-level evaluation. Add up the rated visitor ratings.
  • Viewer rating value viewer rating x c + viewer rating x c 'x (viewer rating / total viewer rating) + c "
  • V Calculate the sum of the evaluation values for the free content calculated in (i) to (iv) above, and obtain the "evaluation value of each free content”.
  • the evaluation correction algorithm 4 is a process for improving the quality of free contents transmitted by associates in the information exchange market.
  • Associates may also be able to make arbitrary assessments of free content that is originated by other associates in the same group of entities. For example, when browsing free content as an associate, the relevant associate is made to be able to evaluate the evaluation on the quality of the browsed free content by an arbitrary evaluation method such as, for example, 33. Moreover, you may correct
  • the evaluation after correction for the evaluated free content may be evaluated as the upper limit or lower limit value.
  • a correction is made to weight evaluation evaluations and evaluation Associates in the same entity group, that is, evaluation values serving as the basis for determining the quantity for which the system currency L is issued, in each association.
  • the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 performs correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value, for example, based on the evaluation behavior of the free content by the user having the "Associates" account and the setting information.
  • the correction by the evaluation correction algorithm 4 is for fake news, stealing of other contents, appearance of unappreciable Associates, and support to valuable Associates in order to improve the quality of free contents and the information exchange market. It is an object.
  • the evaluation algorithm 4 is composed of the following (element 1) to (element 3).
  • (Element 3) is an active evaluation. In other words, it evaluates how much the Associates have actively evaluated other Associates. Associates with a large amount of active evaluations (checking and evaluation of free content) can be corrected to increase the evaluation value. In other words, Associates who send out free content, are evaluated, and evaluate other people's free content will increase their income.
  • an evaluation method unique to Associates is adopted, for example, a 5-step evaluation of 1-5.
  • the evaluation correction algorithm 4 the following processing is performed in order to prevent a bias in evaluation due to a difference in evaluation standard for each associate.
  • the control unit 60 calculates the average value of the evaluation by the user of the selected "associates", and calculates the ratio to the central value of the evaluation.
  • the average value of the evaluation of the contents A to D calculated by the control unit 60 is 3.75, and the ratio to the central value of the evaluation (3 in this example) is 0.8.
  • the control unit 60 corrects the evaluation as follows by multiplying the calculated ratio by the original evaluation.
  • Content A Evaluation 4
  • Content B Evaluation 1
  • Content C Rating 3.2
  • Content D Evaluation 4 It becomes.
  • the lower limit is set for the evaluation of the content B in which the value multiplied by the ratio is less than the lower limit (1 in the above example).
  • the value multiplied by the ratio exceeds the upper limit (5 in the above example), and the upper limit is set.
  • control unit 60 tabulates the evaluation after correction for each free content, and calculates an evaluated average value in a predetermined period.
  • the control unit 60 also performs correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value for each free content, based on the calculation result and the setting information.
  • Associates are ranked for each subject group, and correction is performed to increase or decrease the evaluation value of Associates based on the determined ranking.
  • the Associates are ranked for each subject group, and correction is made to increase or decrease the Associates rating based on the determined ranking.
  • the evaluation values for the free content and the associates are calculated (or calculated) for each subject group, but in the second embodiment
  • the evaluation correction algorithm shown is further from "Reflect the difference in evaluation balance among the groups of subjects (for example, the difference in national character)” "Reflect the difference in evaluation balance between users (for example, the difference in tastes of interests)” "Reflect the difference in the evaluation balance at different times (for example, the degree of change in interest)” "Reflect the difference in the evaluation state of each content (for example, the difference in the content)”
  • the evaluation value is corrected by performing an evaluation process that "reduces the intervention of the intention of the system administrator and relatively reflects the intention of the user".
  • the above-mentioned process differs in the content of the content itself “the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 2", transition of interest change "the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 3", the difference in the information acquisition tendency of the information acquisition user "the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 1), differences in characteristics among subject groups “the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 3", superiority or inferiority of information transmission quality for each free content or each association evaluated by associates "the above evaluation correction algorithm 4", and system management A correction is added to the evaluation value by performing a democratic evaluation process "the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 3" which reduces the user's intention intervention and reflects the user's intention relatively largely.
  • the amount of value transferred from a user with an "Associates" account to a user with an "Operator” or “Individual” account is rationalized with a more rational basis (more actual)
  • the evaluation value can be calculated, and furthermore, the system currency L can be issued fairly and efficiently based on the evaluation value to the associate who is the value provider.
  • the information exchange market can be activated.
  • the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment will be described below.
  • the function of the currency issuing unit 6B of the information distribution server device 6 in the first embodiment will be described in another expression.
  • the "information exchange market” in the first embodiment is referred to as “market place” in the third embodiment, and is referred to as "information providing site” in the fourth embodiment, and is referred to as “virtual market” in the fifth embodiment.
  • "in-system currency L" in the first embodiment is referred to as "point” in the third and fourth embodiments, and is referred to as “virtual currency” in the fifth embodiment.
  • “Associates” in the first embodiment is referred to as “affiliated store” in the third embodiment, “first user” in the fourth embodiment, and “business operator” in the third embodiment. It is referred to as “company member”, and “company” as the “second user” in the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the same meaning and different embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a view for explaining an outline of a service by the point management system S1 of the one embodiment of the privilege management system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration of the point management system S1.
  • an outline of the point management system S1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.
  • the "point" in this specification is a kind of the benefit which has the value which can be exchanged with information, utilization space, or goods.
  • points are illustrated as benefits, but the benefits may be intangibles other than points.
  • the “information” in the present specification is an intangible substance input from a user interface that can be converted to data that can be communicated between a terminal and a server, or an intangible substance output to a user interface.
  • the “information” is, for example, characters, sounds, images, moving images, data files, contents, applications, smells, or operations, or a combination of two or more of them.
  • the point management system S1 allows a user to transmit and receive data to / from a server on a network using a user interface of a communicable terminal such as a PC, a tablet, a mobile phone, a television, a car navigation, a home game machine, or a robot.
  • a communicable terminal such as a PC, a tablet, a mobile phone, a television, a car navigation, a home game machine, or a robot.
  • a market place realized by a website, web application, SNS, metaverse, software, or cloud computing etc. by which information can be exchanged among users.
  • a market place realized by a website, web application, SNS, metaverse, software, or cloud computing etc.
  • the user interface of the terminal is, for example, various data input / output devices such as a display, a speaker, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch pad, a touch panel, a microphone, a camera, a controller, a remote controller, a switch, a glove, a suit, shoes, and goggles.
  • various data input / output devices such as a display, a speaker, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch pad, a touch panel, a microphone, a camera, a controller, a remote controller, a switch, a glove, a suit, shoes, and goggles.
  • the marketplace includes a one or more servers that store for example information, the information provider stores the information in a server on the marketplace via the information providing terminal 1, information user information use terminal 2 You can get information from the server on the marketplace via.
  • an information provider who provides information adjiliated store in FIG. 17
  • an information user who uses information a company member in FIG. 17
  • Information exchange is realized by using the point management server 3 managed by the operator of the point management system S1.
  • the information provider can provide information in the marketplace, for example, by depositing money to the operator.
  • Informants include, for example, agents that support job changes, professionals such as lawyers, patent attorneys, and accountants who advise on legal matters, consultants, and brokers such as real estate agents, marriage counselors, housekeepers introducers, and care managers, etc. And so on.
  • the information provider transmits information to the point management server 3 using the information providing terminal 1 shown in FIG. 18 so that information that the information user can access using the information using terminal 2 can be provided.
  • An information user is an individual, an individual business owner, a corporation, or an organization that utilizes information provided by the information provider for his / her business or behavior.
  • the information user can acquire the information provided from the information provision terminal 1 by accessing the point management server 3 using the information use terminal 2 shown in FIG.
  • the behavior of the information provider is monitored, and various incentives are provided according to the content of the information provider's action.
  • the following incentives are provided.
  • Based on the content and amount of information provided by the information provider available in the marketplace Points are given and displayed by the information provider in the marketplace according to the amount of points given to the information provider within a predetermined evaluation period Rank is determined to be. Then, the operator is provided incentives based on the determined ranking and the amount of commissions transferred to the information users and paid to the operator, and the incentives provided can be used as
  • the points that can be used in the marketplace are not acquired by the affiliated store by paying the price, but are granted based on the result of the point management server 3 evaluating the behavior in the marketplace of the affiliated store.
  • the point management system S1 is awarded points based on the quality and / or amount of information provided in the marketplace.
  • points have been awarded as a reward for purchasing a product.
  • the service to be provided using a point management system S1 rather than intended only selling products, for the purpose of passing it through the information of good quality, as in the prior art, a purchase
  • point management system S1 based on the content and amount of information that the information provider provides, for available point in the marketplace is applied, as participants in the marketplace to provide quality information Can be motivated.
  • information provided by the marketplace operator is provided in the marketplace so that the points given to the affiliated store have a value sufficient to cause the information circulation in the marketplace.
  • setting information such as a coefficient or a formula which determines the relationship between information used in the marketplace and the number of points can be set. Therefore, the operator can appropriately change the value of the points so as to activate the distribution of information in the marketplace by controlling the coefficients or formulas.
  • the points given to the member store can be transferred to the corporate member for a fee or for free ((8) in FIG. 17).
  • the operator collects a fee from the member store. Specifically, the amount of the fee is moved from the system cash passbook of the affiliated store managed by the point management server 3 to the system cash passbook of the operator ((9) in FIG. 17).
  • the point management server 3 eliminates the points of the affiliated store by reducing the predetermined point number from the point balance of the affiliated store recorded in the point passbook of the affiliated store managed by the point management server 3
  • the operator provides the incentive fee to the member store based on the total amount of the fee paid by the member store within a predetermined period and the action evaluation (decided ranking) ((12) in FIG. 17).
  • the system cash passbook of merchants from the operator of the system cash passbook the point management server 3 to manage, to move an amount equivalent to the incentives.
  • the member store is actively motivated to transfer points to the corporate members and carry out the action recommended by the operator.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the configuration of the point management server 3.
  • the point management server 3 includes a communication unit 31, a storage unit 32, and a control unit 33.
  • the communication unit 31 is a communication interface for transmitting and receiving data to and from the information providing terminal 1 and the information using terminal 2.
  • the storage unit 32 is a storage medium such as a ROM, a RAM, and a hard disk.
  • the storage unit 32 stores a program that the control unit 33 executes.
  • the storage unit 32 information provider information (e.g., information for identifying the information provider, and past behavior information content provider), information user information (e.g., to identify the information user Information, and the past action content of the information user), various information such as a system cash passbook and a point passbook are stored.
  • information provider information e.g., information for identifying the information provider, and past behavior information content provider
  • information user information e.g., to identify the information user Information, and the past action content of the information user
  • various information such as a
  • the control unit 33 is, for example, a CPU, and functions as a management unit 41, a rank determination unit 42, and an information providing unit 43 by executing a program stored in the storage unit 32.
  • the management unit 41 executes various functions for managing points. Although the details of the management unit 41 will be described later, when the management unit 41 acquires payment data from the information provider, points of the amount calculated using a predetermined calculation formula based on the deposit amount indicated by the acquired payment data Grant
  • the management unit 41 gives points to the information provider who is the information provider based on the provided information provided from the information providing terminal 1 to the information use terminal 2. For example, the management unit 41 gives points of an amount obtained by multiplying the amount of provided information provided from the information providing terminal 1 to the information using terminal 2 by a predetermined coefficient.
  • the management unit 41 may decrease the awarded points in accordance with the elapsed time since the award of the points. At this time, the management unit 41 decreases the points of the amount based on the order determined by the order determination unit 42. For example, the higher the order determined by the order determining unit 42, the larger the management unit 41 increases the reduction amount of points with respect to a predetermined elapsed time. This makes it easy to change the order of the information providers, which can enhance the motivation for the information providers to provide information.
  • management unit 41 manages the balance of points in association with the information provider and the information user. Management unit 41, reduces the information provider to provide some or all of the points on information users, along with increasing the balance of points associated with the information user, the balance of points associated with the information provider Let
  • the management unit 41 determines the amount of points corresponding to the provided information (for example, a document downloaded by a company member or the like and sent by a member store). The balance of points associated with the information user may be decreased, and the balance of points associated with the information provider may be increased. When the information provider provides the information user with some or all of the points, the management unit 41 may subtract the fee corresponding to the amount of points provided to the information user from the cash balance of the information provider.
  • the management unit 41 is based on the amount of points provided to the information user and the order of the information providers determined by the order determination unit 42.
  • the management unit 41 determines, for example, a reward for each predetermined evaluation period. At this time, the management unit 41 may increase the incentive fee as the rank of the information provider is higher. By doing this, the information provider is motivated to raise their rank, and thus the information provider can provide information positively.
  • the management unit 41 may give the information user a second type point that does not affect the ranking of the information provider.
  • the type 2 points directly given to the information user by the management unit 41 do not affect the evaluation of the information provider.
  • the management unit 41 provides the second type points, whereby an information user who does not have a connection with the information provider can easily start using the service.
  • the ranking determination unit 42 ranks the information providers for each predetermined period based on the number of points given to the information provider by the management unit 41.
  • the ranking determination unit 42 sets the ranking at the time when a plurality of information providers in the information using terminal 2 is displayed on the information using terminal 2 as the number of points given to the information provider in the predetermined evaluation period increases.
  • the predetermined evaluation period is, for example, a predetermined period (e.g., one year) prior to the point when the information provider is given a new point.
  • the predetermined evaluation period may be a predetermined period (for example, one month) starting from a predetermined day (for example, the beginning of a month).
  • the order determination unit 42 may initialize the accumulated point number given to each information provider when the evaluation period ends.
  • Order determination unit 42 for example, the information providing unit 43 displays a plurality of information providers when listing the information use terminal 2, the upper point often informant given to a predetermined evaluation period To determine the order.
  • the information providing unit 43 sequentially displays a plurality of information providers on the information use terminal 2, the frequency (that is, the appearance rate) of displaying the information providers having many points given in the evaluation period may be increased.
  • the operator of the point management system S1 actively provides information to increase the order in which the information provider is displayed or the frequency with which the information provider is displayed. You can be motivated to get it.
  • the ranking determination unit 42 determines the overall ranking determined for all the information providers in the marketplace, the district (province, municipality, prefecture, country, or administrative district such as area, autonomous district, legitimacy district, or It is possible to determine the regional edition ranking determined for the information provider in the corresponding region etc.). Order determination unit 42, by ranking all the information provider for the entire sequentially points granted often determines the overall ranking. Further, the order determination unit 42, by ranking the information provider in the region in descending order of the number of points assigned to determine the local version order.
  • the ranking determination unit 42 provides (1) the population of the area targeted for determining the ranking as (2) information provision that sets the area as a service providing area (activity range) A value obtained by dividing the number by the total number of population in the service area provided by the person and (3) divided by the number of points given by the management unit 41 is used as the basis for determining the order.
  • Rank order determining section 42 has been determined, the order at the time of displaying the information providers belonging to a predetermined region in the information providing site that lists the information provider, the information providing site information user to display the information provider It is reflected in the probability (occurrence rate) displayed on the information providing site when updated and the amount of incentives.
  • the information providing site is a server used to provide information (transmitted by the information providing terminal 1) by the information provider, or a server used to use information (received by the information using terminal 2) by the information user. It is a storage area.
  • the information providing site realizes, for example, a web page, a website, a portal site, an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) site, a web application, an SNS, a metaverse, software, or cloud computing etc. Storage area provided by the server to
  • the information providing unit 43 provides the information using terminal 2 with provider information for specifying at least a part of information providers of a plurality of information providers, based on the order determined by the order determining unit 42.
  • the provider information is, for example, information including a name, an address, a contact address, etc. of the information provider as the information provider, and the information use terminal 2 performs an operation of searching for the information provider. Is displayed.
  • FIG. 20 is a functional block diagram showing functions performed by the management unit 41.
  • the management unit 41 executes a program to execute an action monitoring unit 411, a first point giving unit 412, a second point giving unit 413, a campaign point giving unit 414, a point consumption amount changing unit 415, a point annihilation processing unit 416, It functions as a fee collection unit 417 and an incentive payment unit 418.
  • the behavior monitoring unit 411 monitors the behavior of the information provider as the information provider and the behavior of the information user as the information user by monitoring the information exchanged on the marketplace.
  • the behavior monitoring unit 411 notifies other functional units of the management unit 41 of the content of the monitored and specified behavior.
  • Behavior information provider for example, the act of transmitting the information in the information providing site, or information user is an act that leads to the use of information by the contents of the actions of the information provider, the amount or quality of outgoing information, Or represented by the amount or quality of information used by the contribution of the information provider.
  • the action of the information user is, for example, an action of browsing information on an information providing site.
  • the first point giving unit 412 gives points to the information provider based on the content of the action by the information provider who is the selling entity of the points in the marketplace specified by the action monitoring unit 411.
  • the first point giving unit 412 when detecting that the information provider has taken suggested actions, calculates the number of points issued based on the set recommended action coefficient or predetermined formula by operators to manage the marketplace Do.
  • the recommended action coefficient is determined, for example, in association with the amount and quality of information provided by the information provider, and is set to a larger value as the amount and quality of information is higher.
  • the first point giving unit 412 gives points of the calculated number of issued points to the information provider.
  • the first point giving unit 412 sets the recommended action coefficient to 0 because the information provider does not transmit high-value information. Do not issue points.
  • the first point provision unit 412 may provide 30 points per character to the number of increase characters.
  • the first point giving unit 412 applied when adding the added value in the column is higher content (e.g. images), for one additional image, higher point than added value lower content (e.g. 3000 points) You may
  • the action of the information provider to whom the first point giving unit 412 gives points is, for example, as follows. (1) payment to the information provider by the transfer-only account (2) Consumption of transfer already point by point transferee (3) point transfer by the information provider (4) new registration of information users by the information provider (5) Posting a new column by an informant (6) Answering a question to the questioner by an informant (7) Registering the best answer to the answer of an informant by a questioner (8) Sending a new document by an informant
  • the second point assignment unit 413 assigns points based on the result of accumulating the evaluations on the information provided by the information provider within a predetermined period.
  • the points given by the second point giving unit 413 to the information provider are given as the information provider continues the recommended action, so the information provider gives the points by the second point giving unit 413 giving points. You can be motivated to take action recommendations on an ongoing basis.
  • the second point assignment unit 413 assigns points to the information provider based on the following evaluation content. (1) Total number of points provided by the first point giving unit 412 within a predetermined period (cumulative number) (2) Average value or total number (cumulative value) of evaluations from others on information provided to the marketplace by the information provider
  • the campaign point granting unit 414 grants the information user the campaign point in order to provide the information user with an incentive for an activity that consumes points (for example, an activity of browsing information in the marketplace). Do.
  • the campaign point giving unit 414 determines the number of campaign points to be given based on the consumption behavior that the information user uses information in the marketplace, which the activity monitoring unit 411 has identified by monitoring the action of the information user.
  • the campaign point giving unit 414 determines the number of campaign points to be given, for example, by multiplying the amount of points other than the campaign points consumed by the information user within a predetermined evaluation period by a predetermined coefficient.
  • An information consumer can substantially reduce the point purchase cost by being given campaign points.
  • the information user can obtain an advantage for information users who have not received campaign points or have a small number of offers.
  • the campaign point granting unit 414 grants the campaign points, so that a mechanism for supporting the activity of the information user who has performed a large amount of action expected by the operator can be embedded in the marketplace. By providing such a mechanism, as operator intends, it is possible to activate the flow of information within the marketplace.
  • the point consumption fluctuation unit 415 variably determines the point consumption amount to provide the information user with an incentive for behavior in the marketplace. Similar to the second point giving unit 413, the point consumption change unit 415 performs a predetermined evaluation period using a predetermined coefficient or calculation formula for the action of the information user (for example, the action involving the consumption of points). Evaluate information users within. Point consumption variation unit 415, point consumer behavior information user, and based on the evaluation result of the action without other points consumption, information user after the evaluation is, points necessary to use the predetermined information The amount of point consumption is determined, and the point consumption is updated each time the evaluation result is updated.
  • the point consumption fluctuation unit 415 has a mechanism for automatically supporting the activity of the user who performs a large amount of action expected by the operator in the market, and the point consumption fluctuation unit 415 Together with other incentives, it provides a mechanism that can make the intention of the operator in the market stronger.
  • the point annihilation processing unit 416 causes some or all of the points held by the information provider to disappear as time passes.
  • the point annihilation processing unit 416 annihilates the points in order to perform deduction evaluation on the behavior of the information provider within a predetermined period, based on a coefficient or a formula set in advance by the operator. Specifically, when the information provider performs an action contrary to the operator's expectation in the marketplace over a predetermined period, the point annihilation processing unit 416 partially or entirely holds the points possessed by the information provider. Disappear.
  • the point annihilation processing unit 416 annihilates the points, for example, when the amount of the recommended action performed by the information provider within a predetermined period is less than a threshold. Specifically, if the amount of information provided by the information provider in the marketplace within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined amount, the point annihilation processing unit 416 determines the length of the period during which the information is not provided. Disappear an amount of points according to the When the quality of the information provided by the information provider is lower than a predetermined level, the point annihilation processing unit 416 may cause the point to disappear according to the quality of the information. The point annihilation processing unit 416, for example, annihilates the point of the information provider who provided the incorrect information. By doing this, the point management system S1 can motivate the information provider to frequently provide accurate information.
  • the point annihilation processing unit 416 subtracts the number of transferred points from the number of points to be transferred within the period.
  • points of an amount corresponding to a value multiplied by a predetermined coefficient may be eliminated.
  • the point annihilation processing unit 416 can motivate the information provider to actively perform the recommended action by causing the information provider who has a low frequency of executing the recommended action to annihilate the points. As a result, it becomes possible to activate the distribution of information within the marketplace, as the operator intends.
  • the fee collection unit 417 manages the fee collected from the information provider when the points acquired by the information provider by the first point assignment unit 412 and the second point assignment unit 413 are transferred to the information user.
  • a fee per point hereinafter referred to as a unit fee
  • the fee collection unit 417 is a system of the information provider for an amount obtained by multiplying the number of points transferred by the unit fee. Move from the cash passbook to the operator's system cash notebook. Note that it is optional whether the information provider receives compensation for the points transferred from the information user, and if the information provider receives compensation from the information user for more than the fee, the received compensation and fee and The difference is the benefit of the informant.
  • the fee collection unit 417 monitors the point passbook and system cash passbook of the information provider, and provides transferable point number information indicating the number of transferable points to the information provider.
  • the fee collection unit 417 determines the number of transferable points based on the number of points held by the information provider, the cash balance, and the unit fee.
  • the fee collection unit 417 determines the number of transferable points by selecting the smaller of the number of points held by the information provider or the value obtained by dividing the cash balance of the information provider by the unit fee. For example, when the fee is set to 1 point 0.4 yen, the fee collection unit 417 sets the number of owned points as the first upper limit number (for example, 2 million points), and holds the number of held cash (cash balance) / per unit fee.
  • the fee collection unit 417 sets the smaller number (1.5 million points of the second upper limit number in the above example) of the first upper limit number and the second upper limit number as the number of transferable points.
  • the information provider even if the information provider transfers points to the information user, when there is a problem that there is no payment from the information user, the information provider restricts the point consumption behavior of the information user.
  • the point management server 3 can be instructed to forcibly collect the transferred points from the point user's passbook.
  • the upper limit of the number of points that can be collected by the information provider is the number of points assigned by the information provider.
  • the information provider can collect points up to the upper limit within the balance of points held by the information user.
  • the fee collection unit 417 executes a process of returning the collected fee from the cash passbook of the operator to the cash passbook of the information provider based on the number of points collected.
  • Incentive money granting section 418 the overall ranking or regional version ranking of the information provider determined by ranking determination section 42, the coefficient set in advance by the operator, and the total amount of the fee paid by the information provider within a predetermined period. Determine the incentive amount based on The incentive payment unit 418 executes processing for transferring the determined incentive amount from the system cash passbook of the operator to the system cash passbook of the information provider.
  • incentives offers the following benefits: (1) It is possible to increase income, so that the business base can be strengthened. (2) Since it is possible to provide more points cheaper and more, while strengthening the relationship with the information user who is the customer, and the information user Increase opportunities to contact with (3) You can invest for the services of the main business taking into consideration the profit obtained from the incentives
  • the incentive is paid to the information provider, it is possible to induce the market in the direction in which the operator intends. For example, if the operator wants to distribute a lot of points and build a marketplace where a lot of good information can be exchanged, the information provider can be proactive in providing information by offering incentives. You can motivate users to try to transfer points.
  • the incentive payment unit 418 can set the upper limit value of the amount of incentive to, for example, the fee paid by the information provider to the operator. By doing so, the information provider can be motivated to actively transfer points, since substantially no fee will be paid to the operator when transferring points.
  • the incentive payment unit 418 may use an amount obtained by multiplying the fee paid by the information provider to the operator by a coefficient set in advance by the administrator as the upper limit of the incentive.
  • FIG. 21 is a view showing an example of a screen displayed on the information use terminal 2 when the information use terminal 2 accesses the information providing site of the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 21A shows a screen on which a plurality of information users (A child and B child) who use the information use terminal 2 post questions to the point management server 3. In FIG. 21A, together with the contents of the question, the closing date of the answer and the number of points given to the person who answered are displayed.
  • FIG. 21B is a diagram showing the answers provided by a plurality of information providers (agent X, agent Y) to the question issued by the child A among the questions shown in FIG. 21A.
  • agent Y the answer of the agent Y is selected as the best answer by the questioner A.
  • the management unit 41 may give all the points set by the requester to the information provider who has posted the selected answer as the best answer, and distributes the points to the answer selected as the best answer.
  • the number of points to be made may be greater than the number of points to be distributed to other respondents.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a screen for the information user to search for an information provider, and is an example of provider information provided by the information providing unit 43 to the information use terminal 2.
  • FIG. 22 shows a state in which a screen for searching for an agent is selected among the screen for searching for an agent, the screen for searching for a professional, and the screen for searching for a consultant.
  • the first area attribute information is information indicating the place of residence or activities range of information providers, the second region attribute information, information the user of the residence, scope of activities, or areas where information the user is interested Information indicating
  • the information use terminal 2 selectively acquires, for example, information provided from the information provision terminal 1 associated with the first area attribute information corresponding to the area set by the information user.
  • the information user inputs the area in which he / she is interested.
  • the area where the information user himself / herself is living may be input as an initial value.
  • the information providing unit 43 an agent that is associated with the input area
  • area Version rank order determination unit 42 determines the display in descending order.
  • the display screen in the case where the number of points given to the agent Y is the largest and the number of points given to the agent X is the second highest in a predetermined evaluation period is shown.
  • the information provider who has a large number of points given in the evaluation period is displayed at the top on the search screen and the probability of connecting to the business is increased, the information provider has the information providing site as shown in FIG. Will be motivated to provide good information.
  • FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 are tables for explaining the point giving process performed by the management unit 41.
  • it is determined based on the content of information provided by each of a plurality of information providers, an evaluation point for the provided information, a coefficient associated with an action for providing information, an evaluation point and a coefficient
  • the number of granted points and the cumulative number of granted points which is the number of points given each information provider in the evaluation period are shown.
  • Rows in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 correspond to one action of the information provider providing information, and are arranged in time series.
  • the information provider A provides information twice within the period shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, and it can be seen that the cumulative points increase.
  • the order determination unit 42 can determine the order of a plurality of information providers based on the total number of granted points in a predetermined evaluation period.
  • the evaluation point 5 is given, and the largest number of points is given.
  • the evaluation point 1 is given, the smallest number of points is given.
  • the coefficient is fixed to 100, but in FIG. 24, different coefficients are assigned depending on the evaluation points.
  • the operator wants to highly evaluate superior information, as shown in FIG. 24, the operator gives points when the evaluation point is high by increasing the coefficient when the evaluation point is high. The number can be more than that shown in FIG. Thus, the operator can control the information provider's behavior by adjusting the coefficient.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a processing sequence among the information providing terminal 1, the information using terminal 2 and the point management server 3 when a question and an answer are exchanged at the information providing site shown in FIG.
  • the information user posts a question on the information use terminal 2 (S11)
  • the information use terminal 2 transmits the posted question to the point management server 3.
  • the point management server 3 posts the received question on the information providing site (S12).
  • the information provision terminal 1 requests the point management server 3 for the information provision site screen.
  • the point management server 3 that has received the request, sends the information providing site screen to the information providing terminal 1, the information providing terminal 1 displays the information providing site (S14).
  • the information providing terminal 1 When the information provider performs an operation to post an answer on the information providing terminal 1 (S15), the information providing terminal 1 transmits the input answer to the point management server 3.
  • the point management server 3 gives points to the information provider who uses the information providing terminal 1 in response to the response being transmitted from the information providing terminal 1 (S16).
  • the point management server 3 transmits the information providing site screen the answer by the information provider is reflected in the information use terminal 2, information use terminal 2 displays the information providing site screen answer is reflected ( S17).
  • the information use terminal 2 when the information user selects the answer by the information provider as the best answer (S18), the information use terminal 2 transmits the evaluation information indicating the evaluation for the answer by the information provider to the point management server 3 Do.
  • the point management server 3 further gives points to the information provider based on the evaluation information received from the information use terminal 2 (S19). For example, the point management server 3 gives the information provider a point corresponding to the answer posted by the information provider being selected as the best answer.
  • the point management server 3 updates the ranking of the information providers for each predetermined evaluation period. For example, the point management server 3 calculates the total number of points given to the information provider in a predetermined period in the past in response to the new points being given, and based on the total number of points, The order is updated (S20).
  • the member store is the information provider, but the member store may be the information provider and the information user.
  • a person or company to provide information to the marketplace as an information provider if you wish to use the function of information the user has, by using the e-mail address that is used in the account as an information provider, as the information user Can create an account.
  • the information provider uses the function for the information provider or the function for the information user by switching the member attribute using the operation menu after logging in using the account? Can be selected. It is also possible for the information user to use the function of the information provider by similar processing.
  • a paid employment introduction company which is a member store serving as an information provider, utilizes a hiring client (company) using a hiring market place in which the point management system S1 is embedded (e.g. prompt you to companies sending of information and job information) to, the adoption advertising expenses of client companies as a source of revenue, selling point in the real market, the merchant may be as revenue.
  • the pay placement agency needs to carry out the action recommended by the operator in the marketplace to obtain points in advance.
  • the client company (company member who is an information user) consumes the points purchased from the agent in the real market in the hiring market place, which is a kind of market place, and various information intended (information about the hiring, employment, job change market)
  • the information may be provided by transmitting to the job seeker (the changed form of the corporate member) who is an individual member who is an information user.
  • individual members who are job seekers can select their desired company and occupation from various information transmitted by company members, affiliated stores, and individual members, or useful agents You may use the transmitted information by consulting with.
  • the information user utilizes the information provided by the other members, or consumption point
  • the amount of the case of providing information to other member may be set publisher any way.
  • the individual member may set the consumption point amount in all information use and information provision to zero.
  • individual members may send evaluations from various viewpoints to a company or a company that they have worked for in the past or present to other members (for example, individual members, company members, affiliated stores). .
  • other members can also browse (information use) information on companies provided by other members in addition to the information transmitted from the company itself.
  • the affiliated store as a member of the information provider, has a difficult event in daily work and can not draw an answer on its own, asking other member stores to answer a question (provide information) on a bulletin board (information use ) May be possible.
  • the information provider can obtain information necessary for deriving an answer as an information user who uses information provided by other information providers.
  • a member store may read (use information) a column or the like transmitted by another member store, or may evaluate a column by another member store.
  • it may be ranked so as to increase the information frequency of contact to other users.
  • the marketplace for example, limited the affiliation store as a marriage counselor, and limited the information users to singles who have all or part of the same functions as corporate members and individual members in the employment marketplace described above. It may be a market place exclusively for marriage activities.
  • the point management system S1 can construct a marketplace dedicated to marriage by two types of members: an information provider, a marriage counselor, and an information user, single members.
  • the information users, men a first information user, or attributes assigned to women is the second information users, various services It may be characterized and provided for each attribute.
  • the marketplace is a marketplace dedicated to real estate, for example, with a member store serving as an information provider as a real estate broker, and an information consumer limited to individuals, sole proprietors, corporations, or groups who intend to buy, sell or lend real estate. It may be Furthermore, the information user of this marketplace has functions for sellers or lenders having all or part of the same functions as the corporate members in the employment marketplace described above, and functions similar to the individual members in the employment marketplace. Both functions for buyers or borrowers having all or part may be individually provided in the same information user account.
  • the marketplace for example, uses a member store as an information provider as an insurance broker (insurance broker), an information user as an insurance company who intends to sell insurance products, and an individual who wants to purchase insurance products, an individual business owner It may be a market dedicated to insurance, limited to corporations, or organizations.
  • the information user of this marketplace is the same as the insurance company which is the first information user having all or part of the same function as the corporate member in the employment marketplace described above, and the individual member in the employment marketplace. It may be an individual, an individual business owner, a corporation, or a group who is a second information user having all or part of the functions.
  • the first information user not only consumes the owned points and uses the provided information from the information provider, but also consumes the owned points and information such as the company's solvency margin ratio and disclosure. It may be provided to the second information user.
  • the first of the information user, the consuming point to hold information of insurance products of their own, may be provided to the second of information users.
  • the amount of consumption points may be freely set by the operator.
  • the point consumption change unit 415 may set the consumption point amount in all the information use and information provision by the second information user to 0 based on an instruction from the operator.
  • information that can be handled in such marketplaces is not limited to the information described in this specification, and, for example, marketplaces that deal with information on banking-related financial instruments (affiliated shops are financial planners etc.), securities-based financial instruments Market information handling information (affiliated store is a financial planner etc.), a market place handling information on products or services provided by a store (affiliated shop a blogger etc.), or a market place handling medical or nursing information May be market place information provided by a social worker etc.).
  • the marketplace for example, uses a member store as an information provider as a car critic, a car-related industry reporter, or a columnist, etc., and a car user who wants to sell a car, and an individual who wants to buy a car.
  • the information user of this marketplace is the same as the automobile manufacturer who is the first information user having all or part of the same function as the corporate member in the employment marketplace and the same as the individual member in the employment marketplace above. It may be an individual, an individual business owner, a corporation, or a group who is a second information user having all or part of the functions.
  • the first information user not only consumes the owned points and uses the provided information from the information provider but also consumes the owned points and wants to disseminate it on their own owned technology and branding strategy Information or the like may be provided to the second information user. Further, the first information user, its automotive consuming point carrying, or related information, may be provided to the second information user.
  • a marketplace dedicated to automobiles may provide a service as a three-dimensional virtual space using virtual reality (VR) technology, and such a marketplace may be, for example, a home.
  • a service may be provided for the building industry to be built, the tourism industry that operates resort facilities, etc., or the real estate distribution industry that offers used housing etc. In this way, the user can provide or use more complete information.
  • the information provider leaves excess holding points, as in the case where there is no opportunity to transfer the holding points to the information user, or when there are few.
  • users who can use the point exchange marketplace may be limited to the information provider.
  • An information provider can use point exchange marketplaces to exchange holdings and deposited money with other information providers in the same marketplace or in different marketplaces. This makes it easier to distribute points across multiple marketplaces, not just individual marketplaces.
  • information users who need points can acquire points more easily and can be more easily consumed, and can activate respective marketplaces used by the information users.
  • the fee charged to the operator when the information provider transfers points to other information providers in the point exchange marketplace and the incentive paid by the operator are arbitrary according to the setting information set by the operator. It can be controlled by means of
  • the operator builds the marketplace, changes the setting information of the marketplace, and changes the marketplace and makes the marketplace more consistent with the aspect of the real market and the purpose of the operator. It will be possible to strongly activate the information distribution of marketplaces, and it will be possible to effectively distribute real market information as well as marketplaces.
  • setting information used to determine the amount of points, fees, and the like given in the marketplace may be updated using artificial intelligence technology instead of the operator itself.
  • the point management server 3 having artificial intelligence may determine the setting information, and the point management server 3 acquires setting information from an external artificial intelligence server (hereinafter referred to as an AI server), and obtains the acquired setting information.
  • an AI server an external artificial intelligence server
  • Various processes in the marketplace may be performed on the basis of this.
  • the point management server 3 sends the information providing terminal 1 and the information using terminal 2 and the point management server to the AI server connected to the point management server 3. Input the data sent and received between 3 and 3.
  • the AI server generates setting information data for updating some or all setting information used in the marketplace based on the input data and market place information, and the AI server generates the generated setting information data.
  • the setting information may be updated by transmitting to the point management server 3.
  • the point management server 3 that has received the setting information data transmitted from the AI server may not immediately update the setting information. Further, the AI server may not immediately transmit the generated setting information data to the point management server 3.
  • the point management server 3 may update the original setting information to new setting information after an arbitrary period has elapsed since the AI server generated the setting information data. In this case, the organizer of the marketplace may notify the participants of the marketplace of the updated new setting information within an arbitrary time period.
  • the notification method of the setting information to the participant of a marketplace is arbitrary.
  • a setting information change special site or the like one of information providing sites
  • the generation of setting information by the AI server causes the AI server to automatically process the updating operation of the setting information which is complicated when the market place is enlarged or a plurality of marketplaces are constructed. Can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the operator and to derive effective setting information for the marketplace without intervention of human error and human error. In addition, the generation of the setting information by the AI server makes it possible to shorten the interval for updating the setting information, which contributes to the effective development of the marketplace.
  • the point management system S1 provides a plurality of marketplaces simultaneously.
  • the information provider and the information user may be able to use different marketplaces simultaneously by using the same account. That is, the information provider and the information user can share cash, points, and their own information in a plurality of marketplaces.
  • the point management server 3 may manage the system cash passbook of the affiliated store or the operator and the point passbook of the user or the affiliated store for each account, and it is common across multiple marketplaces. You may manage.
  • the point management server 3 may also give the benefits given to the user and the member store over a plurality of marketplaces.
  • the point management server 3 may also evaluate the evaluation of the information user and the information provider used when granting a benefit, based on the action across a plurality of marketplaces.
  • linking multiple marketplaces in this way, the operator can also operate a non-profit market place that is expected to be less profitable by operating with other profitable market places. It will be possible.
  • the service at the useful public interest market is provided. Will be able to In this way, linking a plurality of marketplaces also helps to develop the low-profit, so-called utility-type advertising market.
  • the point management system S1 is assigned by the management unit 41 that gives points to the information provider based on the provided information provided to the information use terminal 2 from the information provision terminal 1, and the management unit 41. And an order determination unit 42 that determines the order of a plurality of information providers based on the number of points. Then, when the information user searches for the information provider, the information provider is displayed on the information use terminal 2 so that the information user can easily recognize the information provider having the high order determined by the order determining unit 42. Ru.
  • point management system S1 has such a configuration, the information provider, so motivated to provide information to more points are given, the information provider can provide useful information It is displayed at the top. As a result, the information user can easily recognize the information provider who can provide useful information, and the probability of being able to contact useful information is increased.
  • the points given to the information provider in the point management system S1 are controlled by the coefficient set by the operator.
  • the operator can manage the marketplace to disseminate information as the operator expects. Then, the operator can obtain the following effects by utilizing the marketplace for various matching.
  • a job change support information site (hereinafter abbreviated as "job change site”) is taken as an example, and points are provided.
  • job change site a job change support information site
  • the configuration of the management system S2 will be described below.
  • the information providing site in the present embodiment is mainly configured around a like search engines and links, the portal site which the user has a page as a base point for locating information on the Internet as a homepage It is various websites to start with.
  • the information providing site is not limited to the one that collects comprehensive information, but includes the one in which related information and a collection of links are organized as a window in a specific field.
  • the user in the following description is an existence having both an aspect as an information provider and an aspect as a viewer.
  • a first user corresponding to “agent” and a second user corresponding to a company desiring to acquire an individual or a human resource who wishes to change his / her job there will be a first user corresponding to “agent” and a second user corresponding to a company desiring to acquire an individual or a human resource who wishes to change his / her job.
  • a company and an agent are users who strongly have an aspect corresponding to an information provider in the third embodiment, and individuals are strongly used an aspect as an information viewer corresponding to an information user in the first embodiment It is a
  • the second user transmits his / her information or collects other's information within the job change site in order to meet a more suitable workplace or a near ideal person.
  • the first user advertises that the second user is excellent as a consultation window by transmitting information useful for job change and employment in addition to his / her information on the job change site.
  • Information handled within the job change site may be provided in various forms such as characters, images, videos, sounds, data files, applications, 3D contents and the like.
  • Point is, primarily, is issued to the first user who deposits the money to deposit money account, which is determined by the operator, the second of users, was purchased a point from the first user in advance Use the services in the career change site above.
  • the money deposited by the first user is centrally managed by the operator as deposit.
  • the commission for the point sales which is the operator's income source, is settled on the basis of the breakdown of what yen belongs to this deposit.
  • the first user withdraws from the account the amount of money belonging to the first user at the time of withdrawal is refunded among deposits.
  • point management system S2 is based on the service usage behavior of the user, for each user, point free distributions and, benefits such as preferential advertising is characterized by having a mechanism to be applied .
  • the service usage act is, for example, an act of providing information to another user in the point management system S2 or browsing information provided by the other user.
  • FIG. 26 is an overall configuration diagram of a point management system S2 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the point management system S2 is a system realized mainly by the management server 10.
  • the management server 10 is connected to the operator terminal 20, the user terminal 30, and the server 40 of a financial institution via a communication network 50 such as the Internet.
  • Operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30, personal computer, tablet, smartphone, TV is an information terminal such as a game machine or a car navigation system.
  • the operator terminal 20 is used by the operator of the point management system S2, and the user terminal 30 is used by the first user and the second user who are users of the job change site.
  • the operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30 each include an output device such as a display and a speaker and an input device such as a keyboard and a mouse.
  • a browser is mounted on the operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30, and the browser can display at least web pages provided from various servers on the display.
  • a user to perform a special application in the user terminal 30 may be able to output at an output device what it receives from the management server 10.
  • the output device and the input device of the user terminal 30 are not limited to those described above, and VR technology such as a head mounted display may be used.
  • operator terminal 20 is not limited to the embodiments described above, setting information stored in the management server 10 in (details will be described later.) Input operation for updating is possible, in any manner It may be. Therefore, for example, an aspect in which the management server 10 and the operator terminal 20 are integrated is also possible.
  • the operator and the user operate the input device to click a button, an icon, etc. on a web page displayed on a display etc., or enter characters etc. in a form, to the management server 10. Submit a request.
  • the server 40 of the financial institution is a server managed by the financial institution with which the operator has made a contract, and when there is a deposit to the deposit account, the deposit date, the deposit amount, the information of the depositor (deposit ID) is recorded as a deposit record, and the deposit record is provided to the management server 10 automatically or in response to a request from the management server 10.
  • FIG. 27 is a circuit block diagram showing a configuration of management server 10.
  • the management server 10 includes a CPU 110, a ROM 111, a RAM 112, a storage device 113, and a communication control device 114, which are connected to one another by a bus 115.
  • the CPU 110 controls transmission and reception of data among the ROM 111, the RAM 112, and the storage device 113 based on a program stored in the ROM 111, and controls the storage device 113 and the communication control device 114.
  • the CPU 110 also controls the connection with the communication network 50 via the communication control device 114.
  • the storage device 113 is configured of a hard disk drive or the like, and is used as a storage medium for storing data and application programs necessary for the management server 10.
  • the CPU 110 can store data in the storage device 113 or read and use data stored in the storage device 113 as necessary.
  • the storage device 113 is provided in the management server 10, but the storage device 113 may be provided outside the management server 10.
  • FIG. 28 is a functional block diagram for explaining a functional configuration of the management server 10.
  • the CPU 110 executes the programs stored in the ROM 111 and the storage device 113 to realize various functions shown in FIG.
  • the management server 10 includes a communication unit 120, a storage unit 140, and a control unit 130.
  • the communication unit 120 receives the request from the operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30, and transmits the information such as the web page selected or generated by the control unit 130 to the operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30. Do.
  • the communication unit 120 includes, for example, a LAN (Local Area Network) controller.
  • the storage unit 140 includes a user information storage unit 141, a setting information storage unit 142, an evaluation history storage unit 143, a point history storage unit 144, a deposit history storage unit 145, a web page information etc. storage unit 146. Equipped with
  • the user information storage unit 141 stores personal information of each user such as a user ID and a password, and information on a benefit given to each user.
  • the setting information storage unit 142 stores setting information to be referred to in the processing in the control unit 130.
  • the evaluation history storage unit 143 stores a history of service usage by a user.
  • the point history storage unit 144 stores point gain and loss history T7 of each user.
  • the deposit history storage unit 145 stores the deposit amount, which is the amount belonging to the first user among deposits under centralized management by the operator, in association with the identification information of the first user.
  • the deposit history storage unit 145 may store an increase / decrease history of the deposit amount.
  • the web page information etc. storage unit 146 stores the web page which is the basis of the job change site, the information of the web page assigned to each user, and the like.
  • Control unit 130 is, for example, the CPU 110, and executes the program to execute the setting information update unit 131, the authentication unit 132, the point consumption unit 133, the point reduction unit 134, the request processing unit 135, the evaluation value recording unit 136, and the benefit index. It functions as the value calculation unit 137, the privilege giving unit 138, and the deposit processing unit 139.
  • the setting information updating unit 131 updates the setting information stored in the setting information storage unit 142 in response to a request from the operator terminal 20.
  • the authentication unit 132 performs authentication for login control of the user who has accessed the job change site.
  • the point consumption unit 133 subtracts the point of the user from the request from the user terminal 30, and then permits the request processing unit 135 to execute the process.
  • the point reduction unit 134 acquires information on the transfer source corresponding to the consumed points from the user information storage unit 141.
  • the point of the quantity based on the consumed points is given to the first user indicated by the acquired information of the transfer source.
  • the point reduction unit 134 gives points to the first user who is the transfer source of the points, based on the number of points subtracted by the point consumption unit 133.
  • the request processing unit 135 provides information such as a web page and updates the storage unit 140 in response to a request from the user terminal 30. In other words, the request processing unit 135 executes the service usage act of the user in the management server 10 by providing the service in response to the request of the user.
  • the evaluation value recording unit 136 is an evaluation unit that calculates an evaluation value for an action of the user using the information providing site.
  • the evaluation value recording unit 136 calculates an evaluation value to be reflected in a benefit for each process performed by the request processing unit 135, and causes the evaluation history storage unit 143 to record information regarding each process including the evaluation value.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates a benefit index value based on the evaluation value regarding each user stored in the evaluation history storage unit 143.
  • the benefit index value based on the area information indicating the activity range of each user is referred to as a first benefit index value
  • the benefit index value not based on the area information is It is referred to as a two-benefits index value.
  • the privilege granting unit 138 grants a privilege to the user based on the evaluation value corresponding to the user in a predetermined period. Privilege granting unit 138, for example, based on the award indicator value, etc., and priorities for displaying information of each user, to control the points or the like each user's.
  • the deposit processing unit 139 acquires a deposit record from the server 40 of the financial institution, updates the deposit amount of the depositor of the first user who is the depositor to the amount obtained by adding the deposit amount, and deposits to the first user. Grant points according to the amount.
  • the request processing unit 135 includes a browsing processing unit 135a, a search processing unit 135b, a web page update processing unit 135c, a posting processing unit 135d, a point transfer processing unit 135e, and an evaluation processing unit 135f.
  • the browsing processing unit 135 a provides a web page according to the request from the user terminal 30.
  • the search processing unit 135b searches for information meeting the conditions included in the request from the user terminal 30, and presents the searched information.
  • the web page update processing unit 135c updates, in response to a request, a web page dedicated to each user for posting information desired by each user.
  • the post processing unit 135 d reflects the posted columns, questions, and the like on the web page in response to a request for posting a column, a question, and the like from the user terminal 30.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e When the point transfer processing unit 135e receives a first request for transferring points from the user terminal 30, the point transfer processing unit 135e is a transferee in the first request from the first user who is the sender of the first request. It functions as a point transfer unit that moves points of the quantity specified in the first request to the specified user. The point transfer processing unit 135e performs point transfer processing and fee settlement processing in response to a request from the first user.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e when the point transfer processing unit 135e moves the point from the first user to the second user, the point transfer processing unit 135e requests the operator to pay an amount based on the moved point to the operator. May be sent to the user's terminal. For example, the point transfer processing unit 135e calculates an amount to be paid to the operator by multiplying the moved points by a predetermined set value that can be set by the operator.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e when the point transfer processing unit 135e moves the point from the first user to the second user, the point transfer processing unit 135e subtracts the amount belonging to the first user by the amount based on the moved points. You may The point transfer processing unit 135e calculates the amount of money to be subtracted, for example, by multiplying the moved points by a predetermined set value that can be set by the operator.
  • the evaluation processing unit 135 f calculates an evaluation value to be reflected in the benefit based on an evaluation made by the user on the published information, and records the calculated evaluation value in the storage unit 140.
  • the request processing unit 135 provides the content to the user terminal 30 in response to a request for downloading the content from the user terminal 30, for example, or the user terminal 30. May have a function of storing the content in the storage unit 140 in response to the request for uploading the content.
  • the privilege giving unit 138 has a first point giving unit 138a, a display information selecting unit 138b, a display order determining unit 138c, a second point giving unit 138d, an incentive payment unit 138e, and a discount rate calculation unit 138f.
  • the first point giving unit 138a calculates the number of points given to each user based on each evaluation value.
  • the display information selection unit 138 b selects information to be displayed on the advertisement space based on the first benefit index value.
  • the display order determination unit 138c determines the display order of the information to be displayed on the search result display screen based on the first benefit index value.
  • the second point giving unit 138d calculates the number of points given to each user based on the second benefit index value of each user, and performs a point giving process for each user.
  • the incentive payment unit 138e calculates an incentive amount to be provided to each first user, and performs an incentive payment process for each user.
  • the discount rate calculation unit 138 f calculates the discount rate of the number of points required for each second user to use the service, based on the second benefit index value of each second user.
  • the discount rate of points is the same as the number of basic points consumed by a standard second user when using a specific service, and when the specific second user uses the same service. the ratio of the difference between the number of points to be consumed.
  • a user information table T1 As shown in FIG. 29, as items of the user information table T1, for example, a user ID for identifying the user, a password for authenticating the user, a type of the user, a first benefit index Value, second benefit index value, area information indicating the activity range of the user, the address of a web page assigned to the user only, and the like.
  • the job change of the user is information indicating the position within the site.
  • regional information is determined by the user's own choice based on, for example, a city or a municipality as the minimum unit, and in the case of an agent or company, the area in which business is conducted, or in the case of an individual, the area where employment is desired. , it is a geographic information consisting of one or more of the unit area.
  • a deposit ID which is an ID number related to deposit of deposit
  • the number of points consumed for using the service is the quantity obtained from the correspondence table T2 to the consumption points described later (equivalent to the fixed price .) is the ratio for discounting from the discount rate is stored.
  • the user information storage unit 141 may store, as other items, the number of points owned by the user, the amount of money deposited at the first user, and the like.
  • the setting information storage unit 142 stores setting information to be referred to in the processing of the control unit 130.
  • the setting information storage unit 142 is used as first setting information used as a reference when the evaluation value recording unit 136 calculates an evaluation value, and as a reference when the benefit giving unit 138 determines the size of a benefit
  • the setting information including the second setting information is stored.
  • the setting information is, for example, consumption point correspondence table T2, evaluation value correspondence table T3, article evaluation value correspondence table T4, first benefit index value function F1, second benefit index value function F2, first point function F3, second point A function F4, a third point function F5, a fourth point function F6, a fee function F7, a reward function F8, a discount rate function F9, a benefit index value calculation interval IV, and an evaluation value extraction period PD.
  • the first setting information is, for example, the evaluation value correspondence table T3 or the article evaluation value correspondence table T4, and the second setting information is, for example, the first benefit index value function F1 or the second benefit index value function F2.
  • the consumption point correspondence table T2 is a correspondence table between the type of request from the user terminal 30 and the function for calculating the number of consumption points based on the content of the request, which is referred to in the processing of the point consumption unit 133.
  • the type of request corresponds to each process performed by the request processing unit 135, such as a browsing request, a search request, an article posting request, a web page update request, and the like.
  • the function corresponding to the type of each request can be changed as needed by the operator, and may be a function with any numerical value included in the request as a variable or a constant function.
  • a function may be considered such that the number of characters of the article to be posted is multiplied by a predetermined constant.
  • requirement regarding advertisement insertion it is possible to set it as a function which made the variable the advertising period, the space of the advertisement space to publish, etc.
  • a plurality of types of consumption point correspondence table T2 may be present depending on the type of user, such as two types, one for personal use and one for company. In this case, it is possible to set the number of points corresponding to all the request types in the personal consumption point correspondence table T2 to be 0 so that the use of the service by the individual does not cost money.
  • the control unit 130 determines a function corresponding to the type of request corresponding to the use of the service in the consumption point correspondence table T2 based on the instruction of the operator. may be changed to those consumption points is less calculated. As a result, the service becomes more attractive to the user, leading to an increase in the user's willingness to use the service, and as a result, the user's service usage behavior is guided in the direction intended by the operator. be able to.
  • the evaluation value correspondence table T3 is a correspondence table of the type of each processing in the request processing unit 135 and the function for calculating the evaluation value from the processing content, which is referred to in the processing of the evaluation value recording unit 136.
  • the type of each process corresponds to each process performed in the request processing unit 135, such as browsing process, search process, article posting process, web page update process, and the like.
  • the function corresponding to the type of each process can be changed as needed by the operator, and may be a function having any numerical value included in the process as a variable or a constant function.
  • the control unit 130 determines a function corresponding to the type of processing corresponding to the use of the service in the evaluation value correspondence table T3 based on the instruction of the operator. may be changed to the evaluation value is larger calculated. As a result, the service becomes more attractive to the user, leading to an increase in the user's willingness to use the service, and as a result, the user's service usage behavior is guided in the direction intended by the operator. be able to.
  • the article evaluation value correspondence table T4 is a correspondence table between the evaluation of a column or the like by the viewer and the evaluation value, which is referred to in the processing of the evaluation processing unit 135f. For example, when the evaluation of the column by the reader is divided into four stages of “excellent”, “good”, “average”, and “poor”, the article evaluation value correspondence table T4 is for each evaluation. Te can be a table as 2,1,0, evaluation value of -1 corresponds.
  • the first benefit index value function F1 is a function to be referred to in the processing of the benefit index value calculation unit 137 for calculating the first benefit index value from the evaluation value and the area information.
  • the region-dependent evaluation value is an evaluation value for an activity whose opportunity is limited by the user population in the activity range of the user, for example, an evaluation value by point transfer, or from others evaluation value by the evaluation of this is true.
  • the display priority can be determined based on the index that has corrected the inequity caused by the narrowing of the user's activity range, so the quality is truly improved. it can be legitimately favor of high user.
  • the first term and the second term on the right side of the first benefit index value function F1 may be multiplied by an arbitrary constant that can be set by the operator. It becomes possible to adjust how much each of the region-dependent evaluation values affects the first benefit index value.
  • the operator may appropriately limit the extraction condition of the evaluation value, such as calculating the first benefit index value by the evaluation value excluding the evaluation value based on the evaluation from another person.
  • the second benefit index value function F2 is a function to be referred to in the processing of the benefit index value calculation unit 137 for calculating a second benefit index value based on the evaluation value.
  • the function referred to in the processing of the benefit index value calculation unit 137 is not limited to the first benefit index value function F1 and the second benefit index value function F2, and the benefit index differs depending on the function processing unit belonging to the benefit granting unit 138 More types of functions may be stored in the setting information storage unit 142 so that values may be referred to.
  • the first point function F3 is a function for calculating points based on the evaluation value, which is referred to in the process of the first point giving unit 138a.
  • C1 ⁇ evaluation value
  • the first point giving unit 138a can set functions individually according to the type of the user to whom points are to be given, and as a result, it is possible to change the treatment according to the type of the user. Become.
  • the second point function F4 is a function for calculating points based on the second benefit index value, which is referred to in the processing of the second point assignment unit 138d.
  • C2 the number of points given
  • C2 ⁇ second benefit index value
  • the third point function F5 is a function for calculating the number of points to be provided based on the number of subtracted points, which is referred to in the process of the point reduction unit 134.
  • the fourth point function F6 is a function to be referred to in the processing of the deposit processing unit 139 for calculating the number of points given from the deposit amount.
  • the fee function F7 is a function for calculating the fee from the number of points to be transferred, which is referred to in the processing of the point transfer processing unit 135e.
  • the fee function F7 may also be substituted by a fee function table consisting of a plurality of types of functions, similarly to the first point function F3 and the second point function F4. In this case, different functions can be set for each type of user who is the point transferee. As a result, for example, it is possible to make a setting such that a commission is generated for the transfer to the second user, and a commission does not occur for the transfer between the first users.
  • the incentive function F8 is a function for calculating the incentive amount based on the second benefit index value, which is referred to in the processing of the incentive payment unit 138e.
  • the discount rate function F9 is a function for calculating the discount rate based on the second benefit index value referred to in the processing of the discount rate calculation unit 138f.
  • the discount rate function F9 may also be substituted by a discount rate function table consisting of a plurality of types of functions, similarly to the first point function F3, the second point function F4, and the fee function F7. In this case, different functions can be set depending on the type of the second user for which the discount rate is calculated (for example, to which one of the company and the individual the user belongs).
  • the constants C1 to C7 and the lower limits C1 ', C2', C6 'and C7' in the various functions can be changed as needed by the operator.
  • the functions F1 to F9 are not limited to the illustrated functions, and may be other functions.
  • the constants but also the functions F1 to F9 themselves may be changeable by the operator at any time.
  • the benefit index value calculation interval IV is a numerical value that affects the frequency at which the processing of the benefit index value calculation unit 137 is performed.
  • the benefit index value calculation interval IV can be, for example, one month, one week, one day, or the like.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 performs the following process when the benefit index value calculation interval IV has elapsed from the time when the immediately preceding process is performed. For this reason, when it is desired to promptly reflect the user's service usage act to the benefit, the benefit index value calculation interval IV may be set short.
  • the evaluation value extraction period PD is a numerical value to be referred to when extracting the evaluation value in the benefit index value calculation unit 137.
  • the evaluation value extraction period PD can be, for example, one month, half a year, one year, and the like.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 uses the records of the evaluation history T5 and the article evaluation history T6 after the time when the evaluation value extraction period PD is traced back from the start time of the process (hereinafter abbreviated as “extraction starting point”). Extract evaluation values. For this reason, when it is desired to reflect the long-term trend of the user in the benefit, the evaluation value extraction period PD may be set long.
  • benefit index value calculation interval IV and the evaluation value extraction period PD are numerical values set independently of each other, and further, a process of referring to the first benefit index value and the second benefit index value calculated by these is performed. Different benefit index value calculation intervals IV and evaluation value extraction periods PD may be set for each functional processing unit to be responsible.
  • the benefit index value calculation interval IV and the evaluation value extraction period PD referred to at the time of calculation of the second benefit index value referred to in the processing of the second point granting unit 138d and the incentive payment unit 138e are mutually equal numerical values Is desirable, and the first benefit index value referred to in the processing of the display information selection unit 138b and the display order determination unit 138c and the benefit index referred to in the calculation of the second benefit index value referred to in the processing of the discount rate calculation unit 138f.
  • value calculating interval IV is preferably less numerical evaluation value extraction period PD.
  • the evaluation history storage unit 143 stores a history of service usage by the user as an evaluation history T5 as shown in FIG.
  • the items of the evaluation history T5 include, for example, the date and time indicating the time when the action was performed, the user ID of the user who is the subject of the action, the type of the action, the action The evaluation value etc. which were calculated from
  • the type of action corresponds to each process performed in the request processing unit 135, such as browsing action, search action, article posting action, web page updating action, and the like.
  • the evaluation history T5 is updated by the processing of the evaluation value recording unit 136, and is referred to in the processing of the first point giving unit 138a and the benefit index value calculation unit 137, and the processing of the browsing processing unit 135a as necessary. May be referred to.
  • a history of evaluations by viewers such as columns is stored as an article evaluation history T6 as shown in FIG. 30 (b).
  • items of the article evaluation history T6 for example, it is obtained from the date and time representing the time when the evaluation was performed, the user ID of the poster such as the column where the evaluation was made, and the evaluation Evaluation value etc.
  • the article evaluation history T6 is updated by the process of the evaluation processing unit 135f, and is referred to in the process of the benefit index value calculation unit 137.
  • a point gain and loss history T7 as shown in FIG. 31 is stored for each user.
  • the items of the point gain and loss history T7 for example, the date and time the point was obtained, the number of points obtained (a negative number means lost), and points obtained by what Or the details indicating the loss, the balance of acquired points, and the like.
  • the acquired balance of points is a value indicating, for each record for which points have been acquired, how many points remain after the acquired points, and when the user loses the points Only updated.
  • the point gain and loss history T7 of the first user may include the user ID of the transferee user recorded when the points are lost due to transfer.
  • the second user's point gain and loss history T7 may include the user ID of the transfer source user, which is recorded when points are obtained by transfer.
  • the point gain and loss history T7 is updated by the processing of the point consumption unit 133, the point reduction unit 134, the point transfer processing unit 135e, the benefit provision unit 138, and the deposit processing unit 139, and is referred to in the processing of the point reduction unit 134 , if necessary, may be referenced in the processing of the browsing processing part 135a.
  • the deposit history storage unit 145 stores the increase / decrease history of the deposit amount as the deposit history T8 as shown in FIG. 32 for each first user.
  • the items of the deposit history T8 include, for example, the date and time when the deposit amount increased or decreased, the deposit amount increase or decrease, the basis of the deposit amount change, the deposit balance, and the like.
  • the latest deposit balance in deposit history T8 corresponds to the deposit amount of the first user corresponding to the deposit history T8.
  • the deposit history T8 is updated by the processing of the point transfer processing unit 135e, the incentive payment unit 138e, and the payment processing unit 139. In addition, it may be referred to in the processing of the browsing processing unit 135a or the point transfer processing unit 135e, as necessary.
  • the deposit history storage unit 145 may store the deposit history T8 of the operator as well as the first user.
  • the operator's deposit amount is the amount obtained by removing the deposit amount of all the first users from the balance of the deposit account.
  • the operator's deposit history T8 is updated by all processes of the point transfer processing unit 135e and the incentive payment unit 138e.
  • the web page information etc. storage unit 146 stores various web pages as a basis of a job change site, information of web pages allocated exclusively for each user, and various contents provided in the job change site. It is done. For example, information of a web page is stored as an HTML (HyperText Markup Language) file or the like, and information of other contents is stored as a document file, an image file, an audio file, a moving image file or the like. These pieces of information are provided to the user terminal 30 as the processing result of the request processing unit 135. In the present embodiment, it is described that one web page is assigned to each user. However, each user can use a component of the website so that each user can configure a unique website. The server space for storing certain web page information and content may be allocated.
  • the setting information updating unit 131 updates the setting information stored in the setting information storage unit 142 in response to a request from the operator terminal 20.
  • the management server 10 receives a request for changing setting information from the operator terminal 20, the setting information updating unit 131 sends a screen to the operator terminal 20 requesting the operator to select which setting information to change. Display.
  • consumption point correspondence table T2 evaluation value correspondence table T3, article evaluation value correspondence table T4, first benefit index value function F1, second benefit index value function F2, first point function F3 , A second point function F4, a third point function F5, a fourth point function F6, a fee function F7, a reward function F8, a discount rate function F9, a benefit index value calculation interval IV, and an evaluation value extraction period PD are displayed.
  • the setting information updating unit 131 When the setting information to be changed is selected by the operator, the setting information updating unit 131 causes the operator terminal 20 to display a screen for the operator to input new setting information. When a new value or function is input by the operator, the setting information updating unit 131 sets the value or function of the setting information stored in the setting information storage unit 142 to the value or function newly input by the operator. Update.
  • the update of the setting information by the setting information update unit 131 may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update operation by the operator.
  • the setting information updating unit 131 notifies the user that updating to new setting information will be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed, using the new setting information acquired by the updating operation by the operator.
  • the setting information stored in the setting information storage unit 142 may be updated for the first time after a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification.
  • the change of setting information monitors the transmission / reception state of data between the user terminal 30 and the management server 10 at the information providing site on behalf of the operator, and is artificial intelligence designed to derive desirable setting information. It may be done by
  • the authentication unit 132 performs login control of the user who has accessed the job change site.
  • the management server 10 receives an authentication request including user ID and password information from the user terminal 30, the authentication unit 132 determines the user terminal based on the user ID and password information included in the user information table T1. Perform authentication processing of the user who operates 30.
  • the authentication unit 132 can also perform login control of the operator. For example, the user information and password of the operator are stored in the user information table T1, and the user ID and password included in the authentication request match the user ID and password of the operator stored in the user information table T1. In this case, the authentication unit 132 authenticates that the sender of the authentication request is the operator.
  • the point consumption unit 133 subtracts the point of the user from the request from the user terminal 30, and then permits the request processing unit 135 to execute the process.
  • the management server 10 receives, from the user terminal 30, the various requests to be processed by the request processing unit 135 by the user authenticated as the second user by the authentication unit 132, the point consumption unit 133 consumes Referring to the discount rate of the second user at the point correspondence table T2 and the user information table T1, the type of the received request, calculates the number of points to be subtracted.
  • the point consumption unit 133 is a point to be subtracted from the balance of the oldest record whose balance is not 0 among the records pertaining to the acquisition of points recorded in the point gain and loss history T7 of the second user.
  • the point subtraction processing is performed for each recording until the number is reached, and when the points acquired by the transfer from the first user are subtracted, notification processing to the point reduction unit 134 is performed.
  • the second user issues a request for updating the web page on July 10, and the point consumer unit 133 responds to the request by the second user.
  • the number of points to be subtracted from the points held by is calculated to be 350 points.
  • the point consumption unit 133 first subtracts all 300 points from the balance 300 points of the July 1st record to subtract points from the oldest record, the July 1st record.
  • the balance of the July 1 record is updated to 0 points, and the user ID is recorded with reference to the transfer source information of the record.
  • the user ID of the transfer source user is associated with the number of points (300 in the case of this example) subtracted from the recording, and notified to the point reduction unit 134.
  • the point consuming unit 133 can subtract 300 points out of 350 points to be subtracted. Subsequently, the point consumption unit 133 subtracts the remaining 50 points from the next oldest record, the July 5 record.
  • the balance for the July 5 record is 100 points, so 50 points will remain after subtracting 50 points.
  • the point consumption unit 133 updates the balance for the July 5 record to 50 points, refers to the information of the transfer source for the record, and the user ID is Since the information is not recorded, the process is ended without notifying the point reducing unit 134.
  • the point consumption unit 133 newly records the date and time, the number of points, and details in the point gain and loss history T7 as shown in FIG. It transmits to the part 135.
  • the number of points recorded here can be a number obtained by adding a minus sign to the number of points to be subtracted. Also, in detail, a record may be made to indicate that the consumption is for updating the web page.
  • the point consumption unit 133 transmits a warning notifying that points to the user is insufficient, the request Delete or hold
  • Point reduction section 134 based on the user ID and subtracted points of information transferable original user notified from the point consumption portion 133 imparts a point to the first user is the transfer origin.
  • Point reduction section 134 the first user point tradeoffs history T7 that correspond to the user ID notified from the point consumption unit 133, date and time, the number of points and detail records.
  • the number of points, the third point function F5 points to be given, which is calculated from the number of points to be subtracted notified from the point consumption portion 133 is recorded, in particular, points in the transferee A record is made to show that it is a reduction due to consumption.
  • the request processing unit 135 performs processing for responding to various requests from the user terminal 30.
  • the request processing unit 135 performs various functional processing such as a browsing processing unit 135a, a search processing unit 135b, a web page update processing unit 135c, a posting processing unit 135d, a point transfer processing unit 135e, and an evaluation processing unit 135f described in detail below. It has a department.
  • the functions of the request processing unit 135 are not limited to those performed by these function processing units, and functions generally used on a website may be added as appropriate.
  • the application may be provided with these function processing units.
  • the browsing processor 135 a belongs to the request processor 135 and provides a web page according to the request from the user terminal 30.
  • Function of the browsing processing part 135a of the present embodiment is substantially the features and the general web server has similar basically, the call-originating user and information of the user which area information is not at all match the viewing request Has the feature that it is not provided to the user who is the request originator. As a result, unnecessary information for the user who has sent the browsing request can be excluded in advance, so that it is possible to reduce the effort for the user to find out the necessary information.
  • the browsing processing part 135a if included the inventory or the like on a web page to be provided to the user terminal 30, web page insert ads elected by the display information selecting unit 138b to be described later to the inventory Can be provided to the user terminal 30.
  • the browsing processing unit 135a may receive a browsing request of various histories from the user terminal 30.
  • the evaluation history T5 stored in the evaluation history storage unit 143 indicates the request by the user who is the sender of the request.
  • An evaluation record based on a service usage act can be extracted and provided to the user terminal 30 as a service usage history of the user.
  • the user terminal 30 may display a point acquisition history T7 corresponding to the user who is the sender of the request, which receives the browsing request regarding the acquisition history of points and is stored in the point history storage unit 144. .
  • the user terminal 30 receives the deposit request T2 about the deposit request T4 to receive the browse request for the increase / decrease history of deposit, and stored in the deposit / deposit history memory unit 145 corresponding to the first user who is the sender of the request. it may be displayed on.
  • the search processing unit 135 b belongs to the request processing unit 135 and selects and presents information that meets the conditions included in the information search request from the user terminal 30.
  • the function of the search processing unit 135b is substantially the same as a general information search function, but when generating the search result display screen, higher-order information is generated based on the display order determined by the display order determination unit 138c described later. Are placed in an advantageous position that is more easily visible to viewers.
  • the web page update processing unit 135c updates the web page belonging to the request processing unit 135 and allocated exclusively to each user, in response to the user's request.
  • the management server 10 receives a request for updating a web page from the user terminal 30
  • the web page update processing unit 135c acquires the address of the web page dedicated to the user from the user information table T1
  • a screen for editing a web page dedicated to the user is displayed on the user terminal 30.
  • the web page update processing unit 135c receives the information on the new web page after being edited by the user, the web page update processing unit 135c stores the information on the web page dedicated to the user stored in the web page information storage unit 146. , Update the information on the new web page after editing.
  • the web page update process part 135c receives the upload request
  • the existing file can be updated or a new file can be stored in the space allocated to the user in question.
  • the post processing unit 135d belongs to the request processing unit 135, and receives a request from the user terminal 30 for posting a column, a question, and the like.
  • the post processing unit 135 d has, for example, a function of a general electronic bulletin board, and stores the posted information in the web page information etc. storage unit 146.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e belongs to the request processing unit 135, and performs processing of moving points in response to a request from the first user.
  • the unit 135e first acquires the deposit amount from the deposit history T8 of the first user who has sent the request.
  • the point transfer unit 135e includes a fee function F7, calculates a fee from the number of points to be transferred, it compares the acquired deposit amount. If the acquired deposit amount is equal to or more than the calculated fee, point transfer processing as described below is performed.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e first performs subtraction processing for the number of points transferred in the point gain and loss history T7 of the first user who has sent the request, and the date and time, the number of points transferred, and the user of the transfer destination user Make a record of the ID and the loss of points due to assignment.
  • the specific procedure of the process is the same as the point subtraction process in the point consumption unit 133, so the description will be omitted.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e sets the date and time, the fee amount calculated from the number of points to be transferred by the fee function F7, as a new deposit reduction record to the deposit history T8 of the first user who has sent the request. and, to record the effect that a reduction on the sale.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e records, in the point acquisition history T7 of the transfer destination user, the fact that a predetermined number of points have been acquired by transfer. Specifically, the point transfer processing unit 135e acquires the date and time, the number of points transferred, the user ID of the first user who has sent the request that is the transfer source, and the transfer by means of transfer as recording of new point acquisition. to records that is.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e does not perform the above-described point transfer processing, and deposits the amount to the user terminal 30 that has sent the request. Issue a warning informing that there is not enough, and delete or hold the request.
  • the factor for the point transfer processing unit 135e to start processing is not limited to the request from the first user for transferring points.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e receives points from the user terminal 30, including the information of the second user who has sent a request, the number of points to be transferred, and the first user of the transfer source, from the user terminal 30. Based on the receipt of the request for the transfer, the first user designated as the transfer source is notified to confirm the presence or absence of the intention to transfer, and the first user has the intention to transfer After obtaining the answer, processing after the comparison between the fee and the deposit amount described above may be performed.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e may, conversely, receive a request from the first user for transferring points, and confirm whether or not the user of the transfer destination intends to receive the points.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e uses the number of points to be transferred by the fee function F7 instead of leaving a record of deposit reductions in the deposit history T8 of the first user who has sent a request for transferring points. Send a notice to the operator to pay the calculated fee amount to the first user.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e records a fee to be charged to each first user, and for each fixed period, each first The commissions to be charged to the users of may be notified to each first user. Also, the history of fees recorded in this process is useful information for managing the funds for the operator and the first user.
  • Evaluation processing unit 135f belongs to the request processing unit 135, the evaluation made by the user with respect to information published in the career sites, recorded in the evaluation history storage unit 143 as an evaluation value to be reflected in benefits.
  • a check box or the like is provided for the reader to input an evaluation of the column or the like.
  • the management server 10 receives information for identifying the column or the like and the evaluation.
  • the evaluation processing unit 135f refers to the article evaluation value correspondence table T4, with obtaining the evaluation value from the evaluation, from the information for identifying the column and the like of the user who originated the column or the like Get user ID. Subsequently, the evaluation processing unit 135f is the article evaluation history T6 recording, date, author's user ID, such as the column, and the evaluation value obtained from the article evaluation value correspondence table T4, as new articles rated recording Do.
  • the evaluation value recording unit 136 calculates an evaluation value to be reflected in the benefit for each process performed by the request processing unit 135, and records information on each process including the evaluation value in the evaluation history storage unit 143.
  • the evaluation value recording unit 136 calculates an evaluation value from the content of the process with reference to the evaluation value correspondence table T3. Subsequently, in the evaluation history T5, the date and time when the process was performed, the user ID of the user who requested the process, the type of the process, and the evaluation value calculated from the action are used as new evaluation records. Record.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates a benefit index value based on the evaluation value regarding each user stored in the evaluation history storage unit 143.
  • Benefits index value calculation section 137 every time elapses benefits index value calculating interval IV, a first privilege index value affects the priority when displaying information about each user, point or incentives, etc.
  • the second benefit index value that affects the grant of benefits having direct monetary value is calculated respectively.
  • the benefits index value calculation section 137 updates the first privilege index value and the second privilege index value of each user stored in the user information storage unit 141, the numerical value newly calculated.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 may execute the process each time a new evaluation value is recorded in the evaluation history storage unit 143 instead of being executed at every specific index value calculation interval IV. In this case, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 may execute the process only for the user related to the newly recorded evaluation value.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates the first benefit index value based on the first benefit index value function F1. Taking the function exemplified in the description of the first benefit index value function F1 as an example, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates the first benefit index value of a certain user by comparing the first benefit index value of a certain user. calculated by the processing as described below. First, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 extracts the evaluation value having no area dependency regarding the user from the record after the extraction starting point in the evaluation history T5, and calculates the sum of the extracted evaluation values ( to get the total regional-independent evaluation value) related to the user.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 extracts an evaluation value having area dependency regarding the user from the record after the extraction starting point in the evaluation history T5, and the user uses the record after the extraction starting point in the article evaluation history T6. to extract the evaluation value for outgoing information. Then, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 obtains (the sum of evaluation values having area dependency with respect to the user) by calculating the sum of the extracted evaluation values. Furthermore, the privilege index value calculation unit 137 extracts a user whose partial user or all of the user's area information matches the user information table T1 (a part or all of the user information and the local information but to get the match the total number of users to be). The benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates the first benefit index value of the user by substituting each value obtained in this way into the first benefit index value function F1.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates the second benefit index value based on the second benefit index value function F2.
  • the benefit index value calculation unit 137 extracts the evaluation value for the user from the record after the extraction starting point in the evaluation history T5, and the extraction starting point in the article evaluation history T6 the user from the recording and extracts an evaluation value for outgoing information for. Then, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates a second benefit index value by adding up all the extracted evaluation values.
  • the privilege imparting unit 138 updates the information related to the privilege of each user stored in the storage unit 140 based on the recording or the like by the evaluation value recording unit 136.
  • the privilege giving unit 138 includes a first point giving unit 138a, a display information selecting unit 138b, a display order determining unit 138c, a display rate calculating unit 137c, a second point giving unit 138d, an incentive payment unit 138e, and a discount, which will be described in detail below.
  • the rate calculator 138 f is provided.
  • First point granting section 138a Each time the process in the evaluation value recording unit 136 is performed, the first point application unit 138a calculates the number of points to be provided to each user based on each evaluation value, and the user is given to each user Perform point grant processing.
  • the first point giving unit 138a first sends the first point function F3 to the user regarding the evaluation record based on the evaluation value included in the evaluation record. Calculate the number of points to be awarded.
  • the first point giving unit 138a acquires the date and time, the calculated number of points, and the benefit as a new point acquisition record in the point acquisition history T7 of the user having the user ID included in the evaluation record. Record the effect.
  • the display information selection unit 138b belongs to the privilege giving unit 138, and when the browsing processing unit 135a needs to provide a web page including an advertisement space, the information to be displayed in the advertisement space is selected.
  • the display information selection unit 138 b selects, for example, information to be displayed in the advertisement space from among the advertisements created by each user.
  • the display information selection unit 138 b causes the information providing site to preferentially display information on the user whose first benefit index value is larger.
  • the display information selection unit 138b refers to the first benefit index value of the user information table T1 and selects the advertisement created by the user with the larger first benefit index value to have a higher selection frequency. Do the processing.
  • the display order determination unit 138c belongs to the privilege imparting unit 138 and determines the display order of the information selected by the process of the search processing unit 135b.
  • the display order determination unit 138c refers to the first benefit index value of the user regarding each of the selected information, and information on the user with the larger first benefit index value. Make a ranking so that is higher.
  • the second point granting unit 138d belongs to the privilege giving unit 138, calculates the number of points given to each user based on the second benefit index value of each user, and performs point giving processing for each user.
  • the second point assignment unit 138d is updated based on the second benefit index value of each user in the user information table T1 by the second point function F4. Calculate the number of points to be given to each user, and record the date and time, the calculated number of points, and the fact that it has been acquired as a benefit as a new point acquisition record in the point gain and loss history T7 of each user .
  • the second point provision unit 138d may strip points from the user when the second benefit index value corresponding to the user does not reach the predetermined value. For example, when the calculated number of points is a negative value, the second point provision unit 138 d may deprive the user of the number of points corresponding to the absolute value of the calculated value. In this case, the second point giving unit 138d performs the same process as the point subtraction process by the point consumption unit 133 on the point gain and loss history T7 of the user, and records that the operator has deprived the points.
  • the second point granting unit 138d applies the number of points given to each user by the process of the first point granting unit 138a instead of giving each user the number of points based on the second benefit index value.
  • a ratio (hereinafter, referred to as a “point ratio”) for premium or discount may be calculated from the quantity obtained by the one-point function F3.
  • the constant C8 is a value set by the operator and expected as the second benefit index value of the user.
  • the constant C8 may be an average value or the like of the second benefit index values of all the users.
  • the first point giving unit 138a When referring to the point ratio, when a new evaluation record is recorded in the evaluation history T5, the first point giving unit 138a performs the evaluation based on the evaluation value included in the evaluation record by the first point function F3. to calculate the standard value of the point given to the user about the record. Furthermore, the first point giving unit 138a calculates the number of points actually given to the user by multiplying the standard value by the point ratio of the user.
  • Incentive money granting unit 138e belongs to privilege granting unit 138, calculates the incentive amount to be paid to each first user based on the second benefit index value of each first user, and encourages each user Perform the money supply process.
  • the incentive fee provision unit 138e uses the incentive fee function F8 to set the second benefit index value of each first user in the user information table T1. Calculate the amount of incentive to be paid to each first user based on the above.
  • the incentive payment unit 138e records the date and time, the calculated incentive amount, and the increase due to the payment of the incentive payment as a new deposit increase / decrease record in the deposit history T8 of each first user. .
  • the incentive payment unit 138e charges the fee collected from each first user by the processing of the point transfer processing unit 135e. May be calculated as a rate (hereinafter referred to as a “fee rate”) for adding or discounting the amount obtained by the fee function F7.
  • the fee ratio may be calculated by referring to a function similar to the function F10, similarly to the point ratio.
  • the point transfer processing unit 135e calculates the standard amount of the fee from the number of points to be transferred included in the request by the fee function F7 in response to the request for transferring the points. Furthermore, the point transfer processing unit 135e calculates the amount of the fee actually collected from the first user by multiplying the calculated standard amount by the fee ratio of the first user who is the sender of the request. to.
  • Discount rate calculation unit 138f belongs to the privilege granting unit 138, based on the second award index value of each second user, the discount rate of the number of points each second user to consume in order to use the service Calculate
  • the discount rate calculation unit 138f uses the discount rate function F9 to set the second benefit index value for each second user in the user information table T1.
  • the discount rate calculation unit 138 f updates the discount rates corresponding to the respective second users in the user information table T 1 to the calculated discount rates.
  • the deposit processing unit 139 acquires a deposit record from the server 40 of the financial institution, updates the deposit amount of the depositor of the first user who is the depositor to the amount obtained by adding the deposit amount, and deposits to the first user. Grant points according to the amount.
  • the deposit processing unit 139 refers to the user information table T1 and is a depositor from the deposit ID included in the deposit record. Identify the first user.
  • the deposit processing unit 139 adds a deposit date and time included in the deposit record, a deposit amount included in the deposit record, and an increase due to deposit to the deposit history T8 of the first user as a new deposit increase and decrease record Record that it is.
  • the deposit processing unit 139 acquires the deposit amount after deposit record reflection and the highest deposit balance after the deposit history T8 of the first user, and the first point use by the fourth point function F6. it may calculate the number of points to be given to the person.
  • the deposit processing unit 139 records, as a new point acquisition history, the date and time, the calculated number of points, and the fact that it is acquired by deposit in the point gain and loss history T7 of the first user.
  • the control unit 130 may be provided with a point management unit that manages an expiration date until a point is given and then used.
  • the point management unit monitors the point acquisition history T7 of each user and performs processing of changing the balance to 0 for the records for which the expiration date has passed since the points were acquired among the records for which the points were acquired.
  • the expiration date of points is a type of setting information and is set by the operator.
  • FIG. 34 is a list of objects that can be the first user and the second user at various information provision sites. According to the management system, it is possible to provide a wide variety of information provision sites related to the market centering on the intermediary, such as the marriage activity site, the real estate site, and the insurance site shown in FIG.
  • an intermediary means a person who controls information properly and seeks appropriate matching between a consumer and a supplier, and as a result of organizing and releasing collected or created information based on a certain theme , Bloggers, columnists, writers, journalists, etc., who may also play a role in mediating the demander and the supplier.
  • An information provider or an information user may be an intermediary.
  • the information provision site taken up in FIG. 34 is an example to the last, and the information provision site which can be provided by point management system S2 is not limited to these.
  • the information providing site provided by the point management system S2 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the information providing site provided by the web browser as described above.
  • it is an information providing site in which the user executes a dedicated application for the user to use the information providing site on the user terminal 30, and the application causes the output device to output the content received from the management server 10, it may be.
  • the information providing site provided by the point management system S2 according to the present embodiment may be constructed as a virtual reality world using VR technology and provided to the user by an output device such as a head mounted display.
  • a media market which is one virtual market that can be created in a virtual market
  • virtual reality means other values, including real-world currency, which are generated and distributed in the virtual market and used as means for mediating the movement of the existing value in the virtual market. It is an entity such as a currency with limited value in exchangeable virtual market, for example, as real market real society has currency such as legal currency which is a means to mediate value, virtual market It means that there will be virtual reality.
  • virtual currency has no real substance, has value only in the virtual market, and the method of creating is not to create in the market in exchange for other assets, so the traditional currency However, based on the arrangements of the virtual market, it is a means of mediating the value that can be taken in any distribution form. Note that so-called virtual currency such as bitcoin does not meet the virtual currency mentioned here.
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic view showing an example of the virtual reality supply system according to the fifth embodiment.
  • the virtual reality supply system is a user interface of a communicable terminal such as a personal computer (PC), a tablet, a mobile phone, a television, a car navigation, a home game machine, or a robot using a virtual market.
  • a communicable terminal such as a personal computer (PC), a tablet, a mobile phone, a television, a car navigation, a home game machine, or a robot using a virtual market.
  • SNS social networks service
  • metaverses software, or virtual markets
  • cloud computing Built in the city, the user of the virtual market is a system of order to dress affect each other.
  • Component 1 “Information Handled Mainly in Media Market” will be described.
  • the information mainly handled here is four data listed below, it does not disturb the handling of these other information, and shall be changed according to the situation according to circumstances. Further, the information mainly handled here may be "all works that can be converted into data”. (1) “Language data etc.” Journalists, columnists, essayists or critics, etc. works such as language data etc.
  • Component 2 “Information to be followeded in the Media Market” will be described.
  • the component 1 information to be handled mainly
  • the information handled as subordinate is made into the following three information, handling of other information is not disturbed and shall be changed according to the situation according to the situation.
  • Company information business information, business conditions, employment information, employment information, guidance information, or business information sent by a company that sends information to the public or target company (local government, Corporations or non-profit organizations such as NPOs)
  • Personal information Activity area information, activity time information, ability information, aptitude information, or personal information transmitted by an individual who sends information such as guidance information (individuals prescribed by the so-called personal information protection law)
  • Appeal information limited to work that can not identify an individual for the purpose of acquiring an offer from a business, not information.
  • Advertising information additionally transmitted to the public or the target by "advertising" operators and individuals
  • component 3 "subjects who participate in the media market". There are three main actors participating in the media market, but they do not prevent the participation of other main actors, and they can be changed according to the circumstances.
  • the first user of "Associates” or the first user (hereinafter referred to as "Associates") Associates is the "first user” who is the primary acquirer of the first virtual reality (hereinafter simply referred to as virtual reality) supplied by the operator, to the media market by the virtual reality supply system.
  • Valuable information such as “language data etc.”, “moving image data etc.”, “work data etc.”, “beneficial information data etc.” mentioned in the above-mentioned component 1 intended to be evaluated by others It is an entity that provides to other users through the media market.
  • a business entity is an entity that sends out information that it wants to obtain or send out valuable information provided by Associates, whether paid or not.
  • An individual is an entity that sends out information that it wants to obtain or send out valuable information provided by Associates, whether paid or not.
  • An individual is an entity that transfers virtual reality from Associates and uses media market.
  • the component 4 "object to provide service” will be described.
  • the targets in the real market that the media market provides services are as follows.
  • (2) "Participant" Media market target participants are associates who intend to provide valuable information as copyrighted works to other users, as well as individuals who wish to acquire or transmit information, and businesses.
  • the infrastructure requirements necessary for using the media market are the application for logging in to the media market, connected to the communication network for transmitting and receiving data to and from the server of the operator. There is an environment where participants can use the information processing terminal equipment.
  • the media market according to the above components is represented as one form of virtual market, but the virtual market of the present embodiment is to connect a plurality of virtual markets in parallel to function.
  • users can easily move to other virtual markets, for example, there may be a virtual market that provides a meeting place for men and women, We believe that there may be a virtual market that promotes the sale and sale of real estate, and there may also be exhibition facilities for houses using VR technology, exhibition facilities for cars, and tourist facilities such as attraction facilities. That is, in this embodiment, the problem solving ability can be further enhanced in this embodiment, and these are considered as the best mode as a whole.
  • one form of virtual market is to facilitate the distribution of virtual currency throughout the virtual market including media market, that is, to facilitate the purchase and sale of virtual currency that associates are acquiring and intending to transfer to other users.
  • the “Valcharancy Trading Exchange” hereinafter referred to as “Trading Exchange”
  • the problem solving power can be further enhanced, and the virtual market group as an integral unit including the exchange is considered as the best mode.
  • the rights acquired as Associates do not extend to the business members even with the same account.
  • a business member a who has an Associates side account in the media market may not consume the business as a business member in the media market and other virtual markets, even if he holds a large amount of virtual reality as the associate a '. Can not. If you want to consume virtual capital as a business member, whether it is a 'or a', a 'from the side a' of the Associates to the side a of the business member just as you transfer virtual reality to other users. You have to transfer the virtual currency.
  • a that has the aspect of the business member can use each virtual market as the business member a through the entire virtual market group, but a virtual market where a is somewhere If you want to act as an associate at a, in each market a must take the prescribed procedures.
  • an individual an entity that has basically the same function as a business member.
  • the second user in the media market includes an individual (hereinafter referred to as an individual member) in addition to the business member.
  • the individual members basically have the same function as the business members, and it is not impossible to have the aspect of the Associates only if they are recognized by the operator. (For example, with regard to an individual who is a celebrity and that the operator recognizes as having the ability to transmit information, the operator may be invited to be registered with Associates as a columnist or essayist.)
  • the server also has the function of evaluating the information transmission act for individual members (as well as business members) (it also has the function of evaluating the information acquisition act) Discounting the consumption of virtual currency associated with superior use of the media market (see first consumption activity described later), based on the evaluation value, to have the same meaning as the grant of virtual currency to associates In order to be able to distribute virtual currency free of charge (see the consumption tax and basic income described later) or as a basic income. The same applies to business members.
  • the virtual reality supply system process of “the virtual reality supply based on the setting information and performed by the server based on evaluation” is not only the assignment of virtual reality to the associates but also the virtual reality for the whole user. It also includes the function of “control” of the entire virtual market including the media market by “supply control” of And all these start are started from "the evaluation to the user based on setting information (calculation of the evaluation value to the user's action based on setting information)".
  • ⁇ a ' which is active in the aspect of Associates, has a virtual currency grant based on an evaluation value calculated based on setting information.
  • the evaluation value and the amount of virtual currency given are the setting information set in advance by the operator, the evaluation of the service usage act of a 'by the server (information provision act), and a' from other users. If there is also an evaluation on information provision by a user (such as a simple act ⁇ like!
  • the user's information acquisition act ⁇ browsing is inferred from data transmission and reception between the user terminal and the server It is determined based on the time, the operation while browsing, the number of browsing users, the total number of these, etc.) and the evaluation and assignment by various algorithms stored in the storage unit. This process is the starting point of the supply of virtual reality to the virtual market.
  • a 'having a side of columnist Associates in the media market posts a column as an associate, free of charge, partially paid, or all paid, and this is viewed or downloaded by other users.
  • the server calculates an evaluation value taking into account the amount of the content of the act itself that posted the column, and temporarily assigns virtual reality to a ′ based on the calculated evaluation value.
  • the server evaluates, based on the setting information, how other users have evaluated the copyright column provided by a over a predetermined period of time as a grant to a 'of secondary virtual reality. A value is calculated, and virtuality is given to a 'in a secondary (every predetermined period).
  • Evaluation value for reading time upper rank reading time evaluation value reading time x b + reading time x b' x (reading time / total Reading time) + b " (3) "Reader evaluation value”
  • the viewer evaluation value is calculated by referring to the evaluation number (total number of likes)-(total number of likes) obtained by the free content in a predetermined period, and the total number of acquired ⁇ .
  • the free content delivery evaluation value is calculated by referring to the total amount of free content (number of transmissions x internal capacity) sent by the associate during a predetermined period.
  • the operator can control the degree of evaluation for free content and associates by arbitrarily updating the setting information, and the free content provided for the virtual market including the media market can be controlled.
  • the quality and quantity can be increased and guided in the intended direction.
  • evaluation correction algorithm is added to the evaluation algorithm (and the virtual reality assignment algorithm). This does not treat all evaluations by the other users with respect to the information provided by the Associates equally, but evaluates the user, who is the evaluator, the Associates, who is the evaluator, and the provided information, which is the object to be evaluated. And is a process of correcting the evaluation value.
  • the information provided by the Associates who has caused the user to acquire information that the user usually does not obtain much is highly evaluated, and the Associates are highly evaluated, while the user is usually well
  • the economic review column c which is read by the individual member b who reads the gossip column frequently, is regarded as highly appreciated by the individual member b, and the individual member who reads the economic comment column well.
  • the evaluation from the individual member d to the economic criticism column c which d was to read is lower than the evaluation from the individual member b to the economic criticism column c.
  • the weight of the evaluation is significantly different between when the same person continues to evaluate the same person without reflection, and when a new person starts to evaluate a new person” Therefore, it aims to maximize the value of the media market by adjusting the supply balance of the virtual reality to make it easier for new associates of Associates and user innovation to occur.
  • the server is easy to be acquired by the user from the information acquisition act of the user in the past predetermined period acquiring information provided by the associates in the virtual market group such as media market based on the setting information stored in advance in the server Calculate the provided information category and the information acquisition rate of the associate who is an information provider who is easily acquired.
  • the evaluation correction rate for the act of acquiring the information provided by the user's associates is calculated, and the evaluation value is corrected by adding an evaluation. Adjust the balance of the amount of virtual currency assigned to the Associates based on the value.
  • 0 Based on the provided information category that has not been acquired by the user and the information acquisition rate of associates that have not been acquired, and based on the acquired acquired information category and the acquired frequency of acquired associates, 0 Calculate the information acquisition rate for a predetermined period (for example, one week, one month, or one year) of the user between 100 and 100, and subtract this from 100 (calculate the rate at which information is not acquired), In the calculated value, a coefficient as setting information stored in advance in the server (for example, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 1.5 or 2.0, 10.0, 100.0, 1000.0, etc. ) And add 100 to this. Then, division is performed so that the maximum value of the calculated values is 1, and various evaluation correction rates are derived.
  • a coefficient as setting information stored in advance in the server for example, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 1.5 or 2.0, 10.0, 100.0, 1000.0, etc.
  • calculation formula may be anything, for example, it may be changed into calculation formula that the upper and lower width of correction factor becomes larger or smaller, and by updating setting information, the operator can calculate what kind of function It can also be set.
  • the charging process is executed for each "transfer" process, and posting (storage of processing data) is made in the system cash passbook of the server established in advance in the Associates, and is posted in the virtual currency passbook of the server established in advance by the user. (The process data is stored). In other words, bookkeeping remembers when, to whom (from whom), what, what, how, what, what, how much, and how the virtual currency supplied to the virtual market is distributed, and to which the server is charged Associates are in a mode of constructing a database capable of grasping collectively what activities they are doing and how they are charged (causing accounts payable).
  • the Associates may be forced to recover from the second user the unused portion (retention) of virtual currency that has been transferred to the second user, assuming that there is an irregular It is giving the function.
  • the operator shall provide the Associates with a sales incentive fee (having a nature of refund). It is possible to And this will also be registered in the system cash passbook.
  • the sales incentive money is a tax refund function, which is equivalent to reducing the Associates' debt, which has the effect of improving the operator's ability to control the virtual market.
  • the exchange there are participants as an aspect of Associates and (second aspect) a second user.
  • participants from virtual markets other than the media market in the exchange and as a whole virtual market group, it is in a form to promote circulation of virtual currency in one exchange.
  • the exchange will be attended by various people in the real world and all users who are individuals and businesses with various backgrounds.
  • the virtual lancy distributed in the virtual market has all existing expiration dates (durations that can be kept after being acquired) are set based on setting information that can be updated by the operator, for example, It makes it impossible for users to buy and sell virtual currency for investment or speculative purposes and to operate virtual markets in a way that is advantageous to them.
  • the server controls the virtual market by updating the setting information, based on the transition of the price of the virtual currency derived from the status of this transaction (for example, the buying order is strong and the value of the virtual currency is relatively increased) If it is the situation, update the setting information to increase the amount of virtual currency supply to the virtual market newly, or conversely, if the sell order is strong and the purchase order is weak, to reduce the amount of virtual chargeability to be newly supplied.
  • the setting information is updated.
  • the operator has the function to charge for the Associates when the Associates transfer the virtual reality to (the aspect of) the second user. Because it is an exchange, it does not require processing to collect another new fee, and it is unified to collection processing of virtual currency transfer fee.
  • Another function of the exchange is the exchange of virtual currency of associates. This is because, when there is an associate who has as a customer a second user who can sell a large amount of virtual currency in a local transaction, the associate (generated and provided by the virtual space supply system) produces the virtual associate. If the amount of currency alone does not keep up with the demand of the second user, the Associates gather virtual capitals from the other Associates, and the Associates put together this for the second User. By selling, it is possible to meet the demand of the second user.
  • the exchange has a mechanism to eliminate the supply-demand gap between virtual currency areas (anything between cities, municipalities, prefectures, and nations). It can be said that By doing this, the circulation of virtual reality will be further promoted, and the speed of information circulation in the media market will have the effect of further accelerating.
  • the server may display the exchange price of the amount automatically deducting the transfer fee scheduled to be collected from the Associates who made the selling order, and For the Associates who are trying to do so, it will be better if the public order is made for the purchase order at a price that takes into account the transfer fee charged at the time of sale to the second user after the deal.
  • the Associates who are selling Virtual Carence it is possible for the Associates who are selling Virtual Carence to become the Associates as a result, even though the exchange price to be promised is reduced from the exchange price of the selling order, There is no charge for the transfer fee in the case of sale to a third party, so it is said to be the same as the exchange price obtained by selling virtual currency to the second party.
  • the above-mentioned transaction function of the virtual currency exchange is the same as the transaction function of the transaction locally.
  • the local trade and the exchange trade are mutually related, and together they constitute a virtual currency trading transaction.
  • the "evaluation and correction algorithm reflecting the difference in purchasing power for each subject group” will be described.
  • the evaluation is made to reflect the difference in the first consumption price for each group of subjects, that is, the purchasing power. Then, based on the corrected evaluation, grant virtual ralche to Associates who are the assessors, and provide virtual ralca to virtual market appropriately.
  • a value (evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor) is calculated such that the evaluation total amount of each subject group (subject evaluation total amount) is equal to the first consumption of each subject group (first consumption of the subject group).
  • Evaluation purchasing power multiple factor subject group first consumption / subject group evaluation total amount (2)
  • the evaluation value (purchasing power reflecting evaluation value) for associates and gratis contents belonging to each subject group reflecting the purchasing power difference is calculated.
  • Purchasing power reflection evaluation value original evaluation value ⁇ evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor (3)
  • the virtual reality supply system executes the subsequent processing using the purchasing power reflection evaluation value.
  • the currency supply system can, based on the calculated evaluation value (purchasing power reflection evaluation value), provide virtual currency to the Associates who are the assessors, and can supply virtual currency to the virtual market. It is a thing. Also, by doing this, efficient information distribution that is not affected by economic disparities between countries (between regions) will be conducted in the virtual market, and evaluation values will be updated as needed (purchasing power reflection evaluation values In this way, it is possible to absorb in real time the changes in economic disparities accompanying the change of the times, and it is also expected that the time lag of changes will not occur.
  • the evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor calculated here is an existence like purchasing power parity, and serves as an index representing the difference in purchasing power between groups of entities, that is, for example, the difference in purchasing power between countries.
  • evaluation as setting information performed by the operator only sets the evaluation balance of Associates and free content for differences between large and small by the operation of this algorithm, and it is used as a relative evaluation in the virtual market. It becomes possible to operate, and for example, even if the evaluation to be set is absolutely too large or too small, it will be corrected to the evaluation of the amount commensurate with the consumption of the virtual market as a result. It is possible to give an assessor a value as an evaluation (purchasing power reflection evaluation value) in which purchasing power based on market consumption is reflected on gratis provided information (free content) provided for no charge.
  • the paid content provided by Associates (for example, from the second consumption activity in a small group of evaluation purchasing power multiples (for example, India) is compared with the paid content provided by Associates in a large group of evaluation purchasing powers (for example, Japan)
  • the price competencies are high, and the willingness to provide paid contents of the associates in the group of entities having a large evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor may decline.
  • the second consumption price has been increased as a function to make a mechanism to solve only the problem inherent in the virtual market such as the media market while maintaining the aspect (benefitability) of the duty as a protective policy.
  • Associates of the subject group A send paid content with an arbitrary amount of virtual currency (second consumption price)
  • Evaluation of the sent content sent The subject group B whose purchasing power ratio is higher than that of the subject group A If the second user of is trying to purchase, the second consumption price for the second user of the subject group B according to the ratio of the evaluation purchasing power multiple of the subject group A and the evaluation purchasing power multiple of the subject group B Is displayed.
  • Second consumption price displayed Second consumption price of paid content arbitrarily set by Associates of subject group A ⁇ Evaluation of subject group B (subject group with high evaluation purchasing power factor) Purchasing power ratio / Subject group A (evaluation purchasing power ratio factor (3) Evaluation of purchasing power factor of (higher target group) (2) Second consumption price paid by the second user of the target group B who purchased the paid content transmitted by the associate of the target group A at the displayed second consumption price Of the group A's Associates acquire
  • the optional second consumption price of the paid content that the Associates of India (the above-mentioned subject group A) intends to sell is the second user of India (the same subject group) and the evaluation purchasing power ratio of India.
  • the second user of the lower subject group C for example, Kenya
  • any second consumer price set can be sold as it is, while the second use of Japan (subject group B) having a high evaluation purchasing power multiple As for the elderly, it becomes possible to sell them at the second consumption price that reflects the high purchasing power, and the income of Associates in India (Subject Group A) increases, and the Associates in Japan (Group B) An effect is exerted that the second consumption price of the paid content to be provided can not be depressed.
  • This also has the effect of being able to completely reduce the surplus value arising from economic disparities to the Indian associates who created value. In other words, it can be expected to make it easier to raise the economic power of India (subjects with a relatively low evaluation purchasing power multiple).
  • the scope of the group of entities to which the evaluation purchasing power multiple factor is applied is not limited to the state, but may be any area where economic conditions such as prices are considered to be comparable.
  • the correction of the first consumption price between the groups of agents having different evaluation purchasing power multiplying factors will be described.
  • the first consumption price displayed to the second user of India the first consumption price in the same subject group and the subject group having a high evaluation purchasing power multiple (for example, Japan) is displayed as it is.
  • the first consumption price in a group of relatively low evaluated purchasing power multiples for example, India
  • the second user of Japan the subject group B having a relatively high evaluated purchasing power multiple
  • the first consumption price in the subject group A which is displayed to the second user of the subject group B, has an evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor lower than that of the subject group B, the evaluation purchasing power factor of the subject group B and the evaluation of the subject group A
  • the first consumption price (evaluation purchase power multiple reflection first consumption price) according to the ratio of the purchase power multiple is displayed.
  • Subject group with low evaluation purchasing power factor that is displayed to a second user belonging to subject group B with relatively high evaluation purchasing power factor, trying to acquire first consumption price information in subject group A with low evaluation purchasing power factor
  • the price is the first consumption price reflected by the evaluation purchasing power factor, but the second user of the subject group B performs the first consumption activity, and the evaluation purchasing power factor reflection first consumption price is paid Ver Yarukarenshi may be disappeared from the virtual market by cancellation according to the first consumption activities, or the amount of minute of virtual currency was increased from the original first consumption price may be as benefit funds due to basic income algorithm.
  • Ver Yarukarenshi may be disappeared from the virtual market by cancellation according to the first consumption activities, or the
  • the media market is included between the second user whose economic power is weak belonging to the group of entities with low evaluation purchasing power multiple and the second user of high economic power belonging to the subject group with high evaluation purchasing power multiple. While strengthening market competition principle in the first consumption activity of the virtual market and exerting the effect of activating the consumption activity in the virtual market, it also corrects the factor that hinders the people's economic activity due to the economic disparities between countries Exert an effect.
  • cryptocurrency virtual virtual reality
  • a block chain using storage area and communication network of information processing terminal equipment such as user's computer. It is possible to add the function of supplying currency, cryptocurrency, or existence called cryptographic asset etc., also for the purpose of reducing payment load.
  • the first and second users who use the exchange have their own accounts created in advance on the block chain that the operator also constructs as one account. Then, on this block chain, the operator supplies cryptocurrency using the method of ICO. This cryptocurrency is used as a means of payment for purchasing a virtual currency on the exchange.
  • the flow is as follows. (1) The user acquires an account on the virtual market and on the block chain (2) The user participates in or trades in the ICO and acquires cryptocurrency (acquisition is optional) (3) Associates acquire virtual currency by activity in virtual market (4) Associates and second user exchange virtual currency and cryptocurrency in exchange (5) second user is virtual The activity in the market consumes the virtual currency (6) Associates exchange the cryptocurrency to be acquired for cash etc. which can be used in the real market or store the cryptocurrency as it is (7) The second user needs the necessary cryptocurrency (8) Associates acquire desired virtual reality by the process of (3) From (9), the above process cycles
  • This will allow cryptocurrency to indirectly generate quantified intrinsic value based on consumer market activity and valuation of the virtual market.
  • cryptocurrency can be exchanged at any time to equal the virtual currency, and depending on the balance of the cryptocurrency, the value of the virtual reality will be smaller than 1 although it may be greater than 1 It will disappear if it becomes. Thus, cryptocurrency will have more value than virtual currency.
  • the above cryptocurrency is a non-centralized bitcoin-like cryptocurrency, but the characteristic difference is that the total issue volume is infinite and the amount of cryptocurrency increases according to the balance of supply and demand It is in the part that contains the algorithm to reduce or reduce.
  • the virtual value is generated by the virtual reality, fundamental analysis is also possible, and the economic role in the virtual market is also added, thereby realizing low volatility which is not found in the conventional cryptocurrency, It can be a cryptocurrency that can withstand not only payment methods in the virtual market but also other payment methods in the real world.
  • cryptocurrency can also be exchanged for other values, such transactions as described herein with other virtual reality in other services such as the virtual market described herein.
  • One-to-one exchange is also possible. That is, the virtual currency that connects the value with the cryptocurrency of the aspect described in this specification is infinite, and from this, the distribution total amount of cryptocurrency is the value of the value including the future expectation value of the virtual currency that connects the value.
  • the total amount can, in theory, be expanded infinitely, and can continue to increase market capitalization.
  • the exchange payment means is limited to cryptocurrency
  • cryptocurrency will be charged to the transfer fee payment means charged when the Associates (side) transfers the virtuality to the second user (side) It is effective to use.
  • This is limited to the cryptocurrency of the Associates' responsibilities managed by the system cash passbook of the server, as described in “Transfer of virtual key from first user to second user, and charging and refunding”. Operation.
  • the transfer fee (debt) for transfer of virtual currency in Associates, and the sales incentive fee (reduction of debt) for incentive payment are not limited to the legal currency such as yen, dollar or euro, but limited to cryptocurrency mentioned above. It is said that.
  • the transfer fee paid by the Associates to the operator will be the cryptocurrency even if the exchange consideration of the virtual currency bought by the Associates is the local legal currency.
  • the cryptocurrency mentioned above together with “payment means at the exchange” and “tax payment means at the virtual market”, has a solid economic value of "can be exchanged for virtual currency anytime” (virtual key currency).
  • the “preserving function of value”, “value measuring function”, and “value exchanging function” inherently possessed by the above cryptocurrency function synergistically to establish the function as “currency”. It will be.
  • the “virtual currency control algorithm” and the “crypt currency control algorithm” in the present embodiment integrally form an algorithm, the evaluation from the other party (information provider It is possible to provide "money based on the approval request of the information transferee” and the value transferred to others based on the knowledge desire of the information acquirer, that is, "evaluation-oriented money”.
  • it is a virtual currency whose intrinsic value is the evaluation of others, and a cryptocurrency whose intrinsic value is virtual currency, which is the present embodiment that causes these to function.
  • the size of the credit line granted to the Associates may be linked to the display priority of the Associates (first user) in the prior patent specification "Privilege Management Device", or the Virtual Callacity will be granted. Whether it is linked with the amount, linked with the accumulated payment (tax payment) amount to the operator, or linked with the sales encouragement (refund) amount from the operator, it is considered to be anything. That is, it is a function of a credit card or the like which conventionally exists.
  • the service usage act which is paid, is a function to use the media market in which the user participates more advantageously than other users using it free of charge.
  • advertisement-like use acts such as enabling information to be delivered faster, more, and more appropriately to an object for whom information is desired to be acquired, and information acquired by oneself
  • information collection and use act such as enabling to obtain more quickly, more and more appropriately from the subject that the user wants to provide.
  • it is the consumption of virtual currency that determines the size and priority of the amount and accuracy.
  • first consumption activities by second users The use of these virtual carrances to disappear from the virtual market is referred to as "first consumption activities by second users". And, I think that the first consumption activity in the media market is dominated by the advertising activities of the second user who is a business member. The flow will be described below.
  • Valuable information is provided to the media market by Associates such as reporters who register in the media market, and business members and individual members who intend to acquire this gather. Then, among the gathered business members, a business member who wants to advertise to other users is created, and the virtual consumption is purchased from the Associates, and the first consumption activity in which the virtual reality is consumed (disappears) is performed. And, valuable information is provided by Associates such as reporters, etc., in order to gain the virtual reality that is newly supplied to the media market beyond the volume that will disappear from the media market. Then, a business member who purchases virtual currency from the Associates who has acquired virtual currency, further performs primary consumption activities such as advertising and the like in a way that is advantageous to themselves. And furthermore, business members and individual members who expect the provision of valuable information of associates increase, and these cycle.
  • an associate such as a reporter can set an arbitrary amount of virtual currency and sell content such as a work to be created to other second users.
  • content such as a work to be created to other second users.
  • the content sold by the Associates can be paid by the Virtual currency to the Associates at his own discretion, and the content can be acquired.
  • TV and other media for example, books generally sold in the real world, It will be able to handle even copyrighted works such as music and movies. The flow will be described below.
  • the reporter Associates distributes (displays) only the surface to the media market, setting prices for articles that are considered to be of relatively high value that they should not provide free information.
  • the second user who sees the surface of the article of the said reporter who has been displayed determines the value of the paid content from the free content etc. of the article etc. being delivered free of the said reporter, and pays the virtual reality for the content. Purchase from the relevant reporter. At this time, no charge from the operator for the reporter and the second user is assumed. Then, the reporter sells paid content, transfers the acquired virtual currency to the second user's side and consumes it by itself, or transfers it to other users at a local transaction or exchange. And get paid. On the other hand, the second user who has purchased the paid content transfers from the Associates (or an aspect of Associates) the local transaction or the virtual exchange that he / she needs later, and pays for it.
  • virtual reality from the first consumption activity to the second user's use of services accompanied by the disappearance of virtual reality is "virtual activity by the second consumption activity". It will transfer between users while transferring the ownership right in the market. It is a currency.
  • Virtual media supply to the virtual market group is based on the evaluation of other users and operators for the provision of information (providing free content) by Associates such as reporters in the media market. Starting with the creation of virtual reality on the virtual market and the grant of the virtual reality to the Associates.
  • the virtual currency disappears from the virtual market by the first consumption activity through the second consumption activity.
  • the virtual activity takes a variety of distribution routes from the time it is created in the virtual market until it disappears by the second consumption activity, the virtual reality period has a uniform period of existence. Does not exist.
  • the virtual exchange value of virtual currency can be considered as arbitrary among users. From these things, it seems that the operator can not control the virtual karmic flow disturbance (it is the information circulation trouble itself) due to the fluctuation of the unit exchange value of the virtual currency in the virtual market as a whole. Absent.
  • the operator can control the virtual karmic flow disturbance (which is the information circulation trouble itself) caused by the fluctuation of the unit exchange value of the virtual currency of the whole virtual market.
  • the fact that the virtual reality continues to disappear from the market (2)
  • the server can adjust the supply of the virtual reality to the market in any way (3) “evaluation correction reflecting the difference in purchasing power among the groups of subjects Unify the unit value of virtual currency through the whole virtual market by the algorithm (4) that the server keeps track of the unit exchange value of virtual currency through the exchange, To execute.
  • virtual currency can be determined as the unit value in the entire virtual market, and servers that understand this price transition will always disappear from the virtual market according to (1) (2) must be continuously supplied, and servers should process this so that the virtual exchangeability of virtual exchange will not occur due to the fluctuation of the unit exchange value of virtual exchange throughout the virtual market. Although it is necessary to do this, this is solved only by adding the following processing to the server.
  • Sales orders of virtual currency in the exchange give priority to orders with low sales prices
  • the server is infinite in a one-to-one relationship with the consideration for exchanging virtual sales orders.
  • the setting of the first consumption price performed by the operator in the setting information is set with a sense of the value of the value to be exchanged.
  • the selling order by the server of (2) is subordinate to the selling order of the first user (the side of the Associates) if the same amount as the selling order of the (first aspect)
  • the server always stores Make a purchase order of virtual carlucency of the same amount as the amount of “pre-sale virtual carreality of borrowing” in a one-to-one relationship with the value to be exchanged (6) “pre-sale virtual carreality of borrowing” is set as setting information Below the identified threshold (
  • the adjustment of the amount of virtual carcal supply will be from A% (10%) to B% (setting information, eg 50%, ie 15% of the total amount of virtual carrance) (A + A X B%) Borrower Pre-sale Vending status of the amount of virtual carrance) If upside (symptom of lack of supply), a predetermined C period (setting information, for example, one month or one week or two months) Any period The total amount of the new supply amount of) is increased by “(A ⁇ B)%, that is, 5% in this case” of the total amount of virtual reality.
  • the operator updates these setting information according to the condition of the virtual market (9)
  • the total supply adjustment of new supply of (8) is retroactively calculated to enhance the immediate effect, and has already been supplied to the associates in the past In addition to the amount of virtual capital, the retroactive adjustment may be immediately supplied to the Associates, and the total adjustment of new supply may be continued thereafter (10)
  • the demand for virtual currency decreases
  • the adjustment of the amount of supply of virtual carrancy from the amount of A% (10%) to D% (setting information, for example 50%, ie 5% of the total amount of virtuality) (A-A ⁇ D%) virtual sales pre-sale virtual
  • the predetermined E period setting information, for example, 1 month or 1 week
  • the total supply of the new supply of the virtual supply is decreased by “(A ⁇ D)%, that is, 5% in this case” of the total supply of the virtual supply for the total supply
  • the operator updates these setting information in accordance with the state of the virtual market. Further, at the timing of performing supply adjustment at the time of demand decrease described here, the threshold value Z of the above (6) is set, and the decrease in value (counting of the expiration date) due to the holding period of virtual currency held by Associates is stopped. Then, when the demand for virtual reality increases and the amount of pre-sale virtual currency for rent reaches the value of A, the counting of the virtual lifetime for the virtual key ownership held by the Associates who has stopped is resumed.
  • the unit price of virtual currency will be kept completely constant (exchange price and one-to-one value) in "normal time” in which there is one or more "pre-sale virtual rental volume". Even if the demand declines rapidly at exceptional times such as when the economic recession or monetary policy failure etc. (“pre-sale virtual rental amount” is 0, that is, an emergency), the unit price of virtual currency will not easily fall. When the demand declines above the threshold, the expiration date of the virtual key property held by Associates has stopped counting, and even if the amount of pre-sale virtual key property is 0, it is not necessary to bother and sell cheaply.
  • the virtual currency recovers to its original value (the residual sales virtual currency amount becomes 1 or more at the time of borrowing), so the selling order is one-for-one with the exchange price. It should be kept at the price, and it should be sold cheaply by 1 to 0.9 mag, etc., only when you want exchange consideration immediately (with no real money).
  • this makes it possible to settle the purchase of the virtual customer of the consumer without any stress under any circumstances, and the sale of the virtual reality by the Associates can be settled without any stress in peacetime. Since it is possible to wait only for a short while for an emergency situation, it is effective to reduce the transaction stress of the user as in the conventional exchange.
  • it is possible to easily calculate the amount of virtual carrance in the virtual market that is insufficient or left over simply by monitoring the “pre-sale virtual callalty amount for borrowing”. Therefore, the operator and the user also have the effect of easily recognizing the basis of the adjustment.
  • the competition principle with market expansion has been made to work strongly. That is, in the present embodiment, the operator can cycle the virtual market group to be built to activate (market expansion) at a limit speed, and therefore, the effect of activating the real market is also exhibited. It is
  • the best mode in this embodiment is "do not use cryptocurrency using local legal currency as settlement means, per country (Ecousing single legal currency is also regarded as one country)
  • local model and global model that uses multiple countries and crosses the world, and does not use legal currency that uses cryptocurrency as payment means.
  • the “basic income algorithm” will be described.
  • the second user a business member who uses the media market, consumes virtual currency, based on setting information set in advance by the operator, like a sort of consumption tax that exists in the real world (hereinafter referred to as consumption tax
  • the operator will be charged virtual capital, in addition to the amount of virtual capital used.
  • the consumption tax rate is 10%
  • the amount of virtual currency debited from the virtual currency passbook of the server is deducted by 11,000. (The display may be displayed as 11000 as an internal tax.) If the purpose of consumption is acquisition of paid content provided by Associates, 10000 out of 11000 withdrawn, provided content. Move to Associates, 1000 move to operator.
  • the virtual reality which the operator collects from the second user who is the business member during the predetermined period, is distributed to the second user who is the individual member at predetermined intervals.
  • the operator can do whatever by updating the setting information.
  • the users of the virtual market to be constructed are guaranteed the right to participate in the economic activities carried out by the users, and there is an effect that the consumption activity is promoted.
  • the explanation here explains the transfer processing of virtual currency from business members to individual members, the technology is not limited to the above explanation, and “the second user uses the name of the consumption tax
  • the basic income algorithm is one of the evaluation algorithm based on the evaluation based on the evaluation of the virtual reality to be supplied to the virtual market, since it is a process of supplying the virtual reality collected at step 2 to the second user. It is said that it is a side.
  • the operator is further enhancing the power to control the virtual market.
  • the "setting information" will be described.
  • the control of virtual reality in which the virtual market including the media market in the present embodiment is distributed is controlled based on setting information previously determined by the operator.
  • the setting information can be updated anytime by the operator, and the operator can control the distribution of virtual reality by updating the setting information so as to control the virtual market. There is.
  • the setting information includes setting of the consumption virtual quantity (first consumption price) in the first consumption activity by the second user.
  • the operator decides, for example, whether the price of bread in a certain group is 1 or 10 or 100. Then, based on the determined bread price, the prices of other products are balanced and determined. Furthermore, with regard to groups of entities with different purchasing powers, the prices and balances of the above-mentioned groups of entities will be taken into consideration. This is the setting of the first consumption price.
  • the unit price of virtual currency is the same as the unit price of USD
  • the virtual reality supply algorithm that distributes the entire virtual market works with a sense of quantitative value
  • the primary consumption price of bread is 100 and other primary consumption prices are balanced
  • the unit price of virtual reality is Japanese yen
  • the virtual reality supply algorithm that distributes the entire virtual market works with the same sense of quantitative value as the unit price.
  • the determination of the first consumption price is not the act of determining the absolute value, but the action of determining the relative value to the other first consumption prices, and the operator is the first consumption activity of the virtual market as a whole.
  • the operator updates the setting information so as to raise the first consumption price as a whole, and the total circulation amount of virtual reality increases.
  • the so-called US dollar-based GDP does not rise, but there is a mechanism that reduces the unit price of virtual currency.
  • the quantity of the value of the setting information of the first consumption price of bread With a sense of value, cryptocurrency will circulate in the real world. That is, the basis of the setting information is the setting of the first consumption price.
  • the Associates will decide the offered price of the paid content by itself and promote the second consumption activity to the second user.
  • the setting information includes a setting for calculating an evaluation value from another user with respect to the provision of the free content according to (the aspect of) the associate.
  • the operator evaluates each activity in the content acquisition situation of the user other than the content provider for a certain free content, for example, whether the evaluation per one second viewing time is 1 or 10 or 100 decide. Then, based on the determined value of the browsing time of 1 second, other evaluations are determined in balance. This is the evaluation setting that determines how to balance the amount by which the Associates are given virtual reality for each Associate.
  • the total amount (total supply amount) of the amount to be given to the Virtual Carrance Associates is controlled by the new total supply adjustment algorithm, and the operator can not modify the total supply amount.
  • the setting is, like the setting of the price balance of the first consumption price, the setting of the evaluation balance for the Associates, that is, the setting of the grant balance of the virtual reality for the Associates.
  • the operator updates the setting information so as to balance the evaluation value so that the quality and quantity of the free content provided by the associate is improved.
  • setting of an evaluation that becomes a basis for calculating an evaluation value for the second user for discounting the first consumption price by the second user and / or determining the distribution ratio of the basic income There is.
  • the operator likes, for example, an action expected of the second user! In the case of promotion of intentional evaluation such as ⁇ and ⁇ 3, etc., for each intentional evaluation to calculate an evaluation value based on how many times of intentional evaluation in a predetermined period were, for example, it is good!
  • the evaluation value may be calculated based on the total value.
  • the setting information is not limited to the setting described in the present specification, and the operator can update any setting information, and the setting is made such that the value of the virtual market becomes larger according to the situation. It is intended to update information.
  • the operator of artificial intelligence functions such as reinforcement learning function It may be realized by mounting on a terminal (setting up an AI server).
  • the input processing in the AI server is as follows. (1) Acquisition of usage activity data of the user acquired (acquired from the user terminal) by the evaluation unit that evaluates usage activity of the user (2) Acquisition of distribution data of virtual currency that is stored in the virtual currency passbook database ( 3) Acquisition of legal currency or cryptocurrency movement data stored in the system cash (or cryptocurrency) passbook (4) Virtual currency and exchange traded currency and legal currency or cryptocurrency buy and sell orders and execution data And, the output data of AI in the AI server is as follows. (1) Update of setting information
  • the characteristic role (intermediate processing) of AI in the AI server is as follows. (1) From the big data collected by input processing, the optimal solution of various setting information is derived and updated to the derived setting information. (2) From the state in which the setting information has been updated, big data is further collected, an optimal solution of new various setting information is derived, and the setting information is updated.
  • the AI server connected to the virtual reality supply system can always keep collecting big data from the virtual market, and can also verify the effect of output processing, such as the market effect of updating configuration information. It is.
  • the AI server can continue learning, and can be appropriately updated with appropriate setting information, which contributes to effective circulation of virtual reality and effective development of virtual market. become.
  • the optimal solution of various setting information is derived for the purpose of maximizing the value of the virtual market, but how to make the AI server recognize that the value of the virtual market is maximized
  • a score system is used in which the “use time of the user” and the “economic size of the virtual market” become larger, respectively, resulting in a higher point distribution.
  • quantifying how the second user evaluates (the information provided by) the first user (for example, how much evaluation has been made for each individual associate as 100 as a whole, etc.
  • the various algorithms based on which the operator is based, determine the amount and amount of virtual carrarchy produced for the first user based on the quantified evaluation of the individual or for a predetermined period of time). By updating the setting information, it can be changed in any way. From this, the amount of virtual currency supply to the virtual market is determined by the demand, and the operator sets the configuration information in order to adjust the balance (allocation rate) of the amount of virtual currency given to the first user. It controls the virtual market by updating.
  • the core in this embodiment is a system for supplying a virtual market, such as a currency in the real market, virtual currency, to the virtual market that it constructs, and various algorithms for effectively distributing this are available. It is an additional implementation. And, to express this technical purpose in a nutshell, it will be "to increase the total value of the virtual currency that circulates the virtual market".
  • the goal point of the process of all algorithms of the virtual currency supply system is the increase of the distribution total value (quantity ⁇ unit price) of virtual currency, the increase of the quality and quantity of free content, and the increase of the total evaluation amount.
  • it is an increase in demand, an increase in consumption activity, and various supply algorithms for the purpose of adjusting the supply balance for effectively performing these, and is updating of setting information. By doing this, it will be possible to effectively control the virtual market to be built.
  • the “information transmission terminal device” of the user having the “Associates” account to which “information” (value for someone) “free content” is transmitted (the terminal device 7 in the first embodiment
  • the information distribution server for the calculated evaluation value of how many quantities of the system currency L “value exchange medium” are generated and issued for each “associate” calculated by the information distribution server apparatus 6
  • the factor multiplication process by the device 6 (for balancing the supply and demand balance in the information exchange market of the “value exchange medium” that can be exchanged with other
  • the transfer recording process by the information distribution server device 6 for recording the transfer of the “value exchange medium” for distributing the “value exchange medium” issued to the “associates” by the information distribution server device 6 in the information exchange market There, Then, the value exchange medium creation and distribution method by the information distribution server device 6 in the information exchange market is disclosed by a process of managing the "value exchange medium” in association with the user's account.
  • each embodiment described above is a technology for extracting and distributing the economic value included in the free value transferred from the user to the user, and further, the quantity according to the extracted and allocated economic value Discloses a technology for creating, issuing and distributing value exchange media.
  • the information distribution server device 6 can generate, issue and distribute "money", which is a value exchange medium multiplied by the economic value, in the information exchange market.
  • each of the above-described embodiments is "information distribution method, apparatus, system, and program", and simultaneously, "money distribution method, apparatus, system, and program”. By synchronizing these two distribution methods, the effect on the prior art can be exhibited.
  • the so-called in-system currency L in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the points in the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, and the "value exchange medium” called virtual reality in the fifth embodiment It can be said that it is synonymous with ".
  • the information distribution system and the money distribution system in the above-described embodiment function as a united body by the processing of the function unit of the information distribution server device 6, promote information distribution with efficient money distribution, and provide a valuable information exchange market. It is the disclosure of technology that can be built.
  • each embodiment described above mutates the economic value included in the free information moved from right to left into a value exchange medium, generates and issues from left to right, and further from that value exchange medium Discloses a technique for distributing the content among users.
  • Each embodiment mentioned above relates to the technique which distributes information and money simultaneously.
  • the technical scope of the present invention is not limited to the range given in the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modification and change are possible within the range of the gist. is there.
  • a specific embodiment of device distribution and integration is not limited to the above embodiment, and all or a part thereof may be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit.
  • new embodiments produced by any combination of a plurality of embodiments are also included in the embodiments of the present invention.
  • a part of the functions of the information distribution system 600, a part of the functions of the point management system S1, and a part of the functions of the point management system S2 may be combined.
  • the effects of the new embodiment generated by the combination combine the effects of the original embodiment.
  • Point management system S1 Point management system S2 Point management system 1 Information provision terminal 2 Information utilization terminal 3 Point management server 31 Communication unit 32 Storage unit 33 Control unit 41 Management unit 42 Order determination unit 43 Information provision Part 411 ... behavior monitoring part 412 ... first point granting part 413 ... second point granting part 414 ... campaign point granting part 415 ... point consumption change part 416 ... point annihilation processing part 417 ... fee collection part 418 ... incentive money supply part DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Point management server 110 ... CPU, 111 ... ROM, 112 ... RAM, 113 ... Storage apparatus, 114 ... Communication control apparatus, 115 ... Bus 120 ... Communications part 130 ... Control part 131 ... Setting information update part 132 ...
  • Storage unit 20 Operator terminal 30: User terminal 40: Server of financial institution 50: Communication network 600: Information distribution system 6.

Landscapes

  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Accounting & Taxation (AREA)
  • Finance (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Strategic Management (AREA)
  • Marketing (AREA)
  • Economics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Development Economics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Tourism & Hospitality (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Human Resources & Organizations (AREA)
  • Primary Health Care (AREA)
  • Entrepreneurship & Innovation (AREA)
  • Game Theory and Decision Science (AREA)
  • Management, Administration, Business Operations System, And Electronic Commerce (AREA)
  • Financial Or Insurance-Related Operations Such As Payment And Settlement (AREA)

Abstract

An information distribution method that: includes a plurality of terminal devices and a server device that are capable of communicating via a communications network; and causes information to be distributed between devices. The server device: calculates an evaluation value on the basis of the degree of usefulness of content dispatched via one of the terminal devices among the plurality of terminal devices; determines the quantity of value exchange media exchanged between user identification information for each of the plurality of terminal devices, on the basis of the calculated evaluation value; and associates the value exchange media corresponding to the determined quantity, to user identification information for one terminal device and issues same.

Description

情報流通方法、情報流通サーバ装置、端末装置、及びコンピュータプログラムINFORMATION DISTRIBUTION METHOD, INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION SERVER DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM
 本発明は、情報流通方法、情報流通サーバ装置、端末装置、及びコンピュータプログラムに関する。 The present invention relates to an information distribution method, an information distribution server device, a terminal device, and a computer program.
 実社会での活動のみならず、情報通信技術を基礎とした通信社会における情報発信を含む活動も膨大な経済的価値を生む。ユーザは一定の通信費用の支払いと個人情報の提供とによって基本的に無料でインターネットを介した膨大な量の情報の入手が可能である。膨大な情報の中から、ユーザにとって本当に価値ある情報を取り出すことは困難である。また、評価に値する情報を発信するユーザが存在している場合であっても、そのユーザを正当に評価できていない。 Not only activities in the real world, but also activities including information dissemination in the telecommunications society based on information and communication technologies will produce enormous economic value. The user can obtain a vast amount of information via the Internet basically free of charge by paying a fixed communication fee and providing personal information. It is difficult to extract information that is really valuable for the user from among a large amount of information. In addition, even if there is a user who sends information worthy of evaluation, the user can not be evaluated properly.
 各種SNS(Social Networking Service)では、コンテンツと共に表示出力される広告宣伝の宣伝費用を、コンテンツの閲覧回数等の数量に応じてコンテンツ提供者に還元してコンテンツ発信を促進させている。コンテンツ発信を促進させることで、発信時に付帯的に表示出力させる広告宣伝によって商品・サービスの認知度向上が図られる。 In various SNS (Social Networking Service), advertising costs of advertising displayed and output together with the content are returned to the content provider according to the quantity such as the number of browsing times of the content to promote content transmission. By promoting content transmission, awareness of products and services can be improved by advertising that is displayed and output incidentally at the time of transmission.
 非特許文献1には、情報提供サイトの利用促進のための取り組みとして、情報提供サイトのサービスアカウントを持つ一のユーザが商品又はサービスを紹介するコンテンツを発信し、そのコンテンツを介して他のユーザからその商品又はサービスを取り扱う電子商取引サイトの閲覧又は取引があった場合に、一のユーザへ一部をポイントとして還元するアフィリエイトサービスが開示されている。 In Non-Patent Document 1, one user having a service account of an information providing site sends out a content introducing a product or service as an effort to promote the use of the information providing site, and the other user via the content There is disclosed an affiliate service in which, when there is a browsing or transaction of an electronic commerce site that handles the goods or services from the above, an affiliate service is provided that returns a part of the same to one user.
 しかしながら、このようなポイントサービスでは、結局、関連の電子商取引サイトの使用を促すためのポイント還元である。またポイントは法定通貨で価値が特定される物品又はサービスへの交換が前提である。したがってこのようなポイントサービスでは、SNSで商品又はサービスの紹介のコンテンツの発信が促進される程度で、結局電子商取引サイトの利用促進が図られるに留まる。 However, such point services are ultimately point reductions to encourage use of the associated e-commerce site. Also, points are premised on exchange for goods or services whose value is specified in legal currency. Therefore, in such a point service, the use of the e-commerce site is only promoted after the launch of the content of the introduction of the product or service by the SNS.
 本発明は斯かる事情に鑑みてなされたものであり、発信されるコンテンツの評価に基づき価値を生み出す情報交換マーケットを実現する情報流通方法、情報流通サーバ装置、端末装置、及びコンピュータプログラムを提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and provides an information distribution method, an information distribution server device, a terminal device, and a computer program for realizing an information exchange market that produces value based on evaluation of transmitted content. The purpose is
 本開示の情報流通方法は、通信ネットワークを介して通信可能である複数の端末装置及びサーバ装置を含み、装置間で情報を流通させる情報流通方法であって、前記サーバ装置は、前記複数の端末装置の内の1つの端末装置を介して発信されたコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値を算出し、算出された評価値に基づき、前記複数の端末装置夫々の利用者識別情報間で交換される価値交換媒体の数量を決定し、決定された数量に応じた価値交換媒体を前記1つの端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応付けて発行する。 An information distribution method according to the present disclosure is an information distribution method including a plurality of terminal devices and a server device that can communicate via a communication network, and distributing information among the devices, the server device including the plurality of terminals An evaluation value is calculated based on the usefulness of the content transmitted via one of the devices, and the user identification information of each of the plurality of terminal devices is exchanged based on the calculated evaluation value. The quantity of value exchange medium is determined, and the value exchange medium according to the determined quantity is issued in association with the user identification information of the one terminal device.
 本開示の情報流通方法は、通信ネットワークを介して第1ユーザにより発信されたコンテンツに対する評価に応じた額の価値交換媒体を、前記第1ユーザに発行し、前記第1ユーザに発行された価値交換媒体の一部又は全部を第2ユーザへ移転し、前記通信ネットワークを介した前記第2ユーザの有利的情報の発信に伴い、前記第2ユーザに移転された価値交換媒体の内から、前記有利的情報の発信に応じた額の価値交換媒体の価値を消滅させ、前記第1ユーザへの価値交換媒体の発行、並びに、発行された価値交換媒体の移転及び消滅を含む取引情報を記憶する処理をコンピュータに実行させる。 The information distribution method according to the present disclosure issues, to the first user, a value exchange medium of an amount according to an evaluation on the content transmitted by the first user via the communication network, and the value issued to the first user From among the value exchange media transferred to the second user, part or all of the exchange medium is transferred to the second user, and upon transmission of the advantageous information of the second user via the communication network, Disappear the value of the value exchange medium in an amount corresponding to the transmission of the advantageous information, store the issue of the value exchange medium to the first user, and store transaction information including transfer and extinction of the issued value exchange medium Have the computer execute the process.
 本開示の情報流通サーバ装置は、通信ネットワークを介して複数の端末装置と通信するサーバ装置であって、前記複数の端末装置の内の第1の端末装置を介して発信されたコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値を算出する算出部と、算出された評価値に基づき、前記複数の端末装置夫々の利用者識別情報間で交換される価値交換媒体の数量を決定する決定部と、決定された数量に応じた価値交換媒体を前記第1の端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応付けて発行する発行部とを備える。 The information distribution server device of the present disclosure is a server device that communicates with a plurality of terminal devices via a communication network, and the usefulness of the content transmitted via the first terminal device of the plurality of terminal devices. And a determination unit for determining the quantity of value exchange media to be exchanged among the user identification information of the plurality of terminal devices based on the calculated evaluation value, and And an issuing unit that issues a value exchange medium according to a quantity in association with user identification information of the first terminal device.
 本開示の端末装置は、通信ネットワークを介して情報流通サーバ装置と通信する端末装置であって、利用者識別情報に対応付けて一又は複数のコンテンツを発信する発信部と、前記利用者識別情報に対応付けて発信された前記一又は複数のコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値に基づき前記情報流通サーバ装置により発行される価値交換媒体の数量を示す情報を前記情報流通サーバ装置より受信する受信部と、前記利用者識別情報に対応付けられている価値交換媒体の数量を表示する表示部とを備える。 A terminal device of the present disclosure is a terminal device that communicates with an information distribution server device via a communication network, and includes a transmitting unit that transmits one or more contents in association with user identification information; and the user identification information A receiver for receiving, from the information distribution server apparatus, information indicating the quantity of value exchange media issued by the information distribution server apparatus based on the evaluation value based on the usefulness of the one or more contents transmitted in association with And a display unit for displaying the quantity of value exchange media associated with the user identification information.
 本開示のコンピュータプログラムは、通信部を備えるコンピュータに、前記通信部によって通信接続される複数の端末装置の内の第1の端末装置を介して発信されたコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値を算出し、算出された評価値に基づき、前記複数の端末装置夫々の利用者識別情報間で交換される価値交換媒体の数量を決定し、決定された数量に応じた価値交換媒体を前記第1の端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応付けて発行する処理を実行させる。 The computer program of the present disclosure calculates an evaluation value based on the usefulness of content transmitted via a first terminal device among a plurality of terminal devices that are communicably connected by the communication unit to a computer including a communication unit. And determining the quantity of value exchange medium to be exchanged among the user identification information of each of the plurality of terminal devices on the basis of the calculated evaluation value, and the value exchange medium corresponding to the quantity thus determined is used as the first value exchange medium. Execute processing to be issued in association with the user identification information of the terminal device.
 本開示のコンピュータプログラムは、通信部、表示部及び記憶部を備えるコンピュータに、前記通信部にて前記記憶部に記憶してある利用者識別情報に対応付けて一又は複数のコンテンツを発信し、前記記憶部に記憶してある利用者識別情報に対応付けて発信された前記一又は複数のコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値に基づき発行される価値交換媒体の数量を示す情報を前記通信部によって受信し、前記記憶部に記憶してある利用者識別情報に対応付けられている価値交換媒体の数量を前記表示部に表示する処理を実行させる。 The computer program of the present disclosure transmits one or more contents to a computer including a communication unit, a display unit, and a storage unit in association with the user identification information stored in the storage unit by the communication unit. Information indicating the quantity of value exchange medium to be issued based on the evaluation value based on the usefulness of the one or more contents transmitted in association with the user identification information stored in the storage unit by the communication unit A process of displaying on the display unit the quantity of the value exchange medium received and associated with the user identification information stored in the storage unit is executed.
 本発明によれば、発信されるコンテンツの評価に基づき価値を生み出す情報交換マーケットを実現する情報流通方法、情報流通サーバ装置、端末装置、及びコンピュータプログラムを提供することが可能になる。例えば、本発明によれば、情報流通効率を高めることで流通する情報の価値を高め、情報流通を促進させ価値ある情報交換マーケットを築くことが可能になる。また、例えば、本発明によれば、ユーザは情報交換マーケットで高効率に自身に有益な情報を取得し、また自身が発信するコンテンツによって適切な収益を得ることが可能になる。更に、収益はまた情報交換マーケット内での情報発信及び情報取得に使用するなどして循環され、情報交換マーケットの情報流通を活発化してマーケット自体の価値を向上させることが可能になる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide an information distribution method, an information distribution server device, a terminal device, and a computer program for realizing an information exchange market that generates value based on the evaluation of transmitted content. For example, according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the value of information to be distributed by enhancing the information distribution efficiency, to promote information distribution and to build a valuable information exchange market. Also, for example, according to the present invention, the user can efficiently obtain information useful to himself / herself in the information exchange market, and can also obtain appropriate revenue from the content transmitted by the user. Furthermore, the revenue is also circulated, for example, for information dissemination and information acquisition within the information exchange market, and it becomes possible to activate the information exchange of the information exchange market and improve the market itself.
第一実施形態における情報流通システムの概要を示す図である。It is a figure showing the outline of the information distribution system in a first embodiment. 情報流通サーバ装置の機能構成の一例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a function structure of an information distribution server apparatus. 情報流通システムに含まれる装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the apparatus contained in an information distribution system. 出納記録を示すシステム内通貨管理テーブルの一例を示す概念図である。It is a conceptual diagram which shows an example of the in-system currency management table which shows a checkout record. 制御部による管理部としての処理手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process sequence as a management part by a control part. 評価値算出手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of evaluation value calculation procedure. 端末装置におけるシステム内通貨の管理の手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of management of the currency in the system in a terminal device. 端末装置に表示される画面例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a screen displayed on a terminal device. 情報流通サーバ装置におけるシステム内通貨の移転処理の手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of transfer processing of the currency in the system in an information distribution server apparatus. 情報流通サーバ装置における利用行為の受け付け処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reception process of the utilization act in an information distribution server apparatus. 有償コンテンツの価格設定を受付ける処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process which accepts the price setting of a charged content. システム内通貨の供給・流通・消滅の流れを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the flow of supply / distribution / extinction of the currency in a system. システム内通貨の新規供給量の基準の概要を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the standard of the new supply of the currency in a system. 主体群に応じて評価値を補正する手法の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the method of correcting an evaluation value according to an object group. 価値連動部によって実行されるシステム内通貨の交換手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the exchange procedure in the system internal currency performed by a value interlocking | linkage part. 物価とシステム内通貨の新規供給量及び流通量、システム内通貨の単価の関係の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the price supply and the new supply amount and circulation amount of the currency in a system, and the unit price of the currency in a system. 第三実施形態に係るポイント管理システムによるサービスの概要について説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the service by the point management system which concerns on 3rd embodiment. ポイント管理システムの構成を示す図である。It is a figure showing composition of a point management system. ポイント管理サーバの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of a point management server. 管理部が実行する機能を示す機能ブロック図である。It is a functional block diagram which shows the function which a management part performs. 情報提供サイトに情報利用端末がアクセスした際に情報利用端末に表示される画面の例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of the screen displayed on an information utilization terminal, when an information utilization terminal accesses an information provision site. 情報利用者が情報提供者を検索・探索等するための画面の例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of the screen for an information user to search and search an information provider. 管理部により実行されるポイント付与処理について説明するための表である。It is a table | surface for demonstrating the point provision process performed by the management part. 管理部により実行されるポイント付与処理について説明するための表である。It is a table | surface for demonstrating the point provision process performed by the management part. 情報提供端末、情報利用端末及びポイント管理サーバの間での処理シーケンスを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the processing sequence between an information provision terminal, an information utilization terminal, and a point management server. 第四実施形態に係るポイント管理システムの全体構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the point management system which concerns on 4th embodiment. 管理サーバの構成を示す回路ブロック図である。It is a circuit block diagram showing composition of a management server. 管理サーバの機能的な構成を説明するための機能ブロック図である。It is a functional block diagram for demonstrating the functional structure of a management server. 利用者情報表T3の説明図である。It is explanatory drawing of user information chart T3. 評価履歴T5の説明図である。It is an explanatory view of evaluation history T5. ポイント得失履歴T7の説明図である。It is an explanatory view of point profit and loss history T7. 預入金履歴T8の説明図である。It is an explanatory view of deposit and receipt history T8. ポイントの減算の過程の説明図である。It is explanatory drawing of the process of subtraction of a point. 本発明を適用した管理システムによって提供することができる情報提供サイトの一覧表である。It is a list of the information provision site which can be provided by the management system to which the present invention is applied. 第五実施形態に係るヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムの一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the virtual reality supply system which concerns on 5th embodiment.
 本発明をその実施の形態を示す図面を参照して具体的に説明する。 The present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings showing the embodiments thereof.
 <第一実施形態>
 図1は、情報流通システム600の概要を示す図である。情報流通システム600は、情報流通システム600を実現する情報流通サーバ装置6と、ユーザが使用する複数の端末装置7とを含む。
First Embodiment
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overview of an information distribution system 600. As shown in FIG. The information distribution system 600 includes an information distribution server device 6 for realizing the information distribution system 600 and a plurality of terminal devices 7 used by the user.
 情報流通サーバ装置6は、コンテンツ発信を可能とし、発信されたコンテンツに基づき発行される後述のシステム内通貨Lの授受、及び該システム内通貨Lの利用を可能とする情報交換マーケットのプラットフォームを提供する。情報流通サーバ装置6は、情報交換マーケットのシステム管理者によって管理される。情報交換マーケットのプラットフォームはWebベースのシステムであり、端末装置7からのWebブラウザによるアクセスによってマーケットへの参加が実現される。端末装置7による情報交換マーケットの利用は、基本的にアカウント登録を必要とする。情報交換マーケットにて発信されるコンテンツは、アカウント登録をしていない不特定多数の情報端末装置から一部又は全部が視聴又は閲覧可能に公開されてもよい。情報交換マーケットはWeb(WWW:World Wide Web)に基づく公開のみならず、新たな通信プロトコルに基づくものであってもよいし、メタバース等の特定の仮想空間上での公開であってもよい。 The information distribution server device 6 provides a platform for an information exchange market that enables the transmission of content, exchanges the in-system currency L described later issued based on the transmitted content, and enables the use of the in-system currency L. Do. The information distribution server device 6 is managed by a system administrator of the information exchange market. The platform of the information exchange market is a web-based system, and access to the market from the terminal device 7 by the web browser is realized. The use of the information exchange market by the terminal device 7 basically requires account registration. Content transmitted in the information exchange market may be partially or entirely disclosed publicly so as to be viewable or viewable from an unspecified number of information terminal devices not having account registration. The information exchange market may be based not only on the Web (WWW: World Wide Web) but also on a new communication protocol, or may be on a specific virtual space such as a metaverse.
 端末装置7は、ユーザが使用するコンピュータ装置であり、一例ではPC(Personal Computer)である。端末装置7は他の例では、スマートフォン、携帯電話機、又はタブレット端末装置であってもよい。端末装置7は、少なくともWebブラウザを含むアプリケーションプログラムを実行することが可能であり、表示部、操作部及び通信部を備える装置であれば、任意のコンピュータ装置でよい。この意味で例えば端末装置7は、テレビジョン受信機、車載ナビゲーション装置、据え置き型ゲーム機、又はロボット等であってもよい。 The terminal device 7 is a computer device used by a user, and in one example, is a PC (Personal Computer). The terminal device 7 may be a smartphone, a mobile phone, or a tablet terminal device in another example. The terminal device 7 can execute an application program including at least a web browser, and may be any computer device as long as the device includes a display unit, an operation unit, and a communication unit. In this sense, for example, the terminal device 7 may be a television receiver, a car navigation system, a stationary game machine, a robot or the like.
 端末装置7は、特定のアプリプログラム7P(図3参照)を実行することにより、汎用的なコンピュータを情報流通システム600における端末として機能させる。端末装置7は特定のアプリプログラム7Pに限らず、汎用的なWebブラウザプログラムによって情報流通サーバ装置6が提供するサービスログイン画面からログインすることによって、情報流通システム600における端末として機能することもできる。 The terminal device 7 causes a general-purpose computer to function as a terminal in the information distribution system 600 by executing a specific application program 7P (see FIG. 3). The terminal device 7 can also function as a terminal in the information distribution system 600 by logging in from the service login screen provided by the information distribution server device 6 using a general-purpose web browser program as well as the specific application program 7P.
 端末装置7のユーザは、例えば「アソシエイツ」、「事業者」、「個人」の3種に区分されたアカウントの内の少なくともいずれか1つを有する。アカウントの区分によって、情報交換マーケットで受けられるサービスが異なる。 The user of the terminal device 7 has, for example, at least one of accounts classified into three types of "Associates", "Operator", and "Individual". Depending on the division of account, different services can be received in the information exchange market.
 図1中のユーザAは、「アソシエイツ」の区分のアカウントを持つ。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザAは、情報交換マーケットに有償又は無償のコンテンツを発信する権限を有する。ここで、有償のコンテンツは、「事業者」又は「個人」に区分されるユーザが対価(システム内通貨L)を支払うことによって取得することできるコンテンツである。一方、無償のコンテンツは、全てのユーザにとって、対価を支払うことなく取得することができるコンテンツである。無償コンテンツは、例えば、大衆に記事等のコンテンツを配信して、その他のユーザに対して価値を提供する(価値を移転させる)こと及びその他のユーザからの評価を受けることでシステム内通貨Lを獲得する目的で「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザAにより発信される。また、無償コンテンツは、有償コンテンツの購買意欲を向上させ、購買希望者を増やす目的においても「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザAにより発信される。なお、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントは、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを有するユーザがシステム管理者等に申請し、システム管理者等によって許諾された場合に付与されるアカウントである。すなわち、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザは、少なくとも「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを併せ持ち、獲得したシステム内通貨Lを、後述するように自身の「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントに移転させ、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントにより、後述する第1の消費活動や第2の消費活動を行うことでシステム内通貨Lを自身の活動により消費することが可能である。 The user A in FIG. 1 has an account in the “Associates” category. User A who has an "Associates" account has the right to transmit paid or free content to the information exchange market. Here, the paid content is content that can be acquired by the user classified as “business operator” or “individual” by paying the value (in-system currency L). On the other hand, free content is content that all users can obtain without paying any compensation. For example, free content distributes content such as articles to the public, provides value to other users (transfers the value), and receives an evaluation from other users, and the system currency L is Sent by user A who has an "Associates" account for the purpose of acquisition. In addition, the free content is transmitted by the user A who has an "Associates" account for the purpose of improving the purchase desire for paid content and increasing the number of purchase applicants. The "Associates" account is an account given when a user having an "Operator" or "Individual" account applies to a system administrator or the like and is licensed by the system administrator or the like. That is, a user having an "Associates" account has at least a "Business operator" or "Individual" account, and the acquired in-system currency L is an account of his / her "Business operator" or "Personal" as described later. It is possible to consume the in-system currency L by its own activity by transferring it to an account of “business operator” or “individual” and performing the first consumption activity and the second consumption activity described later.
 図1中のユーザBは、「事業者」のアカウントを持ち、ユーザAにより発信された有償又は無償のコンテンツを、端末装置7によって利用できる。ここでの利用は、コンテンツの閲覧、視聴、端末装置7へのダウンロード等種々の形態が可能である。「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザBは、情報交換マーケットにおいて、無償コンテンツの利用権限だけでなく、システム内通貨Lを用いた有償コンテンツの利用権限が与えられてもよい。「事業者」のアカウントには、後述する第1の消費活動によりその他のユーザよりも有利に情報交換マーケットを利用する権限が与えられてもよい。「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザBは、情報交換マーケットにおいてコンテンツと見なされない情報(後述するように従として取り扱われる情報)についての発信(システム利用行為)の権限が無償又はシステム内通貨Lを用いた有償(後述する第1の消費活動)で与えられてもよい。 The user B in FIG. 1 has an “operator” account, and the terminal device 7 can use the paid or free content transmitted by the user A. The usage here can be various modes such as browsing of content, viewing, and downloading to the terminal device 7. In the information exchange market, the user B who has the account of the “business operator” may be given not only the right to use free content but also the right to use paid content using the system currency L. The "consumer" account may be authorized to use the information exchange market more advantageously than other users by the first consumption activity described later. User B, who has an “Operator” account, has the right to transmit (system use behavior) for information not regarded as content in the information exchange market (information to be treated as described below) or the system currency L May be provided for a fee (first consumption activity described later).
 図1中のユーザCは、「個人」のアカウントを持ち、ユーザAにより発信された有償又は無償のコンテンツを、端末装置7によって利用できる。「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザCは、情報交換マーケットにおいて、無償コンテンツの利用権限だけでなく、システム内通貨Lを用いた有償コンテンツの利用権限が与えられてもよい。「個人」のアカウントには、後述する第1の消費活動によりその他のユーザよりも有利に情報交換マーケットを利用する権限が与えられてもよい。「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザCは、ユーザBと同様に、情報交換マーケットにおいてコンテンツと見なされない情報についての発信の権限が無償又はシステム内通貨Lを用いた有償(後述する第1の消費活動)で与えられてもよい。 The user C in FIG. 1 has an “individual” account, and the terminal device 7 can use the paid or free contents transmitted by the user A. In the information exchange market, the user C who has the “individual” account may be given not only the right to use free content but also the right to use paid content using the system currency L. The "individual" account may be authorized to use the information exchange market more advantageously than other users by the first consumption activity described later. User C who has an “individual” account, like user B, has the right to transmit information not considered content in the information exchange market either free of charge or paid using system currency L (the first consumption described later Activities) may be given.
 「事業者」のアカウントと「個人」のアカウントとは、アカウント発行時に登録される属性が「事業者」であるか「個人」であるかで区別されるのみであって、実質的に同一の利用権限が与えられてもよい。一方、情報交換マーケットの種類によっては、両者を明確に区別していることが好ましい場合があり、「事業者」のアカウントと「個人」のアカウントとの間で異なる利用権限が与えられてもよい。例えば、主として広告宣伝(後述する第1の消費活動の1つ、表現を変えると、事業活動的情報発信)を行う者に対して、「事業者」のアカウントを設定し、コンテンツと見なされない情報についての発信の権限を与え、それ以外の利用権限を制限してもよい。また、主として有償コンテンツの利用(後述する第2の消費活動)を希望する者に対して、「個人」のアカウントを設定し、システム内通貨Lを用いた有償コンテンツの利用権限を与え、それ以外の利用権限を制限してもよい。また、全てのアカウントは、情報交換マーケット以外の仮想社会又は実社会における資産によって、システム内通貨Lを購入する権限を有していることとしてもよい。また、「アソシエイツ」から発信される無償コンテンツを利用するだけのユーザは、必ずしも「個人」のアカウントを取得する必要はなく、アカウントを所持せずに無償コンテンツを利用するユーザが存在していてもよい。そして、アカウントを所持しないユーザ又はログイン認証を行わないユーザが無償コンテンツを取得する場合においても、情報流通サーバ装置6は、後述する「アソシエイツ」のアカウントへの評価値の算出の基礎となる評価を行うこととしてもよい。 The "business" account and the "individual" account are only distinguished depending on whether the attribute registered when the account is issued is "business" or "individual", and substantially the same. Usage rights may be given. On the other hand, depending on the type of the information exchange market, it may be preferable to clearly distinguish between the two, and different usage rights may be given between the "business" account and the "personal" account. For example, for a person who mainly conducts advertising (one of the first consumption activities described below, and sending out business-active information when the expression is changed), the "business" account is set and it is not considered as content You may give the right to send information and restrict the other usage rights. In addition, for individuals who wish to use mainly paid content (the second consumption activity described later), an “individual” account is set, and the right to use paid content using the system currency L is given, and others You may restrict the use authority of. Also, all accounts may be authorized to purchase the system currency L by assets in a virtual society or real society other than the information exchange market. In addition, users who only use free content sent from Associates do not necessarily need to acquire an "personal" account, and even if there are users who use free content without possessing an account. Good. Then, even when a user who does not possess an account or a user who does not perform login authentication acquires free content, the information distribution server device 6 evaluates the basis of calculation of the evaluation value to the account of "Associates" described later. You may do it.
 第一実施形態における情報流通システム600では、情報流通サーバ装置6によって提供されるプラットフォームにより、ユーザAは、端末装置7を介して情報交換マーケットへコンテンツを発信することが可能である。ユーザAによって発信されたコンテンツは、Web等の情報交換マーケットが形成される仮想空間にて他のユーザB、ユーザCが使用する端末装置7から利用可能である。具体的には例えば、発信されたコンテンツは、特定のWebサイト内にコンテンツを取得するためのリンクとして選択可能に含まれる。コンテンツを提供するWebサイトは、例えば、情報交換マーケットのポータルサイトであってもよく、このマーケットが形成された仮想空間であるWebサイト内に設けられた発信者のユーザのアカウントページ等の領域(ユーザAの空間)であってもよい。この意味で情報交換マーケットはコンテンツ配信システムとして機能させることもできる。また情報交換マーケットは、ユーザがアカウントを持つ場合に端末装置7を用いてコンテンツに対するコメント登録、ユーザ評価(like/dislike)等が可能なSNSとして機能させてもよい。 In the information distribution system 600 in the first embodiment, the user A can transmit contents to the information exchange market via the terminal device 7 by the platform provided by the information distribution server device 6. The content transmitted by the user A is available from the terminal device 7 used by other users B and C in a virtual space where an information exchange market such as Web is formed. Specifically, for example, the transmitted content is selectively included as a link for acquiring the content in a specific web site. The website providing the content may be, for example, a portal site of the information exchange market, and an area such as an account page of the user of the caller provided in the website which is a virtual space in which this market is formed It may be the space of user A). In this sense, the information exchange market can also function as a content delivery system. The information exchange market may also function as an SNS capable of comment registration for content, user evaluation (like / dislike) and the like using the terminal device 7 when the user has an account.
 ここで「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザAから発信されるコンテンツとは例えば以下のようなものであり、情報交換マーケットにて主として取り扱われる情報である。ただし、以下の4つに限られず、「データに変換できる著作物全て」であってもよい。他のユーザから価値が見いだされるものであれば、これに限らない。なお、「アソシエイツ」から発信されるコンテンツは、無償、一部有償、または、全部有償であってもよい。コンテンツの有償又は無償の区別、及び有償とする場合の対価の量については、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザAによって任意に設定されるようにすればよい。 Here, the contents transmitted from the user A having the “Associates” account are, for example, as follows, and are information mainly handled in the information exchange market. However, the present invention is not limited to the following four, and may be "all works that can be converted into data". It is not limited to this as long as the value is found from other users. The content transmitted from "Associates" may be free of charge, partially paid, or all paid. The distinction between chargeable or free of content and the amount of charge for charge may be arbitrarily set by the user A who has an “Associates” account.
 (1)「言語データ等」
 ジャーナリスト、コラムニスト、エッセイスト、又は評論家等による不特定多数(情報取得可能なユーザ属性を限定しない発信方法。以下同じ)又は特定の対象(情報取得可能なユーザ属性を限定する発信方法。以下同じ)向けのテキストベースの著作物。従来のニュース、ブログ記事、メールマガジン等を含む。
(1) "Language data etc."
A journalist, a columnist, an essayist, or a critic, etc. (unspecified majority (sending method that does not limit the user attribute that can obtain information. The same applies to the following) or a specific target (sending method that limits the user attribute that can obtain information. The same below ) Text based work. Includes traditional news, blog posts, email newsletters, etc.
 (2)「動画データ等」
 ニュース、ドキュメンタリー、ドラマ、エンターテイメント、又は論評等、不特定多数又は特定の対象向けの動画データ等の著作物。従来のコンテンツ配信システムにて配信された一般ユーザが作成した動画データも含まれる。
(2) "Video data etc."
Works such as moving image data for an unspecified number or specific subject, such as news, documentary, drama, entertainment, or commentary. It also includes moving image data created by a general user distributed by a conventional content distribution system.
 (3)「作品データ等」
 論文、小説、脚本、漫画、映画、書、写真、グラビア、音楽、振り付け、設計図、ソフトウェア、コンピュータプログラム、又はこれらの二次的著作物、若しくは編集著作物を含む、不特定多数又は特定の対象向けの作品データ。従来のコンテンツ配信事業者によって配信された作品データも含まれる。
(3) "Work data etc."
Unspecified number or specific, including articles, novels, scripts, cartoons, movies, books, photographs, music, choreography, design drawings, software, computer programs, or their secondary works or edited works. Work data for the target. It also includes work data distributed by conventional content distribution companies.
 (4)「有益情報データ等」
 専門家によって発信される有益情報データ。弁護士等の士業者、キャリアコンサルタント等の転職エージェント、経営コンサルタント等のコンサルティング事業者等の専門事業者が提供する、不特定多数又は特定の対象向けの専門的な有益情報データ。従来の専門家による質疑応答システムにて提供された有益情報も含まれる。
(4) "Beneficial information data, etc."
Useful information data sent by experts. Professional useful information data for an unspecified number or specific targets provided by specialists such as lawyers and other agents, career change agents such as career consultants, and consulting companies such as management consultants. It also includes useful information provided by a conventional expert question-and-answer system.
 これに対し、「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザB又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザCから発信される情報とは例えば以下のようなものであり、情報交換マーケットにて従として取り扱われる情報である。以下の3つに限られず、「データに変換できる情報」であれば適宜追加してもよい。 On the other hand, the information transmitted from the user B who has the account of "business company" or the user C who has the account of "individual" is, for example, the following, and information which is treated as subordinate in the information exchange market It is. The information is not limited to the following three, and may be added as appropriate, as long as it is “information that can be converted into data”.
 (1)「事業者情報」
 会社概要、事業内容、経営業況、採用情報、案内情報、プレスリリース、又はIR(Investor Relations)等の不特定多数又は特定の対象向けの情報であって、上述した著作物又は有益情報に該当しない事実に基づく情報。地方自治体、社団法人、又はNPO法人等の事業者の情報を含む。
(1) "Business information"
Information about an unspecified number or specific target such as company profile, business content, financial condition, employment information, guidance information, press release, or IR (Investor Relations), which does not correspond to the aforementioned copyrighted work or useful information Factual information. Includes information on businesses such as local governments, incorporated corporations, or NPO corporations.
 (2)「プロフィール情報」
 「個人」のアカウントに対応する「事業者情報」に相当する。活動圏情報、活動時間情報、能力情報、適性情報、又は案内情報等の個人により発信される個人のプロフィール情報を含む。ここでプロフィール情報は、個人を特定できる個人情報に限らず、事業者又は個人からのオファーの獲得を目的とした仕事、社会貢献的活動(ボランティア活動)、趣味等についてアピールする情報を含む。
(2) Profile Information
It corresponds to "business information" corresponding to the "personal" account. It includes personal profile information transmitted by the individual, such as activity zone information, activity time information, ability information, aptitude information, or guidance information. Here, the profile information is not limited to personal information that can identify individuals, but includes information that appeals about work aimed at obtaining offers from businesses or individuals, social contribution activities (volunteer activities), hobbies and the like.
 (3)「広告」
 事業者及び個人により、不特定多数又は特定の対象向けに発信される広告情報である。広告の対象は、発信者が任意に設定することができ、例えば発信者の収益に繋がるような情報を含む。例えば、訴求対象が個人の場合、地域(国家でもよい)、性別、世代、使用言語、職業種別、最終学歴、及び所得水準などの情報が、属性として任意に、又は前提として設定されてもよい。また、訴求対象のユーザがログインする端末装置7が情報流通サーバ装置6と通信している時間帯、地域、その地域における天候等の情報を端末装置7から取得して設定情報に含めても良い。また、上述のように、情報交換マーケットの種類によっては、「事業者」のアカウントを有するユーザBのみが広告情報を発信できるように権限を設定してもよい。
(3) "Advertisement"
It is advertising information transmitted to an unspecified number or a specific target by a business owner and an individual. The target of the advertisement can be arbitrarily set by the sender, and includes, for example, information that leads to the caller's revenue. For example, when the object of appeal is an individual, information such as region (may be national), gender, generation, language used, occupation type, final education, and income level may be arbitrarily set as an attribute or as a premise. . In addition, information such as the time zone in which the terminal device 7 to which the appealing user logs in is communicating with the information distribution server device 6, the area, and the weather in that area may be acquired from the terminal device 7 and included in the setting information. . Also, as described above, depending on the type of the information exchange market, the authority may be set such that only the user B who has the “company” account can transmit the advertisement information.
 第一実施形態における情報流通システム600では、ユーザB又はユーザCが、ユーザAによって発信された無償のコンテンツを利用すると、情報流通サーバ装置6によって利用された無償コンテンツ自体及び利用された無償コンテンツの発信者であるユーザAが評価される。情報流通サーバ装置6は、前記評価に基づいてシステム内通貨Lを、コンテンツ発信者であるユーザAのアカウントに対して発行する。 In the information distribution system 600 in the first embodiment, when the user B or the user C uses the free content transmitted by the user A, the free content itself used by the information distribution server device 6 and the free content used User A who is the sender is evaluated. The information distribution server device 6 issues the in-system currency L to the account of the user A who is the content sender based on the evaluation.
 システム内通貨Lは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザA以外が、他のユーザよりも有利に情報交換マーケットを利用する行為(第1の消費活動)を行うことによって消費される。第1の消費活動は、自身に有利なように有利的情報(上述する従として取り扱われる情報)を発信する行為、自身に有利なように欲する情報を取得する行為、不要な情報をブロックする行為、所望のコンテンツをより有利に利用する行為等を含む。ここで、有利的情報には、広告宣伝情報、IR、会社情報等が含まれる。また、所望のコンテンツをより有利に利用する行為とは、例えば、他のユーザよりも先行してコンテンツにアクセスする行為、排他的にコンテンツを利用する行為等を含む。更に、第1の消費活動は、情報交換マーケットを利用してアンケートを行う行為、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザへの公開質問、発信する情報量の拡大、事業者によるプレスリリースの発行等を含んでもよい。第1の消費活動によって消費されたシステム内通貨Lは、情報交換マーケットから消滅する。システム内通貨Lは、情報交換マーケットから消滅する点で、法定通貨や仮想通貨、暗号通貨又は暗号資産と呼ばれる電子的通貨とは異なる。なお、システム内通貨Lは、各アカウントを持つユーザが取得してからの経過期間によっても消滅する。 The in-system currency L is consumed by the action (first consumption action) in which the user A who has an account of "Associates" uses the information exchange market more advantageously than other users. The first consumption activity is an act of transmitting advantageous information (information treated as a subordinate described above) in the interest of the user, an act of acquiring information desired in the interest of the user, an act of blocking unnecessary information. , Act of using desired content more advantageously. Here, the advantageous information includes advertising information, IR, company information and the like. Further, the act of using the desired content more advantageously includes, for example, an act of accessing the content prior to other users, an act of utilizing the content exclusively, and the like. Furthermore, the first consumption activity is the act of conducting a questionnaire using the information exchange market, the open question to the user who has an "Associates" account, the expansion of the amount of information to be transmitted, the issuance of a press release by the business operator, etc. May be included. The in-system currency L consumed by the first consumption activity disappears from the information exchange market. The intrasystem currency L differs from the legal currency, virtual currency, cryptocurrency or electronic currency called cryptosystem asset in that it disappears from the information exchange market. The in-system currency L also disappears according to an elapsed period after the user having each account acquires it.
 システム内通貨Lは、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザB又はユーザCを主体とする利用行為によって消費されるが、システム内通貨Lは「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザAに対してのみ発行される。ユーザAは、システム内通貨Lを消費するためには、自らの「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントの側面にて情報交換マーケットを利用しなければ消費はできない。ユーザB及びユーザCは、ユーザAからシステム内通貨Lを獲得しなければ、上述の利用行為(第1の消費活動)を不可能としている。そこでシステム内通貨Lは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザAから「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザB又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザCへの移転を可能とする。ユーザB及びユーザCは、ユーザAから獲得したシステム内通貨Lを消費して、上述の第1消費活動のほかに、ユーザAから発信される有償コンテンツを取得することができる。ユーザがシステム内通貨Lを消費して有償コンテンツを取得する行為を第2の消費活動と呼ぶ。なお、第2の消費活動では、システム内通貨Lの帰属が「事業者」又は「個人」から「アソシエイツ」に移転するだけであり、システム内通貨Lは情報交換マーケットからは消滅しない。 The in-system currency L is consumed by the user B or C who has an account of "business person" or "individual", but the in-system currency L is a user A who has an "Associates" account. Is issued only against. In order to consume the intra-system currency L, the user A can not consume unless the information exchange market is used on the side of his "business person" or "personal" account. If the user B and the user C do not obtain the system currency L from the user A, the above-mentioned usage act (first consumption activity) is not possible. Therefore, the intra-system currency L enables transfer from the user A having an "Associates" account to the user B having an "Operator" account or the user C having an "Individual" account. The user B and the user C can consume the in-system currency L acquired from the user A, and can acquire the paid content transmitted from the user A, in addition to the above-described first consumption activity. The act of the user consuming the system currency L to acquire paid content is referred to as a second consumption activity. Note that in the second consumption activity, the attribution of the system currency L is only transferred from the "business operator" or the "individual" to the "associates", and the system currency L does not disappear from the information exchange market.
 システム内通貨Lは、所定の単位(例えば、米ドル「$」や日本円「¥」のように)で数量が規定される。システム内通貨Lの所定の単位は、直接的に法定通貨に基づいて価値が規定されるようにはなっていない。所定の単位は、システム管理者、又はその他の手段によって設定される情報流通サーバ装置6の第1の消費活動に係る設定情報(物価設定行為)、及び情報流通システム600のシステム内通貨Lの生成・発行・流通・消滅を制御する制御アルゴリズムによって調整される。システム内通貨Lは、システム内で流通するがシステム外の通貨等のシステム外資産を交換手段に用いたアカウント間の所有権の移転を受け入れるので、実社会と仮想社会である情報交換マーケットとの間での価値交換媒体としての機能も有する。本実施形態では、後述の通貨制御部6Cの機能によって、システム内通貨Lは、情報交換マーケットにおいて流通量が過剰又は不足状態にならないよう、またシステム内通貨Lとシステム外資産との交換バランスが適切に維持されるように新規発行量を制御しながら単位価値が調整される。通貨制御部6Cは後述するように、複数の主体群の購買力差による、無償コンテンツの経済的価値の差を反映させたシステム内通貨Lの新規供給バランスの調整を行うようシステム内通貨Lの制御に補正を加える機能を持ってもよい。つまり、情報交換マーケットでの通貨は、情報流通サーバ装置6により独自に発行され、流通するシステム内通貨Lであり、またリアルマーケット(実社会)での通貨は、中央銀行により独自に発行され、流通する法定通貨又はその他の手段で流通する仮想通貨であり、情報流通サーバ装置6の各機能部の処理によって、これらの通貨の交換をはじめとするシステム内通貨Lの制御を実現している。 The intra-system currency L has a quantity defined in a predetermined unit (for example, as US dollar “$” or Japanese yen “¥”). The predetermined unit of the system currency L is not designed to have a value directly based on the legal currency. The predetermined unit is the setting information (price setting behavior) related to the first consumption activity of the information distribution server device 6 set by the system administrator or other means, and generation of the system currency L of the information distribution system 600 Adjusted by a control algorithm that controls issuance, distribution, and extinction. In-system currency L accepts the transfer of ownership between accounts that use in-system assets such as in-system currency, but exchange in-system currency, and therefore, between the real and virtual society information exchange markets. It also has a function as a value exchange medium. In this embodiment, with the function of the currency control unit 6C described later, the in-system currency L does not have an excessive or insufficient distribution amount in the information exchange market, and the exchange balance between the in-system currency L and non-system assets is Unit value is adjusted while controlling the amount of new issue to be maintained properly. As described later, the currency control unit 6C controls the currency L in the system so as to adjust the new supply balance of the currency L in the system reflecting the difference in the economic value of the free content by the purchasing power difference between the plurality of subject groups It may have a function to make corrections to In other words, the currency in the information exchange market is the system currency L, which is issued and distributed independently by the information distribution server device 6, and the currency in the real market (real society) is uniquely issued by the central bank and distributed. This is a virtual currency distributed in legal currency or other means, and the control of the intra-system currency L including exchange of these currencies is realized by the processing of each functional unit of the information distribution server device 6.
 システム内通貨Lは、上述したように、学術的に通貨の機能とされている価値の保蔵機能は有しておらず、従来の法定通貨、又は仮想通貨等の通貨とは異なる。システム内通貨Lは、用途としては情報交換マーケットの利用行為のための決済手段、交換媒体、及び価値の尺度をユーザ間で共有するための手段に用いられる。更に、システム内通貨Lは、各ユーザが取得してからの経過時間に応じて消滅するために、蓄財されるものではなく、情報流通システム600内を転々と流通しながら、最終的には第1の消費活動により消滅する。しかしながら、システム内通貨Lは、従来は法定通貨、又は仮想通貨等の通貨にしかないとされ、従来のポイントや電子マネーにはない、その他の資産との自由な交換が可能になっている。また、システム内通貨Lの流通する範囲は、情報交換マーケットに限ってはいるが、マーケット内でのユーザ間での支払い手段として機能し、ユーザ間での価値の尺度としても機能し、情報交換マーケットにおける利用価値は保証されている。そしてシステム内通貨Lは、ユーザの情報交換マーケットにおける唯一無二の価値交換媒体として機能する。さらにシステム内通貨Lの本源的な価値は、情報交換マーケットに参加するユーザの、その他のユーザから提供され取得する無償コンテンツの価値に由来し、評価アルゴリズム(バリュエーションアルゴリズム)により定量化されるユーザ間を移転した価値の量に基づいている。これらのことから、システム内通貨Lは、情報交換マーケットにおいて、ユーザ間を移転する情報の価値を本源とする貨幣として、「情報価値本位貨幣」や「評価本位貨幣」と表現することもできる。そういう意味では、システム内通貨Lは通貨であるともいえる。 As described above, the in-system currency L does not have the function of storing the value scientifically regarded as a currency function, and is different from the conventional legal currency or a currency such as a virtual currency. The in-system currency L is used as a means of settlement for use of the information exchange market as an application, an exchange medium, and a means for sharing a measure of value among users. Furthermore, the in-system currency L is not stored in order to disappear according to the elapsed time since each user has acquired it, and it is eventually stored in the information distribution system 600 while being circulated from time to time. It disappears by consumption activity of 1. However, the in-system currency L is conventionally limited to a currency such as a legal currency or a virtual currency, and free exchange with other assets that are not in conventional points or electronic money is possible. Moreover, although the range of circulation of the system currency L is limited to the information exchange market, it functions as a means of payment among users in the market, and also functions as a measure of value between users, and information exchange The use value in the market is guaranteed. The in-system currency L functions as a unique value exchange medium in the user's information exchange market. Furthermore, the intrinsic value of the intra-system currency L is derived from the value of free content provided and acquired from other users of users participating in the information exchange market, and is quantified by the evaluation algorithm (valuation algorithm). Based on the amount of value transferred. From these things, the system internal currency L can also be expressed as "information value-oriented money" or "evaluation-oriented money" as money based on the value of information transferred between users in the information exchange market. In that sense, it can be said that the system currency L is a currency.
 更に、ユーザAに対して発行されるシステム内通貨Lの数量は、無償コンテンツの利用回数、又は利用時間に対する所定の割合等の一義的算出式のみに基づいて定まるのではなく、また無償コンテンツを利用するユーザB又はユーザCがその利用の都度にユーザの主観で定めるものでもなく、情報流通サーバ装置6の複数の機能部の連続的処理により決定される。この点で、従来のポイント制度、コンテンツ配信システムにおける報酬制度とも更に異なる。 Furthermore, the quantity of the system currency L issued to the user A is not determined based only on the unambiguous calculation formula such as the number of times of use of the free content or a predetermined ratio with respect to the use time. The user B or user C to use is not determined by the subjectivity of the user each time it is used, but is determined by continuous processing of a plurality of functional units of the information distribution server device 6. In this respect, it is further different from the conventional point system and the compensation system in the content delivery system.
 システム内通貨Lは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザAの無償コンテンツ発信から始まる各機能部の一連の処理によって、情報交換マーケット内に生まれる。情報交換マーケットに生まれたシステム内通貨Lは、ユーザAから「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザB又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザCへの移転によって、情報交換マーケット内で流通を開始する。システム内通貨Lの移転には、システム外の資産を交換対象とすることができ、より有益な無償コンテンツを発信するユーザAが、収益を得られるシステムが達成され、ユーザB、Cのような利用者も増えて情報交換マーケットの規模が拡大され続ける。情報交換マーケットは以下のような流れで成長する。 The in-system currency L is created in the information exchange market by a series of processes of each functional unit starting from the free content distribution of the user A having an "Associates" account. The in-system currency L created in the information exchange market starts distribution in the information exchange market by transfer from the user A to the user B having the "business operator" account or the user C having the "individual" account. For the transfer of the in-system currency L, assets outside the system can be targeted for exchange, and a system in which the user A who sends more useful free content can earn a profit is achieved, such as the users B and C The number of users also increases and the size of the information exchange market continues to expand. The information exchange market grows in the following manner.
 (a)「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザによって有償又は無償のコンテンツが発信される。
 (b)コンテンツを求めて「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザが増大する。
 (c)増大したユーザに対し広告等の情報を発信したい「事業者」のユーザが現れる。「アソシエイツ」から発信されるコンテンツに価値を見出した場合、その「アソシエイツ」から発信されるコンテンツが有償であったとしても、コンテンツの取得を希望する「個人」のユーザが現れる。こうして、第1、第2の消費活動が大きくなる。
 (d)システム内通貨Lの需要の増大に基づき、「アソシエイツ」のユーザにシステム内通貨Lが発行される数量が増大する。すなわち、システム内通貨Lの新規発行量は、情報流通サーバ装置6の機能部の処理によりシステム内通貨Lの需要に基づき供給調整されるためである。
 (e)「事業者」及び「個人」のユーザは「アソシエイツ」のユーザに、対価を支払ってシステム内通貨Lの移転を受ける。これにより「アソシエイツ」のユーザは「事業者」及び「個人」のユーザからの対価の支払いによりシステム外資産を取得する。
 (f)「事業者」のユーザは、移転されたシステム内通貨Lを消費して情報を発信(第1の消費活動)し、これによりシステム内通貨Lは消滅する。「個人」のユーザは、移転されたシステム内通貨Lを消費して「アソシエイツ」の有償コンテンツを取得(第2の消費活動)し、これによりシステム内通貨Lの帰属は「個人」から「アソシエイツ」に移転する。
 (g)システム外資産を取得した「アソシエイツ」のユーザは、価値のあるコンテンツを更に発信する。
 (h)ユーザの増大及び消費の増大に伴い、システム内通貨Lの情報交換マーケットへの供給量が上昇する。
 (i)新規発行(供給)されたシステム内通貨Lが「アソシエイツ」のユーザに与えられる。
 (j)(a)へ戻る。
(A) A user with an "Associates" account sends out paid or free content.
(B) The number of users with "business" or "individual" accounts increases for content.
(C) Users of "business operators" who want to transmit information such as advertisements to the increased users appear. When value is found in the content transmitted from "Associates", even if the content transmitted from "Associates" is paid, users of "Individuals" who wish to acquire the content appear. Thus, the first and second consumption activities increase.
(D) Due to the increase in the demand for the in-system currency L, the quantity for which the in-system currency L is issued to the user of "Associates" increases. That is, the amount of new issuance of the system currency L is adjusted by the processing of the functional unit of the information distribution server 6 based on the demand of the system currency L.
(E) The users of the "business operator" and the "individual" pay the compensation to the user of "associates" and receive the transfer of the system currency L. As a result, the user of "Associates" acquires the non-system asset by paying the compensation from the "business person" and the "individual" user.
(F) The user of the “business operator” consumes the transferred system currency L to transmit information (first consumption activity), whereby the system currency L disappears. The "individual" user consumes the transferred system currency L to acquire paid content of "associates" (second consumption activity), whereby the attribution of the system currency L is from "individual" to "Associates" Transfer to
(G) The user of "Associates" who has acquired the off-system asset further transmits valuable content.
(H) As the number of users increases and consumption increases, the supply amount of the system currency L to the information exchange market rises.
(I) A newly issued (supplied) in-system currency L is given to the user of "Associates".
(J) Return to (a).
 情報交換マーケットは、発信されるコンテンツの種別やアソシエイツの業態の別によって分別された複数の情報交換マーケットを含んでいてもよい。情報流通サーバ装置6は、異なる情報交換マーケット毎に機能を分別して動作してもよいし、異なる情報交換マーケット間でのやり取りを仲介する機能を持たせて一つのアカウントで異なる情報交換マーケットでの活動が行なえるようにしてもよい。複数のマーケットは相互に一部が重複していてもよい。なお、「アソシエイツ」としてのアカウントの機能は、システム管理者によって情報交換マーケットごとに認定して与えられるものである。ある情報交換マーケットにおいて「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザが、異なる情報交換マーケットにおいても「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザとしての活動を希望する場合には、基礎となる「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントにて、当該異なる情報交換マーケットにおいてシステム管理者に「アソシエイツ」としての活動の許可を申請し許諾されるようにすればよい。 The information exchange market may include a plurality of information exchange markets sorted according to the type of content to be transmitted and the business condition of the Associates. The information distribution server device 6 may operate by separating functions for different information exchange markets, or may have a function of mediating exchanges between different information exchange markets so that one account can operate in different information exchange markets. It may be possible to perform activities. Multiple markets may overlap with each other. In addition, the function of the account as “Associates” is given by the system administrator for each information exchange market. If a user who has an "Associates" account in one information exchange market wishes to act as a user who has an "Associates" account even in a different information exchange market, the underlying "Operator" or "Individual" In the account of, the application for permission of activity as “Associates” may be applied to the system administrator in the different information exchange market, and the application may be permitted.
 このような情報交換マーケットを実現するために情報流通サーバ装置6は、図1に示すように管理部6A、通貨発行部6B、通貨制御部6C、取引処理部6D、及び価値連動部6Eとして機能する。各機能は別々のサーバコンピュータで実装され、集合として情報流通サーバ装置6として動作してもよい。 In order to realize such an information exchange market, the information distribution server device 6 functions as a management unit 6A, a currency issuing unit 6B, a currency control unit 6C, a transaction processing unit 6D, and a value interlocking unit 6E as shown in FIG. Do. Each function may be implemented by separate server computers, and may operate as the information distribution server device 6 as a set.
 更に、管理部6A、通貨発行部6B、通貨制御部6C、及び取引処理部6Dはそれぞれ、図2に示す機能を備える。具体的には、管理部6Aは、利用要求受付部601、取得要求受付部602、消費記録部603、第1移転記録部604、及び第2移転記録部605を備える。また、通貨発行部6Bは、算出部606、及び決定部607を備える。また、通貨制御部6Cは、価値制御部608、補正部609、評価補正部610、消費量決定部611、及び更新受付部612を備える。また、取引処理部6Dは、売買受付部613、及び交換受付部614を備える。各機能の詳細は後述する。 Furthermore, the management unit 6A, the currency issuing unit 6B, the currency control unit 6C, and the transaction processing unit 6D each have the functions shown in FIG. Specifically, the management unit 6A includes a use request receiving unit 601, an acquisition request receiving unit 602, a consumption recording unit 603, a first transfer recording unit 604, and a second transfer recording unit 605. In addition, the currency issuing unit 6B includes a calculating unit 606 and a determining unit 607. Further, the currency control unit 6C includes a value control unit 608, a correction unit 609, an evaluation correction unit 610, a consumption amount determination unit 611, and an update reception unit 612. Further, the transaction processing unit 6D includes a trade reception unit 613 and an exchange reception unit 614. Details of each function will be described later.
 管理部6Aは、各機能全体の制御、アカウントの発行手続き、コンテンツの発信受け付け、及びコンテンツ利用受け付け等を行なう。アカウントの発行手続きで管理部6Aは、ユーザのアカウントに対応付けて、ユーザの属性情報を記憶したデータベースにおけるデータ処理を実行する。例えば管理部6Aは、予め「事業者」のアカウントを有するユーザAが使用する端末装置7と通信可能に接続されており、管理部6Aは、ユーザAが使用する端末装置7から情報交換マーケットにおける「アソシエイツ」のアカウント発行の依頼を受け付けると、ユーザAから何らかの担保の設定を条件として、ユーザAに対して情報交換マーケットにおける「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを発行する。ここで担保は、法定通貨又は仮想通貨に基づく資産(金銭)でもよいし、コンテンツの情報の有益性の担保となる資格証明等であってもよい。「事業者」のアカウント発行については、「個人」よりも登録項目が多い等の条件が設定されてもよい。なお、「事業者」及び「個人」のアカウントの発行については、管理部6Aによる担保の設定を条件としなくてもよい。 The management unit 6A controls the overall functions, issues an account issuance procedure, accepts transmission of content, accepts usage of content, and the like. In the account issuance procedure, the management unit 6A executes data processing in the database storing the attribute information of the user in association with the account of the user. For example, the management unit 6A is communicably connected in advance to the terminal device 7 used by the user A who has an account of "business operator", and the management unit 6A is connected from the terminal device 7 used by the user A to the information exchange market. When a request for issuing an "Associates" account is received, the "Associates" account in the information exchange market is issued to the user A, on the condition that the user A sets some collateral. Here, the collateral may be an asset (money) based on a legal currency or a virtual currency, or may be a credential or the like that secures the usefulness of the information of the content. With regard to the issuance of the account of the “business operator”, conditions may be set such that there are more registration items than “individual”. It should be noted that the issuance of “business person” and “individual” accounts may not be conditional on the setting of collateral by the management unit 6A.
 通貨発行部6Bは、ユーザAが使用する端末装置7と通信可能に接続される。通貨発行部6Bは、システム管理者が使用する端末装置と通信可能に接続されてもよい。通貨発行部6Bは、ユーザAから発信された無償コンテンツ及びユーザAに対する評価値を算出する算出部606と、算出された評価値に基づいて、ユーザAに対して発行するシステム内通貨Lの数量を決定する決定部607とを含む。ここで、算出部606が算出する評価値は、無償コンテンツの情報交換マーケットでの有用度に基づく。通貨発行部6Bは、決定した数量に応じたシステム内通貨LをユーザAに発行する。システム内通貨Lは、ユーザAから発信された無償コンテンツ及びユーザAに対する評価値に基づき発行量が定まるため、情報交換マーケット内で通用させるに必要な経済的価値の根拠は、無償コンテンツ及びユーザAに対する評価値を基礎とした経済的価値であるとも言える。また、情報交換マーケットにおけるシステム内通貨Lの需要に基づき、システム内通貨Lの発行量を定め、システム内通貨Lは単価(単位としての価値)が一定に保たれるようにしてもよい。このとき、通貨発行部6Bは、マーケットの規模、システム内通貨Lの需要と供給のバランス等に基づいてシステム内通貨Lを新規発行(供給)する。 The currency issuing unit 6B is communicably connected to the terminal device 7 used by the user A. The currency issuing unit 6B may be communicably connected to a terminal device used by a system administrator. The currency issuing unit 6B calculates the free content transmitted from the user A and the calculating unit 606 for calculating the evaluation value for the user A, and the quantity of the system currency L to be issued to the user A based on the calculated evaluation value. And a determination unit 607 that determines the Here, the evaluation value calculated by the calculation unit 606 is based on the usefulness of the free content in the information exchange market. The currency issuing unit 6B issues the system currency L to the user A according to the determined quantity. Since the issue amount of the system internal currency L is determined based on the free content transmitted from the user A and the evaluation value for the user A, the basis of the economic value necessary for passing the information exchange market is the free content and the user A It can be said that it is the economic value based on the evaluation value for. Further, the issuance amount of the system currency L may be determined based on the demand of the system currency L in the information exchange market, and the system currency L may be maintained at a fixed unit price (value as a unit). At this time, the currency issuing unit 6B newly issues (supplies) the in-system currency L based on the size of the market, the balance between the demand and supply of the in-system currency L, and the like.
 通貨制御部6Cは、システム内通貨Lの価値を変動させる機能を発揮する。通貨制御部6Cは、情報交換マーケットへの通貨発行部6Bからのシステム内通貨Lの供給量を調整、制御する。また通貨制御部6Cは、供給を調整するために取引処理部6Dにおけるシステム内通貨Lとそれ以外の資産との交換時の交換比率を自律的に調整するようにしてもよい。また通貨制御部6Cは、主体群間の購買力の相違を吸収するように調整を行なってもよい。通貨制御部6Cの機能は自律的に発揮されてもよいし、特に情報交換マーケットのシステム管理者が使用する端末装置を介して手動にて実行されるものとしてもよい。 The currency control unit 6C exhibits a function of changing the value of the system currency L. The currency control unit 6C adjusts and controls the supply amount of the system currency L from the currency issuing unit 6B to the information exchange market. Further, the currency control unit 6C may autonomously adjust the exchange ratio at the time of exchange between the system currency L and the other assets in the transaction processing unit 6D in order to adjust the supply. In addition, the currency control unit 6C may perform adjustment so as to absorb the difference in purchasing power between the subject groups. The function of the currency control unit 6C may be exhibited autonomously, or in particular, may be manually executed via a terminal device used by a system administrator of the information exchange market.
 取引処理部6Dは、ユーザ間のシステム内通貨Lの取引を処理する。取引処理部6Dは、情報交換マーケットにおけるシステム内通貨Lの取引所として機能する。ユーザ間のシステム内通貨Lの取引の1つとして、システム外資産、例えば法定通貨、又は仮想通貨、暗号通貨若しくは暗号資産と呼ばれる電子的通貨との交換を可能とする。 Transaction processing unit 6D processes transactions of intra-system currency L between users. The transaction processing unit 6D functions as an exchange of the system currency L in the information exchange market. As one of the intra-system currency L transactions among users, exchange with non-system assets such as legal currency or virtual currency, cryptocurrency or electronic currency called cryptosystem asset is enabled.
 価値連動部6Eは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザが所持するシステム内通貨Lと、システム外で流通するデジタル資産との交換を受付ける機能を発揮する。本実施形態では、価値連動部6Eによって、システム内通貨Lと、デジタル資産の一例である特定の仮想通貨との価値を交換することができるようになり、システム内通貨Lの価値の保蔵機能を特定の仮想通貨によって代替することができるようになる。 The value interlocking unit 6E exhibits a function of accepting exchange between the system internal currency L held by the user having the “Associates” account and the digital asset distributed outside the system. In this embodiment, the value interlocking unit 6E can exchange the value of the system currency L with a specific virtual currency which is an example of a digital asset, and the function of storing the value of the system currency L can be realized. It will be possible to substitute by a specific virtual currency.
 なお、紙面の都合上、図1では1つの情報交換マーケットについてのみ示したが、発信するコンテンツの種別(例えば、テレビメディア系のコンテンツ、求人系のコンテンツ等)に応じて複数の情報交換マーケットを設けてもよい。この場合、情報交換マーケット毎に情報流通サーバ装置6を設けてもよく、複数の情報交換マーケットを一括して制御・管理する一の情報流通サーバ装置6を設けてもよい。複数の情報交換マーケットが設けられている場合、ある情報交換マーケットに属する「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザから、別の情報交換マーケットに属する「事業者」又は「個人」若しくは「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザに対して、システム内通貨Lが譲渡されてもよい。
 更に、情報流通サーバ装置6により、全世界又は複数の主体群(例えば、経済圏や国家や州や県など、ユーザの地域属性の集合体)に及ぶメタバース(重層化された情報交換マーケットの集合体であって、独自の通貨を生成し流通させている仮想国家のようなヴァーチャルマーケット)を制御・管理する構成としてもよい。メタバースでは、リアルマーケットに存在する「距離」という概念がなく、このことから、リアルマーケットにあるような「物流及び移動」によるコストは生じない。メタバースに参加するユーザは、距離(すなわちコストであり帰属する国家である)に縛られることなく、自由に生産活動を含む活動を行うことが好適である。メタバースに参加するユーザは、リアルマーケットにおいてネットワークに接続されたパーソナルコンピュータ、スマートフォン、タブレット端末、テレビ受信機、又はゲーム機を含むVR(Virtual Reality)専用機等の情報処理端末機器をユーザインタフェースとして用いることによって、いつでもどこでも誰でもが、アカウント認証処理を経て、メタバースにログインして活動することが可能である。なお、上述したように、アカウントを所持しないユーザ又はログイン認証処理を行わないユーザもメタバースに参加できるような態様としてもよい。
Although only one information exchange market is shown in FIG. 1 for the sake of space, a plurality of information exchange markets are selected according to the type of content to be transmitted (for example, television media type content, job type content, etc.). You may provide. In this case, the information distribution server device 6 may be provided for each information exchange market, or one information distribution server device 6 may be provided to collectively control and manage a plurality of information exchange markets. When multiple information exchange markets are established, a user having an "Associates" account belonging to one information exchange market can be used to make an "Operator" or "Individual" or "Associates" account belonging to another information exchange market. The in-system currency L may be transferred to the user who has it.
Furthermore, a group of metaverses (multilayered information exchange market) covering the whole world or a plurality of principal groups (for example, a group of regional attributes of users such as an economic zone, a state, a state or a prefecture, etc.) by the information distribution server device 6 The system may be configured to control and manage a virtual market (a virtual state such as a virtual state that generates and distributes its own currency). In the metaverse, there is no concept of “distance” that exists in the real market, and this does not incur the costs of “distribution and movement” that are in the real market. Users participating in the metaverse are preferably free to perform activities, including production activities, without being tied to distance (ie cost and belonging state). Users participating in the metaverse use an information processing terminal device such as a personal computer, a smartphone, a tablet terminal, a television receiver, or a VR (Virtual Reality) dedicated device including a game machine connected to a network in the real market as a user interface By doing so, anyone can log in to the metaverse and perform activities anytime, anywhere, through account authentication. As described above, a user who does not possess an account or a user who does not perform login authentication processing may also participate in the metaverse.
 上述のような情報流通システム600を実現する具体的な構成について以下に説明する。 A specific configuration for realizing the information distribution system 600 as described above will be described below.
 図3は、情報流通サーバ装置6と端末装置7の内部構成を示すブロック図である。情報流通サーバ装置6は、サーバコンピュータを用い、制御部60、記憶部61、及び通信部62を備える。第一実施形態において情報流通サーバ装置6は、上述した管理部6A、通貨発行部6B、通貨制御部6C、取引処理部6D、及び価値連動部6Eの機能毎に各々別のハードウェアを有することが好ましい。しかしながら、以下では仮想的に1つのサーバコンピュータにて各機能を持つインスタンスが生成されて各々が処理を行なうものとして説明する。 FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the information distribution server device 6 and the terminal device 7. The information distribution server device 6 includes a control unit 60, a storage unit 61, and a communication unit 62 using a server computer. In the first embodiment, the information distribution server device 6 has separate hardware for each function of the management unit 6A, the currency issuing unit 6B, the currency control unit 6C, the transaction processing unit 6D, and the value interlocking unit 6E described above. Is preferred. However, in the following description, it is assumed that an instance having each function is generated virtually by one server computer and each performs processing.
 制御部60は、CPU(Central Processing Unit )又はGPU(Graphics Processing Unit)を用いたプロセッサであり、内蔵するROM(Read Only Memory)及びRAM(Random Access Memory)等のメモリを用い、各構成部を制御して処理を実行する。具体的には、制御部60は、例えば図1及び図2に示した管理部6A、通貨発行部6B、通貨制御部6C、取引処理部6D、及び価値連動部6Eを構成する。制御部60は、記憶部61に記憶されているサーバプログラム6Pに基づく情報処理を実行する。サーバプログラム6PにはWebサーバプログラムが含まれ、制御部60は、端末装置7への情報交換マーケットのポータルサイトであるWebページの提供、Webサービスへのログインの受け付け等を実行するWebサーバとして機能する。 The control unit 60 is a processor using a central processing unit (CPU) or a graphics processing unit (GPU), and uses a memory such as a read only memory (ROM) and a random access memory (RAM) incorporated therein. Control and execute processing. Specifically, the control unit 60 configures, for example, a management unit 6A, a currency issuing unit 6B, a currency control unit 6C, a transaction processing unit 6D, and a value interlocking unit 6E shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The control unit 60 executes information processing based on the server program 6P stored in the storage unit 61. The server program 6P includes a web server program, and the control unit 60 functions as a web server that executes provision of a web page that is a portal site of the information exchange market to the terminal device 7, acceptance of login to a web service, etc. Do.
 記憶部61は、例えばハードディスク又はフラッシュメモリ等の不揮発性メモリを用いる。記憶部61には、上述したサーバプログラム6P及び制御部60が参照する各種情報が記憶される。 The storage unit 61 uses, for example, a non-volatile memory such as a hard disk or a flash memory. The storage unit 61 stores the above-described server program 6P and various types of information to which the control unit 60 refers.
 通信部62は、ネットワークNを介した通信を実現するインタフェースであり、例えばEthernet(登録商標)、又は無線通信用アンテナ等の通信インタフェースを用いる。制御部60は、通信部62を介して端末装置7と通信接続が可能である。 The communication unit 62 is an interface for realizing communication via the network N, and uses, for example, a communication interface such as Ethernet (registered trademark) or a wireless communication antenna. The control unit 60 can communicate with the terminal device 7 via the communication unit 62.
 情報流通サーバ装置6は、管理部6Aの機能により、提供する情報交換マーケットのユーザのアカウント情報を記憶した記憶装置63に対し情報の読み書きが可能である。情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60は、記憶装置63に対してアカウント情報の追加・削除、アカウント情報の更新、読み出し等を行なう。制御部60は、発信されたコンテンツのデータ及び識別情報を含むコンテンツ情報を対応付けて記憶装置63に蓄積する。コンテンツの識別情報には、コンテンツを識別する情報だけでなく、有償又は無償を識別する情報が含まれる。制御部60は、システム内通貨Lがいずれのユーザに帰属しているか、いずれのユーザから他のユーザへ移転したか等を記録する出納記録を記憶装置63に蓄積する。これに加えて制御部60は、「事業者」又は「個人」のユーザから発信される「従として取り扱われる情報」(サブコンテンツ情報)を記憶装置63に記憶する。 The information distribution server device 6 can read / write information from / to the storage device 63 storing the account information of the user of the information exchange market to be provided by the function of the management unit 6A. The control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 performs addition / deletion of account information, update / readout of account information and the like to the storage device 63. The control unit 60 associates the content data including the transmitted content data and the identification information with each other, and stores the content information in the storage device 63. The identification information of the content includes not only information identifying the content but also information identifying paid or free. The control unit 60 stores, in the storage device 63, an accounting record that records to which user the intra-system currency L belongs, which user has transferred it to another user, and the like. In addition to this, the control unit 60 stores, in the storage device 63, "information to be treated as slave" (sub-content information) transmitted from a user of "business operator" or "individual".
 図4は、システム内通貨Lの出納記録を示すシステム内通貨管理テーブルの一例を示す概念図である。図4に示す例では、例えば、システム内通貨管理テーブルに、通貨ID、取得者ID、取得日、及び消滅予定日が関連付けて記録されている。通貨IDは、個々のシステム内通貨Lを識別するための情報である。制御部60は、通貨発行部6Bがシステム内通貨Lを発行する都度、所定単位(例えば最小単位)のシステム内通貨Lに対して個別の通貨IDを割り当て、割り当てた通貨IDをシステム内通貨管理テーブルに記録する。取得者IDは、システム内通貨Lの取得者を識別するための情報である。制御部60は、通貨発行部6Bから「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザに対してシステム内通貨Lが発行された場合、発行されたシステム内通貨Lの通貨IDに関連付けて、発行先のユーザを識別する取得IDをシステム内通貨管理テーブルに記録する。取得日は、ユーザがシステム内通貨を取得した日付を表す。例えば、通貨発行部6Bから「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザに対してシステム内通貨Lが発行された場合、制御部60は、システム内通貨Lが発行された日付をユーザの取得日としてシステム内管理テーブルに記録する。消滅予定日は、システム内通貨Lが消滅する日付を表している。本実施形態では、ユーザがシステム内通貨Lを取得してから使用することなく設定期間が経過した場合、システム内通貨Lは消滅するように構成されている。設定期間は、ユーザに応じて設定することができる。例えば、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザに対しては1年、「事業者」のアカウントを有するユーザに対しては6ヶ月、「個人」のアカウントを有するユーザに対しては3ヶ月のように設定することができる。また、システム内通貨Lの消滅する設定期間は、システム内通貨Lの取得経緯に応じて設定することが可能である。例えば、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザに対して、新規発行は1年、有償コンテンツの支払いは1年、その他のアソシエイツからの譲り受けは6ヶ月、債務不履行時の譲渡先からの回収は6ヶ月、及びその他のキャンペーンは3ヶ月などのように設定することができる。また、「事業者」及び「個人」のアカウントを有するユーザに対して、アソシエイツからの譲り受けは6ヶ月、ベーシックインカムは2ヶ月、及びその他のキャンペーンは3ヶ月のように設定することができる。なお、上述したキャンペーンとは、実社会にあるような政府紙幣の発行やケインズ政策等にあるような、マーケットの活性化を目的にした臨時的、政策的な通貨の供給としてのシステム内通貨Lの給付を意味する。 FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of the in-system currency management table showing the accounting record of the in-system currency L. As shown in FIG. In the example illustrated in FIG. 4, for example, the currency ID, the acquirer ID, the acquisition date, and the expected date of extinction are associated and recorded in the in-system currency management table. The currency ID is information for identifying each in-system currency L. The control unit 60 assigns an individual currency ID to the in-system currency L of a predetermined unit (for example, the smallest unit) each time the currency issuing unit 6B issues the in-system currency L, and manages the assigned currency ID in-system currency. Record on the table. The acquirer ID is information for identifying an acquirer of the in-system currency L. When the currency L in the system is issued from the currency issuing portion 6B to the user having the “Associates” account, the control portion 60 associates the issued user with the issued currency ID of the in-system currency L. Record the acquisition ID to identify in the in-system currency management table. The acquisition date represents the date when the user acquired the system internal currency. For example, when in-system currency L is issued from the currency issuing unit 6B to a user having an “Associates” account, the control unit 60 uses the date when the in-system currency L is issued as the acquisition date of the user. Record in management table. The expected disappearance date represents a date on which the system currency L disappears. In the present embodiment, the intra-system currency L is configured to disappear if the setting period has elapsed without using the intra-system currency L after the user acquires the intra-system currency L. The setting period can be set according to the user. For example, 1 year for users with "Associates" account, 6 months for users with "Operator" account, 3 months for users with "Individual" account It can be set. Further, the set period of time in which the system currency L disappears can be set according to the acquisition history of the system currency L. For example, for users with "Associates" account, 1 year for new issue, 1 year for payment of paid content, 6 months for transfer from other associates, 6 months for recovery from transferee at default , And other campaigns can be set as 3 months and so on. In addition, for users having "business" and "individual" accounts, the transfer from Associates may be set to six months, the basic income may be set to two months, and other campaigns may be set to three months. The above-mentioned campaign is the issuance of government banknotes as in the real world, Keynesian policy, etc., and the system currency L of the system L as a temporary and policy supply of currency for the purpose of activating the market. Means a benefit.
 また、システム内通貨Lは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザから「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザ又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザへの移転を可能としている。システム内通貨管理テーブルは、システム内通貨Lの移転に応じて適宜書き換えられる。例えば、通貨ID「L001」のシステム内通貨Lが、取得者ID「U001」のユーザ(アソシエイツ)から、取得者ID「U021」のユーザ(個人)に2018年8月1日に移転した場合、通貨ID「L001」に関連付けられている取得者ID及び取得日の各項目は、それぞれ「U021」、「2018.08.01」に書き換えられる。また、個人に対する消滅期間が3ヶ月に設定されている場合、消滅予定日は「2018.11.01」に書き換えられる。
 なお、本実施形態では、1人のユーザが複数のアカウントを有する場合がある。たとえば、上述したように「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザは、少なくとも「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを有している。このため、システム内通貨管理テーブルでは、システム内通貨Lの通貨ID、取得日、及び消滅予定日の情報を、取得者を識別する取得者IDだけでなく、その取得者が所有しているアカウントのIDに関連付けて記録される構成としてもよい。そして、この場合には、例えば取得者IDが同一のユーザが「アソシエイツ」と、「事業者」のアカウントを同時に持っている場合には、システム内通貨Lは、主としてそれぞれのアカウントのIDごとに関連付けて管理されるようにすれば好適である。つまり、システム内通貨管理テーブルに記録される出納記録を基礎にした、従来のオンラインバンクシステムにあるような「通帳機能」をアカウントに関連付けて制御する構成にしてもよい。上述した「通帳機能」は、アカウントごとにユーザの端末装置7の表示部73に表示させ、操作部74によりアカウントを持つユーザからの操作を受け付け、通信部72によって情報流通サーバ装置6と通信を行うことで、システム内通貨管理テーブルに記録される出納記録を読み出したり書き換えたり書き加えたりする構成にすればよい。なお、上述した「通帳機能」は、取引処理部6Dと連携して機能させてもよい。
Also, the intra-system currency L enables transfer from a user with an "Associates" account to a user with an "Operator" account or a user with an "Individual" account. The in-system currency control table is appropriately rewritten according to the transfer of the in-system currency L. For example, when the intra-system currency L of the currency ID "L001" is transferred from the user (associates) of the acquirer ID "U001" to the user (individual) of the acquirer ID "U021" on August 1, 2018, The items of the acquirer ID and the acquisition date associated with the currency ID "L001" are rewritten as "U021" and "2012.08.01", respectively. In addition, when the disappearance period for an individual is set to 3 months, the estimated deletion date is rewritten as "2017.11.01."
In the present embodiment, one user may have a plurality of accounts. For example, as described above, a user who has an "Associates" account has at least an "Operator" or "Individual" account. Therefore, in the in-system currency management table, the information of the currency ID of the intra-system currency L, the acquisition date, and the estimated date of destruction is not only the acquirer ID identifying the acquirer, but an account owned by the acquirer. It may be configured to be recorded in association with the ID of. Then, in this case, for example, when the user having the same acquirer ID simultaneously has “Associates” and “Operator” accounts, the intra-system currency L is mainly for each account ID. It is preferable if they are managed in association with each other. That is, a "passbook function" as in the conventional online bank system based on the accounting record recorded in the in-system currency management table may be controlled in association with the account. The "passbook function" described above is displayed on the display unit 73 of the user's terminal device 7 for each account, receives an operation from the user having the account by the operation unit 74, and communicates with the information distribution server device 6 by the communication unit 72. By doing this, the accounting record recorded in the in-system currency management table may be read, rewritten, or added. The “passbook function” described above may function in cooperation with the transaction processing unit 6D.
 また、第1の消費活動によって消費されたシステム内通貨Lは、情報交換マーケットから消滅する。この場合、システム内通貨管理テーブルからは、消滅したシステム内通貨Lのレコードは削除される。 Also, the in-system currency L consumed by the first consumption activity disappears from the information exchange market. In this case, the record of the extant in-system currency L is deleted from the in-system currency control table.
 なお、本実施形態では、システム内通貨Lの移転又は消滅に応じて、システム内通貨管理テーブルのレコードを書き換える構成としたが、それぞれのシステム内通貨Lについて、発行から移転及び消滅に至る履歴をレコードとして残すようにしてもよい。また、本実施形態では、システム内通貨管理テーブルにおいて、通貨ID、取得者ID、取得日、及び消滅予定日を関連付けて記録する構成としたが、使用の内訳(例えば、他のユーザへの譲渡、第1の消費活動、第2の消費活動)を併せて記録する構成としてもよい。システム内通貨管理テーブルにおいて、何らかの処理により、ある取得者ID(又はアカウントID)からシステム内通貨Lをその他の取得者ID(又はその他のアカウントID)に移転又は消滅させる通貨IDの優先順位は、同一取得者ID(又はアカウントID)ごとに消滅期限の到来する日が近い通貨IDからとすればよい。  In the present embodiment, the record of the in-system currency management table is rewritten according to the transfer or disappearance of the in-system currency L, but the history from issuance to transfer and disappearance of each in-system currency L is You may leave it as a record. Further, in the present embodiment, in the system internal currency management table, the currency ID, the acquirer ID, the acquisition date, and the estimated due date are associated and recorded, but the breakdown of use (for example, transfer to another user , The first consumption activity and the second consumption activity) may be recorded together. In the in-system currency management table, the priority order of the currency ID for transferring or deleting the in-system currency L from one acquirer ID (or account ID) to another acquirer ID (or other account ID) is The same acquirer ID (or account ID) may be taken from a currency ID in which the expiration date is near.
 端末装置7は上述したようにユーザが使用するパーソナルコンピュータ、スマートフォン又はタブレット端末装置などのコンピュータ装置であって、制御部70、記憶部71、通信部72、表示部73及び操作部74を備える。 The terminal device 7 is a computer device such as a personal computer, a smartphone, or a tablet terminal device used by the user as described above, and includes a control unit 70, a storage unit 71, a communication unit 72, a display unit 73, and an operation unit 74.
 制御部70は、CPU、GPU等のプロセッサと、メモリ等を用いる。制御部70は、プロセッサ、メモリ、記憶部71及び通信部72を集積した1つのハードウェア(SoC:System On a Chip)として構成されていてもよい。制御部70は、記憶部71に記憶されているアプリプログラム7Pに基づき、情報流通サーバ装置6への通信接続を実行し、該情報流通サーバ装置6によって提供される情報交換マーケットにおけるWebページを介した処理を実行する。 The control unit 70 uses a processor such as a CPU and a GPU, a memory, and the like. The control unit 70 may be configured as one hardware (SoC: System On a Chip) in which the processor, the memory, the storage unit 71, and the communication unit 72 are integrated. The control unit 70 executes communication connection to the information distribution server device 6 based on the application program 7P stored in the storage unit 71, and via the Web page in the information exchange market provided by the information distribution server device 6. Execute the process
 記憶部71は、フラッシュメモリを用い、アプリプログラム7Pを含む制御部70が参照するプログラム、及びデータが記憶される。アプリプログラム7Pは少なくともWebブラウザプログラムを含み、制御部70は、アプリプログラム7Pに基づき、情報流通サーバ装置7で提供されるWebページの情報から画面を表示部73に表示させる。また、記憶部71は、ユーザのアカウントに関連付けられたシステム内通貨Lの出納記録を示すシステム内通貨管理テーブルを有していてもよい。端末装置7のシステム内通貨テーブルには、例えば、システム内通貨Lの通貨ID、取得日、及び消滅予定日が関連付けられて記録される。 The storage unit 71 uses a flash memory, and stores programs and data referred to by the control unit 70 including the application program 7P. The application program 7P includes at least a web browser program, and the control unit 70 causes the display unit 73 to display a screen based on the information of the web page provided by the information distribution server device 7 based on the application program 7P. In addition, the storage unit 71 may have an in-system currency management table indicating accounting records of the in-system currency L associated with the user's account. In the in-system currency table of the terminal device 7, for example, the currency ID of the in-system currency L, the acquisition date, and the expected disappearance date are associated and recorded.
 通信部72は、ネットワークNへの通信接続を実現する通信モジュールである。通信部72は、ネットワークカード、無線通信デバイス又はキャリア通信用モジュールを用いる。 The communication unit 72 is a communication module that implements communication connection to the network N. The communication unit 72 uses a network card, a wireless communication device or a module for carrier communication.
 表示部73は、液晶パネル又は有機ELディスプレイ等のディスプレイ装置を用いる。操作部74は、ユーザの操作を受け付けるインタフェースであり、物理ボタン、ディスプレイ内蔵のタッチパネルデバイス、スピーカ及びマイクロフォン等を用いる。操作部74は、物理ボタン又はタッチパネルにて表示部73で表示している画面上で操作を受け付けてもよいし、マイクロフォンにて入力音声から操作内容を認識し、スピーカで出力する音声との対話形式で操作を受け付けてもよい。 The display unit 73 uses a display device such as a liquid crystal panel or an organic EL display. The operation unit 74 is an interface for receiving user's operation, and uses a physical button, a touch panel device with a built-in display, a speaker, a microphone, and the like. The operation unit 74 may receive an operation on a screen displayed on the display unit 73 by a physical button or a touch panel, or the microphone recognizes an operation content from an input sound and interacts with the sound output from a speaker The operation may be accepted in a form.
 表示部73及び操作部74は、上述の態様に限らない。例えば操作部74は、ゲーム機のジョイスティックのようなコントローラモジュールを用いてもよい。またユーザの動きに応じて操作を受け付けるウェアラブルデバイスであってもよく、グローブ、スーツ、シューズ、ゴーグル等の種々の入出力装置を用いることができる。 The display unit 73 and the operation unit 74 are not limited to the modes described above. For example, the operation unit 74 may use a controller module such as a joystick of a game machine. The device may be a wearable device that receives an operation according to the user's movement, and various input / output devices such as gloves, suits, shoes, and goggles can be used.
 このように構成される情報流通システム600における情報流通サーバ装置6により実現される機能について順に説明する。 The functions realized by the information distribution server device 6 in the information distribution system 600 configured as described above will be described in order.
 第1に管理部6Aの機能について説明する。制御部60は管理部6Aの機能により、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザが使用する端末装置7から発信するコンテンツ登録依頼を受け付ける。制御部60は、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザのみに対し、コンテンツの登録を受け付けるインタフェースをWebサイト、又は端末装置7にて表示される画面に表示させる。制御部60は、受け付けたコンテンツにコンテンツ識別情報を付与して記憶装置63に記憶する。制御部60は、コンテンツ識別情報と、発信者であるユーザのアカウント情報と、コンテンツの登録日時を含む時間情報とを対応付けて記憶装置63に記憶する。コンテンツの閲覧、視聴等の利用が有償である場合、発信者であるユーザが定めたシステム内通貨Lの数量が対応付けて記憶されているとよい。この数量は事後的に変更可能である。制御部60はコンテンツへのアクセスを含むWebサイトを提示し、これによりコンテンツの利用が可能となる。 First, the function of the management unit 6A will be described. The control unit 60 receives the content registration request transmitted from the terminal device 7 used by the user having the “Associates” account by the function of the management unit 6A. The control unit 60 causes an interface that accepts content registration to be displayed on a screen displayed on the website or the terminal device 7 only for a user who has an “Associates” account. The control unit 60 adds content identification information to the received content and stores the content identification information in the storage device 63. The control unit 60 stores the content identification information, the account information of the user who is the sender, and the time information including the registration date of the content in the storage device 63 in association with each other. In the case where the use of content browsing, viewing, and the like is paid, it is preferable that the quantity of in-system currency L determined by the user who is the sender is stored in association. This quantity can be changed ex post. The control unit 60 presents a web site including access to the content, which enables the use of the content.
 制御部60は管理部6Aの機能により、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザが使用する端末装置7からコンテンツが利用されると、その利用回数を含む利用履歴等をコンテンツ識別情報に対応付けて記憶装置63に記憶する。また制御部60は管理部6Aの機能により、ユーザのアカウント情報に対応付けて、各ユーザがどのようなコンテンツをどのようなタイミングで利用したのかを含む利用履歴を記憶装置63に記憶する。 When the content is used from the terminal device 7 used by the user having the "business operator" or "individual" account by the function of the management unit 6A, the control unit 60 uses the content history including the usage count etc. Are stored in the storage device 63 in association with Further, the control unit 60 stores, in the storage device 63, a usage history including what kind of content each user has used and at what timing in association with the user's account information by the function of the management unit 6A.
 図5は、制御部60による管理部6Aとしての処理手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。制御部60は管理部6Aとして、一日に一度、週に一度、月になどの所定の周期によって以下の処理を実行する。 FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing procedure of the control unit 60 as the management unit 6A. The control unit 60, as the management unit 6A, executes the following processing once a day, once a week, once a month, etc. according to a predetermined cycle.
 制御部60は、記憶装置63に記憶されているアカウント情報に基づき「アソシエイツ」のユーザを選択する(ステップS101)。 The control unit 60 selects the user of "associates" based on the account information stored in the storage device 63 (step S101).
 選択されたユーザのコンテンツ又はユーザ自身について、制御部60は評価値を算出し(ステップS102)、選択中のユーザについて算出した評価値に基づき、対応するシステム内通貨Lの数量を決定する(ステップS103)。 The control unit 60 calculates an evaluation value for the content of the selected user or the user itself (step S102), and determines the quantity of the corresponding intra-system currency L based on the evaluation value calculated for the user under selection (step S102) S103).
 制御部60は、ステップS103で決定した数量に応じたシステム内通貨Lを選択中のユーザに発行する(ステップS104)。ステップS104にて制御部60は、選択中のユーザのアカウント情報(例えば取得者ID)に対応付けて、新規に発行したシステム内通貨Lを識別する通貨IDをシステム内通貨管理テーブルに記憶する。ここでシステム内通貨Lの通貨IDは、システム内通貨Lをユーザが取得した取得日(すなわち、システム内通貨Lの発行日)、及びそのシステム内通貨Lが消滅する日付と共に、システム内通貨管理テーブルに記憶される。 The control unit 60 issues the in-system currency L according to the quantity determined in step S103 to the user currently selected (step S104). In step S104, the control unit 60 stores the currency ID identifying the newly issued in-system currency L in the in-system currency management table in association with the account information (for example, acquirer ID) of the currently selected user. Here, the currency ID of the in-system currency L is the in-system currency management together with the acquisition date when the in-system currency L is acquired by the user (ie, the issue date of the in-system currency L) and the date when the in-system currency L disappears. It is stored in the table.
 制御部60は、コンテンツを発信する「アソシエイツ」のユーザ全てについて選択したか否かを判断し(ステップS105)、選択していない場合(S105:NO)、処理をステップS101へ戻す。ステップS105にて全て選択したと判断した場合(S105:YES)、制御部60は処理を終了する。 The control unit 60 determines whether or not all the users of "associates" who transmit the content have been selected (step S105), and when not selected (S105: NO), returns the process to step S101. If it is determined in step S105 that all the items have been selected (S105: YES), the control unit 60 ends the process.
 ステップS102及びステップS103の処理について説明する。制御部60はコンテンツの利用履歴に基づく評価値の算出方法を第1の設定情報として記憶部61又は記憶装置63に記憶しており、制御部60は、この第1の設定情報に基づいて評価値を算出する。 The processes of steps S102 and S103 will be described. The control unit 60 stores the calculation method of the evaluation value based on the usage history of the content as the first setting information in the storage unit 61 or the storage device 63, and the control unit 60 evaluates based on the first setting information. Calculate the value.
 図6は、評価値算出手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。図6のフローチャートに示す処理手順は、図5のフローチャートにおけるステップS102の処理の詳細に対応する。なお、図6のフローチャートに基づく評価値の算出手順はあくまで一例に過ぎず、図6のフローチャートに示す手順に限定されない。 FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the evaluation value calculation procedure. The processing procedure illustrated in the flowchart of FIG. 6 corresponds to the details of the process of step S102 in the flowchart of FIG. Note that the calculation procedure of the evaluation value based on the flowchart of FIG. 6 is merely an example, and is not limited to the procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG.
 制御部60は、選択中の「アソシエイツ」のユーザのアカウント情報が対応付けられているコンテンツ識別情報を参照し、当該ユーザによって発信された無償のコンテンツを1つ選択する(ステップS201)。 The control unit 60 refers to the content identification information to which the account information of the user of “associates” being selected is associated, and selects one free content transmitted by the user (step S201).
 制御部60は、選択した無償コンテンツについて「回数評価値」を算出する(ステップS202)。「回数評価値」は、所定の期間、例えば前回の算出時点から今回の算出時点までの期間における利用したユーザ数に基づき算出される。ユーザ数は延べ数でもよいし、アカウント情報によって区別されてもよい。例えば制御部60は、以下のように「回数評価値」を算出する。
 「回数評価値」=利用回数×x1 +利用回数×x2 ×(利用回数/総利用回数)+x3 
 ここでx1 :ユーザ数係数(設定情報)
    x2 :総利用回数との比率で評価する場合の係数(設定情報)
    x3 :利用ユーザ数上位に対する評価値(設定情報)
 「利用回数」は、所定の期間における回数、「総利用回数」はコンテンツが登録されてから今回の算出時点までの総回数である。「利用回数」は、コンテンツを指定するリンクへのアクセス回数により計数される値であり、コンテンツを含むWebページへのアクセス回数、PDF(Portable Document Format)のダウンロード回数、動画の再生回数等を含む。
The control unit 60 calculates the “number evaluation value” for the selected free content (step S202). The “count evaluation value” is calculated based on the number of users used in a predetermined period, for example, a period from the previous calculation time point to the current calculation time point. The number of users may be a total number or may be distinguished by account information. For example, the control unit 60 calculates the “count evaluation value” as follows.
"Number of times evaluation value" = number of times used x x 1 + number of times used x x 2 x (number of times used / total number of times used) + x 3
Where x1: user number coefficient (setting information)
x2: Coefficient when evaluating based on the ratio to the total number of times of use (setting information)
x3: Evaluation value for the top users (setting information)
The "number of times of use" is the number of times in a predetermined period, and the "total number of times of use" is the total number of times from the time when the content is registered to the time of this calculation. "Number of times of use" is a value counted by the number of times of access to the link specifying the content, including the number of times of access to the Web page containing the content, the number of downloads of Portable Document Format (PDF), the number of times of playback of moving images, etc. .
 制御部60は、「時間評価値」を算出する(ステップS203)。「時間評価値」は、所定の期間にユーザが対象コンテンツを利用した時間に基づき算出される。例えば制御部60は、以下のように「時間評価値」を算出する。
 「時間評価値」=利用時間×y1 +利用時間×y2 ×(利用時間/総利用時間)+y3 
 ここでy1 :時間係数(設定情報)
    y2 :総利用時間との比率で評価する場合の係数(設定情報)
    y3 :利用時間上位に対する評価値(設定情報)
 「利用時間」は、所定の期間における時間、「総利用時間」はコンテンツが登録されてから今回の算出時点までの合計時間である。「利用時間」は、ユーザの端末装置7にてコンテンツを閲覧している時間であり、コンテンツを含むWebページの表示時間、PDFの表示時間、動画の再生時間等を含む。
The control unit 60 calculates a "time evaluation value" (step S203). The “time evaluation value” is calculated based on the time when the user uses the target content in a predetermined period. For example, the control unit 60 calculates the "time evaluation value" as follows.
“Time evaluation value” = use time × y1 + use time × y2 × (use time / total use time) + y3
Where y1: time coefficient (setting information)
y2: Coefficient when evaluating based on the ratio to total usage time (setting information)
y3: Evaluation value for upper use time (setting information)
The “use time” is a time in a predetermined period, and the “total use time” is a total time from the time when the content is registered to the present calculation time. The “use time” is a time during which content is viewed on the terminal device 7 of the user, and includes the display time of a web page including the content, the display time of the PDF, the reproduction time of the moving image, and the like.
 制御部60は、「ユーザ評価値」を算出する(ステップS204)。「ユーザ評価値」は、所定の期間にユーザが対象コンテンツを評価した評価内容(評価数)に基づき算出される。評価数は、コンテンツに対する「いいね(Like)」の数と、逆の「わるいね(Dislike )」の数との差分、与えられる☆の数の総数である。例えば制御部60は、以下のように「ユーザ評価値」を算出する。
 「ユーザ評価値」=評価数×z1 +評価数×z2 ×(評価数/総評価数)+z3 
 ここでz1 :評価数係数(設定情報)
    z2 :総評価数との比率で評価する場合の係数(設定情報)
    z3 :評価数上位に対する評価値(設定情報)
 「評価数」は、所定の期間における評価数、「総評価数」はコンテンツが登録されてから今回の算出時点までの評価数の総計である。
The control unit 60 calculates a "user evaluation value" (step S204). The “user evaluation value” is calculated based on the evaluation content (the number of evaluations) in which the user evaluated the target content in a predetermined period. The evaluation number is the difference between the number of "Like" for the content and the number of "Dislike" in reverse, and is the total number of the given *. For example, the control unit 60 calculates the “user evaluation value” as follows.
"User evaluation value" = evaluation number x z1 + evaluation number x z2 x (number of evaluations / total number of evaluations) + z3
Where z1: evaluation number coefficient (setting information)
z2: Coefficient when evaluating with the ratio to the total evaluation number (setting information)
z3: Evaluation value for top evaluation numbers (setting information)
"Evaluation number" is the number of evaluations in a predetermined period, and "total evaluation number" is the total of the number of evaluations from the time when content is registered to the time of this calculation.
 制御部60は、評価が認められる他の指標に基づき評価値を算出する(ステップS205)。ステップS205において制御部60は例えば、予め設定されている期間以上にコンテンツとして利用されているロングセラーである場合に加算する。その他制御部60は例えば、著名な評論による評価が付与されているか、賞が与えられている等の事実によって評価値を加算してもよい。 The control unit 60 calculates an evaluation value based on another index for which the evaluation is recognized (step S205). In step S205, the control unit 60 adds, for example, when it is a long seller that is used as a content for a predetermined period or more. The other control unit 60 may add the evaluation value based on the fact that, for example, an evaluation by a well-known critic is given or an award is given.
 制御部60は、ステップS202からステップS205までに算出した評価値を総合してコンテンツ評価値を算出する(ステップS206)。ステップS206において制御部60は例えば、評価値を合算する。 The control unit 60 integrates the evaluation values calculated from step S202 to step S205 to calculate a content evaluation value (step S206). In step S206, for example, the control unit 60 adds up the evaluation values.
 制御部60は、選択中の「アソシエイツ」の全てのコンテンツについて処理を行なったか否かを判断する(ステップS207)。全てについて処理を行なっていないと判断された場合(S207:NO)、制御部60は処理をステップS201へ戻す。 The control unit 60 determines whether or not the process has been performed on all the contents of the selected "associates" (step S207). If it is determined that the process has not been performed for all (S207: NO), the control unit 60 returns the process to step S201.
 全てについて処理を行なったと判断した場合(S207:YES)、制御部60は、全てのコンテンツについて算出したコンテンツ評価値を合算した合算値を算出する(ステップS208)。 If it is determined that processing has been performed for all (S207: YES), the control unit 60 calculates a sum value obtained by adding up the content evaluation values calculated for all the contents (step S208).
 制御部60は、「発信量評価値」を算出する(ステップS209)。「発信量評価値」は、所定の期間に選択中の「アソシエイツ」のユーザが発信したコンテンツの発信数及び内容量(テキスト数、時間等)に基づき算出される。例えば制御部60は、以下のように「発信量評価値」を算出する。
 「発信量評価値」=発信量×w1 +発信量×w2 ×(発信量/総発信量)+w3 
 ここでw1 :発信量係数(設定情報)
    w2 :総発信量との比率で評価する場合の係数(設定情報)
    w3 :発信量上位に対する評価値(設定情報)
 「発信量」は、所定の期間において無償で提供されるコンテンツの発信量である。「発信量」は発信されたコンテンツの数と内容サイズとの乗算値である。「総発信量」は「アソシエイツ」のユーザが最初にコンテンツを登録してから今回の算出時点までの「発信数と内容量との乗算値の総計である。
The control unit 60 calculates a "transmission amount evaluation value" (step S209). The “transmission amount evaluation value” is calculated based on the number of transmissions of the content transmitted by the user of “Associates” selected during a predetermined period and the internal capacity (the number of text, time, etc.). For example, the control unit 60 calculates the “transmission amount evaluation value” as follows.
“Delivery amount evaluation value” = Dialing amount × w1 + Dialing amount × w2 × (Dialing amount / total dispatching amount) + w3
Where w1: transmission amount coefficient (setting information)
w2: A coefficient (setting information) when evaluating with the ratio to the total transmission volume
w3: Evaluation value for upper sending volume (setting information)
The “amount of transmission” is the amount of transmission of content provided free of charge in a predetermined period. The “amount of transmission” is a product of the number of contents transmitted and the content size. The "total transmission amount" is the total of the multiplication value of the "number of transmissions and the internal capacity" from the time when the user of "associates" first registers the content to the present calculation time.
 制御部60は、コンテンツ評価値とアソシエイツ評価値とを総合した「総合評価値」を算出し(ステップS210)、処理を終了する。ステップS210にて制御部60は、コンテンツ評価値とアソシエイツ評価値とを加算して「総合評価値」を算出してもよい。 The control unit 60 calculates an “overall evaluation value” in which the content evaluation value and the Associates evaluation value are integrated (step S210), and ends the process. In step S210, the control unit 60 may calculate the "overall evaluation value" by adding the content evaluation value and the associated evaluation value.
 制御部60は、算出した評価値と記憶部61又は記憶装置63に記憶してある第2の設定情報とに基づいてシステム内通貨Lの発行数量を決定する。第2の設定情報は例えば、評価値に対する比率である。またさらに、第2の設定情報は例えば、情報交換マーケットにおけるシステム内通貨Lの需要から情報流通サーバ装置6が自律的に導出、又はシステム管理者が任意に設定する、すべてのアソシエイツに発行する新規発行総量、つまり情報交換マーケットに追加的に供給するシステム内通貨Lの追加供給総量としてもよい。なお、この場合に導出、又は任意に設定されたシステム内通貨Lの新規発行総量(追加供給総量)は、導出、又は任意に設定された所定の期間の数量とすればよい。 The control unit 60 determines the issued quantity of the intra-system currency L based on the calculated evaluation value and the second setting information stored in the storage unit 61 or the storage device 63. The second setting information is, for example, a ratio to an evaluation value. Furthermore, the second setting information is newly issued, for example, to all the associates that the information distribution server device 6 autonomously derives from the demand of the system currency L in the information exchange market, or arbitrarily set by the system administrator. It may be the total issue volume, that is, the additional total volume of the system currency L additionally supplied to the information exchange market. In this case, the newly issued total amount (additional supplied total amount) of the system currency L which is derived or set arbitrarily may be the quantity of the predetermined period which is derived or set arbitrarily.
 第1の設定情報及び第2の設定情報は、適宜変更、更新が可能である。システム管理者が使用する端末装置を介して、情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60が変更、更新、登録等を受け付けることでシステム管理者が意図するマーケットへ修正が可能である。すなわち、制御部60は、第1の設定情報及び第2の設定情報の更新を受付ける更新受付部612として機能する。ただし本来は、システム管理者の意図を反映させるのでなく、マーケット自体が自律的に、マーケットを成長させるように設定情報を更新するように設計されることが好ましい。すなわち、制御部60は、コンテンツの利用状況に応じて、第1の設定情報及び第2の設定情報を補正する補正部609として機能してもよい。 The first setting information and the second setting information can be changed and updated as appropriate. When the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 receives a change, an update, a registration, and the like via a terminal device used by the system administrator, it is possible to correct the market intended by the system administrator. That is, the control unit 60 functions as an update accepting unit 612 that accepts the update of the first setting information and the second setting information. However, it is preferable that the market itself is designed to update the configuration information to grow the market autonomously, not to reflect the intention of the system administrator. That is, the control unit 60 may function as a correction unit 609 that corrects the first setting information and the second setting information in accordance with the usage condition of the content.
 次に、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザに与えられたシステム内通貨Lの消費について説明する。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのみを持つユーザが存在したとした場合には上述したように、コンテンツ発信に基づき獲得したシステム内通貨Lを自ら(同一ユーザ)の行為によって消費することはできない。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザは、獲得したシステム内通貨Lを他のユーザの持つ「事業者」又は「個人」若しくは「アソシエイツ」のアカウントへ移転、又は自身の「アソシエイツ」のアカウントの基礎にある「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントへ移転させることができる。 Next, the consumption of the in-system currency L given to the user having the “Associates” account will be described. In the case where there is a user having only the “Associates” account, as described above, the system currency L acquired based on the content transmission can not be consumed by the action of the same user (the same user). A user with an "Associates" account transfers the acquired in-system currency L to the "Operator" or "Individual" or "Associates" account owned by another user, or on the basis of his "Associates" account. Can be transferred to a certain "business" or "individual" account.
 端末装置7にて「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザのシステム内通貨Lの譲渡を含む管理について説明する。図7は、端末装置7におけるシステム内通貨Lの管理の手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。端末装置7にて情報流通システム600へのログインが行なわれると、情報流通サーバ装置6との情報の授受に基づいて制御部70は以下の処理を開始する。 A management including transfer of the system currency L of a user who has an “Associates” account in the terminal device 7 will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of management of the system currency L in the terminal device 7. When login to the information distribution system 600 is performed by the terminal device 7, the control unit 70 starts the following processing based on the exchange of information with the information distribution server device 6.
 制御部70は、通信部72(発信部)を通じて、コンテンツを情報交換マーケットへ発信する(ステップS600)。コンテンツの発信に伴い、情報流通サーバ装置6では、コンテンツ(無償コンテンツ)及び発信者(アソシエイツ)に対する評価が行われ、評価結果に基づき、システム内通貨Lが発信者に発行される。 Control unit 70 transmits the content to the information exchange market through communication unit 72 (transmission unit) (step S600). With the transmission of the content, the information distribution server device 6 evaluates the content (free content) and the sender (associates), and based on the evaluation result, the system currency L is issued to the sender.
 制御部70は、記憶部71に記憶されているユーザのアカウント情報を通信部72から情報流通サーバ装置6へ向けて送信する(ステップS601)。制御部70は、情報流通サーバ装置6から送信されるアカウント情報を対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lについての数量等の情報を含む画面情報を通信部72(受信部)にて受信する(ステップS602)。 The control unit 70 transmits the account information of the user stored in the storage unit 71 from the communication unit 72 to the information distribution server device 6 (step S601). Control unit 70 causes communication unit 72 (reception unit) to receive screen information including information such as the quantity of in-system currency L associated with the account information transmitted from information distribution server device 6 (step S602).
 制御部70は、受信した画面情報に基づき、ユーザのアカウント情報に対して発行されたシステム内通貨Lの数量を含む画面を表示部73に表示する(ステップS603)。これにより「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザは、自身のコンテンツ発信活動に対して与えられたシステム内通貨Lの数量を把握することができる。なお画面情報には、そのシステム内通貨Lがいずれのコンテンツに対し、どのような評価値に基づいて、いつ発行されたのかを示す詳細情報が含まれており、詳細情報の表示を操作部74にて選択した場合にこれが表示されるとよい。 Based on the received screen information, control unit 70 causes display unit 73 to display a screen including the quantity of in-system currency L issued for the account information of the user (step S603). As a result, a user having an "Associates" account can grasp the amount of in-system currency L given for his content transmission activity. The screen information includes detailed information indicating when the system internal currency L was issued to which content, based on what evaluation value, and the display of the detailed information is performed by the operation unit 74. This should be displayed when selected in.
 制御部70は、表示された数量を含むシステム内通貨Lについての画面内に、システム内通貨Lの他の「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザへの譲渡(売り)を受け付ける画面を表示させる(ステップS604)。制御部70は、譲渡を受け付ける画面が選択されたか否かを判断し(ステップS605)、選択されたと判断した場合(S605:YES)、譲渡する数量を受け付け(ステップS606)、受け付けた数量に基づく取引情報を作成する(ステップS607)。制御部70は、作成した取引情報を情報流通サーバ装置6の取引処理部6Dへ送信する(ステップS608)。情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60は、端末装置7から送信される取引情報を受信した場合、システム内通貨管理テーブルの記録内容を更新する。 Control unit 70 is a screen for accepting transfer (sell) to user having account of other "business operator" or "individual" in system L regarding the system currency L including the displayed quantity. Is displayed (step S604). Control unit 70 determines whether or not the screen for accepting transfer has been selected (step S605), and when it is determined that it has been selected (S605: YES), accepts the quantity to be assigned (step S606), based on the accepted quantity Transaction information is created (step S 607). The control unit 70 transmits the created transaction information to the transaction processing unit 6D of the information distribution server device 6 (step S608). When the transaction information transmitted from the terminal device 7 is received, the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 updates the recorded contents of the in-system currency management table.
 制御部70は、アプリプログラム7P又は情報流通サーバ装置6のポータルサイトへのログインを終了するか否かを判断し(ステップS609)、終了しないと判断された場合(S609:NO)、処理をステップS602へ戻す。ステップS609でアプリプログラム7P又はログインを終了すると判断された場合(S609:YES)、処理を終了する。 The control unit 70 determines whether or not the login to the portal site of the application program 7P or the information distribution server device 6 is to be ended (step S609), and when it is determined not to be ended (S609: NO), the process is performed Return to S602. If it is determined in step S609 that the application program 7P or login is to be ended (S609: YES), the process is ended.
 ステップS605にて選択されていないと判断した場合(S605:NO)、制御部70は処理をステップS609へ進める。この場合も制御部70は、アプリプログラム7P又はログインの終了が選択された場合に処理を終了する。 If it is determined in step S605 that no selection has been made (S605: NO), the control unit 70 advances the process to step S609. Also in this case, the control unit 70 ends the process when the application program 7P or the end of login is selected.
 取引情報は譲渡先のユーザの「事業者」又は「個人」若しくは「アソシエイツ」のアカウント情報の指定を含む。システム内通貨Lの譲渡は、自由取引であり現実社会における直接的な売買を基本とする。したがって譲渡されるシステム内通貨Lの数量は、ユーザ間で、その対価と共に直接的に取り決められる。対価は、法定通貨でもよいし、仮想通貨、債務の弁済、物品又は役務の提供、債権等の資産であってもよい。 The transaction information includes designation of account information of "business person" or "individual" or "associates" of the transferee user. Transfer of the system currency L is based on free trade and direct trading in the real world. Therefore, the quantity of in-system currency L to be transferred is directly negotiated with the user among the users. The consideration may be a legal currency or may be an asset such as a virtual currency, payment of debt, provision of goods or services, or a bond.
 図8は、端末装置7に表示される画面例を示す図である。図8は、図7のフローチャートに示した処理手順の内、ステップS603における画面情報に基づき表示される画面例を示す。図8に示すように、端末装置7の表示部73に表示されるシステム内通貨Lの確認画面730には、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザ「AA」に発行され、残存しているシステム内通貨Lの数量「5500」を含む数量画面731が含まれている。数量画面731には、ユーザ「AA」のシステム内通貨Lの獲得の経緯の詳細情報を表示するためのインタフェースが含まれている。図8に示すシステム内通貨Lの確認画面730には、ステップS604に対応する譲渡の受け付け画面732が含まれている。譲渡の受け付け画面732には、譲渡する数量及び譲渡先を選択するコントロールと、譲渡を指示するインタフェース733とが含まれている。またシステム内通貨Lの確認画面730には、ポータルサイトに戻るためのインタフェースも含まれている。 FIG. 8 is a view showing an example of a screen displayed on the terminal device 7. FIG. 8 shows an example of a screen displayed based on the screen information in step S603 in the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, on the confirmation screen 730 of the intra-system currency L displayed on the display unit 73 of the terminal device 7, the system is issued to the user “AA” having the “Associates” account and remains A quantity screen 731 including the quantity “5500” of the currency L is included. The quantity screen 731 includes an interface for displaying detailed information on the process of acquiring the in-system currency L of the user “AA”. The confirmation screen 730 of the intra-system currency L shown in FIG. 8 includes a transfer acceptance screen 732 corresponding to step S604. The transfer acceptance screen 732 includes a control for selecting a quantity to be transferred and a transfer destination, and an interface 733 for instructing transfer. Further, the confirmation screen 730 of the system currency L includes an interface for returning to the portal site.
 なお、この場合端末装置7からの送信された取引情報に基づいて情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60は、譲渡元の「アソシエイツ」のユーザのアカウント情報から、「事業者」又は「個人」若しくは「アソシエイツ」のユーザのアカウント情報へのシステム内通貨Lの移転処理を行なう。この際の移転の対価の決定はシステム外での自由取引によって定められていてもよいし、以下のフローチャートで説明するように、情報流通サーバ装置6が取引処理部6Dで取引所として機能を発揮して実現してもよい。 In this case, based on the transaction information transmitted from the terminal device 7, the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 determines from the account information of the user of "associates" of the transfer source as "business operator" or "individual" or Transfers the system currency L to the account information of the "Associates" user. The determination of the compensation for the transfer at this time may be determined by free trading outside the system, and the information distribution server device 6 functions as a exchange at the transaction processing unit 6D as described in the following flowchart. It may be realized.
 図9は、情報流通サーバ装置6におけるシステム内通貨Lの移転処理の手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of transfer processing of the system currency L in the information distribution server device 6.
 制御部60は、通信部62により「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのユーザが使用する端末装置7から取引情報を、アカウント情報と対応付けて受信する(ステップS701)。 The control unit 60 causes the communication unit 62 to receive transaction information from the terminal device 7 used by the user of the account of “Associates” in association with the account information (step S701).
 制御部60は、受信した取引情報に、譲渡先のユーザを示す情報が含まれているか否かを判断し(ステップS702)、含まれていると判断した場合(S702:YES)、譲渡先のユーザのアカウント情報を特定する(ステップS703)。 The control unit 60 determines whether the received transaction information includes information indicating the user of the transferee (step S702), and when it is determined that it is included (S702: YES), the transferee's The account information of the user is specified (step S703).
 制御部60は、譲渡元のアカウント情報に対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lを、取引情報に含まれている数量分だけ譲渡先のアカウント情報に移転させる(ステップS704)。具体的には、制御部60は、譲渡元のユーザ(アソシエイツ)が所有するシステム内通貨Lのうち、取引情報に含まれる数量分だけ、システム内通貨Lの取得者IDを譲渡元のユーザのIDから譲渡先のユーザのIDに書き換える処理を実行する。また、制御部60は、譲渡先のユーザに応じてシステム内通貨Lの消滅予定日を書き換える処理を併せて実行する。ステップS704においては所謂ブロックチェーン技術を用いて情報交換マーケット内での移転の事実を記憶装置63における出納記録に記録されるようにしてもよい。 The control unit 60 transfers the in-system currency L associated with the transfer source account information to the transfer destination account information by the number included in the transaction information (step S704). Specifically, the control unit 60 controls the acquirer ID of the in-system currency L by the amount included in the transaction information among the in-system currency L owned by the transfer source user (associates). Execute processing to rewrite the ID to the ID of the transfer destination user. Further, the control unit 60 additionally executes a process of rewriting the estimated date of disappearance of the system currency L according to the user of the transferee. In step S704, so-called block chain technology may be used to record the fact of transfer in the information exchange market in the accounting record in the storage device 63.
 制御部60は、取引処理部6Dの機能により、ステップS704の移転の登録の処理の際に、所定の額の手数料を「アソシエイツ」のアカウント情報が対応付けられている資産から徴収する(ステップS705)。資産は「アソシエイツ」のアカウントの登録時に暗号資産等のデジタル資産若しくは法定通貨による入金の登録を受け付けておき、これらから徴収してもよく、後述するように、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントごとに与信限度額を定めておいたうえで売掛金処理を行ってもよい。また、これら両方を行ってもよい。売掛金処理を行う場合に、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントごとの与信限度額の算定については、情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60の処理にゆだねてもよい。また、「アソシエイツ」のアカウント情報が対応付けられている資産から徴収する手数料の額は、記憶部61に予め記憶されている0(ゼロ)以上の任意の設定情報とすればよい。ステップS705において具体的に制御部60は、取引処理部6Dの機能により、譲渡元のアカウント情報に対応付けられて記録されている資産を、手数料分だけ減額して記録し、システム管理者についてあらかじめ用意されるアカウント情報に対応付けられて記録される資産に、徴収した手数料分だけ加算して記録する。また、上述した特定の仮想通貨を含むデジタル資産により手数料を徴収する場合、制御部60は、減額分のデジタル資産をシステム管理者のアカウントに移す処理を実行すればよい。 The control unit 60 uses the function of the transaction processing unit 6D to collect a fee of a predetermined amount from the asset associated with the account information of "associates" at the time of processing for registration of transfer in step S704 (step S705). ). Assets may be collected from digital assets such as crypto assets or registrations in legal currency at the time of registration of Associates account, and may be collected from these, as described later, credit limit for each Associates account You may process the accounts receivable after the amount is fixed. Also, both of them may be performed. When the accounts receivable processing is performed, the calculation of the credit limit for each “Associates” account may be left to the processing of the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6. Further, the amount of the fee to be collected from the asset associated with the “Associates” account information may be arbitrary setting information of 0 (zero) or more stored in advance in the storage unit 61. Specifically, at step S705, the control unit 60 reduces the fee by the amount corresponding to the asset recorded in association with the transfer source account information by the function of the transaction processing unit 6D, and records it in advance for the system administrator. Add only the collected fee to the asset to be recorded in association with the prepared account information and record. Further, in the case where the fee is collected by the digital asset including the above-described specific virtual currency, the control unit 60 may execute a process of transferring the reduced digital asset to the account of the system administrator.
 制御部60は、移転後及び手数料の徴収後の譲渡元の「アソシエイツ」のアカウント情報に対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lについての数量等の情報を含む画面情報をステップS701で受信した取引情報の送信元の端末装置7へ送信し(ステップS706)、処理を終了する。 At step S701, the control unit 60 receives the screen information including information such as the quantity of the system currency L associated with the account information of the transferee “associates” after transfer and collection of the fee in step S701. It transmits to the terminal device 7 of the transmission origin of (step S706), and a process is complete | finished.
 ステップS702にて譲渡先のユーザが含まれていないと判断された場合(S702:NO)、制御部60は取引処理部6Dに含まれる取引所の機能により、取引情報を、その取引情報に含まれる数量分のシステム内通貨Lの売り注文として受け付ける(ステップS707)。すなわち、制御部60は売買受付部613として機能する。 If it is determined in step S702 that the transferee user is not included (S702: NO), the control unit 60 includes the transaction information in the transaction information by the function of the exchange included in the transaction processing unit 6D. It receives as a sales order of the system internal currency L for the quantity which is made (step S707). That is, the control unit 60 functions as the purchase and reception unit 613.
 制御部60は取引所の機能により、「アソシエイツ」を含む全てのアカウントのユーザからの買い注文を受け付けておく(ステップS708)。ステップS708において制御部60は、買い注文としてシステム外の資産である法定通貨又は仮想通貨等の通貨、あるいは現物資産を別途、預り資産として登録を受け付けておく。制御部60は、取引が成立した場合には預かり資産から減じる処理を外部の資産の取引システムに依頼すればよい。クレジットカード番号の登録を受け付けておき、クレジットカードの管理会社等への請求を行なうようにしてもよい。支払いが滞る場合、制御部60は管理部6Aとして「アソシエイツ」を含むユーザの情報交換マーケットの後述の利用行為を制限するなどの措置を実行する。 The control unit 60 accepts the purchase order from the users of all the accounts including “Associates” by the function of the exchange (step S 708). In step S 708, the control unit 60 separately accepts registration of a currency such as legal currency or virtual currency, which is an asset outside the system, or a physical asset as a deposit asset as a purchase order. The control unit 60 may request an external asset transaction system to subtract processing from the custody asset when the transaction is established. The registration of the credit card number may be accepted, and the credit card management company may be charged. When the payment is delayed, the control unit 60 performs, as the management unit 6A, a measure such as restricting the later-described use act of the user's information exchange market including “Associates”.
 制御部60は、ステップS707で受け付けた売り注文に対して割り当てる買い注文を抽出し(ステップS709)、取引を成立させる(ステップS710)。ステップS710において制御部60は、譲渡元のユーザが所有するシステム内通貨Lのうち、取引情報に含まれる数量分だけ、システム内通貨Lの取得者IDを譲渡元のユーザのIDから譲渡先のユーザのIDに書き換える処理を実行する。また、制御部60は、譲渡先のユーザに応じてシステム内通貨Lの消滅予定日を書き換える処理を併せて実行する。すなわち、制御部60は第2移転記録部605として機能する。ステップS710における取引の際にも制御部60は、所定の額の手数料を「アソシエイツ」のアカウント情報が対応付けられている資産から徴収する(ステップS711)。ステップS705及びS711で徴収する手数料は同額であってもよく、異なる額であってもよい。例えば、ステップS711で取引所の機能によって譲渡が成立した場合に「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザから徴収する手数料は、ステップS705の取引所外での直接的取引が成立した場合に比して高額としてもよいし、その逆でもよい。また、資産は「アソシエイツ」のアカウントの登録時に暗号資産等のデジタル資産若しくは法定通貨による入金の登録を受け付けておき、制御部60はデジタル資産若しくは法定通貨から徴収してもよい。すなわち、制御部60は交換受付部614として機能してもよい。また、徴収する手数料は、システム内通貨Lとしてもよい。この場合には、システム管理者のIDを用意しておき、減額(徴収)分のシステム内通貨Lの取得者IDを徴収先(手数料を支払うべきアソシエイツのアカウント)のIDからシステム管理者のIDに書き換える処理を実行すればよい。 The control unit 60 extracts a buying order to be assigned to the selling order received in step S 707 (step S 709), and completes the transaction (step S 710). In step S 710, the control unit 60 determines the acquirer ID of the system currency L from the ID of the user of the transfer source, for the quantity included in the transaction information among the system currency L owned by the transfer source user. Execute processing to rewrite to user ID. Further, the control unit 60 additionally executes a process of rewriting the estimated date of disappearance of the system currency L according to the user of the transferee. That is, the control unit 60 functions as the second transfer recording unit 605. Also at the time of the transaction in step S710, the control unit 60 collects a fee of a predetermined amount from the asset associated with the account information of "associates" (step S711). The fees collected in steps S705 and S711 may be the same amount or different amounts. For example, the fee collected from the user with the “Associates” account when the transfer is established by the function of the exchange in step S711 is more expensive than the case where the direct transaction outside the exchange in step S705 is established. It may be or vice versa. In addition, the asset may receive registration of a digital asset such as a cryptographic asset or a deposit in the legal currency at the time of registration of the “Associates” account, and the control unit 60 may collect the digital asset or the legal currency. That is, the control unit 60 may function as the exchange receiving unit 614. Further, the fee to be collected may be the system currency L. In this case, the ID of the system administrator is prepared, and the acquirer ID of the system currency L for the reduction (collection) is the ID of the system administrator from the ID of the collection destination (the account of the Associates who should pay the fee). It is sufficient to execute the process of rewriting to.
 制御部60は、取引成立の譲渡元の「アソシエイツ」のアカウント情報に対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lについての数量等の情報を含む画面情報をステップS701で受信した取引情報の送信元の端末装置7へ送信し(S706)、処理を終了する。 The control unit 60 transmits the screen information including the information such as the quantity of the system currency L associated with the account information of the "associates" of the transfer source of the transaction establishment in step S701. It transmits to the apparatus 7 (S706), and a process is complete | finished.
 これにより、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのユーザは、コンテンツ発信に基づいて獲得したシステム内通貨Lに基づいて、法定通貨又は仮想通貨等の資産による収益を得ることができる。コンテンツ発信者が収益を得ることで、コンテンツ発信者は、以降も客観的で正当な評価による収益が見込まれることから更なるコンテンツ発信の意欲を持ち、情報交換マーケットを活性化させることができる。 As a result, the user of the account of “Associates” can obtain revenue from assets such as legal currency or virtual currency based on the in-system currency L acquired based on the content transmission. If the content originator earns a profit, the content originator can be motivated to issue further content because the profit from the objective and legitimate evaluation can be expected thereafter and the information exchange market can be activated.
 そしてこの移転登録により、「事業者」又は「個人」等の「アソシエイツ」以外のアカウントを持つユーザ、並びに「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザであっても、システム内通貨Lを追加的に欲するユーザは、システム内通貨Lの移転の登録をもってこれを獲得することができる。「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザが使用する端末装置7においても、アプリプログラム7Pに基づき、図7のフローチャートに示す処理手順の内のステップS603のアカウント情報に対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lの数量を含む画面表示までの処理を行なう。「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザが使用する端末装置7でも、情報交換マーケットのポータルサイトが表示され、コンテンツの検索等を受け付ける画面以外に、図8に示したような譲渡を受けて所有するシステム内通貨Lの数量を確認する画面が表示される。 And by this transfer registration, a user who has an account other than "Associates" such as "Business Operator" or "Individual", and a user who has an "Associates" account also desires the system currency L additionally Can acquire this by registering the transfer of the system currency L. The terminal device 7 used by the user having the “business operator” or “individual” account is also associated with the account information of step S603 in the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 based on the application program 7P. Process up to the screen display including the quantity of the currency L in the system. Even on the terminal device 7 used by the user having the “business operator” or “individual” account, the portal site of the information exchange market is displayed, and the transfer as shown in FIG. A screen for confirming the quantity of system internal currency L received and owned is displayed.
 ステップS707からステップS710で示した通り、情報流通サーバ装置6は取引処理部6Dによって取引所として機能し、システム内通貨Lのユーザ間の移転を促すことができる。しかしながら、上述したように、システム内通貨Lには全て存在期限が設定されているので、ユーザが投資又は投機目的で売買することや、情報交換マーケットの操作を困難にする。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザは、システム内通貨Lを別の資産へ交換する目的、つまり実社会における資産の獲得を目的としてこれを譲渡する。「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザは、保有する資産を情報交換マーケットのシステム内通貨Lに交換する目的、つまり情報交換マーケットの利用を目的としてシステム内通貨Lの譲渡を受ける。きわめて単純な目的の売買を成立させ、システム内通貨Lを保有して温めて利益を得ると言った投資又は投機目的での売買は考えにくい。なお、システム内通貨Lには、従来において通貨の機能の1つであるとされている「価値の保蔵機能」を、その他の通貨としての機能を向上させるために「存在期限の設定」により排除していることがある。このことから、システム内通貨Lは、交換する法定通貨や仮想通貨等の資産と一体的なシステムとして、通貨としての機能を提供する。つまり、情報交換マーケットを利用するユーザにとって、余っているシステム内通貨Lは、法定通貨等のその他の資産に交換しておき、他方、不足しているシステム内通貨Lは、余っている法定通貨等のその他の資産と交換して取得すればよいということである。システム内通貨Lは、「価値の保蔵」という資産的機能を有していない点で、従来の通貨とは異なる。 As shown in steps S707 to S710, the information distribution server device 6 functions as a exchange by means of the transaction processing unit 6D, and can promote the transfer of the system currency L between users. However, as described above, since all the system currency L have an expiration date, it makes it difficult for the user to buy and sell for investment or speculative purposes and to operate the information exchange market. A user who has an "Associates" account transfers it for the purpose of exchanging the system currency L for another asset, that is, for the purpose of acquiring an asset in the real world. A user who has an "enterprise" or "individual" account receives the transfer of the system internal currency L for the purpose of exchanging the owned assets into the system internal currency L of the information exchange market, that is, the purpose of using the information exchange market. It is difficult to think of trading for investment or speculative purposes, such as establishing a very simple purpose trading, holding the currency L in the system and warming it up for profit. In addition, in the system currency L, in order to improve the function as another currency, the "value retention function", which is conventionally considered to be one of the functions of the currency, is eliminated by the "setting of the expiration date". I have something to do. From this, the in-system currency L provides a function as a currency as an integrated system with assets such as legal currency and virtual currency to be exchanged. That is, for the user using the information exchange market, the surplus system currency L is exchanged for other assets such as legal currency, while the shortage of system currency L is surplus legal currency. Etc. may be exchanged for other assets. The in-system currency L is different from the conventional currency in that it does not have the asset function of "holding value".
 「アソシエイツ」のアカウントと、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントとの間の譲渡では上述したように、直接取引と比較して高い手数料を徴収してもよいとした。この手数料は、システム管理者にとっては「アソシエイツ」に対する債権である。価格の上限値を「アソシエイツ」毎に異なる値を用いて運用するとよい。つまり、前述した与信限度額に相当する。利用者のサービス利用行為を評価して、「アソシエイツ」の信用枠を増減させるものと言える。この信用枠の増減は、個々の「アソシエイツ」のアカウントから発信されるコンテンツの表示優先度と関連させてもよいし、より多くのシステム内通貨Lが発行されるように設定情報が更新されるようにしてもよい。また、システム管理者からの奨励金の額に関連させてもよい。 As stated above, the transfer between the "Associates" account and the "Operator" or "Individual" account may be charged a higher fee compared to the direct transaction. This fee is a bond to "Associates" for the system administrator. It is good to operate the upper limit value of the price using a different value for each "associates". That is, it corresponds to the credit limit mentioned above. It can be said that it evaluates the user's service usage behavior and increases or decreases the credit line of "Associates". This increase or decrease in the credit limit may be related to the display priority of the content originating from the individual "Associates" account, or the setting information is updated such that more in-system currency L is issued. You may do so. It may also be related to the amount of incentives from the system administrator.
 取引所としての機能の中では、「アソシエイツ」のアカウント同士のシステム内通貨Lの取引を可能としてもよい。また、通常の譲渡と同様に、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザ同士で、取引所を介さずに直接的にシステム内通貨Lの取引(交換取引)を可能としてもよい。ある「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに対し、実社会における取引においてシステム内通貨Lを大量に購買することができる「事業者」のアカウントが存在する場合がある。この場合、ある「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのみでは、この「事業者」のアカウントからの需要量を満たすほどのシステム内通貨Lの発行を受けることができない可能性がる。この場合、他の「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのユーザからシステム内通貨Lを集めてこの「事業者」のアカウントからの需要に応じることができる。この場合、「事業者」のアカウントのユーザも、不特定多数の「アソシエイツ」のアカウントと取引所で取引を行なうことなく、信頼に足る「アソシエイツ」のアカウントと直接的に取引ができる。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザ同士で取引を可能とすることで、地域間、及び異なる情報交換マーケット間におけるシステム内通貨Lの需給ギャップを解消させることもでき、情報流通をさらに促進することができる。なお「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザ同士の取引では、二重課税防止の観点での譲渡手数料の免除という処理が追加的に行われるようにしてもよい。 In the function as an exchange, it may be possible to trade in-system currency L between accounts of "associates". Further, as in the case of ordinary transfer, it is also possible for users having "Associates" accounts to be able to directly trade in the system currency L (exchange trade) without passing through the exchange. For a certain "Associates" account, there may be an "Operator" account that can purchase a large amount of system currency L in a real-world transaction. In this case, there is a possibility that the issuance of the in-system currency L enough to satisfy the demand from the "business agent" account can not be received only with a certain "Associates" account. In this case, it is possible to collect in-system currency L from the user of another "Associates" account to meet the demand from this "Operator" account. In this case, the user of the "business operator" account can also directly trade with the trustable "Associates" account without trading on the exchange with an unspecified number of "Associates" accounts. By enabling trading among users with "Associates" accounts, it is possible to eliminate the supply-demand gap of intra-system currency L between regions and between different information exchange markets, further promoting information distribution. it can. Note that, in transactions between users who have an "Associates" account, processing of exemption of transfer fee from the viewpoint of double taxation prevention may be additionally performed.
 なお、取引所としての機能の売買の取引成立における対価、つまりシステム内通貨Lの価値については、後述する通貨発行部6B及び通貨制御部6Cの機能により、システム内通貨Lの単価が、場所的(例えば、購買力平価の異なる複数国家にまたがる等)及び時間的(例えば、現在と将来とにまたがる等)に一定水準に保たれ、通貨の重要な機能とされている「価値の尺度機能」を適切に働かせることができるようにし、また、システム内通貨Lの価値をシステム外の資産の価値と適切にバランスさせながら、システム内通貨Lの需要に応じた供給調整を行い、システム内通貨Lのボラティリティーを抑え込み、流通速度を向上させ、さらに、上述の投資又は投機目的での売買を抑制する。この機能については詳細を後述する。 The value of the currency L in the system, that is, the value of the currency L in the system, is determined locally by the function of the currency issuing unit 6B and the currency control unit 6C described later. The “value scale function” is considered to be an important function of the currency, which is kept at a constant level (for example, across multiple countries with different purchasing power parity) and temporally (for example, across the current and future) In order to be able to work properly and to properly balance the value of the in-system currency L with the value of the off-system asset, the supply adjustment is made according to the demand of the in-system currency L, and the in-system currency L Reduce volatility, improve circulation speed, and further curb trading for investment or speculative purposes as described above. Details of this function will be described later.
 次に、システム内通貨Lを「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザから譲り受けることにより獲得した「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザによるシステム内通貨Lの利用行為について説明する。「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザは、使用する端末装置7を介して利用行為の要求を情報流通サーバ装置6へ送信する。利用行為とは上述したように、情報交換マーケットにおいてコンテンツと見なされない情報(従として取り扱われる情報)についての発信を含む情報交換マーケットの有利的利用行為、又はシステム内通貨Lを用いた有償コンテンツの取得行為である。 Next, an operation of using the in-system currency L by the user having the “business person” or “individual” account acquired by transferring the in-system currency L from the user having the “Associates” account will be described. A user having an account of “business person” or “individual” transmits a request for usage act to the information distribution server device 6 via the terminal device 7 to be used. As described above, the usage act is an advantageous usage act of the information exchange market including transmission of information not regarded as content in the information exchange market (information treated as subordinate), or paid content using the system currency L Acquisition of
 図10は、情報流通サーバ装置6における利用行為の受付処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。制御部60は管理部6Aの機能により、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザが使用する端末装置7からの要求を受け付ける(ステップS801)。管理部6Aは利用要求受付部601及び取得要求受付部602として機能する。 FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the acceptance process of the use act in the information distribution server device 6. The control unit 60 receives a request from the terminal device 7 used by the user having the “business operator” or “individual” account by the function of the management unit 6A (step S801). The management unit 6A functions as a usage request receiving unit 601 and an acquisition request receiving unit 602.
 制御部60は、受け付けた要求の内容を特定する(ステップS802)。ステップS802にて制御部60は例えば、要求の内容が従として取り扱われる情報の発信であると特定する。又は制御部60は、要求の内容が有償コンテンツの取得であることを特定する。 The control unit 60 specifies the content of the received request (step S802). In step S802, for example, the control unit 60 specifies that the content of the request is transmission of information to be treated as a slave. Alternatively, the control unit 60 specifies that the content of the request is acquisition of paid content.
 制御部60は、特定した内容が情報の発信であるか否かを判断し(ステップS803)、情報の発信であると判断された場合(S803:YES)、要求元のアカウント情報に対して消費すべきシステム内通貨Lの消費量を決定する(ステップS804)。すなわち、制御部60は消費量決定部611として機能する。ステップS804において制御部60は例えば、要求の内容に応じて、記憶部61又は記憶装置63に記憶してある設定情報に基づいてシステム内通貨Lの消費量を決定するとよい。ユーザの要求に応じたシステム内通貨Lの消費量を決定付ける設定情報は、システム管理者によって、又は情報流通サーバ装置6の機能によって自律的に、利用を多くするように更新されるとよい。 The control unit 60 determines whether the specified content is transmission of information (step S 803), and if it is determined that transmission is information (S 803: YES), consumption of the account information of the request source The consumption amount of the system currency L to be determined is determined (step S804). That is, the control unit 60 functions as the consumption determination unit 611. In step S804, for example, the control unit 60 may determine the consumption amount of the system currency L based on the setting information stored in the storage unit 61 or the storage device 63 according to the content of the request. The setting information that determines the consumption amount of the system currency L according to the user's request may be updated to increase usage by the system administrator or autonomously by the function of the information distribution server device 6.
 制御部60は、決定された消費量の分だけ、要求元の「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウント情報に対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lを消費させ(ステップS805)、要求に対する処理を終了する。すなわち、制御部60は、第1の消費活動によるシステム内通貨Lの消費(消滅)をシステム内通貨管理テーブルに記録する消費記録部603として機能する。ステップS805にて制御部60は、取引処理部6Dにて記憶装置63に記憶されているアカウント情報に対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lの数量を減少させる。具体的には、制御部60は、要求元の「事業者」又は「個人」が所有するシステム内通貨Lのレコードを決定された消費量分だけシステム内通貨管理テーブルから削除する処理を実行する。このとき減少分のシステム内通貨Lは、他へ移転されることはない。ステップS805におけるシステム内通貨Lの消費によって、システム内通貨Lは情報交換マーケットから消滅する。 The control unit 60 consumes the in-system currency L associated with the account information of the requesting "business company" or "individual" by the determined consumption amount (step S805), and performs processing for the request. finish. That is, the control unit 60 functions as a consumption recording unit 603 which records consumption (disappearance) of the in-system currency L due to the first consumption activity in the in-system currency management table. At step S805, control unit 60 reduces the quantity of system currency L associated with the account information stored in storage device 63 by transaction processing unit 6D. Specifically, the control unit 60 executes a process of deleting the record of the in-system currency L owned by the requesting "business company" or "individual" from the in-system currency management table by the determined consumption amount. . At this time, the reduced system currency L is not transferred to another. The consumption of the intra-system currency L at step S805 causes the intra-system currency L to disappear from the information exchange market.
 また、制御部60は、システム内通貨Lを消費させる前に、ステップS804で決定した消費量の情報を要求元の端末装置7へ送信し、システム内通貨Lの消費を承諾するか否かを要求元のユーザに確認してもよい。端末装置7は、受信した消費量の情報を表示部73に表示し、システム内通貨Lの消費を承諾するか否かの選択を操作部74にて受付ける。端末装置7は、選択結果を通信部72より情報流通サーバ装置6へ送信する。情報流通サーバ装置6は、システム内通貨Lの消費を承諾する旨の選択結果を受付けた場合にのみ、決定した消費量分のシステム内通貨Lを消費させる。 In addition, before consuming the system internal currency L, the control unit 60 transmits information on the consumption amount determined in step S 804 to the request source terminal device 7 and determines whether to consent to the consumption of the system internal currency L or not. You may check with the requesting user. The terminal device 7 displays the received consumption amount information on the display unit 73, and accepts, at the operation unit 74, a selection as to whether or not the consumption of the system currency L is accepted. The terminal device 7 transmits the selection result from the communication unit 72 to the information distribution server device 6. The information distribution server device 6 consumes the in-system currency L corresponding to the determined consumption only when the selection result of accepting the consumption of the in-system currency L is received.
 ステップS803では、広告宣伝等の情報の発信であるか否かを判断したが、この消滅を伴う利用には、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザが所望のコンテンツをはじめとして、情報交換マーケットを有利に利用できる、例えばより早く、多く、適切に取得できるようにする情報収取利用行為等であってもよい。この場合システム内通貨Lをより多く消費するほどに、優先度や、精度を向上させて利用できるようにしてもよい。 In step S 803, it is determined whether it is the transmission of information such as an advertisement, but for the use accompanied by this disappearance, a user having an account of “business person” or “individual” starts including desired content, The information exchange market may be advantageously used, for example, an information collection and utilization act that enables quicker, more, and appropriate acquisition. In this case, as the system currency L is consumed more, the priority and accuracy may be improved and used.
 情報交換マーケットが有益な情報を提示するマーケットとなる程に、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザは、これに関連付けて広告宣伝となるような情報の発信を望むようになる。これにより、主に「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザから、著作物を創作及び提供する情報提供者である「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのユーザへ、直接的且つ効果的に広告宣伝費用を還流させることができる。「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザの数の増大、及び利用時間の上昇によって、更にその規模が大きくなる。 As the information exchange market becomes a market that provides useful information, users with "business" or "individual" accounts will want to transmit information that will be associated with this and become advertising. As a result, the advertising expenses are directly and effectively returned to the users of the "Associates" account, which is an information provider who creates and provides copyrighted works, mainly from the user having the "Operator" account. Can. The increase in the number of users of "business" or "individual" accounts and the increase in usage time will further increase the scale.
 ステップS803にて情報の発信でないと判断された場合(S803:NO)、要求の内容は有償コンテンツの取得である。この場合制御部60は、有償コンテンツのコンテンツ識別情報に対応付けて記憶装置63に記憶されている価格に基づき、その価格分だけ、要求元のアカウント情報に対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lを有償コンテンツ提供者のアカウント情報に移転させ(ステップS806)、処理を終了する。具体的には、制御部60は、要求元のユーザ(事業者又は個人)が所有するシステム内通貨Lのうち、有償コンテンツの価格分だけ、システム内通貨Lの取得者IDを要求元のユーザのIDからコンテンツ提供者のIDに書き換える処理を実行する。また、制御部60は、移転先のユーザに応じてシステム内通貨Lの消滅予定日を書き換える処理を併せて実行する。すなわち、制御部60は第1移転記録部604として機能する。なお、コンテンツ識別情報に対応付けて記憶されている価格は、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのユーザが端末装置7を用いて有償、無償の別を問わずコンテンツとして発信する際に、指定するか事後的に、コンテンツを指定して価格を設定することができるようにすればよく、例えば、発信する際に、価格の指定がなければ無償コンテンツとして扱うことにしてもよい。 If it is determined in step S803 that the information is not sent (S803: NO), the content of the request is acquisition of paid content. In this case, based on the price stored in the storage device 63 in association with the content identification information of the paid content, the control unit 60 corresponds to the in-system currency L associated with the account information of the request source by the price. The content is transferred to the account information of the paid content provider (step S806), and the process ends. Specifically, the control unit 60 determines the acquirer ID of the in-system currency L by the price of paid content among the in-system currency L owned by the requesting user (the enterprise or the individual). Execute processing to rewrite the ID of the content provider to the ID of the content provider. Further, the control unit 60 additionally executes a process of rewriting the estimated date of disappearance of the system currency L according to the user of the transfer destination. That is, the control unit 60 functions as the first transfer recording unit 604. It should be noted that the price stored in association with the content identification information may be specified when the user of the account of “Associates” transmits as content regardless of whether paid or free using the terminal device 7 The content may be designated and the price may be set. For example, when the content is transmitted, if the price is not designated, it may be treated as free content.
 ステップS806にて具体的に制御部60は、取引処理部6Dの機能により、要求元のアカウント情報に対応付けられて記憶装置63の出納記録に記憶されているシステム内通貨Lの数量を、価格分だけ減額して記録する(通帳記録)。この場合、同タイミングで制御部60は、有償コンテンツの提供元のアカウント情報に対応付けて、当該有償コンテンツを取得した要求元のアカウント情報に対応付けられ減額したシステム内通貨Lの数量を記憶装置63の出納記録に記録する。 Specifically, at step S806, the control unit 60 sets the price of the quantity L of the system currency L stored in the delivery record of the storage device 63 in association with the request source account information by the function of the transaction processing unit 6D. Reduce by minutes and record (passbook record). In this case, at the same time, the control unit 60 stores the quantity of the system currency L reduced and associated with the account information of the request source that has acquired the paid content in association with the account information of the provider of the paid content. Record on 63 cash records.
 このように、有償コンテンツにより、例えば「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザが任意に価格を設定し、創作する著作物のコンテンツの販売が可能である。図11は、有償コンテンツの価格設定を受付ける処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。端末装置7の制御部70は、情報交換マーケットに発信された有償又は無償コンテンツの取得に必要な価格設定を受付ける受付画面を表示部73に表示させる(ステップS901)。この受付画面には、例えば、コンテンツを識別する識別情報の表示欄、コンテンツの価格(システム内通貨Lの数量)が入力される入力欄、入力された価格を確定させるための確定ボタンなどが配置される。 As described above, the paid content allows, for example, a user having an “Associates” account to optionally set a price and sell the content of a work to be created. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing for accepting the price setting of paid content. The control unit 70 of the terminal device 7 causes the display unit 73 to display a reception screen for receiving the price setting necessary for obtaining the paid or free content transmitted to the information exchange market (step S901). On the reception screen, for example, a display field of identification information for identifying the content, an input field for inputting the price of the content (quantity of the currency L in the system), a confirmation button for fixing the input price, etc. are arranged. Be done.
 次いで、制御部70は、コンテンツの価格が確定したか否かを判断する(ステップS902)。すなわち、上述した受付画面の入力欄に価格が入力され、確定ボタンが押下操作された場合、コンテンツの価格が確定したと判断することができる。価格が確定していないと判断した場合(S902:NO)、制御部70は、価格が確定するまで待機する。 Next, the control unit 70 determines whether the price of the content has been determined (step S902). That is, when the price is input in the input field of the reception screen described above and the confirm button is pressed, it can be determined that the price of the content is fixed. If it is determined that the price has not been decided (S902: NO), the control unit 70 stands by until the price is decided.
 価格が確定したと判断した場合(S902:YES)、制御部70は、コンテンツを識別する識別情報、及び確定された価格(システム内通貨の数量)等の情報を情報流通サーバ装置6へ送信する(ステップS903)。情報流通サーバ装置6は、コンテンツの識別情報及び価格の情報を受信した場合、受信した情報を対応付けて記憶装置63に記憶させる。 If it is determined that the price is determined (S902: YES), the control unit 70 transmits information such as identification information for identifying the content and the determined price (quantity of currency in the system) to the information distribution server device 6. (Step S903). When the information distribution server device 6 receives the content identification information and the price information, the information distribution server device 6 stores the received information in the storage device 63 in association with each other.
 また、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザとしても、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザから購入する等をして獲得したシステム内通貨Lを支払って、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザが販売する有償コンテンツを取得することができる。有償コンテンツは、例えば従来におけるメールマガジンでもよいし、書籍、音楽、映画等のコンテンツであってもよい。コンテンツの発信者であるユーザは、一部のみを無償コンテンツとして発信し、これを利用した「個人」又は「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザが更に取得したいと考えた場合に、全部を有償コンテンツとして取得してもらうという形態をとることもできる。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザは、情報交換マーケットに対し、多様な著作物を多様な形態で提供することができる。有名、無名、資金の有り無しに関わらず、あらゆるコンテンツを、その価値を認めてくれるユーザへ提供することができるようになる。無名のコンテンツの価値が、誕生して認められやすくなり、創作者の創作意欲を向上させ、著作物の価値の流通を促進する効果を発揮する。なお、情報交換マーケットにおいて発信されるコンテンツは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザ自らが創造した著作物に限らず、例えば、音楽配信業者が著作者から委託又は譲り受けた著作権等の権利に基づく著作物であってもよい。この場合に、当該著作物をコンテンツとして発信する「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザは、音楽配信業者となる。つまり、動画配信業者等のコンテンツ配信業者も「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持ったユーザとして、情報交換マーケットにおいて事業を展開できるようにしてもよい。 In addition, even as a user with a "business operator" or "individual" account, pay an in-system currency L acquired by purchasing from a user with an "Associates" account, etc., and have an "Associates" account It is possible to acquire paid content sold by the user. The paid content may be, for example, a conventional e-mail magazine, or may be content such as books, music, movies and the like. If the user who is the originator of the content sends only a part of the content as free content, and the user who has an “individual” or “business person” account using it wants to acquire it further, all the paid content It can also take the form of being acquired as. A user with an "Associates" account can provide the information exchange market with various works in various forms. It will be possible to provide any content, whether famous, anonymous, with or without funds, to users who appreciate its value. The value of unnamed content is more likely to be born and recognized, and has the effect of enhancing the creative motivation of creators and promoting circulation of the value of works. In addition, the content transmitted in the information exchange market is not limited to the copyrighted material created by the user with the “Associates” account, for example, based on the copyright or other rights entrusted to or acquired from the author by the music distributor. It may be a work. In this case, a user who has an "Associates" account that transmits the work as the content is a music distributor. In other words, a content distributor such as a video distributor may also be able to develop business in the information exchange market as a user with an "Associates" account.
 「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザによる情報交換マーケットにおける消費活動においては、システム内通貨Lの消滅を伴う利用行為(第1の消費活動)と、消滅しない利用行為(第2の消費活動)とに区別されていることは上述のとおりである。なお、このとき「アソシエイツ」のアカウントにおけるシステム内通貨Lの譲渡と異なり、「事業者」又は「個人の」アカウントに対する手数料の徴収はされないようにしてある。しかしながら、第1の消費活動に伴うシステム内通貨Lの消費において、「事業者」のアカウントによって消費されるシステム内通貨Lの内から所定率の額を、システム管理者に一時的に徴収されるものとして、後述する「ベーシックインカム」の原資としてもよい。この場合に「ベーシックインカム」の原資たるシステム管理者に徴収される「事業者」のアカウントからシステム管理者に移転するシステム内通貨Lは、予め設定された「税率」に基づいて第1の消費活動時に徴収されるとよい。そしてこの「税率」によって徴収されたシステム内通貨Lは、「ベーシックインカム」として「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザに対して配給されるようにしてもよい。「ベーシックインカム」として配給することで、情報交換マーケットにおける「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザの経済活動を支援し、個人消費を促し、「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザの利用頻度を高め、結果的に情報交換マーケット全体のシステム内通貨Lの流通量および消費量を増大させる効果を発揮する。なお、第2の消費活動に対しても上述の課税を行うようにしてもよい。 In consumption activities in the information exchange market by users with "business" or "individual" accounts, usage behavior (first consumption activity) accompanied by disappearance of the system currency L and usage activity (second one) The distinction between consumption activities) is as described above. At this time, unlike the transfer of the system currency L in the "Associates" account, the fee for the "Business" or "Individual" account is not collected. However, in the consumption of in-system currency L accompanying the first consumption activity, the amount of a predetermined rate is temporarily collected from the system administrator from the in-system currency L consumed by the “business operator” account. As a thing, it is good also as a fund of the "basic income" mentioned later. In this case, the in-system currency L transferred to the system administrator from the account of the “business operator” collected to the system administrator of the “basic income” is the first consumption based on the “tax rate” set in advance. It is good to be collected at the time of activity. The in-system currency L collected by the "tax rate" may be distributed as "basic income" to a user having an "individual" account. Distribution as "Basic income" supports the economic activity of users with "personal" accounts in the information exchange market, promotes personal consumption, and increases usage frequency of users with "personal" accounts, resulting in Exerts the effect of increasing the amount of circulation and consumption of system currency L throughout the information exchange market. Note that the above-described taxing may be performed on the second consumption activity.
 このように、無償コンテンツ発信によって「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのユーザに対して発行されたシステム内通貨Lは、ユーザがシステム内通貨Lの消費を伴う広告宣伝等の従として取り扱う情報を発信するといったような情報交換マーケットのその他のユーザに比して相対的に有利な利用行為、又は消滅期限の到来によって消滅するまでは、図7から図9を参照して示した譲渡等の移転や、上述したような有償コンテンツの際の利用により、ユーザ間で転々と流通する通貨である。図12は、システム内通貨Lの供給・流通・消滅の流れを示す図である。なお、システム内通貨Lは、従来は発行時に発行主体の負債となってしまっていた、発行主体の帰属する国家における法定通貨の補完物であるポイントや電子マネー等の価値交換媒体と異なる。システム内通貨Lは、発行主体の負債にならないにもかかわらず、情報流通サーバ装置6の機能によって本源的経済価値を自らが有する貨幣となり、発行主体の用いる情報流通サーバ装置6によって構築される一又は複数の情報交換マーケットにおいて価値交換媒体として縦横無尽に流通する通貨になる。 In this way, the in-system currency L issued to the user of the "Associates" account by sending free content is such that the user transmits information to be treated as a subordinate such as advertisement involving consumption of the in-system currency L, etc. Until it disappears due to the use activity relatively relative to other users of the information exchange market, or the expiration date, transfer such as transfer shown with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. It is a currency that circulates among the users from time to time by using such paid contents. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of supply, distribution and extinction of the currency L in the system. The intra-system currency L is different from the value exchange medium such as points and electronic money, which are complements of legal currency in the country to which the issuing entity belongs, which has conventionally been the debt of the issuing entity at the time of issuance. Although the intra-system currency L is not a debt of the issuing entity, the function of the information distribution server device 6 becomes a coin having intrinsic economic value by itself, and is constructed by the information distribution server device 6 used by the issuing entity Or it becomes a currency that circulates endlessly as value exchange media in multiple information exchange markets.
 通貨発行部6Bの機能について説明する。通貨発行部6Bは、情報交換マーケットにおいて「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに対してシステム内通貨Lを新規発行する機能を持つ。通貨発行部6Bは、新規発行したシステム内通貨Lの情報(例えば通し番号等の識別情報)を記憶装置63に帰属と共に記憶するとよい。新規発行時において、システム内通貨Lの帰属は、システム内通貨管理テーブルにおいて管理される。 The function of the currency issuing unit 6B will be described. The currency issuing unit 6B has a function of newly issuing the in-system currency L to the "Associates" account in the information exchange market. The currency issuing unit 6B may store the newly issued information (for example, identification information such as a serial number) of the system currency L in the storage device 63 together with attribution. At the time of new issue, attribution of the system internal currency L is managed in the system internal currency control table.
 通貨制御部6Cは、システム内通貨Lの価値を変動させる機能を発揮する。通貨制御部6Cは、各ユーザがシステム内通貨Lを取得してから所定期間経過後に、価値をゼロ、即ち消滅させる、若しくは使用できなくするか、又はより少ない価値に変動させる価値制御部608として機能する。システム内通貨Lを制御する情報流通サーバ装置6には、ユーザの所有期間の経過とともにシステム内通貨Lの価値が減少又は消滅するプロセスが具備されている。また、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザは、システム内通貨Lに対して自らの消費価値を有していない。そして、「アソシエイツ」からシステム内通貨Lをその他の資産と交換して取得する「事業者」や「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザは、システム内通貨Lに対して消費価値のみを有している。さらに、システム内通貨Lは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに対する新規発行において、システム管理者の負債とせずに発行すること、及び発行段階でシステム内通貨Lに財産的価値が付与されていないことから、システム内通貨Lは発行初期の段階で「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザの資産ではなく単なる定量化された評価ということがある。このことから、発行するシステム内通貨Lの消滅期限は、システム管理者の任意の設定とすることができる根拠を有するようになっている。極端な消滅期限設定として、システム内通貨Lの取得経緯が無償取得の場合には1日、1週間又は1か月のように短期としてもよく、取得経緯が有償取得(アソシエイツからの購入等)の場合であっても1か月、3か月、又は6か月のように資産価値を与えず消費価値のみ与えるような短期としてもよい。そして、システム内通貨Lは、消費可能なユーザによる第1の消費活動によっても消滅する。これらのことから、情報交換マーケットを流通するシステム内通貨Lは、従来の価値交換媒体と比して、流通速度の速い価値交換媒体として機能させることができる特徴を有する。システム内通貨Lは、情報交換マーケットにおいて流通速度の速い貨幣としての機能を発揮し、マーケットにおける情報流通速度を向上(情報交換マーケット総生産を押し上げ)させる効果を発揮させることができる。なお、このことは、システム管理者のマーケット制御力を向上させる効果も同時に期待できる。また、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザは、いつでも発行されたシステム内通貨Lをその他の資産に交換できることから、システム内通貨Lが具備していない価値保蔵機能は、システム全体として機能する。このように、情報流通サーバ装置6の機能部の処理によって、システム内通貨Lは、従来の法定通貨に比して貨幣流通速度の速い通貨としての効果も期待できるようになる。
The currency control unit 6C exhibits a function of changing the value of the system currency L. As the value control unit 608, the currency control unit 6C causes the value to be zero, that is, to disappear, become unusable, or change to a smaller value after a predetermined period has elapsed since each user acquired the system currency L. Function. The information distribution server 6 for controlling the in-system currency L is equipped with a process in which the value of the in-system currency L decreases or disappears as the user's possession period elapses. In addition, a user who has an "Associates" account does not have his own consumption value for the system currency L. And a user with a "business person" or "individual" account who acquires the currency L in the system by exchanging it with other assets from "Associates" has only consumption value for the currency L in the system . Furthermore, the in-system currency L is issued without being a system administrator's debt in a new issue for the "Associates" account, and since the in-system currency L is not given an intellectual value in the issue stage. In-system currency L may not be an asset of a user having an "Associates" account at the early stage of issuance, but a mere quantified evaluation. From this, the expiration date of the in-system currency L to be issued has a ground that can be set arbitrarily by the system administrator. If the acquisition history of the system currency L is free acquisition, it may be a short term such as one day, one week or one month, and the acquisition history may be paid for (as purchased from associates, etc.). Even in the case of 1 month, 3 months, or 6 months, it may be a short period such as giving only the consumption value without giving the asset value. Then, the intrasystem currency L disappears even by the first consumption activity by the consumable user. From these facts, the intra-system currency L that circulates the information exchange market has a feature that can function as a value exchange medium having a high circulation speed as compared with the conventional value exchange medium. The in-system currency L can exhibit a function as a money having a high circulation speed in the information exchange market, and can exhibit an effect of improving the information circulation speed in the market (boosting total information exchange market production). This can also be expected to have the effect of improving the market control power of the system administrator. In addition, since a user having an "Associates" account can exchange the system currency L issued at any time for other assets, the value storage function that the system currency L does not have functions as the entire system. As described above, by the processing of the functional unit of the information distribution server device 6, the system currency L can also be expected to be effective as a currency having a faster money circulation rate than the conventional legal currency.
 通貨制御部6Cは通貨発行部6Bによるシステム内通貨Lの情報交換マーケットへの供給量、即ち「アソシエイツ」のアカウントへのシステム内通貨Lの発行数量を決定する。通貨制御部6Cは、記憶部61又は記憶装置63に記憶されている設定情報に基づいて供給量を決定する。通貨制御部6Cは例えば、取引処理部6Dにおける譲渡先を指定しない取引情報、即ちシステム内通貨Lに対するユーザの売り注文及び買い注文を参照し、システム内通貨Lに対する売買注文で約定されるシステム外の資産の価値の推移に基づいて供給量を決定してもよい。また、通貨制御部6Cは、後述する、「借り受け事前販売量」をモニタリングすることによるシステム内通貨Lの新規供給量を調整するアルゴリズムによって決定してもよい。 The currency control unit 6C determines the amount of supply of the in-system currency L to the information exchange market by the currency issuing unit 6B, that is, the issued quantity of the in-system currency L to the "Associates" account. The currency control unit 6C determines the supply amount based on the setting information stored in the storage unit 61 or the storage device 63. The currency control unit 6C refers to, for example, transaction information that does not designate a transferee in the transaction processing unit 6D, that is, a sales order and a purchase order of the user for the system currency L, The supply volume may be determined based on the change in the value of the asset. In addition, the currency control unit 6C may be determined by an algorithm for adjusting a new supply amount of the system currency L by monitoring the “pre-sales amount for borrowing” described later.
 例えば、通貨制御部6Cは、買い注文が多く、システム内通貨Lの価値が相対的に上昇する傾向にあると判断した場合には、新規供給量を増やすように設定情報を更新してもよい。逆に通貨制御部6Cは、売り注文が強く買い注文が弱いと判断した場合には、新規供給量を減らすように設定情報を更新してもよい。これにより、情報交換マーケットにおけるシステム内通貨Lの需給バランスを安定させることができるようになり、同時にシステム内通貨Lのボラティリティーも下げることができるようになり、また、システム外の資産との間の取引における約定速度を向上させることが可能になる。 For example, the currency control unit 6C may update the setting information so as to increase the new supply amount when it is determined that there are many buying orders and the value of the currency L in the system tends to relatively increase. . Conversely, when it is determined that the selling order is strong and the buying order is weak, the currency control unit 6C may update the setting information so as to reduce the new supply amount. This makes it possible to stabilize the balance of supply and demand of the system currency L in the information exchange market, and at the same time reduce the volatility of the system currency L, and also between assets outside the system. It is possible to improve the execution speed of transactions.
 通貨制御部6Cは、取引所(取引所機能)の売買注文の約定価格の推移に基づき供給量を決定することが可能であるが、この他に以下のようなアルゴリズムで供給量を調整してもよい。図13は、以下のアルゴリズムによるシステム内通貨Lの新規供給量の基準の概要を示す図である。図13に示す円グラフの全体は、情報交換マーケットにおいて流通しているシステム内通貨Lの流通総量を表す。図13に示す円グラフのうち色付き部分は、評価値に基づいてアソシエイツに対して発行されたシステム内通貨Lの流通数量を表す。図13に示す円グラフのうち色が付いていない部分は、後述する借り受け事前販売量の残数を表す。情報交換マーケットでは、情報流通サーバ6の機能部の処理によって前記借り受け事前販売量の割合を所定の範囲内に収めようとするシステム内通貨Lの供給調整(アソシエイツへのシステム内通貨L発行数量の調整)が行われることで、情報交換マーケットにおけるシステム内通貨Lの需給バランスの安定化を図りつつシステム内通貨Lの貨幣価値を一定に保つことが可能となる。
(1)取引所におけるシステム内通貨Lの売り注文は、販売価格(交換対価の設定)が低い程優先して約定させる。
(2)通貨制御部6Cは、取引所にてシステム内通貨Lの売り注文を、交換するあらかじめ定められた法定通貨又は特定の仮想通貨等のその他の資産(交換資産)と予め設定情報として定めた所定の交換比率、例えば1対1の関係(システム内通貨Lと、システム管理者が定める交換資産とが等価交換になるようにシステム管理者は任意に交換比率を定めればよい。また、定める交換資産がシステム管理者の発行する特定の仮想通貨の場合には、等量交換が望ましい)で無限に立てる。
(3)(2)の売り注文は、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントからの売り注文と販売価格が同額であれば劣後して約定させる。つまり、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントからの売り注文の販売価格が(2)の販売価格よりも高い場合、及び「アソシエイツ」のアカウントからの(2)の販売価格と同額以下の売り注文の要求量が、買い注文の要求量を下回ったとき、通貨制御部6Cは、(2)の売り注文に基づき「借り受け量」を増加させ、買い注文を約定させる。なお、ここで言う「借り受け量」とは、通貨制御部6Cが、約定させた(2)の売り注文において必要となったシステム内通貨Lの数量である。通貨制御部6Cは、無限にシステム内通貨Lを発行する機能を有しているといえる。取引所におけるシステム内通貨Lの需給バランスに基づき、通貨制御部6Cによって「追加的に発行されたシステム内通貨Lの数量」のことを「借り受け量」と称した。
 これにより、ユーザが(2)の価格(交換比率)以上の価格で買い注文を取引処理部6Dへ送信した場合に、必ず(2)の価格で約定され、ユーザがシステム内通貨Lを購入できない状態が生じない。ユーザはいつでも予めシステム管理者によって定められた法定通貨又は特定の仮想通貨を定められた交換比率でシステム内通貨Lと交換できる。
(4)(1)~(3)によって取引処理部6Dでは、システム内通貨Lを大量に(無限に)販売している状態となるが、通貨制御部6Cはこの数量を「借り受け事前販売量」として記憶しておく。
(5)通貨制御部6Cは、記憶している「借り受け事前販売量」と同量のシステム内通貨Lの買い注文を(2)の価格で取引処理部6Dに立てる。
 取引処理部6Dにおけるユーザの立てた売り注文に対しては、ユーザの立てた買い注文から優先的に約定させる。ユーザの売り注文が存在しているにも関わらずユーザの買い注文が存在しない場合のみ、通貨制御部6Cからの買い注文が約定され、「借り受け事前販売量」を減少させ、記憶する。これにより、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザが売り注文を立てた場合、「借り受け事前販売量」の残高がある限り、必ず約定される。「借り受け事前販売量」の残高がある限り、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザがシステム内通貨Lを販売(売却)できない状態は生じない。「借り受け事前販売量」の残高がある限り、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザはいつでも、システム内通貨Lをあらかじめ定められた交換比率で定められた法定通貨又は上述した特定の仮想通貨等の資産に交換できるようになる。
(6)通貨制御部6Cは、「借り受け事前販売量」が設定情報として設定された閾値(Z、以下に説明する)を下回った場合、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lの保有期間による価値の減少(消滅期限のカウント)を停止させる。
(7)通貨制御部6Cは、「借り受け事前販売量」が、情報交換マーケットに存在するシステム内通貨Lの総量のA%(Aは設定値であり、例えば10%)に近づくように通貨発行部6Bによる供給量を調整する。
The currency control unit 6C can determine the supply amount based on the transition of the contract price of the trading order of the exchange (exchange function), but in addition to this, the supply amount is adjusted by the following algorithm. It is also good. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an outline of the standard of the new supply amount of the currency L in the system according to the following algorithm. The whole of the pie chart shown in FIG. 13 represents the total amount of in-system currency L distributed in the information exchange market. The colored part of the pie chart shown in FIG. 13 represents the quantity of in-system currency L issued to associates based on the evaluation value. The uncolored part of the pie chart shown in FIG. 13 represents the remaining number of borrowing advance sales volumes described later. In the information exchange market, the adjustment of the supply of the in-system currency L to try to keep the ratio of the pre-sales amount of borrowing within the predetermined range by the processing of the functional unit of the information distribution server 6 (the in-system currency L issuance amount to associates By performing the adjustment), it is possible to keep the monetary value of the currency L in the system constant while stabilizing the supply and demand balance of the currency L in the system in the information exchange market.
(1) The selling order of the intra-system currency L at the exchange is preferentially executed as the selling price (setting of exchange consideration) is lower.
(2) The currency control unit 6C determines in advance the selling order of the system currency L at the exchange as setting information and other assets (exchange assets) such as a predetermined legal currency to be exchanged or a specific virtual currency. For example, the system administrator may arbitrarily set the exchange ratio so that a predetermined exchange ratio, for example, a one-to-one relationship (in-system currency L and an exchange asset defined by the system administrator) become equivalent exchange. If the exchange asset to be determined is a specific virtual currency issued by the system administrator, equivalent exchange is desirable).
(3) The selling order in (2) is subordinately executed if the selling order from the "Associates" account and the selling price are equal. In other words, if the selling price of the selling order from the "Associates" account is higher than the selling price of (2), and the requested amount of the selling order equal to or less than the selling price of (2) from the "Associates" account is When the required amount of the purchase order is exceeded, the currency control unit 6C increases the “amount of borrowing” based on the selling order of (2) and causes the purchase order to be fulfilled. Here, the “amount of borrowing” is the quantity of the system currency L required for the selling order (2) which the currency control unit 6C has made a contract. It can be said that the currency control unit 6C has a function of issuing the in-system currency L infinitely. Based on the balance between supply and demand of the system currency L at the exchange, the "quantity of system currency L additionally issued" by the currency control unit 6C is referred to as "the amount of borrowing".
By this, when the user sends a buy order to the transaction processing unit 6D at a price (the exchange ratio) or more of (2), the price is always filled with the price of (2) and the user can not purchase the system currency L. There is no condition. At any time, the user can exchange the legal currency specified by the system administrator or a specific virtual currency with the in-system currency L at a predetermined exchange rate.
(4) According to (1) to (3), the transaction processing unit 6D sells a large amount (infinitely) of the system currency L, but the currency control unit 6C As "".
(5) The currency control unit 6C places a buy order of the system currency L of the same amount as the stored “pre-sale amount for borrowing” in the transaction processing unit 6D at the price of (2).
With regard to the selling order made by the user in the transaction processing unit 6D, the user is preferentially executed from the buying order made by the user. The purchase order from the currency control unit 6C is executed only when the user's sell order exists but the user buy order does not exist, and the "advance pre-sale amount" is reduced and stored. In this way, when a user with an "Associates" account places a sales order, it will always be fulfilled as long as the "advance pre-sales volume" balance remains. As long as there is a balance of "advance sales volume", there is no situation where a user having an "Associates" account can not sell (sold) the system currency L. As long as there is a balance of “pre-sales volume for borrowing”, users with “Associates” account can always use assets in the system L, such as the legal currency defined at a predetermined exchange rate or the specific virtual currency mentioned above Can be exchanged for
(6) The currency control unit 6C determines the in-system currency associated with the "Associates" account when the "pre-sale amount for borrowing" falls below the threshold (Z, described below) set as the setting information. Stop the decrease in value due to the holding period of L (counting of the expiration date).
(7) The currency control unit 6C issues the currency so that the “pre-sale amount for borrowing” approaches A% (A is a set value, for example 10%) of the total amount of in-system currency L existing in the information exchange market. Adjust the supply amount by the part 6B.
 上述の(1)~(7)の基礎的処理に続けて措置的処理は以下のように実行される。
(8)通貨制御部6Cは、「借り受け事前販売量」がA%からB%上振れした場合、即ち需要増大、供給不足の状態では、所定のC期間におけるシステム内通貨Lの総量を(A×B)%増大させるように供給量を調整する。需要増大、供給不足の状態は、「借り受け事前販売量」がシステム内通貨Lの総量の(A+A×B)%となっている状態である。B%は設定情報であり、例えば50%である。C期間も設定情報であり、1か月、2か月又は1週間等の任意の期間である。
 システム内通貨Lの新規供給量の調整を行なった場合に「借り受け事前販売量」に反映するまでにはある程度の期間を必要とする。その間もシステム内通貨Lの新規供給量の調整が続けられたままとなること(供給量の過剰調整)を防ぐために、「一定期間(例えばD期間)」が経過するまでの間は、「借り受け事前販売量」が閾値を上回っていたとしても新規供給量の調整は行なわないようにするとよい。このD期間は、設定された「借り受け事前販売量」を下回るまでの期間としてもよい。所定の期間Cの設定は、短ければ調整の影響は大きく、長ければ調整の影響は小さくなる。これらの設定情報は、システム管理者が端末装置を介して情報交換マーケットの状態に応じて更新するとよい。
Subsequent to the above-mentioned basic processes (1) to (7), the procedural process is performed as follows.
(8) The currency control unit 6C determines that the total amount of in-system currency L in a predetermined period C is “A” when “the advance sales volume for borrowings” rises above A% to B%, ie, demand increases and supply shortages occur. × B) Adjust the supply amount to increase by%. The condition of increased demand and shortage of supply is the condition that the "pre-sales volume of borrowing" is (A + A × B)% of the total amount of the currency L in the system. B% is setting information, for example, 50%. Period C is also setting information, and is any period such as one month, two months, or one week.
When adjusting the new supply amount of the currency L in the system, it takes a certain period of time to be reflected in the “pre-sales volume of borrowing”. In order to prevent the adjustment of the new supply of the system currency L from continuing to be continued (over adjustment of the supply), the “rental” should be continued until the “fixed period (for example, D period)” has elapsed. Even if the "pre-sales amount" exceeds the threshold value, it is preferable not to adjust the new supply amount. This period D may be a period until it falls below the set “pre-sales volume”. If the setting of the predetermined period C is short, the influence of the adjustment is large, and if it is long, the influence of the adjustment is small. These setting information may be updated by the system administrator via the terminal device according to the state of the information exchange market.
 なお、「借り受け事前販売量」の増加局面である需要増大、供給不足時における「新規供給量の調整」とは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザに、評価値に基づいて決定され発行されるシステム内通貨Lの数量に対して、本アルゴリズムによって導出された「係数」を乗じて、システム内通貨Lの発行数量を増加補正する措置である。こうすることによって、情報流通サーバ装置6は、需要増大、供給不足時において情報交換マーケットにて流通するシステム内通貨Lの流通総量を効果的に増加させることができるようになり、併せてシステム内通貨Lの単価の上昇を未然に防ぐ効果を奏する。なお、別の見方をすると、システム内通貨Lの需要増大局面については、無償コンテンツ及び「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザをより高く評価するよう評価値を上昇させる措置を講じているともいえる。つまり、無償コンテンツ及び「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザへの評価は一義的なものではなく、情報交換マーケットの総消費需要(総システム内通貨L需要)に基づきリアルタイムに変動するものであると言える。このことも含めることによって、アソシエイツによって発信され、その他のユーザに移転した価値たる無償コンテンツの経済的価値をバリュエーション(評価)することがさらにできるようになる。このようなことから、システム内通貨Lは、本源的経済価値を有した価値交換媒体であると言える。以降、情報流通サーバ装置6によって価値交換媒体たるシステム内通貨Lは流通する。 In addition, demand increase, which is an increase phase of “pre-sales volume for borrowing,” and “adjustment of new supply volume at the time of supply shortage” are determined and issued based on the evaluation value to the user with “Associates” account. The quantity of the in-system currency L is multiplied by the “factor” derived by the present algorithm to increase and correct the issued quantity of the in-system currency L. By doing this, the information distribution server device 6 can effectively increase the total amount of distribution in the system currency L distributed in the information exchange market when the demand increases and the supply shortages. The effect of preventing an increase in the unit price of the currency L is achieved. From another point of view, it can be said that measures have been taken to increase the evaluation value so that users with free content and "Associates" accounts are more highly rated regarding the demand increase phase of the system currency L. In other words, evaluations to users with free content and "Associates" accounts are not unique and can be said to fluctuate in real time based on total consumption demand (total system currency L demand in the information exchange market) . By including this as well, it is possible to further evaluate the economic value of the value free content that has been transmitted by the Associates and transferred to other users. From these facts, it can be said that the intrasystem currency L is a value exchange medium having intrinsic economic value. Thereafter, the in-system currency L, which is a value exchange medium, is distributed by the information distribution server device 6.
(9)(8)の新規供給総量調整は、即効性を高めるために遡って計算し、過去において、既に「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに対して供給されたシステム内通貨Lの量に上乗せして、通貨発行部6Bが調整分を更に「アソシエイツ」へ即時に追加供給してもよい。以降、新規供給総量調整が行なわれ続けるようにしてもよい。このように、新規供給量を調整する本アルゴリズムによって調整される供給量は、都度、リセットしながら毎回新規に行われるものではなく、乗算的に重ね続けるようにしてもよい。この場合に一度閾値を超えて乗算された評価値に乗じる係数値は、以降もずっとそのままであり、その状態から、さらに閾値を超えた場合に、追加して補正を加え続ける態様としてもよい。 (9) The new supply total adjustment in (8) is calculated retroactively to increase the immediate effect, and in the past, it is added to the amount of system currency L supplied to the account of “Associates”, The currency issuing unit 6B may further immediately supply the adjustment to "Associates". Thereafter, the adjustment of the total new supply amount may be continued. As described above, the supply amount adjusted by the present algorithm for adjusting the new supply amount may not be newly provided each time while being reset, and may be continuously overlapped in a multiplicative manner. In this case, the coefficient value to be multiplied by the evaluation value that has been multiplied once beyond the threshold may remain unchanged thereafter, and from that state, if the threshold is further exceeded, an additional correction may be continued.
(10)通貨制御部6Cは、「借り受け事前販売量」がA%からD%下振れした場合、即ち需要減少、供給過多の状態では、所定のE期間におけるシステム内通貨Lの総量を(A×D)%減少させるように供給量を調整する。需要減少、供給過多の状態は、「借り受け事前販売量」がシステム内通貨Lの総量の(A-A×D)%となっている状態である。D%は設定情報であり、例えば50%である。E期間も設定情報であり、1か月、2か月又は1週間等の任意の期間である。
 需要減少時も(8)同様に、システム内通貨Lの新規供給量の調整を行なった場合に、反映までに期間を要するから、一定期間が経過するまでの間は、「借り受け事前販売量」が閾値を下回っていたとしても新規供給量の調整は行なわないようにするとよい。この「一定期間」は、設定された「借り受け事前販売量」を上回るまでの期間としてもよい。なお、所定の期間Eの設定は、短ければ調整の影響は大きく、長ければ調整の影響は小さくなる。これらの設定情報は、システム管理者が端末装置を介して情報交換マーケットの状態に応じて更新するとよい。
(10) The currency control unit 6C determines that the total amount of in-system currency L in a predetermined period E is “A” when the “pre-sales volume for borrowing” falls below A% to D%, ie, demand declines and oversupply. X D) Adjust the supply to reduce%. The decrease in demand and the excess supply state are states in which the “pre-sales volume of borrowing” is (A−A × D)% of the total amount of the currency L in the system. D% is setting information, for example, 50%. Period E is also setting information, and is any period such as one month, two months, or one week.
Even when the demand declines (8) Similarly, when adjusting the new supply amount of the currency L in the system, it takes a period to reflect, so until the fixed period elapses, the “pre-sales volume for borrowing” It is preferable not to adjust the new supply amount even if the value is below the threshold. The “fixed period” may be a period until it exceeds the set “pre-sale amount of borrowing”. In addition, if the setting of the predetermined period E is short, the influence of adjustment will be large, and if it is long, the influence of adjustment will become small. These setting information may be updated by the system administrator via the terminal device according to the state of the information exchange market.
 なお、「借り受け事前販売量」の減少局面である需要減少、供給過多時における「新規供給量の調整」とは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザに、評価値に基づいて決定され発行されるシステム内通貨Lの数量に対して、本アルゴリズムによって導出された「係数」を乗じて、システム内通貨Lの発行数量を減少補正する措置である。こうすること、及び後述の仕組みを付加することによって、情報流通サーバ装置6は、需要減少、供給過多時において情報交換マーケットにて流通するシステム内通貨Lの流通総量を効果的に減少させることができるようになり、併せてシステム内通貨Lの単価の下落を未然に防ぐ効果を奏する。  In addition, demand decrease, which is a decrease phase of “pre-sales volume for borrowing”, and “adjustment of new supply amount” at oversupply time are determined and issued based on the evaluation value to the user with “Associates” account. The quantity of the in-system currency L is multiplied by the “factor” derived by this algorithm to reduce and correct the issued quantity of the in-system currency L. By doing this and adding a mechanism described later, the information distribution server device 6 can effectively reduce the total amount of distribution in the system currency L distributed in the information exchange market at the time of reduced demand and excessive supply. In addition, there is an effect of preventing the fall of the unit price of the currency L in the system.
 上述のように通貨制御部6Cは、システム管理者が使用する端末装置から、情報交換マーケットの状態に応じてこれらの設定情報の更新を受け付ける。
 (11)需要減少時の供給調整を行なうタイミングをもって(6)における「借り受け事前販売量」の閾値Zとし、通貨制御部6Cは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのユーザに対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lの保有期間による価値の減少(消滅期限のカウント)を停止する措置を実行するとよい。通貨制御部6Cは、システム内通貨Lの需要が増加し、「借り受け事前販売量」がAの値に到達した場合、停止していた消滅期限のカウントを再開させる。具体的には、例えば、通貨制御部6Cは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントIDに紐づけられている通貨IDの消滅期限を、上記措置の実行期間中1日進むごとに1日延長させた値に更新し、当該措置が終了すると、元の処理に戻す。
As described above, the currency control unit 6C receives the update of the setting information from the terminal device used by the system administrator according to the state of the information exchange market.
(11) The timing at which supply adjustment at the time of demand decrease is made the threshold Z of the "pre-sales volume for borrowing" in (6), and the currency control unit 6C determines the in-system currency associated with the user of Measures should be taken to stop the decrease in value (counting of the expiration date) due to the holding period of L. When the demand for the intra-system currency L increases and the “pre-sales volume of borrowing” reaches the value of A, the currency control unit 6C resumes the counting of the expiration date that has been stopped. Specifically, for example, the currency control unit 6C extends the expiration date of the currency ID linked to the account ID of "associates" by a value obtained by advancing one day during the execution period of the above measure. Update and return to the original processing when the action is completed.
 (8)~(11)の措置的処理に続けて緊急的処理は以下のように行なわれる。
(12)急激な需要減少があり、「借り受け事前販売量」が0(ゼロ)、又は0に所定の範囲で近くなった場合、通貨制御部6Cは、このタイミングに限って、上述した「ベーシックインカム」における税率を所定率へ上昇させる。所定率も設定情報であり、更新することにより変更可能である。これにより、1又は複数の情報交換マーケット全体のシステム内通貨Lの消費量を実質的に増加させると共に、システム内通貨Lの「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザへの無償給付量を増大させ、「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザの消費を下支えすることができる。なお、この緊急的処理が行なわれる場合には、ユーザの端末装置7へこれを周知するとよい。情報交換マーケットにおける「借り受け事前販売量」を含むシステム内通貨Lの流通状態をユーザに公開するとよい。このときこの緊急的処理の実行タイミングをユーザは予測することができるようになる。したがって、実行直前(増税直前)における「事業者」のアカウントを持つユーザによる駆け込み消費が期待でき、このことにより需要を増大させ、結果的に緊急的処理を遅らせる、又は緊急的処理を行なわなくて済むという効果が期待できる。
Following the measures (8) to (11), the urgent treatment is carried out as follows.
(12) If there is a sharp decline in demand, and the "pre-sales volume of borrowing" becomes close to 0 (zero) or 0 within a predetermined range, the currency control unit 6C limits the above mentioned "basic" Raise the tax rate in the “income” to a predetermined rate. The predetermined rate is also setting information, and can be changed by updating. This substantially increases the consumption of the system currency L throughout the one or more information exchange markets, and increases the free benefit amount to the user having the "individual" account of the system currency L, It can support the consumption of users with "personal" accounts. In addition, when this emergency process is performed, it is good to make this known to the user's terminal device 7. It is preferable to disclose to the user the distribution state of the in-system currency L including “the advance amount of borrowing” in the information exchange market. At this time, the user can predict the execution timing of the emergency process. Therefore, it is possible to expect rush consumption by the user with the "business operator" account immediately before implementation (immediately before tax increase), thereby increasing demand and consequently delaying urgent processing or performing no urgent processing. It can be expected to be effective.
 通貨制御部6Cはまた、取引処理部6Dにおいて上述の「借り受け事前販売量」が1以上存在している「平時」においては、システム内通貨Lの単価(1単位あたりのその他の物品又は役務の提供、並びに法定通貨等のその他の資産との交換価値)を一定水準(あらかじめ設定情報として定めた所定の交換比率)に保つようになる。また、上述及び後述の処理によって、情報交換マーケットにおける景気の減退期、金融政策失敗時等の例外時における急激な需要減少等の「緊急時」(「借り受け事前販売量」が0の状態、つまり上述の緊急的処理が行なわれるような状態)であってもシステム内通貨Lの取引所での単価は下がりにくくなる。 Currency control unit 6C also determines the unit price of currency L in the system (in other goods or services per unit in “normal time” in which one or more of the above-mentioned “pre-sales volume of borrowings” is present in transaction processing unit 6D. Provision and exchange value with other assets such as legal currency can be maintained at a predetermined level (predetermined exchange ratio predetermined as setting information). In addition, by the processing described above and below, “emergency” (“pre-sales volume” is “0”), such as a sharp decline in demand at an exception such as economic recession in the information exchange market or monetary policy failure. Even in the situation where the above-mentioned emergency processing is performed), the unit price at the exchange of the currency L in the system is unlikely to decrease.
 閾値Zを超えるような需要減少時には上述したように、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに対応付けられているシステム内通貨Lの消滅期限のカウントが停止しており、「借り受け事前販売量」が0(ゼロ)又は0に近くなったとしても、ユーザ(アソシエイツ)はシステム内通貨Lを安く販売せずともよい。いずれ、流通総量の減少と共にシステム内通貨Lの需要は元の需要に回復する(借り受け事前販売量が1以上になる)からである。ユーザは、「平時」の交換資産の値段(通貨制御部6Cによって予め定められた交換比率、例えば1対1)で立てておいたままにしておけばよい。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザは、交換資産がすぐほしい等の場合にのみ、例えば1対0.9等、安く交換比率を設定して売り注文を送信すればよい。 As described above, when the demand decreases such that the threshold Z is exceeded, the expiration date of the system currency L associated with the "Associates" account has stopped counting, and the "pre-sales volume for borrowing" is 0 (zero Even if it becomes close to 0), the user (associates) may not sell the system currency L cheaply. This is because the demand of the system currency L recovers to the original demand (the advance sales volume for borrowing becomes 1 or more) with the decrease of the total amount of distribution. The user may keep standing at the price of the “normal” exchange asset (the exchange ratio predetermined by the currency control unit 6C, for example, 1 to 1). A user with an "Associates" account may set a low exchange ratio, for example, 1 to 0.9, and transmit a sell order only when he / she wants exchange assets soon.
 更に通貨制御部6Cは、(12)の「緊急時」には、「借り受け事前販売量」が0(ゼロ)又は0に近くなった場合に、システム管理者が使用する端末装置を介し、予め設定された注文価格での買い注文を受け付けてもよい。これにより、システム管理者によって「アソシエイツ」のアカウントのユーザから売り出されたシステム内通貨Lが一時的に買い受けられる。なおこの場合の買い注文の価格は、「平時」の買い注文の価格と同額でもよいし、システム内通貨Lの価格の下落を許容する場合には、許容範囲内で「平時」の買い注文の価格を下回る価格でもよい。この場合新規供給総量の調整が行われ、需給バランスの回復が成された場合に、通貨制御部6Cはシステム管理者が使用する端末装置から、買い受けてあったシステム内通貨Lの売却を受け付ける。このときの売却価格は買い受けた金額でもよいし、通常に売り立てる価格(通貨制御部6Cによって予め定められた交換比率、例えば1対1)でもよい。これにより、「緊急時」には、システム管理者が買い支えることで価格がシステム管理者の下落許容価格を下回ることは無くなり、システム内通貨Lの売買価格が下落することを防ぐことができると同時に、需要の低下により、取引が成立しないといった状態も防ぐことができる。 Furthermore, in the case of (emergency) of (12), the currency control unit 6C causes, in advance, the terminal device used by the system administrator in advance when the “pre-sales volume for borrowing” becomes 0 (zero) or close to 0. You may accept a buy order at a set order price. As a result, the system currency L temporarily sold out by the system administrator from the user of the account of "Associates" is temporarily purchased. In this case, the price of the buy order may be the same as the price of the "normal" buy order, or if the price of the currency L in the system is allowed to fall, the "average" buy order is acceptable. The price may be lower than the price. In this case, the adjustment of the total amount of new supply is performed, and when the balance of supply and demand is restored, the currency control unit 6C receives the sale of the system currency L purchased from the terminal device used by the system administrator. The selling price at this time may be the purchased amount or a price to be usually sold (for example, one-to-one exchange ratio predetermined by the currency control unit 6C). As a result, in the "emergency", the system administrator can buy and support the price so that it does not fall below the system administrator's decline allowable price, and it is possible to prevent the decline in the trading price of the system currency L in the system. At the same time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a transaction can not be concluded due to a drop in demand.
 このようにし通貨発行部6B及び通貨制御部6Cは、自律的に需給ギャップに基づき、システム内通貨Lの売り注文(新規生成と販売、または保有分の売却)と、買い注文(新規生成販売分の買戻し、または需要不足分の回収)を行なう。 In this manner, the currency issuing unit 6B and the currency control unit 6C autonomously perform selling order (newly generating and selling, or selling for holding) of the currency L in the system based on the supply-demand gap and buying order (newly generated sales Repurchase or recover the shortfall in demand).
 通貨発行部6B及び通貨制御部6Cにおける処理により、取引処理部6Dにて、需要者のシステム内通貨Lの買い注文に対し、ユーザにストレスを与えることなく決済させることができる。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザによるシステム内通貨Lの販売についても、平時においてはストレスなく決済される。ユーザは緊急事態のみ、少しの間、待っていればよいから、従来の取引所にあるようなユーザの取引ストレスを低減させる効果も期待できるようになる。 By the processing in the currency issuing unit 6B and the currency control unit 6C, the transaction processing unit 6D can settle the user's purchase order for the system currency L without giving stress to the user. The sale of the in-system currency L by a user having an "Associates" account is also settled without stress in peacetime. Since the user only has to wait for a while for an emergency situation, the effect of reducing the transaction stress of the user as in a conventional exchange can be expected.
 通貨発行部6Bは、システム内通貨Lの新規供給量の調整値を算出するに際し、不足、又は余っているシステム内通貨Lの量が、「借り受け事前販売量」のモニタリングによって容易に算出できるようになる。したがって、システム管理者にとってもユーザにとっても、調整の根拠を容易に認識することができる効果も期待できる。 When calculating the adjustment value of the new supply amount of the in-system currency L, the currency issuing unit 6B can easily calculate the amount of the in-system currency L that is insufficient or surplus by monitoring the “advance sales volume of borrowing”. become. Therefore, it is expected that the system administrator and the user can easily recognize the basis of the adjustment.
 また通貨制御部6Cは、上述した「借り受け事前販売量」のモニタリングによるシステム内通貨Lの新規供給量の調整アルゴリズムに拠らずに新規供給量を調整することも可能である。例えば、通貨制御部6Cは、記憶部61又は記憶装置63に記憶してある設定値P、Q、Rに基づき、システム内通貨Lの総流通量に対する数量を調整供給量として増加又は、減少させる。Pは「適正価格」であり、Qは価格の変動許容上限、Rは変動許容下限である。いずれも設定情報であって変更可能である。設定値Q及びRについては、複数段階での閾値を用いて段階的な調整供給とすることも可能である。 Further, the currency control unit 6C can adjust the new supply amount without depending on the adjustment algorithm of the new supply amount of the currency L in the system by monitoring the above-mentioned "advance pre-sale amount of borrowing". For example, based on the set values P, Q, R stored in the storage unit 61 or 63, the currency control unit 6C increases or decreases the quantity for the total circulation quantity of the currency L in the system as the adjustment supply quantity. . P is a “fair price”, Q is a price fluctuation upper limit, and R is a fluctuation lower limit. Both are setting information and can be changed. With regard to the set values Q and R, it is also possible to make stepwise adjustment supply using thresholds in a plurality of stages.
 通貨制御部6Cは、取引処理部6Dにおけるシステム内通貨Lの約定価格が設定値Qを超過したか否かを定期的に判断し、超過したと判断した場合に、通貨発行部6Bによって調整供給を開始させる。通貨制御部6Cは、システム内通貨Lの現在の価格をx、調整供給量をyとした場合、調整供給量yを以下のように算出する。
 y=((x-P)/P)×総流通量
 調整供給が反映するまでに時間を要することから、調整供給が過度に行なわれ続けないようにするため、通貨制御部6Cは調整供給の開始後、所定の期間が経過するまでは調整供給を停止させる。
The currency control unit 6C periodically determines whether the contract price of the system currency L in the transaction processing unit 6D exceeds the set value Q. If it is determined that it has exceeded, the currency issuing unit 6B adjusts and supplies To start. When the current price of the system currency L is x and the adjusted supply amount is y, the currency control unit 6C calculates the adjusted supply amount y as follows.
y = ((x−P) / P) × total circulation amount Since it takes time for the adjusted supply to be reflected, the currency control unit 6C is configured to adjust the adjusted supply in order to prevent the adjusted supply from continuing excessively. After the start, the adjustment supply is stopped until a predetermined period has elapsed.
 通貨制御部6Cは、取引処理部6Dにおけるシステム内通貨Lの約定価格が設定値R未満となったか否かを定期的に判断し、設定R未満となったと判断した場合も通貨発行部6Bによって調整供給を開始させる。通貨制御部6Cは、システム内通貨Lの現在の価格をx’、調整供給量をy’とした場合、通貨発行部6Bは、y’を以下のように算出する。
 y’=((P-x’)/P)×総流通量
 この場合も通貨制御部6Cは、調整供給の開始後、所定の期間が経過するまでは調整供給を停止させるとよい。調整供給が減少の場合は、流通中のシステム内通貨Lを直接的に削除(消滅)させることができないから、少しずつ減少させることになる。したがって、設定値Rと適正価格Pとの間の差異は、設定値Qと適正価格Pとの間の差異よりも小さくすることが好ましい。
The currency control unit 6C periodically determines whether the contract price of the system currency L in the transaction processing unit 6D is less than the set value R, and also determines that the currency issue unit 6B determines that it is less than the set R. Start adjustment supply. Assuming that the current price of the in-system currency L is x ′ and the adjusted supply amount is y ′, the currency control unit 6C calculates y ′ as follows.
y ′ = ((P−x ′) / P) × total distribution amount Also in this case, after the start of the adjustment supply, the currency control unit 6C may stop the adjustment supply until a predetermined period elapses. If the adjustment supply is reduced, the in-system currency L in circulation can not be deleted (erased) directly, so it will be reduced gradually. Therefore, it is preferable that the difference between the set value R and the appropriate price P be smaller than the difference between the set value Q and the appropriate price P.
 調整供給量y(y’)による調整供給は通貨発行部6Bにより、以下のように行なわれる。通貨制御部6Cは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウント毎に、評価値に基づく発行量(評価供給量)から調整供給量の配分を算出する。通貨制御部6Cは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウント毎の発行量の、全発行量に対する割合に応じて、調整供給量を配分する。なお基になる評価供給量は、増加させる場合は直近の評価供給量、減少させる場合は次のタイミングで決定される評価供給量を用いて算出するとよい。なお、増加させる場合も減少させる場合も、次のタイミングで決定される評価供給量を用いてもよい。通貨制御部6Cは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウント毎の評価供給量ではなく、評価値そのものの全体に対する割合に応じて調整供給の配分を算出してもよい。配分の算出方法は、できるだけ「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザに公平に配分されるように種々の方法が考えられる。 The adjustment supply by the adjustment supply amount y (y ') is performed by the currency issuing unit 6B as follows. The currency control unit 6C calculates the distribution of the adjustment supply amount from the issue amount (evaluation supply amount) based on the evaluation value for each account of "associates". The currency control unit 6C distributes the adjusted supply amount according to the ratio of the issue amount of each account of "Associates" to the total issue amount. The base evaluation supply amount may be calculated using the latest evaluation supply amount when increasing it and using the evaluation supply amount determined at the next timing when decreasing. In the case of increasing or decreasing, the estimated supply amount determined at the next timing may be used. The currency control unit 6C may calculate the distribution of the adjustment supply according to the ratio to the whole of the evaluation value itself instead of the evaluation supply amount for each account of "Associates". There are various conceivable methods of calculating the allocation, in order to be distributed equally to the users having the "Associates" account as much as possible.
 システム管理者等によって設定される第1の消費価格は主体群ごとに夫々最適解を求めて設定され、更新される。複数の主体群を比較した場合、各主体群で活動するユーザの数、コンテンツ流通の活性度、及び実体経済における購買力等に応じて、主体群毎に、システム内通貨Lの利用行為における消費量に差異が生じる。アソシエイツにとっての獲得するシステム内通貨Lの実質の経済的価値にも差異が生じる可能性がある。他のシステム外の資産との約定価格にも差異が生じる可能性がある。これは、複数の主体群を一括して管理する情報流通サーバ装置6であって、構築する情報交換マーケットにおいて全体を通して流通させる単一通貨であるシステム内通貨Lを生成及び流通させていることによる。通貨制御部6Cは、この差異を反映させて評価値を補正する。図14は、主体群に応じて評価値を補正する手法の一例を示すフローチャートである。補正された評価値に基づいて、通貨発行部6Bは「アソシエイツ」のアカウントへシステム内通貨Lを発行する。 The first consumption price set by the system administrator or the like is set and updated by obtaining an optimum solution for each of the subject groups. When a plurality of actor groups are compared, the consumption amount in the system L usage of the currency L in each entity group according to the number of users active in each entity group, the activity level of content distribution, and purchasing power in the real economy, etc. Makes a difference. There may also be differences in the real economic value of the intra-system currency L acquired for the Associates. There may also be differences in the contract price with other non-system assets. This is because the information distribution server device 6 collectively manages a plurality of subject groups, and generates and distributes the system currency L, which is a single currency distributed throughout the entire information exchange market to be constructed. . The currency control unit 6C corrects the evaluation value by reflecting the difference. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a method of correcting the evaluation value according to the subject group. Based on the corrected evaluation value, the currency issuing unit 6B issues the in-system currency L to the "Associates" account.
 この補正は、「評価」の価値(情報のユーザ間の移動に伴うユーザ間で移動した価値)は、ユーザが所属する主体群の購買力によって大きくも小さくもなり、また時代の変遷に伴う主体群の購買力の変動によっても変動するため行なわれるべきである。また、購買力平価にもあるように、主体群の一つである国家ごとの、物品又は役務等に対する経済価値は国家ごとに異なる。これら購買力平価の異なる主体群を複数内包するマーケット(情報交換マーケット)における単一決済手段(システム内通貨L)を提供する場合には、その生成、流通等の制御について、購買力平価について考慮しなければならない。ここで説明するアルゴリズムは、これらの課題を解決する手段である。なお、ここで言う「主体群」とは、情報交換マーケットを利用する「アソシエイツ」、「事業者」、「個人」等のアカウント(を持つユーザ)の記憶部61に記憶された属性情報を、あらかじめ記憶部61に記憶してある設定情報によって一定範囲にまとめた呼称であって、さらに、記憶部61に記憶された属性情報の一つである「地域属性」を一定範囲にまとめた「地域属性主体群」の呼称である。「主体群」は、市区町村、都道府県、州、地域、国家、経済圏、又は大陸等、どのようにでも定めることのできるものであるが、ここでは「国家」を想定して説明する。別の表現をすると、「主体群」とは、同一の地域属性を有するアカウントの集合体であって、文化、言語、購買力平価、税制等の同様な集団を指す。つまり、「主体群」とは、たいていの場合、国家を表す。 In this correction, the value of “evaluation” (the value moved between users due to the movement between users of information) becomes larger or smaller depending on the purchasing power of the agents to which the user belongs, and the agents relating to the transition of the times It should be done because it fluctuates by fluctuation of purchasing power. Also, as in purchasing power parity, the economic value of goods or services, etc. for each nation that is one of the groups of actors differs from nation to nation. In the case of providing a single settlement means (in-system currency L) in a market (information exchange market) including a plurality of entities having different purchasing power parities, the control of generation, distribution, etc. must be considered with respect to purchasing power parity. You must. The algorithm described here is a means to solve these problems. Here, “the group of subjects” means attribute information stored in the storage unit 61 of (the user having the account with) “associates”, “business person”, “individual” and the like who use the information exchange market, A “area” in which “area attribute” which is one of the attribute information stored in the storage unit 61 and which is a name summarized in a predetermined range according to setting information stored in the storage unit 61 in advance It is the designation of "attribute subject group". "Subject groups" can be defined in any way, such as municipality, prefectures, states, regions, countries, economic zones, or continents, but in this case they will be described assuming "state". . In other words, “subject group” is a collection of accounts having the same regional attribute, and refers to similar groups of culture, language, purchasing power parity, taxation, and the like. In other words, "subjects" usually represent a nation.
(1)通貨制御部6Cは、所定の期間において、各主体群におけるユーザ(アソシエイツ)の評価総量が、当該主体群における第1の消費活動において決定(消費)されたシステム内通貨Lの消費量の総量(第1消費量)と等しくなる値(評価購買力倍率)を以下のように算出する(ステップS1301)。
 各主体群の所定の期間の評価購買力倍率=第1消費量/評価総量
(2)通貨制御部6Cは、購買力の差異を反映させた、各主体群に属するアソシエイツ及び無償コンテンツへの評価値(購買力反映評価値)を以下のように算出する(ステップS1302)。すなわち、通貨制御部6Cは評価補正部610として機能する。
 購買力反映評価値=元の評価値×評価購買力倍率
 通貨発行部6Bは、この補正後の購買力反映評価値を用いてシステム内通貨Lを発行する。
(1) In the predetermined period, the currency control unit 6C determines the consumption amount of the intra-system currency L for which the evaluation total amount of the user (associates) in each of the principal groups is determined (consumed) in the first consumption activity of the principal groups. A value (evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor) equal to the total amount (first consumption amount) of is calculated as follows (step S1301).
Evaluation of purchasing power of each entity group for a predetermined period = first consumption amount / total evaluation amount (2) The currency control unit 6C reflects the difference in purchasing power, and evaluates the Associates and gratis content belonging to each entity group ( The purchasing power reflection evaluation value is calculated as follows (step S1302). That is, the currency control unit 6C functions as the evaluation correction unit 610.
Purchasing power reflection evaluation value = original evaluation value × evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor The currency issuing unit 6B issues the in-system currency L using the purchasing power reflection evaluation value after this correction.
 このような補正を行なうことにより、購買力に差の有る主体群毎において、アソシエイツ及び無償コンテンツに対してその差を反映させた評価値が算出される。以降、情報流通サーバ装置6は通貨発行部6Bによって、購買力反映評価値に基づいてシステム内通貨Lを「アソシエイツ」のアカウントへ発行する。このように、購買力平価の差にあるような経済格差に影響を受けない効率的なシステム内通貨Lの主体群間の流通が実現し、主体群の経済格差に影響を受けない効率的な情報の流通が実現する。更に購買力反映評価値が逐次更新されることで、経済格差の時間的変動もリアルタイムに吸収される。 By performing such correction, in each group of subjects having a difference in purchasing power, an evaluation value in which the difference is reflected on associates and free content is calculated. Thereafter, the information distribution server device 6 causes the currency issuing unit 6B to issue the in-system currency L to the account of “Associates” based on the purchasing power reflection evaluation value. In this way, efficient inter-system currency L communication is realized that is not affected by economic disparities, such as differences in purchasing power parities, and efficient information is not affected by economic disparities of the main bodies. Distribution of Furthermore, by updating the purchasing power reflection evaluation value one by one, the time variation of the economic gap is absorbed in real time.
 上述で算出される評価購買力倍率は、購買力平価のような存在であり、主体群間の購買力の差異を表す指標にもなる。システム管理者によって更新される設定情報としての評価関数は、ここで説明する評価補正アルゴリズムを用いることによって、主体群間の差異についてシステム管理者及びユーザが考慮する必要がなくなり、購買力差のある地域間の「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザにとって合理的な評価値が算出されるようになり、情報交換マーケットにおける情報流通の阻害要因を排除できるようになるとともにユーザの利用が促進され、情報流通が活性化する。そして、このこと、及び上述の「新規供給総量調整アルゴリズム」によるシステム内通貨Lの発行量の制御によって、システム管理者によって更新されるシステム内通貨Lの発行数量を決定づける設定情報としての評価関数は、あくまでも無償コンテンツ及び「アソシエイツ」に対する評価バランスを設定するに過ぎず、情報交換マーケット内における相対的評価として運用することができるようになる。例えば、設定された評価が絶対的に大き過ぎたり、小さ過ぎたりしてシステム内通貨Lの発行量の基礎になる評価値が異常値になった場合であっても、結果的に、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに発行されるシステム内通貨Lの発行量は、マーケット内における主体群ごとの購買力及びシステム内通貨Lの需要量に見合った量の発行量に調整される。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザによって無償で提供される無償コンテンツに対し、マーケット内の他のアカウントのユーザによる購買力が反映された評価(購買力反映評価値)としての価値が、システム内通貨Lの発行を通じて被評価者である「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに与えられるようになり、情報流通が盛んになり情報交換マーケットが活性化する効果が期待できる。 The evaluation purchasing power multiple calculated as described above is an existence such as purchasing power parity, and also serves as an index representing the difference in purchasing power among the groups of subjects. By using the evaluation correction algorithm described here, the evaluation function as the setting information updated by the system administrator eliminates the need for the system administrator and the user to consider the difference between the subject groups, and the area with purchasing power difference A reasonable evaluation value is calculated for the user who has an "Associates" account among them, and it becomes possible to eliminate the impediment factor of the information distribution in the information exchange market, and at the same time, the use of the user is promoted and the information distribution is made. Activate. Then, the evaluation function as setting information for determining the issued quantity of the in-system currency L updated by the system administrator by this and the control of the issued amount of the in-system currency L by the above-mentioned "new supply total amount adjustment algorithm" However, it is possible to use it as a relative evaluation in the information exchange market only by setting the evaluation balance for the free contents and "associates". For example, even if the set evaluation is absolutely too large or too small and the evaluation value on which the issue amount of the currency L in the system is based becomes an outlier, as a result, “associates The issuance amount of the in-system currency L issued to the “account” is adjusted to the purchasing power of each group of entities in the market and the issuance amount of the amount corresponding to the demand amount of the in-system currency L. The value as the evaluation (purchasing power reflection evaluation value) that reflects the purchasing power by users of other accounts in the market against the free content provided free of charge by the user with the “Associates” account is the system currency L The issue will be given to the account of "Associates" who are the assessors through issuance, and information distribution will be popular, and the effect of activating the information exchange market can be expected.
 情報交換マーケットには、システム内通貨Lが個々の主体群の実体を反映させて適切に主体群毎に供給される。ここで算出された評価購買力倍率を用いて、通貨制御部6Cは、異なる主体群毎の購買力の差から生じる物価の差、実体経済での国家間経済格差に似た主体群間の格差に対する是正措置を実現することも可能である。 In the information exchange market, the system internal currency L is appropriately supplied to each entity group by reflecting the entities of the individual entity groups. Using the evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor calculated here, the currency control unit 6C corrects for the price difference resulting from the difference in purchasing power for different subject groups, and for the disparity between the subject groups similar to the national economic disparity in the real economy. It is also possible to realize the measures.
 評価購買力倍率が相対的に低い主体群(例えばインドとする)における「アソシエイツ」のアカウントから提供される有償コンテンツは、評価購買力倍率が相対的に高い主体群(例えば日本とする)における有償コンテンツよりも、価格競争力が高い。これにより評価購買力倍率が相対的に高い主体群おける有償コンテンツの提供意欲が減退する可能性がある。例えば、日本のアソシエイツが、価値ある有償コンテンツを、自身で定める交換価値(価格)を提示(システム内通貨Lの数量を決定)して「個人」等の他のユーザに提供しようとしたとしても、インドのアソシエイツから同等又は廉価版としての価値を有する類似の有償コンテンツが破格の交換価値で提供される可能がある。ユーザがコストを支払うことなく世界中を瞬間的に移動することのできるメタバースである情報交換マーケットにおいて、この場合、主体群間の購買力差から、日本のアソシエイツは、提供しようとする有償コンテンツの付加価値をインドのアソシエイツから提供される有償コンテンツと比較して過度に上げなければならず、日本のアソシエイツに相当な負荷が掛かり、疲弊する虞がある。 The paid content provided from the “Associates” account in a group of subjects having a relatively low rating purchasing power ratio (for example, India) has a higher content than the paid content in a group of subjects having a relatively high rating purchasing power ratio (for example, Japan). Even, price competitiveness is high. This may reduce the willingness to provide paid content in a group of subjects having a relatively high evaluation purchasing power multiple. For example, even if Japanese Associates try to provide valuable paid content to other users such as "individual" by presenting the exchange value (price) defined by itself (determining the quantity of the currency L in the system) There is a possibility that similar paid contents having value as equivalent or inexpensive edition can be provided with exceptional exchange value from Associates of India. In the information exchange market, which is a metaverse that allows users to move around the world instantaneously without paying costs, in this case, due to differences in purchasing power between groups of actors, Japanese Associates will add paid content to be provided. The value must be increased excessively compared to the paid content provided by Associates in India, and it is likely that Japan's Associates will be heavily loaded and fatigued.
 実体経済においても、物価が他よりも低い国家等の地域で生産された商品又は役務は、物価がそれよりも高い国家等の地域で生産された商品又は役務に比べて価格競争力が高い。例えば経済格差を利用して、生産拠点を他国に移して逆輸入する先進国の企業がある。実体経済では、「関税」の制度を用いて国家の単位でマーケット内の産業が守られている。 Also in the real economy, products or services produced in regions such as nations where prices are lower than others are more price competitive than products or services produced in regions such as nations where prices are higher. For example, there are companies in developed countries that transfer production bases to other countries and reimport them using economic disparities. In the real economy, industries in the market are protected on a national basis using a “tariff” system.
 本実施形態における情報流通サーバ装置6は、通貨制御部6Cの機能により、有償コンテンツの取得に必要なシステム内通貨Lの交換価格(第2の消費活動についての第2消費価格)を増額させる措置を実施してもよい。この措置は、例えば、主体群B(評価購買力倍率が相対的に高い主体群)における「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザが、主体群A(評価購買力倍率が相対的に低い主体群)にて発信されている有償コンテンツを取得しようとした場合に実施されるようにすればよい。具体的には、主体群Bの「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザに対し、主体群間の評価購買力倍率の比率に応じた価格が提示されるようにすればよい。
 提示される交換価格=主体群Aの「アソシエイツ」が任意に設定した有償コンテンツの交換価格×(主体群Bの評価購買力倍率/主体群Aの評価購買力倍率)
 主体群Bの「事業者」又は「個人」のユーザが、提示される交換価格にて主体群Aの「アソシエイツ」のユーザから発信される有償コンテンツを購入した場合、主体群Bのユーザが支払う交換価格に相当するシステム内通貨Lは、主体群Aの「アソシエイツ」のユーザによって取得される。
The information distribution server device 6 in the present embodiment has a function of increasing the exchange price (the second consumption price for the second consumption activity) of the system currency L necessary for acquiring the paid content by the function of the currency control unit 6C. May be implemented. In this measure, for example, the user of the account of “business person” or “individual” in the subject group B (subject group having a relatively high evaluation purchasing power multiple) has a subject group A (subject group having a relatively low evaluation purchasing power multiple). It may be implemented when it is going to acquire the paid contents sent out in. Specifically, a price according to the ratio of the evaluation purchasing power multiple among the subject groups may be presented to the user of the account of the “business company” or the “individual” of the subject group B.
Exchange price presented = Exchange price of paid content arbitrarily set by "Associates" of subject group A × (evaluation purchasing power multiple of subject group B / evaluation purchasing power multiple of subject group A)
If the user of Entity B's "Business Operator" or "Individual" purchases paid content sent from the user of Entity A's "Associates" at the exchange price presented, the user of Entity B will pay The intra-system currency L corresponding to the exchange price is acquired by the user of the “associates” of the group of entities A.
 主体群Aの「アソシエイツ」が販売しようとする有償コンテンツの交換価格は、主体群A又は主体群Aよりも評価購買力倍率が更に低い主体群Cにおける「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザには、定められた交換価格のまま販売される。これに対し、評価購買力倍率が主体群Aよりも高い主体群Bにおける「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザには、購買力の高さが反映された補正後の交換価格にて販売される。これによって主体群Aにおける「アソシエイツ」のアカウントの収益が大きくなると共に、主体群B内での有償コンテンツの交換価格が不当に押し下げられなくなる。これは更に、価値を創造した主体群Aにおける「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに対して経済格差から生じる剰余価値を還元できるという効果を奏し、主体群Aの経済力の上昇が期待される。
 なお、同じ評価購買力倍率を適用する主体群の範囲は、国家に限定するものではなく、物価等の経済状況が同程度であると考えられる任意の地域としてもよい。
The exchange price of paid content that "Associates" of subject group A intends to sell is a user of the account of "business person" or "individual" in subject group C whose evaluation purchasing power multiple is lower than that of subject group A or subject group A Are sold at the stated exchange price. On the other hand, users of accounts of “business person” or “individual” in the subject group B whose evaluation purchasing power multiple is higher than the subject group A are sold at the corrected exchange price that reflects the high purchasing power. Ru. As a result, the income of the "associates" account in the subject group A increases, and the exchange price of the paid content in the subject group B can not be unduly depressed. This further has the effect of being able to reduce the surplus value arising from economic disparities to the account of "associates" in the group of entities A that created value, and the economic power of the group of entities A is expected to rise.
The scope of the group of entities to which the same evaluation purchasing power multiple factor is applied is not limited to the state, but may be any region where economic conditions such as prices are considered to be similar.
 これに加えて、本実施形態における情報流通サーバ装置6は、通貨制御部6Cの機能により、異なる主体群間における従となる情報の発信に必要なシステム内通貨Lの消費量(第1消費価格)を増額させる措置を実施してもよい。
 例えば上述の例における評価購買力倍率が相対的に低い主体群Aにおける「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザに対して提示される第1消費価格は、主体群A及び主体群Aよりも評価購買力倍率が高い主体群Bにおいて決定される第1消費価格がそのまま提示される。これに対し、評価購買力倍率が他よりも高い主体群Bにおける「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザに対して提示される第1消費価格に対し、通貨制御部6Cによって次のような措置が実行されてもよい。
In addition to this, the information distribution server device 6 in the present embodiment consumes the amount of consumption of the system currency L necessary for transmission of subordinate information between different subject groups by the function of the currency control unit 6C You may implement measures to increase).
For example, the first consumption price presented to the user of the account of “business person” or “individual” in the group of subjects A having relatively low evaluation purchase power multiple factor in the above example is higher than The first consumption price determined in the subject group B having a high evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor is presented as it is. On the other hand, with respect to the first consumption price presented to the user of the account of the “business operator” or “individual” in the group of subjects B whose evaluation purchasing power multiple is higher than others, Measures may be taken.
 通貨制御部6Cは、主体群Bの「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントに対する、主体群Aにおける第1の消費活動に対する消費量を、両者の評価購買力倍率の比率に応じて補正する。
 主体群Bにおけるユーザが、主体群Aにおける第1消費価格を参照しようとした場合、通貨制御部6Cは、以下の第1消費価格を提示する。
 第1消費価格=主体群Aにおける第1消費価格×(主体群Bの評価購買力倍率/主体群Aの評価購買力倍率)
The currency control unit 6C corrects the consumption amount for the first consumption activity in the subject group A with respect to the account of the “business operator” or the “individual” of the subject group B according to the ratio of the evaluation purchase power ratio of the two.
When the user in the subject group B tries to refer to the first consumption price in the subject group A, the currency control unit 6C presents the following first consumption price.
1st consumption price = 1st consumption price in subject group A × (evaluation purchasing power multiple of subject group B / evaluation purchasing power multiple of subject group A)
 これにより、主体群Aにおいて第1の消費活動を行なおうとする、主体群Bの「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザに対して提示される第1消費価格は、評価購買力倍率の差が反映された価格となる。
 主体群Bのユーザが主体群Aの活動圏(情報交換マーケット内の主体群Aの活動する一部の領域)において第1消費活動を行った場合、評価購買力倍率の差が反映された第1消費価格に相当するシステム内通貨Lが情報交換マーケットから消滅してもよい。また、元の第1消費価格から増額した分のシステム内通貨Lをベーシックインカムの給付原資としてもよい。この場合、給付対象を主体群Aにおける「個人」のアカウントに限定し、評価購買力倍率が相対的に低い主体群Aの購買力を上昇させるようにしてもよい。ベーシックインカムを採用する場合には、増額した分のシステム内通貨Lは、主体群Aの「個人」のアカウントに給付され、採用しない場合には、全額が主体群Bの第1消費量として処理されるということである。つまり、ベーシックインカム処理を含めた評価購買力倍率を反映させた第1消費価格に対する補正処理は、主体群間の購買力差を均衡化させる効果も期待できる。
As a result, the first consumption price presented to the user of the "business" or "individual" account of the subject group B, who intends to carry out the first consumption activity in the subject group A, is The price reflects the difference.
When the user of the subject group B performs the first consumption activity in the activity area of the subject group A (a part of the area in which the subject group A is active in the information exchange market), the first factor on which the difference in evaluation purchasing power ratio is reflected The intra-system currency L corresponding to the consumption price may disappear from the information exchange market. Alternatively, the system internal currency L may be used as the source of benefit for the basic income as much as the original first consumption price. In this case, the object of payment may be limited to the “individual” account in the subject group A, and the purchasing power of the subject group A having a relatively low evaluation purchasing power multiple may be increased. If the basic income is adopted, the system currency L for the increased amount is provided to the "personal" account of the entity group A, and if not adopted, the entire amount is treated as the first consumption amount of the entity group B It is to be done. That is, the correction process for the first consumption price reflecting the evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor including the basic income process can also be expected to have the effect of balancing the purchasing power difference between the subject groups.
 このように通貨制御部6Cの機能により、評価購買力倍率の異なる主体群に夫々属する「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントのユーザによる第1の消費活動の市場競争原理を強度に生じさせることができる。これにより、情報交換マーケットにおける消費活動を活性化させる効果が発揮され、更には異なる主体群間の購買力の格差による経済活動の阻害要因を是正する効果も期待できる。 As described above, the function of the currency control unit 6C can strongly generate the market competition principle of the first consumption activity by the user of the "business operator" or the "individual" account belonging to the groups of agents having different evaluation purchasing power multiples. it can. As a result, the effect of activating the consumption activity in the information exchange market can be exhibited, and further, the effect of correcting the impediment factor of the economic activity due to the difference in purchasing power among different subject groups can also be expected.
 価値連動部6Eは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザが所持するシステム内通貨Lと、システム外で流通するデジタル資産との交換を受付ける機能を発揮する。ここで、デジタル資産とは、例えば、システム内通貨Lに対して外貨に当たる特定の仮想通貨であり、ICOのようなシステム管理者主体によって発行されるものである。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザは、この特定の仮想通貨を所有するために、システム管理者が管理するブロックチェーンネットワーク上に各自ウォレットアドレスを獲得する必要がある。 The value interlocking unit 6E exhibits a function of accepting exchange between the system internal currency L held by the user having the “Associates” account and the digital asset distributed outside the system. Here, the digital asset is, for example, a specific virtual currency equivalent to a foreign currency with respect to the system currency L, and is issued by a system administrator such as ICO. Users with "Associates" accounts need to obtain their own wallet address on the blockchain network managed by the system administrator in order to own this particular virtual currency.
 図15は価値連動部6Eによって実行されるシステム内通貨の交換手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。価値連動部6Eは、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザが所持するシステム内通貨Lのうち、交換対象のシステム内通貨Lの数量を受付ける(ステップS1401)。 FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of an intra-system currency exchange procedure executed by the value interlocking unit 6E. The value interlocking unit 6E receives the quantity of the system currency L to be exchanged among the system currency L possessed by the user having the “Associates” account (step S1401).
 価値連動部6Eは、受付けた数量のシステム内通貨Lを特定の仮想通貨に交換するように、取引処理部6Dに交換依頼を行う(ステップS1402)。取引処理部6Dは、上述したように、情報交換マーケットにおける取引所として機能し、システム内通貨Lの取引の1つとして、システム外資産(例えば、特定の仮想通貨)への交換を可能とする。取引処理部6Dの機能によって、システム内通貨Lから特定の仮想通貨への交換が完了した場合、交換によって獲得した特定の仮想通貨の情報がシステム内通貨Lを販売した「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザのウォレットアドレスに書き込まれる。なお、本実施形態では、システム内通貨Lと、特定の仮想通貨との交換レートは定率(例えば1対1)である。本実施形態では、上述した「借り受け事前販売量」のモニタリングによる新規供給量調整アルゴリズムの処理と、価値連動部6Eによる処理とが連動することによって、システム内通貨Lと特定の仮想通貨の交換レートをシステム管理者による任意の設定により固定させることが可能となる。 The value interlocking unit 6E makes a exchange request to the transaction processing unit 6D so as to exchange the accepted quantity of currency L in the system for a specific virtual currency (step S1402). As described above, the transaction processing unit 6D functions as an exchange in the information exchange market, and enables exchange for a non-system asset (for example, a specific virtual currency) as one of the intra-system currency L transactions. . When the exchange from the system currency L to a specific virtual currency is completed by the function of the transaction processing unit 6D, the information of the specific virtual currency acquired by the exchange has an “Associates” account that sold the system currency L. Written to the user's wallet address. In the present embodiment, the exchange rate between the intra-system currency L and the specific virtual currency is a fixed rate (for example, one to one). In the present embodiment, the exchange rate between the system currency L and the specific virtual currency is exchanged by interlocking the processing of the new supply adjustment algorithm by monitoring the “pre-sales volume of borrowing” described above and the processing by the value interlocking unit 6E. Can be fixed by any setting by the system administrator.
 また、取引処理部6Dの機能によって、システム内通貨Lから特定の仮想通貨への交換が完了した場合、制御部60は、前記ユーザが所持するシステム内通貨Lの数量を、交換した数量だけ減算するようにシステム内通貨管理テーブルを更新する(ステップS1403)。 Further, when the exchange from the system currency L to a specific virtual currency is completed by the function of the transaction processing unit 6D, the control unit 60 subtracts the quantity of the system currency L owned by the user by the exchanged quantity. The in-system currency management table is updated to do this (step S1403).
 以上のように、価値連動部6Eによって、システム内通貨Lと特定の仮想通貨との価値を交換することができるようになり、システム内通貨Lの価値の保蔵機能を特定の仮想通貨に代替させることができるようになる。また、システム内通貨Lと特定の仮想通貨とは一体として通貨の機能を提供することができるようになる。
 他方、システム内通貨Lと特定の仮想通貨とが定率交換(例えば1対1)されることから、特定の仮想通貨にシステム内通貨Lの価値を本位させることが可能となり、前記仮想通貨に経済的価値を生じさせることができるようになる。
さらに、上述した「借り受け事前販売量」をモニタリングしてシステム内通貨Lの新規供給量を調整するアルゴリズムから、同じく上述した取引処理部6Dの機能によって、特定の仮想通貨を保有するユーザは、保有する特定の仮想通貨をシステム内通貨Lにいつでもどれだけの量でも交換することができるようになる。価値連動部6Eは、特定の仮想通貨に対する経済的価値の根拠を生じさせる機能を発揮する。
 このようにして、従来にない、情報交換マーケットにおいて無償で交換される情報に含まれる経済的価値を本源とした通貨(価値交換媒体、つまりシステム内通貨L)を生成し、情報交換マーケットのみならず、実社会においてもブロックチェーンネットワーク上においてシステム内通貨Lの経済的価値を本源とした特定の仮想通貨を流通させることができるようになる。
As described above, the value interlocking unit 6E makes it possible to exchange the value between the system currency L and a specific virtual currency, and substitutes the function of storing the value of the system currency L with a specific virtual currency. Will be able to Also, the system currency L and the specific virtual currency can be integrated to provide the function of the currency.
On the other hand, constant exchange of system currency L with a specific virtual currency (for example, one-to-one) makes it possible to set the value of system currency L to a specific virtual currency, thereby making the virtual currency economic Will be able to generate
Furthermore, the user who holds a specific virtual currency is held by the above-described function of the transaction processing unit 6D based on the above-described algorithm for monitoring the "pre-sale amount for borrowing" and adjusting the new supply amount of the currency L in the system. It is possible to exchange a specific virtual currency to the intrasystem currency L at any time and in any quantity. The value interlocking unit 6E exerts a function of generating a basis of economic value for a specific virtual currency.
In this way, a currency (value exchange medium, that is, currency L in the system) is generated based on the economic value contained in the information exchanged free of charge in the information exchange market, as in the prior art. Also, in the real world, it becomes possible to circulate a specific virtual currency based on the economic value of the system currency L on the block chain network.
図16は、物価と、システム内通貨Lの新規供給量及び流通量と、システム内通貨Lの単価の関係の一例を示す図である。システム管理者が使用する管理者端末等による設定情報の更新によって主体群ごとに定められる第1消費価格(物価)は、第1消費価格の相対的バランス、システム内通貨Lの単価、及び情報交換マーケットに流通するシステム内通貨Lの総量を決定付ける根拠としての役割を有する。すなわち、図16に示すように、主体群ごとに定められる第1消費価格(物価)が上昇した場合、システム内通貨Lの新規供給量及び流通量は増加し、それに伴いシステム内通貨Lの単価は下落するという側面を有する。逆に、主体群ごとに定められる第1消費価格(物価)が下落した場合、システム内通貨Lの新規供給量及び流通量は減少し、それに伴いシステム内通貨Lの単価は上昇するという側面を有する。そして、上述した第1消費価格の上昇及び下落は、システム管理者による設定情報の更新によって制御することができるというものである。 FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the price, the new supply amount and circulation amount of the in-system currency L, and the unit price of the in-system currency L. The first consumption price (price) defined for each entity group by updating setting information by the administrator terminal etc. used by the system administrator is the relative balance of the first consumption price, the unit price of the system currency L, and information exchange It serves as a basis for determining the total amount of in-system currency L distributed to the market. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, when the first consumption price (price) defined for each group of entities rises, the amount of new supply and the amount of circulation of the currency L in the system increase, and the unit price of the currency L in the system accordingly Has the aspect of falling. On the contrary, when the first consumption price (price) defined for each entity group falls, the new supply amount and circulation amount of the currency L in the system decrease, and the unit price of the currency L in the system accordingly increases. Have. The increase and decrease of the first consumption price described above can be controlled by updating the setting information by the system administrator.
 <第二実施形態>
 以下、第二実施形態について説明する。第二実施形態では、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザから発信された無償コンテンツ及び当該ユーザに対する評価値を補正する構成について説明する。具体的には、制御部60は、図6のフローチャートに示した処理手順により算出される評価値を、以下で説明する評価補正アルゴリズムに基づき補正してもよい。なお、情報流通サーバ装置6を含むシステムの全体構成については第一実施形態と同様であるから、その詳細な説明を省略することとする。また、ここで説明する評価補正の目的である評価値の算出は、上述したように、結果的にシステム内通貨Lのアソシエイツごとに発行する数量をどのように配分するかのバランス取りと同義である。つまり評価値は、絶対値としてではなく、無償コンテンツ及びアソシエイツ間の相対値としての評価の定量化である。いわば、ユーザ間で移転した無償の価値のバランスを定量化する行為が評価値の算出である。後述する評価補正アルゴリズムとは、この相対値としての評価値をどのように補正して、どのようにバランス取りをするかの処理である。つまり、評価値を補正しようがしまいが、例えば結果的に評価値が10倍になったからと言って、システム内通貨Lの発行数量が10倍になるわけではない。システム内通貨Lの発行数量の決定には、別の処理が用いられる。
Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described below. In the second embodiment, free content transmitted from a user having an “Associates” account and a configuration for correcting the evaluation value for the user will be described. Specifically, the control unit 60 may correct the evaluation value calculated by the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 based on the evaluation correction algorithm described below. The entire configuration of the system including the information distribution server device 6 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the calculation of the evaluation value, which is the purpose of the evaluation correction described here, is equivalent to balancing of how to distribute the quantity to be issued for each association of the currency L in the system as described above. is there. That is, the evaluation value is not an absolute value but quantification of evaluation as a relative value between free content and associates. In other words, the act of quantifying the balance of the free values transferred among the users is the calculation of the evaluation value. The evaluation correction algorithm described later is processing of how to correct the evaluation value as the relative value and how to balance. That is, although the evaluation value is to be corrected, for example, just because the evaluation value is 10 times as a result, the issued quantity of the system currency L is not 10 times. Another process is used to determine the issue quantity of the in-system currency L.
 (1)評価補正アルゴリズム1
 評価補正アルゴリズム1は、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザによる所定期間の無償コンテンツ取得行為の傾向を算出し、算出結果及び設定情報に基づき、評価値を増減させる補正を行う処理である。
 無償コンテンツを取得するユーザ(すなわち、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザ)は、それぞれ趣味嗜好に基づき無償コンテンツを取得する。そのため、あるユーザに取得されやすい無償コンテンツのカテゴリ、又は発信元のアソシエイツには偏りが生じやすくなる。このことから、情報流通サーバ装置6によって制御される情報交換マーケットにおいて、無償情報交換によりユーザ間で移転した価値たる無償コンテンツの価値の算出には、上述した「偏り」を補正する措置を講じる必要性が生じる可能性がある。そこで、ここで説明する評価補正アルゴリズム1を用いることによって、「偏り」の大きい無償コンテンツ及びアソシエイツを低く評価し、「偏り」の小さい無償コンテンツ及びアソシエイツを高く評価する補正を加えることにしてもよい。こうすることで、無償コンテンツを取得する情報取得者たるユーザにとって、普段、多量に取得している情報に近い情報を取得する場合のユーザ間で移転した価値は低く算出することができ、普段、少量に取得している又はまったく取得していなかった情報に近い情報を取得する場合のユーザ間で移転した価値は高く算出することができるようになる。つまり、別の表現を用いると、普段、取得しない傾向のユーザに取得させることになった情報の価値は、普段から取得されている情報の価値より大きく評価する、というものである。
(1) Evaluation correction algorithm 1
The evaluation correction algorithm 1 is a process of calculating the tendency of a free content acquisition act for a predetermined period by a user having an “enterprise” or “individual” account, and performing correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value based on the calculation result and setting information It is.
The users who acquire the free content (that is, the users having the "business" or "individual" account) each acquire free content based on their tastes and preferences. Therefore, bias is likely to occur in categories of free content that can be easily obtained by a certain user, or in the originator's associates. From this, in the information exchange market controlled by the information distribution server device 6, it is necessary to take measures to correct the above-mentioned "bias" in the calculation of the value of free content which is value transferred between users by free information exchange. Sex may occur. Therefore, by using the evaluation correction algorithm 1 described here, it is possible to evaluate the free contents and associates with large “bias” low and add corrections that highly evaluate the free contents with low “bias” and associates high. . By doing this, for a user who is an information acquirer who acquires free content, it is possible to calculate low the value transferred between users in the case of acquiring information close to the information that is usually acquired in large quantities, The value transferred between users in the case of acquiring information similar to information acquired in a small amount or not acquired at all can be calculated highly. In other words, if another expression is used, the value of the information which is caused to be acquired by the user who usually does not acquire is evaluated more than the value of the information acquired from ordinary.
 評価補正アルゴリズム1では、情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60は、例えば無償コンテンツの属するカテゴリ毎の取得率の差を反映させて評価に対する補正倍率を変更(乗算)することができる。また、制御部60は、コンテンツの属するアソシエイツ毎の取得率の差を反映させて評価に対する補正倍率を変更(乗算)してもよい。 In the evaluation correction algorithm 1, the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 can change (multiply) the correction magnification for the evaluation, for example, by reflecting the difference in the acquisition rate for each category to which the free content belongs. Further, the control unit 60 may change (multiply) the correction magnification for the evaluation by reflecting the difference in the acquisition rate for each association to which the content belongs.
 制御部60は、例えば、以下に示す(1-1)~(1-6)の処理によって、ユーザの評価に対する補正倍率を算出することができる。 The control unit 60 can calculate the correction magnification with respect to the user's evaluation, for example, by the processes (1-1) to (1-6) shown below.
(1-1)カテゴリ毎の閲覧割合
 制御部60は、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザが無償コンテンツを取得する都度、カテゴリ毎の閲覧割合を以下の演算式により算出する。
 カテゴリ毎の閲覧割合=カテゴリ毎の閲覧量/全カテゴリの総閲覧量
 例えば、あるユーザのカテゴリA~Gに属するコンテンツの閲覧回数がそれぞれ、A50回,B100回,C0回,D1500回,E500回,F1500回,G5000回である場合、全コンテンツの閲覧回数の合計は8650回であるため、カテゴリ毎の閲覧割合は、それぞれA0.6%,B1.2%,C0.0%,D17.3%,E5.8%,F17.3%,G57.8%と算出される。
(1-2)カテゴリ毎の閲覧割合に応じた加算値
 制御部60は、(1-1)で算出した閲覧割合に応じた加算値を算出する。具体的には、各カテゴリに属するコンテンツの閲覧回数に加算される加算値yは、以下の演算式により算出される。
 y=a+(1-各カテゴリの閲覧割合)×b
 ここで、aは全て同一のカテゴリの無償コンテンツを取得していた場合の加算値、bは一度も取得したことがないカテゴリの無償コンテンツを取得した場合の加算値を表している。ここで、a=0、b=1と設定した場合、上記カテゴリA~Gに対する加算値は、それぞれA0.99,B0.99,C1.00,D0.83,E0.94,F0.83,G0.42となる。この場合、ユーザがカテゴリCの無償コンテンツを取得した場合の加算値は、取得頻度が高いカテゴリGよりも高い値となる。
(1-3)アソシエイツ毎の閲覧割合
 制御部60は、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザが無償コンテンツを取得する都度、アソシエイツ毎の閲覧割合を以下の演算式により算出する。
 アソシエイツ毎の閲覧割合=アソシエイツ毎の閲覧量/全アソシエイツの総閲覧量
 例えば、あるユーザによるアソシエイツA~Gの無料コンテンツの閲覧回数がそれぞれ、A50回,B100回,C0回,D1500回,E500回,F1500回,G5000回である場合、閲覧回数の合計は8650回であるため、アソシエイツ毎の閲覧割合は、それぞれA0.6%,B1.2%,C0.0%,D17.3%,E5.8%,F17.3%,G57.8%と算出される。
(1-4)アソシエイツ毎の閲覧割合に応じた加算値
 制御部60は、(1-3)で算出した閲覧割合に応じた加算値を算出する。具体的には、アソシエイツ毎の閲覧回数に加算される加算値y’は、以下の演算式により算出される。
 y’=a’+(1-各アソシエイツの閲覧割合)×b’
 ここで、a’は全て同一のアソシエイツが発信する無償コンテンツを取得していた場合の加算値、b’は一度も取得したことがないアソシエイツが発信する無償コンテンツを取得した場合の加算値を表している。ここで、a’=0、b’=1と設定した場合、上記アソシエイツA~Gに対する加算値は、それぞれA0.99,B0.99,C1.00,D0.83,E0.94,F0.83,G0.42となる。この場合、ユーザがアソシエイツCの無償コンテンツを取得した場合の加算値は、取得頻度が高いアソシエイツGよりも高い値となる。
(1-5)閲覧回数、閲覧時間、閲覧者評価の補正
 制御部60は、閲覧回数、閲覧時間、閲覧者評価に乗じる補正倍率を、以下の演算式により算出する。
 補正倍率=1+y+y’
 ここで、yは上記(1-2)で算出されるカテゴリ毎の閲覧割合に応じた加算値であり、y’は上記(1-4)で算出されるアソシエイツ毎の閲覧割合に応じた加算値である。
(1-1) Percent Browsing Per Category The control unit 60 calculates the per cent browsing ratio per category according to the following arithmetic expression each time the user having the “business person” or “individual” account acquires free content.
Reading rate for each category = reading amount for each category / total reading amount for all categories For example, the number of browsing times of content belonging to a category A to G of a user is A50 times, B100 times, B0 times, C0 times, D1500 times, E500 times , F1500 times and G5000 times, the total number of browsing times for all contents is 8650 times, so the browsing rates for each category are A 0.6%, B 1.2%, C 0.0%, D 17.3. %, E5.8%, F17.3%, G57.8%.
(1-2) Addition Value According to Reading Ratio for Each Category The control unit 60 calculates the addition value according to the reading ratio calculated in (1-1). Specifically, the addition value y to be added to the number of browsing times of the content belonging to each category is calculated by the following arithmetic expression.
y = a + (1-browsing rate of each category) x b
Here, a represents an added value when all free content of the same category is obtained, and b represents an added value when obtained free content of a category that has never been obtained. Here, when a = 0 and b = 1, the addition values for the above categories A to G are A0.99, B0.99, C1.00, D0.83, E0.94, F0.83, respectively. It becomes G0.42. In this case, the addition value when the user acquires the free content of category C is a value higher than that of category G, which has a high acquisition frequency.
(1-3) Browsing Ratio for Each Associate The control unit 60 calculates the browsing ratio for each Associate according to the following arithmetic expression each time a user having an account of “business person” or “individual” acquires free content.
Reading rate for each associate = reading amount for each associate / total reading amount for all associates For example, the number of times for viewing a free content of associates A to G by a user is A50 times, B100 times, B0 times, C0 times, D1500 times, E500 times , F1500 times and G5000 times, the total number of browsing times is 8650 times, so the browsing rates for each associate are A 0.6%, B 1.2%, C 0.0%, D 17.3%, E5 respectively .8%, F 17.3%, G 57.8%.
(1-4) Addition Value According to Browsing Ratio for Each Associate The control unit 60 calculates an addition value according to the browsing ratio calculated in (1-3). Specifically, the addition value y ′ to be added to the number of browsing times for each associate is calculated by the following equation.
y '= a' + (1-browsing rate of each associate) x b '
Here, a 'represents the added value when all the free content transmitted by the same Associates has been acquired, and b' represents the added value when the free content transmitted by the Associates that has never been acquired has been acquired. ing. Here, when setting a ′ = 0 and b ′ = 1, the addition values to the above associates A to G are A 0.99, B 0.99, C 1.00, D 0.83, E 0.94, F 0. 83, G 0.42. In this case, the addition value when the user acquires the free content of Associates C is a higher value than Associates G, which has a high acquisition frequency.
(1-5) Correction of the number of browsing times, browsing time, viewer evaluation The control unit 60 calculates the number of browsing times, browsing time, correction magnification by which the viewer evaluation is multiplied by the following arithmetic expression.
Correction magnification = 1 + y + y '
Here, y is an added value according to the browsing ratio for each category calculated in (1-2) above, and y 'is an addition according to the browsing ratio for each associate calculated in (1-4) above It is a value.
 (2)評価補正アルゴリズム2
 評価補正アルゴリズム2は、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザによる無償コンテンツの取得率、及び設定情報に基づき、評価値を増減させる補正を行う処理である。
 無償コンテンツを閲覧又は取得等するユーザ(すなわち、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザ)の端末操作状態から、情報流通サーバ装置6は、ユーザが、無償コンテンツを最初から最後まで全てに(どの程度)目を通したかどうか判断する処理を加えるようにしてもよい。例えば、ユーザの端末装置7の表示部73に表示される記事等の無償コンテンツは、大抵の場合において、画面をスクロールしなければ全てを閲覧することはできず、また、ページが複数ある場合には、画面を更新しなければ全てを閲覧できないということがある。このとき、情報流通サーバ装置6は、上記の行程をユーザがどのように行なったかを判断し、例えば、全ての行程を行なった場合には100点、50%以上の行程を行なった場合には50点、30%以上の行程を行なった場合には30点、行った行程が30%未満の時は0点など、点数を付け、点数に基づく評価の補正を行ってもよい。
 さらに加えて、このとき、記事等の無償コンテンツの情報量の大小が、上記点数に与える影響は大きいわけであるが、無償コンテンツの情報量の大小について、評価に係数を乗じる措置を講じてもよい。こうすることで、より情報量が大きく、かつユーザに最後まで閲覧されるコンテンツは、情報流通サーバ装置6により、より高く評価されるようになり、アソシエイツによって発信される無償コンテンツの質及び量が向上及び無償コンテンツを閲覧するユーザの情報取得意欲が高まり、情報交換マーケットが活性化する効果が発揮されるようになる。
(2) Evaluation correction algorithm 2
The evaluation correction algorithm 2 is processing for performing correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value based on the acquisition rate of free content by the user having the “business person” or “individual” account, and the setting information.
From the terminal operation state of the user who browses or acquires the free content (ie, the user having the “business person” or “individual” account), the information distribution server device 6 allows the user to handle all free content from the beginning to the end A process may be added to determine (to what extent) the eye has passed. For example, free content such as articles displayed on the display unit 73 of the user's terminal device 7 can not all be browsed unless the screen is scrolled in most cases, and there are a plurality of pages. May not be able to view everything without updating the screen. At this time, the information distribution server device 6 determines how the user performed the above-mentioned process, for example, when performing all the processes, 100 points, 50% or more of the processes are performed. The evaluation based on the points may be corrected by adding points, such as 30 points when 50 points or 30% or more of the stroke is performed, or 0 points when the performed stroke is less than 30%.
Furthermore, at this time, although the amount of information of the free content such as articles has a large influence on the above score, the measure of multiplying the amount of information of free content may be multiplied by a factor to evaluate Good. By doing this, the information distribution is larger than the amount of information, and the content browsed to the user is highly evaluated by the information distribution server device 6, and the quality and the amount of free content transmitted by Associates are The user's willingness to view and improve the free content will be increased, and the information exchange market will be activated.
 評価補正アルゴリズム2では、情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60は、例えば以下の演算式により、ステップS203で算出される時間評価値に対して乗算する補正倍率を算出する。
 補正倍率=(取得率-下限取得率)/(100-下限取得率)
 設定情報として、無償コンテンツ毎に取得率が100%の状態、及び下限取得率が予め定義されているものとする。ユーザによる無償コンテンツの取得率は、100%の取得率に対する割合(%)として算出される。
In the evaluation correction algorithm 2, the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 calculates a correction magnification by which the time evaluation value calculated in step S203 is multiplied, for example, by the following arithmetic expression.
Correction magnification = (acquisition rate-lower acquisition rate) / (100-lower acquisition rate)
As setting information, it is assumed that an acquisition rate of 100% and a lower limit acquisition rate are defined in advance for each free content. The acquisition rate of free content by the user is calculated as a ratio (%) to the 100% acquisition rate.
 例えば、評価対象のコンテンツが2分間の視聴時間を有する動画である場合、取得率100%の状態はユーザが当該動画を2分間の視聴することと定義される。ユーザが1分間だけ上記動画を視聴した場合、取得率は50%として算出される。下限取得率は適宜設定される。例えば、下限取得率を30%とし、ユーザによる上記動画の視聴時間を1分間とした場合、補正倍率は、(50-30)/(100-30)=0.29と算出される。この例において、補正倍率は、取得率が100%で最大(=1)となり、取得率が30%以下(視聴時間が36秒以下)で最小(=0)となる。上記の例では、動画を例に取って補正倍率の具体的な算出方法を説明したが、動画以外の文書、音楽、画像といったコンテンツについても、取得率が100%の状態と、下限取得率とを定義しておくことにより、同様の算出手法にて、補正倍率を算出することができる。 For example, when the content to be evaluated is a moving image having a viewing time of 2 minutes, a state where the acquisition rate is 100% is defined as the user viewing the moving image for 2 minutes. If the user views the video for one minute, the acquisition rate is calculated as 50%. The lower limit acquisition rate is appropriately set. For example, when the lower limit acquisition rate is 30% and the viewing time of the moving image by the user is one minute, the correction magnification is calculated as (50-30) / (100-30) = 0.29. In this example, the correction magnification is maximum (= 1) when the acquisition rate is 100%, and is minimum (= 0) when the acquisition rate is 30% or less (viewing time is 36 seconds or less). In the above example, the moving image was taken as an example to explain the specific calculation method of the correction magnification, but the content such as the document other than the moving image, music, and images also has 100% acquisition rate, lower acquisition rate and The correction magnification can be calculated by the same calculation method by defining.
 なお、補正倍率を算出する演算式は、上記の演算式に限定されず、例えば、以下で示すような演算式を用いてもよい。
 補正倍率=a×(x-p)×(x-p)
 ここで、xは取得率、pは下限取得率、aは1/((1-p)×(1-p))で算出される変化率を表している。この演算式では、取得率が100%に近づくほど補正倍率が1に近づく。
In addition, the arithmetic expression which calculates correction | amendment magnification is not limited to said arithmetic expression, For example, you may use arithmetic expressions which are shown below.
Correction magnification = a x (x-p) x (x-p)
Here, x represents an acquisition rate, p represents a lower limit acquisition rate, and a represents a change rate calculated by 1 / ((1-p) × (1-p)). In this arithmetic expression, the correction magnification approaches 1 as the acquisition rate approaches 100%.
 以上の算出手法を採用することによって、例えば、1秒間の視聴が60回あったコンテンツと、60秒間の視聴が1回あったコンテンツとでは、後者の方が評価が高くなるように差別化して評価することができ、より適切な評価が可能となる。なお、上述の演算式では、共に補正倍率の上限値を1としているが、補正倍率の上限値は1に限定されるものではなく、適宜設定してもよい。 By adopting the above calculation method, for example, the latter is differentiated so that the evaluation is higher between the content that had 60 viewings per second and the content that had one viewing for 60 seconds. It is possible to make an evaluation and a more appropriate evaluation is possible. Although the upper limit value of the correction magnification is 1 in both of the above-described arithmetic expressions, the upper limit value of the correction magnification is not limited to 1 and may be set as appropriate.
 (3)評価補正アルゴリズム3
 評価補正アルゴリズム3は、「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを有するユーザによって設定された設定情報に基づき、評価値を増減させる補正を行う処理である。
システム管理者による基本となる設定情報による評価バランス設定に上乗せして、ユーザの任意の設定による、評価の度合いの重み付け(評価バランス)補正を行うようにしてもよい。「アソシエイツ」のアカウントに対するシステム内通貨Lの発行量のバランスを決定づける評価値の基礎にある評価の基本的なバランス設定について、これをユーザの意思を反映させた態様にするための処理が評価補正アルゴリズム3である。例えば「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザは、自身の無償コンテンツ取得行為に対する評価バランスを任意に補正することができるようにしてもよく、さらに、情報流通サーバ装置6は、補正された評価バランスを、情報流通サーバ装置6が算出する評価値に乗じる措置を実行することができるようにしてもよい。このようにすることで、情報流通サーバ装置6は、ユーザの意思が反映(任意に評価バランスを補正)された評価値を導出することができるようになるとともに、従来は、システム管理者の任意の専用行為であった評価の重み付け(バランス取り)を、ユーザの行為にまで拡張することができるようになり、システム管理者の意思の介在する範囲が限定されるとともに、ユーザ個々の意思を介在させることができるという効果が期待できるようになるというものである。なお、ここでいう評価バランスの補正とは、無償コンテンツの属する各カテゴリのその他のカテゴリとの相対的な重み調整である。
(3) Evaluation correction algorithm 3
The evaluation correction algorithm 3 is processing for performing correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value based on setting information set by a user having an account of “business operator” or “individual”.
In addition to the evaluation balance setting based on the basic setting information by the system administrator, weighting (evaluation balance) correction of the degree of evaluation may be performed by the user's arbitrary setting. About the basic balance setting of the evaluation based on the evaluation value that determines the balance of the issue amount of the currency L in the system to the "Associates" account, the processing to make this reflect the user's intention is the evaluation correction Algorithm 3. For example, a user having an account of “business person” or “individual” may be able to arbitrarily correct the evaluation balance for his free content acquisition behavior, and the information distribution server device 6 is further corrected It may be possible to execute a measure that multiplies the evaluation value calculated by the information distribution server device 6 by the evaluation balance. In this way, the information distribution server device 6 can derive an evaluation value that reflects the user's intention (arbitrarily corrects the evaluation balance), and conventionally, the information distribution server device 6 conventionally receives an option from the system administrator. It becomes possible to extend the weighting (balancing) of the evaluation that was a dedicated action of the user to the action of the user, the range of intervention of the system administrator's intention is limited, and the intention of the user is intervened Can be expected to be effective. Here, the correction of the evaluation balance is a relative weight adjustment with other categories of each category to which the free content belongs.
 例えば、ユーザ自身が任意に行う評価補正は、直感的な操作が可能となるように、音楽の音を調整するイコライザーのようなユーザインタフェースを用いて受付ける構成であってもよい。なお、恣意的な操作を受け付けないようにするよう、例えば、ユーザがすべての値を最大値に補正したとしても、バランスの上では、情報流通サーバ装置6には、これを、中央値算出工程を含めることで補正を行っていないと判断させ、あくまでも、ユーザが「評価のバランスをどのように考えているか」を評価に反映させるものとしてもよい。つまり、ここで言うユーザが行う評価補正とは、絶対的なものではなく、相対的なバランスをどのように補正するかということである。例えば、情報交換マーケットにおいて、情報流通サーバ装置6は、「アソシエイツ」以外のアカウントを持つユーザによる投票(上述した任意の評価補正)を常時受け付け、あらかじめシステム管理者によって定められた所定の期間ごとに、評価の基本的なバランス設定について、投票の結果(平均値)を、情報流通サーバ装置6の設定情報に反映させる処理を行うようにしてもよい。なお、ユーザの投票は、設定情報の更新処理が行われた後であってもリセットされないようにし、ユーザは、いつでも投票において設定した評価の基本的なバランスについて、更新投票できるものとしてもよい。そして、情報流通サーバ装置6は、所定の期間ごとに、投票に基づき設定情報を更新するものとしてもよい。急激な評価の基本的なバランスの変更を抑止するため、変更幅については、例えば投票された変更量の半分の変更量にしても良い。また、極端な値になることを防ぐため、あらかじめシステム管理者によって、上端値および下端値を設定しておいても良い。さらに、ユーザごとの投票に重み付けしてもよく、この場合には、ユーザの情報交換マーケット利用状況に基づき、ユーザごとの重み付けを行い、投票に対して、重みに応じた係数を乗じてもよい。 For example, the evaluation correction arbitrarily performed by the user may be received using a user interface such as an equalizer that adjusts the sound of music so that an intuitive operation can be performed. In addition, even if the user corrects all values to the maximum value so as not to accept arbitrary operation, for example, in balance, the information distribution server device 6 performs this in the median calculation process. It may be determined that the correction is not performed by including the, and the evaluation may reflect "how the user thinks of the balance of the evaluation" to the last. That is, the evaluation correction performed by the user mentioned here is not an absolute one but how to correct the relative balance. For example, in the information exchange market, the information distribution server device 6 always receives votes by the users having accounts other than "Associates" (any evaluation correction described above), every predetermined period determined in advance by the system administrator. For the basic balance setting of evaluation, processing of reflecting the result (average value) of the votes on the setting information of the information distribution server device 6 may be performed. Note that the user's vote may not be reset even after the setting information update processing is performed, and the user may be able to always update the basic balance of the evaluation set in the vote. Then, the information distribution server device 6 may update the setting information based on the vote every predetermined period. The change width may be set to, for example, a half of the change amount voted, in order to prevent a change in the basic balance of rapid evaluation. Further, in order to prevent the value from becoming an extreme value, the upper end value and the lower end value may be set in advance by the system administrator. Furthermore, weighting may be performed on votes for each user. In this case, weighting may be performed for each user based on the user's information exchange market usage condition, and voting may be multiplied by a coefficient according to the weight. .
 例えば、上記のほかに、情報流通サーバ装置6は、ユーザが入力する検索単語の文字列を記憶し、ユーザの無償コンテンツへの興味の度合いを導出し、導出した興味の度合いに基づき、それら興味の関連している無償コンテンツの属するカテゴリ(例えば、国内政治カテゴリや国内経済カテゴリや国際テクノロジーカテゴリや国内音楽カテゴリなど)に対する評価の度合いを変動させてもよい。なお、情報流通サーバ装置6が実行する興味の度合いに基づく評価の度合いの変動については、主体群ごとに実行してもよい。 For example, in addition to the above, the information distribution server device 6 stores the character string of the search word input by the user, derives the degree of interest in the free content of the user, and based on the derived degree of interest The degree of evaluation of categories to which the related free content belongs (eg, domestic political category, domestic economic category, international technology category, domestic music category, etc.) may be changed. The change in the degree of evaluation based on the degree of interest performed by the information distribution server device 6 may be performed for each subject group.
 さらに上記に追加して、情報流通サーバ装置6は、ユーザが設定した自らの評価バランスについて、ユーザの属する主体群ごとに、ユーザの評価バランスの平均値(主体群評価バランス)を算出し、情報流通サーバ装置6は、算出された主体群評価バランスに基づき、当該主体群に属するアソシエイツ及び無償コンテンツに対して算出された評価値に、さらに、追加して補正する処理を加えるようにしてもよい。また、情報流通サーバ装置6は、主体群評価バランス及び興味の度合いについて、リアルタイムにアソシエイツに対して開示してもよい。こうすることで、情報流通サーバ装置6は、ユーザの評価に基づく、アソシエイツに対するシステム内通貨Lの発行数量について、より実際の評価に近いバランスで配分発行できるようになり、また、主体群ごとの評価傾向の違い(特性、例えば国民性等)を反映させた評価が可能になり、さらに、ユーザの興味の度合い(検索文字列によるもの)の移り変わりを反映させた無償コンテンツの提供が促されるようになり、情報交換マーケットの活性化を促すとともに、ユーザの利便性を高め、システム管理者等の意思の介入及び労力を減少させる効果を発揮させることができるようになる。 Furthermore, in addition to the above, the information distribution server device 6 calculates the average value of the user's evaluation balance (subject group evaluation balance) for each subject group to which the user belongs, with respect to the user's own evaluation balance, The distribution server device 6 may add processing to add and correct the evaluation value calculated for the associates and the free content belonging to the subject group based on the calculated subject group evaluation balance. . Further, the information distribution server device 6 may disclose to the associates in real time about the subject group evaluation balance and the degree of interest. By doing this, the information distribution server device 6 can distribute and issue the balance of the in-system currency L to the associates based on the user's evaluation in a balance closer to the actual evaluation, and It is possible to make it possible to make evaluations that reflect differences in evaluation tendency (characteristics, for example, national character etc.), and to encourage the provision of free content that reflects changes in the user's degree of interest (by search strings) As a result, the information exchange market can be activated, the convenience of the user can be enhanced, and the intervention and effort of the system administrator can be reduced.
 評価補正アルゴリズム3では、情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60は、例えば「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを有するユーザから、無償コンテンツのカテゴリ毎に評価に対する補正倍率の変更を受付け、変更後の補正倍率に基づき、無償コンテンツに対する評価値を増減させる。また、変更後の補正倍率を主体群毎に集計し、集計結果に基づき、主体群毎に各カテゴリに対する補正倍率を変更してもよい。この場合、変更後の補正倍率に基づき、主体群毎に各カテゴリに属する無償コンテンツの評価値を増減させる補正が行われる。 In the evaluation correction algorithm 3, the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 receives, for example, a change in correction magnification for evaluation for each category of free content from a user having an account of “business operator” or “individual”. The evaluation value for the free content is increased or decreased based on the correction magnification of. Also, the correction magnification after change may be totaled for each subject group, and the correction magnification for each category may be changed for each subject group based on the tabulation result. In this case, based on the post-change correction magnification, correction is performed to increase or decrease the evaluation value of the free content belonging to each category for each subject group.
 なお、補正倍率の変更を受付ける際、各カテゴリに対する補正倍率の総和が変更前後で増減しないという条件を課してもよい。また、変更を受付ける補正倍率に対して予め上限値及び/又は下限値が設定されていてもよい。 When accepting a change in the correction magnification, a condition may be imposed that the sum of the correction magnifications for each category does not increase or decrease before and after the change. Further, the upper limit value and / or the lower limit value may be set in advance with respect to the correction magnification that accepts the change.
 評価補正アルゴリズム3では、ユーザ自身がカテゴリ毎に補正倍率を設定するので、カテゴリの数が増えた場合、操作量が多くなるという弊害が生まれる。そのため、カテゴリを大分類と小分類とに分け、各カテゴリに対する補正倍率の変更を大分類毎及び/又は小分類毎に一括して受付けることにより、ユーザの操作量を減らすようにしてもよい。 In the evaluation correction algorithm 3, since the user sets the correction magnification for each category, when the number of categories increases, an adverse effect is caused that the operation amount increases. Therefore, the amount of operation of the user may be reduced by dividing the categories into the large classification and the small classification, and collectively accepting the change of the correction magnification for each category for each large classification and / or each small classification.
 また、無償コンテンツの評価値を算出する際、評価補正アルゴリズム1~3により補正された閲覧回数、閲覧時間、閲覧者評価を集計して用いてもよい。
(i)閲覧回数評価値では、所定の期間に何人のユーザが無償コンテンツを閲覧したかを参照し、閲覧回数評価値を算出する。このとき、評価補正アルゴリズム1~3により補正された閲覧回数を集計する。
 閲覧回数評価値=閲覧回数×a+閲覧回数×a’×(閲覧回数/総閲覧回数)+a”
 ここで、設定値a:閲覧人数倍率
        a’:総閲覧回数との比率で評価する場合の閲覧人数倍数
        a”:閲覧人数上位に対する評価値
(ii)閲覧時間評価値では、所定の期間にユーザが無償コンテンツを何秒間閲覧したかを参照し、閲覧時間評価値を算出する。このとき、上記の評価補正アルゴリズム1~3により補正された閲覧時間を集計する。
 閲覧時間評価値=閲覧時間×b+閲覧時間×b’×(閲覧時間/総閲覧時間)+b”
 ここで、設定値b:閲覧時間倍率
        b’:総閲覧時間との比率で評価する場合の閲覧時間倍率
        b”:閲覧時間上位に対する評価値
(iii)閲覧者評価値では、所定の期間に無償コンテンツが得た評価数(例えば、いいね総数-わるいね総数)や、5段階評価の評価総数を参照し、閲覧者評価値を算出する。このとき、上記の評価補正アルゴリズム1~3により補正された閲覧者評価を集計する。
 閲覧者評価値=閲覧者評価×c+閲覧者評価×c’×(閲覧者評価/総閲覧者評価)+c”
 ここで、設定値c:閲覧者評価倍率
        c’:総量との比率で評価する場合の閲覧者評価倍率
        c”:閲覧者評価上位に対する評価値
(iv)上記の(i)~(iii)以外で無償コンテンツに対し評価が認められると思われる場合(例えば所定の期間を超えるロングセラーや著名な評価など)、適切な方法で評価値を算出する。
(v)上記(i)から(iv)において算出された無償コンテンツに対する評価値の和を算出し、「各無償コンテンツの評価値」を得る。
In addition, when calculating the evaluation value of the free content, the number of browsing times, browsing time, and browser evaluation corrected by the evaluation correction algorithms 1 to 3 may be aggregated and used.
(I) In the browsing frequency evaluation value, the browsing frequency evaluation value is calculated with reference to how many users browsed the free content in a predetermined period. At this time, the number of browsing times corrected by the evaluation correction algorithms 1 to 3 is counted.
Number of browsing evaluation value = number of browsing x a + number of browsing x a 'x (number of browsing / total number of browsing) + a "
Here, the setting value a: the number of viewing people's magnification a ': the number of viewing people multiple in the case of evaluation by the ratio to the total number of viewings a ": the evaluation value for the highest number of viewing people (ii) The browsing time evaluation value is calculated by referring to how many seconds the free content has been browsed, and at this time, the browsing times corrected by the evaluation correction algorithms 1 to 3 are totaled.
Reading time evaluation value = reading time x b + reading time x b 'x (reading time / total reading time) + b "
Here, the setting value b: browsing time magnification b ': browsing time magnification when evaluating with the ratio to the total browsing time b ": evaluation value for the browsing time upper rank (iii) Viewer evaluation value is free for a predetermined period The viewer evaluation value is calculated with reference to the number of evaluations obtained by the content (for example, total number of likes-total number of different likes) and the total number of evaluations of the five-level evaluation. Add up the rated visitor ratings.
Viewer rating value = viewer rating x c + viewer rating x c 'x (viewer rating / total viewer rating) + c "
Here, the setting value c: viewer evaluation magnification c ′: viewer evaluation magnification when evaluating with the ratio to the total amount c ′ ′: evaluation value for the viewer evaluation top (iv) other than the above (i) to (iii) If the evaluation is deemed to be permitted for the free content at (for example, a long seller exceeding a predetermined period, a prominent evaluation, etc.), the evaluation value is calculated by an appropriate method.
(V) Calculate the sum of the evaluation values for the free content calculated in (i) to (iv) above, and obtain the "evaluation value of each free content".
 (4)評価補正アルゴリズム4
 評価補正アルゴリズム4は、情報交換マーケットにアソシエイツによって発信される無償コンテンツの質を高めるための処理である。
 アソシエイツは、同一主体群におけるその他のアソシエイツによって発信される無償コンテンツに対する任意の評価を行うことができるようにしてもよい。例えば、アソシエイツとして無償コンテンツを閲覧する場合に、当該アソシエイツは、閲覧した無償コンテンツの質に対する評価を、例えば☆3つ等のような任意の評価方法で評価することができるようにする。また、所定の期間ごとに、評価者として無償コンテンツを評価した値の平均値が評価の中心値になるように補正をかけてもよい。このとき、評価の上限または下限値を超える値に補正される被評価済み無償コンテンツがある場合には、当該被評価済み無償コンテンツに対する補正後の評価は、上限または下限値としての評価としてもよい。そして、同一主体群における評価アソシエイツおよび被評価アソシエイツ、つまり同一主体群におけるアソシエイツごとの、システム内通貨Lが発行される数量を決定づける基礎になる評価値に重みづけを行う補正を加える。こうすることで例えば次のことを生じさせることができるようになる。
(4) Evaluation correction algorithm 4
The evaluation correction algorithm 4 is a process for improving the quality of free contents transmitted by associates in the information exchange market.
Associates may also be able to make arbitrary assessments of free content that is originated by other associates in the same group of entities. For example, when browsing free content as an associate, the relevant associate is made to be able to evaluate the evaluation on the quality of the browsed free content by an arbitrary evaluation method such as, for example, 33. Moreover, you may correct | amend so that the average value of the value which evaluated the free content as an evaluator may become the central value of evaluation for every predetermined | prescribed period. At this time, if there is evaluated free content that is corrected to a value exceeding the upper limit or lower limit value of evaluation, the evaluation after correction for the evaluated free content may be evaluated as the upper limit or lower limit value. . Then, a correction is made to weight evaluation evaluations and evaluation Associates in the same entity group, that is, evaluation values serving as the basis for determining the quantity for which the system currency L is issued, in each association. By doing this, for example, it becomes possible to cause the following.
(i)アソシエイツごとに、無償コンテンツを評価する量の大小を生じさせることができるようになり、評価する量の大小に基づくアソシエイツの順位によって、アソシエイツの評価値を上下させる補正を行うことができるようになる。(能動的評価を評価するもの)
(ii)無償コンテンツごとに、その他のアソシエイツからの評価の大小を生じさせることができるようになり、無償コンテンツを評価される度合いによって、コンテンツの評価値を上下させる補正を行うことができるようになる。(受動的評価を評価するもの)
(iii)無償コンテンツごとに、その他のアソシエイツからの評価の大小を生じさせることができるようになり、アソシエイツごとの、発信する無償コンテンツを評価される度合いの平均値に基づくアソシエイツの順位によって、アソシエイツの評価値を上下させる補正を行うことができるようになる。(受動的評価を評価するもの)
(iv)アソシエイツは、他者の発信する無償コンテンツを多く評価し、自身が発信する無償コンテンツを高く評価されるほどに評価値が増加する補正が加わり、逆に、極端な例として、他者の発信する無償コンテンツを評価することなく、自身が発信する無償コンテンツをその他のアソシエイツから低く評価されるほどに評価値が減少する補正が加わるようになる。
(v)同一主体群のアソシエイツ全体に発行されるシステム内通貨Lの総量は、第一実施形態で示した情報流通サーバ装置6の処理よって決定づけられていることから、アソシエイツ間の相互評価行為は、アソシエイツごとのシステム内通貨Lの発行バランスを変動させるものとなり、無償コンテンツの質に対する自浄効果が発揮されるようになる。
(vi)アソシエイツは、そもそもが自らの専門性や創造性を発揮して、情報交換マーケットにおいてシステム内通貨Lを獲得して、情報交換マーケットはもとより、実社会における収入を得ることのできる主体であることから、情報交換マーケットにおける無償コンテンツの質の向上が図られることによるユーザの利用増加は、自らの収入を増加させる基礎になるため、自浄効果がさらに発揮されるようになる。
(vii)フェイクニュースが発信されにくくなる効果が期待できる。
(viii)模倣コンテンツ(盗用等の著作権侵害コンテンツ)が発信されにくくなる効果が期待できる。
(I) It becomes possible to generate the amount of evaluation of the free content for each associate, and it is possible to perform correction to raise or lower the evaluation value of the associate according to the order of the association based on the amount of evaluation. It will be. (What evaluates active evaluation)
(Ii) For each free content, it is possible to make the evaluation from other associates larger or smaller, and it is possible to perform correction to raise or lower the evaluation value of the content depending on the degree to which the free content is evaluated. Become. (Thing to evaluate passive evaluation)
(Iii) For each free content, it is possible to make the evaluation from other associates larger or smaller, and for each Associate, Associates ranks by the average of the degree to which the free content to be transmitted is evaluated. It is possible to perform correction that raises and lowers the evaluation value of. (Thing to evaluate passive evaluation)
(Iv) Associates evaluate many free content sent by others, and the higher the free content sent by oneself gets higher, the correction that the evaluation value increases is added, conversely, as an extreme example, others Instead of evaluating the free content sent by the, the correction value to which the evaluation value decreases will be added to the extent that the free content sent by the user is rated low by other associates.
(V) Since the total amount of intra-system currency L issued to the entire association of the same entity group is determined by the processing of the information distribution server device 6 shown in the first embodiment, the mutual evaluation action among the associates is As a result, the issue balance of the intra-system currency L for each associate is changed, and the self-cleaning effect on the quality of the free content is exhibited.
(Vi) Associates are primarily able to gain in-world currency as well as the information exchange market by acquiring the in-system currency L in the information exchange market by exhibiting their own expertise and creativity From the above, the increase in user usage by improving the quality of free content in the information exchange market is the basis for increasing their own income, so that the self-cleaning effect will be further exhibited.
(Vii) It can be expected that the fake news will not be easily transmitted.
(Viii) It can be expected that the imitation content (copyright infringing content such as plagiarized content) is less likely to be transmitted.
 評価補正アルゴリズム4では、情報流通サーバ装置6の制御部60 は、例えば「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザによる無償コンテンツの評価行動と、設定情報とに基づき、評価値を増減させる補正を行う。評価補正アルゴリズム4による補正は、無償コンテンツの品質向上、及び情報交換マーケットの質の向上を図るために、フェイクニュース、他のコンテンツの盗用、評価に値しないアソシエイツのあぶり出し、価値あるアソシエイツへの後援を目的としている。評価アルゴリズム4は、以下の(要素1)~(要素3)から構成される。 In the evaluation correction algorithm 4, the control unit 60 of the information distribution server device 6 performs correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value, for example, based on the evaluation behavior of the free content by the user having the "Associates" account and the setting information. The correction by the evaluation correction algorithm 4 is for fake news, stealing of other contents, appearance of unappreciable Associates, and support to valuable Associates in order to improve the quality of free contents and the information exchange market. It is an object. The evaluation algorithm 4 is composed of the following (element 1) to (element 3).
 (要素1)アソシエイツが無償コンテンツに対して行った評価、及び設定情報を基にし、該無償コンテンツの評価値を増減させる補正
 アソシエイツは、一般ユーザと異なり、情報交換マーケットから収益を得ている存在である。情報交換マーケットが活性化するためにも、自身はもとより、その他のアソシエイツにより発信される無償コンテンツの品質向上は、自身の収入アップにもつながる。そこで、アソシエイツは、無償コンテンツを監視(利用)し、無償コンテンツに対して「量」ではなく、「率」の補正を行う評価を実行する。
(Element 1) Corrections to increase or decrease the evaluation value of gratis content based on the evaluations and settings information made on the gratis content by Associates Associates, unlike general users, are earning revenue from the information exchange market It is. In order to revitalize the information exchange market, the quality improvement of the free content released by other associates as well as oneself will lead to an increase in one's income. Therefore, Associates monitors (uses) the free content and executes an evaluation to correct the "rate" instead of the "amount" for the free content.
 (要素2)他のアソシエイツから受けた総評価の行程により、アソシエイツの評価を増減させる補正
 無償コンテンツごとにアソシエイツ評価は行われるものであるが、これら、アソシエイツ評価された無償コンテンツのアソシエイツ総評価量の大小によって、被評価者たるアソシエイツの評価を行う。
(Element 2) Correction to increase or decrease the evaluation of associates according to the process of total evaluation received from other associates Associates evaluation is carried out for each free content, but the total evaluation amount of these Associates evaluated free contents Associates Associates, who are the assessors, are evaluated based on
 (要素3)及びアソシエイツ自身が行った、評価行動の多少により、該アソシエイツの評価値を増減させる補正を行う。
 (要素3)は、能動的評価である。すなわち、その他のアソシエイツに対する能動的評価行動を当該アソシエイツがどれだけ行ったかを評価するものである。能動的評価(無償コンテンツに対するチェック及び評価付け)を行う量の多いアソシエイツは、評価値が大きくなる補正を加えられる。つまり、無償コンテンツを発信し、評価され、さらに他人の無償コンテンツを評価するアソシエイツは、収入が上がることになる。
Depending on (element 3) and the degree of evaluation behavior performed by the Associates themselves, correction is performed to increase or decrease the evaluation value of the Associates.
(Element 3) is an active evaluation. In other words, it evaluates how much the Associates have actively evaluated other Associates. Associates with a large amount of active evaluations (checking and evaluation of free content) can be corrected to increase the evaluation value. In other words, Associates who send out free content, are evaluated, and evaluate other people's free content will increase their income.
 「アソシエイツ」のユーザによる無償コンテンツの評価には、例えば1~5の5段階評価のように、アソシエイツ独自の評価方法を採用する。評価補正アルゴリズム4では、アソシエイツ毎に評価基準が異なることによる評価の偏りを防ぐために、以下の処理を行う。 For evaluation of free content by users of "Associates", an evaluation method unique to Associates is adopted, for example, a 5-step evaluation of 1-5. In the evaluation correction algorithm 4, the following processing is performed in order to prevent a bias in evaluation due to a difference in evaluation standard for each associate.
 制御部60は、選択した「アソシエイツ」のユーザによる評価の平均値を算出し、評価の中央値に対する比率を算出する。例えば、ある「アソシエイツ」のユーザによるコンテンツA~Dの評価が、以下のように、
 コンテンツA=評価5
 コンテンツB=評価1
 コンテンツC=評価4
 コンテンツD=評価5
 であった場合、制御部60により算出されるコンテンツA~Dの評価の平均値は3.75となり、評価の中心値(この例では3)に対する比率は0.8となる。
The control unit 60 calculates the average value of the evaluation by the user of the selected "associates", and calculates the ratio to the central value of the evaluation. For example, the evaluation of content A to D by a certain “Associates” user is as follows:
Content A = Evaluation 5
Content B = Evaluation 1
Content C = Evaluation 4
Content D = Evaluation 5
In this case, the average value of the evaluation of the contents A to D calculated by the control unit 60 is 3.75, and the ratio to the central value of the evaluation (3 in this example) is 0.8.
 制御部60は、算出した比率を元の評価に乗じることにより、以下のように評価を補正する。
 コンテンツA=評価4
 コンテンツB=評価1
 コンテンツC=評価3.2
 コンテンツD=評価4
 となる。ただし、比率を乗じた値が下限値(上記の例では1)未満となるコンテンツBの評価には、下限値が設定されている。比率を乗じた値が上限値(上記の例では5)を上回る場合についても同様であり、上限値に設定される。
The control unit 60 corrects the evaluation as follows by multiplying the calculated ratio by the original evaluation.
Content A = Evaluation 4
Content B = Evaluation 1
Content C = Rating 3.2
Content D = Evaluation 4
It becomes. However, the lower limit is set for the evaluation of the content B in which the value multiplied by the ratio is less than the lower limit (1 in the above example). The same applies to the case where the value multiplied by the ratio exceeds the upper limit (5 in the above example), and the upper limit is set.
 上記の補正を行うことにより、評価の甘い(又は辛い)アソシエイツが全てのコンテンツに対して評価5(又は1)を付けた場合であっても、補正後の評価は全て3となり、個々のアソシエイツの評価の偏りが除去される。 By performing the above correction, even if the sweet (or painful) Associates of the Evaluation gives the evaluation 5 (or 1) to all the contents, the evaluation after the correction becomes all 3 and the individual Associates Bias in the evaluation of
 次いで、制御部60は、補正後の評価を無償コンテンツ毎に集計し、所定期間中の被評価平均値を算出する。また、制御部60は、その算出結果と設定情報に基づき、無償コンテンツ毎の評価値を増減させる補正を行う。 Next, the control unit 60 tabulates the evaluation after correction for each free content, and calculates an evaluated average value in a predetermined period. The control unit 60 also performs correction to increase or decrease the evaluation value for each free content, based on the calculation result and the setting information.
 また、アソシエイツ毎の無償コンテンツ評価件数を基に、主体群毎にアソシエイツの順位付けを行い、決定された順位に基づいてアソシエイツの評価値を増減させる補正を行う。 In addition, based on the number of free content evaluations for each Associate, Associates are ranked for each subject group, and correction is performed to increase or decrease the evaluation value of Associates based on the determined ranking.
 更に、アソシエイツの発信される無償コンテンツが受けたアソシエイツ評価の平均値を基に、主体群毎のアソシエイツの順位付けを行い、決定された順位に基づいてアソシエイツの評価を増減させる補正を行う。 Furthermore, based on the average value of the Associates rating received by the free content transmitted by Associates, the Associates are ranked for each subject group, and correction is made to increase or decrease the Associates rating based on the determined ranking.
 以上、第一実施形態に示した情報流通サーバ装置6の処理によって、無償コンテンツ及びアソシエイツに対する評価値は、主体群ごとに算出された(又は算出される)状態であるが、第二実施形態で示した評価補正アルゴリズムは、そこからさらに、
 「主体群ごとの評価バランスの違い(例えば、国民性の違い)を反映」させ、
 「ユーザごとの評価バランスの違い(例えば、趣味趣向の違い)を反映」させ、
 「時期ごとの評価バランスの違い(例えば、興味の移り変わりの度合い)を反映」させ、
 「コンテンツごとの評価状態の違い(例えば、内容の違い)を反映」させ、
 「アソシエイツ同士の評価状態の違い(例えば、無償コンテンツの質の優劣)を反映」させ、
 さらに、「システム管理者の意思の介入を減少させてユーザの意思を相対的に大きく反映」させる評価処理を行う、評価値の補正を行うものである。
As described above, according to the process of the information distribution server device 6 shown in the first embodiment, the evaluation values for the free content and the associates are calculated (or calculated) for each subject group, but in the second embodiment The evaluation correction algorithm shown is further from
"Reflect the difference in evaluation balance among the groups of subjects (for example, the difference in national character)"
"Reflect the difference in evaluation balance between users (for example, the difference in tastes of interests)"
"Reflect the difference in the evaluation balance at different times (for example, the degree of change in interest)"
"Reflect the difference in the evaluation state of each content (for example, the difference in the content)"
Make it possible to reflect the difference in evaluation status between associates (for example, the superiority or inferiority of the quality of free content),
Further, the evaluation value is corrected by performing an evaluation process that "reduces the intervention of the intention of the system administrator and relatively reflects the intention of the user".
 つまり、上述の行程(コンテンツそのものの内容の違い「上述の評価補正アルゴリズム2」、興味の移り変わりの変遷「上述の評価補正アルゴリズム3」、情報取得ユーザの情報取得傾向の違い「上述の評価補正アルゴリズム1」、主体群ごとの特性の違い「上述の評価補正アルゴリズム3」、アソシエイツ同士によって評価される無償コンテンツごと又はアソシエイツごとの情報発信品質の優劣「上述の評価補正アルゴリズム4」)、及びシステム管理者の意思の介入を減少させてユーザの意思を相対的に大きく反映させる民主的評価処理「上述の評価補正アルゴリズム3」)を行うことによって、評価値に補正を加えるものである。 That is, the above-mentioned process (difference in the content of the content itself "the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 2", transition of interest change "the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 3", the difference in the information acquisition tendency of the information acquisition user "the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 1), differences in characteristics among subject groups "the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 3", superiority or inferiority of information transmission quality for each free content or each association evaluated by associates "the above evaluation correction algorithm 4", and system management A correction is added to the evaluation value by performing a democratic evaluation process "the above-mentioned evaluation correction algorithm 3" which reduces the user's intention intervention and reflects the user's intention relatively largely.
 こうすることで、「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを有するユーザから「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを有するユーザに移転した価値の量を、よりいっそうの根拠をもった(より実際の)合理的な評価値として算出することができるようになり、さらに、価値の提供者たるアソシエイツに対して評価値に基づき、公平及び効率的にシステム内通貨Lを発行することができるようになる。このようにして情報交換マーケットを活性化させることができるようになる。 In this way, the amount of value transferred from a user with an "Associates" account to a user with an "Operator" or "Individual" account is rationalized with a more rational basis (more actual) The evaluation value can be calculated, and furthermore, the system currency L can be issued fairly and efficiently based on the evaluation value to the associate who is the value provider. Thus, the information exchange market can be activated.
 以下、第三実施形態、第四実施形態及び第五実施形態について説明する。第一実施形態における情報流通サーバ装置6の特に通貨発行部6Bの機能について他の表現で説明する。例えば第一実施形態における「情報交換マーケット」は第三実施形態においては「マーケットプレイス」と称し、第四実施形態においては「情報提供サイト」と称し、第五実施形態では「ヴァーチャルマーケット」と称する。また、第一実施形態における「システム内通貨L」は第三及び第四実施形態においては「ポイント」と称し、第五実施形態では「ヴァーチャルカレンシー」と称する。更に、第一実施形態における「アソシエイツ」は、第三実施形態においては「加盟店」、第四実施形態においては「第一の利用者」と称し、「事業者」は第三実施形態においては「企業会員」、第四実施形態においては「第二の利用者」としての「企業」と称する。同様の意味であって異なる実施形態の例であるに過ぎない。 The third embodiment, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment will be described below. The function of the currency issuing unit 6B of the information distribution server device 6 in the first embodiment will be described in another expression. For example, the "information exchange market" in the first embodiment is referred to as "market place" in the third embodiment, and is referred to as "information providing site" in the fourth embodiment, and is referred to as "virtual market" in the fifth embodiment. . Also, "in-system currency L" in the first embodiment is referred to as "point" in the third and fourth embodiments, and is referred to as "virtual currency" in the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, "Associates" in the first embodiment is referred to as "affiliated store" in the third embodiment, "first user" in the fourth embodiment, and "business operator" in the third embodiment. It is referred to as "company member", and "company" as the "second user" in the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the same meaning and different embodiment.
 <第三実施形態>
 図17は、第三実施形態に係る特典管理システムの一実施形態のポイント管理システムS1によるサービスの概要について説明するための図である。図18は、ポイント管理システムS1の構成を示す図である。まず、図17及び図18を参照しながらポイント管理システムS1の概要を説明する。なお、本明細書における「ポイント」は、情報、利用スペース、又は物品と交換できる価値を有する特典の一種である。本明細書においては、特典としてポイントを例示するが、特典は、ポイント以外の無形物であってもよい。本明細書における「情報」は、端末とサーバ間で通信可能なデータに変換できるユーザインタフェースから入力される無形物、又はユーザインタフェースに出力される無形物である。「情報」は、例えば文字、音声、画像、動画、データファイル、コンテンツ、アプリケーション、匂い、若しくは動作等、又はこれらのうち二以上の組み合わせ等である。
Third Embodiment
FIG. 17 is a view for explaining an outline of a service by the point management system S1 of the one embodiment of the privilege management system according to the third embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration of the point management system S1. First, an outline of the point management system S1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. In addition, the "point" in this specification is a kind of the benefit which has the value which can be exchanged with information, utilization space, or goods. In the present specification, points are illustrated as benefits, but the benefits may be intangibles other than points. The “information” in the present specification is an intangible substance input from a user interface that can be converted to data that can be communicated between a terminal and a server, or an intangible substance output to a user interface. The “information” is, for example, characters, sounds, images, moving images, data files, contents, applications, smells, or operations, or a combination of two or more of them.
 ポイント管理システムS1は、利用者が、PC、タブレット、携帯電話、テレビ、カーナビゲーション、家庭用ゲーム機、又はロボット等の通信可能な端末のユーザインタフェースを用いてネットワーク上のサーバとデータを送受信することにより、利用者間で情報を交換することができるウェブサイト、ウェブアプリケーション、SNS、メタバース、ソフトウェア、又はクラウドコンピューティング等により実現されるオンラインマーケット(以下、マーケットプレイスという)を構築し、マーケットプレイスの利用者が相互に影響し合えるようにするためのシステムである。端末のユーザインタフェースは、例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカ、キーボード、マウス、タッチパッド、タッチパネル、マイク、カメラ、コントローラ、リモコン、スイッチ、グローブ、スーツ、シューズ、ゴーグル等のさまざまなデータ入出力装置である。 The point management system S1 allows a user to transmit and receive data to / from a server on a network using a user interface of a communicable terminal such as a PC, a tablet, a mobile phone, a television, a car navigation, a home game machine, or a robot. To create an online market (hereinafter referred to as a market place) realized by a website, web application, SNS, metaverse, software, or cloud computing etc. by which information can be exchanged among users. Is a system to allow users of each other to interact with each other. The user interface of the terminal is, for example, various data input / output devices such as a display, a speaker, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch pad, a touch panel, a microphone, a camera, a controller, a remote controller, a switch, a glove, a suit, shoes, and goggles.
 マーケットプレイスには、例えば情報を格納する一以上のサーバが含まれており、情報提供者は情報提供端末1を介してマーケットプレイス上のサーバに情報を格納し、情報利用者は情報利用端末2を介してマーケットプレイス上のサーバから情報を得ることができる。ポイント管理システムS1においては、情報を提供する情報提供者(図17における加盟店)、及び情報を利用する情報利用者(図17における企業会員)が、それぞれ情報提供端末1及び情報利用端末2を使用して、ポイント管理システムS1の運営者が管理するポイント管理サーバ3にアクセスすることにより、情報交換が実現される。 The marketplace, includes a one or more servers that store for example information, the information provider stores the information in a server on the marketplace via the information providing terminal 1, information user information use terminal 2 You can get information from the server on the marketplace via. In the point management system S1, an information provider who provides information (affiliated store in FIG. 17) and an information user who uses information (a company member in FIG. 17) respectively have an information providing terminal 1 and an information using terminal 2 Information exchange is realized by using the point management server 3 managed by the operator of the point management system S1.
 情報提供者は、例えば、運営者に対して金銭を預け入れることにより、マーケットプレイスにおいて情報を提供できるようになる。情報提供者は、例えば、転職を支援するエージェント、法的問題について助言する弁護士・弁理士・会計士等のプロフェッショナル、コンサルタント、並びに不動産業者、結婚相談業者、家政婦紹介業者、及びケアマネージャー等の仲介者等である。情報提供者は、図18に示す情報提供端末1を用いてポイント管理サーバ3に情報を送信することにより、情報利用者が情報利用端末2を用いてアクセス可能な情報を提供することができる。 The information provider can provide information in the marketplace, for example, by depositing money to the operator. Informants include, for example, agents that support job changes, professionals such as lawyers, patent attorneys, and accountants who advise on legal matters, consultants, and brokers such as real estate agents, marriage counselors, housekeepers introducers, and care managers, etc. And so on. The information provider transmits information to the point management server 3 using the information providing terminal 1 shown in FIG. 18 so that information that the information user can access using the information using terminal 2 can be provided.
 情報利用者は、情報提供者が提供する情報を自らの事業や行動に活用する個人、個人事業主、法人、又は団体である。情報利用者は、図18に示す情報利用端末2を用いてポイント管理サーバ3にアクセスすることにより、情報提供端末1から提供される情報を取得することができる。 An information user is an individual, an individual business owner, a corporation, or an organization that utilizes information provided by the information provider for his / her business or behavior. The information user can acquire the information provided from the information provision terminal 1 by accessing the point management server 3 using the information use terminal 2 shown in FIG.
 本サービスにおいては、情報提供者によって優良な情報が提供されるために、情報提供者の行動が監視され、情報提供者の行動の内容に応じて各種のインセンティブが提供される。本サービスにおいては、例えば以下のインセンティブが提供される。
(1)情報提供者が、マーケットプレイスで使用可能なポイントを無償で付与されること
(2)情報提供者が提供する情報の内容及び量に基づいて、マーケットプレイスで使用可能なポイントが付与され、所定の評価期間内に情報提供者に付与されたポイントの量に応じて、マーケットプレイスにおいて情報提供者が表示される順位が決定されること
(3)情報提供者が付与されたポイントを情報利用者に譲渡し、リアルマーケットにおいて、ポイントを譲渡した代金を情報利用者から徴収し、収益とすること
(4)情報提供者が提供する情報の内容及び量に基づいて、マーケットプレイスで使用可能なポイントが付与され、所定の評価期間内に情報提供者に付与されたポイントの量に応じて、マーケットプレイスにおいて情報提供者が表示される順位が決定される。そして、決定された順位と、情報利用者にポイントを譲渡し運営者に支払った手数料額とに基づく奨励金を運営者から支給され、支給された奨励金を収益にできること
In this service, in order to provide excellent information by the information provider, the behavior of the information provider is monitored, and various incentives are provided according to the content of the information provider's action. In this service, for example, the following incentives are provided.
(1) information provider, based on the content and amount of information that is given the available points marketplace free of (2) the information provider provides, usable points is given by the marketplace According to the amount of points given to the information provider within a predetermined evaluation period, the order in which the information providers are displayed in the marketplace is determined (3) Information points given by the information provider Transfer to the user, and collect the price of the point transferred from the information user in the real market, and use it as revenue (4) Based on the content and amount of information provided by the information provider, available in the marketplace Points are given and displayed by the information provider in the marketplace according to the amount of points given to the information provider within a predetermined evaluation period Rank is determined to be. Then, the operator is provided incentives based on the determined ranking and the amount of commissions transferred to the information users and paid to the operator, and the incentives provided can be used as earnings.
 マーケットプレイスで使用可能なポイントは、加盟店が対価を支払うことにより取得するものではなく、加盟店のマーケットプレイスにおける行動をポイント管理サーバ3が評価した結果に基づいて付与される。例えば、ポイント管理システムS1は、マーケットプレイスにおいて提供される情報の質及び量の少なくともいずれかに基づいてポイントが付与される。従来、非特許文献1に記載されているように、商品を購入したことに対する報奨としてポイントが付与されてきた。しかしながら、ポイント管理システムS1を用いて提供されるサービスのように、商品の販売だけを目的とするのではなく、良質の情報を流通させることを目的とする場合、従来のように、商品を購入したことに対する報奨としてポイントを付与しても、良質の情報の流通量を増やすことにつながらないという問題があった。ポイント管理システムS1においては、情報提供者が提供する情報の内容及び量に基づいて、マーケットプレイスで使用可能なポイントが付与されるため、マーケットプレイスへの参加者が良質な情報を提供するように動機付けることができる。 The points that can be used in the marketplace are not acquired by the affiliated store by paying the price, but are granted based on the result of the point management server 3 evaluating the behavior in the marketplace of the affiliated store. For example, the point management system S1 is awarded points based on the quality and / or amount of information provided in the marketplace. Conventionally, as described in Non-Patent Document 1, points have been awarded as a reward for purchasing a product. However, as the service to be provided using a point management system S1, rather than intended only selling products, for the purpose of passing it through the information of good quality, as in the prior art, a purchase There is a problem that, even if points are given as a reward for doing things, it does not lead to an increase in the amount of high quality information. In point management system S1, based on the content and amount of information that the information provider provides, for available point in the marketplace is applied, as participants in the marketplace to provide quality information Can be motivated.
 ポイント管理システムS1においては、加盟店に付与されたポイントが、マーケットプレイスにおける情報の流通を促す効果を生じさせるだけの価値を有するように、マーケットプレイスの運営者が、マーケットプレイスで提供される情報又はマーケットプレイスで利用される情報とポイント数との関係を定める係数又は計算式等の設定情報を設定することができる。したがって、運営者は、係数又は計算式を制御することにより、マーケットプレイスにおける情報の流通が活性化するように、ポイントの価値を適切に変更することができる。 In the point management system S1, information provided by the marketplace operator is provided in the marketplace so that the points given to the affiliated store have a value sufficient to cause the information circulation in the marketplace. Alternatively, setting information such as a coefficient or a formula which determines the relationship between information used in the marketplace and the number of points can be set. Therefore, the operator can appropriately change the value of the points so as to activate the distribution of information in the marketplace by controlling the coefficients or formulas.
(ポイントの譲渡)
 加盟店に付与されたポイントは、有償又は無償で企業会員に譲渡することができる(図17における(8))。加盟店が企業会員にポイントを譲渡すると、運営者は加盟店から手数料を徴収する。具体的には、ポイント管理サーバ3が管理する加盟店のシステム現金通帳から運営者のシステム現金通帳に手数料の額を移動する(図17における(9))。
(Assignment of points)
The points given to the member store can be transferred to the corporate member for a fee or for free ((8) in FIG. 17). When a member store transfers points to a business member, the operator collects a fee from the member store. Specifically, the amount of the fee is moved from the system cash passbook of the affiliated store managed by the point management server 3 to the system cash passbook of the operator ((9) in FIG. 17).
(ポイントの消費)
 企業会員は、付与されたポイントを消費して、各種の情報を得ることができる。企業会員がポイントを消費すると、ポイント管理サーバ3は、企業会員に対応するポイント通帳から、消費されたポイント数を減算する(図17における(10))。
(Consumption of points)
Corporate members can consume various points granted to obtain various information. When the corporate member consumes points, the point management server 3 subtracts the number of points consumed from the point passbook corresponding to the corporate member ((10) in FIG. 17).
(ポイントの消滅)
 加盟店は、マーケットプレイスで情報を提供するといったあらかじめ運営者によって設定されたポイントが付与される行動(推奨行動)を実行しない期間が継続すると、付与されたポイントが消滅する(図17における(11))。具体的には、ポイント管理サーバ3は、ポイント管理サーバ3が管理する加盟店のポイント通帳に記録されている加盟店のポイント残高から所定のポイント数を減少させることにより、加盟店のポイントを消滅させる。
(Elimination of points)
If a member store does not execute an action (recommended action) in which points set by the operator in advance are provided, such as providing information in the marketplace, the granted points disappear ((11 in FIG. )). Specifically, the point management server 3 eliminates the points of the affiliated store by reducing the predetermined point number from the point balance of the affiliated store recorded in the point passbook of the affiliated store managed by the point management server 3 Let
(奨励金)
 運営者は、加盟店が所定の期間内に支払った手数料の総額及び行動評価(決定された順位)に基づいて奨励金を加盟店に提供する(図17における(12))。具体的には、ポイント管理サーバ3が管理する運営者のシステム現金通帳から加盟店のシステム現金通帳に対して、奨励金に相当する額を移動する。このように運営者が奨励金を提供することによって、加盟店は、積極的にポイントを企業会員に譲渡及び運営者が推奨する行動を実行するように動機付けられる。
(Incentive)
The operator provides the incentive fee to the member store based on the total amount of the fee paid by the member store within a predetermined period and the action evaluation (decided ranking) ((12) in FIG. 17). Specifically, the system cash passbook of merchants from the operator of the system cash passbook the point management server 3 to manage, to move an amount equivalent to the incentives. In this manner, by providing the incentives to the operator, the member store is actively motivated to transfer points to the corporate members and carry out the action recommended by the operator.
[ポイント管理サーバ3の構成]
 以下、ポイント管理サーバ3の構成及び動作について詳細に説明する。以下の説明においては、加盟店を情報提供者と称し、企業会員を情報利用者と称する。
[Configuration of point management server 3]
Hereinafter, the configuration and operation of the point management server 3 will be described in detail. In the following description, a member store is referred to as an information provider, and a company member is referred to as an information user.
 図19は、ポイント管理サーバ3の構成を示す図である。ポイント管理サーバ3は、通信部31と、記憶部32と、制御部33とを有する。通信部31は、情報提供端末1及び情報利用端末2とデータを送受信するための通信インタフェースである。記憶部32は、ROM、RAM及びハードディスク等の記憶媒体である。記憶部32は、制御部33が実行するプログラムを記憶している。また、記憶部32は、情報提供者の情報(例えば、情報提供者を特定するための情報、及び情報提供者の過去の行動内容)、情報利用者の情報(例えば、情報利用者を特定するための情報、及び情報利用者の過去の行動内容)、システム現金通帳及びポイント通帳等の各種の情報を記憶している。 FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the configuration of the point management server 3. The point management server 3 includes a communication unit 31, a storage unit 32, and a control unit 33. The communication unit 31 is a communication interface for transmitting and receiving data to and from the information providing terminal 1 and the information using terminal 2. The storage unit 32 is a storage medium such as a ROM, a RAM, and a hard disk. The storage unit 32 stores a program that the control unit 33 executes. The storage unit 32, information provider information (e.g., information for identifying the information provider, and past behavior information content provider), information user information (e.g., to identify the information user Information, and the past action content of the information user), various information such as a system cash passbook and a point passbook are stored.
 制御部33は、例えばCPUであり、記憶部32に記憶されたプログラムを実行することにより、管理部41、順位決定部42及び情報提供部43として機能する。 The control unit 33 is, for example, a CPU, and functions as a management unit 41, a rank determination unit 42, and an information providing unit 43 by executing a program stored in the storage unit 32.
 管理部41は、ポイントを管理するための各種の機能を実行する。管理部41の詳細については後述するが、管理部41は、情報提供者からの入金データを取得すると、取得した入金データが示す入金額に基づいて所定の計算式を用いて算出した量のポイントを付与する。 The management unit 41 executes various functions for managing points. Although the details of the management unit 41 will be described later, when the management unit 41 acquires payment data from the information provider, points of the amount calculated using a predetermined calculation formula based on the deposit amount indicated by the acquired payment data Grant
 また、管理部41は、情報提供端末1から情報利用端末2に提供された提供情報に基づいて、情報提供者である情報提供者にポイントを付与する。管理部41は、例えば、情報提供端末1から情報利用端末2に提供された提供情報の量に所定の係数を乗じた量のポイントを付与する。 Also, the management unit 41 gives points to the information provider who is the information provider based on the provided information provided from the information providing terminal 1 to the information use terminal 2. For example, the management unit 41 gives points of an amount obtained by multiplying the amount of provided information provided from the information providing terminal 1 to the information using terminal 2 by a predetermined coefficient.
 管理部41は、ポイントを付与してからの経過時間に応じて、付与したポイントを減少させてもよい。この際、管理部41は、順位決定部42が決定した順位に基づく量のポイントを減少させる。管理部41は、例えば、順位決定部42が決定した順位が高ければ高いほど、所定の経過時間に対するポイントの減少量を大きくする。このようにすることで、情報提供者の順位が入れ替わりやすくなるので、情報提供者が情報を提供するモチベーションを高めることができる。 The management unit 41 may decrease the awarded points in accordance with the elapsed time since the award of the points. At this time, the management unit 41 decreases the points of the amount based on the order determined by the order determination unit 42. For example, the higher the order determined by the order determining unit 42, the larger the management unit 41 increases the reduction amount of points with respect to a predetermined elapsed time. This makes it easy to change the order of the information providers, which can enhance the motivation for the information providers to provide information.
 また、管理部41は、情報提供者及び情報利用者に関連付けてポイントの残高を管理する。管理部41は、情報提供者が情報利用者にポイントの一部又は全部を提供すると、情報利用者に関連付けられたポイントの残高を増加させるとともに、情報提供者に関連付けられたポイントの残高を減少させる。 Also, the management unit 41 manages the balance of points in association with the information provider and the information user. Management unit 41, reduces the information provider to provide some or all of the points on information users, along with increasing the balance of points associated with the information user, the balance of points associated with the information provider Let
 管理部41は、情報提供端末1が情報利用端末2に情報を提供すると、提供された情報(例えば、企業会員等がダウンロードした、加盟店が発信するドキュメント)に対応するポイントの量に基づいて、情報利用者に関連付けられたポイントの残高を減少させるとともに、情報提供者に関連付けられたポイントの残高を増加させてもよい。管理部41は、情報提供者が情報利用者にポイントの一部又は全部を提供すると、情報利用者に提供したポイントの量に対応する手数料を情報提供者の現金残高から減算してもよい。 When the information providing terminal 1 provides information to the information using terminal 2, the management unit 41 determines the amount of points corresponding to the provided information (for example, a document downloaded by a company member or the like and sent by a member store). The balance of points associated with the information user may be decreased, and the balance of points associated with the information provider may be increased. When the information provider provides the information user with some or all of the points, the management unit 41 may subtract the fee corresponding to the amount of points provided to the information user from the cash balance of the information provider.
 また、管理部41は、情報提供者が情報利用者にポイントの一部又は全部を提供すると、情報利用者に提供したポイントの量、及び順位決定部42が決定した情報提供者の順位に基づいて決定した奨励金を情報提供者の現金残高に加算する。管理部41は、例えば、所定の評価期間ごとに奨励金を決定する。この際、管理部41は、情報提供者の順位が高ければ高いほど奨励金を多くしてもよい。このようにすることで、情報提供者が順位を上げようとするモチベーションが高まるので、情報提供者が積極的に情報を提供するようになる。 Further, when the information provider provides the information user with a part or all of the points, the management unit 41 is based on the amount of points provided to the information user and the order of the information providers determined by the order determination unit 42. The incentives determined in the report to the cash balance of the informant. The management unit 41 determines, for example, a reward for each predetermined evaluation period. At this time, the management unit 41 may increase the incentive fee as the rank of the information provider is higher. By doing this, the information provider is motivated to raise their rank, and thus the information provider can provide information positively.
 なお、管理部41は、情報利用者が新規に登録した場合に、情報提供者の順位に影響しない第二種ポイントを情報利用者に付与してもよい。管理部41が情報利用者に直接付与した第二種ポイントは、情報提供者の評価には影響しない。このように、管理部41が第二種ポイントを提供することにより、情報提供者とのつながりを持っていない情報利用者がサービスの利用を開始しやすくなる。 When the information user newly registers, the management unit 41 may give the information user a second type point that does not affect the ranking of the information provider. The type 2 points directly given to the information user by the management unit 41 do not affect the evaluation of the information provider. As described above, the management unit 41 provides the second type points, whereby an information user who does not have a connection with the information provider can easily start using the service.
 順位決定部42は、管理部41により情報提供者に付与したポイント数に基づいて、情報提供者を所定の期間ごとに順位付けする。順位決定部42は、所定の評価期間内に情報提供者に付与されたポイントが多ければ多いほど、情報利用端末2における複数の情報提供者が情報利用端末2に表示される際の順位を高くする。所定の評価期間は、例えば、情報提供者に新たなポイントが付与された時点以前の所定の期間(例えば1年間)である。所定の評価期間は、所定の日(例えば月初)を起点とする所定の期間(例えば1ヶ月間)であってもよい。順位決定部42は、評価期間が終了した時点で、各情報提供者に付与された累計ポイント数を初期化してもよい。 The ranking determination unit 42 ranks the information providers for each predetermined period based on the number of points given to the information provider by the management unit 41. The ranking determination unit 42 sets the ranking at the time when a plurality of information providers in the information using terminal 2 is displayed on the information using terminal 2 as the number of points given to the information provider in the predetermined evaluation period increases. Do. The predetermined evaluation period is, for example, a predetermined period (e.g., one year) prior to the point when the information provider is given a new point. The predetermined evaluation period may be a predetermined period (for example, one month) starting from a predetermined day (for example, the beginning of a month). The order determination unit 42 may initialize the accumulated point number given to each information provider when the evaluation period ends.
 順位決定部42は、例えば、情報提供部43が、複数の情報提供者を情報利用端末2において一覧表示する際に、所定の評価期間に付与されたポイントが多い情報提供者を上位に表示するように順位を決定する。情報提供部43は、複数の情報提供者を情報利用端末2に順次表示する場合、評価期間に付与されたポイントが多い情報提供者を表示する頻度(すなわち出現率)を高くしてもよい。このようにすることで、ポイント管理システムS1の運営者は、情報提供者が、表示される場合の順位を上げたり表示される頻度を高めたりするために積極的に情報を提供してポイントを得ようとするように動機付けることができる。 Order determination unit 42, for example, the information providing unit 43 displays a plurality of information providers when listing the information use terminal 2, the upper point often informant given to a predetermined evaluation period To determine the order. When the information providing unit 43 sequentially displays a plurality of information providers on the information use terminal 2, the frequency (that is, the appearance rate) of displaying the information providers having many points given in the evaluation period may be increased. By doing this, the operator of the point management system S1 actively provides information to increase the order in which the information provider is displayed or the frequency with which the information provider is displayed. You can be motivated to get it.
 順位決定部42は、マーケットプレイスの全ての情報提供者を対象に決定された全体順位と、地域(市区町村、都道府県、国、又はエリア等の行政区、自治区、立法権区、若しくはこれらに準ずる地域等)内の情報提供者を対象に決定された地域版順位とを決定することができる。順位決定部42は、付与されたポイント数が多い順に全体の全ての情報提供者を順位付けすることにより、全体順位を決定する。また、順位決定部42は、付与されたポイント数が多い順に地域内の情報提供者を順位付けすることにより、地域版順位を決定する。 The ranking determination unit 42 determines the overall ranking determined for all the information providers in the marketplace, the district (province, municipality, prefecture, country, or administrative district such as area, autonomous district, legitimacy district, or It is possible to determine the regional edition ranking determined for the information provider in the corresponding region etc.). Order determination unit 42, by ranking all the information provider for the entire sequentially points granted often determines the overall ranking. Further, the order determination unit 42, by ranking the information provider in the region in descending order of the number of points assigned to determine the local version order.
 なお、順位決定部42は、地域版順位を決定する際に、(1)順位を決定する対象となる地域の人口を、(2)当該地域をサービス提供圏(活動範囲)にしている情報提供者がサービスを提供する圏内の人口総数で除算し、(3)除算して得られる値に、管理部41が付与したポイント数を乗じた値を、順位の決定に用いる根拠とする。順位決定部42が決定した順位は、情報提供者を一覧表示する情報提供サイトにおいて所定の地域に属する情報提供者を表示する際の順位、情報利用者が情報提供者を表示する情報提供サイトを更新した際に情報提供サイトに表示される確率(出現率)、及び奨励金の額に反映される。 Note that when determining the regional version ranking, the ranking determination unit 42 provides (1) the population of the area targeted for determining the ranking as (2) information provision that sets the area as a service providing area (activity range) A value obtained by dividing the number by the total number of population in the service area provided by the person and (3) divided by the number of points given by the management unit 41 is used as the basis for determining the order. Rank order determining section 42 has been determined, the order at the time of displaying the information providers belonging to a predetermined region in the information providing site that lists the information provider, the information providing site information user to display the information provider It is reflected in the probability (occurrence rate) displayed on the information providing site when updated and the amount of incentives.
 情報提供サイトは、情報提供者によって情報を提供(情報提供端末1によって送信)するために用いられるサーバ、又は情報利用者によって情報を利用(情報利用端末2によって受信)するために用いられるサーバの記憶領域である。情報提供サイトは、例えば、マーケットプレイスを構成するサーバにより提供されるウェブページ、ウェブサイト、ポータルサイト、FTP(File Transfer Protocol)サイト、ウェブアプリケーション、SNS、メタバース、ソフトウェア、又はクラウドコンピューティング等を実現するためにサーバにより提供される記憶領域である。 The information providing site is a server used to provide information (transmitted by the information providing terminal 1) by the information provider, or a server used to use information (received by the information using terminal 2) by the information user. It is a storage area. The information providing site realizes, for example, a web page, a website, a portal site, an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) site, a web application, an SNS, a metaverse, software, or cloud computing etc. Storage area provided by the server to
 情報提供部43は、順位決定部42が決定した順位に基づいて、複数の情報提供者の少なくとも一部の情報提供者を特定するための提供者情報を情報利用端末2に提供する。提供者情報は、例えば、情報提供者としての情報提供者の名称、住所、連絡先等を含む情報であり、情報利用者が情報提供者を検索する操作を行なうことにより、情報利用端末2に表示される。 The information providing unit 43 provides the information using terminal 2 with provider information for specifying at least a part of information providers of a plurality of information providers, based on the order determined by the order determining unit 42. The provider information is, for example, information including a name, an address, a contact address, etc. of the information provider as the information provider, and the information use terminal 2 performs an operation of searching for the information provider. Is displayed.
[管理部41の詳細]
 以下、管理部41の詳細について説明する。図20は、管理部41が実行する機能を示す機能ブロック図である。管理部41は、プログラムを実行することにより、行動監視部411、第一ポイント付与部412、第二ポイント付与部413、キャンペーンポイント付与部414、ポイント消費量変動部415、ポイント消滅処理部416、手数料徴収部417及び奨励金支給部418として機能する。
[Details of management section 41]
The details of the management unit 41 will be described below. FIG. 20 is a functional block diagram showing functions performed by the management unit 41. The management unit 41 executes a program to execute an action monitoring unit 411, a first point giving unit 412, a second point giving unit 413, a campaign point giving unit 414, a point consumption amount changing unit 415, a point annihilation processing unit 416, It functions as a fee collection unit 417 and an incentive payment unit 418.
(行動監視部411)
 行動監視部411は、マーケットプレイス上でやり取りされる情報を監視することにより、情報提供者としての情報提供者の行動、及び情報利用者としての情報利用者の行動を監視する。行動監視部411は、監視して特定した行動の内容を、管理部41の他の機能部に通知する。情報提供者の行動は、例えば、情報提供サイトにおいて情報を発信する行為、又は情報利用者による情報の利用につながる行為であり、情報提供者の行動の内容は、発信した情報の量又は質、又は情報提供者の貢献により利用された情報の量又は質により表される。情報利用者の行動は、例えば、情報提供サイトにおいて情報を閲覧する行為である。
(Action monitoring unit 411)
The behavior monitoring unit 411 monitors the behavior of the information provider as the information provider and the behavior of the information user as the information user by monitoring the information exchanged on the marketplace. The behavior monitoring unit 411 notifies other functional units of the management unit 41 of the content of the monitored and specified behavior. Behavior information provider, for example, the act of transmitting the information in the information providing site, or information user is an act that leads to the use of information by the contents of the actions of the information provider, the amount or quality of outgoing information, Or represented by the amount or quality of information used by the contribution of the information provider. The action of the information user is, for example, an action of browsing information on an information providing site.
(第一ポイント付与部412)
 第一ポイント付与部412は、行動監視部411が特定したマーケットプレイス内におけるポイントの販売主体である情報提供者による行動の内容に基づいて、情報提供者にポイントを付与する。第一ポイント付与部412は、情報提供者が推奨行動を行ったことを検出した場合、マーケットプレイスを管理する運営者によって設定された推奨行動係数又は所定の計算式に基づいてポイント発行数を算出する。推奨行動係数は、例えば、情報提供者が提供した情報の量及び質に関連付けて決定されており、情報の量及び質が高ければ高いほど大きな値に設定されている。第一ポイント付与部412は、算出したポイント発行数のポイントを情報提供者に付与する。
(First point granting unit 412)
The first point giving unit 412 gives points to the information provider based on the content of the action by the information provider who is the selling entity of the points in the marketplace specified by the action monitoring unit 411. The first point giving unit 412, when detecting that the information provider has taken suggested actions, calculates the number of points issued based on the set recommended action coefficient or predetermined formula by operators to manage the marketplace Do. The recommended action coefficient is determined, for example, in association with the amount and quality of information provided by the information provider, and is set to a larger value as the amount and quality of information is higher. The first point giving unit 412 gives points of the calculated number of issued points to the information provider.
 第一ポイント付与部412は、例えば、既に発信済みのコラムの文章の編集を情報提供者が行った場合、情報提供者が価値の高い情報を発信したことにならないので、推奨行動係数を0としてポイントを発行しない。一方、第一ポイント付与部412は、コラムの文章を編集したことによって文字数が増加した場合には、増加文字数に対して一文字あたり30ポイントを付与してもよい。第一ポイント付与部412は、コラム内に付加価値が高いコンテンツ(例えば画像)を追加した場合に、1つの追加画像に対して、付加価値が低いコンテンツよりも高いポイント(例えば3000ポイント)を付与してもよい。 For example, when the information provider edits the text of the column that has already been transmitted, the first point giving unit 412 sets the recommended action coefficient to 0 because the information provider does not transmit high-value information. Do not issue points. On the other hand, when the number of characters is increased by editing the text of the column, the first point provision unit 412 may provide 30 points per character to the number of increase characters. The first point giving unit 412, applied when adding the added value in the column is higher content (e.g. images), for one additional image, higher point than added value lower content (e.g. 3000 points) You may
 第一ポイント付与部412がポイントを付与する対象となる情報提供者の行動は、例えば以下のとおりである。
(1)情報提供者による振込専用口座への入金
(2)ポイント譲渡先による譲渡済みポイントの消費
(3)情報提供者によるポイント譲渡
(4)情報提供者による情報利用者の新規登録
(5)情報提供者によるコラムの新規投稿
(6)情報提供者による質問者への質問の回答
(7)質問者による情報提供者の回答へのベストアンサー登録
(8)情報提供者によるドキュメントの新規発信
The action of the information provider to whom the first point giving unit 412 gives points is, for example, as follows.
(1) payment to the information provider by the transfer-only account (2) Consumption of transfer already point by point transferee (3) point transfer by the information provider (4) new registration of information users by the information provider (5) Posting a new column by an informant (6) Answering a question to the questioner by an informant (7) Registering the best answer to the answer of an informant by a questioner (8) Sending a new document by an informant
(第二ポイント付与部413)
 第二ポイント付与部413は、所定の期間内に情報提供者が提供した情報に対する評価を累計した結果に基づいてポイントを付与する。第二ポイント付与部413が情報提供者に付与するポイントは、情報提供者が推奨行動を継続することにより付与されるので、第二ポイント付与部413がポイントを付与することにより、情報提供者が継続的に推奨行動を行なうように動機付けることができる。
(Second point granting unit 413)
The second point assignment unit 413 assigns points based on the result of accumulating the evaluations on the information provided by the information provider within a predetermined period. The points given by the second point giving unit 413 to the information provider are given as the information provider continues the recommended action, so the information provider gives the points by the second point giving unit 413 giving points. You can be motivated to take action recommendations on an ongoing basis.
 第二ポイント付与部413は、以下の評価内容に基づいて情報提供者にポイントを付与する。
(1)所定の期間内に第一ポイント付与部412により付与されたポイントの総数(累積数)
(2)情報提供者によりマーケットプレイスに提供された情報に対する他者からの評価の平均値又は総数(累積値)
The second point assignment unit 413 assigns points to the information provider based on the following evaluation content.
(1) Total number of points provided by the first point giving unit 412 within a predetermined period (cumulative number)
(2) Average value or total number (cumulative value) of evaluations from others on information provided to the marketplace by the information provider
(キャンペーンポイント付与部414)
 キャンペーンポイント付与部414は、情報利用者に対して、ポイントを消費する活動(例えば、マーケットプレイス内の情報を閲覧する活動)へのインセンティブを与えるために、情報利用者に対してキャンペーンポイントを付与する。キャンペーンポイント付与部414は、行動監視部411が情報利用者の行動を監視して特定した、情報利用者がマーケットプレイスにおいて情報を利用する消費行動に基づいて、付与するキャンペーンポイント数を決定する。キャンペーンポイント付与部414は、例えば、所定の評価期間内に情報利用者が消費したキャンペーンポイント以外のポイントの量に予め定められた係数を乗算することにより、付与するキャンペーンポイント数を決定する。
(Campaign Point Granting Unit 414)
The campaign point granting unit 414 grants the information user the campaign point in order to provide the information user with an incentive for an activity that consumes points (for example, an activity of browsing information in the marketplace). Do. The campaign point giving unit 414 determines the number of campaign points to be given based on the consumption behavior that the information user uses information in the marketplace, which the activity monitoring unit 411 has identified by monitoring the action of the information user. The campaign point giving unit 414 determines the number of campaign points to be given, for example, by multiplying the amount of points other than the campaign points consumed by the information user within a predetermined evaluation period by a predetermined coefficient.
 情報利用者は、キャンペーンポイントを付与されることによって、実質的にポイント購入コストを低下させることができる。その結果、情報利用者は、キャンペーンポイントの付与を受けていない、又は付与数の少ない情報利用者に対してアドバンテージを得ることができる。このように、キャンペーンポイント付与部414がキャンペーンポイントを付与することで、運営者が期待する行動を行った量が多い情報利用者の活動を支援する仕組みをマーケットプレイス内に内在させることができる。このような仕組みを設けることにより、運営者が意図するように、マーケットプレイス内での情報の流通を活性化することが可能になる。 An information consumer can substantially reduce the point purchase cost by being given campaign points. As a result, the information user can obtain an advantage for information users who have not received campaign points or have a small number of offers. As described above, the campaign point granting unit 414 grants the campaign points, so that a mechanism for supporting the activity of the information user who has performed a large amount of action expected by the operator can be embedded in the marketplace. By providing such a mechanism, as operator intends, it is possible to activate the flow of information within the marketplace.
(ポイント消費量変動部415)
 ポイント消費量変動部415は、情報利用者に対してマーケットプレイスにおける行動へのインセンティブを与えるために、ポイント消費量を変動可能に決定する。ポイント消費量変動部415は、第二ポイント付与部413と同様に、情報利用者の行動(例えば、ポイントの消費を伴う行動)を予め定められた係数又は計算式を用いて、所定の評価期間内に情報利用者を評価する。ポイント消費量変動部415は、情報利用者のポイント消費行動、及びその他のポイント消費を伴わない行動の評価結果に基づいて、評価後に情報利用者が、所定の情報を利用するために必要なポイントの量を定めるポイント消費量を決定するものとし、評価結果が更新されるたびにポイント消費量を更新する。
(Point consumption change unit 415)
The point consumption fluctuation unit 415 variably determines the point consumption amount to provide the information user with an incentive for behavior in the marketplace. Similar to the second point giving unit 413, the point consumption change unit 415 performs a predetermined evaluation period using a predetermined coefficient or calculation formula for the action of the information user (for example, the action involving the consumption of points). Evaluate information users within. Point consumption variation unit 415, point consumer behavior information user, and based on the evaluation result of the action without other points consumption, information user after the evaluation is, points necessary to use the predetermined information The amount of point consumption is determined, and the point consumption is updated each time the evaluation result is updated.
 運営者が期待する行動量の多い情報利用者は、良好な評価を得た場合にポイント消費量が低下することによって、その他のマーケットプレイスの利用者に対してアドバンテージを得ることができる。つまり、ポイント消費量変動部415は、運営者が期待する行動を行なう量の多い利用者の活動を自動的に支援する仕組みをマーケット内に内在させるものであり、ポイント消費量変動部415は、他のインセンティブと相まって、マーケットにおける運営者の意図をより強度に発揮することができる仕組みを提供するものである。 Operators have come to expect action a large amount of information the user is, by that point consumption is reduced in the case to obtain a good evaluation, it is possible to obtain an advantage over other Marketplace users. That is, the point consumption fluctuation unit 415 has a mechanism for automatically supporting the activity of the user who performs a large amount of action expected by the operator in the market, and the point consumption fluctuation unit 415 Together with other incentives, it provides a mechanism that can make the intention of the operator in the market stronger.
(ポイント消滅処理部416)
 ポイント消滅処理部416は、時間の経過に伴って、情報提供者が保有するポイントの一部又は全部を消滅させる。ポイント消滅処理部416は、あらかじめ運営者によって設定された係数又は計算式に基づいて、所定の期間内の情報提供者の行動に対して減点評価を行なうために、ポイントを消滅させる。具体的には、ポイント消滅処理部416は、所定の期間にわたって情報提供者がマーケットプレイス内で運営者の期待に反する行動を行っている場合に、情報提供者が保有するポイントの一部又は全部を消滅させる。
(Point annihilation processing unit 416)
The point annihilation processing unit 416 causes some or all of the points held by the information provider to disappear as time passes. The point annihilation processing unit 416 annihilates the points in order to perform deduction evaluation on the behavior of the information provider within a predetermined period, based on a coefficient or a formula set in advance by the operator. Specifically, when the information provider performs an action contrary to the operator's expectation in the marketplace over a predetermined period, the point annihilation processing unit 416 partially or entirely holds the points possessed by the information provider. Disappear.
 ポイント消滅処理部416は、例えば、所定の期間内に情報提供者が実行した推奨行動の量が閾値未満である場合に、ポイントを消滅させる。具体的には、ポイント消滅処理部416は、所定の期間内に情報提供者がマーケットプレイス内で提供した情報の量が所定の量未満である場合に、情報を提供していない期間の長さに応じた量のポイントを消滅させる。ポイント消滅処理部416は、情報提供者が提供した情報の質が所定のレベルよりも低い場合に、情報の質に応じてポイントを消滅させてもよい。ポイント消滅処理部416は、例えば、不正確な情報を提供した情報提供者のポイントを消滅させる。このようにすることで、ポイント管理システムS1は、正確な情報を頻繁に提供するように情報提供者を動機付けることができる。 The point annihilation processing unit 416 annihilates the points, for example, when the amount of the recommended action performed by the information provider within a predetermined period is less than a threshold. Specifically, if the amount of information provided by the information provider in the marketplace within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined amount, the point annihilation processing unit 416 determines the length of the period during which the information is not provided. Disappear an amount of points according to the When the quality of the information provided by the information provider is lower than a predetermined level, the point annihilation processing unit 416 may cause the point to disappear according to the quality of the information. The point annihilation processing unit 416, for example, annihilates the point of the information provider who provided the incorrect information. By doing this, the point management system S1 can motivate the information provider to frequently provide accurate information.
 ポイント消滅処理部416は、所定の期間内に情報提供者が情報利用者に譲渡したポイント数が所定の数未満である場合、当該期間内に譲渡するべきポイント数から譲渡したポイント数を減算し、所定の係数を乗算した値に相当する量のポイントを消滅させてもよい。このようにすることで、ポイント管理システムS1は、ポイントを積極的に譲渡するように情報提供者を動機付けることができるので、マーケットプレイスが活性化する。 When the number of points transferred by the information provider to the information user within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the point annihilation processing unit 416 subtracts the number of transferred points from the number of points to be transferred within the period. Alternatively, points of an amount corresponding to a value multiplied by a predetermined coefficient may be eliminated. By doing this, the point management system S1 can motivate the information provider to actively transfer points, thereby activating the marketplace.
 以上のとおり、ポイント消滅処理部416が、推奨行動を実行する頻度が低い情報提供者のポイントを消滅させることにより、情報提供者が積極的に推奨行動を実行するように動機付けることができる。その結果、運営者が意図するように、マーケットプレイス内での情報の流通を活性化することが可能になる。 As described above, the point annihilation processing unit 416 can motivate the information provider to actively perform the recommended action by causing the information provider who has a low frequency of executing the recommended action to annihilate the points. As a result, it becomes possible to activate the distribution of information within the marketplace, as the operator intends.
(手数料徴収部417)
 手数料徴収部417は、第一ポイント付与部412、及び第二ポイント付与部413により情報提供者が取得したポイントを情報利用者に譲渡した際に情報提供者から徴収する手数料を管理する。手数料は、予め運営者によって1ポイント当たりの手数料(以下、単位手数料という)が定められており、手数料徴収部417は、譲渡されたポイント数に単位手数料を乗算した金額を、情報提供者のシステム現金通帳から運営者のシステム現金手帳に移動させる。なお、情報提供者が、情報利用者から譲渡したポイントの対価を受け取るかどうかは任意であり、情報提供者が、手数料よりも大きな対価を情報利用者から受け取った場合、受け取った対価と手数料との差分は情報提供者の利益になる。
(Fee charge collection unit 417)
The fee collection unit 417 manages the fee collected from the information provider when the points acquired by the information provider by the first point assignment unit 412 and the second point assignment unit 413 are transferred to the information user. As the fee, a fee per point (hereinafter referred to as a unit fee) is previously determined by the operator, and the fee collection unit 417 is a system of the information provider for an amount obtained by multiplying the number of points transferred by the unit fee. Move from the cash passbook to the operator's system cash notebook. Note that it is optional whether the information provider receives compensation for the points transferred from the information user, and if the information provider receives compensation from the information user for more than the fee, the received compensation and fee and The difference is the benefit of the informant.
 情報提供者から情報利用者にポイントを譲渡することによって、ポイントは、情報提供者のポイント通帳から情報利用者のポイント通帳に移動し、移動後のポイント数がポイント通帳に記録される。手数料徴収部417は、情報提供者のポイント通帳とシステム現金通帳を監視し、譲渡可能ポイント数を示す譲渡可能ポイント数情報を情報提供者に提供する。 By transferring points from the information provider to the information user, the points are moved from the point passbook of the information provider to the point passbook of the information user, and the number of points after movement is recorded in the point passbook. The fee collection unit 417 monitors the point passbook and system cash passbook of the information provider, and provides transferable point number information indicating the number of transferable points to the information provider.
 なお、手数料徴収部417は、情報提供者の保有ポイント数及び現金残高と、単位手数料とに基づいて譲渡可能ポイント数を決定する。手数料徴収部417は、情報提供者の保有ポイント数、又は情報提供者の現金残高を単位手数料で除算した値のいずれか小さい値を選択することにより、譲渡可能ポイント数を決定する。例えば、手数料徴収部417は、手数料が1ポイント0.4円に設定されている場合、保有ポイント数を第一上限数(例えば200万ポイント)とし、保有現金数(現金残高)÷単位手数料を第二上限数(例えば現金残高60万円÷0.4円=150万ポイント)とする。手数料徴収部417は、第一上限数及び第二上限数のうち、小さい数(上記の例の場合、第二上限数の150万ポイント)を譲渡可能ポイント数とする。 The fee collection unit 417 determines the number of transferable points based on the number of points held by the information provider, the cash balance, and the unit fee. The fee collection unit 417 determines the number of transferable points by selecting the smaller of the number of points held by the information provider or the value obtained by dividing the cash balance of the information provider by the unit fee. For example, when the fee is set to 1 point 0.4 yen, the fee collection unit 417 sets the number of owned points as the first upper limit number (for example, 2 million points), and holds the number of held cash (cash balance) / per unit fee. The second upper limit (for example, cash balance ¥ 600,000, ¥ 0.4 = 1.5 million points). The fee collection unit 417 sets the smaller number (1.5 million points of the second upper limit number in the above example) of the first upper limit number and the second upper limit number as the number of transferable points.
 なお、情報提供者が情報利用者にポイントを譲渡したにもかかわらず、情報利用者からの支払いがないという問題が発生した時には、情報提供者は、情報利用者のポイント消費行動を制限するとともに、情報利用者のポイント通帳から強制的に譲渡済みポイントを回収するように、ポイント管理サーバ3に指示することができる。情報提供者が回収できるポイント数の上限値は、情報提供者が譲渡したポイント数である。情報提供者は、情報利用者が保有するポイントの残高の範囲内で上限値までポイントを回収できる。情報提供者がポイントを回収すると、手数料徴収部417は、回収されたポイント数に基づいて、運営者の現金通帳から情報提供者の現金通帳に、徴収済みの手数料を戻す処理を実行する。 In addition, even if the information provider transfers points to the information user, when there is a problem that there is no payment from the information user, the information provider restricts the point consumption behavior of the information user. The point management server 3 can be instructed to forcibly collect the transferred points from the point user's passbook. The upper limit of the number of points that can be collected by the information provider is the number of points assigned by the information provider. The information provider can collect points up to the upper limit within the balance of points held by the information user. When the information provider collects points, the fee collection unit 417 executes a process of returning the collected fee from the cash passbook of the operator to the cash passbook of the information provider based on the number of points collected.
(奨励金支給部418)
 奨励金支給部418は、順位決定部42が決定した情報提供者の全体順位又は地域版順位、予め運営者によって設定された係数、及び情報提供者が所定の期間内に支払った手数料の総額に基づいて奨励金額を決定する。奨励金支給部418は、決定した奨励金額を、運営者のシステム現金通帳から情報提供者のシステム現金通帳に移動させる処理を実行する。
(Incentive granting department 418)
Incentive money granting section 418, the overall ranking or regional version ranking of the information provider determined by ranking determination section 42, the coefficient set in advance by the operator, and the total amount of the fee paid by the information provider within a predetermined period. Determine the incentive amount based on The incentive payment unit 418 executes processing for transferring the determined incentive amount from the system cash passbook of the operator to the system cash passbook of the information provider.
 情報提供者にとってみれば、奨励金を獲得することで、以下のようなメリットが生じる。
(1)収入を増やすことができるので、事業基盤の強化が図れる
(2)ポイントをより安く、より多く提供できるので、顧客である情報利用者との関係性を強化するとともに、及び情報利用者と接触する機会を増やせる
(3)奨励金により得られる収益を考慮して本業のサービスのために投資できる
From the information provider's point of view, acquiring incentives offers the following benefits:
(1) It is possible to increase income, so that the business base can be strengthened. (2) Since it is possible to provide more points cheaper and more, while strengthening the relationship with the information user who is the customer, and the information user Increase opportunities to contact with (3) You can invest for the services of the main business taking into consideration the profit obtained from the incentives
 したがって、このように、奨励金が情報提供者に支払われることにより、運営者が意図する方向にマーケットを誘導することが可能になる。例えば、運営者が、多くのポイントを流通させて、多くの良質な情報がやり取りされるマーケットプレイスを構築したいと考えている場合、奨励金を提供することにより、情報提供者が積極的に情報利用者にポイントを譲渡しようとするように動機付けることができる。 Accordingly, this way, the incentive is paid to the information provider, it is possible to induce the market in the direction in which the operator intends. For example, if the operator wants to distribute a lot of points and build a marketplace where a lot of good information can be exchanged, the information provider can be proactive in providing information by offering incentives. You can motivate users to try to transfer points.
 奨励金支給部418は、奨励金の額の上限値を、例えば、情報提供者が運営者に対して支払った手数料額とすることができる。このようにすることで、情報提供者は、ポイントを譲渡した際に、実質的には運営者に手数料を支払わないで済むので、積極的にポイントを譲渡するように動機付けられる。なお、奨励金支給部418は、情報提供者が運営者に対して支払った手数料額に、運営者が予め設定した係数を乗算した額を奨励金の上限額としてもよい。 The incentive payment unit 418 can set the upper limit value of the amount of incentive to, for example, the fee paid by the information provider to the operator. By doing so, the information provider can be motivated to actively transfer points, since substantially no fee will be paid to the operator when transferring points. The incentive payment unit 418 may use an amount obtained by multiplying the fee paid by the information provider to the operator by a coefficient set in advance by the administrator as the upper limit of the incentive.
[情報提供サイトの画面例]
 図21は、本実施形態の情報提供サイトに情報利用端末2がアクセスした際に情報利用端末2に表示される画面の例を示す図である。図21(a)は、情報利用端末2を利用する複数の情報利用者(A子、B子)が、ポイント管理サーバ3に対する質問を投稿する画面を示している。図21(a)においては、質問内容とともに、回答の締切日と、回答した人に与えられるポイント数が表示されている。
[Example screen of information provision site]
FIG. 21 is a view showing an example of a screen displayed on the information use terminal 2 when the information use terminal 2 accesses the information providing site of the present embodiment. FIG. 21A shows a screen on which a plurality of information users (A child and B child) who use the information use terminal 2 post questions to the point management server 3. In FIG. 21A, together with the contents of the question, the closing date of the answer and the number of points given to the person who answered are displayed.
 図21(b)は、図21(a)に示す質問のうち、A子が発した質問に対して複数の情報提供者(エージェントX、エージェントY)が提供した回答を示す図である。図21(b)においては、質問者であるA子により、エージェントYの回答がベストアンサーに選択されている。このような場合、管理部41は、質問者が設定した全てのポイント数をベストアンサーに選択された回答を投稿した情報提供者に付与してもよく、ベストアンサーに選択された回答者に配分するポイント数を他の回答者に配分するポイント数よりも多くなるようにしてもよい。 FIG. 21B is a diagram showing the answers provided by a plurality of information providers (agent X, agent Y) to the question issued by the child A among the questions shown in FIG. 21A. In FIG. 21 (b), the answer of the agent Y is selected as the best answer by the questioner A. In such a case, the management unit 41 may give all the points set by the requester to the information provider who has posted the selected answer as the best answer, and distributes the points to the answer selected as the best answer. The number of points to be made may be greater than the number of points to be distributed to other respondents.
 図22は、情報利用者が情報提供者を検索するための画面の例を示す図であり、情報提供部43が情報利用端末2に提供する提供者情報の一例である。図22においては、エージェントを検索する画面、プロフェッショナルを検索する画面、コンサルタントを検索する画面のうち、エージェントを検索するための画面が選択された状態を示している。 FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a screen for the information user to search for an information provider, and is an example of provider information provided by the information providing unit 43 to the information use terminal 2. FIG. 22 shows a state in which a screen for searching for an agent is selected among the screen for searching for an agent, the screen for searching for a professional, and the screen for searching for a consultant.
 情報利用者が、自身にとって関心がある地域に関する情報を取得できるようにするために、情報利用端末2は、情報提供端末1に関連付けられた第一地域属性情報と自身に関連付けられた第二地域属性情報とに基づいて、情報提供端末1から提供情報を取得するか否かを判定する。第一地域属性情報は、情報提供者の居住地又は活動範囲を示す情報であり、第二地域属性情報は、情報利用者の居住地、活動範囲、又は情報利用者が関心を持っている地域を示す情報である。情報利用端末2は、例えば、情報利用者が設定した地域に対応する第一地域属性情報に関連付けられた情報提供端末1から提供された情報を選択的に取得する。 Information the user, in order to be able to obtain information about the region of interest to itself, information use terminal 2, the second region associated with the first regional attribute information and its associated information providing terminal 1 Based on the attribute information, it is determined whether to obtain the provided information from the information providing terminal 1 or not. The first area attribute information is information indicating the place of residence or activities range of information providers, the second region attribute information, information the user of the residence, scope of activities, or areas where information the user is interested Information indicating The information use terminal 2 selectively acquires, for example, information provided from the information provision terminal 1 associated with the first area attribute information corresponding to the area set by the information user.
 具体的には、図22に示す画面において、情報利用者は、自身が関心を持っている地域を入力する。図22に示す画面には、情報利用者自身が居住している地域が初期値として入力されていてもよい。この場合、情報提供部43は、入力された地域に関連付けられているエージェントを、順位決定部42が決定した地域版順位が高い順に表示する。図22に示す例においては、所定の評価期間内にエージェントYに付与されたポイントが最も多く、エージェントXに付与されたポイントが2番目に多い場合の表示画面が示されている。このように、評価期間内に付与されたポイント数が多い情報提供者は検索画面で上位に表示され、ビジネスにつながる確率が高まるので、情報提供者は、図21に示したような情報提供サイトにおいて優良な情報を提供するように動機付けられることになる。 Specifically, on the screen shown in FIG. 22, the information user inputs the area in which he / she is interested. In the screen shown in FIG. 22, the area where the information user himself / herself is living may be input as an initial value. In this case, the information providing unit 43, an agent that is associated with the input area, area Version rank order determination unit 42 determines the display in descending order. In the example shown in FIG. 22, the display screen in the case where the number of points given to the agent Y is the largest and the number of points given to the agent X is the second highest in a predetermined evaluation period is shown. As described above, since the information provider who has a large number of points given in the evaluation period is displayed at the top on the search screen and the probability of connecting to the business is increased, the information provider has the information providing site as shown in FIG. Will be motivated to provide good information.
[ポイント付与数の決定方法]
 図23及び図24は、管理部41により実行されるポイント付与処理について説明するための表である。図23及び図24においては、複数の情報提供者のそれぞれが提供した情報の内容、提供した情報に対する評価点、情報を提供する行為に関連付けられた係数、評価点と係数とに基づいて決定された付与ポイント数、及び各情報提供者が評価期間内に付与されたポイント数である累計付与ポイント数が示されている。
[How to determine the number of points given]
FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 are tables for explaining the point giving process performed by the management unit 41. In FIGS. 23 and 24, it is determined based on the content of information provided by each of a plurality of information providers, an evaluation point for the provided information, a coefficient associated with an action for providing information, an evaluation point and a coefficient The number of granted points and the cumulative number of granted points which is the number of points given each information provider in the evaluation period are shown.
 図23及び図24における行は、情報提供者が情報を提供する1回の行為に対応しており、時系列に並んでいる。情報提供者Aは、図23及び図24に示す期間内に情報を2回提供しており、累計ポイントが増加していることがわかる。順位決定部42は、所定の評価期間内における累計付与ポイント数に基づいて、複数の情報提供者の順位を決定することができる。 Rows in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 correspond to one action of the information provider providing information, and are arranged in time series. The information provider A provides information twice within the period shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, and it can be seen that the cumulative points increase. The order determination unit 42 can determine the order of a plurality of information providers based on the total number of granted points in a predetermined evaluation period.
 図23によれば、情報利用者がベストアンサーに選択した情報に対しては評価点5が与えられており、最も多いポイント数が付与されている。一方、評価点1が与えられた場合には、最も少ないポイント数が付与されている。 According to FIG. 23, for the information selected by the information user as the best answer, the evaluation point 5 is given, and the largest number of points is given. On the other hand, when the evaluation point 1 is given, the smallest number of points is given.
 図23においては、係数が100に固定されているが、図24においては、評価点によって異なる係数が割り当てられている。運営者が、優良な情報に対して高く評価したいと考える場合、運営者は、図24に示すように、評価点が高い場合の係数を大きくすることで、評価点が高い場合に付与するポイント数を、図24に示す場合よりも多くすることができる。このように、運営者は、係数を調整することにより、情報提供者の行動をコントロールすることができる。 In FIG. 23, the coefficient is fixed to 100, but in FIG. 24, different coefficients are assigned depending on the evaluation points. When the operator wants to highly evaluate superior information, as shown in FIG. 24, the operator gives points when the evaluation point is high by increasing the coefficient when the evaluation point is high. The number can be more than that shown in FIG. Thus, the operator can control the information provider's behavior by adjusting the coefficient.
[処理シーケンス]
 図25は、図21に示した情報提供サイトにおいて質問と回答がやり取りされる際の情報提供端末1、情報利用端末2及びポイント管理サーバ3の間での処理シーケンスを示す図である。まず、情報利用者が情報利用端末2において質問を投稿すると(S11)、情報利用端末2は、投稿された質問をポイント管理サーバ3に送信する。ポイント管理サーバ3は、受信した質問を情報提供サイトに掲載する(S12)。
[Processing sequence]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a processing sequence among the information providing terminal 1, the information using terminal 2 and the point management server 3 when a question and an answer are exchanged at the information providing site shown in FIG. First, when the information user posts a question on the information use terminal 2 (S11), the information use terminal 2 transmits the posted question to the point management server 3. The point management server 3 posts the received question on the information providing site (S12).
 続いて、情報提供者が情報提供端末1において情報提供サイトを閲覧するための操作を行なうと(S13)、情報提供端末1は、情報提供サイト画面をポイント管理サーバ3に要求する。要求を受けたポイント管理サーバ3は、情報提供サイト画面を情報提供端末1に送信し、情報提供端末1は、情報提供サイトを表示する(S14)。 Subsequently, when the information provider performs an operation for browsing the information provision site in the information provision terminal 1 (S13), the information provision terminal 1 requests the point management server 3 for the information provision site screen. The point management server 3 that has received the request, sends the information providing site screen to the information providing terminal 1, the information providing terminal 1 displays the information providing site (S14).
 情報提供者が情報提供端末1において回答を投稿する操作を行なうと(S15)、情報提供端末1は、入力された回答をポイント管理サーバ3に送信する。ポイント管理サーバ3は、情報提供端末1から回答が送信されたことに応じて、情報提供端末1を使用する情報提供者に対してポイントを付与する(S16)。 When the information provider performs an operation to post an answer on the information providing terminal 1 (S15), the information providing terminal 1 transmits the input answer to the point management server 3. The point management server 3 gives points to the information provider who uses the information providing terminal 1 in response to the response being transmitted from the information providing terminal 1 (S16).
 続いて、ポイント管理サーバ3は、情報提供者による回答が反映された情報提供サイト画面を情報利用端末2に送信し、情報利用端末2は、回答が反映された情報提供サイト画面を表示する(S17)。情報利用端末2において、情報利用者が、情報提供者による回答をベストアンサーとして選択すると(S18)、情報利用端末2は、情報提供者による回答に対する評価を示す評価情報をポイント管理サーバ3に送信する。 Then, the point management server 3 transmits the information providing site screen the answer by the information provider is reflected in the information use terminal 2, information use terminal 2 displays the information providing site screen answer is reflected ( S17). In the information use terminal 2, when the information user selects the answer by the information provider as the best answer (S18), the information use terminal 2 transmits the evaluation information indicating the evaluation for the answer by the information provider to the point management server 3 Do.
 ポイント管理サーバ3は、情報利用端末2から受信した評価情報に基づいて、情報提供者に対してさらにポイントを付与する(S19)。ポイント管理サーバ3は、例えば、情報提供者が投稿した回答がベストアンサーに選択されたことに対応するポイントを情報提供者に付与する。ポイント管理サーバ3は、所定の評価期間ごとに情報提供者の順位を更新する。例えば、ポイント管理サーバ3は、新たにポイントを付与したことに応じて、過去の所定の期間内に情報提供者に付与された累計ポイント数を計算し、累計ポイント数に基づいて情報提供者の順位を更新する(S20)。 The point management server 3 further gives points to the information provider based on the evaluation information received from the information use terminal 2 (S19). For example, the point management server 3 gives the information provider a point corresponding to the answer posted by the information provider being selected as the best answer. The point management server 3 updates the ranking of the information providers for each predetermined evaluation period. For example, the point management server 3 calculates the total number of points given to the information provider in a predetermined period in the past in response to the new points being given, and based on the total number of points, The order is updated (S20).
[変形例]
 上記の説明においては、加盟店が情報提供者であるものとしたが、加盟店が、情報提供者であるとともに情報利用者であってもよい。情報提供者としてマーケットプレイスに情報を提供する人又は会社が、情報利用者が有する機能を利用したいと望む場合、情報提供者としてのアカウントで使用されているメールアドレスを用いて、情報利用者としてのアカウントを作成することができる。この場合、情報提供者は、アカウントを用いてログインした後に、操作メニューを用いて、会員属性を切り換えることにより、情報提供者向けの機能を使用するか、情報利用者向けの機能を使用するかを選択することができる。同様の処理により、情報利用者が情報提供者の機能を使用することも可能である。
[Modification]
In the above description, the member store is the information provider, but the member store may be the information provider and the information user. A person or company to provide information to the marketplace as an information provider, if you wish to use the function of information the user has, by using the e-mail address that is used in the account as an information provider, as the information user Can create an account. In this case, whether the information provider uses the function for the information provider or the function for the information user by switching the member attribute using the operation menu after logging in using the account? Can be selected. It is also possible for the information user to use the function of the information provider by similar processing.
 例えば、情報提供者たる加盟店である有料職業紹介事業者(エージェント)は、求人クライアント(企業)に、ポイント管理システムS1が内在する採用マーケットプレイスを活用(例えば、「転職市場」という転職マーケットプレイスへの企業情報及び求人情報の発信)するよう促し、クライアント企業の採用広告宣伝費を収益源として、リアルマーケットにおいてポイントを販売し、加盟店は収益としてもよい。ただし、この場合、有料職業紹介事業者は、事前にマーケットプレイス内において運営者が推奨する行動を実行してポイントを獲得しておく必要がある。 For example, a paid employment introduction company (agent), which is a member store serving as an information provider, utilizes a hiring client (company) using a hiring market place in which the point management system S1 is embedded (e.g. prompt you to companies sending of information and job information) to, the adoption advertising expenses of client companies as a source of revenue, selling point in the real market, the merchant may be as revenue. However, in this case, the pay placement agency needs to carry out the action recommended by the operator in the marketplace to obtain points in advance.
 また、クライアント企業(情報利用者たる企業会員)は、エージェントからリアルマーケットにおいて購入したポイントをマーケットプレイスの一種である採用マーケットプレイスで消費し、意図する様々な情報(採用・就職・転職マーケットに関する情報)を情報利用者たる個人会員である求職者(企業会員の変化した形態)に対して発信することにより情報提供してもよい。 Also, the client company (company member who is an information user) consumes the points purchased from the agent in the real market in the hiring market place, which is a kind of market place, and various information intended (information about the hiring, employment, job change market) The information may be provided by transmitting to the job seeker (the changed form of the corporate member) who is an individual member who is an information user.
 そして、求職者である個人会員(企業会員等の一つの形態)は、企業会員、加盟店、及び個人会員が発信する様々な情報から自分の求める企業及び職業を選定すること、又は有用なエージェントに相談することにより、発信された情報を利用してもよい。なお、情報利用者がその他の会員から提供された情報を利用する場合、又はその他の会員に情報を提供する場合の消費ポイント量は、運営者がどのようにでも設定できるようにしてもよい。例えば、個人会員は全ての情報利用及び情報提供における消費ポイント量を0としてもよい。 Also, individual members who are job seekers (one form of company members etc.) can select their desired company and occupation from various information transmitted by company members, affiliated stores, and individual members, or useful agents You may use the transmitted information by consulting with. In the case where the information user utilizes the information provided by the other members, or consumption point the amount of the case of providing information to other member may be set publisher any way. For example, the individual member may set the consumption point amount in all information use and information provision to zero.
 また、個人会員は、過去又は現在において自らが勤めた企業又は勤めている企業に対する様々な視点からの評価を他の会員(例えば個人会員、企業会員、加盟店)に対して発信してもよい。そして、この場合には、他の会員は、企業自身の発信する情報以外にも、他の会員から提供された企業の情報をも閲覧(情報利用)することができる。 In addition, individual members may send evaluations from various viewpoints to a company or a company that they have worked for in the past or present to other members (for example, individual members, company members, affiliated stores). . And, in this case, other members can also browse (information use) information on companies provided by other members in addition to the information transmitted from the company itself.
 また、情報提供者たる加盟店が、日々の業務の中で難しい出来事があり自らで答えを導き出せないときに、他の加盟店に掲示板で質問への回答(情報提供)を求めること(情報利用)ができるようにしてもよい。このようにすることで、情報提供者が、他の情報提供者から提供される情報を利用する情報利用者として、答えを導き出すために必要な情報を得ることができる。なお、加盟店は、他の加盟店が発信しているコラム等を閲覧(情報利用)してもよく、他の加盟店によるコラムを評価してもよい。さらに、マーケットプレイスでの活動の活発な加盟店については、他の利用者への情報接触頻度を高めるように順位付けしてもよい。 In addition, when the affiliated store, as a member of the information provider, has a difficult event in daily work and can not draw an answer on its own, asking other member stores to answer a question (provide information) on a bulletin board (information use ) May be possible. By doing this, the information provider can obtain information necessary for deriving an answer as an information user who uses information provided by other information providers. Note that a member store may read (use information) a column or the like transmitted by another member store, or may evaluate a column by another member store. In addition, for active merchant activities in the marketplace, it may be ranked so as to increase the information frequency of contact to other users.
 マーケットプレイスは、例えば、情報提供者たる加盟店を結婚相談業者とし、情報利用者を上記の採用マーケットプレイスにおける企業会員及び個人会員と同様の機能の全部又は一部を有する、独身者に限定した婚活専用のマーケットプレイスであってもよい。この場合、ポイント管理システムS1は、情報提供者は結婚相談業者、及び情報利用者は独身者の2種類の会員による婚活専用のマーケットプレイスを構築できる。マーケットプレイスの有用性を考慮して、ポイント管理システムS1は、情報利用者を、第一の情報利用者である男性、又は第二の情報利用者である女性に属性付けし、各種のサービスを属性ごとに特徴付けて提供してもよい。 The marketplace, for example, limited the affiliation store as a marriage counselor, and limited the information users to singles who have all or part of the same functions as corporate members and individual members in the employment marketplace described above. It may be a market place exclusively for marriage activities. In this case, the point management system S1 can construct a marketplace dedicated to marriage by two types of members: an information provider, a marriage counselor, and an information user, single members. In view of the utility of the marketplace, point management system S1, the information users, men a first information user, or attributes assigned to women is the second information users, various services It may be characterized and provided for each attribute.
 マーケットプレイスは、例えば、情報提供者たる加盟店を不動産仲介業者とし、情報利用者を、不動産を売り買い若しくは貸し借りしようとする個人、個人事業主、法人、又は団体に限定した、不動産専用のマーケットプレイスであってもよい。さらに、このマーケットプレイスの情報利用者は、上記の採用マーケットプレイスにおける企業会員と同様の機能の全部又は一部を有する売主若しくは貸主向けの機能、及び前記採用マーケットプレイスにおける個人会員と同様の機能の全部又は一部を有する買主若しくは借主向けの機能の双方を同一情報利用者アカウント内に個別に有していてもよい。 The marketplace is a marketplace dedicated to real estate, for example, with a member store serving as an information provider as a real estate broker, and an information consumer limited to individuals, sole proprietors, corporations, or groups who intend to buy, sell or lend real estate. It may be Furthermore, the information user of this marketplace has functions for sellers or lenders having all or part of the same functions as the corporate members in the employment marketplace described above, and functions similar to the individual members in the employment marketplace. Both functions for buyers or borrowers having all or part may be individually provided in the same information user account.
 マーケットプレイスは、例えば、情報提供者たる加盟店を保険ブローカー(保険仲立人)とし、情報利用者を、保険商品を販売しようとする保険会社、及び保険商品を購入しようとする個人、個人事業主、法人、又は団体に限定した、保険専用のマーケットプレイスであってもよい。このマーケットプレイスの情報利用者は、上記の採用マーケットプレイスにおける企業会員と同様の機能の全部又は一部を有する第一の情報利用者である保険会社、及び前記採用マーケットプレイスにおける個人会員と同様の機能の全部又は一部を有する第二の情報利用者である個人、個人事業主、法人、又は団体としてもよい。 The marketplace, for example, uses a member store as an information provider as an insurance broker (insurance broker), an information user as an insurance company who intends to sell insurance products, and an individual who wants to purchase insurance products, an individual business owner It may be a market dedicated to insurance, limited to corporations, or organizations. The information user of this marketplace is the same as the insurance company which is the first information user having all or part of the same function as the corporate member in the employment marketplace described above, and the individual member in the employment marketplace. It may be an individual, an individual business owner, a corporation, or a group who is a second information user having all or part of the functions.
 この場合に、第一の情報利用者は、保有するポイントを消費して情報提供者からの提供情報を利用するだけでなく、保有ポイントを消費して自社のソルベンシーマージン比率やディスクロージャー等の情報を第二の情報利用者に提供してもよい。また、第一の情報利用者は、保有するポイントを消費して自社の保険商品の情報を、第二の情報利用者に提供してもよい。 In this case, the first information user not only consumes the owned points and uses the provided information from the information provider, but also consumes the owned points and information such as the company's solvency margin ratio and disclosure. It may be provided to the second information user. In addition, the first of the information user, the consuming point to hold information of insurance products of their own, may be provided to the second of information users.
 なお、第二の情報利用者がその他の会員から提供された情報を利用する場合、又はその他の会員に情報を提供する場合の消費ポイント量は、運営者が自由に設定できるようにしてもよい。例えば、ポイント消費量変動部415は、運営者からの指示に基づいて、第二の情報利用者による全ての情報利用及び情報提供における消費ポイント量を0としてもよい。そして、このようなマーケットプレイスにおいて取り扱うことができる情報は本明細書に記載の情報に限られず、例えば、銀行系金融商品の情報を取り扱うマーケットプレイス(加盟店はファイナンシャルプランナー等)、証券系金融商品の情報を取り扱うマーケットプレイス(加盟店はファイナンシャルプランナー等)、店舗による商品、若しくはサービス提供の情報を取り扱うマーケットプレイス(加盟店はブロガー等)、又は医療、若しくは介護の情報を取り扱うマーケットプレイス(加盟店は社会福祉士等)等において提供されるマーケットプレイスの情報であってもよい。 When the second information user uses information provided by other members, or when providing information to other members, the amount of consumption points may be freely set by the operator. . For example, the point consumption change unit 415 may set the consumption point amount in all the information use and information provision by the second information user to 0 based on an instruction from the operator. And, information that can be handled in such marketplaces is not limited to the information described in this specification, and, for example, marketplaces that deal with information on banking-related financial instruments (affiliated shops are financial planners etc.), securities-based financial instruments Market information handling information (affiliated store is a financial planner etc.), a market place handling information on products or services provided by a store (affiliated shop a blogger etc.), or a market place handling medical or nursing information May be market place information provided by a social worker etc.).
 マーケットプレイスは、例えば、情報提供者たる加盟店を自動車評論家、自動車関連業界記者、又はコラムニスト等とし、情報利用者を、自動車を販売しようとする自動車メーカー、及び自動車を購入しようとする個人、個人事業主、法人、又は団体に限定した、自動車専用のマーケットプレイスがあってもよい。このマーケットプレイスの情報利用者は、前記採用マーケットプレイスにおける企業会員と同様の機能の全部又は一部を有する第一の情報利用者である自動車メーカー、及び上記の採用マーケットプレイスにおける個人会員と同様の機能の全部又は一部を有する第二の情報利用者である個人、個人事業主、法人、又は団体としてもよい。 The marketplace, for example, uses a member store as an information provider as a car critic, a car-related industry reporter, or a columnist, etc., and a car user who wants to sell a car, and an individual who wants to buy a car. There may be a market place dedicated to cars, limited to a sole proprietor, a corporation, or a group. The information user of this marketplace is the same as the automobile manufacturer who is the first information user having all or part of the same function as the corporate member in the employment marketplace and the same as the individual member in the employment marketplace above. It may be an individual, an individual business owner, a corporation, or a group who is a second information user having all or part of the functions.
 この場合に、第一の情報利用者は、保有するポイントを消費して情報提供者からの提供情報を利用するだけでなく、保有ポイントを消費して自社の保有技術やブランディング戦略上の発信したい情報等を第二の情報利用者に提供してもよい。また、第一の情報利用者は、保有するポイントを消費して自社の自動車、又は関連する情報を、第二の情報利用者に提供してもよい。 In this case, the first information user not only consumes the owned points and uses the provided information from the information provider but also consumes the owned points and wants to disseminate it on their own owned technology and branding strategy Information or the like may be provided to the second information user. Further, the first information user, its automotive consuming point carrying, or related information, may be provided to the second information user.
 なお、自動車専用のマーケットプレイスは、仮想現実(VR:Virtual Reality)技術を用いた三次元仮想空間としてサービスを提供してもよく、また、このような形態のマーケットプレイスは、例えば、住宅等を建築する建築業界、リゾート施設等を運営する観光業界、又は中古住宅等を提供する不動産流通業界等に向けてサービスを提供してもよい。こうすることで、利用者は、より充実した情報を提供、又は利用することができるようになる。 Note that a marketplace dedicated to automobiles may provide a service as a three-dimensional virtual space using virtual reality (VR) technology, and such a marketplace may be, for example, a home. A service may be provided for the building industry to be built, the tourism industry that operates resort facilities, etc., or the real estate distribution industry that offers used housing etc. In this way, the user can provide or use more complete information.
 さらに、上記以外の変形例としては、例えば、マーケットプレイスにおいて情報提供者は、保有するポイントを情報利用者に譲渡する機会がない場合、又は少ない場合等のように、保有ポイントを余らせている場合に、管理サーバによって手数料を徴収されることなく、ポイントを必要とするその他の情報提供者に保有ポイントを譲渡することができるようにしてもよい。こうすることによって、マーケットプレイス内でポイントがより流通しやすくなる。また、ポイントを必要とする情報利用者は、よりポイントを取得、及び消費しやすくなり、マーケットプレイスを活性化させることができるようになる。 Furthermore, as a modification other than the above, for example, in the marketplace, the information provider leaves excess holding points, as in the case where there is no opportunity to transfer the holding points to the information user, or when there are few. In this case, it may be possible to transfer the possessed points to other information providers who need the points without being collected by the management server. This makes it easier to distribute points within the marketplace. Further, the information user in need of points, get more points, and easier to consume, it is possible to activate the marketplace.
 また、上記以外の変形例としては、例えば、複数のマーケットプレイス間のポイントの移動を可能とするポイント交換マーケットプレイスがあってもよい。この場合に、ポイント交換マーケットプレイスを利用することができるユーザを情報提供者に限ってもよい。情報提供者は、ポイント交換マーケットプレイスを利用して、同一マーケットプレイス、又は異なるマーケットプレイスのその他の情報提供者との間で、保有するポイントと預け入れている金銭とを交換することができる。こうすることによって、個別のマーケットプレイスに限らず、複数のマーケットプレイスをまたがりポイントがより流通しやすくなる。また、ポイントを必要とする情報利用者は、よりポイントを取得、及び消費しやすくなり、情報利用者が利用するそれぞれのマーケットプレイスを活性化させることができるようになる。なお、ポイント交換マーケットプレイスにおいて情報提供者が他の情報提供者にポイントを譲渡する際に運営者に徴収される手数料、及び運営者が支給する奨励金は、運営者が設定する設定情報により任意の手段で制御できるものとする。 Also, as another modified example, there may be, for example, a point exchange marketplace that enables the movement of points between a plurality of marketplaces. In this case, users who can use the point exchange marketplace may be limited to the information provider. An information provider can use point exchange marketplaces to exchange holdings and deposited money with other information providers in the same marketplace or in different marketplaces. This makes it easier to distribute points across multiple marketplaces, not just individual marketplaces. In addition, information users who need points can acquire points more easily and can be more easily consumed, and can activate respective marketplaces used by the information users. In addition, the fee charged to the operator when the information provider transfers points to other information providers in the point exchange marketplace and the incentive paid by the operator are arbitrary according to the setting information set by the operator. It can be controlled by means of
 そして、運営者は、リアルマーケットの態様、及び運営者の目的に沿って、マーケットプレイスを構築し、マーケットプレイスの設定情報を変更し、及びマーケットプレイスを変容、また離合集散等させることによって、より強度にマーケットプレイスの情報流通を活性化させることができるようになり、マーケットプレイスはもとより、リアルマーケットの情報を効果的に流通させることができるようになる。 Then, the operator builds the marketplace, changes the setting information of the marketplace, and changes the marketplace and makes the marketplace more consistent with the aspect of the real market and the purpose of the operator. It will be possible to strongly activate the information distribution of marketplaces, and it will be possible to effectively distribute real market information as well as marketplaces.
 さらに、上記以外の変形例として、マーケットプレイスにおいて付与されるポイントの量や手数料等の決定に用いられる設定情報を、運営者自身ではなく人工知能技術を用いて更新するようにしてもよい。この場合、人工知能を有するポイント管理サーバ3が設定情報を決定してもよく、ポイント管理サーバ3が外部の人工知能サーバ(以下、AIサーバという)から設定情報を取得し、取得した設定情報に基づいてマーケットプレイスにおける各種の処理を実行してもよい。 Furthermore, as a modification other than the above, setting information used to determine the amount of points, fees, and the like given in the marketplace may be updated using artificial intelligence technology instead of the operator itself. In this case, the point management server 3 having artificial intelligence may determine the setting information, and the point management server 3 acquires setting information from an external artificial intelligence server (hereinafter referred to as an AI server), and obtains the acquired setting information. Various processes in the marketplace may be performed on the basis of this.
 AIサーバが適切な設定情報を生成することができるようにするために、ポイント管理サーバ3は、ポイント管理サーバ3に接続されたAIサーバに、情報提供端末1及び情報利用端末2とポイント管理サーバ3との間で送受信されたデータを入力する。AIサーバは入力されたデータ、及びマーケットプレイスの情報に基づいて、マーケットプレイスで使用される一部又は全ての設定情報を更新する設定情報データを生成し、AIサーバは、生成した設定情報データをポイント管理サーバ3に送信することにより、設定情報を更新してもよい。 In order to enable the AI server to generate appropriate setting information, the point management server 3 sends the information providing terminal 1 and the information using terminal 2 and the point management server to the AI server connected to the point management server 3. Input the data sent and received between 3 and 3. The AI server generates setting information data for updating some or all setting information used in the marketplace based on the input data and market place information, and the AI server generates the generated setting information data. The setting information may be updated by transmitting to the point management server 3.
 また、AIサーバから送信された設定情報データを受信したポイント管理サーバ3は直ちに設定情報を更新しなくてもよい。また、AIサーバは、生成した設定情報データを直ちにポイント管理サーバ3に送信しなくてもよい。ポイント管理サーバ3は、AIサーバが設定情報データを生成してから任意の期間が経過した後に、元の設定情報から新たな設定情報に更新してもよい。この場合に、マーケットプレイスの運営者は、任意の期間内に、更新後の新たな設定情報をマーケットプレイスの参加者に告知してもよい。 Also, the point management server 3 that has received the setting information data transmitted from the AI server may not immediately update the setting information. Further, the AI server may not immediately transmit the generated setting information data to the point management server 3. The point management server 3 may update the original setting information to new setting information after an arbitrary period has elapsed since the AI server generated the setting information data. In this case, the organizer of the marketplace may notify the participants of the marketplace of the updated new setting information within an arbitrary time period.
 なお、マーケットプレイスの参加者への設定情報の告知方法は任意である。例えば、マーケットプレイス内に設定情報変更特設サイト等(情報提供サイトの一つ)を設けて、マーケットプレイスの参加者が当該サイトにアクセスすることにより最新の設定情報を把握できるようにしてもよい。 In addition, the notification method of the setting information to the participant of a marketplace is arbitrary. For example, a setting information change special site or the like (one of information providing sites) may be provided in the marketplace so that participants of the marketplace can grasp the latest setting information by accessing the site.
 以上のとおり、AIサーバが設定情報を生成することによって、マーケットプレイスが大きくなったり、複数のマーケットプレイスが構築されたりした場合に複雑化する設定情報の更新作業をAIサーバにより全自動処理させることができる。その結果、運営者の手間を軽減させるとともに、人為的ミス、及び人為的不正を介在させることなく、マーケットプレイスにとって効果的な設定情報を導き出すことが可能となる。また、AIサーバが設定情報を生成することによって、設定情報を更新する間隔を短くすることもできるようになり、マーケットプレイスの効果的な発展に寄与するものとなる。 As described above, the generation of setting information by the AI server causes the AI server to automatically process the updating operation of the setting information which is complicated when the market place is enlarged or a plurality of marketplaces are constructed. Can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the operator and to derive effective setting information for the marketplace without intervention of human error and human error. In addition, the generation of the setting information by the AI server makes it possible to shorten the interval for updating the setting information, which contributes to the effective development of the marketplace.
 さらに、上記以外の変形例として、ポイント管理システムS1が、複数のマーケットプレイスを同時に提供する形態が考えられる。ポイント管理システムS1が複数のマーケットプレイスを同時に提供する場合、情報提供者及び情報利用者が、同一アカウントを用いて、異なるマーケットプレイスを同時に利用できるようにしてもよい。つまり、情報提供者及び情報利用者は、現金、ポイント、及び自身の情報を複数のマーケットプレイスにおいて共通に使用することができる。 Furthermore, as a modification other than the above, it is conceivable that the point management system S1 provides a plurality of marketplaces simultaneously. When the point management system S1 provides a plurality of marketplaces simultaneously, the information provider and the information user may be able to use different marketplaces simultaneously by using the same account. That is, the information provider and the information user can share cash, points, and their own information in a plurality of marketplaces.
 具体的には、同一の運営者が運営するマーケットプレイスが複数ある場合に、利用者、加盟店、及び運営者は、一つのアカウントによって複数のマーケットプレイスを利用することができるようにしてもよい。この場合に、ポイント管理サーバ3は、加盟店又は運営者のシステム現金通帳、及び、利用者又は加盟店のポイント通帳は、アカウントごとに管理してもよく、複数のマーケットプレイスをまたがって共通に管理してもよい。また、ポイント管理サーバ3は、利用者及び加盟店に対して付与する特典についても、複数のマーケットプレイスにまたがって付与してもよい。さらに、ポイント管理サーバ3は、特典を付与する際に用いられる情報利用者及び情報提供者の評価についても、複数のマーケットプレイスにまたがる行動に基づいて評価してもよい。 Specifically, when there are a plurality of marketplaces operated by the same operator, the user, affiliated store, and the operator may be able to use a plurality of marketplaces with one account. . In this case, the point management server 3 may manage the system cash passbook of the affiliated store or the operator and the point passbook of the user or the affiliated store for each account, and it is common across multiple marketplaces. You may manage. In addition, the point management server 3 may also give the benefits given to the user and the member store over a plurality of marketplaces. Furthermore, the point management server 3 may also evaluate the evaluation of the information user and the information provider used when granting a benefit, based on the action across a plurality of marketplaces.
 このようにすることで、複数のマーケットプレイスを含む全体におけるポイントの流動性が高まり、ポイントの価値が安定又は上昇し、マーケットプレイスへの参加者のポイントに対する信認性が上昇することにより、マーケットプレイスの信認性の上昇にもつながる。 In this way, the increased fluidity points throughout including a plurality of marketplace, and stable or increased value of the point, by confidence against participants points to Marketplace rises marketplace It also leads to an increase in credibility.
 また、このように複数のマーケットプレイスを連動させることにより、運営者は、収益性の高い他のマーケットプレイスとともに運営することで、収益性が低いと見込まれる公益的なマーケットプレイスを運営することも可能になる。この際、利用者の消費ポイント量、及び加盟店の評価等を決定する際に、公益的要素に鑑みて決定された設定情報を用いることで、有用な公益的マーケットプレイスでのサービスを提供することができるようになる。このように、複数のマーケットプレイスを連動させることは、収益性が低い、いわゆる公益型ビジネスの広告宣伝市場を発展させるという点でも役立つ。 Also, by linking multiple marketplaces in this way, the operator can also operate a non-profit market place that is expected to be less profitable by operating with other profitable market places. It will be possible. At this time, when determining the consumption point amount of the user, the evaluation of the affiliated store, etc., by using the setting information determined in view of the public interest factor, the service at the useful public interest market is provided. Will be able to In this way, linking a plurality of marketplaces also helps to develop the low-profit, so-called utility-type advertising market.
[ポイント管理システムS1による効果]
 以上説明したように、ポイント管理システムS1は、情報提供端末1から情報利用端末2に提供された提供情報に基づいて、情報提供者にポイントを付与する管理部41と、管理部41により付与されたポイントの数に基づいて、複数の情報提供者の順位を決定する順位決定部42とを有する。そして、情報利用者が情報提供者を検索する際に、順位決定部42が決定した順位が高い情報提供者を情報利用者が認識しやすいように、情報利用端末2に情報提供者が表示される。
[Effect by point management system S1]
As described above, the point management system S1 is assigned by the management unit 41 that gives points to the information provider based on the provided information provided to the information use terminal 2 from the information provision terminal 1, and the management unit 41. And an order determination unit 42 that determines the order of a plurality of information providers based on the number of points. Then, when the information user searches for the information provider, the information provider is displayed on the information use terminal 2 so that the information user can easily recognize the information provider having the high order determined by the order determining unit 42. Ru.
 ポイント管理システムS1がこのような構成を有することで、情報提供者は、より多くのポイントが付与されるために情報を提供するように動機付けられるので、有用な情報を提供できる情報提供者が上位に表示される。その結果、情報利用者が、有用な情報を提供できる情報提供者を認識しやすくなり、有用な情報に接触できる確率が高まる。 By point management system S1 has such a configuration, the information provider, so motivated to provide information to more points are given, the information provider can provide useful information It is displayed at the top. As a result, the information user can easily recognize the information provider who can provide useful information, and the probability of being able to contact useful information is increased.
 また、ポイント管理システムS1において情報提供者に付与されるポイントは、運営者が設定した係数によってコントロールされる。したがって、運営者は、運営者が期待するように情報が流通するべくマーケットプレイスを管理することができる。そして、運営者は、マーケットプレイスを各種のマッチングに活用することで、以下のような効果を得ることができる。 Further, the points given to the information provider in the point management system S1 are controlled by the coefficient set by the operator. Thus, the operator can manage the marketplace to disseminate information as the operator expects. Then, the operator can obtain the following effects by utilizing the marketplace for various matching.
(1)情報の効果的流通による、求める者同士の出会い、新たな発見、又は選択におけるミスマッチの防止とベストマッチングの推進
(2)情報の効果的流通、及びベストマッチングの推進による、リアルマーケットにおける流動性向上の阻害要因の排除と促進要因の創造
(3)リアルマーケットにおける流動性向上による、生産性、付加価値、又は幸福度上昇サイクルの阻害要因の排除と促進要因の創造
(4)ベストマッチングの推進、流動性向上、及び付加価値上昇等による、リアルマーケットの活性化の阻害要因の排除と促進要因の創造
(5)小規模専門事業者の専門性の向上及び見込み客への告知拡大の阻害要因の排除と促進要因の創造
(6)非効率広告手段の排除と高効率広告手段の創造
(7)情報提供者と情報利用者、情報提供者と情報提供者、及び情報利用者と情報利用者とが接触する機会の阻害要因の排除と促進要因の創造
(1) Encountering seekers through effective distribution of information, prevention of mismatches in new discoveries or choices and promotion of best matching (2) Effective distribution of information, and promotion of best matching in the real market by flow improver in creation (3) real market driving factors and elimination of impediments to the fluidity improving productivity, creation of exclusion and Drivers impediment value-added, or happiness rise cycle (4) best match Elimination of impediments to activation of the real market and creation of facilitators by promotion of liquidity, improvement of liquidity, and increase of added value etc. (5) Improvement of specialization of small-scale specialists and expansion of notification to prospective customers Elimination of impeding factors and creation of promoting factors (6) Elimination of inefficient advertising means and creation of highly efficient advertising means (7) Information providers and information users, information provision An information provider, and the information user and information users and the creation of exclusion and Drivers impediment opportunity to contact
<第四実施形態>
[ポイント管理システムS2の構成]
 本発明の一実施形態である第四実施形態に係るポイント管理システムS2によって提供される情報提供サイトとして、転職支援情報サイト(以下、「転職サイト」と略記する。)を例に挙げて、ポイント管理システムS2の構成を以下に説明する。ここで、本実施形態における情報提供サイトは、主に検索エンジンやリンク集などを中心として構成された、利用者がインターネット上で情報を探し出すための基点となるページをトップページとして有するポータルサイトを始めとする各種のウェブサイトである。情報提供サイトは、総合的な情報を取りまとめたものに限らず、特定分野の窓口として関連情報やリンク集の整理などを行っているものも含まれるものとする。また、以下の説明における利用者とは、情報提供者としての側面と、閲覧者としての側面を併せ持つ存在である。
Fourth Embodiment
[Configuration of point management system S2]
As an information providing site provided by the point management system S2 according to the fourth embodiment which is an embodiment of the present invention, a job change support information site (hereinafter abbreviated as "job change site") is taken as an example, and points are provided. The configuration of the management system S2 will be described below. Here, the information providing site in the present embodiment is mainly configured around a like search engines and links, the portal site which the user has a page as a base point for locating information on the Internet as a homepage It is various websites to start with. The information providing site is not limited to the one that collects comprehensive information, but includes the one in which related information and a collection of links are organized as a window in a specific field. Further, the user in the following description is an existence having both an aspect as an information provider and an aspect as a viewer.
 本実施形態に係るポイント管理システムS2によって提供される転職サイトを利用する利用者には、個人と企業とを適切にマッチングするための仲介者の役割を果たす職業紹介事業者や人材紹介事業者(以下、「エージェント」と略記する。)に該当する第一の利用者と、転職を希望する個人や人材の獲得を希望する企業に該当する第二の利用者と、が存在する。ここで、企業及びエージェントは第三実施形態における情報提供者に対応する側面を強く有する利用者であり、個人は第一実施形態における情報利用者に対応する情報閲覧者としての側面を強く有する利用者である。 For users who use the job change site provided by the point management system S2 according to the present embodiment, a job introduction business person or a staff introduction business person acting as an intermediary for matching an individual and a company appropriately Hereinafter, there will be a first user corresponding to “agent” and a second user corresponding to a company desiring to acquire an individual or a human resource who wishes to change his / her job. Here, a company and an agent are users who strongly have an aspect corresponding to an information provider in the third embodiment, and individuals are strongly used an aspect as an information viewer corresponding to an information user in the first embodiment It is a
 第二の利用者は、より自分に合った職場、又は、より理想に近い人材に巡り会うために、転職サイト内で自己の情報を発信したり他者の情報を収集したりする。一方、第一の利用者は、転職サイト内で、自己の情報に加えて転職や採用に役立つ情報を発信することで、第二の利用者に相談窓口として優れていることをアピールする。なお、転職サイト内で取り扱われる情報は、文字や画像、映像、音声、データファイル、アプリケーション、3Dコンテンツ等の様々な形態で提供される。 The second user transmits his / her information or collects other's information within the job change site in order to meet a more suitable workplace or a near ideal person. On the other hand, the first user advertises that the second user is excellent as a consultation window by transmitting information useful for job change and employment in addition to his / her information on the job change site. Information handled within the job change site may be provided in various forms such as characters, images, videos, sounds, data files, applications, 3D contents and the like.
 また、転職サイト内では、金銭的価値を有するポイントが流通し、このポイントは第二の利用者が転職サイト内のサービスを利用するための利用料として消費される。ポイントは、主に、運営者によって定められた預入金口座に金銭を預け入れた第一の利用者に対して発行され、第二の利用者は、事前に第一の利用者からポイントを購入した上で転職サイト内のサービスを利用する。 Also within career sites distributed points with monetary value, this point is consumed as usage fee for the second user uses the services of the career sites. Point is, primarily, is issued to the first user who deposits the money to deposit money account, which is determined by the operator, the second of users, was purchased a point from the first user in advance Use the services in the career change site above.
 第一の利用者によって預け入れられた金銭は、預入金として運営者によって一元管理される。運営者の収入源であるポイント販売に係る手数料は、この預入金のうち何円が誰に帰属しているかという内訳に基づいて決済される。また、第一の利用者が退会する際には、預入金のうち、退会の時点で当該第一の利用者に帰属する金額が返金される。 The money deposited by the first user is centrally managed by the operator as deposit. The commission for the point sales, which is the operator's income source, is settled on the basis of the breakdown of what yen belongs to this deposit. In addition, when the first user withdraws from the account, the amount of money belonging to the first user at the time of withdrawal is refunded among deposits.
 さらに、ポイント管理システムS2は、利用者のサービス利用行為に基づいて、各利用者に対して、ポイント無償発行や、優先的な広告掲載等の特典が付与される仕組みを有することを特徴とする。サービス利用行為は、例えばポイント管理システムS2において他の利用者に情報を提供したり、他の利用者が提供する情報を閲覧したりする行為である。 Furthermore, point management system S2 is based on the service usage behavior of the user, for each user, point free distributions and, benefits such as preferential advertising is characterized by having a mechanism to be applied . The service usage act is, for example, an act of providing information to another user in the point management system S2 or browsing information provided by the other user.
 図26は、第四実施形態に係るポイント管理システムS2の全体構成図である。ポイント管理システムS2は、主に、管理サーバ10によって実現されるシステムである。管理サーバ10は、インターネット等の通信ネットワーク50を介して、運営者端末20、利用者端末30及び金融機関のサーバ40と接続される。 FIG. 26 is an overall configuration diagram of a point management system S2 according to the fourth embodiment. The point management system S2 is a system realized mainly by the management server 10. The management server 10 is connected to the operator terminal 20, the user terminal 30, and the server 40 of a financial institution via a communication network 50 such as the Internet.
 運営者端末20及び利用者端末30は、パーソナルコンピュータ、タブレット、スマートフォン、テレビ、ゲーム機又はカーナビ等の情報端末である。運営者端末20はポイント管理システムS2の運営者によって使用され、利用者端末30は転職サイトの利用者である第一の利用者及び第二の利用者によって使用される。また、運営者端末20及び利用者端末30は、ディスプレイ及びスピーカ等の出力装置とキーボード及びマウス等の入力装置とを備えている。 Operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30, personal computer, tablet, smartphone, TV, is an information terminal such as a game machine or a car navigation system. The operator terminal 20 is used by the operator of the point management system S2, and the user terminal 30 is used by the first user and the second user who are users of the job change site. The operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30 each include an output device such as a display and a speaker and an input device such as a keyboard and a mouse.
 さらに、運営者端末20及び利用者端末30にはブラウザが搭載されており、このブラウザは、少なくとも、種々のサーバから提供されるウェブページをディスプレイに表示することができる。なお、利用者が専用のアプリケーションを利用者端末30で実行することにより、管理サーバ10から受信した内容を出力装置において出力できるようにしてもよい。また、利用者端末30の出力装置及び入力装置は、上記のものに限定されず、ヘッドマウントディスプレイ等のVR技術が使用されたものであってもよい。 Furthermore, a browser is mounted on the operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30, and the browser can display at least web pages provided from various servers on the display. Incidentally, by a user to perform a special application in the user terminal 30 may be able to output at an output device what it receives from the management server 10. Further, the output device and the input device of the user terminal 30 are not limited to those described above, and VR technology such as a head mounted display may be used.
 なお、運営者端末20は上記の態様に限定されず、管理サーバ10内に記憶されている設定情報(詳細は後述する。)を更新するための入力操作が可能であれば、任意の態様であってもよい。ゆえに、例えば、管理サーバ10と運営者端末20とが一体を成す態様も可能である。 Incidentally, operator terminal 20 is not limited to the embodiments described above, setting information stored in the management server 10 in (details will be described later.) Input operation for updating is possible, in any manner It may be. Therefore, for example, an aspect in which the management server 10 and the operator terminal 20 are integrated is also possible.
 運営者及び利用者は、入力装置を操作することにより、ディスプレイ等に表示されたウェブページ上にあるボタンやアイコン等をクリックしたり、フォームに文字等を入力したりして、管理サーバ10に要求を発信する。 The operator and the user operate the input device to click a button, an icon, etc. on a web page displayed on a display etc., or enter characters etc. in a form, to the management server 10. Submit a request.
 金融機関のサーバ40は、運営者が契約を交わした金融機関で管理されるサーバであり、預入金口座への入金があった場合に、入金日時と、入金金額と、入金者の情報(入金ID)とを入金記録として記録し、自動的に、又は、管理サーバ10からの要求に応じて、入金記録を管理サーバ10に提供する。 The server 40 of the financial institution is a server managed by the financial institution with which the operator has made a contract, and when there is a deposit to the deposit account, the deposit date, the deposit amount, the information of the depositor (deposit ID) is recorded as a deposit record, and the deposit record is provided to the management server 10 automatically or in response to a request from the management server 10.
[管理サーバ10の構成]
 図27は、管理サーバ10の構成を示す回路ブロック図である。管理サーバ10は、CPU110、ROM111、RAM112、記憶装置113及び通信制御装置114を備えており、これらはバス115で互いに接続されている。
[Configuration of Management Server 10]
FIG. 27 is a circuit block diagram showing a configuration of management server 10. Referring to FIG. The management server 10 includes a CPU 110, a ROM 111, a RAM 112, a storage device 113, and a communication control device 114, which are connected to one another by a bus 115.
 CPU110は、ROM111に格納されているプログラムに基づいて、ROM111、RAM112及び記憶装置113の相互間でのデータの送受信を制御したり、記憶装置113及び通信制御装置114の制御を行ったりする。また、CPU110は、通信制御装置114を介して通信ネットワーク50との間の接続を制御する。 The CPU 110 controls transmission and reception of data among the ROM 111, the RAM 112, and the storage device 113 based on a program stored in the ROM 111, and controls the storage device 113 and the communication control device 114. The CPU 110 also controls the connection with the communication network 50 via the communication control device 114.
 記憶装置113は、ハードディスク装置等から構成されており、管理サーバ10にとって必要なデータやアプリケーションプログラムを記憶しておく記憶媒体として使用される。CPU110は、必要に応じて、データを記憶装置113に記憶させたり、記憶装置113に記憶されているデータを読み取って使用したりすることができる。なお、本実施形態では、記憶装置113は管理サーバ10に設けられるが、記憶装置113は管理サーバ10の外部に設けられるものであってもよい。 The storage device 113 is configured of a hard disk drive or the like, and is used as a storage medium for storing data and application programs necessary for the management server 10. The CPU 110 can store data in the storage device 113 or read and use data stored in the storage device 113 as necessary. In the present embodiment, the storage device 113 is provided in the management server 10, but the storage device 113 may be provided outside the management server 10.
 図28は、管理サーバ10の機能的な構成を説明するための機能ブロック図である。管理サーバ10においては、CPU110がROM111や記憶装置113に記憶されているプログラムを実行することによって、図28に示す各種の機能を実現する。図28に示すように、管理サーバ10は、通信部120と、記憶部140と、制御部130とを備える。 FIG. 28 is a functional block diagram for explaining a functional configuration of the management server 10. In the management server 10, the CPU 110 executes the programs stored in the ROM 111 and the storage device 113 to realize various functions shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the management server 10 includes a communication unit 120, a storage unit 140, and a control unit 130.
(通信部120)
 通信部120は、運営者端末20及び利用者端末30からの要求の受信、及び、制御部130によって選択又は生成されたウェブページ等の情報の運営者端末20及び利用者端末30への送信を行なう。通信部120は、例えばLAN(Local Area Network)コントローラを有する。
(Communication unit 120)
The communication unit 120 receives the request from the operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30, and transmits the information such as the web page selected or generated by the control unit 130 to the operator terminal 20 and the user terminal 30. Do. The communication unit 120 includes, for example, a LAN (Local Area Network) controller.
(記憶部140)
 記憶部140は、利用者情報記憶部141と、設定情報記憶部142と、評価履歴記憶部143と、ポイント履歴記憶部144と、預入金履歴記憶部145と、ウェブページ情報等記憶部146とを備える。
(Storage unit 140)
The storage unit 140 includes a user information storage unit 141, a setting information storage unit 142, an evaluation history storage unit 143, a point history storage unit 144, a deposit history storage unit 145, a web page information etc. storage unit 146. Equipped with
 利用者情報記憶部141は、ユーザIDやパスワードのような各利用者の個人情報や、各利用者に付与された特典に関する情報を記憶する。
 設定情報記憶部142は、制御部130における処理で参照される設定情報を記憶する。
 評価履歴記憶部143は、利用者によるサービス利用行為の履歴を記憶する。
 ポイント履歴記憶部144は、各利用者のポイント得失履歴T7を記憶する。
The user information storage unit 141 stores personal information of each user such as a user ID and a password, and information on a benefit given to each user.
The setting information storage unit 142 stores setting information to be referred to in the processing in the control unit 130.
The evaluation history storage unit 143 stores a history of service usage by a user.
The point history storage unit 144 stores point gain and loss history T7 of each user.
 預入金履歴記憶部145は、運営者によって一元管理されている預入金のうち当該第一の利用者に帰属する金額である預入金額を、第一利用者の識別情報に対応付けて記憶する。預入金履歴記憶部145は、預入金額の増減履歴を記憶してもよい。
 ウェブページ情報等記憶部146は、転職サイトの基礎となるウェブページや、各利用者に割り当てられているウェブページの情報等を記憶する。
The deposit history storage unit 145 stores the deposit amount, which is the amount belonging to the first user among deposits under centralized management by the operator, in association with the identification information of the first user. The deposit history storage unit 145 may store an increase / decrease history of the deposit amount.
The web page information etc. storage unit 146 stores the web page which is the basis of the job change site, the information of the web page assigned to each user, and the like.
(制御部130)
 制御部130は、例えばCPU110であり、プログラムを実行することにより、設定情報更新部131、認証部132、ポイント消費部133、ポイント還元部134、要求処理部135、評価値記録部136、特典指標値算出部137、特典付与部138、及び入金処理部139として機能する。
(Control unit 130)
The control unit 130 is, for example, the CPU 110, and executes the program to execute the setting information update unit 131, the authentication unit 132, the point consumption unit 133, the point reduction unit 134, the request processing unit 135, the evaluation value recording unit 136, and the benefit index. It functions as the value calculation unit 137, the privilege giving unit 138, and the deposit processing unit 139.
 設定情報更新部131は、運営者端末20からの要求に応じて、設定情報記憶部142に記憶されている設定情報を更新する。
 認証部132は、転職サイトへアクセスを行った利用者のログイン制御のための認証を行なう。
The setting information updating unit 131 updates the setting information stored in the setting information storage unit 142 in response to a request from the operator terminal 20.
The authentication unit 132 performs authentication for login control of the user who has accessed the job change site.
 ポイント消費部133は、利用者端末30からの要求に対して、当該利用者のポイントを減算した上で、要求処理部135における処理の実行を許可する。 The point consumption unit 133 subtracts the point of the user from the request from the user terminal 30, and then permits the request processing unit 135 to execute the process.
 ポイント還元部134は、第二の利用者が情報提供サイトにおけるサービスの利用のためにポイントを消費した場合に、消費されたポイントに対応する譲渡元の情報を利用者情報記憶部141から取得し、取得した譲渡元の情報が示す第一の利用者に、消費されたポイントに基づく数量のポイントを付与する。ポイント還元部134は、ポイント消費部133において減算されたポイント数に基づいて、当該ポイントの譲渡元である第一の利用者にポイントを付与する。 When the second user consumes points for use of the service at the information providing site, the point reduction unit 134 acquires information on the transfer source corresponding to the consumed points from the user information storage unit 141. The point of the quantity based on the consumed points is given to the first user indicated by the acquired information of the transfer source. The point reduction unit 134 gives points to the first user who is the transfer source of the points, based on the number of points subtracted by the point consumption unit 133.
 要求処理部135は、利用者端末30からの要求に応じてウェブページ等の情報の提供や記憶部140の更新を行なう。換言すれば、要求処理部135は、利用者の要求に応じてサービスを提供することにより、管理サーバ10において、利用者のサービス利用行為を実行する。 The request processing unit 135 provides information such as a web page and updates the storage unit 140 in response to a request from the user terminal 30. In other words, the request processing unit 135 executes the service usage act of the user in the management server 10 by providing the service in response to the request of the user.
 評価値記録部136は、利用者による情報提供サイトを利用する行為に対する評価値を算出する評価部である。評価値記録部136は、要求処理部135においてなされた各処理に対して特典に反映される評価値を算出し、評価値を含む各処理に関する情報を評価履歴記憶部143に記録させる。 The evaluation value recording unit 136 is an evaluation unit that calculates an evaluation value for an action of the user using the information providing site. The evaluation value recording unit 136 calculates an evaluation value to be reflected in a benefit for each process performed by the request processing unit 135, and causes the evaluation history storage unit 143 to record information regarding each process including the evaluation value.
 特典指標値算出部137は、評価履歴記憶部143に記憶されている各利用者に関する評価値に基づいて特典指標値を算出する。特典指標値算出部137で算出される特典指標値のうち、各利用者の活動範囲を示す地域情報に基づく特典指標値を第一特典指標値と称し、地域情報に基づかない特典指標値を第二特典指標値と称する。 The benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates a benefit index value based on the evaluation value regarding each user stored in the evaluation history storage unit 143. Among the benefit index values calculated by the benefit index value calculator 137, the benefit index value based on the area information indicating the activity range of each user is referred to as a first benefit index value, and the benefit index value not based on the area information is It is referred to as a two-benefits index value.
 特典付与部138は、所定の期間中の利用者に対応する評価値に基づいて、利用者に特典を付与する。特典付与部138は、例えば、特典指標値等に基づいて、各利用者の情報を表示する優先順位や、各利用者が保有するポイント等を制御する。
 入金処理部139は、金融機関のサーバ40から入金記録を取得し、入金者である第一の利用者の預入金額を入金額分加算した金額に更新すると共に、当該第一の利用者に預入金額に応じたポイントを付与する。
The privilege granting unit 138 grants a privilege to the user based on the evaluation value corresponding to the user in a predetermined period. Privilege granting unit 138, for example, based on the award indicator value, etc., and priorities for displaying information of each user, to control the points or the like each user's.
The deposit processing unit 139 acquires a deposit record from the server 40 of the financial institution, updates the deposit amount of the depositor of the first user who is the depositor to the amount obtained by adding the deposit amount, and deposits to the first user. Grant points according to the amount.
(制御部130:要求処理部135)
 要求処理部135は、閲覧処理部135a、検索処理部135b、ウェブページ更新処理部135c、投稿処理部135d、ポイント譲渡処理部135e、及び評価処理部135fを有する。閲覧処理部135aは、利用者端末30からの要求に応じたウェブページを提供する。検索処理部135bは、利用者端末30からの要求に含まれる条件に合う情報を検索し、検索した情報を提示する。
(Control unit 130: request processing unit 135)
The request processing unit 135 includes a browsing processing unit 135a, a search processing unit 135b, a web page update processing unit 135c, a posting processing unit 135d, a point transfer processing unit 135e, and an evaluation processing unit 135f. The browsing processing unit 135 a provides a web page according to the request from the user terminal 30. The search processing unit 135b searches for information meeting the conditions included in the request from the user terminal 30, and presents the searched information.
 ウェブページ更新処理部135cは、各利用者が発信したい情報を掲載するための各利用者専用のウェブページを、要求に応じて更新する。投稿処理部135dは、利用者端末30からのコラムや質問等を投稿するための要求に応じて、投稿されたコラムや質問等をウェブページに反映する。 The web page update processing unit 135c updates, in response to a request, a web page dedicated to each user for posting information desired by each user. The post processing unit 135 d reflects the posted columns, questions, and the like on the web page in response to a request for posting a column, a question, and the like from the user terminal 30.
 ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、利用者端末30から、ポイントを譲渡するための第一の要求を受信すると、第一の要求の発信者である第一の利用者から第一の要求において譲渡先として指定された利用者へ第一の要求において指定された数量のポイントを移動させるポイント譲渡部として機能する。ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、第一の利用者からの要求に応じてポイントの移動処理及び手数料の決済処理を行なう。 When the point transfer processing unit 135e receives a first request for transferring points from the user terminal 30, the point transfer processing unit 135e is a transferee in the first request from the first user who is the sender of the first request. It functions as a point transfer unit that moves points of the quantity specified in the first request to the specified user. The point transfer processing unit 135e performs point transfer processing and fee settlement processing in response to a request from the first user.
 また、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、第一の利用者から前記第二の利用者へポイントの移動が行なわれると、移動されたポイントに基づく金額を運営者に対して支払うよう求める通知を第一の利用者の端末に送信してもよい。ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、例えば、移動されたポイントに、運営者が設定可能な所定の設定値を乗算することにより、運営者に支払う金額を算出する。 In addition, when the point transfer processing unit 135e moves the point from the first user to the second user, the point transfer processing unit 135e requests the operator to pay an amount based on the moved point to the operator. May be sent to the user's terminal. For example, the point transfer processing unit 135e calculates an amount to be paid to the operator by multiplying the moved points by a predetermined set value that can be set by the operator.
 また、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、第一の利用者から前記第二の利用者へポイントの移動が行なわれると、第一の利用者に帰属する金額を、移動されたポイントに基づく金額分減算してもよい。ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、例えば、移動されたポイントに、運営者が設定可能な所定の設定値を乗算することにより、減算する金額を算出する。 In addition, when the point transfer processing unit 135e moves the point from the first user to the second user, the point transfer processing unit 135e subtracts the amount belonging to the first user by the amount based on the moved points. You may The point transfer processing unit 135e calculates the amount of money to be subtracted, for example, by multiplying the moved points by a predetermined set value that can be set by the operator.
 評価処理部135fは、公開されている情報に対して利用者によってなされる評価に基づいて、特典に反映される評価値を算出し、算出した評価値を記憶部140に記録する。 The evaluation processing unit 135 f calculates an evaluation value to be reflected in the benefit based on an evaluation made by the user on the published information, and records the calculated evaluation value in the storage unit 140.
 要求処理部135は、以上の機能の他に、例えば、利用者端末30からの、コンテンツをダウンロードするための要求に応じて、当該コンテンツを利用者端末30へ提供する機能や、利用者端末30からの、コンテンツをアップロードするための要求に応じて、当該コンテンツを記憶部140に記憶させる機能等を有してもよい。 In addition to the above functions, the request processing unit 135 provides the content to the user terminal 30 in response to a request for downloading the content from the user terminal 30, for example, or the user terminal 30. May have a function of storing the content in the storage unit 140 in response to the request for uploading the content.
(制御部130:特典付与部138)
 特典付与部138は、第一ポイント付与部138a、表示情報選出部138b、表示順位決定部138c、第二ポイント付与部138d、奨励金支給部138e、及び割引率算出部138fを有する。第一ポイント付与部138aは、評価値記録部136における処理が行なわれる度に、各評価値に基づいて各利用者に付与するポイント数を算出する。表示情報選出部138bは、第一特典指標値に基づいて広告枠に表示させる情報を選出する。
(Control unit 130: benefit granting unit 138)
The privilege giving unit 138 has a first point giving unit 138a, a display information selecting unit 138b, a display order determining unit 138c, a second point giving unit 138d, an incentive payment unit 138e, and a discount rate calculation unit 138f. Each time the process in the evaluation value recording unit 136 is performed, the first point giving unit 138a calculates the number of points given to each user based on each evaluation value. The display information selection unit 138 b selects information to be displayed on the advertisement space based on the first benefit index value.
 表示順位決定部138cは、第一特典指標値に基づいて検索結果表示画面に表示させる情報の表示順を決定する。第二ポイント付与部138dは、各利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各利用者に付与するポイント数を算出し、各利用者にポイント付与処理を行なう。奨励金支給部138eは、各第一の利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各第一の利用者に支給する奨励金額を算出し、各利用者に奨励金支給処理を行なう。割引率算出部138fは、各第二の利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各第二の利用者がサービスを利用するために必要となるポイント数の割引率を算出する。ポイント数の割引率は、標準的な第二の利用者が特定のサービスを利用する際に消費される基本ポイント数に対する、基本ポイント数と特定の第二の利用者が同じサービスを利用する際に消費されるポイント数との差の割合である。 The display order determination unit 138c determines the display order of the information to be displayed on the search result display screen based on the first benefit index value. The second point giving unit 138d calculates the number of points given to each user based on the second benefit index value of each user, and performs a point giving process for each user. Based on the second benefit index value of each first user, the incentive payment unit 138e calculates an incentive amount to be provided to each first user, and performs an incentive payment process for each user. The discount rate calculation unit 138 f calculates the discount rate of the number of points required for each second user to use the service, based on the second benefit index value of each second user. The discount rate of points is the same as the number of basic points consumed by a standard second user when using a specific service, and when the specific second user uses the same service. the ratio of the difference between the number of points to be consumed.
(記憶部140に記憶されている情報の詳細)
 ここで、ポイント管理システムS2の機能の詳細な説明に先立って、記憶部140に記憶されている情報について、詳細に説明する。
(Details of information stored in storage unit 140)
Here, prior to detailed description of the functions of the point management system S2, information stored in the storage unit 140 will be described in detail.
(利用者情報記憶部141に記憶されている情報)
 利用者情報記憶部141には、ユーザIDやパスワードのような各利用者の個人情報や、各利用者に付与された特典に関する情報が、図29に示すような利用者情報表T1として記憶されている。図29に示すように、利用者情報表T1の項目としては、例えば、当該利用者を識別するためのユーザID、当該利用者を認証するためのパスワード、当該利用者の種別、第一特典指標値、第二特典指標値、当該利用者の活動範囲を示す地域情報、当該利用者専用に割り当てられたウェブページのアドレス等が挙げられる。
(Information stored in user information storage unit 141)
In the user information storage unit 141, personal information of each user such as a user ID and a password, and information regarding a benefit given to each user are stored as a user information table T1 as shown in FIG. ing. As shown in FIG. 29, as items of the user information table T1, for example, a user ID for identifying the user, a password for authenticating the user, a type of the user, a first benefit index Value, second benefit index value, area information indicating the activity range of the user, the address of a web page assigned to the user only, and the like.
 ここで、利用者の種別とは、例えば、第一の利用者と第二の利用者のどちらに属するか、又は、エージェントと企業と個人のうちのいずれに属するか等、利用者の当該転職サイト内における立場を示す情報である。また、地域情報は、例えば、市区町村を最小単位とし、エージェントや企業の場合は事業展開する地域、個人の場合は就職を希望する地域等に基づいて、当該利用者自身の選択によって定められる、一以上の単位地域からなる地理的情報である。 Here, with regard to the type of the user, for example, which one of the first user and the second user belongs, or which one of the agent, the company, and the individual belongs to, the job change of the user is information indicating the position within the site. In addition, regional information is determined by the user's own choice based on, for example, a city or a municipality as the minimum unit, and in the case of an agent or company, the area in which business is conducted, or in the case of an individual, the area where employment is desired. , it is a geographic information consisting of one or more of the unit area.
 また、利用者情報記憶部141には、第一の利用者限定の項目として、預入金の入金に関するID番号である入金IDが記憶されている。一方、利用者情報記憶部141には、第二の利用者限定の項目として、サービスを利用するために消費するポイント数を、後述する消費ポイントに対応表T2より得られる数量(定価に相当する。)から割り引くための比率である割引率が記憶されている。 Further, in the user information storage unit 141, as an item for the first user limitation, a deposit ID, which is an ID number related to deposit of deposit, is stored. On the other hand, in the user information storage unit 141, as the second user-limited item, the number of points consumed for using the service is the quantity obtained from the correspondence table T2 to the consumption points described later (equivalent to the fixed price .) is the ratio for discounting from the discount rate is stored.
 また、利用者情報記憶部141には、その他の項目として、利用者が保有するポイント数や、第一の利用者に帰属する預入金額等が記憶されていてもよい。
 利用者情報表T1は、認証部132、ポイント消費部133、要求処理部135及び特典付与部138の処理において参照されると共に、特典指標値算出部137及び割引率算出部138fの処理に伴って更新される。
In addition, the user information storage unit 141 may store, as other items, the number of points owned by the user, the amount of money deposited at the first user, and the like.
The user information table T1, the authentication unit 132, the point consumption portion 133, while being referenced in the processing of the request processing unit 135 and the privilege granting unit 138, along with the processing benefits index value calculation section 137 and the discount rate calculation unit 138f It will be updated.
(設定情報記憶部142に記憶されている情報)
 設定情報記憶部142には、制御部130における処理で参照される設定情報が記憶されている。設定情報記憶部142は、例えば、評価値記録部136が評価値を算出する際の基準として用いられる第一設定情報、及び特典付与部138が特典の大きさを決定する際の基準として用いられる第二設定情報を含む設定情報を記憶する。設定情報は、例えば、消費ポイント対応表T2、評価値対応表T3、記事評価値対応表T4、第一特典指標値関数F1、第二特典指標値関数F2、第一ポイント関数F3、第二ポイント関数F4、第三ポイント関数F5、第四ポイント関数F6、手数料関数F7、奨励金関数F8、割引率関数F9、特典指標値算出間隔IV、評価値抽出期間PDである。第一設定情報は、例えば評価値対応表T3又は記事評価値対応表T4であり、第二設定情報は、例えば第一特典指標値関数F1又は第二特典指標値関数F2である。
(Information stored in setting information storage unit 142)
The setting information storage unit 142 stores setting information to be referred to in the processing of the control unit 130. For example, the setting information storage unit 142 is used as first setting information used as a reference when the evaluation value recording unit 136 calculates an evaluation value, and as a reference when the benefit giving unit 138 determines the size of a benefit The setting information including the second setting information is stored. The setting information is, for example, consumption point correspondence table T2, evaluation value correspondence table T3, article evaluation value correspondence table T4, first benefit index value function F1, second benefit index value function F2, first point function F3, second point A function F4, a third point function F5, a fourth point function F6, a fee function F7, a reward function F8, a discount rate function F9, a benefit index value calculation interval IV, and an evaluation value extraction period PD. The first setting information is, for example, the evaluation value correspondence table T3 or the article evaluation value correspondence table T4, and the second setting information is, for example, the first benefit index value function F1 or the second benefit index value function F2.
 消費ポイント対応表T2は、ポイント消費部133の処理において参照される、利用者端末30からの要求の種別と、その要求内容に基づいて消費ポイント数を算出するための関数との対応表である。ここで、要求の種別とは、閲覧要求、検索要求、記事投稿要求、ウェブページ更新要求等、要求処理部135において行なわれる各処理に対応する。また、各要求の種別に対応する関数は、運営者によって随時変更可能であり、当該要求に含まれる何らかの数値を変数とした関数であってもよいし、定数関数であってもよい。例えば、記事投稿要求に対応する関数としては、投稿する記事の文字数に所定の定数を乗じるような関数が考えられる。また、広告掲載に関する要求に対応する関数であれば、広告掲載期間や掲載する広告枠の広さ等を変数とした関数とすることが考えられる。 The consumption point correspondence table T2 is a correspondence table between the type of request from the user terminal 30 and the function for calculating the number of consumption points based on the content of the request, which is referred to in the processing of the point consumption unit 133. . Here, the type of request corresponds to each process performed by the request processing unit 135, such as a browsing request, a search request, an article posting request, a web page update request, and the like. Further, the function corresponding to the type of each request can be changed as needed by the operator, and may be a function with any numerical value included in the request as a variable or a constant function. For example, as a function corresponding to the article posting request, a function may be considered such that the number of characters of the article to be posted is multiplied by a predetermined constant. Moreover, if it is a function corresponding to the request | requirement regarding advertisement insertion, it is possible to set it as a function which made the variable the advertising period, the space of the advertisement space to publish, etc.
 なお、消費ポイント対応表T2は、個人用と企業用の2種類とする等、利用者の種別に応じて複数種類存在してもよい。この場合、個人用の消費ポイント対応表T2の、全要求の種別に対応するポイント数を0として、個人によるサービスの利用にはお金がかからないように設定することもできる。 A plurality of types of consumption point correspondence table T2 may be present depending on the type of user, such as two types, one for personal use and one for company. In this case, it is possible to set the number of points corresponding to all the request types in the personal consumption point correspondence table T2 to be 0 so that the use of the service by the individual does not cost money.
 運営者が特定のサービスの利用を推進したい場合には、制御部130は、運営者の指示に基づいて、消費ポイント対応表T2における、当該サービスの利用に対応する要求の種別に対応する関数を、消費ポイント数がより少なく算出されるものに変更してもよい。これにより、利用者にとって当該サービスがより魅力的なものとなるため、利用者の当該サービスの利用意欲の増進につながり、結果として、運営者の意図する方向に利用者のサービス利用行為を誘導することができる。 When the operator wants to promote the use of a specific service, the control unit 130 determines a function corresponding to the type of request corresponding to the use of the service in the consumption point correspondence table T2 based on the instruction of the operator. may be changed to those consumption points is less calculated. As a result, the service becomes more attractive to the user, leading to an increase in the user's willingness to use the service, and as a result, the user's service usage behavior is guided in the direction intended by the operator. be able to.
 評価値対応表T3は、評価値記録部136の処理において参照される、要求処理部135における各処理の種別と、その処理内容から評価値を算出するための関数との対応表である。ここで、各処理の種別とは、閲覧処理、検索処理、記事投稿処理、ウェブページ更新処理等、要求処理部135において行なわれる各処理に対応する。また、各処理の種別に対応する関数は、運営者によって随時変更可能であり、当該処理に含まれる何らかの数値を変数とした関数であってもよいし、定数関数であってもよい。なお、評価値対応表T3は、エージェント用と企業用と個人用の3種類とする等、利用者の種別に応じて複数種類存在してもよい。さらに、処理の種別に、新規会員登録処理を加えることによって、新規に会員登録を行った利用者に対して、特別にポイントを付与することも可能となる。 The evaluation value correspondence table T3 is a correspondence table of the type of each processing in the request processing unit 135 and the function for calculating the evaluation value from the processing content, which is referred to in the processing of the evaluation value recording unit 136. Here, the type of each process corresponds to each process performed in the request processing unit 135, such as browsing process, search process, article posting process, web page update process, and the like. Further, the function corresponding to the type of each process can be changed as needed by the operator, and may be a function having any numerical value included in the process as a variable or a constant function. Note that there may be multiple types of evaluation value correspondence table T3 depending on the type of user, such as three types for agent, enterprise and personal. Furthermore, by adding a new member registration process to the type of process, it is possible to specially give points to the user who has newly registered as a member.
 運営者が特定のサービスの利用を推進したい場合には、制御部130は、運営者の指示に基づいて、評価値対応表T3における、当該サービスの利用に対応する処理の種別に対応する関数を、評価値がより大きく算出されるものに変更してもよい。これにより、利用者にとって当該サービスがより魅力的なものとなるため、利用者の当該サービスの利用意欲の増進につながり、結果として、運営者の意図する方向に利用者のサービス利用行為を誘導することができる。 When the operator wants to promote the use of a specific service, the control unit 130 determines a function corresponding to the type of processing corresponding to the use of the service in the evaluation value correspondence table T3 based on the instruction of the operator. may be changed to the evaluation value is larger calculated. As a result, the service becomes more attractive to the user, leading to an increase in the user's willingness to use the service, and as a result, the user's service usage behavior is guided in the direction intended by the operator. be able to.
 記事評価値対応表T4は、評価処理部135fの処理において参照される、閲覧者によるコラム等の評価と、評価値との対応表である。記事評価値対応表T4は、例えば、閲覧者によるコラム等の評価が、「excellent」、「good」、「average」、「poor」の4段階に分けられている場合に、それぞれの評価に対して、2、1、0、-1という評価値が対応するような表とすることができる。 The article evaluation value correspondence table T4 is a correspondence table between the evaluation of a column or the like by the viewer and the evaluation value, which is referred to in the processing of the evaluation processing unit 135f. For example, when the evaluation of the column by the reader is divided into four stages of “excellent”, “good”, “average”, and “poor”, the article evaluation value correspondence table T4 is for each evaluation. Te can be a table as 2,1,0, evaluation value of -1 corresponds.
 第一特典指標値関数F1は、特典指標値算出部137の処理において参照される、評価値と地域情報から第一特典指標値を算出するための関数である。第一特典指標値関数F1は、例えば、(ある利用者の第一特典指標値)=(当該利用者に関する地域依存性のない評価値の合計)+(当該利用者に関する地域依存性のある評価値の合計)/(当該利用者と地域情報の一部又は全部が一致する利用者の総数)とすることができる。ここで、地域依存性のある評価値とは、当該利用者の活動範囲における利用者人口によって機会が制限される行為に対する評価値のことであり、例えば、ポイント譲渡による評価値や、他者からの評価による評価値がこれに該当する。第一特典指標値関数F1をこのような関数にすることにより、利用者の活動範囲の広狭によって生じる不公平を是正した指標に基づいて表示の優先順位を決定することができるため、真に質の高い利用者を正当に優遇することができる。 The first benefit index value function F1 is a function to be referred to in the processing of the benefit index value calculation unit 137 for calculating the first benefit index value from the evaluation value and the area information. The first benefit index value function F1 is, for example, (the first benefit index value of a certain user) = (the sum of evaluation values having no regional dependence on the relevant user) + (the regional dependence on the relevant user) The sum of the values) / (total number of users in which part or all of the user and the regional information match) can be set. Here, the region-dependent evaluation value is an evaluation value for an activity whose opportunity is limited by the user population in the activity range of the user, for example, an evaluation value by point transfer, or from others evaluation value by the evaluation of this is true. By making the first benefit index value function F1 such a function, the display priority can be determined based on the index that has corrected the inequity caused by the narrowing of the user's activity range, so the quality is truly improved. it can be legitimately favor of high user.
 なお、例示の第一特典指標値関数F1の右辺第一項及び第二項には、運営者によって設定可能な任意の定数が乗じられてもよく、これにより、地域依存性のない評価値と地域依存性のある評価値とのそれぞれが、第一特典指標値に対してどの程度影響するかを調整することが可能となる。また、他者からの評価に基づく評価値を除いた評価値によって第一特典指標値を算出する等、運営者によって評価値の抽出条件に適宜制限が加えられてもよい。 The first term and the second term on the right side of the first benefit index value function F1 may be multiplied by an arbitrary constant that can be set by the operator. It becomes possible to adjust how much each of the region-dependent evaluation values affects the first benefit index value. In addition, the operator may appropriately limit the extraction condition of the evaluation value, such as calculating the first benefit index value by the evaluation value excluding the evaluation value based on the evaluation from another person.
 第二特典指標値関数F2は、特典指標値算出部137の処理において参照される、評価値に基づいて第二特典指標値を算出するための関数である。第二特典指標値関数F2は、例えば、(ある利用者の第二特典指標値)=(当該利用者に関する評価値の合計)とすることができる。
 なお、特典指標値算出部137の処理において参照される関数は、第一特典指標値関数F1及び第二特典指標値関数F2に限定されず、特典付与部138に属する機能処理部によって異なる特典指標値が参照されるよう、より多種類の関数が設定情報記憶部142に記憶されていてもよい。
The second benefit index value function F2 is a function to be referred to in the processing of the benefit index value calculation unit 137 for calculating a second benefit index value based on the evaluation value. The second privilege index value function F2, for example, be a (second privilege index value of a certain user) = (sum of the evaluation values related to the user).
The function referred to in the processing of the benefit index value calculation unit 137 is not limited to the first benefit index value function F1 and the second benefit index value function F2, and the benefit index differs depending on the function processing unit belonging to the benefit granting unit 138 More types of functions may be stored in the setting information storage unit 142 so that values may be referred to.
 第一ポイント関数F3は、第一ポイント付与部138aの処理において参照される、評価値に基づいてポイントを算出するための関数である。第一ポイント関数F3は、例えば、(付与されるポイント数)=C1×(評価値)のような任意の定数C1を含む一次関数とすることができる。また、ポイントを付与するために必要な評価値の下限値C1’を定めることも可能である。この場合、第一ポイント関数F3は、例えば、評価値が下限値C1’以上の場合には(付与されるポイント数)=C1×(評価値)であり、評価値が下限値C1’未満の場合には定数関数(付与されるポイント数)=0であるような関数とすることができる。さらに、第一ポイント関数F3の代わりに、複数種類の関数からなる第一ポイント関数表が設定情報記憶部142に記憶されていてもよい。この場合、第一ポイント付与部138aは、ポイントの付与対象である利用者の種別によって、個別に関数を設定することができ、この結果、利用者の種別によって待遇に変化をつけることが可能となる。 The first point function F3 is a function for calculating points based on the evaluation value, which is referred to in the process of the first point giving unit 138a. The first point function F3 can be, for example, a linear function including an arbitrary constant C1 such as (the number of points given) = C1 × (evaluation value). In addition, it is also possible to set a lower limit C1 'of the evaluation value required to give points. In this case, the first point function F3 is, for example, (the number of points given) = C1 × (evaluation value) when the evaluation value is the lower limit C1 ′ or more, and the evaluation value is less than the lower limit C1 ′. In this case, it can be a function such that constant function (number of points given) = 0. Furthermore, instead of the first point function F3, a first point function table made up of a plurality of types of functions may be stored in the setting information storage unit 142. In this case, the first point giving unit 138a can set functions individually according to the type of the user to whom points are to be given, and as a result, it is possible to change the treatment according to the type of the user. Become.
 第二ポイント関数F4は、第二ポイント付与部138dの処理において参照される、第二特典指標値に基づいてポイントを算出するための関数である。第二ポイント関数F4は、例えば、(付与されるポイント数)=C2×(第二特典指標値)のような任意の定数C2を含む一次関数とすることができる。また、ポイントを付与するために必要な第二特典指標値の下限値C2’を定めることも可能である。この場合、例えば、第二ポイント関数F4は、第一ポイント関数F3の説明における例示と同様の関数であってもよいし、(付与されるポイント数)=C2×{(第二特典指標値)-C2’}のような、第二特典指標値が下限値C2’未満なら、付与されるポイント数が負の値となるような関数とすることもできる。さらに、第二ポイント関数F4も、第一ポイント関数F3と同様に、複数種類の関数からなる第二ポイント関数表によって代用されてもよい。 The second point function F4 is a function for calculating points based on the second benefit index value, which is referred to in the processing of the second point assignment unit 138d. The second point function F4 can be, for example, a linear function including an arbitrary constant C2 such as (the number of points given) = C2 × (second benefit index value). In addition, it is also possible to define the lower limit C2 'of the second benefit index value required to give points. In this case, for example, the second point function F4 may be the same function as the example in the description of the first point function F3, or (the number of points given) = C2 × {(second benefit index value) If the second benefit index value is less than the lower limit C2 ', such as -C2', the function may be such that the number of points to be given is a negative value. Furthermore, the second point function F4 may also be substituted by a second point function table consisting of a plurality of types of functions, similarly to the first point function F3.
 第三ポイント関数F5は、ポイント還元部134の処理において参照される、減算されたポイント数に基づいて、付与されるポイント数を算出するための関数である。第三ポイント関数F5は、例えば、(付与されるポイント数)=C3×(減算されたポイント数)のような任意の定数C3を含む一次関数とすることができる。 The third point function F5 is a function for calculating the number of points to be provided based on the number of subtracted points, which is referred to in the process of the point reduction unit 134. The third point function F5 may be, for example, a linear function including an arbitrary constant C3 such as (the number of points given) = C3 × (the number of points subtracted).
 第四ポイント関数F6は、入金処理部139の処理において参照される、預入金額から付与されるポイント数を算出するための関数である。第四ポイント関数F6は、例えば、(入金記録反映後の預入金額)が(預入金額の過去最高額)より小さい場合は(付与されるポイント数)=C4×{(入金記録反映後の預入金額)-(預入金額の過去最高額)}のような任意の定数C4を含む一次関数であり、(入金記録反映後の預入金額)が(預入金額の過去最高額)以下の場合は定数関数(付与されるポイント数)=0であるような関数とすることができる。 The fourth point function F6 is a function to be referred to in the processing of the deposit processing unit 139 for calculating the number of points given from the deposit amount. The fourth point function F6 is, for example, (the number of points to be granted) = C4 × {(the deposit amount after the deposit record is reflected) if (the deposit amount after the deposit record is reflected) is smaller than (the record maximum of the deposit amount) )-(Primary amount of the deposit amount) is a linear function including an arbitrary constant C4, and (Constant amount after deposit record reflection) is less than (Past amount of deposit amount) Constant function ( it can be a function such that the number of points) = 0 is given.
 手数料関数F7は、ポイント譲渡処理部135eの処理において参照される、譲渡されるポイント数から手数料を算出するための関数である。手数料関数F7は、例えば、(手数料)=C5×(譲渡されるポイント数)のような任意の定数C5を含む一次関数とすることができる。また、手数料関数F7も、第一ポイント関数F3及び第二ポイント関数F4と同様に、複数種類の関数からなる手数料関数表によって代用されてもよい。この場合、ポイントの譲渡先である利用者の種別毎に異なる関数を設定することができる。これにより、例えば、第二の利用者への譲渡には手数料が発生し、第一の利用者同士での譲渡には手数料が発生しない等の設定が可能となる。 The fee function F7 is a function for calculating the fee from the number of points to be transferred, which is referred to in the processing of the point transfer processing unit 135e. The fee function F7 may be, for example, a linear function including an arbitrary constant C5 such as (fee) = C5 × (number of points to be assigned). Further, the fee function F7 may also be substituted by a fee function table consisting of a plurality of types of functions, similarly to the first point function F3 and the second point function F4. In this case, different functions can be set for each type of user who is the point transferee. As a result, for example, it is possible to make a setting such that a commission is generated for the transfer to the second user, and a commission does not occur for the transfer between the first users.
 奨励金関数F8は、奨励金支給部138eの処理において参照される、第二特典指標値に基づいて奨励金額を算出するための関数である。奨励金関数F8は、例えば、(奨励金額)=C6×(第二特典指標値)のような任意の定数C6を含む一次関数とすることができる。また、奨励金を支給するために必要な第二特典指標値の下限値C6’を定めることも可能であり、奨励金関数F8を、第一ポイント関数F3の説明における例示と同様の関数とすることができる。 The incentive function F8 is a function for calculating the incentive amount based on the second benefit index value, which is referred to in the processing of the incentive payment unit 138e. The incentive function F8 may be, for example, a linear function including an arbitrary constant C6 such as (incentive amount) = C6 × (second benefit index value). It is also possible to define the lower limit value C6 'of the second benefit index value necessary to pay the incentive fee, and the incentive fee function F8 is a function similar to the example in the description of the first point function F3. be able to.
 割引率関数F9は、割引率算出部138fの処理において参照される、第二特典指標値に基づいて割引率を算出するための関数である。割引率関数F9は、例えば、(割引率)=C7×(第二特典指標値)のような任意の定数C7を含む一次関数とすることができる。また、割引を適用するために必要な第二特典指標値の下限値C7’を定めることも可能であり、割引率関数F9を、第一ポイント関数F3の説明における例示と同様の関数とすることができる。さらに、割引率関数F9も、第一ポイント関数F3、第二ポイント関数F4及び手数料関数F7と同様に、複数種類の関数からなる割引率関数表によって代用されてもよい。この場合、割引率が算出される第二の利用者の種別(企業と個人のどちらに属するか等)によって、異なる関数を設定することができる。 The discount rate function F9 is a function for calculating the discount rate based on the second benefit index value referred to in the processing of the discount rate calculation unit 138f. The discount rate function F9 can be, for example, a linear function including an arbitrary constant C7 such as (discount rate) = C7 × (second benefit index value). It is also possible to define the lower limit C7 'of the second benefit index value required to apply the discount, and to set the discount rate function F9 to a function similar to the example in the description of the first point function F3. can. Furthermore, the discount rate function F9 may also be substituted by a discount rate function table consisting of a plurality of types of functions, similarly to the first point function F3, the second point function F4, and the fee function F7. In this case, different functions can be set depending on the type of the second user for which the discount rate is calculated (for example, to which one of the company and the individual the user belongs).
 なお、上記各種関数内の定数C1~C7及び下限値C1’、C2’、C6’、C7’は運営者によって随時変更可能である。また、関数F1~F9は例示の関数に限定されず、他の関数とすることができる。さらに、定数のみならず、関数F1~F9自体が、運営者によって随時変更可能であってもよい。 The constants C1 to C7 and the lower limits C1 ', C2', C6 'and C7' in the various functions can be changed as needed by the operator. Also, the functions F1 to F9 are not limited to the illustrated functions, and may be other functions. Furthermore, not only the constants but also the functions F1 to F9 themselves may be changeable by the operator at any time.
 特典指標値算出間隔IVは、特典指標値算出部137の処理が行なわれる頻度に影響を与える数値である。特典指標値算出間隔IVは、例えば、1ヶ月や1週間、1日等とすることができる。特典指標値算出部137は、直前の処理を行った時点から特典指標値算出間隔IVが経過した時点で次の処理を行なう。このため、利用者のサービス利用行為を速やかに特典に反映させたい場合には、特典指標値算出間隔IVを短く設定すればよい。 The benefit index value calculation interval IV is a numerical value that affects the frequency at which the processing of the benefit index value calculation unit 137 is performed. The benefit index value calculation interval IV can be, for example, one month, one week, one day, or the like. The benefit index value calculation unit 137 performs the following process when the benefit index value calculation interval IV has elapsed from the time when the immediately preceding process is performed. For this reason, when it is desired to promptly reflect the user's service usage act to the benefit, the benefit index value calculation interval IV may be set short.
 評価値抽出期間PDは、特典指標値算出部137において、評価値の抽出の際に参照される数値である。評価値抽出期間PDは、例えば、1ヶ月、半年、1年等とすることができる。特典指標値算出部137は、例えば、処理の開始時点から評価値抽出期間PD遡った時点(以下、「抽出起点」と略記する。)以降の、評価履歴T5及び記事評価履歴T6の記録から、評価値の抽出を行なう。このため、利用者の長期的な動向を特典に反映させたい場合には、評価値抽出期間PDを長く設定すればよい。 The evaluation value extraction period PD is a numerical value to be referred to when extracting the evaluation value in the benefit index value calculation unit 137. The evaluation value extraction period PD can be, for example, one month, half a year, one year, and the like. For example, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 uses the records of the evaluation history T5 and the article evaluation history T6 after the time when the evaluation value extraction period PD is traced back from the start time of the process (hereinafter abbreviated as “extraction starting point”). Extract evaluation values. For this reason, when it is desired to reflect the long-term trend of the user in the benefit, the evaluation value extraction period PD may be set long.
 なお、特典指標値算出間隔IV及び評価値抽出期間PDは、それぞれ独立して設定される数値であり、さらに、これらによって算出される第一特典指標値及び第二特典指標値を参照する処理を司る機能処理部毎に、異なる特典指標値算出間隔IV及び評価値抽出期間PDが設定されてもよい。例えば、第二ポイント付与部138dや奨励金支給部138eの処理において参照される第二特典指標値の算出時に参照される特典指標値算出間隔IV及び評価値抽出期間PDは互いに等しい数値であることが望ましく、表示情報選出部138bや表示順位決定部138cの処理において参照される第一特典指標値及び割引率算出部138fの処理において参照される第二特典指標値の算出時に参照される特典指標値算出間隔IVは、評価値抽出期間PD以下の数値であることが望ましい。 In addition, the benefit index value calculation interval IV and the evaluation value extraction period PD are numerical values set independently of each other, and further, a process of referring to the first benefit index value and the second benefit index value calculated by these is performed. Different benefit index value calculation intervals IV and evaluation value extraction periods PD may be set for each functional processing unit to be responsible. For example, the benefit index value calculation interval IV and the evaluation value extraction period PD referred to at the time of calculation of the second benefit index value referred to in the processing of the second point granting unit 138d and the incentive payment unit 138e are mutually equal numerical values Is desirable, and the first benefit index value referred to in the processing of the display information selection unit 138b and the display order determination unit 138c and the benefit index referred to in the calculation of the second benefit index value referred to in the processing of the discount rate calculation unit 138f. value calculating interval IV is preferably less numerical evaluation value extraction period PD.
(評価履歴記憶部143に記憶されている情報)
 評価履歴記憶部143には、利用者によるサービス利用行為の履歴が、図30(a)に示すような評価履歴T5として記憶されている。図30(a)に示すように、評価履歴T5の項目としては、例えば、当該行為の行なわれた時間を表す日時、当該行為の主体である利用者のユーザID、当該行為の種別、当該行為から算出された評価値等が挙げられる。ここで、行為の種別とは、閲覧行為、検索行為、記事投稿行為、ウェブページ更新行為等、要求処理部135において行なわれる各処理に対応する。評価履歴T5は、評価値記録部136の処理によって更新されると共に、第一ポイント付与部138a及び特典指標値算出部137の処理において参照される他、必要に応じて、閲覧処理部135aの処理において参照されてもよい。
(Information stored in evaluation history storage unit 143)
The evaluation history storage unit 143 stores a history of service usage by the user as an evaluation history T5 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 30A, the items of the evaluation history T5 include, for example, the date and time indicating the time when the action was performed, the user ID of the user who is the subject of the action, the type of the action, the action The evaluation value etc. which were calculated from Here, the type of action corresponds to each process performed in the request processing unit 135, such as browsing action, search action, article posting action, web page updating action, and the like. The evaluation history T5 is updated by the processing of the evaluation value recording unit 136, and is referred to in the processing of the first point giving unit 138a and the benefit index value calculation unit 137, and the processing of the browsing processing unit 135a as necessary. May be referred to.
 また、評価履歴記憶部143には、コラム等の閲覧者による評価の履歴が、図30(b)に示すような記事評価履歴T6として記憶されている。図30(b)に示すように、記事評価履歴T6の項目としては、例えば、当該評価の行なわれた時間を表す日時、当該評価がなされたコラム等の投稿者のユーザID、当該評価から求められた評価値等が挙げられる。記事評価履歴T6は、評価処理部135fの処理によって更新されると共に、特典指標値算出部137の処理において参照される。 Further, in the evaluation history storage unit 143, a history of evaluations by viewers such as columns is stored as an article evaluation history T6 as shown in FIG. 30 (b). As shown in FIG. 30 (b), as items of the article evaluation history T6, for example, it is obtained from the date and time representing the time when the evaluation was performed, the user ID of the poster such as the column where the evaluation was made, and the evaluation Evaluation value etc. The article evaluation history T6 is updated by the process of the evaluation processing unit 135f, and is referred to in the process of the benefit index value calculation unit 137.
(ポイント履歴記憶部144に記憶されている情報)
 ポイント履歴記憶部144には、図31に示すようなポイント得失履歴T7が利用者毎に記憶されている。図31に示すように、ポイント得失履歴T7の項目としては、例えば、ポイントが取得された日時、取得されたポイント数(負の数ならば喪失したことを意味する。)、何によってポイントを取得又は喪失したかを示す詳細、取得されたポイントの残高等が挙げられる。ここで、取得されたポイントの残高とは、ポイントが取得された記録毎に、その際取得されたポイントがあと何ポイント残っているかを示す値であり、当該利用者がポイントを喪失した際にのみ更新される。
(Information stored in point history storage unit 144)
In the point history storage unit 144, a point gain and loss history T7 as shown in FIG. 31 is stored for each user. As shown in FIG. 31, as the items of the point gain and loss history T7, for example, the date and time the point was obtained, the number of points obtained (a negative number means lost), and points obtained by what Or the details indicating the loss, the balance of acquired points, and the like. Here, the acquired balance of points is a value indicating, for each record for which points have been acquired, how many points remain after the acquired points, and when the user loses the points Only updated.
 なお、ポイントの喪失の記録には、残高は記録されない。また、第一の利用者のポイント得失履歴T7には、譲渡によりポイントを喪失した場合に記録される譲渡先の利用者のユーザIDが含まれていてもよい。また、第二の利用者のポイント得失履歴T7には、譲渡によりポイントを取得した場合に記録される譲渡元の利用者のユーザIDが含まれていてもよい。 Note that the recording of the loss of points, balance is not recorded. Further, the point gain and loss history T7 of the first user may include the user ID of the transferee user recorded when the points are lost due to transfer. In addition, the second user's point gain and loss history T7 may include the user ID of the transfer source user, which is recorded when points are obtained by transfer.
 ポイント得失履歴T7は、ポイント消費部133、ポイント還元部134、ポイント譲渡処理部135e、特典付与部138及び入金処理部139の処理によって更新されると共に、ポイント還元部134の処理において参照される他、必要に応じて、閲覧処理部135aの処理において参照されてもよい。 The point gain and loss history T7 is updated by the processing of the point consumption unit 133, the point reduction unit 134, the point transfer processing unit 135e, the benefit provision unit 138, and the deposit processing unit 139, and is referred to in the processing of the point reduction unit 134 , if necessary, may be referenced in the processing of the browsing processing part 135a.
(預入金履歴記憶部145に記憶されている情報)
 預入金履歴記憶部145は、預入金額の増減履歴が、図32に示すような預入金履歴T8として、第一の利用者毎に記憶されている。図32に示すように、預入金履歴T8の項目としては、例えば、預入金額の増減が発生した日時、預入金額の増減額、預入金額の増減の根拠、及び、預入金残高等が挙げられる。預入金履歴T8における最新の預入金残高が、当該預入金履歴T8に対応する第一の利用者の預入金額に相当する。預入金履歴T8は、ポイント譲渡処理部135e、奨励金支給部138e及び入金処理部139の処理によって更新される。また、必要に応じて、閲覧処理部135aやポイント譲渡処理部135eの処理において参照されてもよい。
(Information stored in deposit history storage unit 145)
The deposit history storage unit 145 stores the increase / decrease history of the deposit amount as the deposit history T8 as shown in FIG. 32 for each first user. As shown in FIG. 32, the items of the deposit history T8 include, for example, the date and time when the deposit amount increased or decreased, the deposit amount increase or decrease, the basis of the deposit amount change, the deposit balance, and the like. The latest deposit balance in deposit history T8 corresponds to the deposit amount of the first user corresponding to the deposit history T8. The deposit history T8 is updated by the processing of the point transfer processing unit 135e, the incentive payment unit 138e, and the payment processing unit 139. In addition, it may be referred to in the processing of the browsing processing unit 135a or the point transfer processing unit 135e, as necessary.
 なお、預入金履歴記憶部145には、第一の利用者だけでなく、運営者の預入金履歴T8が記憶されていてもよい。運営者の預入金額は、預入金口座の残高から、全ての第一の利用者の預入金額を除いた金額である。運営者の預入金履歴T8は、ポイント譲渡処理部135e及び奨励金支給部138eの全ての処理によって更新されることになる。 The deposit history storage unit 145 may store the deposit history T8 of the operator as well as the first user. The operator's deposit amount is the amount obtained by removing the deposit amount of all the first users from the balance of the deposit account. The operator's deposit history T8 is updated by all processes of the point transfer processing unit 135e and the incentive payment unit 138e.
(ウェブページ情報等記憶部146に記憶されている情報)
 ウェブページ情報等記憶部146には、転職サイトの基礎となる各種のウェブページや、各利用者専用に割り当てられているウェブページの情報、その他転職サイト内で提供される様々なコンテンツ等が記憶されている。例えば、ウェブページの情報はHTML(HyperText Markup Language)ファイル等として、その他のコンテンツの情報は文書ファイルや画像ファイル、音声ファイル、動画ファイル等として保存されている。これらの情報は、要求処理部135の処理結果として利用者端末30に提供される。なお、本実施形態では各利用者に1つのウェブページが割り当てられるものとして説明を行っているが、各利用者が独自のウェブサイトを構成できるよう、各利用者に、ウェブサイトの構成要素であるウェブページ情報及びコンテンツ等を格納するためのサーバスペースが割り当てられる態様であってもよい。
(Information stored in storage unit 146 such as web page information)
The web page information etc. storage unit 146 stores various web pages as a basis of a job change site, information of web pages allocated exclusively for each user, and various contents provided in the job change site. It is done. For example, information of a web page is stored as an HTML (HyperText Markup Language) file or the like, and information of other contents is stored as a document file, an image file, an audio file, a moving image file or the like. These pieces of information are provided to the user terminal 30 as the processing result of the request processing unit 135. In the present embodiment, it is described that one web page is assigned to each user. However, each user can use a component of the website so that each user can configure a unique website. The server space for storing certain web page information and content may be allocated.
[ポイント管理システムS2の機能の詳細]
(設定情報更新部131)
 設定情報更新部131は、運営者端末20からの要求に応じて、設定情報記憶部142に記憶されている設定情報を更新する。管理サーバ10が運営者端末20から設定情報を変更するための要求を受信すると、設定情報更新部131は、どの設定情報を変更するか選択するよう運営者に要求する画面を運営者端末20に表示させる。
[Details of function of point management system S2]
(Setting information update unit 131)
The setting information updating unit 131 updates the setting information stored in the setting information storage unit 142 in response to a request from the operator terminal 20. When the management server 10 receives a request for changing setting information from the operator terminal 20, the setting information updating unit 131 sends a screen to the operator terminal 20 requesting the operator to select which setting information to change. Display.
 変更可能な設定情報の選択肢として、例えば消費ポイント対応表T2、評価値対応表T3、記事評価値対応表T4、第一特典指標値関数F1、第二特典指標値関数F2、第一ポイント関数F3、第二ポイント関数F4、第三ポイント関数F5、第四ポイント関数F6、手数料関数F7、奨励金関数F8及び割引率関数F9、特典指標値算出間隔IV、評価値抽出期間PDが表示される。 As choices of setting information that can be changed, for example, consumption point correspondence table T2, evaluation value correspondence table T3, article evaluation value correspondence table T4, first benefit index value function F1, second benefit index value function F2, first point function F3 , A second point function F4, a third point function F5, a fourth point function F6, a fee function F7, a reward function F8, a discount rate function F9, a benefit index value calculation interval IV, and an evaluation value extraction period PD are displayed.
 運営者によって、変更する設定情報が選択されると、設定情報更新部131は、運営者が新しい設定情報を入力するための画面を運営者端末20に表示させる。運営者によって新しい値又は関数が入力されると、設定情報更新部131は、設定情報記憶部142に記憶されている当該設定情報の値又は関数を、運営者によって新しく入力された値又は関数に更新する。 When the setting information to be changed is selected by the operator, the setting information updating unit 131 causes the operator terminal 20 to display a screen for the operator to input new setting information. When a new value or function is input by the operator, the setting information updating unit 131 sets the value or function of the setting information stored in the setting information storage unit 142 to the value or function newly input by the operator. Update.
 なお、設定情報更新部131による設定情報の更新は、運営者による更新作業から所定の時間が経過した後に行なわれてもよい。例えば、設定情報更新部131は、運営者による更新作業により取得された新しい設定情報を用いて、所定の期間が経過後に新しい設定情報への更新が行なわれることを利用者に告知し、利用者に告知してから所定の期間が経過後に初めて設定情報記憶部142に記憶されている設定情報を更新してもよい。 The update of the setting information by the setting information update unit 131 may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update operation by the operator. For example, the setting information updating unit 131 notifies the user that updating to new setting information will be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed, using the new setting information acquired by the updating operation by the operator. The setting information stored in the setting information storage unit 142 may be updated for the first time after a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification.
 なお、設定情報の変更は、運営者に代わって情報提供サイトにおける利用者端末30と管理サーバ10との間でのデータの送受信状態を監視し、望ましい設定情報を導出するよう設計された人工知能によって行なわれてもよい。 In addition, the change of setting information monitors the transmission / reception state of data between the user terminal 30 and the management server 10 at the information providing site on behalf of the operator, and is artificial intelligence designed to derive desirable setting information. It may be done by
(認証部132)
 認証部132は、転職サイトへアクセスを行った利用者のログイン制御を行なう。管理サーバ10が利用者端末30からユーザID及びパスワードの情報を含む認証要求を受信すると、認証部132は、利用者情報表T1に含まれるユーザID及びパスワードの情報に基づいて、当該利用者端末30を操作する利用者の認証処理を行なう。
(Authentication unit 132)
The authentication unit 132 performs login control of the user who has accessed the job change site. When the management server 10 receives an authentication request including user ID and password information from the user terminal 30, the authentication unit 132 determines the user terminal based on the user ID and password information included in the user information table T1. Perform authentication processing of the user who operates 30.
 また、認証部132は、運営者のログイン制御を行なうことも可能である。例えば、利用者情報表T1に運営者のユーザID及びパスワードが記憶されており、認証要求に含まれるユーザID及びパスワードが利用者情報表T1に記憶されている運営者のユーザID及びパスワードと一致する場合には、認証部132は、当該認証要求の発信者が運営者であると認証する。 The authentication unit 132 can also perform login control of the operator. For example, the user information and password of the operator are stored in the user information table T1, and the user ID and password included in the authentication request match the user ID and password of the operator stored in the user information table T1. In this case, the authentication unit 132 authenticates that the sender of the authentication request is the operator.
(ポイント消費部133)
 ポイント消費部133は、利用者端末30からの要求に対して、当該利用者のポイントを減算した上で、要求処理部135における処理の実行を許可する。管理サーバ10が、利用者端末30から、認証部132において第二の利用者として認証された利用者による、要求処理部135で処理されるべき各種要求を受信すると、ポイント消費部133は、消費ポイント対応表T2及び利用者情報表T1における当該第二の利用者の割引率を参照し、受信した要求の種別から、減算すべきポイント数を算出する。
(Point consumption unit 133)
The point consumption unit 133 subtracts the point of the user from the request from the user terminal 30, and then permits the request processing unit 135 to execute the process. When the management server 10 receives, from the user terminal 30, the various requests to be processed by the request processing unit 135 by the user authenticated as the second user by the authentication unit 132, the point consumption unit 133 consumes Referring to the discount rate of the second user at the point correspondence table T2 and the user information table T1, the type of the received request, calculates the number of points to be subtracted.
 続いて、ポイント消費部133は、当該第二の利用者のポイント得失履歴T7に記録されているポイントの取得に係る記録のうち、残高が0でない最古の記録の残高から、減算すべきポイント数に達するまで、記録毎にポイントの減算処理を行なうと共に、第一の利用者からの譲渡により取得されたポイントが減算された場合には、ポイント還元部134への通知処理を行なう。 Subsequently, the point consumption unit 133 is a point to be subtracted from the balance of the oldest record whose balance is not 0 among the records pertaining to the acquisition of points recorded in the point gain and loss history T7 of the second user. The point subtraction processing is performed for each recording until the number is reached, and when the points acquired by the transfer from the first user are subtracted, notification processing to the point reduction unit 134 is performed.
 例えば、ある第二の利用者が、図33(a)に示すように、7月1日に譲渡により300ポイントを取得し、7月5日に特典として100ポイント取得していた場合、それ以降にポイントを消費していなければ、7月1日記録分は300ポイント全部、及び7月5日記録分は100ポイント全部が残高として記録される。 For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), if a second user acquires 300 points by transfer on July 1 and acquires 100 points as a benefit on July 5, If the points have not been consumed, the total of 300 points recorded on July 1 and the entire 100 points recorded on July 5 are recorded as the balance.
 この後、当該第二の利用者が、例えば、7月10日にウェブページの更新を行なうための要求を発信し、ポイント消費部133が、当該要求に対応するために当該第二の利用者が保有するポイントから減算されるべきポイント数が350ポイントであると算出したとする。この場合、ポイント消費部133は、まず、最も古い記録である7月1日記録分からポイントを減算するため、まず、7月1日記録分の残高300ポイントから、300ポイント全部を減算する。この際、図33(b)に示すように、7月1日記録分の残高を0ポイントに更新すると共に、当該記録分の譲渡元の情報を参照し、ユーザIDが記録されているため、当該譲渡元の利用者のユーザIDと当該記録分から減算されたポイント数(本例示の場合は300)とを関連付けて、ポイント還元部134に通知する。 Thereafter, for example, the second user issues a request for updating the web page on July 10, and the point consumer unit 133 responds to the request by the second user. Suppose that the number of points to be subtracted from the points held by is calculated to be 350 points. In this case, the point consumption unit 133 first subtracts all 300 points from the balance 300 points of the July 1st record to subtract points from the oldest record, the July 1st record. At this time, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the balance of the July 1 record is updated to 0 points, and the user ID is recorded with reference to the transfer source information of the record. The user ID of the transfer source user is associated with the number of points (300 in the case of this example) subtracted from the recording, and notified to the point reduction unit 134.
 以上の処理により、ポイント消費部133は、減算すべき350ポイントのうち300ポイントが減算できた。続いて、ポイント消費部133は、残り50ポイントを、次に古い記録である7月5日記録分から減算する。7月5日記録分の残高は100ポイントであるため、50ポイントを減算すると50ポイントが残ることになる。この際、図33(c)に示すように、ポイント消費部133は、7月5日記録分の残高を50ポイントに更新すると共に、当該記録分の譲渡元の情報を参照し、ユーザIDが記録されていないため、ポイント還元部134への通知は行わずに処理を終了する。 By the above process, the point consuming unit 133 can subtract 300 points out of 350 points to be subtracted. Subsequently, the point consumption unit 133 subtracts the remaining 50 points from the next oldest record, the July 5 record. The balance for the July 5 record is 100 points, so 50 points will remain after subtracting 50 points. At this time, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the point consumption unit 133 updates the balance for the July 5 record to 50 points, refers to the information of the transfer source for the record, and the user ID is Since the information is not recorded, the process is ended without notifying the point reducing unit 134.
 これらの処理が問題無く完了すると、ポイント消費部133は、図33(d)に示すように、当該ポイント得失履歴T7に、日時、ポイント数及び詳細を新たに記録すると共に、当該要求を要求処理部135に伝達する。ここで記録されるポイント数は、減算すべきポイント数に負号を付した数とすることができる。また、詳細には、ウェブページの更新を行なうための消費である旨がわかる記録がなされればよい。 If these processes are completed without any problem, the point consumption unit 133 newly records the date and time, the number of points, and details in the point gain and loss history T7 as shown in FIG. It transmits to the part 135. The number of points recorded here can be a number obtained by adding a minus sign to the number of points to be subtracted. Also, in detail, a record may be made to indicate that the consumption is for updating the web page.
 一方、残高の合計より減算すべきポイント数の方が多く、減算処理が完了しない場合には、ポイント消費部133は、当該利用者にポイントが足りない旨を知らせる警告を発信すると共に、当該要求を消去又は保留する。 On the other hand, many people total number of points to be subtracted from the balance, along with if the subtraction process is not completed, the point consumption unit 133, transmits a warning notifying that points to the user is insufficient, the request Delete or hold
(ポイント還元部134)
 ポイント還元部134は、ポイント消費部133から通知された譲渡元の利用者のユーザID及び減算されたポイント数の情報に基づいて、当該譲渡元である第一の利用者にポイントを付与する。ポイント還元部134は、ポイント消費部133から通知されたユーザIDに対応する第一の利用者のポイント得失履歴T7に、日時、ポイント数及び詳細を記録する。ここで、ポイント数には、第三ポイント関数F5により、ポイント消費部133から通知された減算すべきポイント数から算出された付与すべきポイント数が記録され、詳細には、譲渡先でのポイント消費による還元である旨がわかる記録がなされる。
(Point reduction unit 134)
Point reduction section 134, based on the user ID and subtracted points of information transferable original user notified from the point consumption portion 133 imparts a point to the first user is the transfer origin. Point reduction section 134, the first user point tradeoffs history T7 that correspond to the user ID notified from the point consumption unit 133, date and time, the number of points and detail records. Here, the number of points, the third point function F5, points to be given, which is calculated from the number of points to be subtracted notified from the point consumption portion 133 is recorded, in particular, points in the transferee A record is made to show that it is a reduction due to consumption.
(要求処理部135)
 要求処理部135は、利用者端末30からの様々な要求に対応するための処理を行なう。要求処理部135は、以下に詳述する閲覧処理部135a、検索処理部135b、ウェブページ更新処理部135c、投稿処理部135d、ポイント譲渡処理部135e、評価処理部135fのような様々な機能処理部を備えている。なお、要求処理部135の機能は、これらの機能処理部によって行なわれるものに限定されず、ウェブサイトにおいて一般的に用いられている機能が適宜追加されていてもよい。また、利用者端末30からの要求が、専用のアプリケーションによって処理される場合には、当該アプリケーションがこれらの機能処理部を備えていればよい。
(Request processing unit 135)
The request processing unit 135 performs processing for responding to various requests from the user terminal 30. The request processing unit 135 performs various functional processing such as a browsing processing unit 135a, a search processing unit 135b, a web page update processing unit 135c, a posting processing unit 135d, a point transfer processing unit 135e, and an evaluation processing unit 135f described in detail below. It has a department. The functions of the request processing unit 135 are not limited to those performed by these function processing units, and functions generally used on a website may be added as appropriate. In addition, when a request from the user terminal 30 is processed by a dedicated application, the application may be provided with these function processing units.
(閲覧処理部135a)
 閲覧処理部135aは、要求処理部135に属し、利用者端末30からの要求に応じたウェブページを提供する。本実施形態に係る閲覧処理部135aによる機能は、一般的なウェブサーバが有する機能と略同様であるが、基本的に、閲覧要求を発信した利用者と地域情報が全く一致しない利用者の情報は、要求発信者である利用者には提供しないという特徴を有する。これにより、閲覧要求を発信した利用者にとって不必要な情報を予め除外することができるため、利用者が必要な情報を探し出すまでの労力を軽減することができる。
(Browse processing unit 135a)
The browsing processor 135 a belongs to the request processor 135 and provides a web page according to the request from the user terminal 30. Function of the browsing processing part 135a of the present embodiment is substantially the features and the general web server has similar basically, the call-originating user and information of the user which area information is not at all match the viewing request Has the feature that it is not provided to the user who is the request originator. As a result, unnecessary information for the user who has sent the browsing request can be excluded in advance, so that it is possible to reduce the effort for the user to find out the necessary information.
 また、閲覧処理部135aは、利用者端末30に提供すべきウェブページに広告枠等が含まれる場合には、後述する表示情報選出部138bにより選出された広告を当該広告枠に挿入したウェブページを利用者端末30に提供することができる。 Also, the browsing processing part 135a, if included the inventory or the like on a web page to be provided to the user terminal 30, web page insert ads elected by the display information selecting unit 138b to be described later to the inventory Can be provided to the user terminal 30.
 さらにまた、閲覧処理部135aは、利用者端末30からの、各種履歴の閲覧要求を受け付けてもよい。例えば、管理サーバ10が、利用者端末30からサービス利用履歴の閲覧要求を受信した場合には、評価履歴記憶部143に記憶されている評価履歴T5から、当該要求の発信者である利用者によるサービス利用行為に基づく評価記録を抽出し、当該利用者のサービス利用履歴として利用者端末30に提供することができる。また、ポイントの得失履歴について閲覧要求を受け付け、ポイント履歴記憶部144に記憶されている、当該要求の発信者である利用者に対応するポイント得失履歴T7を利用者端末30に表示させてもよい。さらにまた、預入金の増減履歴について閲覧要求を受け付け、預入金履歴記憶部145に記憶されている、当該要求の発信者である第一の利用者に対応する預入金履歴T8を利用者端末30に表示させてもよい。 Furthermore, the browsing processing unit 135a may receive a browsing request of various histories from the user terminal 30. For example, when the management server 10 receives a request for browsing service usage history from the user terminal 30, the evaluation history T5 stored in the evaluation history storage unit 143 indicates the request by the user who is the sender of the request. An evaluation record based on a service usage act can be extracted and provided to the user terminal 30 as a service usage history of the user. Alternatively, the user terminal 30 may display a point acquisition history T7 corresponding to the user who is the sender of the request, which receives the browsing request regarding the acquisition history of points and is stored in the point history storage unit 144. . Furthermore, the user terminal 30 receives the deposit request T2 about the deposit request T4 to receive the browse request for the increase / decrease history of deposit, and stored in the deposit / deposit history memory unit 145 corresponding to the first user who is the sender of the request. it may be displayed on.
(検索処理部135b)
 検索処理部135bは、要求処理部135に属し、利用者端末30からの情報検索要求に含まれる条件に合う情報を選出し提示する。検索処理部135bによる機能は、一般的な情報検索機能と略同様であるが、検索結果表示画面の生成にあたり、後述する表示順位決定部138cにより決定された表示順位に基づいて、より上位の情報を、より閲覧者の目に止まりやすい優位な位置に配置することを特徴とする。
(Search processing unit 135b)
The search processing unit 135 b belongs to the request processing unit 135 and selects and presents information that meets the conditions included in the information search request from the user terminal 30. The function of the search processing unit 135b is substantially the same as a general information search function, but when generating the search result display screen, higher-order information is generated based on the display order determined by the display order determination unit 138c described later. Are placed in an advantageous position that is more easily visible to viewers.
(ウェブページ更新処理部135c)
 ウェブページ更新処理部135cは、要求処理部135に属し、各利用者専用に割り当てられているウェブページを、当該利用者の要求に応じて更新する。管理サーバ10が利用者端末30からウェブページを更新するための要求を受信すると、ウェブページ更新処理部135cは、利用者情報表T1から、当該利用者専用のウェブページのアドレスを取得し、当該利用者専用のウェブページを編集するための画面を利用者端末30に表示させる。ウェブページ更新処理部135cは、利用者によって編集が行なわれた後の新たなウェブページの情報を受信すると、ウェブページ情報等記憶部146に記憶されている当該利用者専用のウェブページの情報を、編集後の新たなウェブページの情報に更新する。
(Web page update processing unit 135c)
The web page update processing unit 135c updates the web page belonging to the request processing unit 135 and allocated exclusively to each user, in response to the user's request. When the management server 10 receives a request for updating a web page from the user terminal 30, the web page update processing unit 135c acquires the address of the web page dedicated to the user from the user information table T1, A screen for editing a web page dedicated to the user is displayed on the user terminal 30. When the web page update processing unit 135c receives the information on the new web page after being edited by the user, the web page update processing unit 135c stores the information on the web page dedicated to the user stored in the web page information storage unit 146. , Update the information on the new web page after editing.
 なお、各利用者にウェブサイトを構成するためのサーバスペースが割り当てられている場合には、ウェブページ更新処理部135cは、HTMLファイルやコンテンツ等のアップロード要求を受け付け、ウェブページ情報等記憶部146の当該利用者に割り当てられているスペースに既存のファイルの更新を行ったり、新規のファイルを記憶させたりすることができる。 In addition, when the server space for comprising a website is allocated to each user, the web page update process part 135c receives the upload request | requirement of an HTML file, a content, etc., The web page information etc. storage part 146 The existing file can be updated or a new file can be stored in the space allocated to the user in question.
(投稿処理部135d)
 投稿処理部135dは、要求処理部135に属し、利用者端末30からのコラムや質問等を投稿するための要求を受け付ける。投稿処理部135dは、例えば一般的な電子掲示板の機能を有しており、投稿された情報をウェブページ情報等記憶部146に記憶させる。
(Post processing unit 135d)
The post processing unit 135d belongs to the request processing unit 135, and receives a request from the user terminal 30 for posting a column, a question, and the like. The post processing unit 135 d has, for example, a function of a general electronic bulletin board, and stores the posted information in the web page information etc. storage unit 146.
(ポイント譲渡処理部135e)
 ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、要求処理部135に属し、第一の利用者からの要求に応じてポイントを移動させる処理を行なう。管理サーバ10が、利用者端末30から、要求を発信した第一の利用者、譲渡するポイント数及び譲渡先の利用者の情報を含む、ポイントを譲渡するための要求を受信すると、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、まず、要求を発信した第一の利用者の預入金履歴T8から預入金額を取得する。また、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、手数料関数F7により、譲渡するポイント数から手数料を算出し、取得した預入金額と比較する。取得した預入金額が算出した手数料以上であれば、以下に説明するようなポイント移動処理を行なう。
(Point transfer processing unit 135e)
The point transfer processing unit 135e belongs to the request processing unit 135, and performs processing of moving points in response to a request from the first user. When the management server 10 receives from the user terminal 30 a request for transferring points, including information on the first user who has sent a request, the number of points to be transferred, and the user of the transfer destination, point transfer processing is performed. The unit 135e first acquires the deposit amount from the deposit history T8 of the first user who has sent the request. Also, the point transfer unit 135e includes a fee function F7, calculates a fee from the number of points to be transferred, it compares the acquired deposit amount. If the acquired deposit amount is equal to or more than the calculated fee, point transfer processing as described below is performed.
 ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、まず、要求を発信した第一の利用者のポイント得失履歴T7において、譲渡したポイント数分の減算処理を行い、日時、譲渡したポイント数、譲渡先の利用者のユーザID、及び、譲渡によるポイントの喪失である旨の記録を行なう。具体的な処理の手順は、ポイント消費部133におけるポイントの減算処理と同様であるので、説明を省略する。さらに、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、要求を発信した第一の利用者の預入金履歴T8に新たな預入金減額の記録として、日時、手数料関数F7により譲渡するポイント数から算出された手数料額、及び、譲渡による減額である旨を記録する。 The point transfer processing unit 135e first performs subtraction processing for the number of points transferred in the point gain and loss history T7 of the first user who has sent the request, and the date and time, the number of points transferred, and the user of the transfer destination user Make a record of the ID and the loss of points due to assignment. The specific procedure of the process is the same as the point subtraction process in the point consumption unit 133, so the description will be omitted. Furthermore, the point transfer processing unit 135e sets the date and time, the fee amount calculated from the number of points to be transferred by the fee function F7, as a new deposit reduction record to the deposit history T8 of the first user who has sent the request. and, to record the effect that a reduction on the sale.
 さらにまた、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、譲渡先の利用者のポイント得失履歴T7に、譲渡により所定の数量のポイントを取得した旨を記録する。具体的には、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、新たなポイント取得の記録として、日時、譲渡されたポイント数、譲渡元である要求を発信した第一の利用者のユーザID、及び、譲渡による取得である旨を記録する。 Furthermore, the point transfer processing unit 135e records, in the point acquisition history T7 of the transfer destination user, the fact that a predetermined number of points have been acquired by transfer. Specifically, the point transfer processing unit 135e acquires the date and time, the number of points transferred, the user ID of the first user who has sent the request that is the transfer source, and the transfer by means of transfer as recording of new point acquisition. to records that is.
 一方、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、利用者情報表T1から取得した預入金額が手数料未満であった場合には、上述のポイント移動処理を行わず、要求を発信した利用者端末30に、預入金額が足りない旨を知らせる警告を発信すると共に、当該要求を消去又は保留する。 On the other hand, when the deposit amount acquired from the user information table T1 is less than the fee, the point transfer processing unit 135e does not perform the above-described point transfer processing, and deposits the amount to the user terminal 30 that has sent the request. Issue a warning informing that there is not enough, and delete or hold the request.
 なお、ポイント譲渡処理部135eが処理を開始する要因は、第一の利用者からのポイントを譲渡するための要求に限定されない。例えば、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、管理サーバ10が、利用者端末30から、要求を発信した第二の利用者、譲り受けるポイント数及び譲渡元の第一の利用者の情報を含む、ポイントを譲り受けるための要求を受信したことに基づいて、譲渡元として指定された第一の利用者に、譲渡の意思の有無を確認する通知を行い、当該第一の利用者に譲渡の意思がある旨の回答を得た上で、前述の、手数料と預入金額との比較以降の処理を行ってもよい。また、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、反対に、第一の利用者からのポイントを譲渡するための要求を受けて、譲渡先の利用者にポイントを譲り受ける意思の有無を確認してもよい。 The factor for the point transfer processing unit 135e to start processing is not limited to the request from the first user for transferring points. For example, the point transfer processing unit 135e receives points from the user terminal 30, including the information of the second user who has sent a request, the number of points to be transferred, and the first user of the transfer source, from the user terminal 30. Based on the receipt of the request for the transfer, the first user designated as the transfer source is notified to confirm the presence or absence of the intention to transfer, and the first user has the intention to transfer After obtaining the answer, processing after the comparison between the fee and the deposit amount described above may be performed. In addition, the point transfer processing unit 135e may, conversely, receive a request from the first user for transferring points, and confirm whether or not the user of the transfer destination intends to receive the points.
 また、ここまでは、第一の利用者が預入金として運営者によって定められた預入金口座に金銭を預け入れることを前提に説明してきたが、運営者による預入金の一元管理が行なわれず、ポイント譲渡に伴う手数料の請求のみが自動で行なわれる態様としてもよい。この場合、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、ポイントを譲渡するための要求を発信した第一の利用者の預入金履歴T8に預入金減額の記録を残す代わりに、手数料関数F7により譲渡するポイント数から算出された手数料額を運営者に対して支払うよう求める通知を、当該第一の利用者に対して発信する。さらに、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、各第一の利用者がポイントの譲渡を行なう度に、各第一の利用者に請求すべき手数料を記録し、一定期間毎に、当該期間における各第一の利用者に請求すべき手数料をまとめて各第一の利用者に通知してもよい。また、この過程で記録された手数料の履歴は、運営者や第一の利用者にとって、資金を管理するのに有益な情報である。 Also, so far, the explanation has been made on the premise that the first user deposits money in the deposit account defined by the operator as deposit, but the centralized management of deposit by the operator is not performed, and points Only the request for the fee associated with the transfer may be made automatically. In this case, the point transfer processing unit 135e uses the number of points to be transferred by the fee function F7 instead of leaving a record of deposit reductions in the deposit history T8 of the first user who has sent a request for transferring points. Send a notice to the operator to pay the calculated fee amount to the first user. Furthermore, every time each first user transfers points, the point transfer processing unit 135e records a fee to be charged to each first user, and for each fixed period, each first The commissions to be charged to the users of may be notified to each first user. Also, the history of fees recorded in this process is useful information for managing the funds for the operator and the first user.
(評価処理部135f)
 評価処理部135fは、要求処理部135に属し、転職サイト内で公開されている情報に対して利用者によってなされる評価を、特典に反映される評価値として評価履歴記憶部143に記録する。転職サイト内で公開されているコラム等を閲覧するためのウェブページには、閲覧者が当該コラム等の評価を入力するためのチェックボックス等が設けられている。閲覧者によって当該コラム等の評価が入力されると、管理サーバ10は、当該コラム等を識別するための情報及び当該評価を受信する。これを受けて、評価処理部135fは、記事評価値対応表T4を参照して、当該評価から評価値を求めると共に、当該コラム等を識別するための情報から当該コラム等を発信した利用者のユーザIDを取得する。続いて、評価処理部135fは、記事評価履歴T6に、日時、当該コラム等の投稿者のユーザID、及び、記事評価値対応表T4から求められた評価値を、新たな記事評価記録として記録する。
(Evaluation processing unit 135f)
Evaluation processing unit 135f belongs to the request processing unit 135, the evaluation made by the user with respect to information published in the career sites, recorded in the evaluation history storage unit 143 as an evaluation value to be reflected in benefits. On a web page for browsing a column or the like published in the job change site, a check box or the like is provided for the reader to input an evaluation of the column or the like. When the viewer inputs an evaluation of the column or the like, the management server 10 receives information for identifying the column or the like and the evaluation. In response to this, the evaluation processing unit 135f refers to the article evaluation value correspondence table T4, with obtaining the evaluation value from the evaluation, from the information for identifying the column and the like of the user who originated the column or the like Get user ID. Subsequently, the evaluation processing unit 135f is the article evaluation history T6 recording, date, author's user ID, such as the column, and the evaluation value obtained from the article evaluation value correspondence table T4, as new articles rated recording Do.
(評価値記録部136)
 評価値記録部136は、要求処理部135においてなされた各処理に対して特典に反映される評価値を算出し、評価値を含む各処理に関する情報を評価履歴記憶部143に記録する。要求処理部135において何らかの処理が行なわれると、評価値記録部136は、評価値対応表T3を参照して、当該処理の内容から評価値を算出する。続いて、評価履歴T5に、当該処理の行なわれた日時、当該処理の要求を行った利用者のユーザID、当該処理の種別、及び、当該行為から算出した評価値を、新たな評価記録として記録する。
(Evaluation value recording unit 136)
The evaluation value recording unit 136 calculates an evaluation value to be reflected in the benefit for each process performed by the request processing unit 135, and records information on each process including the evaluation value in the evaluation history storage unit 143. When some processing is performed in the request processing unit 135, the evaluation value recording unit 136 calculates an evaluation value from the content of the process with reference to the evaluation value correspondence table T3. Subsequently, in the evaluation history T5, the date and time when the process was performed, the user ID of the user who requested the process, the type of the process, and the evaluation value calculated from the action are used as new evaluation records. Record.
(特典指標値算出部137)
 特典指標値算出部137は、評価履歴記憶部143に記憶されている各利用者に関する評価値に基づいて特典指標値を算出する。特典指標値算出部137は、特典指標値算出間隔IVが経過する毎に、各利用者に関する情報を表示する際の優先順位に影響を与える第一特典指標値と、ポイントや奨励金等の、直接的な金銭的価値を有する特典の付与に影響を与える第二特典指標値とをそれぞれ算出する。そして、特典指標値算出部137は、利用者情報記憶部141に記憶されている各利用者の第一特典指標値及び第二特典指標値を、それぞれ新たに算出した数値に更新する。なお、特典指標値算出部137は、特定指標値算出間隔IV毎に実行されるのではなく、評価履歴記憶部143に新たな評価値が記録される度に処理を実行してもよい。この場合、特典指標値算出部137は、新たに記録された評価値に関する利用者についてのみ、処理を実行すればよい。
(Privilege index value calculation unit 137)
The benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates a benefit index value based on the evaluation value regarding each user stored in the evaluation history storage unit 143. Benefits index value calculation section 137, every time elapses benefits index value calculating interval IV, a first privilege index value affects the priority when displaying information about each user, point or incentives, etc. The second benefit index value that affects the grant of benefits having direct monetary value is calculated respectively. The benefits index value calculation section 137 updates the first privilege index value and the second privilege index value of each user stored in the user information storage unit 141, the numerical value newly calculated. The benefit index value calculation unit 137 may execute the process each time a new evaluation value is recorded in the evaluation history storage unit 143 instead of being executed at every specific index value calculation interval IV. In this case, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 may execute the process only for the user related to the newly recorded evaluation value.
 特典指標値算出部137は、第一特典指標値関数F1に基づいて第一特典指標値を算出する。第一特典指標値関数F1の説明において例示した関数を例に挙げると、特典指標値算出部137は、ある利用者の第一特典指標値の算出は、ある利用者の第一特典指標値を以下に説明するような処理によって算出する。まず、特典指標値算出部137は、評価履歴T5における抽出起点以降の記録から当該利用者に関する地域依存性のない評価値を抽出し、抽出された評価値の合計を算出することにより、(当該利用者に関する地域依存性のない評価値の合計)を取得する。 The benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates the first benefit index value based on the first benefit index value function F1. Taking the function exemplified in the description of the first benefit index value function F1 as an example, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates the first benefit index value of a certain user by comparing the first benefit index value of a certain user. calculated by the processing as described below. First, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 extracts the evaluation value having no area dependency regarding the user from the record after the extraction starting point in the evaluation history T5, and calculates the sum of the extracted evaluation values ( to get the total regional-independent evaluation value) related to the user.
 また、特典指標値算出部137は、評価履歴T5における抽出起点以降の記録から当該利用者に関する地域依存性のある評価値を抽出し、記事評価履歴T6における抽出起点以降の記録から当該利用者が発信した情報に対する評価値を抽出する。そして、特典指標値算出部137は、抽出した評価値の合計を算出することにより、(当該利用者に関する地域依存性のある評価値の合計)を取得する。さらに、特典指標値算出部137は、利用者情報表T1から当該利用者と地域情報の一部又は全部が一致する利用者を抽出することにより、(当該利用者と地域情報の一部又は全部が一致する利用者の総数)を取得する。特典指標値算出部137は、こうして得られた各値を第一特典指標値関数F1に代入されることで、当該利用者の第一特典指標値を算出する。 Further, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 extracts an evaluation value having area dependency regarding the user from the record after the extraction starting point in the evaluation history T5, and the user uses the record after the extraction starting point in the article evaluation history T6. to extract the evaluation value for outgoing information. Then, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 obtains (the sum of evaluation values having area dependency with respect to the user) by calculating the sum of the extracted evaluation values. Furthermore, the privilege index value calculation unit 137 extracts a user whose partial user or all of the user's area information matches the user information table T1 (a part or all of the user information and the local information but to get the match the total number of users to be). The benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates the first benefit index value of the user by substituting each value obtained in this way into the first benefit index value function F1.
 一方、特典指標値算出部137は、第二特典指標値関数F2に基づいて第二特典指標値を算出する。ある利用者の第二特典指標値を算出する場合、特典指標値算出部137は、評価履歴T5における抽出起点以降の記録から当該利用者に関する評価値を抽出し、記事評価履歴T6における抽出起点以降の記録から当該利用者が発信した情報に対する評価値を抽出する。そして、特典指標値算出部137は、抽出した全ての評価値を足し合わせることにより第二特典指標値を算出する。 On the other hand, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates the second benefit index value based on the second benefit index value function F2. When calculating the second benefit index value of a certain user, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 extracts the evaluation value for the user from the record after the extraction starting point in the evaluation history T5, and the extraction starting point in the article evaluation history T6 the user from the recording and extracts an evaluation value for outgoing information for. Then, the benefit index value calculation unit 137 calculates a second benefit index value by adding up all the extracted evaluation values.
(特典付与部138)
 特典付与部138は、評価値記録部136による記録等に基づいて、記憶部140に記憶されている各利用者の特典に関する情報を更新する。特典付与部138は、以下に詳述する第一ポイント付与部138a、表示情報選出部138b、表示順位決定部138c、表示率算出部137c、第二ポイント付与部138d、奨励金支給部138e及び割引率算出部138fを備えている。
(Privilege granting unit 138)
The privilege imparting unit 138 updates the information related to the privilege of each user stored in the storage unit 140 based on the recording or the like by the evaluation value recording unit 136. The privilege giving unit 138 includes a first point giving unit 138a, a display information selecting unit 138b, a display order determining unit 138c, a display rate calculating unit 137c, a second point giving unit 138d, an incentive payment unit 138e, and a discount, which will be described in detail below. The rate calculator 138 f is provided.
(第一ポイント付与部138a)
 第一ポイント付与部138aは、特典付与部138に属し、評価値記録部136における処理が行なわれる度に、各評価値に基づいて各利用者に付与するポイント数を算出し、各利用者にポイント付与処理を行なう。評価履歴T5に新たな評価記録が記録されると、第一ポイント付与部138aは、まず、第一ポイント関数F3により、当該評価記録に含まれる評価値に基づいて、当該評価記録に関する利用者に付与すべきポイント数を算出する。続いて、第一ポイント付与部138aは、当該評価記録に含まれるユーザIDを有する利用者のポイント得失履歴T7に、新たなポイント取得記録として、日時、算出されたポイント数、及び、特典として取得した旨を記録する。
(First point granting section 138a)
Each time the process in the evaluation value recording unit 136 is performed, the first point application unit 138a calculates the number of points to be provided to each user based on each evaluation value, and the user is given to each user Perform point grant processing. When a new evaluation record is recorded in the evaluation history T5, the first point giving unit 138a first sends the first point function F3 to the user regarding the evaluation record based on the evaluation value included in the evaluation record. Calculate the number of points to be awarded. Subsequently, the first point giving unit 138a acquires the date and time, the calculated number of points, and the benefit as a new point acquisition record in the point acquisition history T7 of the user having the user ID included in the evaluation record. Record the effect.
(表示情報選出部138b)
 表示情報選出部138bは、特典付与部138に属し、閲覧処理部135aにおいて広告枠等が含まれるウェブページの提供が必要となった際に、当該広告枠に表示されるべき情報を選出する。表示情報選出部138bは、例えば、各利用者によって作成された広告の中から広告枠に表示される情報を選出する。表示情報選出部138bは、第一特典指標値がより大きい利用者に関する情報を、情報提供サイトにおいて優先的に表示させる。具体的には、表示情報選出部138bは、利用者情報表T1の第一特典指標値を参照し、より第一特典指標値が大きい利用者によって作成された広告ほど選出頻度が高くなるよう選出処理を行なう。
(Display information selection unit 138b)
The display information selection unit 138b belongs to the privilege giving unit 138, and when the browsing processing unit 135a needs to provide a web page including an advertisement space, the information to be displayed in the advertisement space is selected. The display information selection unit 138 b selects, for example, information to be displayed in the advertisement space from among the advertisements created by each user. The display information selection unit 138 b causes the information providing site to preferentially display information on the user whose first benefit index value is larger. Specifically, the display information selection unit 138b refers to the first benefit index value of the user information table T1 and selects the advertisement created by the user with the larger first benefit index value to have a higher selection frequency. Do the processing.
(表示順位決定部138c)
 表示順位決定部138cは、特典付与部138に属し、検索処理部135bの処理によって選出された情報の表示順位を決定する。表示順位決定部138cは、検索処理部135bによって情報の選出が行なわれると、選出された各情報に関する利用者の第一特典指標値を参照し、より第一特典指標値が大きい利用者に関する情報がより上位となるような順位付けを行なう。
(Display order determination unit 138c)
The display order determination unit 138c belongs to the privilege imparting unit 138 and determines the display order of the information selected by the process of the search processing unit 135b. When the information processing is performed by the search processing unit 135b, the display order determination unit 138c refers to the first benefit index value of the user regarding each of the selected information, and information on the user with the larger first benefit index value. Make a ranking so that is higher.
(第二ポイント付与部138d)
 第二ポイント付与部138dは、特典付与部138に属し、各利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各利用者に付与するポイント数を算出し、各利用者にポイント付与処理を行う。第二ポイント付与部138dは、特典指標値算出部137により第二特典指標値が更新されると、第二ポイント関数F4により、利用者情報表T1における各利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各利用者に付与すべきポイント数を算出し、各利用者のポイント得失履歴T7に、新たなポイント取得記録として、日時、算出されたポイント数、及び、特典として取得した旨を記録する。
(Second point granting unit 138d)
The second point granting unit 138d belongs to the privilege giving unit 138, calculates the number of points given to each user based on the second benefit index value of each user, and performs point giving processing for each user. When the second benefit index value is updated by the benefit index value calculation unit 137, the second point assignment unit 138d is updated based on the second benefit index value of each user in the user information table T1 by the second point function F4. Calculate the number of points to be given to each user, and record the date and time, the calculated number of points, and the fact that it has been acquired as a benefit as a new point acquisition record in the point gain and loss history T7 of each user .
 なお、第二ポイント付与部138dは、利用者に対応する第二特典指標値が既定値に達しない場合に、当該利用者からポイントを剥奪してもよい。第二ポイント付与部138dは、例えば、算出したポイント数が負の値だった場合には、当該算出値の絶対値に相当する数量のポイントを当該利用者から剥奪してもよい。この場合、第二ポイント付与部138dは、当該利用者のポイント得失履歴T7に、ポイント消費部133によるポイント減算処理と同様の処理を行い、運営者によりポイントが剥奪された旨を記録する。 The second point provision unit 138d may strip points from the user when the second benefit index value corresponding to the user does not reach the predetermined value. For example, when the calculated number of points is a negative value, the second point provision unit 138 d may deprive the user of the number of points corresponding to the absolute value of the calculated value. In this case, the second point giving unit 138d performs the same process as the point subtraction process by the point consumption unit 133 on the point gain and loss history T7 of the user, and records that the operator has deprived the points.
(第二ポイント付与部138dの変形例)
 第二ポイント付与部138dは、各利用者に第二特典指標値に基づく数量のポイントを付与する代わりに、第一ポイント付与部138aの処理によって各利用者に付与されるポイントの数量を、第一ポイント関数F3によって得られる数量から割増又は割引するための比率(以下、「ポイント比率」と称す。)を算出してもよい。この場合、第二ポイント付与部138dは、第二ポイント関数F4の代わりに、(当該利用者のポイント比率)=(当該利用者の第二特典指標値)/C8のような任意の定数C8を含む関数F10を参照すればよい。定数C8は、運営者によって設定される、利用者の第二特典指標値として期待される値である。また、定数C8は、全利用者の第二特典指標値の平均値等であってもよい。
(Modification of second point application unit 138d)
The second point granting unit 138d applies the number of points given to each user by the process of the first point granting unit 138a instead of giving each user the number of points based on the second benefit index value. A ratio (hereinafter, referred to as a “point ratio”) for premium or discount may be calculated from the quantity obtained by the one-point function F3. In this case, instead of the second point function F4, the second point giving unit 138d sets an arbitrary constant C8 such as (point ratio of the user concerned) = (second benefit index value of the user concerned) / C8. Reference may be made to the included function F10. The constant C8 is a value set by the operator and expected as the second benefit index value of the user. In addition, the constant C8 may be an average value or the like of the second benefit index values of all the users.
 ポイント比率を参照する場合、第一ポイント付与部138aは、評価履歴T5に新たな評価記録が記録されると、第一ポイント関数F3により、当該評価記録に含まれる評価値に基づいて、当該評価記録に関する利用者に付与するポイントの標準値を算出する。さらに、第一ポイント付与部138aは、この標準値に当該利用者のポイント比率を乗じることにより、実際に当該利用者に付与するポイントの数量を算出する。 When referring to the point ratio, when a new evaluation record is recorded in the evaluation history T5, the first point giving unit 138a performs the evaluation based on the evaluation value included in the evaluation record by the first point function F3. to calculate the standard value of the point given to the user about the record. Furthermore, the first point giving unit 138a calculates the number of points actually given to the user by multiplying the standard value by the point ratio of the user.
(奨励金支給部138e)
 奨励金支給部138eは、特典付与部138に属し、各第一の利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各第一の利用者に支給する奨励金額を算出し、各利用者に奨励金支給処理を行なう。奨励金支給部138eは、特典指標値算出部137により第二特典指標値が更新されると、奨励金関数F8により、利用者情報表T1における各第一の利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各第一の利用者に支給すべき奨励金額を算出する。奨励金支給部138eは、各第一の利用者の預入金履歴T8に、新たな預入金増減記録として、日時、算出された奨励金額、及び、奨励金の支給による増額である旨を記録する。
(Incentive Granting Department 138e)
Incentive money granting unit 138e belongs to privilege granting unit 138, calculates the incentive amount to be paid to each first user based on the second benefit index value of each first user, and encourages each user Perform the money supply process. When the second benefit index value is updated by the benefit index value calculation unit 137, the incentive fee provision unit 138e uses the incentive fee function F8 to set the second benefit index value of each first user in the user information table T1. Calculate the amount of incentive to be paid to each first user based on the above. The incentive payment unit 138e records the date and time, the calculated incentive amount, and the increase due to the payment of the incentive payment as a new deposit increase / decrease record in the deposit history T8 of each first user. .
(奨励金支給部138eの変形例)
 奨励金支給部138eは、各第一の利用者に第二特典指標値に基づく額の奨励金を支給する代わりに、ポイント譲渡処理部135eの処理によって各第一の利用者から徴収される手数料を、手数料関数F7によって得られる額から割増又は割引するための比率(以下、「手数料比率」と称す。)を算出してもよい。この場合、手数料比率は、ポイント比率と同様に、関数F10に類する関数の参照により算出されればよい。
(Modified example of incentive payment part 138e)
Instead of providing each first user with a reward based on the second benefit index value, the incentive payment unit 138e charges the fee collected from each first user by the processing of the point transfer processing unit 135e. May be calculated as a rate (hereinafter referred to as a “fee rate”) for adding or discounting the amount obtained by the fee function F7. In this case, the fee ratio may be calculated by referring to a function similar to the function F10, similarly to the point ratio.
 手数料比率を参照する場合、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、ポイントを譲渡するための要求に応じて、手数料関数F7により、要求に含まれる譲渡するポイント数から、手数料の標準額を算出する。さらに、ポイント譲渡処理部135eは、算出した標準額に、要求の発信者である第一の利用者の手数料比率を乗じることにより、実際に当該第一の利用者から徴収する手数料の額を算出する。 When referring to the fee ratio, the point transfer processing unit 135e calculates the standard amount of the fee from the number of points to be transferred included in the request by the fee function F7 in response to the request for transferring the points. Furthermore, the point transfer processing unit 135e calculates the amount of the fee actually collected from the first user by multiplying the calculated standard amount by the fee ratio of the first user who is the sender of the request. to.
(割引率算出部138f)
 割引率算出部138fは、特典付与部138に属し、各第二の利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各第二の利用者がサービスを利用するために消費するポイント数の割引率を算出する。割引率算出部138fは、特典指標値算出部137により第二特典指標値が更新されると、割引率関数F9により、利用者情報表T1における各第二の利用者の第二特典指標値に基づいて、各第二の利用者の割引率を算出する。割引率算出部138fは、利用者情報表T1の各第二の利用者に対応する割引率を、算出した割引率に更新する。
(Discount rate calculation unit 138f)
Discount rate calculation unit 138f belongs to the privilege granting unit 138, based on the second award index value of each second user, the discount rate of the number of points each second user to consume in order to use the service Calculate When the second benefit index value is updated by the benefit index value calculation unit 137, the discount rate calculation unit 138f uses the discount rate function F9 to set the second benefit index value for each second user in the user information table T1. Based on the discount rate of each second user is calculated. The discount rate calculation unit 138 f updates the discount rates corresponding to the respective second users in the user information table T 1 to the calculated discount rates.
(入金処理部139)
 入金処理部139は、金融機関のサーバ40から入金記録を取得し、入金者である第一の利用者の預入金額を入金額分加算した金額に更新すると共に、当該第一の利用者に預入金額に応じたポイントを付与する。入金処理部139は、管理サーバ10が金融機関のサーバ40から預入金口座への入金記録を受信すると、利用者情報表T1を参照して、当該入金記録に含まれる入金IDから入金者である第一の利用者を特定する。入金処理部139は、当該第一の利用者の預入金履歴T8に、新たな預入金増減記録として、当該入金記録に含まれる入金日時、当該入金記録に含まれる入金額、及び、入金による増額である旨を記録する。
(Payment processing unit 139)
The deposit processing unit 139 acquires a deposit record from the server 40 of the financial institution, updates the deposit amount of the depositor of the first user who is the depositor to the amount obtained by adding the deposit amount, and deposits to the first user. Grant points according to the amount. When the management server 10 receives the deposit record to the deposit account from the server 40 of the financial institution, the deposit processing unit 139 refers to the user information table T1 and is a depositor from the deposit ID included in the deposit record. Identify the first user. The deposit processing unit 139 adds a deposit date and time included in the deposit record, a deposit amount included in the deposit record, and an increase due to deposit to the deposit history T8 of the first user as a new deposit increase and decrease record Record that it is.
 さらに、入金処理部139は、当該第一の利用者の預入金履歴T8より入金記録反映後の預入金額及び過去最高の預入金残高を取得し、第四ポイント関数F6により、当該第一の利用者に付与すべきポイント数を算出してもよい。入金処理部139は、当該第一の利用者のポイント得失履歴T7に、新たなポイント取得履歴として、日時、算出されたポイント数、及び、入金による取得である旨を記録する。 Furthermore, the deposit processing unit 139 acquires the deposit amount after deposit record reflection and the highest deposit balance after the deposit history T8 of the first user, and the first point use by the fourth point function F6. it may calculate the number of points to be given to the person. The deposit processing unit 139 records, as a new point acquisition history, the date and time, the calculated number of points, and the fact that it is acquired by deposit in the point gain and loss history T7 of the first user.
(制御部130に備わり得るその他の機能処理部)
 制御部130には、ポイントが付与されてから利用されるまでの有効期限を管理するポイント管理部が備えられていてもよい。ポイント管理部は、各利用者のポイント得失履歴T7を監視し、ポイントが取得された記録のうち、ポイントが取得されてから有効期限が経過した記録について、残高を0に変更する処理を行なう。なお、ポイントの有効期限は設定情報の一種であり、運営者によって設定される。
(Other function processing units that can be provided to the control unit 130)
The control unit 130 may be provided with a point management unit that manages an expiration date until a point is given and then used. The point management unit monitors the point acquisition history T7 of each user and performs processing of changing the balance to 0 for the records for which the expiration date has passed since the points were acquired among the records for which the points were acquired. Note that the expiration date of points is a type of setting information and is set by the operator.
[本実施形態に係るポイント管理システムS2により提供される情報提供サイトの例]
 本実施形態に係るポイント管理システムS2によって提供される情報提供サイトの例を図34に示す。図34は、様々な情報提供サイトにおいて、第一の利用者及び第二の利用者になり得る対象をまとめた一覧表である。管理システムによれば、図34に示されている婚活サイトや不動産サイト、保険サイト等、仲介者を軸としたマーケットに関する多種多様な情報提供サイトの提供が可能である。ここで、仲介者とは、情報の統括を行なうと共に、需要者と供給者との適切なマッチングを図る者を意味し、あるテーマに基づいて収集又は作成した情報を整理して公開した結果として、需要者と供給者とを仲介する役割を果たすこともあるブロガー、コラムニスト、ライター及びジャーナリスト等も含まれる。情報提供者又は情報利用者が仲介者となってもよい。
[Example of Information Providing Site Provided by Point Management System S2 According to Present Embodiment]
An example of the information providing site provided by the point management system S2 according to the present embodiment is shown in FIG. FIG. 34 is a list of objects that can be the first user and the second user at various information provision sites. According to the management system, it is possible to provide a wide variety of information provision sites related to the market centering on the intermediary, such as the marriage activity site, the real estate site, and the insurance site shown in FIG. Here, an intermediary means a person who controls information properly and seeks appropriate matching between a consumer and a supplier, and as a result of organizing and releasing collected or created information based on a certain theme , Bloggers, columnists, writers, journalists, etc., who may also play a role in mediating the demander and the supplier. An information provider or an information user may be an intermediary.
 なお、図34で取り上げた情報提供サイトはあくまで例示であって、ポイント管理システムS2によって提供することのできる情報提供サイトはこれらに限定されない。また、複数の専門的情報提供サイトを統合したようなサイトの提供も可能である。この場合、異なる情報提供サイト間でのポイントの交換を可能とすることで、統合的なサイト全体として、ポイントがより流通しやすくなる効果が期待される。 In addition, the information provision site taken up in FIG. 34 is an example to the last, and the information provision site which can be provided by point management system S2 is not limited to these. In addition, it is also possible to provide a site in which a plurality of specialized information provision sites are integrated. In this case, by enabling exchange of points between different information providing sites, it is expected that the integrated site as a whole can more easily distribute points.
 また、本実施形態に係るポイント管理システムS2によって提供される情報提供サイトは、以上で説明したような、ウェブブラウザによって提供される情報提供サイトに限定されない。例えば、利用者がその情報提供サイトを利用するための専用アプリケーションを利用者端末30で実行し、当該アプリケーションによって、管理サーバ10から受信した内容を出力装置に出力させる態様の情報提供サイトであってもよい。さらに、本実施形態に係るポイント管理システムS2によって提供される情報提供サイトがVR技術を用いた仮想現実世界として構築され、ヘッドマウントディスプレイ等の出力装置によって利用者に提供されてもよい。 Further, the information providing site provided by the point management system S2 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the information providing site provided by the web browser as described above. For example, it is an information providing site in which the user executes a dedicated application for the user to use the information providing site on the user terminal 30, and the application causes the output device to output the content received from the management server 10, it may be. Furthermore, the information providing site provided by the point management system S2 according to the present embodiment may be constructed as a virtual reality world using VR technology and provided to the user by an output device such as a head mounted display.
[ポイント管理システムS2による効果]
 以上説明したように、ポイント管理システムS2によれば、利用者による情報提供サイト利用行為に応じて当該利用者に特典が付与されると共に、運営者が端末の操作によって特典付与の程度を制御するための設定情報を細部にわたって随時変更することができる。したがって、運営者の意図するように利用者の当該情報提供サイト利用意欲を増進させることができ、当該情報提供サイトが活性化されると共に、当該情報提供サイト内の情報が充実する。これにより、当該情報提供サイトを、さらに効率的な情報発信及び情報収集が行なわれるサイトに発展させることができる。
[Effect by point management system S2]
As described above, according to the point management system S2, with benefit is given to the user in response to the information providing site exploitation by the user, operator to control the degree of benefits provided by the operation of the terminal You can change the setting information for the details at any time. Therefore, the user's willingness to use the information provision site can be enhanced as intended by the operator, the information provision site is activated, and the information in the information provision site is enriched. Thus, the information providing site can be developed into a site where more efficient information transmission and information collection can be performed.
<第五実施形態>
 以下、第五実施形態について説明する。
 第五実施形態として、ヴァーチャルマーケットの中に作ることのできる1つのヴァーチャルマーケットであるメディアマーケットを例に挙げて構成要素1から4を次に説明する。
 なお、ここで言うヴァーチャルカレンシーとは、ヴァーチャルマーケットにおいて生成され、及び流通する、ヴァーチャルマーケットにおける内部に存在する価値の移動を媒介する手段に用いられる、実社会での通貨等も含めたその他の価値と交換可能なヴァーチャルマーケット内に限定した価値を有する通貨のような存在であり、例えば、実社会のリアルマーケットには価値を媒介する手段である法定通貨等のカレンシーが存在しているように、ヴァーチャルマーケットにもヴァーチャルカレンシーが存在させるということである。
 また、ヴァーチャルカレンシーには、実体がなく、ヴァーチャルマーケットでしか価値を有しておらず、及び生成する方法も、その他の資産と交換してマーケット内に生成するものではないことから、従来の通貨と異なり、ヴァーチャルマーケットの取り決めに基づき、どのような流通形態を採ることもできる価値を媒介する手段である。なお、ビットコイン等のいわゆる仮想通貨は、ここで言うヴァーチャルカレンシーには当たらない。
Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment will be described below.
As a fifth embodiment, components 1 to 4 will be described next by taking a media market, which is one virtual market that can be created in a virtual market, as an example.
As used herein, virtual reality means other values, including real-world currency, which are generated and distributed in the virtual market and used as means for mediating the movement of the existing value in the virtual market. It is an entity such as a currency with limited value in exchangeable virtual market, for example, as real market real society has currency such as legal currency which is a means to mediate value, virtual market It means that there will be virtual reality.
Also, virtual currency has no real substance, has value only in the virtual market, and the method of creating is not to create in the market in exchange for other assets, so the traditional currency However, based on the arrangements of the virtual market, it is a means of mediating the value that can be taken in any distribution form. Note that so-called virtual currency such as bitcoin does not meet the virtual currency mentioned here.
 図35は第五実施形態に係るヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムの一例を示す模式図である。
 ヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムは、ヴァーチャルマーケットを利用する利用者が、PC(Personal Computer)、タブレット、携帯電話、テレビ、カーナビゲーション、家庭用ゲーム機、又はロボット等の通信可能な端末のユーザインタフェース(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカ、キーボード、マウス、タッチパッド、タッチパネル、マイク、カメラ、コントローラ、リモコン、スイッチ、グローブ、スーツ、シューズ、ゴーグル等のさまざまなデータ入出力装置)を用いてネットワーク上のサーバとデータを送受信することにより、利用者間で情報を交換することができるウェブサイト、ウェブアプリケーション、SNS(Social Network Service)、メタバース、ソフトウェア、又はクラウドコンピューティング等のヴァーチャルマーケットを構築し、ヴァーチャルマーケットの利用者が相互に影響し合えるようにするためのシステムである。
FIG. 35 is a schematic view showing an example of the virtual reality supply system according to the fifth embodiment.
The virtual reality supply system is a user interface of a communicable terminal such as a personal computer (PC), a tablet, a mobile phone, a television, a car navigation, a home game machine, or a robot using a virtual market. Send and receive data with servers on a network using various data input / output devices (displays, speakers, keyboards, mice, touch pads, touch panels, microphones, cameras, controllers, remote controls, switches, gloves, suits, shoes, goggles, etc.) To exchange information between users, web sites, web applications, social networks service (SNS), metaverses, software, or virtual markets such as cloud computing. Built in the city, the user of the virtual market is a system of order to dress affect each other.
 構成要素1「メディアマーケットにおいて主として取り扱う情報」を説明する。
 なお、ここで主として取り扱う情報は、次に挙げる4つのデータとするが、これらのほかの情報の取り扱いを妨げるものではなく、状況に照らして臨機応変に変化させることができるものとする。また、ここで主として取り扱う情報は、「データに変換できる著作物すべて」であるとしても良い。
(1)「言語データ等」ジャーナリスト、コラムニスト、エッセイスト、又は評論家等の、大衆又は対象向け情報提供を行う主体による言語データ等の著作物
(2)「動画データ等」ニュース、ドキュメンタリー、ドラマ、エンターテイメント、又は論評等(いわゆるyoutuberの配信する動画も含む)の、大衆又は対象向け情報提供を行う主体により制作される動画データ等の著作物
(3)「作品データ等」論文、小説、脚本、漫画、絵画、書、写真、グラビア、音楽、映画、振り付け、設計図、ソフトウェア、コンピュータプログラム、又はこれらの二次的著作物や編集著作物等の大衆又は対象向け情報提供を行う主体により制作される作品データ等の著作物
(4)「有益情報データ等」弁護士等の士業者、キャリアコンサルタント等の転職エージェント、又は経営コンサルタント等のコンサルティング事業者等の提供する、大衆又は対象向けの専門的な有益情報データ等の著作物
Component 1 “Information Handled Mainly in Media Market” will be described.
In addition, although the information mainly handled here is four data listed below, it does not disturb the handling of these other information, and shall be changed according to the situation according to circumstances. Further, the information mainly handled here may be "all works that can be converted into data".
(1) "Language data etc." Journalists, columnists, essayists or critics, etc. works such as language data etc. by the public or subject providing information for the subject (2) "Video data etc." News, documentary, drama , Entertainment, or commentary (including moving images distributed by so-called youtuber), works such as moving image data produced by the public or subject providing information for the subject (3) "work data etc." articles, novels, script , Cartoons, pictures, books, photographs, gravures, music, movies, choreography, design drawings, software, computer programs, or those that provide information for the public or subjects such as their secondary works or edited works Copyrighted work data etc. (4) "Beneficial information data etc." Changers such as lawyers, career consultants etc. Jento, or management to provide such consulting businesses such as consultants, professional useful information copyrighted material, such as data of the masses or for target
 構成要素2「メディアマーケットにおいて従として取り扱う情報」を説明する。
 メディアマーケットには、前記構成要素1「主として取り扱う情報」以外に、さらに、「従として取り扱う情報」がある。なお、ここで従として取り扱う情報は、次に挙げる3つの情報とするが、このほかの情報の取り扱いを妨げるものではなく、状況に照らして臨機応変に変化させることができるものとする。
(1)「事業者情報」会社概要、事業内容、経営業況、採用情報、案内情報、又はIR等の、大衆又は対象向け情報発信を行う事業者により発信される事業者情報(地方自治体、社団法人、またはNPO法人等の非営利団体も含む)
(2)「個人情報」活動圏情報、活動時間情報、能力情報、適性情報、又は案内情報等の対象向け情報発信を行う個人により発信される個人情報(いわゆる個人情報保護法に規定される個人情報ではなく、事業者からのオファーの獲得を目的とした個人を特定できない仕事に限定されたアピール情報)
(3)「広告」事業者及び個人により、大衆又は対象向けに追加的に発信される広告情報
Component 2 “Information to be Followed in the Media Market” will be described.
In the media market, in addition to the component 1 “information to be handled mainly”, there is “information handled as a subordinate”. In addition, although the information handled as subordinate is made into the following three information, handling of other information is not disturbed and shall be changed according to the situation according to the situation.
(1) "Company Information" Company information, business information, business conditions, employment information, employment information, guidance information, or business information sent by a company that sends information to the public or target company (local government, Corporations or non-profit organizations such as NPOs
(2) “Personal information” Activity area information, activity time information, ability information, aptitude information, or personal information transmitted by an individual who sends information such as guidance information (individuals prescribed by the so-called personal information protection law) Appeal information limited to work that can not identify an individual for the purpose of acquiring an offer from a business, not information.
(3) Advertising information additionally transmitted to the public or the target by "advertising" operators and individuals
 構成要素3「メディアマーケットに参加する主体」について説明する。
 メディアマーケットに参加する主体は次に挙げる3つの主体とするが、このほかの主体の参加を妨げるものではなく、状況に照らして臨機応変に変化させることができるものとする。
(1)「アソシエイツ」第一の利用者又は第一の利用者の側面(以下、アソシエイツという)
 アソシエイツは、運営者の認定した、ヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムによってメディアマーケットに供給する第一のヴァーチャルカレンシー(以下、単にヴァーチャルカレンシーという)の第一次取得者たる「第一の利用者」である。他人に評価されることを目的とした著作物たる前記構成要素1で挙げた「言語データ等」、「動画データ等」、「作品データ等」、「有益情報データ等」等の価値ある情報をメディアマーケットを通じてその他の利用者に提供する主体である。
(2)「事業者」第二の利用者又は第二の利用者の側面(以下、事業者という)
 事業者は、アソシエイツから提供される価値ある情報を、有償・無償を問わず取得、又は発信したい情報を発信する主体である。メディアマーケットにおいてヴァーチャルカレンシーの消費を伴う活動を行おうとする場合には、アソシエイツからヴァーチャルカレンシーを譲受しメディアマーケットを利用する主体である。
(3)「個人」第二の利用者又は第二の利用者の側面(以下、個人という)
 個人は、アソシエイツから提供される価値ある情報を、有償・無償を問わず取得、又は発信したい情報を発信する主体である。メディアマーケットにおいてヴァーチャルカレンシーの消費を伴う活動を行おうとする場合には、アソシエイツからヴァーチャルカレンシーを譲受しメディアマーケットを利用する主体である。
A description will be given of component 3 "subjects who participate in the media market".
There are three main actors participating in the media market, but they do not prevent the participation of other main actors, and they can be changed according to the circumstances.
(1) The first user of "Associates" or the first user (hereinafter referred to as "Associates")
Associates is the "first user" who is the primary acquirer of the first virtual reality (hereinafter simply referred to as virtual reality) supplied by the operator, to the media market by the virtual reality supply system. Valuable information such as “language data etc.”, “moving image data etc.”, “work data etc.”, “beneficial information data etc.” mentioned in the above-mentioned component 1 intended to be evaluated by others It is an entity that provides to other users through the media market.
(2) Aspect of the "business person" second user or second user (hereinafter referred to as business person)
A business entity is an entity that sends out information that it wants to obtain or send out valuable information provided by Associates, whether paid or not. When it is going to carry out the activity with consumption of virtual reality in media market, it is an entity that transfers virtual reality from Associates and uses media market.
(3) "Individual" aspect of the second user or second user (hereinafter referred to as an individual)
An individual is an entity that sends out information that it wants to obtain or send out valuable information provided by Associates, whether paid or not. When it is going to carry out the activity with consumption of virtual reality in media market, it is an entity that transfers virtual reality from Associates and uses media market.
 構成要素4「サービスを提供する対象」について説明する。
 メディアマーケットがサービスを提供するリアルマーケットにおける対象は次のとおりとする。
(1)「地域」本実施形態から、ヴァーチャルカレンシーは、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット全体を通して価値を均一かつ一定にできること、および購買力平価の異なる地域にまたがり広域的に流通させることによる流通阻害要因を生じさせないようにしていることから、本実施形態ではサービスを提供するリアルマーケットにおける地域は、どのようにでもすることができる。つまり、最大規模でサービスを展開するのであれば、サービス提供地域は全世界となる。
(2)「参加主体」メディアマーケットの対象となる参加主体は、著作物としての価値ある情報をその他の利用者に提供しようとするアソシエイツ、並びに情報を取得、又は発信しようとする個人、及び事業者である。つまり、サービス提供地域における経済活動を行うすべての主体である。
(3)「※必要条件」メディアマーケットを利用するうえで必要になるインフラ要件は、運営者のサーバとデータ送受信するための通信ネットワークに接続された、メディアマーケットにログインするためのアプリケーションがインストールされた情報処理端末機器を参加主体が利用できる環境があることである。
The component 4 "object to provide service" will be described.
The targets in the real market that the media market provides services are as follows.
(1) "Region" From the present embodiment, virtual reality is able to make the value uniform and constant throughout the virtual market including the media market, and the distribution impediment factor caused by distributing widely across regions with different purchasing power parity. Since it does not generate, in this embodiment, the area in the real market which provides a service can be anything. In other words, if the service is developed on the largest scale, the service provision area will be the whole world.
(2) "Participant" Media market target participants are associates who intend to provide valuable information as copyrighted works to other users, as well as individuals who wish to acquire or transmit information, and businesses. It is a In other words, it is all actors that carry out economic activities in the service area.
(3) "Requirements" The infrastructure requirements necessary for using the media market are the application for logging in to the media market, connected to the communication network for transmitting and receiving data to and from the server of the operator. There is an environment where participants can use the information processing terminal equipment.
「構成要素の外殻」について説明する。
 本実施形態のベストモードとして、上記の構成要素によるメディアマーケットをヴァーチャルマーケットの一つの形態としてあらわしたわけであるが、本実施形態のヴァーチャルマーケットは、複数のヴァーチャルマーケットを並列に接続して機能させることができるようにしており、実施例であるメディアマーケットから、利用者は、その他のヴァーチャルマーケットに簡単に移動することができ、例えば男女の出会いの場を提供するヴァーチャルマーケットがあっても良いし、不動産の売買を促進するヴァーチャルマーケットがあっても良いし、VR技術を用いた住宅の展示場、車の展示場、又はアトラクション施設等の観光施設等もあっても良いと考えている。つまり、こうすることで、本実施形態では課題解決力を、さらに高めることができるようになるとしており、これらを一体としてベストモードとして考えている。
The "shell of the component" will be described.
As the best mode of the present embodiment, the media market according to the above components is represented as one form of virtual market, but the virtual market of the present embodiment is to connect a plurality of virtual markets in parallel to function. From the example media market, users can easily move to other virtual markets, for example, there may be a virtual market that provides a meeting place for men and women, We believe that there may be a virtual market that promotes the sale and sale of real estate, and there may also be exhibition facilities for houses using VR technology, exhibition facilities for cars, and tourist facilities such as attraction facilities. That is, in this embodiment, the problem solving ability can be further enhanced in this embodiment, and these are considered as the best mode as a whole.
 また、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット全体で流通するヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通、つまり、アソシエイツが獲得し、その他の利用者に譲渡しようとするヴァーチャルカレンシーの売買を円滑にするために、ヴァーチャルマーケットの1つの形態として、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの売買を利用者間で効果的に行うことのできる「ヴァーチャルカレンシー取引所」(以下、取引所という)を設置することにしている。こうすることで、本実施形態では課題解決力を、さらに高めることができるようになり、取引所も含めたうえでの一体としてのヴァーチャルマーケット群をベストモードとして考えている。 In addition, one form of virtual market is to facilitate the distribution of virtual currency throughout the virtual market including media market, that is, to facilitate the purchase and sale of virtual currency that associates are acquiring and intending to transfer to other users. As a matter of fact, we will establish the “Valcharancy Trading Exchange” (hereinafter referred to as “Trading Exchange”), which can effectively carry out the purchase and sale of virtual currency among users. By doing this, in the present embodiment, the problem solving power can be further enhanced, and the virtual market group as an integral unit including the exchange is considered as the best mode.
 アソシエイツ(第一の利用者)と事業者(第二の利用者)の関係について説明する。
アソシエイツの側面のアカウントを得るためには、先に事業者(以下、事業会員という)の側面のアカウントを有してから、事業会員として、所定の手続き(例えば、記者として活動するアソシエイツとしてメディアマーケットに登録するよう申請を運営者に行うもの。登録基準は運営者により設定する)を経て、アソシエイツの側面のアカウントを得ることができる。
The relationship between the associate (first user) and the business operator (second user) will be described.
In order to obtain an account on the side of the Associates, you must first have an account on the side of the business operator (hereinafter referred to as the Business Member) and then proceed as a business member to a prescribed procedure (for example, Media Market as Associates acting as a reporter) Apply to the operator to register in the registration criteria (set by the operator)), you can get an account of the aspect of the Associates.
 なお、ここで取得するアソシエイツとしての権利は、同一アカウントであっても事業会員の側面には及ばない。例えば、メディアマーケットでアソシエイツの側面のアカウントを有する事業会員aは、アソシエイツa’としてヴァーチャルカレンシーを多量に保有していたとしても、これをメディアマーケットおよびその他のヴァーチャルマーケットにおいて事業会員として消費することはできない。aにしろa’にしろ、事業会員としてヴァーチャルカレンシーを消費したければ、a’は、その他の利用者にヴァーチャルカレンシーを譲渡するのと同様に、アソシエイツの側面a’から事業会員の側面aにヴァーチャルカレンシーを譲渡しなければならない。 The rights acquired as Associates do not extend to the business members even with the same account. For example, a business member a who has an Associates side account in the media market may not consume the business as a business member in the media market and other virtual markets, even if he holds a large amount of virtual reality as the associate a '. Can not. If you want to consume virtual capital as a business member, whether it is a 'or a', a 'from the side a' of the Associates to the side a of the business member just as you transfer virtual reality to other users. You have to transfer the virtual currency.
 また、aがメディアマーケットにおいてアソシエイツの側面a‘を有しているからといって、その他のヴァーチャルマーケットにおいてアソシエイツの側面を有することになるわけではない。aは、その他のヴァーチャルマーケットにおいてアソシエイツの側面のアカウントを欲するならば、それぞれのヴァーチャルマーケットにおいて、各個別に所定の手続きをとらなければならない。 Also, just because a has aspect 側面 of the Associates in the media market does not mean that it has aspects of the Associates in other virtual markets. If you want an Associates Aspect account in the other virtual markets, you have to go through each specific procedure in each virtual market.
 つまり、事業会員の側面を有する(当該側面のみ有していても良い)aは、ヴァーチャルマーケット群全体を通して、事業会員aとして各ヴァーチャルマーケットを利用することはできるが、aがどこかのヴァーチャルマーケットにおいてアソシエイツとして活動したければ、それぞれのマーケットにおいてaは所定の手続きをとらなければならない。 In other words, a that has the aspect of the business member (it may have only this aspect) can use each virtual market as the business member a through the entire virtual market group, but a virtual market where a is somewhere If you want to act as an associate at a, in each market a must take the prescribed procedures.
 以降、アソシエイツたるa’は、サーバによってヴァーチャルマーケット利用行為を評価され、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを付与されると同時に、あわせてアソシエイツとしての信用度を、与信限度額の付与という形でサーバに管理されることになる。なお、a‘は、メディアマーケットにおいて構成要素1「主として取り扱う情報」を発信することができる主体としての要件を満たしていると運営者に認められた認定会員ということである。 Thereafter, Associates a 'is evaluated by the server for the virtual market usage behavior and is given virtual currency, and at the same time, the credibility as the Associates is managed by the server in the form of grant of credit limit. Become. Note that a ‘is an authorized member who is recognized by the operator as satisfying the requirements as an entity capable of transmitting the component 1“ information to be mainly handled ”in the media market.
 個人(第二の利用者、事業会員と基本的にはほぼ同様の機能を有する存在)について説明する。
 メディアマーケットにおける第二の利用者には、事業会員のほかに個人(以下、個人会員という)が存在する。個人会員も、基本的には事業会員と同様の機能を有しており、運営者に認められさえすればアソシエイツの側面を有することも不可能ではない。(例えば、著名人であって情報発信力があると運営者が認める個人については、コラムニストやエッセイストとして、アソシエイツに登録してもらえるよう運営者は勧誘しても良い)
Describe an individual (a second user, an entity that has basically the same function as a business member).
The second user in the media market includes an individual (hereinafter referred to as an individual member) in addition to the business member. The individual members basically have the same function as the business members, and it is not impossible to have the aspect of the Associates only if they are recognized by the operator. (For example, with regard to an individual who is a celebrity and that the operator recognizes as having the ability to transmit information, the operator may be invited to be registered with Associates as a columnist or essayist.)
 個人会員は、メディアマーケットにおいて、初期の段階では、アソシエイツの提供する著作物を無償で取得したり、事業会員の発信する情報を取得したり、個人会員の発信する情報を取得したりするのみの存在である。これが、後に説明するベーシックインカム制度、及び利用時間の伸びと共に、個人会員も有償コンテンツの取得、又は有償サービスの利用を行うようになってくる。例えば、アソシエイツの提供する著作物については、無償、一部有償、又は全部有償、及び対価の量についてはアソシエイツの任意であり、個人会員にとって気に入っているアソシエイツの提供する著作物は、有償であっても取得したいものである。近いもので言えば、従前のメルマガである。とくに、実社会では著名人の著作物は価値が高いと考えられている。このようなことから、利用に慣れてきた個人会員は、有償コンテンツを取得するため、事業会員と同様に、大小の違いはあれ、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを欲する度合いは大きくなる。 In the initial stage of the media market, individual members only acquire the copyrighted work provided by Associates free of charge, acquire information transmitted by business members, and acquire information transmitted by individual members. It is an existence. Along with the basic income system, which will be described later, and the increase in usage time, this will allow individual members to acquire paid content or use paid services. For example, the work provided by Associates is free, partially paid, or all paid, and the amount of consideration is at the discretion of Associates, and the work provided by Associates favorite for individual members is paid. Even I want to get it. Speaking in the near thing, it is a traditional mail magazine. In the real world, in particular, the works of celebrities are considered to be valuable. From such a thing, in order to acquire paid content, an individual member who has become accustomed to use, like a business member, becomes greater in desire for virtuality, regardless of the difference between large and small.
 また、メディアマーケットの利用になれてきた個人会員は、自らが情報を発信したくなってくるものである。これを効果的に実行してもらうために、サーバは個人会員(事業会員も同様)に対して、情報発信行為について評価する機能も有し(情報取得行為についても評価する機能がある)ており、評価値に基づいて、アソシエイツに対するヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与と同様の意味を有するように、メディアマーケットの優越的利用(後に説明する第一消費活動を参照)に伴うヴァーチャルカレンシーの消費量を割引したり、ベーシックインカムと称してヴァーチャルカレンシーを無償で配布(後に説明する消費税とベーシックインカムを参照)したりすることができるようにしている。なお、事業会員についても同様である。 In addition, individual members who have been used to the media market want to disseminate information. In order to get this done effectively, the server also has the function of evaluating the information transmission act for individual members (as well as business members) (it also has the function of evaluating the information acquisition act) Discounting the consumption of virtual currency associated with superior use of the media market (see first consumption activity described later), based on the evaluation value, to have the same meaning as the grant of virtual currency to associates In order to be able to distribute virtual currency free of charge (see the consumption tax and basic income described later) or as a basic income. The same applies to business members.
 つまり、「設定情報に基づく、サーバが行う利用者に対する評価によるヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給」という、ヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムの処理は、なにもアソシエイツに対するヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与だけではなく、利用者全体に対するヴァーチャルカレンシーの「供給制御」による、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット全体の「制御」という機能も含んでいるということである。そして、これらすべてのスタートは、「設定情報に基づく利用者に対する評価(設定情報に基づく利用者の行為に対する評価値の算出)」から始まるわけである。 In other words, the virtual reality supply system process of “the virtual reality supply based on the setting information and performed by the server based on evaluation” is not only the assignment of virtual reality to the associates but also the virtual reality for the whole user. It also includes the function of “control” of the entire virtual market including the media market by “supply control” of And all these start are started from "the evaluation to the user based on setting information (calculation of the evaluation value to the user's action based on setting information)".
「アソシエイツに対する評価に基づくヴァーチャルカレンシーの生成と付与」について説明する。
 メディアマーケットにおいてアソシエイツの側面で活動するa‘には、設定情報に基づき算出された評価値に基づくヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与がある。この、評価値及びヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与量は、あらかじめ運営者によって設定された設定情報と、サーバによる、a’のサービス利用行為(情報提供行為)への評価、及びその他の利用者からのa‘による情報提供に対する評価(単純な行為〈いいね!や☆3つのような〉による評価もあれば、利用者端末とサーバ間のデータ送受信から推定される利用者の情報取得行為〈閲覧している時間や閲覧している間の動作や閲覧した人数やこれらの総数など〉による評価もあれば、及び記憶部に記憶された各種アルゴリズムによる評価及び付与もある)に基づいて決定される。なお、本処理は、ヴァーチャルマーケットへのヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給の起点である。
Explain "Generation and Granting of Virtual Chalcencies Based on Evaluation on Associates".
In the media market, 活動 a ', which is active in the aspect of Associates, has a virtual currency grant based on an evaluation value calculated based on setting information. The evaluation value and the amount of virtual currency given are the setting information set in advance by the operator, the evaluation of the service usage act of a 'by the server (information provision act), and a' from other users. If there is also an evaluation on information provision by a user (such as a simple act <like! Or ☆ 3 like>), the user's information acquisition act <browsing is inferred from data transmission and reception between the user terminal and the server It is determined based on the time, the operation while browsing, the number of browsing users, the total number of these, etc.) and the evaluation and assignment by various algorithms stored in the storage unit. This process is the starting point of the supply of virtual reality to the virtual market.
 具体的には、例えば、メディアマーケットにおいてコラムニストたるアソシエイツの側面を有するa’が、アソシエイツとしてコラムを、無償、一部有償、又は全部有償で投稿し、これをその他の利用者が閲覧、又はダウンロードするとき、サーバは、コラムを投稿した行為そのものについて、その内容の量を加味する評価値を算出し、算出した評価値に基づき一次的にヴァーチャルカレンシーをa‘に付与する。そして、二次的なヴァーチャルカレンシーのa’に対する付与として、所定の期間にわたって、その他の利用者がaの提供した著作物たるコラムをどのように評価しているか、サーバは、設定情報に基づき評価値を算出し、二次的(所定の期間ごと)にヴァーチャルカレンシーをa’に付与する。 Specifically, for example, a 'having a side of columnist Associates in the media market posts a column as an associate, free of charge, partially paid, or all paid, and this is viewed or downloaded by other users. When doing this, the server calculates an evaluation value taking into account the amount of the content of the act itself that posted the column, and temporarily assigns virtual reality to a ′ based on the calculated evaluation value. Then, the server evaluates, based on the setting information, how other users have evaluated the copyright column provided by a over a predetermined period of time as a grant to a 'of secondary virtual reality. A value is calculated, and virtuality is given to a 'in a secondary (every predetermined period).
 次に、アソシエイツの無償提供する著作物等の情報(無償コンテンツ)に対する設定情報に基づく「評価値」の算出方法について説明する。
(各無償コンテンツに対する評価値を決定する)
(1)「閲覧回数評価値」所定の期間に何人の利用者が無償コンテンツを閲覧したかを参照し、閲覧回数評価値を算出する。
設定値a閲覧人数倍率
a‘総閲覧回数との比率で評価する場合の閲覧人数倍数
a“閲覧人数上位に対する評価値
閲覧回数評価値=閲覧回数×a+閲覧回数×a‘×(閲覧回数/総閲覧回数)+a“
(2)「閲覧時間評価値」所定の期間に利用者が無償コンテンツを何秒間閲覧したかを参照し閲覧時間評価値を算出する。
設定値b閲覧時間倍率
b‘総閲覧時間との比率で評価する場合の閲覧時間倍率
b“閲覧時間上位に対する評価値
閲覧時間評価値=閲覧時間×b+閲覧時間×b‘×(閲覧時間/総閲覧時間)+b“
(3)「閲覧者評価値」所定の期間に無償コンテンツが得た評価数(いいね総数)-(わるいね総数)や、取得☆総数を参照し、閲覧者評価値を算出する。
設定値c閲覧者評価倍率
c‘総量との比率で評価する場合の閲覧者評価倍率
c“閲覧者評価上位に対する評価値
閲覧者評価値=閲覧者評価×c+閲覧者評価×c‘×(閲覧者評価/総閲覧者評価)+c“
(4)(1)から(3)以外で無償コンテンツに対し評価が認められると思われる場合に適切な方法で評価値を算出する。(所定の期間を超えるロングセラーや著名な評価など)
(5)上記(1)から(4)において算出された無償コンテンツに対する評価値の和
(各アソシエイツに対する評価を決定する)
(6)「無償コンテンツ発信評価値」所定の期間に、アソシエイツが発信した無償コンテンツの総量(発信数×内容量)を参照し、無償コンテンツ発信評価値を算出する。
設定値d無償コンテンツ発信量倍率
d‘総無償コンテンツ発信量との比率を考慮した無償コンテンツ発信量倍率
d“無償コンテンツ発信量上位に対する評価値
無償コンテンツ発信評価値=発信無償コンテンツ量×d+発信無償コンテンツ量×d‘×(発信無償コンテンツ量×総発信無償コンテンツ量)+d“
(7)アソシエイツに属する上記(5)の和
アソシエイツの総評価値=(6)+(7)
(その他の設定情報)
無償コンテンツの属するカテゴリごとの評価の比重のコントロール
Next, a method of calculating an “evaluation value” based on setting information for information (free content) such as a work provided by Associates free of charge will be described.
(Determining the evaluation value for each free content)
(1) "Number of browsing times evaluation value" The number of browsing times evaluation value is calculated with reference to how many users browsed the free content in a predetermined period.
Setting value a Reading people's magnification a 'Reading number multiple when evaluating with the ratio to total reading times a "Evaluation value for the top reading people number of reading times evaluation value = number of views x a + number of views x a' x (number of views / total Number of browsing times) + a “
(2) “Browsing time evaluation value” The browsing time evaluation value is calculated by referring to how many seconds the user browses the free content in a predetermined period.
Setting value b Reading time magnification b 'Reading time magnification when evaluating with ratio to total reading time b "Evaluation value for reading time upper rank reading time evaluation value = reading time x b + reading time x b' x (reading time / total Reading time) + b "
(3) "Reader evaluation value" The viewer evaluation value is calculated by referring to the evaluation number (total number of likes)-(total number of likes) obtained by the free content in a predetermined period, and the total number of acquired ☆.
Setting value c Viewer rating magnification c 'Viewer rating rating in the case of evaluation with the total amount "viewer rating rating for the top rating of viewer rating viewer rating value = viewer rating x c + viewer rating x c' x (view Evaluation / total viewer evaluation) + c "
(4) If it is considered that the evaluation for the free content is recognized other than (1) to (3), the evaluation value is calculated by an appropriate method. (Such as a long seller over a given period or a prominent rating)
(5) Sum of the evaluation value for the free content calculated in the above (1) to (4) (determines the evaluation for each associate)
(6) "Free content delivery evaluation value" The free content delivery evaluation value is calculated by referring to the total amount of free content (number of transmissions x internal capacity) sent by the associate during a predetermined period.
Setting value d Free content sending amount multiplying factor d 'Free content sending amount multiplying factor d taking into consideration the ratio to total free content sending amount Evaluation value for top free content sending amount Free content sending evaluation value = sending free content amount x d + sending free Content amount x d 'x (Delivery free content amount x Total outgoing free content amount) + d "
(7) General value of the above-mentioned (5) Associates belonging to Associates = (6) + (7)
(Other setting information)
Control of evaluation weight for each category to which free content belongs
こうすることで、運営者は、設定情報を任意に更新することで、無償コンテンツ及びアソシエイツに対する評価の度合いをコントロールすることができるようになり、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケットに提供される無償コンテンツの質及び量を増加、並びに意図する方向に誘導することができるようになる。 By doing this, the operator can control the degree of evaluation for free content and associates by arbitrarily updating the setting information, and the free content provided for the virtual market including the media market can be controlled. The quality and quantity can be increased and guided in the intended direction.
 また、評価アルゴリズム(及びヴァーチャルカレンシー付与アルゴリズム)には、「評価補正アルゴリズム」という処理を加えている。これは、アソシエイツの提供する情報に対するその他の利用者からの評価について、すべてを同等に取り扱うのではなく、評価者たる利用者、被評価者たるアソシエイツ、及び被評価物である提供情報の評価状況に基づき、評価値を補正する処理である。 In addition, a process called "evaluation correction algorithm" is added to the evaluation algorithm (and the virtual reality assignment algorithm). This does not treat all evaluations by the other users with respect to the information provided by the Associates equally, but evaluates the user, who is the evaluator, the Associates, who is the evaluator, and the provided information, which is the object to be evaluated. And is a process of correcting the evaluation value.
 この処理を加えることによって、普段、利用者があまり取得しないような情報を当該利用者に取得させるに至ったアソシエイツの提供する情報、及び当該アソシエイツを高く評価し、他方、普段、利用者がよく取得しているような情報を当該利用者に追加的に取得させるに至ったアソシエイツの提供する情報、及び当該アソシエイツを低く評価するようになり、また、設定情報を更新することで、補正の度合い、及び利用者の傾向観察期間を変更することができるようになる。 By adding this process, the information provided by the Associates who has caused the user to acquire information that the user usually does not obtain much is highly evaluated, and the Associates are highly evaluated, while the user is usually well The information provided by the Associates who has made it possible for the user to additionally acquire such information as obtained, and the Associates will be evaluated as low, and the degree of correction can be obtained by updating the setting information. , And user's tendency observation period can be changed.
 こうすることで、例えば、ゴシップコラムをよく読んでいる個人会員bが読むことになった経済評論コラムcは、個人会員bから高く評価されたものとし、経済評論コラムをよく読んでいる個人会員dが読むことになった経済評論コラムcに対する個人会員dからの評価は、個人会員bからの経済評論コラムcに対する評価よりも低くなる。つまり、端的に言えば、「同じ人を同じ人が代り映えもなく評価し続けているのと、新しい人を新しい人が新しく評価し始めるのとでは、評価の重みに大きな差がある」としているわけであり、このことから、アソシエイツの新規参入や利用者のイノベーションを起こしやすくするよう、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給バランスを調整することをもって、メディアマーケットの価値を最大化させるよう図るものである。 By doing this, for example, the economic review column c, which is read by the individual member b who reads the gossip column frequently, is regarded as highly appreciated by the individual member b, and the individual member who reads the economic comment column well. The evaluation from the individual member d to the economic criticism column c which d was to read is lower than the evaluation from the individual member b to the economic criticism column c. In short, simply speaking, "the weight of the evaluation is significantly different between when the same person continues to evaluate the same person without reflection, and when a new person starts to evaluate a new person" Therefore, it aims to maximize the value of the media market by adjusting the supply balance of the virtual reality to make it easier for new associates of Associates and user innovation to occur.
 サーバは、あらかじめサーバに記憶された設定情報に基づき、メディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケット群において、アソシエイツの提供する情報を取得する利用者の過去所定期間の情報取得行為から、当該利用者に取得されやすい提供情報カテゴリ、及び取得されやすい情報提供者たるアソシエイツの情報取得率を算出する。 The server is easy to be acquired by the user from the information acquisition act of the user in the past predetermined period acquiring information provided by the associates in the virtual market group such as media market based on the setting information stored in advance in the server Calculate the provided information category and the information acquisition rate of the associate who is an information provider who is easily acquired.
 そして、設定情報及び利用者ごとに算出された各種の情報取得率から、当該利用者のアソシエイツの提供する情報を取得する行為に対する評価補正率を算出し、評価値に修正を加えることで、評価値に基づくアソシエイツへのヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与量のバランスを調整する。 Then, from the setting information and various information acquisition rates calculated for each user, the evaluation correction rate for the act of acquiring the information provided by the user's associates is calculated, and the evaluation value is corrected by adding an evaluation. Adjust the balance of the amount of virtual currency assigned to the Associates based on the value.
 当該利用者に取得されたことのない提供情報カテゴリ、及び取得されたことのないアソシエイツの情報取得率を0とし、その他取得された提供情報カテゴリ、及び取得されたアソシエイツの取得頻度に基づき、0から100の間で当該利用者の所定期間(例えば1週間、1か月、又は1年など)の情報取得率を算出し、これを100から減算(情報取得されていない率を算出)し、算出された値に、あらかじめサーバに記憶された設定情報としての係数(例えば、0.1、0.5、1、1.5又は2.0や10.0や100.0や1000.0など)を乗算し、これに100を加算する。そして、算出された値の最大値が1となるように除算し、各種の評価補正率を導出する。こうして、所定期間の情報取得率が0の提供情報カテゴリ、又はアソシエイツを最大値の1とした、情報取得率が高ければ高いほど0(0にはならない)に近づく評価補正率が導出される。※なお、計算式はなんでもよく、例えば、補正率の上下幅がもっと大きく、又は小さくなるような計算式に変えても良いし、設定情報を更新することで、運営者はどのような関数を設定することもできる。 Based on the provided information category that has not been acquired by the user and the information acquisition rate of associates that have not been acquired, and based on the acquired acquired information category and the acquired frequency of acquired associates, 0 Calculate the information acquisition rate for a predetermined period (for example, one week, one month, or one year) of the user between 100 and 100, and subtract this from 100 (calculate the rate at which information is not acquired), In the calculated value, a coefficient as setting information stored in advance in the server (for example, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 1.5 or 2.0, 10.0, 100.0, 1000.0, etc. ) And add 100 to this. Then, division is performed so that the maximum value of the calculated values is 1, and various evaluation correction rates are derived. Thus, a provided information category for which the information acquisition rate in a predetermined period is 0, or an evaluation correction rate closer to 0 (not 0) as the information acquisition rate is higher with an associate value of 1 is derived. ※ In addition, calculation formula may be anything, for example, it may be changed into calculation formula that the upper and lower width of correction factor becomes larger or smaller, and by updating setting information, the operator can calculate what kind of function It can also be set.
 なお、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与量を含むすべての値を決定する基礎となる設定情報については、運営者はこれをいつでも更新することができることから、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給制御を図ることでメディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット全体の制御をも図ることができるようにしている。こうすることで、本実施形態では課題解決力を高めているわけである。 In addition, as for the setting information that is the basis for determining all the values including the amount of virtual currency, since the operator can update it at any time, it is possible to control the supply of virtual currency, so that the virtual including the media market It is also possible to control the entire market. By doing this, the problem solving ability is enhanced in the present embodiment.
「第一の利用者から第二の利用者へのヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲渡、並びに課金および還付」について説明する。
 アソシエイツの側面で獲得したヴァーチャルカレンシーについては、アソシエイツの側面が、これを消費する機能を有していないことから、アソシエイツは、保有するヴァーチャルカレンシーを、自身の第二の利用者の側面に譲渡するか、その他の第二の利用者(又はその他のアソシエイツ※下に説明)に譲渡するわけであるが、このヴァーチャルカレンシーの「譲渡」という処理につき、サーバは、あらかじめ設定された設定情報に基づいて、譲渡元(同一アカウント間の譲渡におけるアソシエイツの側面)に対して課金処理を行う。
Explain "transfer of virtual currency from the first user to the second user, and charging and refunding".
With regard to the virtual reality acquired in the aspect of the Associates, the Associates transfer the virtual reality they possess to the second user's side of their own, as the Associates aspect does not have the function to consume it. Or the other second user (or other Associates * described below), but for this virtual key "transfer" process, the server is based on preset configuration information. , And charge the transfer source (the side of the associate in transfer between the same account).
 課金処理は、「譲渡」処理ごとに実行され、アソシエイツにあらかじめ開設しているサーバのシステム現金通帳に記帳(処理データを記憶)、及び利用者にあらかじめ開設しているサーバのヴァーチャルカレンシー通帳に記帳(処理データを記憶)する態様になっている。つまり、記帳は、いつ、誰に(誰から)、何を、どのくらい、何をしたか記憶するものであり、ヴァーチャルマーケットに供給したヴァーチャルカレンシーがどのように流通しているか、及びサーバの課金先であるアソシエイツがどのような活動を行い、どのように課金(買掛金を発生)されているか、一括で掌握できるデータベースを構成する態様になっている。 The charging process is executed for each "transfer" process, and posting (storage of processing data) is made in the system cash passbook of the server established in advance in the Associates, and is posted in the virtual currency passbook of the server established in advance by the user. (The process data is stored). In other words, bookkeeping remembers when, to whom (from whom), what, what, how, what, what, how much, and how the virtual currency supplied to the virtual market is distributed, and to which the server is charged Associates are in a mode of constructing a database capable of grasping collectively what activities they are doing and how they are charged (causing accounts payable).
 また、アソシエイツによる第二の利用者へのヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲渡にあたり、当事者間での任意の取り決めによる対価が、第二の利用者からアソシエイツに支払われるわけであるが、この対価の支払いが滞る等のイレギュラーがあることを想定して、アソシエイツには、第二の利用者に譲渡したヴァーチャルカレンシーの未使用分(保有分)を強制的に、当該第二の利用者から回収することができる機能を与えている。 In addition, in transfer of virtual reality by the Associates to the second user, consideration for any arrangement between the parties will be paid from the second user to the Associates, but such payment will be delayed, etc. The Associates may be forced to recover from the second user the unused portion (retention) of virtual currency that has been transferred to the second user, assuming that there is an irregular It is giving the function.
 そして、回収量に対して保有量が下回る場合には、保有量のみの回収となり、未回収分については、当該アソシエイツが当該第二の利用者に対して債権を有していることから、当該第二の利用者が債務を弁済するまでの間、当該第二の利用者のヴァーチャルマーケット利用行為を当該アソシエイツは制限することができる機能も与えている。こうすることで、自由取引であるヴァーチャルカレンシーの売買についてのモラルの向上が図られ、あわせて健全な市場取引を後押しする効果が期待できる。 And, if the retained amount is less than the recovered amount, only the retained amount will be recovered, and for the uncollected portion, since the Associates have a claim for the second user, It also provides the ability for the Associates to limit the use of the second user's virtual market until the second user repays the debt. By doing this, morals of buying and selling of virtual currency, which is free trade, can be improved, and at the same time, an effect of supporting healthy market trading can be expected.
 なお、アソシエイツに対する課金については、アソシエイツの買掛金(債務)として管理されるわけであるが、アソシエイツは、任意に所定の銀行口座に入金することで、サーバは、入金データを自動的に取得し、これを当該アソシエイツのシステム現金通帳に反映させ、アソシエイツの債務を入金分減少させるようにしている。 In addition, about the fee for Associates, it is managed as accounts payable (debt) of Associates, but the server automatically acquires payment data by depositing money to a predetermined bank account arbitrarily. This is reflected in the system cash passbook of the Associates, and the Associates' debt is reduced by the amount received.
 また、所定の期間のアソシエイツのマーケット利用行為、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲渡量、及び設定情報に基づいて、運営者は、当該アソシエイツに対して販売奨励金(還付金という性質を有するもの)を支給することができるようになっている。そして、これもシステム現金通帳に記帳することにしている。つまり、販売奨励金は納税の還付機能ということになり、アソシエイツの債務を減少させることと同義となり、このことによって運営者の、ヴァーチャルマーケットの制御力を向上させる効果を発揮させている。 In addition, based on the use of the Associates market for a predetermined period, the amount of transfer of virtual currency, and the setting information, the operator shall provide the Associates with a sales incentive fee (having a nature of refund). It is possible to And this will also be registered in the system cash passbook. In other words, the sales incentive money is a tax refund function, which is equivalent to reducing the Associates' debt, which has the effect of improving the operator's ability to control the virtual market.
「ヴァーチャルカレンシー取引所」について説明する。
アソシエイツと第二の利用者によるヴァーチャルカレンシーの売買については、自由取引としており、ローカル取引(リアルマーケットにおける直接の取引)における両者の直接売買を基本としているが、さらに、メディアマーケットおよびヴァーチャルマーケットに接続して、ネットワーク上でヴァーチャルカレンシーを売買できる単一の取引所(以下、取引所という)を設けることで、次のようにしてヴァーチャルカレンシーの全体としての流通を促すことができるようにしている。
Explain the "virtual currency exchange".
As for buying and selling virtual currency by Associates and the second user, it is considered as free trading, and based on the direct buying and selling of both in local trading (direct trading in real market), furthermore, it is connected to media market and virtual market Then, by establishing a single exchange (hereinafter referred to as exchange) that can buy and sell virtual currency on the network, it is possible to promote the overall circulation of virtual currency as follows.
 取引所には、アソシエイツの側面としての参加者と、第二の利用者(の側面)としての参加者が存在する。また、取引所には、メディアマーケット以外のヴァーチャルマーケットからの参加者も存在し、ヴァーチャルマーケット群全体として、一つの取引所でヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通を促す態様にしている。つまり、取引所には、実社会における様々な国民と、様々な背景を持つ個人や事業者である利用者すべてが参加することになる。 In the exchange, there are participants as an aspect of Associates and (second aspect) a second user. In addition, there are participants from virtual markets other than the media market in the exchange, and as a whole virtual market group, it is in a form to promote circulation of virtual currency in one exchange. In other words, the exchange will be attended by various people in the real world and all users who are individuals and businesses with various backgrounds.
 なお、ヴァーチャルマーケットで流通するヴァーチャルカレンシーは、運営者により更新可能な設定情報に基づき、すべて存在期限(取得してから保有し続けていることができる期限)が設定されていることから、例えば、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを利用者が投資又は投機目的で売買することや、ヴァーチャルマーケットを自身に有利なように操作することをできなくしている。こうすることで、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの売買について、アソシエイツにとっては、保有するヴァーチャルカレンシーを別の価値に交換する目的でのヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲渡になり、第二の利用者にとっては、保有する何らかの価値をヴァーチャルカレンシーに交換する目的でのヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲受になり、単純な需要と供給、つまり、アソシエイツにとっては実社会における通貨の獲得が目的であり、第二の利用者にとってはヴァーチャルマーケットの利用が目的という、極めてシンプルな目的の売買を成立させることができるというものである。 In addition, since the virtual lancy distributed in the virtual market has all existing expiration dates (durations that can be kept after being acquired) are set based on setting information that can be updated by the operator, for example, It makes it impossible for users to buy and sell virtual currency for investment or speculative purposes and to operate virtual markets in a way that is advantageous to them. In this way, with regard to the purchase and sale of virtual reality, for Associates, it becomes the transfer of virtual reality for the purpose of exchanging the virtual currency that it holds for another value, and for the second user, it is virtual It is the transfer of virtual currency for the purpose of exchange for currency, simple demand and supply, that is, for Associates the purpose of acquiring currency in the real world, and for the second user the purpose of using virtual market, It is possible to establish a very simple purpose trading.
 取引所での取引の流れであるが、これは、従前からの証券取引所等で採用されているオークション方式を用いた、アソシエイツの売り注文と、第二の利用者の買い注文(又はアソシエイツの買い注文も含む※下に説明)をマッチングさせる態様(信用取引を用いない、従来からある原始的かつシンプルな、売り注文と買い注文を現物取引でつなぎ合わせる機械処理※従来同様の処理であるから割愛する)である。この取引の状況から導出される、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの価格の推移に基づいて、サーバは、設定情報を更新することでヴァーチャルマーケットを制御(例えば、買い注文が強くヴァーチャルカレンシーの価値が相対的に上昇する局面であれば、ヴァーチャルマーケットに新規供給するヴァーチャルカレンシーの量が増えるように設定情報を更新したり、逆に、売り注文が強く買い注文が弱ければ、新規供給するヴァーチャルカレンシーの量を減らすように設定情報を更新)するものである。 The flow of trading on the exchange, this is the sale order of Associates and the second user's purchase order (or Associates's purchase order) using the auction method that has been adopted by stock exchanges etc. A mode that matches buy orders (* explained below) (It does not use a credit transaction, and there is a conventional primitive and simple machine process that combines a sell order and a buy order with spot transactions. * Because it is the same process as before) It is omitted. The server controls the virtual market by updating the setting information, based on the transition of the price of the virtual currency derived from the status of this transaction (for example, the buying order is strong and the value of the virtual currency is relatively increased) If it is the situation, update the setting information to increase the amount of virtual currency supply to the virtual market newly, or conversely, if the sell order is strong and the purchase order is weak, to reduce the amount of virtual chargeability to be newly supplied. The setting information is updated.
 こうすることで、利用者のヴァーチャルカレンシーに対する投機意欲を限りなくゼロまで減衰させ、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの価値を安定させ、流通速度(約定速度)を向上させ、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通を促進することをもって、情報流通を促進し、ヴァーチャルマーケットの価値を向上させる効果を発揮する。 In this way, it is possible to reduce the user's virtual enthusiasm for virtuality to zero as much as possible, stabilize the value of virtuality, improve the circulation speed (the execution speed), and promote the circulation of virtualism. Promote distribution and have the effect of improving the value of the virtual market.
 そして、取引所での約定に対する取引手数料については、そもそも運営者には、アソシエイツが第二の利用者(の側面)にヴァーチャルカレンシーを譲渡したとき、当該アソシエイツに対して課金する機能があることから、取引所だからといって新たな別の手数料を徴収する処理を必要とせず、ヴァーチャルカレンシー譲渡手数料の徴収処理に統一している。 And about the transaction fee for the execution at the exchange, the operator has the function to charge for the Associates when the Associates transfer the virtual reality to (the aspect of) the second user. Because it is an exchange, it does not require processing to collect another new fee, and it is unified to collection processing of virtual currency transfer fee.
 しかしながら、例えば、直接取引時には譲渡手数料率(又は額)を低くし、取引所での取引時には譲渡手数料率(又は額)を高くするなどして、直接取引を優遇することも、その逆も、さらには還付金の額に影響させることも、運営者は設定情報を更新することでどうにでもできるということがあり、運営者によるヴァーチャルマーケットの制御力を高める効果を発揮する。 However, it is also preferable to favor direct transactions, for example, by lowering the transfer fee rate (or amount) at the time of direct transactions, and raising the transfer fee rate (or amount) at the time of trading at a exchange, or vice versa. Furthermore, the influence of the amount of refunds can also be achieved by the operator by updating the setting information, and this has the effect of enhancing the control of the virtual market by the operator.
 また、取引所のもう一つの機能として、アソシエイツ同士のヴァーチャルカレンシーの交換取引がある。これは、ローカル取引においてヴァーチャルカレンシーを多量に販売することができる第二の利用者を顧客として有しているアソシエイツがいるとき、当該アソシエイツの生み出す(ヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムによって生成および付与される)ヴァーチャルカレンシーの量だけでは当該第二の利用者の需要量に追い付かない場合に、当該アソシエイツは、その他のアソシエイツからヴァーチャルカレンシーを集めて、これを当該第二の利用者に対して当該アソシエイツがまとめて販売することで、当該第二の利用者の需要に応じることができるようにするものである。 Also, another function of the exchange is the exchange of virtual currency of associates. This is because, when there is an associate who has as a customer a second user who can sell a large amount of virtual currency in a local transaction, the associate (generated and provided by the virtual space supply system) produces the virtual associate. If the amount of currency alone does not keep up with the demand of the second user, the Associates gather virtual capitals from the other Associates, and the Associates put together this for the second User. By selling, it is possible to meet the demand of the second user.
 そして、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを消費しようとする第二の利用者にとってみると、ローカル取引において信頼しているアソシエイツからヴァーチャルカレンシーを購入することだけで、メディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケットにおいてサービス等を享受できるということであり、取引内容もローカル取引において当事者間で自由に決められ、取引所を利用する必要がなくなるという効果もある。
 この機能を中心に取引所を見た場合には、取引所は、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの地域間(市区町村間でも、都道府県間でも、国家間でもなんでもよい)需給ギャップを解消させる機構を有しているものであるといえる。こうすることで、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通はさらに促され、メディアマーケットにおける情報流通の速度は、さらに加速する効果を発揮する。
And, for the second user who wants to consume virtual reality, it is possible to enjoy services etc. in the virtual market such as the media market, only by purchasing the virtual reality from the associates who trust in the local transaction. There is also an effect that the contents of the transaction can be freely determined between the parties in the local transaction and there is no need to use the exchange.
If you look at the exchange center focusing on this function, the exchange has a mechanism to eliminate the supply-demand gap between virtual currency areas (anything between cities, municipalities, prefectures, and nations). It can be said that By doing this, the circulation of virtual reality will be further promoted, and the speed of information circulation in the media market will have the effect of further accelerating.
 また、二重課税防止の観点から、アソシエイツのアソシエイツに対するヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲渡については、ローカル取引はもとより、取引所においても課金しないこと(非課税)にしている。こうすることで、消費者たる第二の利用者にヴァーチャルカレンシーを譲渡したときにだけ、アソシエイツには課金されることになる。このため、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを販売しようとするアソシエイツにとっては、第二の利用者への販売も、アソシエイツへの販売も、実質的に得られる価値は変わらないようにすることができることから、アソシエイツの売り注文は、第二の利用者向けに公募することのみ(一つの注文のみ)で足りるということになる。つまり、売り注文を閲覧するのがアソシエイツならば、サーバは、自動的に売り注文を公募したアソシエイツから徴収する予定の譲渡手数料を差し引いた額の交換価額を表示すればよいし、買い注文を公募しようとするアソシエイツにとっては、約定後の第二の利用者への販売時に課金される譲渡手数料を加味した価格で買い注文を公募すればよくなる。こうすることで、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを販売するアソシエイツにとって、結果的に販売先がアソシエイツになって、約定する交換価額が売り注文の交換価額から減額されているとしても、これには、第二の利用者に販売した場合の譲渡手数料という課金がないわけであるから、第二の利用者にヴァーチャルカレンシーを売却して得られる交換価額と同じということになる。 Also, from the viewpoint of double taxation prevention, transfer of virtual currency to Associates' associates is not to be charged (tax exempt) not only at local transactions but also at exchanges. In this way, the Associates will be charged only when they transfer Virtual Key to the second consumer. For this reason, for Associates who intend to sell Virtual Carrance, sales to Associates and Sales to Associates can be performed so that the value obtained can be substantially the same. It means that it is sufficient to place an order only for the second user (only one order). In other words, if it is the Associates who browse the Selling Order, the server may display the exchange price of the amount automatically deducting the transfer fee scheduled to be collected from the Associates who made the selling order, and For the Associates who are trying to do so, it will be better if the public order is made for the purchase order at a price that takes into account the transfer fee charged at the time of sale to the second user after the deal. By doing this, it is possible for the Associates who are selling Virtual Carence to become the Associates as a result, even though the exchange price to be promised is reduced from the exchange price of the selling order, There is no charge for the transfer fee in the case of sale to a third party, so it is said to be the same as the exchange price obtained by selling virtual currency to the second party.
 こうすることで、取引所における買い注文は増加しやすくなり、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの単価も上昇及び安定しやすくなり、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット全体に対するヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給量を増加させることにつながり、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通速度及び量が増加し、もってヴァーチャルマーケット全体の情報流通速度及び量が増加するという効果を発揮する。
 なお、上記これらのヴァーチャルカレンシー取引所の取引機能は、ローカルにおける取引の取引機能と同じである。つまり、ローカルでの取引と、取引所での取引は、相互に関係しあいながら、一体としてヴァーチャルカレンシーの売買取引を構成しているわけである。
By doing this, it becomes easy to increase buying orders at the exchange, and it becomes easier to raise and stabilize the unit price of virtual currency, leading to an increase in the supply of virtual currency for the entire virtual market including the media market. It has the effect of increasing the speed and amount of information flow, thereby increasing the speed and amount of information flow throughout the virtual market.
The above-mentioned transaction function of the virtual currency exchange is the same as the transaction function of the transaction locally. In other words, the local trade and the exchange trade are mutually related, and together they constitute a virtual currency trading transaction.
「主体群ごとの購買力の差を反映させた評価補正アルゴリズム」について説明する。
アソシエイツ及び無償コンテンツに対するその他の利用者からの評価の算出を、主体群ごとに補正する処理を加えることによって、主体群ごとの第一消費価格、つまり購買力の差を反映させた評価を行う。そして、補正された評価に基づき、被評価者たるアソシエイツへのヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与及びヴァーチャルマーケットへのヴァーチャルカレンシーの適切な供給を行う。
なお、本処理の基礎にある考え方は、利用者からその他の利用者に移転する価値は、その他の利用者の利用者に対する評価であるとしているわけだが、この「評価」という行為、すなわち「価値」は、利用者の属する主体群の購買力によって大きくも小さくもなり、さらには、時代の変遷に伴う主体群の購買力の変動によっても変動するものと考えていることからきている。
The "evaluation and correction algorithm reflecting the difference in purchasing power for each subject group" will be described.
By adding the process of correcting the evaluations from the other users for the Associates and the free content for each group of subjects, the evaluation is made to reflect the difference in the first consumption price for each group of subjects, that is, the purchasing power. Then, based on the corrected evaluation, grant virtual ralche to Associates who are the assessors, and provide virtual ralca to virtual market appropriately.
Although the basic idea of this process is that the value transferred from one user to another is the evaluation of the other users, this act of "evaluation", that is, "value" Is considered to be large and small depending on the purchasing power of the users to which the users belong, and also to fluctuate due to fluctuations in the purchasing power of the agents accompanying the change of the times.
「主体群ごとの購買力の差を反映させた評価補正アルゴリズム」について説明する。
(1)各主体群の評価総量(主体群評価総量)が、各主体群の第一消費量(主体群第一消費量)と等しくなる値(評価購買力倍率)を算出する。
評価購買力倍率=主体群第一消費量/主体群評価総量
(2)購買力差を反映した、各主体群に属するアソシエイツ及び無償コンテンツに対する評価値(購買力反映評価値)を算出する。
 購買力反映評価値=元の評価値×評価購買力倍率
(3)ヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムは、購買力反映評価値を用いて以降の処理を実行する。
The "evaluation and correction algorithm reflecting the difference in purchasing power for each subject group" will be described.
(1) A value (evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor) is calculated such that the evaluation total amount of each subject group (subject evaluation total amount) is equal to the first consumption of each subject group (first consumption of the subject group).
Evaluation purchasing power multiple factor = subject group first consumption / subject group evaluation total amount (2) The evaluation value (purchasing power reflecting evaluation value) for associates and gratis contents belonging to each subject group reflecting the purchasing power difference is calculated.
Purchasing power reflection evaluation value = original evaluation value × evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor (3) The virtual reality supply system executes the subsequent processing using the purchasing power reflection evaluation value.
 こうすることで、購買力に差のある国家等の主体群ごとのアソシエイツ及び無償コンテンツに対して、各主体群の購買力の差を反映させた評価値を算出することができるようになり、以降ヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムは、算出された評価値(購買力反映評価値)に基づき、被評価者たるアソシエイツに対してヴァーチャルカレンシーを付与するとともに、ヴァーチャルマーケットへのヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給を行うことができるようになるものである。
 また、こうすることによって、国家間(地域間)の経済格差に影響を受けない効率的な情報の流通がヴァーチャルマーケットにおいて行われるようになり、また、随時、評価値が更新(購買力反映評価値に補正)されることにより、時代の変遷に伴う経済格差の変化もリアルタイムに吸収することができ、変化のタイムラグは生じないという効果も期待できる。
By doing this, it becomes possible to calculate an evaluation value that reflects the difference in purchasing power of each entity group with respect to associates and free content for each group of entities such as countries with different purchasing power, and so on. The currency supply system can, based on the calculated evaluation value (purchasing power reflection evaluation value), provide virtual currency to the Associates who are the assessors, and can supply virtual currency to the virtual market. It is a thing.
Also, by doing this, efficient information distribution that is not affected by economic disparities between countries (between regions) will be conducted in the virtual market, and evaluation values will be updated as needed (purchasing power reflection evaluation values In this way, it is possible to absorb in real time the changes in economic disparities accompanying the change of the times, and it is also expected that the time lag of changes will not occur.
 なお、ここで算出された評価購買力倍率は、購買力平価のような存在であり、主体群ごとの購買力の差、すなわち、例えば、国家間の購買力の差を表す指標になるものである。
 また、運営者が行う設定情報としての評価は、本アルゴリズムが働くことによって、大小の違いについては、あくまでもアソシエイツ及び無償コンテンツの評価バランスを設定するものにすぎず、ヴァーチャルマーケット内において相対的評価として運用することができるようになり、例えば、設定する評価が絶対的に大き過ぎたり小さすぎたりしたとしても、結果的にヴァーチャルマーケットの消費量に見合った量の評価に補正されることから、アソシエイツの無償で提供する無償提供情報(無償コンテンツ)に対してマーケットの消費に基づく購買力が反映された評価(購買力反映評価値)としての価値を被評価者に与えることができるようになる。
In addition, the evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor calculated here is an existence like purchasing power parity, and serves as an index representing the difference in purchasing power between groups of entities, that is, for example, the difference in purchasing power between countries.
In addition, evaluation as setting information performed by the operator only sets the evaluation balance of Associates and free content for differences between large and small by the operation of this algorithm, and it is used as a relative evaluation in the virtual market. It becomes possible to operate, and for example, even if the evaluation to be set is absolutely too large or too small, it will be corrected to the evaluation of the amount commensurate with the consumption of the virtual market as a result. It is possible to give an assessor a value as an evaluation (purchasing power reflection evaluation value) in which purchasing power based on market consumption is reflected on gratis provided information (free content) provided for no charge.
そうして、メディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケットは、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを実態を反映させて適切に主体群ごとに供給されるようになるわけであるが、ここで算出された評価購買力倍率を用いて、主体群ごとの購買力差から生じる物価差、すなわち、実体経済での国家間経済格差による不具合について是正する措置を次に説明する。 As a result, the virtual market such as media market will be properly supplied to each group by reflecting the actual situation of virtual reality, but using the evaluation purchasing power ratio calculated here, Next, we will explain measures to correct the price difference resulting from the purchasing power difference between groups, that is, the failure due to the economic disparities between countries in the real economy.
「評価購買力倍率の小さい主体群(例えばインド)における、アソシエイツの提供する有償コンテンツ(第二消費活動によるもの)が、評価購買力倍率の大きい主体群(例えば日本)における、アソシエイツの提供する有償コンテンツよりも、価格競争力が高く、評価購買力倍率の大きい主体群におけるアソシエイツの有償コンテンツ提供意欲が減衰する可能性がある」という不具合がある。つまり、例えば、「日本のアソシエイツが価値ある有償コンテンツを自身が考える相当の交換価値を提示して第二の利用者に提供しようとしても、インドのアソシエイツによって同等又は廉価版としての価値を有する有償コンテンツを破格の交換価値を提示して第二の利用者に提供されてしまうと、日本のアソシエイツは提供しようとする有償コンテンツの付加価値を、インドのアソシエイツに比べて過度に上げなければならず疲弊する」という不具合である。
 これは、実体経済にもよく見られる現象で、物価の低い国家等の地域で生産された商品は、物価の高い国家等の地域で生産された商品に比べて価格競争力が高く、例えば、経済格差を利用して、わざわざ生産拠点を他国に移して逆輸入する先進国の企業もあるように、ある意味、当たり前の構造だと認識されている。
 しかしながら、これが実体経済によくみられる現象であり、当たり前の現象であるとしても、例えば、発展途上国の生産拠点では、永続的な価格競争力を維持したいがために、賃金上昇、ひいては経済発展を抑制するようなアクションを起こしていたり、そもそも、発展途上国の生産拠点が商品を生産し、先進国に輸出し、価格競争力の高さをもって発展途上国が収入を得たとしても、結果としての剰余価値が発展途上国内にとどまり発展途上国の経済を純粋に押し上げる構図になっているとは言えないという状態がある。
 そこで、従来の実体経済では、「関税」という制度を用いて、それぞれの国家という主体群ごとに自身のマーケット内の産業を守っている。しかしながら、これが行き過ぎた場合の課題としての保護主義というものも存在する。つまり、「関税」という概念の制度を用いての地域間経済格差の是正措置には限界があるといえる。
“The paid content provided by Associates (for example, from the second consumption activity in a small group of evaluation purchasing power multiples (for example, India) is compared with the paid content provided by Associates in a large group of evaluation purchasing powers (for example, Japan) Also, there is a problem that the price competencies are high, and the willingness to provide paid contents of the associates in the group of entities having a large evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor may decline. In other words, for example, “If you try to provide a second user with a considerable exchange value for which Japanese associates are worthy to offer valuable paid content you think, you will be charged by the Associates of India as equivalent or inexpensive version. Once the content is provided to the second user by presenting an exceptional exchange value, Japanese Associates must excessively increase the added value of paid content to be provided compared to Associates in India. It is a problem of being exhausted.
This is a phenomenon often seen in the real economy, and products produced in regions with low prices are more competitive in price than products produced in regions with high prices, for example, It is recognized in a sense that it is a natural structure, just as there are companies in developed countries that purposely transfer production bases to other countries and reimport them using economic disparities.
However, even if this is a phenomenon often seen in the real economy and it is a natural phenomenon, for example, production bases in developing countries want to maintain lasting price competitiveness, so wages rise and thus economic development Even if the developing bases in the developing countries produce goods, export them to the developed countries, and the developing countries earn income with high price competitiveness, the result is There is a situation where it can not be said that the surplus value remains as a pure push up of the developing country's economy in the developing countries.
Therefore, in the conventional real economy, a system called "tariff" is used to protect industry within its own market for each group of each nation. However, there is also protectionism as an issue if this goes too far. In other words, it can be said that there is a limit to the correction of regional economic disparities using the system of the concept of “tariff”.
そこで、関税の保護的政策としての側面(有益性)は維持させながら、問題のみを解消する仕組みをメディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケットに内在させる機能として、「第二消費価格を増額して(本処理を行い)購入者が支払うヴァーチャルカレンシーは、有償コンテンツを提供したアソシエイツが取得する」措置を設けても良いと考えている。
(1)主体群Aのアソシエイツは、任意のバーチャルカレンシー量(第二消費価格)で有償コンテンツを発信する
(2)前記発信された有償コンテンツを評価購買力倍率が主体群Aよりも高い主体群Bの第二の利用者が購入しようとした場合、主体群Aの評価購買力倍率と主体群Bの評価購買力倍率の比率に応じた第二消費価格が主体群Bの第二の利用者に対して表示される。
 表示される第二消費価格=主体群Aのアソシエイツが任意に設定した有償コンテンツの第二消費価格×主体群B(評価購買力倍率の高い主体群)の評価購買力倍率/主体群A(評価購買力倍率の高い主体群)の評価購買力倍率
(3)主体群Aのアソシエイツの発信する有償コンテンツを、前記表示される第二消費価格で購入した主体群Bの第二の利用者が支払う第二消費価格のヴァーチャルカレンシーは、主体群Aのアソシエイツが取得する
Therefore, the second consumption price has been increased as a function to make a mechanism to solve only the problem inherent in the virtual market such as the media market while maintaining the aspect (benefitability) of the duty as a protective policy. The virtual reality that the buyer pays) thinks that it is good for the associate who provided the paid content to take "a measure to acquire."
(1) Associates of the subject group A send paid content with an arbitrary amount of virtual currency (second consumption price) (2) Evaluation of the sent content sent The subject group B whose purchasing power ratio is higher than that of the subject group A If the second user of is trying to purchase, the second consumption price for the second user of the subject group B according to the ratio of the evaluation purchasing power multiple of the subject group A and the evaluation purchasing power multiple of the subject group B Is displayed.
Second consumption price displayed = Second consumption price of paid content arbitrarily set by Associates of subject group A × Evaluation of subject group B (subject group with high evaluation purchasing power factor) Purchasing power ratio / Subject group A (evaluation purchasing power ratio factor (3) Evaluation of purchasing power factor of (higher target group) (2) Second consumption price paid by the second user of the target group B who purchased the paid content transmitted by the associate of the target group A at the displayed second consumption price Of the group A's Associates acquire
 こうすることで、インド(前記主体群A)のアソシエイツが販売しようとする有償コンテンツの任意の第二消費価格は、インド(同一主体群)の第二の利用者、およびインドの評価購買力倍率よりも低い主体群C(例えばケニア)の第二の利用者については、設定された任意の第二消費価格のまま販売でき、他方、評価購買力倍率の高い日本(主体群B)の第二の利用者については、購買力の高さを反映させた第二消費価格で販売することができるようになり、インド(主体群A)のアソシエイツの収入が大きくなるとともに、日本(体群B)のアソシエイツの提供する有償コンテンツの第二消費価格が押し下げられなくなるという効果が発揮される。
また、このことは、価値を創造したインドのアソシエイツに対して経済格差から生じる剰余価値を完全に還元することができるという効果も発揮する。つまり、インド(相対的に評価購買力倍率の低い主体群)の経済力を上昇させやすくする効果も期待できる。
 なお、評価購買力倍率を適用する主体群の範囲は、国家に限定するものではなく、物価等の経済状況が同程度であると考えられる任意の地域としても良い。
By doing this, the optional second consumption price of the paid content that the Associates of India (the above-mentioned subject group A) intends to sell is the second user of India (the same subject group) and the evaluation purchasing power ratio of India. For the second user of the lower subject group C (for example, Kenya), any second consumer price set can be sold as it is, while the second use of Japan (subject group B) having a high evaluation purchasing power multiple As for the elderly, it becomes possible to sell them at the second consumption price that reflects the high purchasing power, and the income of Associates in India (Subject Group A) increases, and the Associates in Japan (Group B) An effect is exerted that the second consumption price of the paid content to be provided can not be depressed.
This also has the effect of being able to completely reduce the surplus value arising from economic disparities to the Indian associates who created value. In other words, it can be expected to make it easier to raise the economic power of India (subjects with a relatively low evaluation purchasing power multiple).
The scope of the group of entities to which the evaluation purchasing power multiple factor is applied is not limited to the state, but may be any area where economic conditions such as prices are considered to be comparable.
 次に、評価購買力倍率の異なる主体群間の第一消費価格の補正について説明する。
 例えば、インド(主体群A)の第二の利用者に表示される第一消費価格は、同一主体群および評価購買力倍率の高い主体群(例えば日本)における第一消費価格がそのまま表示される。他方、評価購買力倍率の相対的に高い日本(主体群B)の第二の利用者に表示される評価購買力倍率の相対的に低い主体群(例えばインド)における第一消費価格は、そのまま表示されず、次の処理を加えて表示させても良いと考えている。
Next, the correction of the first consumption price between the groups of agents having different evaluation purchasing power multiplying factors will be described.
For example, as the first consumption price displayed to the second user of India (subject group A), the first consumption price in the same subject group and the subject group having a high evaluation purchasing power multiple (for example, Japan) is displayed as it is. On the other hand, the first consumption price in a group of relatively low evaluated purchasing power multiples (for example, India) displayed to the second user of Japan (subject group B) having a relatively high evaluated purchasing power multiple is displayed as it is. In addition, we believe that the following process may be added and displayed.
 処理の流れを説明する。
(1)主体群Bの第二の利用者に表示される、主体群Bよりも評価購買力倍率の低い主体群Aにおける第一消費価格は、主体群Bの評価購買力倍率と主体群Aの評価購買力倍率の比率に応じた第一消費価格(評価購買力倍率反映第一消費価格)が表示される。
 評価購買力倍率の低い主体群Aにおける第一消費価格情報を取得しようとする、相対的に評価購買力倍率の高い主体群Bに属する第二の利用者に表示される、評価購買力倍率の低い主体群Aにおける、あらかじめ運営者によって設定された設定情報としての第一消費価格(評価購買力倍率反映第一消費価格)=主体群Aにおける第一消費価格×主体群B(評価購買力倍率の高い主体群)の評価購買力倍率/主体群A(評価購買力倍率の高い主体群)の評価購買力倍率
(2)主体群Aにおいて第一消費活動を行おうとする主体群Bに属する第二の利用者に表示される価格は、前記(1)によって評価購買力倍率反映第一消費価格となるわけだが、このまま主体群Bの第二の利用者が第一消費活動を行い、支払われる評価購買力倍率反映第一消費価格のヴァーチャルカレンシーは、第一消費活動による消却によってヴァーチャルマーケットから消滅しても良いし、又は元の第一消費価格から増額した分のヴァーチャルカレンシーの量をベーシックインカムアルゴリズムによる給付原資としても良い。なお、この場合に、給付する対象を主体群Aの第二の利用者に限定して給付し、評価購買力倍率の相対的に低い主体群Aの購買力を上昇させるようにしても良い。
The flow of processing will be described.
(1) The first consumption price in the subject group A, which is displayed to the second user of the subject group B, has an evaluation purchasing power multiplying factor lower than that of the subject group B, the evaluation purchasing power factor of the subject group B and the evaluation of the subject group A The first consumption price (evaluation purchase power multiple reflection first consumption price) according to the ratio of the purchase power multiple is displayed.
Subject group with low evaluation purchasing power factor that is displayed to a second user belonging to subject group B with relatively high evaluation purchasing power factor, trying to acquire first consumption price information in subject group A with low evaluation purchasing power factor First consumption price (setting purchase power multiple reflection first consumption price) as setting information set in advance by the operator in A = first consumption price in group of principals A × group of principals B (group of high concentration of evaluation purchase power multiples) Evaluation of the purchasing power multiple / evaluation of the group of subjects A (group of subjects with high evaluation purchasing power multiple) purchasing power multiple (2) In the group of subjects A, displayed to the second user belonging to the group of subjects B trying to perform the first consumption activity According to (1) above, the price is the first consumption price reflected by the evaluation purchasing power factor, but the second user of the subject group B performs the first consumption activity, and the evaluation purchasing power factor reflection first consumption price is paid Ver Yarukarenshi may be disappeared from the virtual market by cancellation according to the first consumption activities, or the amount of minute of virtual currency was increased from the original first consumption price may be as benefit funds due to basic income algorithm. In this case, the target to be provided may be limited to the second user of the subject group A, and the purchasing power of the subject group A having a relatively low evaluation purchasing power multiple may be raised.
 こうすることで、評価購買力倍率の低い主体群に属する経済力の弱い第二の利用者と、評価購買力倍率の高い主体群に属する経済力の強い第二の利用者との、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケットの第一消費活動における市場競争原理を強度に生じさせ、ヴァーチャルマーケットにおける消費活動を活性化させる効果を発揮するとともに、さらには、国家間の経済格差による人々の経済活動の阻害要因を是正する効果を発揮する。    By doing this, the media market is included between the second user whose economic power is weak belonging to the group of entities with low evaluation purchasing power multiple and the second user of high economic power belonging to the subject group with high evaluation purchasing power multiple. While strengthening market competition principle in the first consumption activity of the virtual market and exerting the effect of activating the consumption activity in the virtual market, it also corrects the factor that hinders the people's economic activity due to the economic disparities between countries Exert an effect.
 「取引所におけるクリプトカレンシーを用いた決済」について説明する。
 ヴァーチャルカレンシーを購入した対価を、どのように決済するかということがあるが、これは、従前の方法として、ヤフーオークションのかんたん決済システムのように、アソシエイツにあらかじめ入金口座登録させておき、購入者には、クレジット決済、銀行振り込み決済、又はコンビニ決済させる方法や、証券取引における証券取引口座決済システムのように、利用者には、あらかじめ決済口座を開設させておき、当該口座残高データと取引所での取引データを紐づけて決済させる、法定通貨を用いた方法などがある。
Description of “Settlement using a cryptocurrency on an exchange” will be described.
There is a question as to how to pay for the purchase of virtual currency, but as a conventional method, as in the Yahoo! As in the case of credit settlement, bank transfer settlement, or convenience store settlement, or a securities transaction account settlement system for securities transactions, the user is required to have a settlement account opened in advance, and the account balance data and the exchange. There is a method using legal currency, etc., by linking and settling transaction data in Japan.
 しかしながら、これらの方法では、国をまたいで取引されることを前提とする、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット全体における取引所の決済においては、例えば、決済が完了するまでにかかる時間が長すぎたり、決済が完了するまでにかかるコストが大きすぎたり、決済が完了するまでに行う処理工程が多すぎたりして、決済にあたっての負荷が大きすぎて効率的ではないという問題があった。 However, in these methods, it is assumed that exchange is performed across the virtual market including the media market on the premise of being transacted across countries, for example, it takes too long to complete the settlement, or There is a problem that the cost for completing the settlement is too large, or too many processing steps are performed until the settlement is completed, and the load for the settlement is too large to be efficient.
 そこで、本ヴァーチャルマーケットには、利用者のコンピュータ等の情報処理端末機器の記憶域及び通信ネットワークを用いたブロックチェーン上に、スマートコントラクトを用いてヴァーチャルカレンシーと経済的価値を接続するクリプトカレンシー(仮想通貨、暗号通貨、又は暗号資産等と呼ばれる存在)を供給する機能を付加することを、決済負荷を低減させる目的でも提供することができるようにしている。取引所を利用する第一及び第二の利用者は、あらかじめ、運営者も一つのアカウントとして運営者が構築するブロックチェーン上に、利用者自らで自身のアカウントを作成している。そして、このブロックチェーン上に、運営者は、ICOの手法を用いてクリプトカレンシーを供給する。このクリプトカレンシーを取引所におけるヴァーチャルカレンシー購入時の支払い手段に利用する。 Therefore, in this virtual market, cryptocurrency (virtual virtual reality) is connected using virtual contract on a block chain using storage area and communication network of information processing terminal equipment such as user's computer. It is possible to add the function of supplying currency, cryptocurrency, or existence called cryptographic asset etc., also for the purpose of reducing payment load. The first and second users who use the exchange have their own accounts created in advance on the block chain that the operator also constructs as one account. Then, on this block chain, the operator supplies cryptocurrency using the method of ICO. This cryptocurrency is used as a means of payment for purchasing a virtual currency on the exchange.
 流れとしては、次のようになる。
(1)利用者は、ヴァーチャルマーケット上及びブロックチェーン上のアカウントを取得する
(2)利用者は、ICOに参加、又は市場取引し、クリプトカレンシーを取得する(アソシエイツの取得は任意)
(3)アソシエイツは、ヴァーチャルマーケットにおける活動によってヴァーチャルカレンシーを取得する
(4)アソシエイツと第二の利用者は、取引所においてヴァーチャルカレンシーとクリプトカレンシーを交換する
(5)第二の利用者は、ヴァーチャルマーケットにおける活動によってヴァーチャルカレンシーを消費する
(6)アソシエイツは、取得するクリプトカレンシーをリアルマーケットで通用する現金等に交換又はクリプトカレンシーのまま蓄財する
(7)第二の利用者は、必要なクリプトカレンシーを前記(2)の行程により取得する
(8)アソシエイツは、欲するヴァーチャルカレンシーを(3)の行程により取得する
(9)以降、上記の行程がサイクルする
The flow is as follows.
(1) The user acquires an account on the virtual market and on the block chain (2) The user participates in or trades in the ICO and acquires cryptocurrency (acquisition is optional)
(3) Associates acquire virtual currency by activity in virtual market (4) Associates and second user exchange virtual currency and cryptocurrency in exchange (5) second user is virtual The activity in the market consumes the virtual currency (6) Associates exchange the cryptocurrency to be acquired for cash etc. which can be used in the real market or store the cryptocurrency as it is (7) The second user needs the necessary cryptocurrency (8) Associates acquire desired virtual reality by the process of (3) From (9), the above process cycles
 こうすることで、取引所における決済にあたっての負荷が大きすぎて効率的ではないという問題が解決され、また、取引所における決済手段を上記クリプトカレンシーに限定させることによって、運営者が発行する上記クリプトカレンシーの経済的価値を生じさせ、かつ安定させ、ボラティリティーが低くなる効果を発揮する。
 また、上記クリプトカレンシーが取引所におけるヴァーチャルカレンシーの対価であるということは、アソシエイツから第二の利用者へのヴァーチャルカレンシーの販売取引はもとより、アソシエイツ間のヴァーチャルカレンシーの売買取引が存在することを考えると、上記クリプトカレンシーは、アソシエイツにとっても、第二の利用者にとっても、メディアマーケットを利用、すなわち、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを取得するうえで必要な資産になり、より一層、上記クリプトカレンシーの経済的価値を上昇、及び安定させる効果が期待できるようになる。
This solves the problem that the load on settlement at the exchange is too large and is not efficient, and the cryptosystem issued by the operator by limiting the settlement means at the exchange to the cryptocurrency. Produces and stabilizes the economic value of currency, and has the effect of reducing volatility.
In addition, the fact that the above cryptocurrency is the compensation for the virtual currency in the exchange means that there is a sales transaction of virtual currency among the associates as well as the sales transaction of virtual currency from the associate to the second user. And, the above cryptocurrency is an asset necessary for Associates and second users to use the media market, that is, to acquire virtual reality, and the economic value of the above cryptocurrency is further enhanced. The effect of rising and stabilizing will be expected.
 なお、クリプトカレンシーには、
(1)アソシエイツの手数料決済(課金と還付)手段
(2)取引所におけるヴァーチャルカレンシーの決済(交換)手段
(3)アソシエイツとしての生産活動による剰余価値の保存手段
(4)上昇を見込んでの資産運用手段
という4つの手段があり、運営者が構築するヴァーチャルマーケット群におけるヴァーチャルカレンシーの時価総額(「流通総量」×「単価」)に連動して(将来期待値も含めて)時価総額(クリプトカレンシーの発行総量×単価)の根拠が決定する。このことから、常時、新規発行し続けるヴァーチャルカレンシーと異なり、常時、新規発行し続けるわけではないクリプトカレンシーの単価は上昇しやすくなっており、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通量が増加することによるヴァーチャルカレンシーの時価総額の上昇に伴うクリプトカレンシーの時価総額上昇によって、クリプトカレンシーの単価は上昇しやすくなっている。つまり、クリプトカレンシーのボラティリティーを下げる措置が必要になってくる。
For cryptocurrency,
(1) Associates commission settlement (charging and refunding) means (2) Settlement (exchange) means of virtual currency in the exchange (3) Reserves of surplus value by production activities as Associates (4) Assets expected to rise There are four means of management, and the market capitalization (including the expected value in the future) is linked to the market capitalization ("total volume of distribution" × "unit price") of virtual currency in the virtual market group that the operator constructs The basis of the total issue volume x unit price) is determined. Because of this, unlike the Virtual Carrecurrence, which is always issued continuously, the unit price of Cryptocurrency, which is not always continued to be issued new, is likely to rise, and the virtual exchange rate of the Virtual Carrance is increased. Cryptocurrency's unit price is likely to rise due to the increase in cryptocurrency's market capitalization associated with the rise in gross value. In other words, it is necessary to take measures to reduce the cryptocurrency volatility.
 あらかじめ、ICOにより発行するクリプトカレンシーに関連して、取引所の処理において、次の処理を加えておく。
(1)サーバは、取引所において、交換レートを1ヴァーチャルカレンシー=1クリプトカレンシーに定めて、無限のヴァーチャルカレンシー売り注文を出しておく。
 こうすることで、クリプトカレンシーに、ヴァーチャルマーケットの利用者の消費活動及び評価に基づく、定量化された本源的価値を間接的に生じさせることができるようになる。つまり、クリプトカレンシーは、いつでもヴァーチャルカレンシーに等量交換することができるということであり、クリプトカレンシーの需給バランスに応じて、対ヴァーチャルカレンシーの価値が1より大きくなる場合はあっても、1より小さくなる場合はなくなる。よって、クリプトカレンシーは、ヴァーチャルカレンシー以上の価値を有することになる。
In advance, in connection with the cryptocurrency issued by the ICO, the following processing is added in the processing of the exchange.
(1) The server establishes an exchange rate of 1 virtual currency = 1 cryptocurry at the exchange and issues an infinite virtual currency sales order.
This will allow cryptocurrency to indirectly generate quantified intrinsic value based on consumer market activity and valuation of the virtual market. In other words, cryptocurrency can be exchanged at any time to equal the virtual currency, and depending on the balance of the cryptocurrency, the value of the virtual reality will be smaller than 1 although it may be greater than 1 It will disappear if it becomes. Thus, cryptocurrency will have more value than virtual currency.
 このとき、クリプトカレンシーの需要(価値)の変動(上昇)を吸収し、クリプトカレンシーの価値をヴァーチャルカレンシーの価値と等しく(近く)なるような措置を講じなければならないわけであるが、これを次に記す。
(1)クリプトカレンシーの価値がヴァーチャルカレンシーの価値に近づくよう、価値の乖離幅に応じてクリプトカレンシーを分割生成する
 クリプトカレンシーは、ヴァーチャルマーケットに存在するヴァーチャルカレンシーの価値を本源的価値においているわけであるが、クリプトカレンシーが、従来のクリプトカレンシーのように、発行総量が固定されているとすれば、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの時価総額の変動により、単価が大きく変動してしまうという問題があった。
 そこで、この問題を解決するため、クリプトカレンシーの価値が、本源的価値であるヴァーチャルカレンシーの価値から離れない(つまり、1対1から離れない)ようにするためのアルゴリズムを、あらかじめクリプトカレンシーに持たせておくようにする。
At this time, it is necessary to absorb the fluctuation (increase) of demand (value) of cryptocurrency and take measures to make the value of cryptocurrency equal to (close to) the value of virtual currency, but Note.
(1) Divide the cryptocurrency according to the gap of value so that the cryptocurrency value approaches the value of the virtual currency The cryptocurrency is the intrinsic value of the virtual currency value existing in the virtual market Although there is a problem with cryptocurrency, as with conventional cryptocurrency, if the total issue volume is fixed, there is a problem that the unit price changes significantly due to the fluctuation of the market capitalization of virtual currency.
Therefore, in order to solve this problem, cryptocurrency has an algorithm in advance to ensure that the value of cryptocurrency does not deviate from the value of the intrinsic value of virtual currency (that is, does not deviate from one to one). Let's keep it up.
 クリプトカレンシーに次の機能を付加する。
(1)ブロックチェーン上のスマートコントラクトを用いて、クリプトカレンシーの需給バランスをモニタリングする
(2)需給バランスが所定の状態(例えば、流通総量の5%を超える需要過多等)を示すと、当該需要過多量のクリプトカレンシーがブロックチェーン上に新規生成され、既存のクリプトカレンシー保有者に対して、保有量の割合に応じた新規生成されたクリプトカレンシーが付与される
(3)需給バランスが所定の状態(例えば、流通総量の5%を超える供給過多等)を示すと、当該供給過多量のクリプトカレンシーをブロックチェーン上から消滅させるべく、既存のクリプトカレンシー保有者に対して、保有量の割合に応じたクリプトカレンシーを消滅させる
 こうすることで、サーバ内(ヴァーチャルマーケット)において通用するヴァーチャルカレンシーと、ブロックチェーン上(実社会)において通用するクリプトカレンシーとを、一体として「通貨」として機能させることができるようになる。
Add the following functions to crypto currency.
(1) Monitor the balance of supply and demand of cryptocurrency using a smart contract on the block chain (2) If the balance of supply and demand shows a predetermined state (for example, excess demand exceeding 5% of the total amount of distribution, etc.) An excessively large amount of cryptocurrency is newly generated on the block chain, and the newly generated cryptocurrency according to the proportion of the amount of the existing cryptocurrency is granted to the existing cryptocurrency holder. (3) The supply and demand balance is in a predetermined state (For example, if it indicates oversupply of over 5% of the total distribution amount, etc.), the existing cryptocurrency holder will be proportionate to the existing cryptocurrency holder in order to eliminate the oversupply of cryptocurrency from the block chain. In the server (virtual market) by eliminating this cryptocurrency It becomes possible to function as a "currency" as a whole, virtual currency that is valid and cryptocurrency that is valid on the block chain (in the real world).
 結局のところ、上記クリプトカレンシーは、中央集権的ではないビットコインのような性質のクリプトカレンシーであるが、特徴的違いは、発行総量が無限であり、需給バランスに応じてクリプトカレンシーの量が増えたり減ったりするアルゴリズムを内包している部分にある。また、ヴァーチャルカレンシーによって本源的価値が生じており、ファンダメンタルズ分析も可能であり、ヴァーチャルマーケットにおける経済的役割も付加されていることから、従来のクリプトカレンシーにない、ボラティリティーの低さを実現し、ヴァーチャルマーケットでの決済手段はもとより、実社会でのその他の決済手段にも耐えうるクリプトカレンシーになることができるものである。 After all, the above cryptocurrency is a non-centralized bitcoin-like cryptocurrency, but the characteristic difference is that the total issue volume is infinite and the amount of cryptocurrency increases according to the balance of supply and demand It is in the part that contains the algorithm to reduce or reduce. In addition, the virtual value is generated by the virtual reality, fundamental analysis is also possible, and the economic role in the virtual market is also added, thereby realizing low volatility which is not found in the conventional cryptocurrency, It can be a cryptocurrency that can withstand not only payment methods in the virtual market but also other payment methods in the real world.
 さらに、クリプトカレンシーは、その他の価値と交換することも可能であることから、本明細書に記載するヴァーチャルマーケットのようなその他のサービスにおけるその他のヴァーチャルカレンシーと、本明細書に記載するような取引所における1対1の交換も可能である。つまり、本明細書に記載する態様のクリプトカレンシーと価値を接続するヴァーチャルカレンシーは無限であり、このことから、クリプトカレンシーの流通総量は、価値を接続するヴァーチャルカレンシーの将来期待値も含めた価値の総量だけ、理論上、無限に拡大することができ、時価総額を増大させ続けることができるものである。 Furthermore, since cryptocurrency can also be exchanged for other values, such transactions as described herein with other virtual reality in other services such as the virtual market described herein. One-to-one exchange is also possible. That is, the virtual currency that connects the value with the cryptocurrency of the aspect described in this specification is infinite, and from this, the distribution total amount of cryptocurrency is the value of the value including the future expectation value of the virtual currency that connects the value. The total amount can, in theory, be expanded infinitely, and can continue to increase market capitalization.
「譲渡におけるクリプトカレンシーを用いた納税」について説明する。
 取引所における支払い手段をクリプトカレンシーに限定した場合に、クリプトカレンシーは、アソシエイツ(の側面)がヴァーチャルカレンシーを第二の利用者(の側面)に譲渡したときに課金される譲渡手数料の支払い手段に用いることが効果的である。
 これは、「第一の利用者から第二の利用者へのヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲渡、並びに課金および還付」に記載した、サーバのシステム現金通帳で管理するアソシエイツの債務を、上記クリプトカレンシーに限定して運用するものである。つまり、アソシエイツに課すヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲渡手数料(債務)、及び報奨的支払いの販売奨励金(債務の減額)は、円やドルやユーロ等の法定通貨ではなく、上記クリプトカレンシーに限定して運用するというものである。このことは、ローカル取引において、アソシエイツが取得する販売したヴァーチャルカレンシーの交換対価が現地法定通貨であったとしても、当該アソシエイツが運営者に支払う譲渡手数料は、上記クリプトカレンシーになるということである。
Explain "paying tax using cryptocurrency in transfer".
If the exchange payment means is limited to cryptocurrency, then cryptocurrency will be charged to the transfer fee payment means charged when the Associates (side) transfers the virtuality to the second user (side) It is effective to use.
This is limited to the cryptocurrency of the Associates' responsibilities managed by the system cash passbook of the server, as described in “Transfer of virtual key from first user to second user, and charging and refunding”. Operation. In other words, the transfer fee (debt) for transfer of virtual currency in Associates, and the sales incentive fee (reduction of debt) for incentive payment are not limited to the legal currency such as yen, dollar or euro, but limited to cryptocurrency mentioned above. It is said that. This means that, in the local transaction, the transfer fee paid by the Associates to the operator will be the cryptocurrency even if the exchange consideration of the virtual currency bought by the Associates is the local legal currency.
 こうすることで、世界中に単一プラットフォームとして展開することを前提とした、本実施形態のメディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケット群の課題である、「国家(国家に属する利用者)ごとに異なる通貨を取り扱わなければならないことによる、決済処理の非効率性」を一切排除する(ローカルにおける利用者間の直接取引は任意かつ自由、つまり、アソシエイツはローカル取引におけるヴァーチャルカレンシーの譲渡の対価を自由に決める)ことができ、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット群においては、銀行の口座決済を必要としない効率的な決済処理を提供することができるようになる。 By doing this, it is an issue of the virtual market group such as the media market of the present embodiment on the premise that it is developed as a single platform all over the world. Eliminate any inefficiencies in payment processing due to having to deal with it (direct transactions between users in the local are optional and free, that is, Associates are free to take charge of transfer of virtuality in local transactions) In the virtual market group including media market, it will be possible to provide efficient payment processing without the need for bank account settlement.
 なお、クリプトカレンシーを用いる実施形態をベストモードと考えているわけであるが、なぜ、「取引所におけるクリプトカレンシーを用いた決済」と、「譲渡におけるクリプトカレンシーを用いた納税」を変形例のように示したかというと、例えば、中国のような市場において、場合によっては、クリプトカレンシーを用いない、中国限定のメディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット群を地域限定で構築する可能性を考慮しているからである。つまり、本実施形態でのヴァーチャルマーケットには、世界中に展開するメインの世界単一プラットフォーム型のヴァーチャルマーケット群のほかに、当該世界中に展開するメインのヴァーチャルマーケット群の利用を制限した、地域限定のヴァーチャルマーケット群があっても良いと考えているわけである。 In addition, although the embodiment using cryptocurrency is considered as the best mode, why “payment using cryptocurrency in the exchange” and “tax payment using cryptocurrency in transfer” are as variations. For example, in the case of a market such as China, in some cases, considering the possibility of regionally building a virtual market group including a media market limited to China, which does not use cryptocurrency, in some cases. is there. In other words, in the virtual market in this embodiment, in addition to the main world single platform virtual market group deployed worldwide, the use of the main virtual market group deployed worldwide is restricted. We believe that there may be a limited set of virtual markets.
 そうして、上記クリプトカレンシーは、「取引所における支払手段」および「ヴァーチャルマーケットにおける納税手段」と併せて、「ヴァーチャルカレンシーにいつでも交換できる」(ヴァーチャルカレンシー本位貨幣)という、確固とした経済的価値を生じさせることで、上記クリプトカレンシーが本来有する、「価値の保存機能」、「価値の尺度機能」、および「価値の交換機能」が相乗的に機能し、「通貨」としての機能を成立させることになる。 Thus, the cryptocurrency mentioned above, together with "payment means at the exchange" and "tax payment means at the virtual market", has a solid economic value of "can be exchanged for virtual currency anytime" (virtual key currency). The “preserving function of value”, “value measuring function”, and “value exchanging function” inherently possessed by the above cryptocurrency function synergistically to establish the function as “currency”. It will be.
 そして、クリプトカレンシーの通貨としての機能を向上させるうえで必要な、ボラティリティーを下げ、クリプトカレンシーの流通総量をヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通総量の上昇に応じて上昇させる、「クリプトカレンシーの分割アルゴリズム」である。これは、クリプトカレンシーの価値が上昇して単価が上昇するのではなく、発行可能クリプトカレンシー総量を無制限としたうえで、価値が上昇すれば、価値の上昇分だけクリプトカレンシー保有者に対して保有量に応じたクリプトカレンシーを生成付与し、価値が減少すれば、価値の減少分だけクリプトカレンシー保有者に対して保有量に応じたクリプトカレンシーを消却するというものであり、いわばクリプトカレンシーにおける金利のようなものである。 Then, it is a "cryptcurrency division algorithm" that lowers the volatility necessary to improve the function of cryptocurrency as a currency, and raises the total amount of cryptocurrency in accordance with the increase in the total amount of virtual currency circulation. This means that the value of cryptocurrency is not increased and the unit price is not increased, but the total issue of cryptocurrency is made unlimited, and if the value goes up, the amount of increase in value is held for the cryptocurrency holder. If the cryptocurrency is generated and given according to the amount and the value decreases, the cryptocurrency holder will cancel the cryptocurrency according to the holding amount by the amount of decrease in value, so the so-called interest rate in cryptocurrency It is like that.
 こうすることで、本実施形態での、「ヴァーチャルカレンシー制御アルゴリズム」と、「クリプトカレンシー制御アルゴリズム」が、一体としてアルゴリズムを形成するとき、実社会に対して、「他者からの評価(情報提供者の承認欲求と情報取得者の知識欲求に基づく他者に移転する価値)に基づく貨幣」、つまり、「評価本位貨幣」を提供することができるようになる。
 つまり、他者の評価を本源的価値としたヴァーチャルカレンシーであり、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを本源的価値としたクリプトカレンシーであり、これらを機能させる本実施形態ということである。
By doing this, when the “virtual currency control algorithm” and the “crypt currency control algorithm” in the present embodiment integrally form an algorithm, the evaluation from the other party (information provider It is possible to provide "money based on the approval request of the information transferee" and the value transferred to others based on the knowledge desire of the information acquirer, that is, "evaluation-oriented money".
In other words, it is a virtual currency whose intrinsic value is the evaluation of others, and a cryptocurrency whose intrinsic value is virtual currency, which is the present embodiment that causes these to function.
「アソシエイツとしての信用度を、与信限度額の付与という形で設定」について説明する。
 アソシエイツがヴァーチャルカレンシーを第二の利用者に譲渡し、ヴァーチャルマーケット運営者から課金される譲渡手数料は、アソシエイツの債務として、これを計上するシステムであり、運営者にとっては、アソシエイツに対する債権(売掛金)であるわけだが、この価額の上限額は、アソシエイツごとに異なる値を用いて運用する態様にしている。つまり、与信限度額である。いわば、クレジットカードのショッピング枠である。
Explain "set creditworthiness as an associate in the form of credit limit grant".
Associates transfers virtual currency to a second user, and the transfer fee charged by the virtual market operator is a system that accounts for this as an associate's debt, and for the operator, a claim on the associate (trade receivables) However, the upper limit of the price is managed using different values for each associate. In other words, the credit limit. It is a shopping frame for credit cards, so to speak.
 これは、クレジットカード等の信用取引にあるような従来技術で足り、特段の特徴的技術はないことから詳細な処理は割愛するが、単純に言って、「利用者のサービス利用行為を評価して、利用者ごとの信用枠を増減させるもの」である。つまり、債権者たるヴァーチャルマーケット群の運営者は、アソシエイツの、
(1)ヴァーチャルマーケット利用行為
(2)ヴァーチャルマーケットのその他の利用者から得ている評価
(3)認定制度による財務諸表情報の提供による取得情報
を用いて、アソシエイツに対する債権限度額(信用枠)を増減させるものである。
Although this is sufficient with prior art such as in credit card credit transactions and there is no particular characteristic technology, detailed processing will be omitted, but simply saying, "Assess the user's service usage behavior. To increase or decrease the credit line for each user. In other words, the operator of the virtual market group who is the creditor is
(1) Virtual market usage act (2) Evaluation obtained from other users of virtual market (3) Credit limit amount (credit limit) for Associates using acquired information by provision of financial statement information by accreditation system It is something to increase or decrease.
 なお、アソシエイツに対して付与する信用枠の大小は、先願特許明細書「特典管理装置」にあるアソシエイツ(第一の利用者)の表示優先度と連携させても良いし、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与量と連携させても、運営者に対する累計支払い(納税)金額と連携させても、運営者からの販売奨励(還付)金額と連携させても、何でもよいと考えている。つまりは、従来から存在するクレジットカード等の機能である。 Note that the size of the credit line granted to the Associates may be linked to the display priority of the Associates (first user) in the prior patent specification "Privilege Management Device", or the Virtual Callacity will be granted. Whether it is linked with the amount, linked with the accumulated payment (tax payment) amount to the operator, or linked with the sales encouragement (refund) amount from the operator, it is considered to be anything. That is, it is a function of a credit card or the like which conventionally exists.
「ヴァーチャルカレンシーの消滅するマーケット利用行為(第二の利用者による第一消費活動)」について説明する。
 第二の利用者(の側面)にとっては、メディアマーケットの機能を利用するとき、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを消費する(消滅させる)利用行為もあれば、消費しない(消滅させない)利用行為もある。運営者は、あらかじめ設定情報を登録(更新)することで、第二の利用者のどのような利用行為を無償行為とするか、また、どのような利用行為をヴァーチャルカレンシーの消費を伴う有償行為とするか、さらには、有償行為ごとに、どのくらいの利用行為について、どのくらいのヴァーチャルカレンシーを対価として消費させるか設定しておく。つまり、ヴァーチャルマーケットにおける物価の設定である。
Explain the "market use behavior to which virtual currency disappears (first consumption activity by the second user)".
For (the second aspect of) the user, when using the functions of the media market, there is a use act that consumes (cancels) virtual reality, and there is a use act that does not consume (does not disappear). The operator registers (updates) the setting information in advance to determine what usage act of the second user is to be a free act, and what usage act is a paid act that involves consumption of virtual reality. In addition, for each paid activity, how much use activity and how much virtual currency will be consumed as compensation is set. In other words, it is the setting of prices in the virtual market.
 有償となるサービス利用行為とは、利用者が参加するメディアマーケットを、その他の利用者が無償で利用するよりも有利に利用するための機能である。例えば、自らが発信する情報を、情報取得してほしい対象に、より早く、より多く、より適切に届けられるようにする等の、いわゆる広告宣伝的利用行為や、自らが取得する情報を、情報提供してほしい対象から、より早く、より多く、より適切に取得することができるようにする等の、いわゆる情報収集利用行為がある。そして、その量や精度についての大小や優先度合いを決定づけるヴァーチャルカレンシーの消費量である。 The service usage act, which is paid, is a function to use the media market in which the user participates more advantageously than other users using it free of charge. For example, so-called advertisement-like use acts such as enabling information to be delivered faster, more, and more appropriately to an object for whom information is desired to be acquired, and information acquired by oneself There is a so-called information collection and use act such as enabling to obtain more quickly, more and more appropriately from the subject that the user wants to provide. And, it is the consumption of virtual currency that determines the size and priority of the amount and accuracy.
 これら、ヴァーチャルカレンシーがヴァーチャルマーケットから消滅する利用行為をもって、「第二の利用者による第一消費活動」としている。そして、メディアマーケットにおける第一消費活動は、事業会員たる第二の利用者の広告宣伝行為がその大半を占めることになると考えている。以下、この流れを説明する。 The use of these virtual carrances to disappear from the virtual market is referred to as "first consumption activities by second users". And, I think that the first consumption activity in the media market is dominated by the advertising activities of the second user who is a business member. The flow will be described below.
 メディアマーケットに登録する記者等のアソシエイツによって、価値ある情報がメディアマーケットに提供され、これを取得しようとする事業会員や個人会員が集まる。そして、集まった事業会員の中から、その他の利用者に広告宣伝したい事業会員が生まれ、ヴァーチャルカレンシーをアソシエイツから購入し、ヴァーチャルカレンシーが消費(消滅)される第一消費活動が行われる。そして、メディアマーケットから消滅する量以上にメディアマーケットに新規供給されるヴァーチャルカレンシーを獲得すべく、記者等のアソシエイツによって価値ある情報がさらに提供される。そして、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを獲得したアソシエイツからヴァーチャルカレンシーを購入した事業会員は、さらに自身に有利なように広告宣伝等の第一消費活動を行う。そして、さらに、アソシエイツの価値ある情報提供を期待する事業会員や個人会員が増え、これらがサイクルする。 Valuable information is provided to the media market by Associates such as reporters who register in the media market, and business members and individual members who intend to acquire this gather. Then, among the gathered business members, a business member who wants to advertise to other users is created, and the virtual consumption is purchased from the Associates, and the first consumption activity in which the virtual reality is consumed (disappears) is performed. And, valuable information is provided by Associates such as reporters, etc., in order to gain the virtual reality that is newly supplied to the media market beyond the volume that will disappear from the media market. Then, a business member who purchases virtual currency from the Associates who has acquired virtual currency, further performs primary consumption activities such as advertising and the like in a way that is advantageous to themselves. And furthermore, business members and individual members who expect the provision of valuable information of associates increase, and these cycle.
 つまり、
(1)アソシエイツによって価値ある情報が提供される
(2)価値ある情報を求めて利用者が増大する
(3)増大した利用者に対して広告宣伝したい事業者が現れる
(4)本実施形態では事業者の広告宣伝費を取得できるアソシエイツが価値ある情報をさらに提供する
(5)さらに価値ある情報を求めて利用者が増大する
(6)本実施形態ではヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給量が上昇する
(7)増大する利用者に対して広告宣伝したい事業者がヴァーチャルカレンシーを購入し広告宣伝を行いヴァーチャルカレンシーが消滅する
(8)ヴァーチャルカレンシーが価値ある情報を提供するアソシエイツに新規供給される
(9)価値ある情報を求めて利用者がさらに増大する、
という流れである。
 つまり、メディアマーケットは、本実施形態から、事業者たる第二の利用者の支払う広告宣伝費用を、著作物を創作及び無償提供する情報提供者たるアソシエイツ(第一の利用者)に直接的かつ効果的に還流させることができるようになり、メディアマーケットの視聴者たる第二の利用者の増大及び利用時間の上昇と共に、その規模を大きくさせ続けてゆくメカニズムを実社会に提供するものである。
In other words,
(1) Associates provide valuable information (2) Users increase in search for valuable information (3) Business operators who want to advertise to the increased users appear (4) In this embodiment Associates who can acquire the advertising expenses of the enterprise further provide valuable information (5) More users are sought for more valuable information (6) In the present embodiment, the supply amount of virtual currency increases (7 ) A business that wants to advertise to an increasing number of users purchases and promotes virtual currency, and virtual currency disappears (8) Virtual currency is newly supplied to associates who provide valuable information (9) Value The number of users increases further for certain information,
It is a flow of.
That is, according to the present embodiment, the media market directly receives the advertising expenses paid by the second user who is the business operator directly to the associate (the first user) who is the information provider who creates and provides the copyrighted work without charge. It will be able to effectively circulate, and it will provide the real world with a mechanism that will continue to increase its scale as the number of second viewers of the media market increases and usage time increases.
 なお、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを無償取得するアソシエイツは、毎回、著作物等を新規創造し続けなければならないというものではなく、継続的に、その他の利用者から評価され続けるような、継続的価値を他者に提供する著作物をメディアマーケットに提供することで、継続的にヴァーチャルカレンシーを獲得し続けることができることから、より一層、価値ある情報をメディアマーケットに提供するようになる。 It should be noted that Associates who acquire Virtual Callancy free of charge do not have to continue to create new works every time, but the continuous value that is continuously evaluated by other users is another person. By providing the material provided to the media market to the media market, it is possible to provide virtual media with more valuable information because it is possible to continuously acquire virtual reality.
「ヴァーチャルカレンシーの消滅しないマーケット利用行為(第二の利用者による第二消費活動)コンテンツ売買」について説明する。
 第二の利用者(の側面)にとっては、メディアマーケットの機能を利用するとき、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを消費する(消滅させる)利用行為もあれば、消費しない(消滅させない)利用行為もあるとしたわけであるが、これら利用行為のほかに、利用者同士のヴァーチャルカレンシーの交換取引というものがある。
 記者等のアソシエイツは、メディアマーケットにおいて、自らの創作する著作物等を、その他の利用者に対して、すべて無償で提供しなければならないわけではなく、無償であるか、有償であるか、有償であればいくらで販売するかを任意で決定することができるようになっている。そして、記者等のアソシエイツがメディアマーケットにおいて提供できる著作物等は、上記に記した「構成要素1」にあるように、様々なものがある。
A description will be given of “market use behavior (second consumption activity by a second user) that the virtual currency does not disappear” content buying and selling ”.
For (second aspect of) the second user, when using the functions of the media market, some use acts to consume (extinguish) virtual currency and some use not to consume (does not disappear). In addition to these usages, there is also a virtual currency exchange transaction among users.
Associates such as reporters do not have to provide all the works they create in the media market without charge to other users, but whether they are free or paid, or paid If so, it is possible to decide arbitrarily how much to sell. And there are various works that can be provided by the Associates such as reporters in the media market, as described in "Component 1" described above.
 例えば、記者等のアソシエイツは、任意のヴァーチャルカレンシー量を設定して、その他の第二の利用者に対して、創作する著作物等のコンテンツを販売することができる。第二の利用者としても、アソシエイツの販売するコンテンツを、自らの判断によって、当該アソシエイツに対してヴァーチャルカレンシーを支払い、当該コンテンツを取得することができる。
 こうすることで、メディアマーケットで取り扱うアソシエイツの提供する情報は、いわゆるテレビ等のメディで無償情報提供されている情報コンテンツの枠を大きく超えて、例えば、一般的に実社会で販売されている、書籍や音楽や映画等の著作物までをも取り扱うことができるようになる。以下、この流れを説明する。
For example, an associate such as a reporter can set an arbitrary amount of virtual currency and sell content such as a work to be created to other second users. As the second user, the content sold by the Associates can be paid by the Virtual currency to the Associates at his own discretion, and the content can be acquired.
In this way, the information provided by the associates handled in the media market greatly exceeds the scope of the information content provided free of charge by so-called TV and other media, for example, books generally sold in the real world, It will be able to handle even copyrighted works such as music and movies. The flow will be described below.
 記者たるアソシエイツは、無償情報提供すべきでないと考える価値の比較的高いであろう記事について、相応の価格を設定してメディアマーケットに表層のみ配信(陳列)する。陳列された当該記者の記事の表層を見た第二の利用者は、当該記者の無償配信している記事等の無償コンテンツ等から、有償コンテンツの価値を判断し、当該コンテンツをヴァーチャルカレンシーを支払い当該記者から購入する。この時、記者および第二の利用者に対する運営者からの課金は想定していない。そして、当該記者は、有償コンテンツを販売し、得たヴァーチャルカレンシーを、自らの第二の利用者の側面に譲渡し自らで消費するか、ローカル取引、又は取引所において、その他の利用者に譲渡し、対価を獲得する。他方、有償コンテンツを購入した第二の利用者は、ローカル取引、又は取引所において、以降に必要とするヴァーチャルカレンシーを、アソシエイツ(又は、アソシエイツの側面)から譲受し、対価を支払う。 The reporter Associates distributes (displays) only the surface to the media market, setting prices for articles that are considered to be of relatively high value that they should not provide free information. The second user who sees the surface of the article of the said reporter who has been displayed determines the value of the paid content from the free content etc. of the article etc. being delivered free of the said reporter, and pays the virtual reality for the content. Purchase from the relevant reporter. At this time, no charge from the operator for the reporter and the second user is assumed. Then, the reporter sells paid content, transfers the acquired virtual currency to the second user's side and consumes it by itself, or transfers it to other users at a local transaction or exchange. And get paid. On the other hand, the second user who has purchased the paid content transfers from the Associates (or an aspect of Associates) the local transaction or the virtual exchange that he / she needs later, and pays for it.
 つまり、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット全体において、「第一消費活動」によるヴァーチャルカレンシーの消滅を伴う第二の利用者のサービス利用行為に至るまでのヴァーチャルカレンシーは、「第二消費活動」によって、ヴァーチャルマーケット内で帰属権を移転しながら利用者間を移転することになる。まさに通貨である。 In other words, in the entire virtual market, including the media market, virtual reality from the first consumption activity to the second user's use of services accompanied by the disappearance of virtual reality is "virtual activity by the second consumption activity". It will transfer between users while transferring the ownership right in the market. It is a currency.
 こうすることで、アソシエイツは、メディアマーケットを通して多様な著作物等をその他の利用者に販売することができるようになり、例えば、多大なコストをかけて制作した映画であったり、感性をかけて創作した音楽や書籍であったり、多大な知識と労力をかけてまとめた記事やドキュメンタリーであったり、有名無名、労力やコストの大小を問わず、多種多様なありとあらゆるコンテンツを、メディアマーケットを通して価値を認めてくれる世界中の利用者に提供することができるようになる。 By doing this, it becomes possible for Associates to sell various works etc. to other users through the media market. It is a music or book that you create, an article or documentary that you put together with a great deal of knowledge and effort, a wide variety of all kinds of content, regardless of the name unknown, effort and cost, value through the media market It will be able to provide to users in the world who accept it.
 そして、このことは、さらに、著作物等の創作物たる供給物を、本実施形態から、直接的かつ効果的に需要者に届けることを可能にするものであることから、従来では失われていた、媒介手段たるメディア機関が切り捨てていた、いわゆる無名の価値が、社会に価値をもって誕生しやすくなり、創作者の創作意欲を向上させ、もって著作物等の価値の流通を劇的に促進する効果を発揮するようになる。 And, this is also lost conventionally because it is possible to deliver the creation supply such as the work directly and effectively from the embodiment to the consumer. Also, the so-called unknown value, which was cut off by media agencies as media, is likely to be born with value in society, improve the creative mind of creators, and thus dramatically promote the distribution of values such as works. Become effective.
「ヴァーチャルカレンシーの消滅と新規供給と取引所での取引価格の関係」について説明する。
 メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット群へのヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給は、メディアマーケットにおいては、記者等のアソシエイツによる情報提供(無償コンテンツ提供)に対する、その他の利用者および運営者の、当該無償コンテンツへの評価に基づく、ヴァーチャルマーケットへのヴァーチャルカレンシーの生成、及び当該アソシエイツへの当該ヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与から始まるものである。
Explain the relationship between the disappearance of virtual reality and the new supply and the trading price at the exchange.
Virtual media supply to the virtual market group, including the media market, is based on the evaluation of other users and operators for the provision of information (providing free content) by Associates such as reporters in the media market. Starting with the creation of virtual reality on the virtual market and the grant of the virtual reality to the Associates.
 そして、ヴァーチャルカレンシーは、利用者間で帰属権を移転させながら、第二消費活動を経て(経ない場合もある)、第一消費活動によって、ヴァーチャルマーケットから消滅する。
 また、第二消費活動によって、ヴァーチャルカレンシーは、ヴァーチャルマーケットに生成されてから、消滅するまでの間に、様々な流通経路をたどるものであるから、ヴァーチャルカレンシーには、一様の存在期間というものは存在しない。そして、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの交換価値は、すべて利用者間の任意としていることがある。
 これらのことから、一見、ヴァーチャルマーケット全体のヴァーチャルカレンシーの単位交換価値の変動によるヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通障害(情報流通障害そのものである)については、運営者は制御できないと考えられるだろうが、そうではない。
And, while transferring the ownership right among the users, the virtual currency disappears from the virtual market by the first consumption activity through the second consumption activity.
In addition, because the virtual activity takes a variety of distribution routes from the time it is created in the virtual market until it disappears by the second consumption activity, the virtual reality period has a uniform period of existence. Does not exist. And, the virtual exchange value of virtual currency can be considered as arbitrary among users.
From these things, it seems that the operator can not control the virtual karmic flow disturbance (it is the information circulation trouble itself) due to the fluctuation of the unit exchange value of the virtual currency in the virtual market as a whole. Absent.
 説明すると、本実施形態では、従来の中央銀行による通貨供給システムにあるような、前提としての、「通貨は消滅しない」という概念に変えて、「ヴァーチャルカレンシーは消滅(保有期間によって価値が変動)する」という概念を加えている。そして、この概念がどこからきているかと言えば、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの存在、つまり本源的価値は、どこからきているかということに由来するわけだが、それは、我々人類の絶え間ない欲求をヴァーチャルカレンシーの本源的価値に据えていることからくるものである。つまり、承認欲求等の能動的他者評価欲求と、知的好奇心や群的知識共有等の能動的知識欲を、ヴァーチャルカレンシー生成の基礎としていることから、ヴァーチャルカレンシーは、マーケットに生み出され続ける(べき)性質のものと捉えていることによる、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの生成と消滅という概念である。 To explain, in this embodiment, the concept of “currency does not disappear” is replaced with the premise that “currency does not disappear” as in the conventional central bank-based currency supply system, “virtuality disappears (value fluctuates depending on holding period) Add the concept of And, speaking of where this concept comes from, it is because of the existence of virtualism, that is, where it originates from where it comes from, it is that the constant desire of humanity is the essence of virtual reality. It comes from putting in value. In other words, since virtual reality is created based on active others' evaluation needs such as approval needs and active curiosity such as intellectual curiosity and group knowledge sharing, virtual reality continues to be produced in the market ( It is the concept of the creation and the extinction of virtual reality, by being regarded as a matter of nature.
 他方、メディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケット群は、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの生成及び付与をアソシエイツに対して行うにあたって、当該アソシエイツから、何らかの物品の提供や役務の提供を受けているわけではないということがある。つまり、ヴァーチャルカレンシーは、生成及び付与の段階では、何らかの対価として、アソシエイツに対して、これを運営者が負債として差し出しているわけではないこと、及び付与されたヴァーチャルカレンシーは、アソシエイツにとっては何らの資産として計上されるべきものでもなく、自らでの利用価値はまったくない無用の長物として存在していることがある。あくまでも、メディアマーケットに無償コンテンツを提供し、その他の利用者によって評価された、いわば、その他の利用者が、提供された無償コンテンツの閲覧等により得たであろう価値を、定量化して表したものがヴァーチャルカレンシーであるというだけのものである。 On the other hand, there are cases where the virtual markets such as the media market do not receive any provision of goods or services from the Associates in performing the creation and grant of the virtual reality to the Associates. In other words, in the stage of creation and granting, Virtualcalness does not offer the Associates a liability for the Associates for any compensation, and the Virtualcurrency granted is not for the Associates. It is not something that should be recorded as an asset, and it may exist as a useless feature that has no value for its own use. To the last, providing free content to the media market and quantifying the value that other users would have gained by browsing the provided free content, etc. It is only that what is virtual reality.
 これらのことから、ヴァーチャルカレンシーには、通貨の役割の一つである「価値の保存」という資産的機能を与えていない。これは、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの保有期間に上限があり、期限が到来すると消滅(期間によって価値が変動)する、という特性をヴァーチャルカレンシーに与えていることからも、さらにいえることである。つまり、ヴァーチャルカレンシーは、人類である利用者の欲によってヴァーチャルマーケットに生み出され続け、いつかは消滅すべき存在として設計しているということである。よって、「ヴァーチャルカレンシーは消滅する」のである。
 なお、これらの処理は、設定情報に基づき処理されるものである。
From these facts, virtual currency is not given the asset function of "value preservation" which is one of the roles of the currency. This is all the more true because it has the property that it has an upper limit on the holding period of the virtual currency and it disappears (the value fluctuates depending on the period) when the time limit comes. In other words, virtual reality is designed to continue being created in the virtual market by the desire of the human user, and to design it as an existence that should eventually disappear. Therefore, "the virtual reality disappears".
Note that these processes are processed based on setting information.
 以上の説明を前提として、「ヴァーチャルマーケット全体のヴァーチャルカレンシーの単位交換価値の変動によるヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通障害(情報流通障害そのものである)については、運営者は制御できる」わけであるが、これは、
(1)ヴァーチャルカレンシーがマーケットから消滅し続けていること
(2)ヴァーチャルカレンシーのマーケットへの供給をサーバはどのようにでも調整できること
(3)「主体群ごとの購買力の差を反映させた評価補正アルゴリズム」によってヴァーチャルマーケット全体を通してヴァーチャルカレンシーの単位価値を統一していること
(4)取引所を通してヴァーチャルカレンシーの単位交換価値をサーバは常時把握していること、
を利用して実行するものである。
 つまり、(3)と(4)によりヴァーチャルカレンシーはヴァーチャルマーケット全体で単位価値が決定されるようになっており、この価格推移を把握しているサーバは、(1)によって常にヴァーチャルマーケットから消滅し続けるヴァーチャルカレンシーを、(2)を用いて常に供給し続けなくてはならず、これを、ヴァーチャルマーケット全体のヴァーチャルカレンシーの単位交換価値の変動によるヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通障害が生じないよう、サーバは処理しなければならないわけであるが、これは、次の処理をサーバに加えるだけで解決する。
On the premise of the above explanation, "The operator can control the virtual karmic flow disturbance (which is the information circulation trouble itself) caused by the fluctuation of the unit exchange value of the virtual currency of the whole virtual market". ,
(1) The fact that the virtual reality continues to disappear from the market (2) The server can adjust the supply of the virtual reality to the market in any way (3) “evaluation correction reflecting the difference in purchasing power among the groups of subjects Unify the unit value of virtual currency through the whole virtual market by the algorithm (4) that the server keeps track of the unit exchange value of virtual currency through the exchange,
To execute.
That is, according to (3) and (4), virtual currency can be determined as the unit value in the entire virtual market, and servers that understand this price transition will always disappear from the virtual market according to (1) (2) must be continuously supplied, and servers should process this so that the virtual exchangeability of virtual exchange will not occur due to the fluctuation of the unit exchange value of virtual exchange throughout the virtual market. Although it is necessary to do this, this is solved only by adding the following processing to the server.
「新規供給総量調整アルゴリズム」の基礎的処理について説明する。
(1)取引所におけるヴァーチャルカレンシーの売り注文は、販売価格が低い注文を優先して約定させる
(2)常時、サーバは、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの売り注文を、交換する対価と1対1の関係で無限に立てておく(なお、設定情報における運営者が行う第一消費価格の設定は、前記交換する対価の価値の感覚をもって設定する)
(3)前記(2)のサーバによる売り注文は、アソシエイツたる第一の利用者(の側面)の売り注文と同額であれば劣後して約定させる
(4)サーバは、前記(1)、(2)及び(3)により、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを無限に販売することができるようになるわけだが、これを、「借り受け事前販売バーチャルカレンシー量」として記憶しておく
(5)常時、サーバは、記憶している「借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量」と同量のヴァーチャルカレンシーの買い注文を、交換する対価と1対1の関係で立てておく
(6)「借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量」が設定情報として設定された閾値(Z、以下に説明する)を下回ると、アソシエイツが保有するヴァーチャルカレンシーの保有期間による価値の減少(消滅期限のカウント)が停止する
(7)サーバは、「借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量」が、ヴァーチャルマーケットに存在するヴァーチャルカレンシーの総量のA%(設定情報、例えば10%)に近づくように、新規供給するヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給量を調整する
The basic process of the "new supply total amount adjustment algorithm" will be described.
(1) Sales orders of virtual currency in the exchange give priority to orders with low sales prices (2) Always, the server is infinite in a one-to-one relationship with the consideration for exchanging virtual sales orders. (In addition, the setting of the first consumption price performed by the operator in the setting information is set with a sense of the value of the value to be exchanged.)
(3) The selling order by the server of (2) is subordinate to the selling order of the first user (the side of the Associates) if the same amount as the selling order of the (first aspect) (4) According to 2) and (3), it becomes possible to sell virtual carrance infinitely, but this is stored as "the amount of pre-sale virtual currency for borrowing" (5) the server always stores Make a purchase order of virtual carlucency of the same amount as the amount of “pre-sale virtual carreality of borrowing” in a one-to-one relationship with the value to be exchanged (6) “pre-sale virtual carreality of borrowing” is set as setting information Below the identified threshold (Z, described below), the value of the valuated property is reduced by (7) The server stops (7) the server supplies a new virtual supply so that the “pre-sale virtual sales amount for lease” approaches A% (setting information, eg 10%) of the total amount of virtuality present in the virtual market Adjust the supply of currency
 前記基礎的処理に続けて、「新規供給総量調整アルゴリズム」の措置的処理について説明する。
(8)ヴァーチャルカレンシーの需要が増大する時のヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給量の調整は、A%(10%)の量からB%(設定情報、例えば50%、つまりヴァーチャルカレンシーの総量の15%(A+A×B%)の借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量になっている状態)上振れ(供給不足の症状)すると、所定C期間(設定情報、例えば1か月でも1週間でも2か月でもよく任意の期間)の新規供給量の総量を、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの総量の「(A×B)%、つまりこの場合には5%」増加させる新規供給するヴァーチャルカレンシーの総量調整を行う
なお、所定期間の設定は、短ければ調整の影響は大きく、長ければ調整の影響は小さくなる。運営者は、ヴァーチャルマーケットの状態に応じてこれらの設定情報を更新する
(9)前記(8)の新規供給総量調整は、即効性を高めるためにさかのぼって計算し、過去において、すでにアソシエイツに供給したヴァーチャルカレンシーの量に上乗せして、さかのぼり調整分をアソシエイツに対して直ちに供給しても良く、以降新規供給総量調整を行われ続けるようにしても良い
(10)ヴァーチャルカレンシーの需要が減少する時のヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給量の調整は、A%(10%)の量からD%(設定情報、例えば50%、つまりヴァーチャルカレンシーの総量の5%(A-A×D%)の借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量になっている状態)下振れ(供給過多の症状)すると、所定E期間(設定情報、例えば1か月でも1週間でも2か月でもよく任意の期間)の新規供給量の総量を、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの総量の「(A×D)%、つまりこの場合には5%」減少させる新規供給するヴァーチャルカレンシーの総量調整を行う
なお、所定期間の設定は、短ければ調整の影響は大きく、長ければ調整の影響は小さくなる。運営者は、ヴァーチャルマーケットの状態に応じてこれらの設定情報を更新する。
また、ここで説明する需要減少時の供給調整を行うタイミングをもって、前記(6)の閾値Zとし、アソシエイツが保有するヴァーチャルカレンシーの保有期間による価値の減少(消滅期限のカウント)を停止する。そして、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの需要が増加し、借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量がAの値に到達すると、停止していたアソシエイツの保有するヴァーチャルカレンシー消滅期限のカウントが再開する。
Next to the basic process, an action process of the "new supply total amount adjustment algorithm" will be described.
(8) When the demand for virtual carrance is increasing, the adjustment of the amount of virtual carcal supply will be from A% (10%) to B% (setting information, eg 50%, ie 15% of the total amount of virtual carrance) (A + A X B%) Borrower Pre-sale Vending status of the amount of virtual carrance) If upside (symptom of lack of supply), a predetermined C period (setting information, for example, one month or one week or two months) Any period The total amount of the new supply amount of) is increased by “(A × B)%, that is, 5% in this case” of the total amount of virtual reality. If it is short, the influence of adjustment is large, and if it is long, the influence of adjustment is small. The operator updates these setting information according to the condition of the virtual market (9) The total supply adjustment of new supply of (8) is retroactively calculated to enhance the immediate effect, and has already been supplied to the associates in the past In addition to the amount of virtual capital, the retroactive adjustment may be immediately supplied to the Associates, and the total adjustment of new supply may be continued thereafter (10) When the demand for virtual currency decreases The adjustment of the amount of supply of virtual carrancy, from the amount of A% (10%) to D% (setting information, for example 50%, ie 5% of the total amount of virtuality) (A-A × D%) virtual sales pre-sale virtual When the amount of currency is downturn (symptom of oversupply), the predetermined E period (setting information, for example, 1 month or 1 week) The total supply of the new supply of the virtual supply is decreased by “(A × D)%, that is, 5% in this case” of the total supply of the virtual supply for the total supply of the new supply for any period) It should be noted that the setting of the predetermined period is short if the influence of the adjustment is large, and if it is long, the influence of the adjustment is small. The operator updates these setting information in accordance with the state of the virtual market.
Further, at the timing of performing supply adjustment at the time of demand decrease described here, the threshold value Z of the above (6) is set, and the decrease in value (counting of the expiration date) due to the holding period of virtual currency held by Associates is stopped. Then, when the demand for virtual reality increases and the amount of pre-sale virtual currency for rent reaches the value of A, the counting of the virtual lifetime for the virtual key ownership held by the Associates who has stopped is resumed.
 前記措置的処理に続けて、「新規供給総量調整アルゴリズム」の緊急的処理について説明する。
(11)急激な需要減少があり、借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量が0になった場合、0である間に限って、後に説明する「ベーシックインカムアルゴリズム」の原資たる消費税を第二の利用者に対して課税する率について、2倍(設定情報を更新することにより変更可能)にする
こうすることで、メディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケット全体のヴァーチャルカレンシー消費量を実質的に増加させ、併せてヴァーチャルカレンシーの無償給付量を増やし、個人消費を下支えする。
なお、本緊急的処理が利用者に周知されている状況において、ヴァーチャルマーケットにおける借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量を含むヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通状態を利用者に公開しているとき、本緊急的処理の実行タイミングを利用者は予測することができるようになっていることから、実行直前(増税直前)における第二の利用者の駆け込み消費が期待でき、このことにより需要を増大させ、結果的に本緊急的処理を遅らせる、又は本緊急的処理を行わなくて済むという効果を発揮する。
Next to the above-mentioned procedural process, the urgent process of the "new supply total amount adjustment algorithm" will be described.
(11) If there is a sharp decline in demand and the amount of pre-sale virtual currency for borrowing becomes zero, the consumption tax on which the basic income algorithm, which will be explained later, is funded, will be explained later only while it is zero. In this way, the rate of taxing is doubled (which can be changed by updating the setting information), substantially increasing the virtual currency consumption of the entire virtual market including the media market, and at the same time the virtual market. Increase free grants for currency and support personal consumption.
In the situation where this urgent processing is well known to the user, the timing of execution of this urgent processing when the circulation status of virtual currency including the amount of pre-sale virtual currency for rental in virtual market is disclosed to the user Since the user can now predict, it is possible to expect a second user's last-minute consumption immediately before implementation (immediately before tax increase), which will increase demand and consequently this emergency. It has the effect of delaying the treatment or eliminating the need for this urgent treatment.
 こうすることで、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの単価は、「借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量」が1以上存在している「平時」においては完全に一定状態(交換する対価と1対1の価値)に保たれ、景気減退期や金融政策失敗時等の例外時における急激な需要減少(「借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量」が0の状態、つまり緊急事態)状態であってもヴァーチャルカレンシーの単価は下がりにくくなる。
閾値を超えるような需要減少時にはアソシエイツが保有するヴァーチャルカレンシーの消滅期限のカウントが停止しており、仮に借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量が0であったとしても、わざわざ焦って安く売らなくとも、いずれヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通総量の減少とともに、ヴァーチャルカレンシーは元の価値に回復する(借り受け時残販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量が1以上になる)わけであるから、売り注文は交換対価と1対1等のもとの値段で立てておいたままにしておけばよく、交換対価がすぐほしい(リアルでのお金がない状態)等の場合にのみ、1対0.9等、安く売ればよいということである。
By doing this, the unit price of virtual currency will be kept completely constant (exchange price and one-to-one value) in "normal time" in which there is one or more "pre-sale virtual rental volume". Even if the demand declines rapidly at exceptional times such as when the economic recession or monetary policy failure etc. (“pre-sale virtual rental amount” is 0, that is, an emergency), the unit price of virtual currency will not easily fall.
When the demand declines above the threshold, the expiration date of the virtual key property held by Associates has stopped counting, and even if the amount of pre-sale virtual key property is 0, it is not necessary to bother and sell cheaply. With the decrease of the total amount of currency circulation, the virtual currency recovers to its original value (the residual sales virtual currency amount becomes 1 or more at the time of borrowing), so the selling order is one-for-one with the exchange price. It should be kept at the price, and it should be sold cheaply by 1 to 0.9 mag, etc., only when you want exchange consideration immediately (with no real money).
 また、こうすることで、どのような状況でも、需要者のヴァーチャルカレンシーの購入はストレスなく決済することができるようになり、アソシエイツによるヴァーチャルカレンシーの販売についても、平時においてはストレスなく決済することができ、緊急事態のみ、少しの間、待っていればよくなることから、従来の取引所にあるような利用者の取引ストレスを低減させる効果を発揮するようになる。
 なお、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの新規供給量の調整値を算出するうえで、ヴァーチャルマーケットで不足、又は余っているヴァーチャルカレンシーの量が、「借り受け事前販売ヴァーチャルカレンシー量」をモニタリングするのみで容易に算出できるようになることから、運営者にとっても利用者にとっても、調整の根拠を容易に認識することができる効果も併せ持つ。
Also, this makes it possible to settle the purchase of the virtual customer of the consumer without any stress under any circumstances, and the sale of the virtual reality by the Associates can be settled without any stress in peacetime. Since it is possible to wait only for a short while for an emergency situation, it is effective to reduce the transaction stress of the user as in the conventional exchange.
In addition, when calculating the adjustment value of the new supply amount of virtual carrance, it is possible to easily calculate the amount of virtual carrance in the virtual market that is insufficient or left over simply by monitoring the “pre-sale virtual callalty amount for borrowing”. Therefore, the operator and the user also have the effect of easily recognizing the basis of the adjustment.
 このことは、ヴァーチャルマーケット群全体を通して、第二の利用者(又は側面、つまりは、すべての消費主体)のヴァーチャルカレンシー需要総量(資金需要総量)と、アソシエイツ(又は側面)の収入が均衡することを意味しており、さらにこのことは、アソシエイツ間でヴァーチャルカレンシーの獲得合戦が生じる(ほかのアソシエイツよりも評価されるよう、より良質の情報提供物を発信しようとする動機付けがなされ、さらに連鎖反応が生じる)ことを意味しており、さらにこのことは、より良質の情報を求める第二の利用者(特に、個人)が増加、及び利用時間が増大することを意味しており、さらにこのことは、第二の利用者のヴァーチャルカレンシー需要総量を増大(特に、事業会員の行う広告宣伝活動が活性化する)させることを意味しており、さらにこのことは、アソシエイツの獲得するヴァーチャルカレンシーの総量を増加させることを意味しており、こうしたことから、ヴァーチャルマーケット群は、メディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケットに参入するアソシエイツに対して、市場膨張を伴う競争原理を強度に働かせるものになっている。
 つまり、本実施形態では、運営者は、構築するヴァーチャルマーケット群を限界速度で活性化(市場拡大)するようサイクルさせることができるということであり、もって、リアルマーケットの活性化を図る効果も発揮するものである。
This means that the total virtual capital demand (total financial demand) of the second user (or aspect, that is, all consumers) and the income of the Associates (or aspect) are balanced throughout the virtual market group. This also means that there is a battle of acquisition of virtual cards among the Associates (the motivation is to try to deliver better quality information to be evaluated more than other Associates, and the chain It means that a reaction occurs), which also means that the number of second users (especially individuals) seeking better information is increased, and the usage time is increased. Will increase the total amount of virtual customer demand for the second user (in particular, the advertising activities conducted by business members will be activated). This means that it also means increasing the total amount of virtual currency acquired by the Associates, and as such, the Virtual Markets Group has become an Associates entering the virtual market such as the media market. On the other hand, the competition principle with market expansion has been made to work strongly.
That is, in the present embodiment, the operator can cycle the virtual market group to be built to activate (market expansion) at a limit speed, and therefore, the effect of activating the real market is also exhibited. It is
結局のところ、本実施形態でのベストモードは、「1国ごと(単一の法定通貨を用いるEUも一つの国として捉える)に行う、現地法定通貨を決済手段に用いたクリプトカレンシーを用いない局所モデル」と、「複数の国をまたがり全世界に行う、クリプトカレンシーを決済手段に用いた法定通貨を用いない世界モデル」の2つがあるということである。 After all, the best mode in this embodiment is "do not use cryptocurrency using local legal currency as settlement means, per country (Ecousing single legal currency is also regarded as one country) There are two types: local model and global model that uses multiple countries and crosses the world, and does not use legal currency that uses cryptocurrency as payment means.
「ベーシックインカムアルゴリズム」について説明する。
 メディアマーケットを利用する事業会員たる第二の利用者は、ヴァーチャルカレンシーを消費するとき、あらかじめ運営者によって設定された設定情報に基づき、いわば実社会に存在する消費税のようなもの(以下、消費税という)として、消費するヴァーチャルカレンシーの量に上乗せして、運営者にヴァーチャルカレンシーを徴収される。例えば、消費税率が10%の場合において、消費する正規のヴァーチャルカレンシー量が10000であるとき、サーバのヴァーチャルカレンシー通帳から引き落とされるヴァーチャルカレンシーの量は、11000引き落とされる。(表示が内税として11000と表示されていても良い)なお、消費目的が、アソシエイツの有償提供しているコンテンツの取得である場合には、引き落とされた11000のうち、10000がコンテンツを提供したアソシエイツに移動し、1000が運営者に移動する。
The "basic income algorithm" will be described.
The second user, a business member who uses the media market, consumes virtual currency, based on setting information set in advance by the operator, like a sort of consumption tax that exists in the real world (hereinafter referred to as consumption tax In addition, the operator will be charged virtual capital, in addition to the amount of virtual capital used. For example, in the case where the consumption tax rate is 10%, when the normal amount of virtual currency consumption is 10000, the amount of virtual currency debited from the virtual currency passbook of the server is deducted by 11,000. (The display may be displayed as 11000 as an internal tax.) If the purpose of consumption is acquisition of paid content provided by Associates, 10000 out of 11000 withdrawn, provided content. Move to Associates, 1000 move to operator.
 そして、あらかじめ設定された設定情報に基づき、運営者が所定期間中に事業会員たる第二の利用者から徴収したヴァーチャルカレンシーを、個人会員たる第二の利用者に所定期間ごとに配給する。なお、配給バランス、及び当該配給するヴァーチャルカレンシーの消費期限については、設定情報を更新することで、運営者はどのようにでもできるものとしている。 Then, based on the setting information set in advance, the virtual reality, which the operator collects from the second user who is the business member during the predetermined period, is distributed to the second user who is the individual member at predetermined intervals. In addition, regarding the distribution balance and the expiration date of the virtual reality to be distributed, the operator can do whatever by updating the setting information.
 こうすることで、メディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケット群における利用者の経済活動を保障し、個人消費を促し、個人会員の利用頻度を高め、結果的にヴァーチャルマーケット全体のヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通量および消費量を増大させる効果を発揮する。なお、ヴァーチャルカレンシーは蓄財できないこと、ヴァーチャルマーケット内でしか利用できないこと、他人に移転することができず自らで消費しなければならないこと、配給されるヴァーチャルカレンシーの消費期限は短く設定できる(例えば1か月など)こと、及びタイムラグはあるが、結果的にアソシエイツに対して配給同等量が供給されることから、従来、実社会にあるような消費税(付加価値税)とベーシックインカムよりも、はるかに大きい効果が期待できるものである。 In this way, the economic activity of users in the virtual market group such as media market is secured, personal consumption is promoted, the usage frequency of individual members is increased, and as a result, the amount and volume of virtual currency in the whole virtual market. Exert an effect of increasing In addition, the fact that virtual currency can not be stored, can only be used within a virtual market, can not be transferred to others, must be consumed on its own, and the consumption period of the distributed virtual currency can be set short (for example, 1 Months, etc.) and time lags, but as a result the distribution equivalent amount is supplied to Associates, it is much more than consumption tax (value added tax) and basic income which are in the real world conventionally. Big effect can be expected.
 つまり、本処理をヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムに加えることで、構築するヴァーチャルマーケットの利用者は、利用者相互に行う経済活動に参加する権利を保障され、消費活動を盛んにするという効果を奏する。
 なお、ここでの説明は、事業会員から個人会員へのヴァーチャルカレンシーの移転処理について説明したわけだが、技術としては、上記説明に限るものではなく、「ある第二の利用者から消費税の名目で徴収したヴァーチャルカレンシーを、ある第二の利用者に対して供給する処理」であることから、ベーシックインカムアルゴリズムは、ヴァーチャルマーケットに供給するヴァーチャルカレンシーの、評価に基づく利用者へ付与アルゴリズムの一つの側面であるとしている。このこと(ヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給制御)をもって、運営者は、ヴァーチャルマーケットを制御する力をさらに高めているわけである。
That is, by adding this processing to the virtual reality supply system, the users of the virtual market to be constructed are guaranteed the right to participate in the economic activities carried out by the users, and there is an effect that the consumption activity is promoted.
In addition, although the explanation here explains the transfer processing of virtual currency from business members to individual members, the technology is not limited to the above explanation, and “the second user uses the name of the consumption tax The basic income algorithm is one of the evaluation algorithm based on the evaluation based on the evaluation of the virtual reality to be supplied to the virtual market, since it is a process of supplying the virtual reality collected at step 2 to the second user. It is said that it is a side. By this (the control of virtual carrance supply), the operator is further enhancing the power to control the virtual market.
「設定情報」について説明する。
 本実施形態でのメディアマーケットを含むヴァーチャルマーケットを流通するヴァーチャルカレンシーの制御については、あらかじめ運営者によって定められた設定情報に基づいて制御される態様になっている。そして、設定情報は、運営者によっていつでも更新することが可能であり、運営者は、ヴァーチャルマーケットを制御すべく、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通を、設定情報を更新することで制御することができるようにしている。
The "setting information" will be described.
The control of virtual reality in which the virtual market including the media market in the present embodiment is distributed is controlled based on setting information previously determined by the operator. And, the setting information can be updated anytime by the operator, and the operator can control the distribution of virtual reality by updating the setting information so as to control the virtual market. There is.
 設定情報には、第二の利用者による第一消費活動における消費ヴァーチャルカレンシー量(第一消費価格)の設定がある。運営者は、例えば、ある主体群におけるパンの価格を1にするか10にするか、または100にするか決定する。そして、決定したパンの価格に基づき、その他の商品の価格を、バランスをとって決定してゆく。さらに、購買力の異なる主体群についても、先の主体群の価格とバランスを考えてそれぞれ決定してゆく。これが、第一消費価格の設定である。先のパンの価格が、米ドル換算で1ドルの時、パンの第一消費価格を1としてその他の第一消費価格をバランスさせた場合には、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの単価は、米ドルの単価と同じような量的価値感覚をもってヴァーチャルマーケット全体を流通するヴァーチャルカレンシー供給アルゴリズムが働き、パンの第一消費価格を100としてその他の第一消費価格をバランスさせた場合には、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの単価は、日本円の単価と同じような量的価値感覚をもってヴァーチャルマーケット全体を流通するヴァーチャルカレンシー供給アルゴリズムが働くようになる。 The setting information includes setting of the consumption virtual quantity (first consumption price) in the first consumption activity by the second user. The operator decides, for example, whether the price of bread in a certain group is 1 or 10 or 100. Then, based on the determined bread price, the prices of other products are balanced and determined. Furthermore, with regard to groups of entities with different purchasing powers, the prices and balances of the above-mentioned groups of entities will be taken into consideration. This is the setting of the first consumption price. If the price of the previous bread is 1 dollar in USD conversion, and the first consumption price of bread is 1 and the other first consumption price is balanced, the unit price of virtual currency is the same as the unit price of USD If the virtual reality supply algorithm that distributes the entire virtual market works with a sense of quantitative value, and the primary consumption price of bread is 100 and other primary consumption prices are balanced, the unit price of virtual reality is Japanese yen The virtual reality supply algorithm that distributes the entire virtual market works with the same sense of quantitative value as the unit price.
 つまり、第一消費価格の決定は、絶対的な価値を決める行為ではなく、その他の第一消費価格との相対的な価値をきめる行為となり、運営者は、ヴァーチャルマーケットの第一消費活動が全体として、より活性化するように第一消費価格の値をバランスさせるものであり、運営者が第一消費価格を全体的に上昇させるよう設定情報を更新してヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通総量が上昇したからと言って、いわゆる米ドルベースのGDPが上昇するわけではなく、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの単価が減少するメカニズムが存在するということである。 In other words, the determination of the first consumption price is not the act of determining the absolute value, but the action of determining the relative value to the other first consumption prices, and the operator is the first consumption activity of the virtual market as a whole. As the balance of the value of the first consumption price is to be more activated, the operator updates the setting information so as to raise the first consumption price as a whole, and the total circulation amount of virtual reality increases. In other words, the so-called US dollar-based GDP does not rise, but there is a mechanism that reduces the unit price of virtual currency.
 さらに、クリプトカレンシーを決済手段に用いる態様のヴァーチャルマーケットであれば、クリプトカレンシーの単価はヴァーチャルカレンシーの単価に近づくアルゴリズムが働くわけであるから、パンの第一消費価格の設定情報の値の量的価値感覚をもってクリプトカレンシーは実社会を流通することになる。つまり、設定情報の基礎は、第一消費価格の設定ということになる。なお、ここで決定づけられたヴァーチャルカレンシーの単価の感覚をもって、アソシエイツは、有償コンテンツの提供価格を自らで決定して、第二の利用者に対して第二消費活動を促すことになる。 Furthermore, in the case of a virtual market in which cryptocurrency is used as a means of payment, since the algorithm of cryptocurrency's unit price approaches the unit price of virtual currency operates, the quantity of the value of the setting information of the first consumption price of bread With a sense of value, cryptocurrency will circulate in the real world. That is, the basis of the setting information is the setting of the first consumption price. In addition, with the sense of the unit price of the virtual currency determined here, the Associates will decide the offered price of the paid content by itself and promote the second consumption activity to the second user.
 また、設定情報には、アソシエイツ(の側面)による無償コンテンツ提供に対するその他の利用者からの評価値を算出するための設定がある。運営者は、例えば、ある無償コンテンツに対するコンテンツ提供者以外の利用者のコンテンツ取得状況における行為ごとの評価、例えば閲覧時間1秒ごとの評価を1にするか10にするか、または100にするか決定する。そして、決定した閲覧時間1秒の評価の値に基づき、その他の評価を、バランスをとって決定してゆく。これが、アソシエイツにヴァーチャルカレンシーを付与する量をアソシエイツごとにどのようにバランスさせるかを決定づける評価の設定である。 Further, the setting information includes a setting for calculating an evaluation value from another user with respect to the provision of the free content according to (the aspect of) the associate. The operator, for example, evaluates each activity in the content acquisition situation of the user other than the content provider for a certain free content, for example, whether the evaluation per one second viewing time is 1 or 10 or 100 decide. Then, based on the determined value of the browsing time of 1 second, other evaluations are determined in balance. This is the evaluation setting that determines how to balance the amount by which the Associates are given virtual reality for each Associate.
 なお、ヴァーチャルカレンシーのアソシエイツに付与する量の総量(供給総量)は、新規供給総量調整アルゴリズムによって制御されており、供給総量に運営者が手を加えることはできないようにしていることから、評価の設定については、第一消費価格の価格バランスの設定と同様に、アソシエイツに対する評価バランスの設定であり、アソシエイツに対するヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与バランスの設定ということである。運営者は、アソシエイツの提供する無償コンテンツの質及び量が向上するように評価の値をバランスさせるよう設定情報を更新するものである。 Note that the total amount (total supply amount) of the amount to be given to the Virtual Carrance Associates is controlled by the new total supply adjustment algorithm, and the operator can not modify the total supply amount. The setting is, like the setting of the price balance of the first consumption price, the setting of the evaluation balance for the Associates, that is, the setting of the grant balance of the virtual reality for the Associates. The operator updates the setting information so as to balance the evaluation value so that the quality and quantity of the free content provided by the associate is improved.
 また、設定情報には、第二の利用者による第一消費価格を割り引く、及び又はベーシックインカムの配分割合を決定するための、第二の利用者に対する評価値を算出する基礎になる評価の設定がある。運営者は、例えば、第二の利用者に期待する行為が、いいね!や☆3つ等の意図的評価の推進である場合に、所定期間における意図的評価の回数が何回であったかに基づき、評価値を算出するべく意図的評価ごとに、例えば、いいね!1回につき1であるとか、☆評価1回につき2であるとか、若しくは、自身のコメントに対する他者からの5段階☆換算の意図的評価が中心値からどれだけ離れている、つまり1,2,3,4,5の5段階の☆評価があったとき、中心値の3を0として、1は―2、2は―1、4は+1、5は+2として、全☆評価を合算し、合計値に基づき評価値を算出しても良い。 In addition, in setting information, setting of an evaluation that becomes a basis for calculating an evaluation value for the second user for discounting the first consumption price by the second user and / or determining the distribution ratio of the basic income. There is. The operator likes, for example, an action expected of the second user! In the case of promotion of intentional evaluation such as ☆ and 等 3, etc., for each intentional evaluation to calculate an evaluation value based on how many times of intentional evaluation in a predetermined period were, for example, it is good! One at a time, two at a time, or two evaluations at one time, or how far the intentional evaluation of five conversions from others to their comments is away from the central value, ie 1, 2 When there are five levels of ☆, 3, 4 and 5 evaluation, the center value 3 is 0, 1 is −2, 2 is −1, 4 is +1, and 5 is +2, and all evaluations are summed up. The evaluation value may be calculated based on the total value.
 こうすることで、運営者の制御力を、アソシエイツたる第一の利用者(の側面)に対する制御力のほかに、第二の利用者(の側面)に対する制御力にまで拡張することができるようになり、ヴァーチャルマーケットの制御力を高める呼応化を発揮するようになる。
 なお、設定情報については、本明細書に記載した設定のみに限らず、運営者は、どのような設定情報でも更新することができ、状況に応じてヴァーチャルマーケットの価値がより大きくなるように設定情報を更新するものである。
In this way, the operator's control power can be extended to control power for the second user (side of the user) in addition to control for the first user (side of the Associates). Become more effective in enhancing the control of the virtual market.
The setting information is not limited to the setting described in the present specification, and the operator can update any setting information, and the setting is made such that the value of the virtual market becomes larger according to the situation. It is intended to update information.
 このようなことから、設定情報の更新作業は、運営者の行う重要な役割であるが、この、更新する設定情報の最適解を導出するために、強化学習機能等の人工知能機能を運営者端末に実装する(AIサーバを設置する)ことによって実現させてもよい。
 この場合に、AIサーバにおける入力処理は次のとおりである。
(1)利用者の利用行為を評価する評価部が取得(利用者端末から取得)する利用者の利用行為データの取得
(2)ヴァーチャルカレンシー通帳データベースに記憶されるヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通データの取得
(3)システム現金(又はクリプトカレンシー)通帳に記憶される法定通貨またはクリプトカレンシーの移動データの取得
(4)取引所で取引されるヴァーチャルカレンシーおよび法定通貨またはクリプトカレンシーの買い注文、売り注文および約定データの取得
そして、AIサーバにおけるAIの出力データは次のとおりである。
(1)設定情報の更新
Because of this, updating configuration information is an important role for the operator, but in order to derive the optimal solution for this configuration information to be updated, the operator of artificial intelligence functions such as reinforcement learning function It may be realized by mounting on a terminal (setting up an AI server).
In this case, the input processing in the AI server is as follows.
(1) Acquisition of usage activity data of the user acquired (acquired from the user terminal) by the evaluation unit that evaluates usage activity of the user (2) Acquisition of distribution data of virtual currency that is stored in the virtual currency passbook database ( 3) Acquisition of legal currency or cryptocurrency movement data stored in the system cash (or cryptocurrency) passbook (4) Virtual currency and exchange traded currency and legal currency or cryptocurrency buy and sell orders and execution data And, the output data of AI in the AI server is as follows.
(1) Update of setting information
 なお、AIサーバにおけるAIの特徴的役割(中間処理)は次のとおりである。
(1)入力処理により回収するビッグデータから、各種設定情報の最適解を導出し、導出した設定情報に更新する。
(2)設定情報が更新された状態から、さらにビッグデータを回収し、新たな各種設定情報の最適解を導出し、設定情報を更新する。
つまり、ヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムと接続されるAIサーバは、常に、ヴァーチャルマーケットからビッグデータを回収し続けることができ、設定情報の更新によるマーケットの影響という、出力処理の効果を検証することもできるものである。
The characteristic role (intermediate processing) of AI in the AI server is as follows.
(1) From the big data collected by input processing, the optimal solution of various setting information is derived and updated to the derived setting information.
(2) From the state in which the setting information has been updated, big data is further collected, an optimal solution of new various setting information is derived, and the setting information is updated.
In other words, the AI server connected to the virtual reality supply system can always keep collecting big data from the virtual market, and can also verify the effect of output processing, such as the market effect of updating configuration information. It is.
 こうすることで、AIサーバは、学習し続けることができるようになり、適切な設定情報に適宜更新することが可能となり、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの効果的な流通およびヴァーチャルマーケットの効果的発展に寄与することになる。
 なお、各種設定情報の最適解は、ヴァーチャルマーケットの価値が最大化することを目的として導出されるわけだが、この「ヴァーチャルマーケットの価値が最大化すること」をどのようにしてAIサーバに認識させるかについては、「利用者の利用時間」、及び「ヴァーチャルマーケットの経済規模」が、それぞれ大きくなることが、より配点が高くなるというスコア方式を用いる。
By doing this, the AI server can continue learning, and can be appropriately updated with appropriate setting information, which contributes to effective circulation of virtual reality and effective development of virtual market. become.
The optimal solution of various setting information is derived for the purpose of maximizing the value of the virtual market, but how to make the AI server recognize that the value of the virtual market is maximized As for the question mark, a score system is used in which the “use time of the user” and the “economic size of the virtual market” become larger, respectively, resulting in a higher point distribution.
「技術的根幹部分」について説明する。
 第一の利用者によってメディアマーケット等のヴァーチャルマーケットに無償提供された情報(無償コンテンツ)を取得した第二の利用者の無償提供情報(無償コンテンツ)に対する評価に基づくヴァーチャルカレンシーのヴァーチャルマーケット内への生成及び当該第一の利用者に対する当該ヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与については、ヴァーチャルマーケットをヴァーチャルカレンシーが流通するにおいてヴァーチャルカレンシーの経済的価値が一定になるようアルゴリズムを実装している。
 これは、第一の利用者(の提供した情報)に対するヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与を決定づける基礎になる、第二の利用者の第一の利用者(の提供した情報)に対する評価について、ヴァーチャルマーケット全体を通して、第二の利用者のヴァーチャルカレンシーの欲する度合い(つまりマーケットにおける消費需要の度合い)を取引所での取引情報をモニタリングすることによって、第一の利用者に付与するヴァーチャルカレンシーの量を増加させたり減少させたりすることをもって実現している。
Explain "technical basis".
Into the virtual market of virtual reality based on the evaluation for the free offer information (free content) of the second user who obtained the information (free content) offered free to the virtual market such as media market by the first user An algorithm is implemented to generate and to add the virtual currency to the first user, so that the virtual value of the virtual currency becomes constant when the virtual market circulates the virtual market.
This is based on the determination of the first user of the second user (the information provided), which is the basis for determining the grant of the virtual reality to the first user (the information provided), throughout the virtual market. Increase the amount of virtual currency given to the first user by monitoring trading information on the exchange with the second user's desired degree of virtual reality (ie, the degree of consumption demand in the market) It is realized by reducing it.
 また、第二の利用者が第一の利用者(の提供した情報)をどのように評価しているかを定量化(例えば、全体を100として個々のアソシエイツごとにどの程度の評価を受けたか等を算出)して、個々、又は所定期間の定量化された評価に基づいて、当該第一の利用者に対するヴァーチャルカレンシーの生成量及び付与量を決定づける基礎になる、各種のアルゴリズムは、運営者が設定情報を更新することによって、どのようにでも変更できるようになっている。
 このことから、ヴァーチャルマーケットへのヴァーチャルカレンシーの供給量は、需要により決定され、運営者は、第一の利用者へのヴァーチャルカレンシーの付与量のバランス(配分率)を調整すべく、設定情報を更新することによってヴァーチャルマーケットを制御するものとしている。
In addition, quantifying how the second user evaluates (the information provided by) the first user (for example, how much evaluation has been made for each individual associate as 100 as a whole, etc. The various algorithms, based on which the operator is based, determine the amount and amount of virtual carrarchy produced for the first user based on the quantified evaluation of the individual or for a predetermined period of time). By updating the setting information, it can be changed in any way.
From this, the amount of virtual currency supply to the virtual market is determined by the demand, and the operator sets the configuration information in order to adjust the balance (allocation rate) of the amount of virtual currency given to the first user. It controls the virtual market by updating.
 最後に、本実施形態での核は、ヴァーチャルカレンシーというリアルマーケットにおける通貨のような存在を、自らが構築するヴァーチャルマーケットに供給するシステムにあり、これを、効果的に流通させるための各種アルゴリズムの付加的実装である。
そして、この技術的目的を端的に表現すると、結局のところ、「ヴァーチャルマーケットを流通するヴァーチャルカレンシーの総価値を上昇させること」となる。
Lastly, the core in this embodiment is a system for supplying a virtual market, such as a currency in the real market, virtual currency, to the virtual market that it constructs, and various algorithms for effectively distributing this are available. It is an additional implementation.
And, to express this technical purpose in a nutshell, it will be "to increase the total value of the virtual currency that circulates the virtual market".
 つまり、ヴァーチャルカレンシー供給システムのすべてのアルゴリズムのプロセスとしての目標点は、ヴァーチャルカレンシーの流通総価値(量×単価)の上昇であり、無償コンテンツの質及び量の上昇であり、評価総量の上昇であり、需要の上昇であり、消費活動の上昇であり、これらを効果的に行うための、供給バランスの調整を目的とした各種の供給アルゴリズムであり、設定情報の更新である。こうすることで、構築するヴァーチャルマーケットを効果的に制御することができるようになるわけである。 In other words, the goal point of the process of all algorithms of the virtual currency supply system is the increase of the distribution total value (quantity × unit price) of virtual currency, the increase of the quality and quantity of free content, and the increase of the total evaluation amount. Yes, it is an increase in demand, an increase in consumption activity, and various supply algorithms for the purpose of adjusting the supply balance for effectively performing these, and is updating of setting information. By doing this, it will be possible to effectively control the virtual market to be built.
 上述した各実施形態は、「無償コンテンツ」という「情報」(誰かにとっての価値)が、発信する「アソシエイツ」のアカウントを持つユーザの「情報発信端末装置」(第一実施形態における端末装置7、第三実施形態における情報提供端末1、第四実施形態における利用者端末30)から、取得する「事業者」又は「個人」のアカウントを持つユーザの「情報取得端末装置」(第一実施形態における端末装置7、第三実施形態における情報利用端末2、第四実施形態における利用者端末30)に移転したときの、移転した価値の量を定量化させるための情報流通サーバ装置6による無償コンテンツ及びアソシエイツに対する評価値の算出処理(総移転価値量のうちの配分割合の算出処理)があって、
 さらに、情報流通サーバ装置6によって算出された個々の「アソシエイツ」に対してどれだけの数量のシステム内通貨Lという「価値交換媒体」を生成及び発行するかの算出された評価値に対する情報流通サーバ装置6による係数乗算処理(その他の資産と交換可能な「価値交換媒体」の、情報交換マーケットにおける需給バランスを均衡化させ、価値の尺度に用いることができるようにしつつ、円滑に流通させるための新規発行量の調整処理)という発行数量決定処理があって、
 さらに、情報流通サーバ装置6によって「アソシエイツ」に発行された「価値交換媒体」を情報交換マーケット内で流通させるための、「価値交換媒体」の移転を記録する情報流通サーバ装置6による移転記録処理があって、
 そうして、「価値交換媒体」をユーザのアカウントに紐づけて管理するプロセスをもって、情報交換マーケットにおける情報流通サーバ装置6による価値交換媒体生成発行流通方法を開示する。
In each embodiment described above, the “information transmission terminal device” of the user having the “Associates” account to which “information” (value for someone) “free content” is transmitted (the terminal device 7 in the first embodiment, The “information acquisition terminal device” of a user having an “enterprise” or “individual” account to be acquired from the information provision terminal 1 in the third embodiment and the user terminal 30 in the fourth embodiment (in the first embodiment Free-use content by the information distribution server device 6 for quantifying the amount of value transferred when transferred to the terminal device 7, the information use terminal 2 in the third embodiment, and the user terminal 30) in the fourth embodiment There is calculation processing of evaluation value (calculation processing of distribution ratio of total transfer value amount) to Associates,
Furthermore, the information distribution server for the calculated evaluation value of how many quantities of the system currency L “value exchange medium” are generated and issued for each “associate” calculated by the information distribution server apparatus 6 The factor multiplication process by the device 6 (for balancing the supply and demand balance in the information exchange market of the “value exchange medium” that can be exchanged with other assets, and enabling it to be distributed smoothly while enabling it to be used as a measure of value. There is an issue quantity decision process called adjustment process of new issue amount),
Furthermore, the transfer recording process by the information distribution server device 6 for recording the transfer of the “value exchange medium” for distributing the “value exchange medium” issued to the “associates” by the information distribution server device 6 in the information exchange market There,
Then, the value exchange medium creation and distribution method by the information distribution server device 6 in the information exchange market is disclosed by a process of managing the "value exchange medium" in association with the user's account.
 つまり、上述した各実施形態は、ユーザからユーザに移転する無償の価値に含まれている経済的価値を抽出及び配分する技術であって、さらに、抽出及び配分された経済的価値に応じた数量の価値交換媒体を生成及び発行並びに流通させる技術を開示する。こうすることで、情報流通サーバ装置6は、経済的価値の乗じた価値交換媒体たる「貨幣」を情報交換マーケットにおいて生成及び発行並びに流通させることができるようになる。このようなことから、上述した各実施形態は、「情報流通方法、装置、システム、及びプログラム」であって、同時に「貨幣流通方法、装置、システム、及びプログラム」である。これら2つの流通方法を同調させることによって、従来技術に対する効果性を発揮させることができる。いわば、第一実施形態及び第二実施形態におけるシステム内通貨L、第三実施形態及び第四実施形態におけるポイント、並びに第五実施形態におけるヴァーチャルカレンシーと称する「価値交換媒体」は、「情報交換媒体」と同義であると言える。上述した実施形態における情報流通システムと貨幣流通システムとは、情報流通サーバ装置6の機能部の処理によって表裏一体として機能し、効率的な貨幣流通をもって情報流通を促進させ、価値ある情報交換マーケットを築くことが可能になる技術の開示である。 That is, each embodiment described above is a technology for extracting and distributing the economic value included in the free value transferred from the user to the user, and further, the quantity according to the extracted and allocated economic value Discloses a technology for creating, issuing and distributing value exchange media. In this way, the information distribution server device 6 can generate, issue and distribute "money", which is a value exchange medium multiplied by the economic value, in the information exchange market. As such, each of the above-described embodiments is "information distribution method, apparatus, system, and program", and simultaneously, "money distribution method, apparatus, system, and program". By synchronizing these two distribution methods, the effect on the prior art can be exhibited. The so-called in-system currency L in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the points in the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, and the "value exchange medium" called virtual reality in the fifth embodiment It can be said that it is synonymous with ". The information distribution system and the money distribution system in the above-described embodiment function as a united body by the processing of the function unit of the information distribution server device 6, promote information distribution with efficient money distribution, and provide a valuable information exchange market. It is the disclosure of technology that can be built.
 表現を変えると、上述した各実施形態は、右から左に移動した無償の情報に含まれる経済的価値を、価値交換媒体に変異させ左から右に生成及び発行し、さらにそこから価値交換媒体をユーザ間で流通させる技術を開示する。上述した各実施形態は、情報と貨幣とを同時に流通させる技術に関する。 In other words, each embodiment described above mutates the economic value included in the free information moved from right to left into a value exchange medium, generates and issues from left to right, and further from that value exchange medium Discloses a technique for distributing the content among users. Each embodiment mentioned above relates to the technique which distributes information and money simultaneously.
 以上、本発明を実施の形態を用いて説明したが、本発明の技術的範囲は上記実施の形態に記載の範囲には限定されず、その要旨の範囲内で種々の変形及び変更が可能である。例えば、装置の分散・統合の具体的な実施の形態は、以上の実施の形態に限られず、その全部又は一部について、任意の単位で機能的又は物理的に分散・統合して構成することができる。また、複数の実施の形態の任意の組み合わせによって生じる新たな実施の形態も、本発明の実施の形態に含まれる。例えば、情報流通システム600が有する機能の一部と、ポイント管理システムS1が有する機能の一部と、ポイント管理システムS2が有する機能の一部とを組み合わせてもよい。組み合わせによって生じる新たな実施の形態の効果は、もとの実施の形態の効果を合わせ持つ。 As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained using an embodiment, the technical scope of the present invention is not limited to the range given in the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modification and change are possible within the range of the gist. is there. For example, a specific embodiment of device distribution and integration is not limited to the above embodiment, and all or a part thereof may be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit. Can. In addition, new embodiments produced by any combination of a plurality of embodiments are also included in the embodiments of the present invention. For example, a part of the functions of the information distribution system 600, a part of the functions of the point management system S1, and a part of the functions of the point management system S2 may be combined. The effects of the new embodiment generated by the combination combine the effects of the original embodiment.
 S1…ポイント管理システム
 S2…ポイント管理システム
 1…情報提供端末
 2…情報利用端末
 3…ポイント管理サーバ
 31…通信部
 32…記憶部
 33…制御部
 41…管理部
 42…順位決定部
 43…情報提供部
 411…行動監視部
 412…第一ポイント付与部
 413…第二ポイント付与部
 414…キャンペーンポイント付与部
 415…ポイント消費量変動部
 416…ポイント消滅処理部
 417…手数料徴収部
 418…奨励金支給部
 10…ポイント管理サーバ
 110…CPU、111…ROM、112…RAM、113…記憶装置、114…通信制御装置、115…バス
 120…通信部
 130…制御部
 131…設定情報更新部
 132…認証部
 133…ポイント消費部
 134…ポイント還元部
 135…要求処理部、135a…閲覧処理部、135b…検索処理部、135c…ウェブページ更新処理部、135d…投稿処理部、135e…ポイント譲渡処理部、135f…評価処理部
 136…評価値記録部
 137…特典指標値算出部
 138…特典付与部、138a…第一ポイント付与部、138b…表示情報選出部、138c…表示順位決定部、138d…第二ポイント付与部、138e…奨励金支給部、138f…割引率算出部
 139…入金処理部
 140…記憶部、141…利用者情報記憶部、142…設定情報記憶部、143…評価履歴記憶部、144…ポイント履歴記憶部、145…預入金履歴記憶部、146…ウェブページ情報等記憶部
 20…運営者端末
 30…利用者端末
 40…金融機関のサーバ
 50…通信ネットワーク
 600…情報流通システム
 6…情報流通サーバ装置
 60…制御部
 61…記憶部
 62…通信部
 63…記憶装置
 6A…管理部
 6B…通貨発行部
 6C…通貨制御部
 6D…取引処理部
 6E…価値連動部
 601…利用要求受付部、602…取得要求受付部、603…消費記録部、604…第1移転記録部、605…第2移転記録部、606…算出部、607…決定部、608…価値制御部、609…補正部、610…評価補正部、611…消費量決定部、612…更新受付部、613…売買受付部、614…交換受付部
 7…端末装置
 70…制御部
 71…記憶部
 72…通信部
 73…表示部
 74…操作部
S1 Point management system S2 Point management system 1 Information provision terminal 2 Information utilization terminal 3 Point management server 31 Communication unit 32 Storage unit 33 Control unit 41 Management unit 42 Order determination unit 43 Information provision Part 411 ... behavior monitoring part 412 ... first point granting part 413 ... second point granting part 414 ... campaign point granting part 415 ... point consumption change part 416 ... point annihilation processing part 417 ... fee collection part 418 ... incentive money supply part DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Point management server 110 ... CPU, 111 ... ROM, 112 ... RAM, 113 ... Storage apparatus, 114 ... Communication control apparatus, 115 ... Bus 120 ... Communications part 130 ... Control part 131 ... Setting information update part 132 ... Authentication part 133 ... Point consumption unit 134 ... Point reduction unit 135 ... Request processing unit, 135a ... Review Processing unit 135b Search processing unit 135c Webpage update processing unit 135d Post processing unit 135e Point transfer processing unit 135f Evaluation processing unit 136 Evaluation value recording unit 137 Benefits index value calculation unit 138 Benefits granting unit 138a First point granting unit 138b Display information selecting unit 138c Displaying order decision unit 138d Second point granting unit 138e Incentive payment unit 138f Discount rate calculation unit 139 Payment Processing unit 140 ... storage unit, 141 ... user information storage unit, 142 ... setting information storage unit, 143 ... evaluation history storage unit, 144 ... point history storage unit, 145 ... deposit history storage unit, 146 ... web page information etc. Storage unit 20: Operator terminal 30: User terminal 40: Server of financial institution 50: Communication network 600: Information distribution system 6. Information Information distribution server device 60 ... control unit 61 ... storage unit 62 ... communication unit 63 ... storage device 6A ... management unit 6B ... currency issuing unit 6C ... currency control unit 6D ... transaction processing unit 6E ... value interlocking unit 601 ... use request reception unit 602 acquisition request receiving unit 603 consumption recording unit 604 first transfer recording unit 605 second transfer recording unit 606 calculation unit 607 determination unit 608 value control unit 609 correction unit , 610: evaluation correction unit, 611: consumption amount determination unit, 612: update reception unit, 613: trading reception unit, 614: exchange reception unit 7: terminal device 70, control unit 71, storage unit 72, communication unit 73, display Part 74 ... Operation part

Claims (22)

  1.  通信ネットワークを介して通信可能である複数の端末装置及びサーバ装置を含み、装置間で情報を流通させる情報流通方法であって、
     前記サーバ装置は、
     前記複数の端末装置の内の1つの端末装置を介して発信されたコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値を算出し、
     算出された評価値に基づき、前記複数の端末装置夫々の利用者識別情報間で交換される価値交換媒体の数量を決定し、
     決定された数量に応じた価値交換媒体を前記1つの端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応付けて発行する
     情報流通方法。
    An information distribution method for distributing information among devices, including a plurality of terminal devices and server devices that can communicate via a communication network,
    The server device is
    Calculating an evaluation value based on the usefulness of the content transmitted via one of the plurality of terminal devices,
    Based on the calculated evaluation value, the number of value exchange media exchanged among the user identification information of each of the plurality of terminal devices is determined,
    An information distribution method for associating a value exchange medium according to a determined quantity with user identification information of the one terminal device and issuing the same.
  2.  通信ネットワークを介して第1ユーザにより発信されたコンテンツに対する評価に応じた額の価値交換媒体を、前記第1ユーザに発行し、
     前記第1ユーザに発行された価値交換媒体の一部又は全部を第2ユーザへ移転し、
     前記通信ネットワークを介した前記第2ユーザの有利的情報の発信に伴い、前記第2ユーザに移転された価値交換媒体の内から、前記有利的情報の発信に応じた額の価値交換媒体の価値を消滅させ、
     前記第1ユーザへの価値交換媒体の発行、並びに、発行された価値交換媒体の移転及び消滅を含む取引情報を記憶する
     処理をコンピュータに実行させる情報流通方法。
    Issuing to the first user a value exchange medium of an amount according to an evaluation of the content transmitted by the first user via the communication network,
    Transferring part or all of the value exchange medium issued to the first user to the second user,
    Among the value exchange media transferred to the second user along with the transmission of the advantageous information of the second user via the communication network, the value of the value exchange medium of the amount according to the transmission of the advantageous information Extinguish the
    An information distribution method for causing a computer to execute processing of storing transaction information including issuance of a value exchange medium to the first user and transfer and disappearance of the issued value exchange medium.
  3.  前記価値交換媒体を取得してから所定期間が経過した場合、前記価値交換媒体の価値を消滅させる
     処理を前記コンピュータに実行させる請求項2に記載の情報流通方法。
    The information distribution method according to claim 2, wherein the computer is made to execute a process of deleting the value of the value exchange medium when a predetermined period has elapsed since acquiring the value exchange medium.
  4.  前記第1ユーザに発行された価値交換媒体の一部を第3ユーザへ移転し、
     前記第1ユーザにより発信された有償コンテンツを前記第3ユーザが取得した場合、前記有償コンテンツに対応する額の価値交換媒体を前記第3ユーザから前記第1ユーザへ移転する
     処理を前記コンピュータに実行させる請求項2又は3に記載の情報流通方法。
    Transferring part of the value exchange medium issued to the first user to a third user,
    When the third user acquires the paid content transmitted by the first user, processing for transferring the value exchange medium of the amount corresponding to the paid content from the third user to the first user is executed to the computer The information distribution method according to claim 2 or 3.
  5.  通信ネットワークを介して複数の端末装置と通信するサーバ装置であって、
     前記複数の端末装置の内の第1の端末装置を介して発信されたコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値を算出する算出部と、
     算出された評価値に基づき、前記複数の端末装置夫々の利用者識別情報間で交換される価値交換媒体の数量を決定する決定部と、
     決定された数量に応じた価値交換媒体を前記第1の端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応付けて発行する発行部と
     を備える情報流通サーバ装置。
    A server device that communicates with a plurality of terminal devices via a communication network, comprising:
    A calculation unit that calculates an evaluation value based on the usefulness of the content transmitted via the first terminal device of the plurality of terminal devices;
    A determination unit that determines the number of value exchange media exchanged among the user identification information of each of the plurality of terminal devices based on the calculated evaluation value;
    An issue unit which issues a value exchange medium according to the determined quantity in association with the user identification information of the first terminal device.
  6.  前記算出部は、前記コンテンツの他の端末装置からの利用状況、及び利用状況に関する第1の設定情報に基づき評価値を算出し、
     前記決定部は、前記算出部が算出した評価値、及び該評価値に関する第2の設定情報に基づき前記価値交換媒体の数量を決定する
     請求項5に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    The calculation unit calculates an evaluation value based on a use status of the content from another terminal device and first setting information on the use status,
    The information distribution server device according to claim 5, wherein the determination unit determines the quantity of the value exchange medium based on the evaluation value calculated by the calculation unit and second setting information on the evaluation value.
  7.  前記第1の設定情報及び/又は第2の設定情報の更新を受け付ける更新受付部
     を備える請求項6に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    The information distribution server device according to claim 6, further comprising: an update receiving unit that receives an update of the first setting information and / or the second setting information.
  8.  前記第1の設定情報及び/又は第2の設定情報を、前記利用状況に応じて補正する補正部
     を備える請求項6又は7に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    8. The information distribution server device according to claim 6, further comprising: a correction unit configured to correct the first setting information and / or the second setting information according to the usage state.
  9.  前記発行部によって発行された価値交換媒体を利用者が取得してからの経過時間に応じて、前記価値交換媒体の価値を変動させる価値制御部
     を備える請求項5から8のいずれか1項に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    The value control unit for changing the value of the value exchange medium according to an elapsed time after the user acquires the value exchange medium issued by the issuing unit, The value control unit according to any one of claims 5 to 8. Information distribution server apparatus as described.
  10.  前記複数の端末装置の内、前記第1の端末装置から前記価値交換媒体の譲渡を受けた第2の端末装置からのシステム利用要求を受け付ける利用要求受付部と、
     該利用要求受付部にて受け付けたシステム利用要求に対する前記価値交換媒体の消費量を決定する消費量決定部と、
     該消費量決定部が決定した消費量分の前記価値交換媒体の消費を、前記第2の端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応付けて記録する消費記録部と
     を備える請求項5から9のいずれか一項に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    Among the plurality of terminal devices, a use request receiving unit that receives a system use request from a second terminal device that has received the transfer of the value exchange medium from the first terminal device;
    A consumption determining unit that determines the consumption of the value exchange medium in response to the system use request received by the use request receiving unit;
    10. A consumption recording unit for recording consumption of the value exchange medium for the consumption amount determined by the consumption amount determining unit in association with user identification information of the second terminal device. The information distribution server apparatus according to any one of the items.
  11.  前記システム利用要求は、前記第2の端末装置を発信元とする広告情報の提示である
     請求項10に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    The information distribution server device according to claim 10, wherein the system use request is presentation of advertisement information whose source is the second terminal device.
  12.  前記複数の端末装置の内の、前記第1の端末装置から前記価値交換媒体の譲渡を受けた第2の端末装置から、特定のコンテンツの取得要求を受け付ける取得要求受付部と、
     前記特定のコンテンツについて設定されてある数量だけ、前記第2の端末装置の利用者識別情報から前記特定のコンテンツの発信元の第1の端末装置の利用者識別情報への前記価値交換媒体の移転を記録する第1移転記録部と
     を備える請求項5から9のいずれか一項に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    An acquisition request receiving unit for receiving an acquisition request for a specific content from a second terminal device of the plurality of terminal devices which has received the transfer of the value exchange medium from the first terminal device;
    Transfer of the value exchange medium from the user identification information of the second terminal device to the user identification information of the first terminal device of the transmission source of the specific content by the number set for the specific content The information transfer server device according to any one of claims 5 to 9, comprising: a first transfer recording unit for recording the information.
  13.  前記算出部、決定部及び発行部の処理は前記コンテンツが無償である場合に実行される
     請求項5から請求項12のいずれか1項に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    The information distribution server device according to any one of claims 5 to 12, wherein the processing of the calculation unit, the determination unit, and the issuance unit is executed when the content is free of charge.
  14.  前記第1の端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応付けられている価値交換媒体の売り注文、及び、第2の端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応する価値交換媒体の買い注文を含む注文情報を受け付ける売買受付部と、
     受け付けた注文情報に基づいて前記第1の端末装置の利用者識別情報から前記第2の端末装置の利用者識別情報への前記価値交換媒体の移転を記録する第2移転記録部と
     を備える請求項5から請求項13のいずれか1項に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    Order information including a selling order of a value exchange medium associated with the user identification information of the first terminal device and a purchase order of a value exchange medium corresponding to the user identification information of the second terminal device A trading reception department that receives
    A second transfer recording unit for recording the transfer of the value exchange medium from the user identification information of the first terminal device to the user identification information of the second terminal device based on the received order information; The information distribution server device according to any one of claims 5 to 13.
  15.  前記価値交換媒体と、システム外で流通するデジタル資産との交換を受け付ける交換受付部
     を備える請求項14に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    The information distribution server device according to claim 14, further comprising: an exchange receiving unit that receives an exchange between the value exchange medium and a digital asset distributed outside the system.
  16.  価値交換媒体の売り注文及び買い注文を前記第1の端末装置の利用者識別情報からの売り注文の数よりも多い任意の価格で出力し、出力中の注文数と所定の設定値との比較に基づき価値交換媒体の供給量を制御する通貨制御部
     を備える請求項14又は請求項15に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    A sale order and a purchase order of a value exchange medium are output at an arbitrary price greater than the number of sale orders from the user identification information of the first terminal device, and the number of orders being output is compared with a predetermined set value. The information distribution server device according to claim 14 or 15, further comprising: a currency control unit that controls the supply amount of the value exchange medium based on the following.
  17.  地域属性に応じて定めた集合体毎に、算出された評価値の総計と、利用行為に必要な価値交換媒体の消費量の総計との比率に基づいて前記算出部が算出する評価値を補正する評価補正部を備える
     請求項10に記載の情報流通サーバ装置。
    The evaluation value calculated by the calculation unit is corrected on the basis of the ratio of the total of the calculated evaluation values and the total of the consumption of the value exchange medium necessary for the use operation for each set determined according to the regional attribute The information distribution server device according to claim 10, comprising:
  18.  通信ネットワークを介して情報流通サーバ装置と通信する端末装置であって、
     利用者識別情報に対応付けて一又は複数のコンテンツを発信する発信部と、
     前記利用者識別情報に対応付けて発信された前記一又は複数のコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値に基づき前記情報流通サーバ装置により発行される価値交換媒体の数量を示す情報を前記情報流通サーバ装置より受信する受信部と、
     前記利用者識別情報に対応付けられている価値交換媒体の数量を表示する表示部と
     を備える端末装置。
    A terminal device that communicates with an information distribution server device via a communication network, comprising:
    A transmitting unit that transmits one or more contents in association with user identification information;
    The information distribution server device is information indicating the quantity of value exchange media issued by the information distribution server device based on the evaluation value based on the usefulness of the one or more contents transmitted in association with the user identification information A receiving unit that receives
    A display unit that displays the quantity of value exchange media associated with the user identification information.
  19.  通信部を備えるコンピュータに、
     前記通信部によって通信接続される複数の端末装置の内の第1の端末装置を介して発信されたコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値を算出し、
     算出された評価値に基づき、前記複数の端末装置夫々の利用者識別情報間で交換される価値交換媒体の数量を決定し、
     決定された数量に応じた価値交換媒体を前記第1の端末装置の利用者識別情報に対応付けて発行する
     処理を実行させるためのコンピュータプログラム。
    A computer having a communication unit,
    Calculating an evaluation value based on the usefulness of the content transmitted via the first terminal device among the plurality of terminal devices communicatively connected by the communication unit;
    Based on the calculated evaluation value, the number of value exchange media exchanged among the user identification information of each of the plurality of terminal devices is determined,
    A computer program for executing a process of issuing a value exchange medium according to a determined quantity in association with user identification information of the first terminal apparatus.
  20.  通信部、表示部及び記憶部を備えるコンピュータに、
     前記通信部にて前記記憶部に記憶してある利用者識別情報に対応付けて一又は複数のコンテンツを発信し、
     前記記憶部に記憶してある利用者識別情報に対応付けて発信された前記一又は複数のコンテンツの有用度に基づく評価値に基づき発行される価値交換媒体の数量を示す情報を前記通信部によって受信し、
     前記記憶部に記憶してある利用者識別情報に対応付けられている価値交換媒体の数量を前記表示部に表示する
     処理を実行させるためのコンピュータプログラム。
    A computer including a communication unit, a display unit, and a storage unit;
    Transmitting one or more contents in association with the user identification information stored in the storage unit by the communication unit;
    Information indicating the quantity of value exchange medium to be issued based on the evaluation value based on the usefulness of the one or more contents transmitted in association with the user identification information stored in the storage unit by the communication unit Receive
    A computer program for executing a process of displaying on the display unit a quantity of value exchange media associated with user identification information stored in the storage unit.
  21.  前記表示部に表示されている価値交換媒体の数量に対し、他の利用者識別情報宛てへの価値交換媒体の譲渡を受け付ける画面を前記表示部に表示させるための請求項20に記載のコンピュータプログラム。 21. The computer program according to claim 20, for displaying on the display unit a screen for receiving transfer of a value exchange medium to another user identification information with respect to the quantity of value exchange medium displayed on the display unit. .
  22.  前記通信部によって発信する特定のコンテンツの取得に必要な価値交換媒体の数量の設定を受け付ける画面を前記表示部に表示させるための請求項20又は21に記載のコンピュータプログラム。 22. The computer program according to claim 20, wherein the display unit displays a screen for receiving the setting of the number of value exchange media necessary for acquiring the specific content transmitted by the communication unit.
PCT/JP2018/030313 2017-08-15 2018-08-14 Information distribution method, information distribution server device, terminal device, and computer program WO2019035459A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018544276A JPWO2019035459A1 (en) 2017-08-15 2018-08-14 Information distribution method, information distribution server device, terminal device, and computer program
JP2019527933A JP6608566B1 (en) 2018-05-11 2019-05-13 System, program, information processing apparatus, and method for controlling unit exchange value of value exchange medium
PCT/JP2019/019007 WO2019142948A2 (en) 2018-05-11 2019-05-13 System for controlling unit exchange value of value exchange medium, program, information processing device, and method
JP2019158684A JP6608560B1 (en) 2018-05-11 2019-08-30 System, program, information processing apparatus, and method for controlling unit exchange value of value exchange medium
JP2019185263A JP6651245B1 (en) 2018-05-11 2019-10-08 System, program, information processing apparatus, and method for controlling unit exchange value of value exchange medium
JP2020006686A JP2020126627A (en) 2018-05-11 2020-01-20 System, program, information processing device, and method for controlling unit exchange value of value exchange medium

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2017/029397 WO2019035183A1 (en) 2017-08-15 2017-08-15 Awards management device, awards management system, and awards management method
PCT/JP2017/029396 WO2019035182A1 (en) 2017-08-15 2017-08-15 Awards management system, awards management device, and awards management method
JPPCT/JP2017/029396 2017-08-15
JPPCT/JP2017/029397 2017-08-15
JP2018-092474 2018-05-11
JP2018092474 2018-05-11

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019035459A1 true WO2019035459A1 (en) 2019-02-21

Family

ID=65362633

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/030313 WO2019035459A1 (en) 2017-08-15 2018-08-14 Information distribution method, information distribution server device, terminal device, and computer program

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2019035459A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2019035459A1 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2020526052A (en) * 2019-04-08 2020-08-27 アリババ・グループ・ホールディング・リミテッドAlibaba Group Holding Limited Product promotion using smart contracts within the blockchain network
JP2020201564A (en) * 2019-06-06 2020-12-17 富士通株式会社 Evaluation program, evaluation method, and evaluation device
WO2021040692A1 (en) * 2019-08-26 2021-03-04 Compound Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for pooling and transferring digital assets
WO2021040690A1 (en) * 2019-08-26 2021-03-04 Compound Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for managing a money market of digital assets
WO2021040691A1 (en) * 2019-08-26 2021-03-04 Compound Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for managing an interest rate for digital assets
JP2021163053A (en) * 2020-03-31 2021-10-11 株式会社ジェーシービー Program, electronic value managing device, and electronic value management method
CN113537975A (en) * 2020-04-22 2021-10-22 丰田自动车株式会社 Wallet server, recording medium, wallet system, and reward providing method
JP2022042378A (en) * 2020-09-02 2022-03-14 株式会社ジェーシービー Electronic value management device, program, method for managing electronic value
US11961142B2 (en) 2019-08-26 2024-04-16 Compound Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for pooling and transferring digital assets
JP7489950B2 (en) 2021-09-16 2024-05-24 Lineヤフー株式会社 Information processing device, information processing method, and information processing program

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7223462B1 (en) * 2021-11-09 2023-02-16 充宏 前田 Transaction support system, transaction support method and program
JP7175046B1 (en) * 2021-11-09 2022-11-18 充宏 前田 Transaction support system, transaction support method and program

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001338097A (en) * 2000-01-25 2001-12-07 Satoshi Hashimoto Expert retrieving system and product information distribution system and management supporting system and management support information distribution system
JP2010152489A (en) * 2008-12-24 2010-07-08 Nec Corp Content evaluation system, profit sharing method by audience evaluation and program
JP2012014676A (en) * 2010-05-31 2012-01-19 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc Virtual reality space providing system, and virtual reality space providing method and program
JP2012113576A (en) * 2010-11-25 2012-06-14 World Picom Kk Order system and order program, and order method
US20130166459A1 (en) * 2011-12-22 2013-06-27 Tata Consultancy Services Limited Invention valuation and scoring system
JP2014002620A (en) * 2012-06-19 2014-01-09 Kenji Okada Information value evaluation device, information value evaluation method and information value evaluation program
JP2014174912A (en) * 2013-03-12 2014-09-22 Nintendo Co Ltd Content sharing system, content sharing server device, content sharing method, and computer program
JP2016031751A (en) * 2014-07-29 2016-03-07 任天堂株式会社 Information processing system, information processing method, information processing device, and information processing program

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002042251A (en) * 2000-07-24 2002-02-08 E Finance.Com:Kk Point exchange system among enterprises
JP2003085432A (en) * 2001-09-14 2003-03-20 Miyata Munenobu Point issuance management and operation system
WO2006043331A1 (en) * 2004-10-22 2006-04-27 Softbankbb Corp. Managing device for point

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001338097A (en) * 2000-01-25 2001-12-07 Satoshi Hashimoto Expert retrieving system and product information distribution system and management supporting system and management support information distribution system
JP2010152489A (en) * 2008-12-24 2010-07-08 Nec Corp Content evaluation system, profit sharing method by audience evaluation and program
JP2012014676A (en) * 2010-05-31 2012-01-19 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc Virtual reality space providing system, and virtual reality space providing method and program
JP2012113576A (en) * 2010-11-25 2012-06-14 World Picom Kk Order system and order program, and order method
US20130166459A1 (en) * 2011-12-22 2013-06-27 Tata Consultancy Services Limited Invention valuation and scoring system
JP2014002620A (en) * 2012-06-19 2014-01-09 Kenji Okada Information value evaluation device, information value evaluation method and information value evaluation program
JP2014174912A (en) * 2013-03-12 2014-09-22 Nintendo Co Ltd Content sharing system, content sharing server device, content sharing method, and computer program
JP2016031751A (en) * 2014-07-29 2016-03-07 任天堂株式会社 Information processing system, information processing method, information processing device, and information processing program

Cited By (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2020526052A (en) * 2019-04-08 2020-08-27 アリババ・グループ・ホールディング・リミテッドAlibaba Group Holding Limited Product promotion using smart contracts within the blockchain network
JP2020201564A (en) * 2019-06-06 2020-12-17 富士通株式会社 Evaluation program, evaluation method, and evaluation device
JP7368111B2 (en) 2019-06-06 2023-10-24 富士通株式会社 Evaluation program, evaluation method and evaluation device
WO2021040692A1 (en) * 2019-08-26 2021-03-04 Compound Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for pooling and transferring digital assets
WO2021040690A1 (en) * 2019-08-26 2021-03-04 Compound Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for managing a money market of digital assets
WO2021040691A1 (en) * 2019-08-26 2021-03-04 Compound Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for managing an interest rate for digital assets
US11961142B2 (en) 2019-08-26 2024-04-16 Compound Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for pooling and transferring digital assets
JP7304309B2 (en) 2020-03-31 2023-07-06 株式会社ジェーシービー Program, electronic value management device, electronic value management method
JP2021163053A (en) * 2020-03-31 2021-10-11 株式会社ジェーシービー Program, electronic value managing device, and electronic value management method
CN113537975A (en) * 2020-04-22 2021-10-22 丰田自动车株式会社 Wallet server, recording medium, wallet system, and reward providing method
JP7285239B2 (en) 2020-09-02 2023-06-01 株式会社ジェーシービー Electronic value management device, program, electronic value management method
JP2022042378A (en) * 2020-09-02 2022-03-14 株式会社ジェーシービー Electronic value management device, program, method for managing electronic value
JP7489950B2 (en) 2021-09-16 2024-05-24 Lineヤフー株式会社 Information processing device, information processing method, and information processing program

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2019035459A1 (en) 2019-11-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Cui et al. Informational challenges in omnichannel marketing: Remedies and future research
JP6725622B2 (en) Dollar depositary receipts, electronic membership transactions, and repo transactions
WO2019035459A1 (en) Information distribution method, information distribution server device, terminal device, and computer program
US9912744B1 (en) Lending digital items to identified recipients
US8788390B2 (en) Estimating values of assets
JP2018538639A (en) Information processing network and method based on unified code issuance, and sensing access device
US20120254303A1 (en) Mediated Lending of Digital Items
JP6592542B2 (en) Method and system for integration between content publishing, advertising services, and reward collection
WO2014108911A1 (en) Userbase and/or deals and/or advertising space trading exchange and marketplace
Horne et al. Gift cards: a review and research agenda
Nguyen Exploring collaborative consumption business models-case peer-to-peer digital platforms
JP6302149B1 (en) Privilege management apparatus, privilege management system, and privilege management method
US20120253893A1 (en) Identification of Borrowers for Digital Items
JP5296900B2 (en) Content sales system and method
US20230162286A1 (en) System, Method, and Platform for Providing Support and Financial Resources for Small Businesses
JP6351885B1 (en) Privilege management system, privilege management device, and privilege management method
JP2019036283A (en) Privilege management device, privilege management system, and privilege management method
Kathuria et al. India's platform economy and emerging regulatory challenges
Ladd et al. Decentralized Autonomous Organizations as a Threat to Centralized Platforms: Applying and Expanding Theories of Platform Competition and Disintermediation
Theofanous POSTGRADUATE THESIS
Brodd Income taxation at the right place at the right time-An analysis of the need for a virtual permanent establishment
CA2907182C (en) Dollar depository receipts and electronic friends trading and repo transactions
Hallam et al. Engineering the High Tech Start Up, Volume II: Applied Knowledge
Brites WISHLIST: E-COMMERCE AND REWARDS OUTSOURCING
JP2019036291A (en) Privilege management system, privilege management device, and method for managing privilege

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018544276

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18846277

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18846277

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1